JP2020073143A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which is represented by a pinball game machine (or a pachinko machine), an enclosed type game machine, or a rotary drum game machine (or a slot machine), having characteristics in image display means.SOLUTION: When a first wipe performance display w1a, w1b is displayed, a second wipe performance display w2a, w2b is displayed on second image display means 1030 before a determination stop display of a stop drawing pattern mode of a decorative drawing pattern is displayed. In a period since a start of the display of the second wipe performance display w2a, w2b to an end of the display, the decorative drawing pattern is not displayed in the second image display means 1030 (figure 235(h)-(j)). A display size (a "decoration 2" indicated in figure 235(l)) of the decorative drawing pattern included in the determination stop display is larger than a display size (a "decoration 2" indicated in figure 235(f)) of the decorative drawing pattern included in a display (a figure 235(f)-(g)) indicating a losing in a ready-to-win performance display in a variation display of the decorative drawing pattern.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 235

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), an enclosed game machine, and a spinning machine (slot machine).

  Gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with obstacles that change the direction in which the game balls fall in the game area of the game board, as well as winning openings, starting openings, and variable winning openings that allow the game balls to win. It is common. When a game ball is won in these, the player is given a privilege such as paying out the prize ball (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  Also, some of these game consoles are provided with image display means.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, the conventional game console has room for improvement in image display means.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a game table having a feature in image display means.

The gaming table of the present invention for solving the above-mentioned object,
A first image display means capable of displaying an image display,
A second image display means capable of displaying an image display,
A gaming machine equipped with
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a variable display of decorative symbols,
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a fixed stop display of a stop symbol mode of a decorative symbol,
The big hit may be notified by the fixed stop display of the stop pattern aspect of the decorative pattern,
Depending on the fixed stop display of the stop pattern of the decorative pattern, the deviation may be notified,
In the reach effect display in the variable display of the decorative pattern, a display suggesting a shift (hereinafter, referred to as “first display”) is displayed, and in the variable design of the decorative pattern, the stop pattern of the decorative pattern is changed. The first wipe display may be displayed on the first image display unit before the confirmation stop display (hereinafter, referred to as “second display”) is displayed.
When the first wipe effect display is displayed, before the second display is displayed, a second wipe effect display is displayed on the second image display means,
In the period from the start of the display of the second wipe effect display until the end of the display, the decorative pattern is not displayed on the second image display means,
The display size of the decorative design included in the second display is larger than the display size of the decorative design included in the first display,
It is characterized by

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a gaming table having a POV display.

It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the front side (player side). It is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the back side. It is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is an example of the display pattern of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display pattern of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display pattern of special figure 2, (c) is a decorative pattern An example is shown, (d) is a figure which shows an example of the stop display design of a general figure. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of special figure pre-reading processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the pre-reading result storage part for special figures 1 and special figures 2. It is a figure explaining the content of the hit / miss determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub-control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub-control part command reception interruption. It is a flow chart of processing, (c) is a flow chart of the 1st sub control part timer interruption processing, and (d) is a flow chart of the 1st sub control part image control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub-control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub-control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub-control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process and (c) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part timer interruption process. It is a figure which shows an example of production centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 14 in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | generation of another case following step (q) in steps. (A) is a figure explaining the display example of a notice icon, (b) is a figure explaining the notice icon display area information storage area memorize | stored in RAM408, (c) is a notice icon. It is a figure explaining an example of a digestion timing, and (d) is a figure explaining an example of an increase timing of a notice icon. (A) is a figure explaining an example of the notice icon before a change, and (b) is a figure explaining an example of a notice icon after a change. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 19 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 20 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 21 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 22 in steps. It is a figure which shows other example of effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows other example of effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows other example of effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure showing another example of production of a notice icon digest production in stages. It is a figure showing another example of production of a notice icon digest production in stages. It is a figure showing another example of production of a notice icon digest production in stages. It is a figure showing another example of production of a notice icon digest production in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 31 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 32 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 33 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 34 in steps. It is a figure which shows other example of effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows other example of effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows other example of effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is the figure which shows the production example where the notice icon changes in stages. It is a figure which shows in stages the display example at the time of a power failure / power recovery, while displaying a notice icon. It is a figure which shows other examples of the notice icon increase production and digest production in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 41 in steps. It is a figure showing another example of production of a notice icon digest production in stages. It is a figure showing another example of production of a notice icon digest production in stages. It is a figure which shows other examples of the notice icon increase production and digest production in stages. It is a figure which shows the modification of the increase production and digestion production of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 46 in steps. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase production and digestion production of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase production and digestion production of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another modification of the digestion production of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase production and digestion production of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure showing another example of production of a notice icon digest production in stages. It is a figure showing in stages about an example of production using a movable means applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing another example of production of notice icon increase production in stages. It is a figure showing another example of production of notice icon increase production in stages. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase production of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure showing another example of production of notice icon increase production in stages. It is a figure which shows other examples of the notice icon increase production and digest production in stages. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase production and digestion production of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure showing an example of the production which can be performed in decorative pattern display device 208 of pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment in stages. It is a figure explaining a lottery table related to an advance notice item. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 62 step by step. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 64 step by step. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of another notice icon increase production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of another notice icon increase production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of another notice icon increase production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of another notice icon increase production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing another example of production concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of another notice icon increase production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of another notice icon increase production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the relation between a notice icon and a tutorial display. It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the front side (player side). It is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the back side. It is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is an example of the display pattern of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display pattern of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display pattern of special figure 2, (c) is a decorative pattern An example is shown, (d) is a figure which shows an example of the stop display design of a general figure. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of special figure pre-reading processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the pre-reading result storage part for special figures 1 and special figures 2. It is a figure explaining the content of the hit / miss determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub-control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub-control part command reception interruption. It is a flow chart of processing, (c) is a flow chart of the 1st sub control part timer interruption processing, and (d) is a flow chart of the 1st sub control part image control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub-control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub-control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub-control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process and (c) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part timer interruption process. (A) An example of a box data table provided in the RAM of the first sub-control unit, and (b) An example of a part data table provided in the RAM of the first sub-control unit. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of command transmission in the effect control of the present embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of command transmission in the effect control of the present embodiment. (A) is a flow chart of production system operation processing, (b) is a flow chart of chance button operation state determination processing. It is a flow chart of various button operation related processing. It is a flow chart of various button operation related processing. It is a flow chart of processing when a button is pressed. It is a flow chart of one-time operation processing. It is a flow chart of one-time operation processing. It is a flowchart of a continuous hit operation process. It is a flow chart of long press operation processing. It is a flowchart of other button operation processing. It is a flow chart of setting display processing at the time of a decision button operation. It is a flowchart of a setting display process at the time of a right button operation. (A) is a flowchart of a brightness setting display update process, (b) is a flowchart of a user brightness setting operation process. (A) is a flowchart of a volume setting display update process, (b) is a flowchart of a user volume setting operation process. It is a flow chart of setting display processing at the time of operating the upper button. (A) is a flowchart of a button long press process, and (b) is a flowchart of a chance button long press operation state determination process. It is a flow chart of various button long press operation related processing. It is a figure which shows the operation key unit shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of production centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | generation of another case following FIG. 108 (q) in steps. (A) is a figure explaining an example of the operation result of each button in the standby state (customer waiting state) which is not performing symbol variation display, (b) is the operation result of each button during symbol variation display It is a figure explaining an example, (c) is a figure explaining an example of an operation result of each button in a big hit game. It is a figure which shows an example of the production step by step centering on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the other example of an effect in the effect shown by FIG. It is a figure explaining the other example of an effect in the effect shown by FIG. It is a figure explaining another example of the effect shown by FIG. It is the figure which explains one example of the setting operation which uses the production button and the operation key unit. It is the figure which explains the production example which uses the production button and the operation key unit. (A) is a timing chart explaining the relationship between the continuous hitting operation by the effect button and the effect display during execution of the effect for continuous hitting, and (B) shows the effect by the effect button during execution of the effect for continuous hitting. It is a timing chart explaining the relationship between a long press operation and effect display, (C) is a timing chart explaining the relationship between a long press operation by an effect button and effect display during execution of an effect for long press. is there. (A) is a timing chart explaining an effect display when a long press operation by an effect button is intermittently performed during execution of a continuous hit effect, and (B) is execution of an effect for long press. It is a timing chart explaining the effect display when the long press operation by the effect button is intermittently performed. It is the figure which shows one example of the production for consecutive hits which centers on the decorative design display of the pachinko machine of this execution form. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect for continuous hits centering on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of the production for long presses centering on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in stages. It is a figure showing an example of a step-up production centering on a decorative pattern display device of a pachinko machine of this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the other example of an effect performed in the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the relation between the effect display and the operation of the effect button in the decorative symbol display device. It is a figure explaining the relation between the effect display and the operation of the effect button in the decorative symbol display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the production step by step centering on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production step by step centering on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production step by step centering on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production step by step centering on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the modification of the example of an effect shown by FIG. It is the figure which shows one example of the production for consecutive hits which centers on the decorative design display of the pachinko machine of this execution form. It is a figure which shows an example of the production step by step centering on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production step by step centering on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production step by step centering on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production step by step centering on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production step by step centering on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the production step by step centering on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production step by step centering on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production step by step centering on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the other example of the effect shown by FIG. It is a figure explaining the modification of the example of an effect shown by FIG. FIG. 3 is an external perspective view of a slot machine (rotating game machine) as a gaming table to which the present invention can be applied, as seen from the front side (player side). (A) is an external perspective view of the information display button 1046, and (b) is a top view of the information display button 1046. 1 is an external perspective view of a pachinko machine 100 according to a first embodiment to which the present invention can be applied, as seen from the front side (player side). 1 is an external view of a pachinko machine 100 according to a first embodiment to which the present invention is applicable, as viewed from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 according to a first embodiment to which the present invention can be applied, as viewed from the front. 1 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of a pachinko machine 100 according to a first embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment to which the present invention is applicable, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 1, (b) of the special figure 2 An example of a stop display design is shown, (c) shows an example of a decoration design, (d) is a figure showing an example of a stop display design of a general figure. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of the main control part main processing of the pachinko machine 100 by a 1st embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. 6 is a flowchart showing a flow of main controller timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. FIG. 9A is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of a special figure prefetching process in the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. (B) ~ (e) is an example of a special figure 1 and special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit provided in the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. FIG. It is a figure which shows the hit / miss judgment table for general figures in the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment to which this invention can be applied, and the example of symbol distribution and hit operation. It is a figure which shows the example of the hit / miss determination table for special drawings in the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment to which this invention can be applied. It is a figure showing an example of a symbol distribution table for special figure 1 and a big hit time operation in a pachinko machine 100 according to a first embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure showing an example of a symbol distribution table for special figure 2 in a pachinko machine 100 by a 1st embodiment to which the present invention is applicable, and an operation at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment to which this invention is applicable, (a) shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process, (B) shows the flow of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, (c) shows the flow of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) shows the flow of the image control process. . It is a figure explaining the electric chulong opening production performed by the production control processing of the main processing in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by a 1st embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. (A) shows the flow of electric chu long opening production, (b) has shown an example of electric chu long opening production in the decorative pattern display device 208. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment to which this invention is applicable, (a) shows the flow of a 2nd sub control part main process, (B) shows the flow of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process. It is a figure which shows the example of the lottery table of the pre-reading notice used by the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment to which this invention can be applied, and the lottery table of the notice at the time of fluctuation disclosure (after a big hit determination). It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of a 1st embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 1st embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining a game production in a pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of a 1st embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of a 1st embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of a 1st embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of a 1st embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of a 1st embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of a 1st embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of a 1st embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of a 1st embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 1st embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 1st embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 by 2nd Embodiment to which this invention can be applied from the front. It is a figure explaining movable body 1002 of pachinko machine 100 by a 2nd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure (the 1) explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of a 2nd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure (the 2) explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of a 2nd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 2nd form of operation of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of a 2nd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of a 2nd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of a 2nd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of a 2nd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of a 2nd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the connection unit of pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of a 2nd embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the connection unit of pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of a 2nd embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of a 2nd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of a 2nd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 2nd form of operation of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 2nd form of operation of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 2nd form of operation of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 13 of a 2nd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 14 of a 2nd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 15 of a 2nd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 16 of a 2nd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 17 of a 2nd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 18 of a 2nd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 19 of a 2nd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 20 of a 2nd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 21 of the 2nd form of operation of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 22 of the 2nd form of operation of the present invention. It is a figure explaining a game production in a pachinko machine 100 by Example 23 of a 2nd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 24 of a 2nd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the production pattern of the game production in the pachinko machine 100 of a 3rd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the connection unit of pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-1 of a 3rd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the connection unit of pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-2 of a 3rd embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-2 of a 3rd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-3 of a 3rd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-4 of a 3rd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-5 of a 3rd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-6 of a 3rd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-7 of a 3rd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-1 of a 3rd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-1 of a 3rd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-2 of a 3rd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-2 of a 3rd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-1 of a 3rd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-2 of a 3rd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-3 of a 3rd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-4 of a 3rd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-5 of a 3rd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-6 of a 3rd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-7 of a 3rd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4-1 of a 3rd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4-2 of a 3rd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5-1 of a 3rd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5-2 of the 3rd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5-3 of a 3rd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5-4 of a 3rd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6-1 of the 3rd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6-2 of a 3rd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6-3 of a 3rd embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of a 4th embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of a 4th embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of a 4th embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of a 4th embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of a 4th embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of a 4th embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of a 4th embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of a 4th embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of a 4th embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of a 4th embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of a 4th embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of a 4th embodiment to which the present invention can be applied. FIG. 38 is a schematic front view of a slot machine 2000 as a gaming table according to a modification to which the present invention can be applied, as seen from the front. It is a figure which shows the game table by the modification which can apply this invention, (a) shows the casino machine 3000, (b) is the mobile telephone 4000 provided with the memory | storage part which memorize | stores the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention. (C) shows a portable game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) has a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. A home video game machine 6000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 7000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. 3 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. FIG. 2 is an external view of the same pachinko machine seen from the back side. It is a schematic front view of the gaming board 200 of the same pachinko machine 100 as seen from the front. 6 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit. (A) It shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a special figure. (B) An example of a decorative design is shown. (C) It shows an example of a stop display design of a universal figure. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part timer interruption processing. 6A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. (B) is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. (C) is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. (D) is a flowchart of image control processing of the first sub control unit 400. 9A is a flowchart of a main process executed by a CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. (B) is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. (C) A flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 different from FIG. 248 from the front. It is a figure which shows the POV display 280 shown in FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the mechanism which moves the 1st movable body 260 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the drive unit shown in FIG. 257, and is a figure for demonstrating the structure of what is called a slip ring. It is a figure which shows the modification of the drive unit shown in FIG. It is the figure which shows one example of the production in the pachinko machine which has the game board 200 which shows in Figure 255 stepwise. 260A is an enlarged view of FIG. 260Q, and FIG. 62B is a view of the display area hatched. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect different from the effect shown in FIG. 260 in steps. It is a figure which shows the example of the button advance notice which continues from FIG. 262 (k) in steps. It is a figure which shows another example which continues from FIG.262 (g) in steps. It is a figure which shows another example which continues from FIG. 263 (1 ') in steps. It is a figure which shows another example which continues from FIG.262 (c) in steps. It is a figure which continues from FIG.262 (i) and shows another example which becomes a big hit stepwise. It is a figure which continues from FIG.262 (i) and shows in steps the example which becomes a loss. It is a figure which shows in stages an example of the production which displays the pattern by the afterimage effect by the 1st movable body 260 used as a sub-liquid crystal unit rotating at high speed by the mechanism shown in FIG. 258 or FIG. 259. It is a figure which continues from FIG. 269 (g) and shows an example of the button advance notice step by step. It is a figure which continues from FIG. 270 (i ') and shows stepwise the example which does not evolve from a button notice to a Versa notice. FIG. 267 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another example of a big hit with another type of verser notification using the first movable body 260, continued from FIG. 269 (i). It is an example of the Versa notice that continues from FIG. 269 (i) similarly to 272, but is a diagram showing an example in which there is a loss in stages. It is a figure showing an example which changes a display mode of a reservation icon in stages using a notice of Versa. FIG. 279 is a diagram illustrating, in a stepwise manner, continuing from FIG. 274 (l), in which the display mode of the changing icon is changed using the verser announcement. It is a figure which continues from FIG. 275 (n ') and which shows another example which changes the display mode of the changing icon in steps. It is a figure which shows the modification of the POV display 280 shown in FIG. 256, FIG. 260, etc. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of a verser notice using the POV display 280 'shown in FIG. 277. It is a figure which shows an example of the Versa advance notice at the time of the ball removal notification.

  Hereinafter, a game table (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning drum game machine such as a slot machine) to which the present invention can be applied will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 1 to 73. It should be noted that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 1 to 73 are used in principle only in the description with reference to FIGS. 1 to 73, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals shown in FIG. In the description using FIG. 73, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 1 to 73 are given priority.

<Overall structure>
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game table that allows a player to obtain a profit when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage tray-equipped door 108, and a launch. The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and is a vertically rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge 112. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk of a store (gaming store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor 1041 that detects that the main body 104 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and to be opened / closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. A clerk of the game shop can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor that detects that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which the game area 124 is provided. In addition, in the present embodiment, an LED as a light source is also called a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage dish is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is opened by pressing an opening lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. A door sensor with a ball storage tray that detects that the door with a ball storage tray 108 has been opened may be provided. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a top plate 126 capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “ball”) and provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launcher 110. , A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation, and a player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by an operation, and a game ball that guides the game balls to the launcher 110 by a player's operation. A ball firing handle 134 that is launched into the game area 124, a production button 136 that changes the production mode of various production devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the player's operation, and a production button 136 that is built in the performance. A chance button lamp 138 that causes the button 136 to emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 that issues a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store, and an instruction to return the player's balance to the card unit. A return operation button 142 for carrying out the above, and a ball lending display section (not shown) for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is filled with a game ball. Further, an operation key unit 137 is also provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided. This launching device 110 sends a game ball to the game area 124 of the game board at every elapse of a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) while the ball firing handle 134 is continuously operated to be fired by the player. It fires toward and corresponds to an example of a firing means. It should be noted that a right hit button capable of maximizing the firing intensity by pressing the ball firing handle 134 while it is being operated may be provided.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 1, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is omitted, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side.

  At the upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls and an opening that opens upward, and a ball tank 150 positioned below the ball tank 150 are provided at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side in rear view.

  The payout device 152 is made of a tubular member, and has a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside thereof. The dispensing device 152 is detachable, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have temporarily stayed are delivered one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that gives a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either one of a high signal and a low signal, when the game ball is not passing, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) to reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined amount. Based on the satisfaction of the condition, a game value (gaming ball) of an amount according to the grant condition is granted (paid out) to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for accommodating a main board 156 which constitutes the main control section 300 (see FIG. 4) for performing control processing of the whole game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-board 400 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board 400. A second sub-board case 166 for accommodating a second sub-board 164 that constitutes a second sub-control section 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to performance, and a payout control section 600 (control processing related to payout of game balls). (Refer to FIG. 4) and a payout board case 172 for housing a payout board 170 provided with an error canceling switch 168 for canceling an error by an operation of a game shop clerk, and relating to the launch of a game ball. A firing board case 176 accommodating a firing board 174 that constitutes a firing control section 630 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing, and a power supply control section 660 (see FIG. 4) that supplies power to various electric gaming machines are provided. A power supply board case 184 housing a power supply board 182 having a power supply switch 178 for turning on and off the power supply by an operation of a game shop staff and a RAM clear switch 180 for outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when operated when the power is turned on. Also, a CR interface section 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section 600 and the card unit is provided.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to define a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll.

  A rendering device 206 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged in the approximate center, and around it, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary The symbol reserve lamp 216, the first special symbol reserve lamp 218, the second special symbol reserve lamp 220, and the high-precision middle lamp 222 are arranged. In addition, hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "universal symbol", and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

  The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, which will be described in detail later.

  The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. This decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a and a middle symbol display region 208b. And the right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it is configured to be able to display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative design displayed on the decorative design display device 208 is a design representing the design displayed on the first special design display device 212 or the second special design display device 214 in an enhanced form, and is a decorative design. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of a predetermined first variable game (detailed variable game which will be described later in detail) that is being held, and in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of variable variable games. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

  The 1st special figure reservation lamp 218 and the 2nd special figure reservation lamp 220 are the lamps for showing the number of the predetermined 2nd fluctuation game which has been reserved (details fluctuation game which details are mentioned later), this execution In the form, it is possible to hold the special figure variation game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, and if the first special figure and the second special figure are combined, eight). The term "hold" here means to hold the start of various determination processes (lottery process, etc.) based on start information described later.

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notifying means) for making a notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-accuracy middle lamp 222 is configured to notify the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the big hit game is started, and thereafter not to notify the current symbol control state. There is. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is cut off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but as the symbol control state here, it may be any state of a normal state, a time saving state (electric support state), and a probability variation state, and a state with a special symbol probability variation and It may be one of the states in which there is no special figure probability change.

  It should be noted that in the present specification, description will be made using a word that refers to a state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100) called a control state, but the term "control state" includes a concept of a so-called game state.

  In addition, a general winning opening 226, a universal drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged around the rendering device 206. ing.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (in the general winning opening 226). When the prize is won), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. 1 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, the balls to be paid out to the player may be referred to as "prize balls" and the balls to be lent to the player may be referred to as "rental balls" in consideration of the prize. And call it "ball (gaming ball)".

  The universal figure starting port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through-chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200. One is installed in each. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided in the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are used as prize balls. Along with discharging to 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of itself does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is provided below the universal figure starting port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. A pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided in the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232. It corresponds to a variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (den Chu). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning the prize in the second special figure starting port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232 when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, and the closed state of the pair of blade members 2321 is an opening / closing mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure variation game is won and the universal figure display device 210 hits and displays the symbol as a stop, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times to the second special figure starting port 232. The ball can be entered (the prize winning state is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is the state where the prize is easy. That is, the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball) of the second special figure starting port 232 is either small (corresponding to the first size) or large (corresponding to the second size). It is a variable starting region in which the easiness of entering the game ball is variable, which changes from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of the second starting region. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. With the pair of blade members 2321 open, of the game balls that have entered the game region 124, the second special region that is the variable starting region is more than the game ball that enters the first special diagram starting port 230 that is the fixed starting region. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or less than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is arranged below the center of the game board 200. The variable winning port 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 that can open and close the variable winning opening with a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be called a special winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be called an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from any one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which the game ball can enter the variable winning opening more easily than the closed state to the other state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state, and the closed state in the variable winning a prize port 234 of this embodiment is such that the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is in a static state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state at the variable winning a prize mouth 234 of the present embodiment is rotated to the player side until the door member 2341 becomes substantially vertical to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning a prize mouth 234 maintains a closed state until the big hit game described later is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. Note that the closed state may be a state in which the game ball is slightly closed to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a state in which it is completely closed. In addition, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. The door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times when the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol in the special figure variation game. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball that has entered the variable winning port 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged near these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The balls contained in the upper plate 126 are supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength according to the operation amount of the ball launch handle 134 of the player, and the launch rod 146 and the launch mall 148 pass the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the ball striking direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and wins the prize (general winning prize 226, variable winning prize 234) or starting mouth. Outgoing outlet 240 by winning in (first special figure starting port 230, second special figure starting port 232), without winning any winning port or starting port, or simply passing through universal figure starting port 228. To reach.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, the warp device 242 and the stage 244 are arranged in the area where the game ball can roll, and the effect movable body 224 is arranged in the area where the game ball cannot roll. . Further, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are arranged on the back side of the rendering device 206. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative pattern display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the effect device 206, from the warp exit 242b to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball ridden by a game nail 238 or the like. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

  In the present embodiment, the production movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm. A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm 224b is provided at the position. The production movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b respectively move to the left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The shielding device 246 shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208, when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the respective inner ends overlap. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner ends of the left door 246a and the right door 246b are slightly overlapped with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can see all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can each be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern the displayed decorative pattern is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may make a part of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 visible through the holes of the lattice, or the shoji part of the holes of the lattice is closed with a semitransparent lens body, The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji portions of the holes of the lattice are completely blocked (shielded), and the rear decorative pattern display device 208 is completely invisible. Good.

  The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 1, the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect movable member 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 3 correspond to the effect means, and among them, the decorative pattern display device 208. Corresponds to an example of the decorative pattern display means.

  Further, on the game board 200, a specification sticker 290 showing the specifications of the game table is attached at a position visible to the player.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a main control unit 300 that responds to a command transmitted by the main control unit 300. In addition, a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. There is.

  First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a time. A timer circuit 312 for measuring the number of times, the number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (counter circuit) used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit has two built-in counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each of the starting port, the winning port, and the variable winning port, and opening of the front frame door. A sensor circuit for receiving signals output by various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame open sensor, and a lower pan full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to a random value generation circuit 318 and a basic circuit 302. 322, a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, and a predetermined A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the symbol display device, for example, the universal figure display device 210, and various status display parts 328 (for example, the universal figure hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, Various driving circuits 330 for performing display control of the high-accuracy middle lamp 222 and the like, and a predetermined movable member such as a blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and a door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere has won the special opening 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the counter value stored in the special figure 1 starting port 230. Stored in the register for use. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has been won in the special figure 2 starting port 232, the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 is similarly latched. The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through the information output circuit 336, an external terminal board 349, and an external hall computer (not shown). The game information (for example, game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 included in.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. Is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started).

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. It is possible to communicate with the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 sends a command and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although it is configured to be able to transmit signals, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured to be unable to transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by bidirectional communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to send a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300, but is configured to be unable to send a signal such as a command from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Good.

  Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and the number of times. It is equipped with. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in different ROMs.

  Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, chance button lamp 138). A drive circuit 432 for controlling the drive of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, and an output from the speaker 120. Volume adjustment switch (not shown) for adjusting the volume to be output, operation unit sensors (not shown) that detect pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and detection signals from these sensors are output to the basic circuit 402. Image data and the like stored in the ROM 406 is read based on signals from the sensor circuit 428 and the CPU 404. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 which generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 displaying an image on a decorative symbol display device 208, is connected to.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. is doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like.

  In addition, the basic circuit 502, the drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, the effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, the detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Sensor circuit 518 for outputting to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game underframe lamp drive for controlling the game underframe lamp 542. A circuit 540 and a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 540 are connected.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the firing control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and based on the control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental ball. It is detected whether or not the payout is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 pays out prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of ball rentals. Ball rental information indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 349. A frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout controller 600. The frame sensor 605 detects when the front frame door 106 is open and outputs an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

  The firing control unit 630 is a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 for instructing to permit or stop firing, and a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134 outputs the operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player. Control of a firing motor 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and control of a ball feeding device 634 that supplies a ball from the upper plate 126 to the launching device 110, based on a control signal that indicates a firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Condenser). In the present embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 discharges the main control unit 300 and the second sub control unit 500. Although the power supply of the predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 5A to 5D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative pattern display device 208, and the general figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be performed will be described.

  The special figure 1 variation game is started on condition that the first starting mouth sensor which is the ball detection sensor detects that the ball has entered the special opening 1 starting opening 230, and the ball enters the special opening 2 starting opening 232. The special figure 2 variation game is started on condition that the second starting opening sensor which is a ball detection sensor has detected that the ball has been hit. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment "variable display of special figure 1" (special figure Fluctuating game). Further, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment "variable display of special figure 2" ( Special figure fluctuation game). Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 2 When, passes, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of this "variable display of special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stopped symbol aspect of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variable display of special figure. The variable display of the special map may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. In FIG. 5A, nine types of special maps, “Special map A” to “Special map I”, are shown. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure show the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions show the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols (“special symbol A” to “special symbol G”) are prepared as stop symbol modes of the special symbol. "Special map A" is a 15-round (R) jackpot design, 15R probable variation big hit pattern that can be expected to win balls in all rounds of 15 rounds, and "Special map B" is a 15R jackpot pattern. So, while you can expect to win balls in 5 out of 15 rounds, you can't expect to win balls in the remaining rounds, which is a real 5R probability variable jackpot design. There is a 15R-rank up bonus (RUB) design that can be expected to win balls in all rounds of 15 rounds, and "Special drawing D" is a 15R jackpot design, 8 out of 15 rounds. You can expect to win balls in one round, but you can't expect to win balls in the remaining rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB. You can expect to win balls in four of the rounds, but you can't expect to win balls in the remaining rounds. It is a real 4R-RUB, and "Special Figure F" is a 5R normal jackpot design. "G" is a 2R jackpot pattern, which is called a latent probability variation or hidden probability variation in which winning of a ball cannot be expected in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit that is produced by a player in a manner that makes it difficult to specify how long a round in which a win can be expected at the start of a big hit lasts. This is a jackpot that directs the player as to whether or not the round in which the winning of balls can be expected to continue continues when the player's eyes reach the 9th round).

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, determination of whether or not to be a big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not to be a special jackpot is performed by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the regular jackpot and the probability jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state with a low probability is special This is called a low probability state. In addition, there is a case where the game is transferred to a time saving state (electric support state) after the big hit game is over. Here, the electric support state is a predetermined advantage that the player is higher than the non-electric support state, such as shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. The state. Although the time saving will be described later in detail, the time saving state is referred to as a high probability state of universal figure (hereinafter, may be referred to as “probability change of normal figure”), and the state not in the short period of time is referred to as low probability state of universal figure. In this way, the power support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric power support state” is a state where the general map is concerned, and the “time saving state” is a state where the special map is concerned or a state where the general map and the special figure are concerned. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a time saving flag, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the electric power support state and the universal figure high probability state. It is easier to win the universal figure fluctuation game in the universal figure high probability state than in the universal figure low probability state (normal figure probability variation). For example, the winning probability of the universal figure fluctuation game is 1/100 in the universal figure low probability state (non-electric power support state), while it increases to 99/100 in the universal figure high probability state (electric power support state). Further, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the universal figure fluctuation game becomes shorter than in the non-electric power support state (general figure variation short). For example, in the non-electric power support state, the fluctuation time of the universal figure fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric power support state. Further, in the electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer than in the non-electric support state (extension of the electric Chu opening period). For example, in the non-electrically-supported state, the electric power open period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric-powered support state. Further, the blade member 2321 is more likely to open in the electrically supported state than in the non-electrically supported state (the number of times of opening the electrically-powered chewing increases). For example, the blade member 2321 that opens only once in the non-electrically supported state for one winning in the universal figure starting port 228 opens twice in the electrically supported state (2 seconds open and 1 second closed and 2 seconds again). Open). Due to the extension of the electric-chew opening period and the increase in the number of electric-chew opening, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases. The time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric power support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, particularly in a big hit game, if a game ball is picked up by an electric chu with a small number of prize balls, and the number of game balls to the variable winning port (attacker) 234 is reduced, a player may be disadvantaged. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (time saving state), all of the normal figure probabilistic change, the general figure short cut, the electric Chu open period extension, and the electric Chu open count increase are all performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's advantage is high, and the player may be in a power support state (time saving state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew opening period and the increase in the number of electric chew opening is performed, which increases the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232, the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. In the non-electrically-supported state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electrically-supported state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes between the difficult winning state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and the easy winning state in which the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is in the easy winning state in the electric support state for a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when "special map A" to "special map E" are stopped and displayed, after the big hit game that is performed thereafter, until the next big hit game is started, the electric power support state (universal figure high probability state) ) Is maintained, and "Special map F" is stopped and displayed, after the big hit game that is performed after that, the special support variable game is maintained for 100 times while the electric power support state is maintained, and the non-electric power is displayed for the 101st time. Transition to support state (universal figure low probability state). On the other hand, when the big hit without the electric power support (“special figure G”) is won, the electric power support state does not shift after the big hit game ends.

  In this way, in this embodiment, when "special map A" to "special map E" are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special map high probability general figure high probability state after the jackpot game is over. Further, when "special map F" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special map low probability general figure high probability state after the jackpot game is over. Further, when the "special map G" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special map high probability general figure low probability state after the jackpot game is over.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 0.1 seconds per operation. In the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game balls enter a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If you do, the second and subsequent releases will not be performed. During the small hit game, the special figure low probability general figure low probability state shifts. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game after the small hit game ends. "Special drawing H" shown in FIG. 5 (a) is a small hit symbol. In this embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing times and opening time) of the variable winning port 234 in the small hitting game and the opening / closing mode (opening of the variable winning port 234 in the big hitting game to which the "special map G" is stopped and displayed. The number of times of opening and the time of opening are substantially the same, but they may be different, for example, at least one of the number of times of opening and the time of opening may be different.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as the lost symbol. "Special drawing I" is a lost design.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. In FIG. 5 (b), six types of special maps, “special map a” to “special map f”, are shown. Of these, five types of special maps are jackpot patterns (“special map a” to “special map”). Fig. E "). "Special drawing a" is a 15R big hit design, 15R probability variation big hit design that can be expected to win balls in all rounds of 15 rounds, and "special drawing b" is a 15R big hit design, 15 It is a 15R-RUB design that can be expected to win balls in all of the rounds, and "Special Drawing c" is a 15R jackpot pattern, and is expected to win balls in 8 out of 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that you can not expect to win balls in the remaining rounds, and the "special map d" is a 15R jackpot design, and you can expect to win balls in four of the 15 rounds. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a substantial 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to win a ball, and the "special figure e" is a 2R normal jackpot design.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as the lost symbol. “Special drawing f” is a lost design.

  FIG. 5C shows an example of a decorative design. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. The special starting point 230 or the special drawing 2 starting opening 232 has won a ball, that is, the first starting opening sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting opening 230, or the special drawing 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on condition that the second starting hole sensor detects that the ball has entered the starting symbol 232. In the pattern display area, "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... "Variable display of symbols" is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol in a variable manner separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed.

  When notifying substantially 5R probability variation big hit (“special drawing B”), 5R normal big hit (“special drawing F”), 2R normal big hit (“special drawing e”), in the design indicatory area 208a-208c, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3 "and" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 "A combination of ornamental patterns in which three ornamental patterns with the same numbers are arranged (for example," decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1 "or" decoration 1-decoration 1 " Decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 ", etc.) is stopped and displayed. In addition, when notifying the 15R probability variation big hit (“special drawing A” and “special drawing a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Stop display of "decoration 7". Furthermore, when notifying 15R-RUB, substance 8R-RUB, and substance 4R-RUB, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are decorative symbols of the same number, and the middle symbol display area 208b is like a lord. A combination of decorative patterns that are decorative patterns (for example, "decoration 1-lord-decoration 1" or "decoration 4-lord-decoration 4") is stopped and displayed. In addition, when notifying a hidden probability change (“special map G”) that is a big hit of 2R or a small hit (“special map H”), “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of decorative patterns such as "3" is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" may be referred to as a chance opportunity. Further, when notifying a lost symbol such as "special symbol I" or "special symbol f", in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, combinations of decorative symbols other than the combinations of decorative symbols described so far (for example, disperse). Stop the display).

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of the “variable display of the decorative symbol” to the stop display of the stopped symbol aspect of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative pattern is performed under the control of the first sub control unit 400.

  FIG. 5 (d) shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a universal figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the universal figure of the present embodiment: a "general figure A" which is a winning symbol and a "universal figure B" which is a deviating symbol. On the basis of the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the universal figure display device 210 has all seven segments illuminated and one segment in the center. Repeated lighting "Public variable display" (Public variable game) is performed. Then, after the change time elapses, either one of the symbols "Public symbol A" which is a hit symbol and "Public symbol B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5D, the white portions in the drawing show the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions are the locations of the segments to be turned on.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the "variable display of the universal figure" to the stop display of the stopped symbol aspect of the universal figure may be referred to as the variable display of the universal figure.

<Main processing of main controller>
Next, main processing main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4, a special figure random number value, a special figure round determination random number value, a special figure electric support determination random number value, and a special figure determination random number are stored. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter for generating these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, the random number value for special figure winning, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area in the RAM 308 that stores the number of reserved special figures is sometimes referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a starting information storage unit for special figures which is divided into a maximum number (four in this example) of areas in which the start of the win / fail judgment (lottery) can be suspended. A random number storage area for general drawings is also provided. As will be described later, the start information storage unit for special figures stores a plurality of types of start information as one set, and the start information is stored for each area one by one in the winning order (holding order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, to which the activation signal is input, resets and starts by a reset interrupt and executes the main processing main processing shown in FIG. 6 according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Allows the operation of and sets the initial value. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines that the voltage value of the power supply that the power supply control unit 660 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is being output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff), the step is performed. It proceeds to S107. Even when the power does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for determining a period for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, Processing for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether the state before the power is cut off (before the power failure) is restored, and if the state before the power failure is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state) ), The process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a clerk of a game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 is ON (indicating that the operation has been performed). If the RAM clear signal is ON (when RAM clear is required), the basic circuit 302 is initialized to step S113. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not required), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is determined. A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte configuration register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether the checksum result is normal or not) is determined. Then, when the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to restore the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is the specific value. When the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. When the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was cut off. That is, the processing is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been returned to the state when the power was cut off, and is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, the normal recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting interrupt prohibition, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generating random number counters for respectively generating initial values of the universal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number counter are updated. For example, if the range of possible numbers for the universal figure winning random number is 0 to 20, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, then 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generating random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 4 ms), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The partial timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (not to detect an abnormality in processing). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main controller timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 including various sphere detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence / absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 performs various operations. The data is stored in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, the RAM 308 stores information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) of the previous two times in the RAM 308. Is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is stored. ) The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in) is read from the present detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, information about the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previously-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the present detection signal storage area is compared, and It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of No. 1 matches the winning determination pattern information. While one gaming ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly activated at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, each time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, the detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed in step S205 described above. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage region, the previous detection signal storage region, and the current detection signal storage region. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after the detection signal is absent, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, there is no previous-previous detection signal, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a present detection signal). (The information indicating that), the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special figure starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the universal figure starting opening 228. It is determined that there has been a passage. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 234 and 226 and the starting openings 230, 232 and 228 have been won. For example, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the first starting opening sensor that detects the ball entering the first special drawing starting opening 230 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the first special drawing It is determined that there is a prize in the starting opening 230, that is, a game medium that passes through a predetermined area is detected, and the processing associated with the subsequent winning in the first special figure starting opening 230 is performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the first special figure starting port 230. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a single winning, it is not determined that there is a winning until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination clear pattern information, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and the universal figure winning random number value and The random number counter for generating each special figure random value is updated. For example, if the numeric range that can be taken as the universal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter makes one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is obtained from a random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value that varies in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter that corresponds to the random number counter for general-purpose winning random value generation. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the universal random number I'll do it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the universal figure winning random number value has made one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for

  In step S211, an effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used in the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, a symbol is displayed on the general symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for timing the time for which the symbol is changed / stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 210. Various including a special figure display symbol update timer for timing the time of fluctuating / stopping, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a timer for measuring a predetermined ending effect period, etc. Update the timer.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning a prize counter updating process, when a winning is made in the winning holes 234, 226 and the starting holes 230, 232. It is read and incremented by 1 and set in the original prize ball number storage area.

  In addition, in step S217, prize winning acceptance processing is performed. In the winning acceptance process, a plurality of types of start information are acquired if a predetermined condition is satisfied. The plurality of types of starting information acquired here are stored as a set of starting information in an empty area of the starting information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 according to the winning order (holding order).

  In step S219, which is executed subsequent to step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set) and bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when it is on, it indicates the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 indicate the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 indicate encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221, a universal figure state update process is performed. The universal figure state updating process is one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure. For example, in the general figure state update process in the middle of the general figure variation display (the value of the above-mentioned general figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

  Further, in the public figure state update process at the timing when the universal figure change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the universal figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in a mode. The 7-segment LED is controlled to be turned on and off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be a lost symbol display mode. ON / OFF driving control of the 7-segment LED is performed. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the universal figure state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal figure stop display is being performed is set in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either one of the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) and the lost symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 5C). Make a display. Further, after that, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbols that are confirmed and displayed are stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the universal figure variation game.

  If the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on as described later. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. While the normal figure operation is set in the setting area, the blade member 2321 is opened in the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And outputs information indicating the opening period to the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In addition, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for driving the opening and closing of 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the general area non-operation is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the universal figure variation game is a loss, the universal figure loss flag is turned on as described later. When the universal figure loss flag is on, even in the universal figure state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure non-operation is set. In the universal figure state updating process when the ordinary figure is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a universal figure related lottery process is performed. In this universal figure-related lottery process, opening / closing control of the universal figure variation game and the second special figure starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the universal figure is not operating), and the pending universal figure variation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is won or unselected by a random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the above random number storage area. The winning judgment is made, and when the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of no win, the hit flag is set to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is acquired as the universal figure timer random number value, and the universal figure display device 210 receives the universal figure display device 210 from the plurality of variable times based on the obtained universal figure timer random number value. One time during which the figure is variably displayed is selected, and this variability display time is stored as a figure variation display time in the figure variation time storage area provided in the RAM 308. It should be noted that the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games is stored in the universal figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this general-use figure hold number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Then, the special figure prefetching process (step S224) is performed. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later. Next, the special figure state update processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure state update processing for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update processing) is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeats lighting and extinguishing drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variation game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the rotation start setting transmission process is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 5R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a general figure probability variation flag. . These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update processing that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R jackpot flag is on, the special figure When the probability variation flag is ON and the universal figure probability variation flag is also ON, any one of special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, and special figure d shown in FIG. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured to have the special figure e when the figure probability variation flag is off, the special figure probability variation flag is on, and the special figure f when the loss flag is on. The 7 segment LED is controlled to be turned on and off, and the setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214, the 15R special big hit pattern (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), 2R normal big hit pattern (special figure e), lost symbol ( The fixed display of any one of the special symbols f) is performed.

  After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the special display 2 that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the special figure 2 variable game. Further, if the number of shortening times stored in the shortening number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of shortening times, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time saving flag. Further, even during a big hit game (during a special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the pattern for stopping the variable display is the special figure 2. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that it exists is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described below, and then the process ends.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the area, in order to stand by for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, while displaying an image notifying the player to start the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 First, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period has ended (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or until the winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the variable winning port 234 is detected) The solenoid for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning port 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), the door member Is output in the open state, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning port 234, and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating the closing period in. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which is repeated at a predetermined number of times (15 rounds, 5 rounds or 2 rounds in the present exemplary embodiment) for opening / closing control of the door member, a predetermined end effect period (for example, Storage area of the production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to stand by for 3 seconds), that is, for the period during which the image for notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative pattern display device 208 is to be displayed is displayed. The information indicating the production standby period is set in. Further, if the universal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the time saving frequency (for example, 100 times) is set in the time saving frequency storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and is also provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the time saving flag. If the universal figure probability variation flag is set to OFF, neither the time saving number is set in the time saving number storage unit nor the time saving flag is turned ON.

  The time saving here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit is shortened. When the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the high probability state of universal figure (universal figure probable variation). In the high probability state of the universal figure, compared to the low probability state of the universal figure, there is a higher probability of being hit in the universal variation game. In addition, in the general figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure fluctuation game becomes shorter than in the general figure low probability state (general figure shortness). Further, in the universal figure high probability state, the open time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer than in the universal figure low probability state (power extension). In addition, in the universal figure high probability state, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open than in the universal figure low probability state. The state in which any one of these Phenomenon Probable, Phenomenon Short, and Den Chu is set is called Densapo (Starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, the general probability low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is a high probability probability state during the big hit game, a large number of game balls in the special figure 2 starting port 232 until a predetermined number of variable prize holes 234 and game balls enter during the big hit game. There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be won during a big hit increases and the gambling performance increases, which is to solve this problem.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operation is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is out, the out flag is turned on. When the deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Toku-zu 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state updating process when the special figure 2 is not operating, the process moves to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Then, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) about special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, the description thereof will be omitted. Omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure related lottery processing for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special map-related lottery process (special map 2 related lottery process) for the special map 2 is performed first (step S229), and then the special map-related lottery process for the special map 1 (special map 1-related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Special figure 2 related lottery processing, the variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not done, the state of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is inactive and special figure 2 which is suspended Assuming that the number of variable games is 1 or more, it is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random number storage area. Special figure 1 related lottery processing, the variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not done, the state of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is inactive both, and special figure 1 which is being held Assuming that the number of variable games is 1 or more, it is executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random number storage area.

  Regarding these special figure related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special map 2 variation game start condition and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are met at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. If the number of special game 2 variable games to be held is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game to be held are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the determination whether or not the special figure variation game is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is notified. The priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting opening 230. In the present exemplary embodiment, the special figure variation game with high advantage (special figure 2 variation game in this example) is given priority over the special figure variation game with low advantage (special figure 1 variation game in this example). For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the game state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery processing in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special piece) from the earliest (oldest stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. FIG. 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value) is acquired, and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the special figure 2 starting information and the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, etc., the ROM 306 It is determined whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a non-win by using the hit / miss determination table stored in (a hit / miss judgment). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random number value in the obtained special figure 2 starting information and the determined hit / miss judgment result. After the variable display, the symbols (stop symbols) to be stopped and displayed are determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / miss determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 hold number at the time of the hit determination, the obtained random number for determining the special figure variation time, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) of special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

  After extracting the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 deletes the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and Figure 2 The special figure 2 reservation number in the reservation number storage area is decremented by one. At this time, the special figure 2 starting information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is performed based on the special figure 2 starting information stored in this temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is similarly performed. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variation game with a high advantage is started prior to the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, and the hold of the special figure 2 is digested prior to the hold of the special figure 1. The special figure 2 priority variation is taken as an example, but the special figure 1 variable game with a low advantage is started with priority over the special figure 2 variable game with a high advantage, and the special figure 1 is suspended. It may be the special figure 1 priority variation that is preferentially digested over the hold. Also, without prioritizing either the special figure 2 variation game with a high degree of advantage or the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, the special figure variation game relating to the suspension of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started. It may be a change in the starting mouth winning order that starts in order. In the starting mouth winning order variation, the maximum number of reservations is eight regardless of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. Therefore, compared with the priority fluctuation in which the maximum number of reservations is 4 in Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, respectively. It may be possible to raise the upper limit of the number of reservations.

  Further, in the above description, the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special map are not performed depending on the state of one special map, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above special map state update By performing the processing and the special figure-related lottery processing independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, a plurality of special figures may be simultaneously changed. In addition, when a plurality of special maps are simultaneously changed in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery result of each special map, or the lottery result of each special map is displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to separately display the respective lottery results, or one display may be configured to display the lottery results of a plurality of special symbols. In addition, when fluctuations relating to a plurality of special maps are performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special map whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special map whose fluctuation is stopped later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The scheduled output information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when on, indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (in this example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. The information that can specify the type of command), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flag values, and a timer selected in the special figure related lottery process. In the case of a symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command, including information such as numbers, various jackpot flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flag values, etc. are included, and winning effect start command and end In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designating command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit round number, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, whether or not there is a winning at the special diagram 2 starting port 232, and winning at the variable winning ports 234 and 235. Including presence or absence. In the case of the prefetch result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of prefetches stored in the prefetch number storage area, which will be described later, and the stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit are included in the command data. Including.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, out-of-match flags, special figure probability variation flags, special figure probability-related lottery processing, and special figure stored in the RAM 308 are included in the command data. 2 Set the information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the values of various types of big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data stored in the RAM 308, such as the effect control information and the special figure probability variation flag output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period. Information indicating the value, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission processing, the command data stores the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability variation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening release transmission processing, the command data, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variation game or special figure 2 variation game Set the information indicating such as. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the command data, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variation games or special figure 2 variation games Set the information indicating such as.

  Further, in this step S233, general command special figure pending increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 for command data, advance notice information (advance notice information, false) (Advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting processing, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower tray full tank error. . When the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning a prize port 234, and the general-purpose display device 210 and the special-figure 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display sections 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or a stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the state becomes HALT.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetching process (step S224) of the main controller timer interrupt process. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, pre-determines the stop symbol before the winning / disapproval decision processing, and the pre-determination result (special The prefetch result) is stored in the prefetch result storage unit (see FIGS. 9A to 9C) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit that stores the pre-reading result of the special figure 1 and the number of special figure 1 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit are specified. A special figure 1 prefetch number storage area for storing one prefetch number is provided. In this example, the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results. In the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 1 pre-reading result of the highest rank (the first place) is deleted each time the number of special figure 1 pre-reading decreases by one, and the remaining special figure 1 pre-reading result is deleted. Are processed so that the rank of the data of 1 is advanced by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 1 prefetches is increased by one, new data of the special figure 1 prefetch results is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 1 prefetch results having the lowest rank (last).

  Further, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section for storing the special figure 2 pre-reading result and the number of special figure 2 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section are stored. A special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing the number is provided. In this example, the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four pre-reading results. In the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 2 pre-reading result of the highest rank is deleted every time the number of special figure 2 pre-reading is decreased, and the order of the remaining special figure 2 pre-reading result data is deleted. Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Also, each time the number of special figure 2 prefetches increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 2 preread result having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increased (step S301). Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 2 is increasing is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 reserved number stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of prefetches. When the special figure 2 reservation number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, the main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing, and the special figure 2 pending number is the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are the same, it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has not increased. When it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and when it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 start information (a set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value) is specified before the winning / judging process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). Figure 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, by using the pre-reading special figure 2 start information, and the hit determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of hit determination, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is changed to the special figure 2 related lottery. Preliminary determination is made before the success / failure determination processing in the processing (step S229). Note that this pre-determination processing may be performed using a special table for pre-determination, instead of the table used for determining whether it is true or false.

  In step S305 subsequent to step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained by the preliminary determination is stored in the first empty area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Then, it transfers to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of special figure 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, as in the case of the special figure 2, the special figure 1 reserved number stored in the special figure 1 reserved number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage. The comparison is performed by comparing with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is not increased, the special figure prefetching process is ended and the main control unit is executed. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not the non-electricity support is being performed. If it is determined that the non-electric power support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric power support is not being performed (the power support is being performed (universal figure high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not the non-electric power support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice is satisfied. For example, the execution condition of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice is, in addition to the non-electric power support, conditions such as not being in the big hit game.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 starting information (a set of special figure 1 winning random number values and special figure 1 random number values) is specified before the winning / losing determination processing in the special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231). Figure 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, by using the pre-reading special figure 1 start information, and the hit determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of hit determination, for example, the stop symbols of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information are drawn to the special figure 1 related lottery. Preliminary determination is made prior to the hit / miss determination processing in the processing (step S231). Note that this pre-determination processing may be performed using a special table for pre-determination, instead of the table used for determining whether it is true or false.

  In step S313 subsequent to step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetch result obtained by the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest empty area of the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the process returns to the main controller timer interrupt process.

  In step S315, the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 in RAM 308 is replaced with the "undetermined" information indicating that the starting information is not pre-read without pre-reading the increased special figure 1 starting information. Store in the first empty area of the set. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the process returns to the main controller timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) described above, only the pre-reading result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 may be stored. All pre-reading results in the set may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  In addition, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 8, pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of special figure 2, and pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of special figure 1 except during power support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased start information of the special maps 1 and 2. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400, which has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300, may determine by lottery whether or not to execute the pre-reading notification for each hold, for example. In addition, regardless of the game state (for example, whether or not in non-electric support), when the start information increases, the prefetch is always executed and the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and the prefetch is performed. The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether to execute the lottery and the effect using the pre-reading result.

  FIG. 9 illustrates a state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 9A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9A, the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as the number of reserveable special figure 1 variable games. .. Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 9 (a), the storage area "Hold 1" stores "special drawing I" (disappearance) as stop symbol information, and the storage area "Hold 2" stores "special drawing I" as stop symbol information. "(Disappearance) is stored," Special figure A "(15R probability variation big hit) is stored in the storage area" Hold 3 "as stop symbol information, and" Special figure I "is stored in the storage area" Hold 4 "as stop symbol information. "(Disappearance) is stored.

  FIG. 9B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 preread result information is stored in the special figure 2 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9B, the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 2 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in this embodiment) as the holdable number of the special figure 2 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 9 (b), the storage area "holding 1" stores "special drawing f" (off) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas "holding 2" to "holding 4" include stop symbols. No information is stored. In addition, in FIG. 9B, a state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 9C shows an example of the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit in the electrical support. As shown in FIG. 9C, in the storage area “holding 1”, “undetermined” information is stored instead of the stop symbol information. Neither stop symbol information nor “undetermined” information is stored in the storage areas “holding 2” to “holding 4”.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, the judgment result, the fluctuation timer number (fluctuation time), the timer group described later, and the like are pre-determined and the pre-read result is stored in the pre-read result storage unit. It can be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as information.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10, for a win / fail judgment table used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. While explaining. Here, FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a high probability table for win / loss determination, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a low probability table for win / loss determination. In the case of performing the special determination of the special figure 1, in the case of the high special probability state of the special figure, the high probability table for determination of good or wrong shown in FIG. , And refer to the low probability table for success / failure determination shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referred win / loss determination table and the obtained random number value, the win / loss determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variation game, a big hit, a small hit, or an outlier is selected as the hit / miss determination result.

  Similarly, in the case of performing the success / failure determination of the special figure 2, in the case of the special figure high probability state, the special figure low probability state is referred to by referring to the high probability table for success / failure determination shown in FIG. In this case, the low probability table for success / failure determination shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referred to table for determination of win / loss and the acquired random number value, the result of win / loss determination of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variation game, the big hit or the outlier is selected as the hit / miss determination result.

  FIG. 10C is a diagram showing an example of the small hit determination table. When the result of the big hit judgment is out of order, the small hit judgment table shown in FIG. 10C is referred to, and based on the numerical range shown by the referred small hit judgment table and the acquired random number value. , Select the result of the special drawing small hit lottery. In the present embodiment, when the win / no win determination result (lottery result) per special map is the special one, the small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the win / no determination result, and the loss is with a probability of 63536/65536. However, if the winning / nothing determination result (lottery result) of the special figure per lottery is the special figure 2, the small hit is not selected.

  Next, the stop is performed based on the winning / decision result or the like determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The special figure determination table used for determining symbols will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 11 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 1 symbol determining table, and FIG. 11 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 2 symbol determining table. When determining the stop symbol of the special figure 1, the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 (a) is referred to, and the special figure is determined based on the hit result of the special figure 1 and the numerical range of the random number value. Select the stop pattern of 1. In the present embodiment, when the hit / no hit result of Toku-zu 1 is a big hit, any one is selected from special drawings A to G, and when the hit / no hit judgment result of Toku-zu 1 is a small hit, Toku-zu H is selected, and when the hit / no-go result of Toku-zu 1 is missing, toku-zu I is selected.

  Further, when determining the stop symbol of the special figure 2, referring to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 (b), based on the hit result of the special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number value, The special design 2 stop design is selected by lottery. In the present embodiment, when the hit / damage result of Toku-zu 2 is a big hit, any one of the Toku-zu a to Toku-e is selected. f is selected. After the symbols to be stopped and displayed are determined, the symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device is set.

  Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 12A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 of FIG. 12A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of the input / output port, initialization processing of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this processing is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the processing proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed. The effect control process will be described later.

  In step S411 following step S409, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, when the depression of the effect button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the depression of the effect button 136.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control processing, if the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to VDP434, this instruction is output to VDP434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a command to the sound source IC 416, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, a lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to various lamps 418, the instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a command to the shielding device 246, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500, the control command is set to be output. Then, it returns to step S403.

  FIG. 12B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects the strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  FIG. 12C is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. To be executed in the cycle. In step S601 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub-control unit main processing and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 following step S601, the control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub control unit main process, and the other effect random number updating process is performed. And so on.

  FIG. 12D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S413 of the first sub-control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data or texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 436. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc., and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 subsequent to step S701, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. When the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S703: Yes), the process proceeds to step S705, If not (step S703: No), it waits until the transfer end interrupt signal is input.

  In step S705, parameter setting is performed based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, the CPU 404 forms the display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, so that the information of the image data forming the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 subsequent to step S705, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the image drawing end is input. If the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S709: Yes), If not (step S709: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 13A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S801 of FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S801. In this initialization processing, initialization of the input / output port, initialization processing of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S803 following step S801, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this processing is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the processing shifts to step S805. .. In step S805, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S807 following step S805, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S809 following step S807, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S807, the effect data corresponding to this command (effect data by the effect movable body 224 and effect data by the lamp) is read from the ROM 506, and the effect data is updated. If necessary, the effect data is updated.

  In step S811 following step S809, lamp control processing is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S813 following step S811, the movable body control process is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Then, it returns to step S803.

  FIG. 13B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S901 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  FIG. 13C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. To be executed in the cycle. In step S1001 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S803 of the second sub-control unit main processing, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1003, which is subsequent to step S1001, an effect random number updating process is performed.

  Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  In FIG. 14, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, an ordinary symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, a special symbol 2 holding lamp 220, and a universal symbol. A hold lamp 216 is shown.

  On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 14A, a combination of decorative patterns “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. The background here is not displayed, but a default background image described later is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. It should be noted that various background images different from the default background image (for example, background images according to modes) may be displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol display area 284 is an area for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or the symbol is stopped), and from the top, the symbol changing notification area of the normal figure, the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 1 , Becomes the notification area during symbol change of special figure 2. While the pattern of the universal figure is stopped, the quadrangle figure is lit up and displayed, but during the change of the pattern of the universal figure, the quadrangle figure is blinked or turned off. While the special figure 1 is stopped, the round figure is lit and displayed, but during the change of the figure 1 special figure, the round figure is blinked or turned off. While the symbol of special figure 2 is stopped, the triangular figure is lit and displayed, but during the change of symbol of special figure 2, the triangular figure is blinked or turned off. As described above, the fourth symbol is different not only in the display position but also in the display mode (here, the shape), and the player can discriminate it at a glance. The look-ahead notice may be given by changing the display mode, lighting mode, or blinking mode of the fourth symbol.

  Further, the decorative pattern display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 14 is a non-electric power support state (non-time saving state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. Further, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state.

  The hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 displays a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1, and the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 displays a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2. .. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is represented by the number of holding icons of special figure 1 holding lamp 218 as well as the number of holding icons of special figure 1, and the number of holdings of special figure 2 is the number of lighting of special figure 2 holding lamp 220. In addition, it is also represented by the number of holding icons in special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon, .... In the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icons on the right side become hold icons with older winnings. In the hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2, hold icons are displayed vertically. , The lower the hold icon, the older the winning icon.

  In FIG. 14A, two holding icons h11 and h12 of the special drawing 1 are displayed in the holding icon display area 281 of the special drawing 1, and both of the holding icons h11 and h12 of the special drawing 1 are shown. , Is displayed in a default display mode (a round, unpatterned, white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is a round hold icon. In addition, in FIG. 14A, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines. ..

  On the other hand, no pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 14 is the non-electric power support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chu and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because. It should be noted that the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, that is, the reserved icon display area provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 does not actually display a line demarcating the area, but in FIG. Is indicated by a dotted line for clarity. A line demarcating the region may be provided, or a line demarcating the region may be displayed when the hold icon is displayed. Further, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the pending icon display area of the special map that is more likely to win in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 ( It is displayed in the effect display area 208d), and the hold icon display area of the other special figure is displayed at the right end. That is, when the control state is the non-electric power support state, as shown in FIG. 14A, the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display of the special figure 2 is displayed. The area 282 is displayed at the right end. On the contrary, when the control state is the electric support state, the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed at the right end.

  Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon of special figure 2 is a rectangular unpatterned and white display mode, and not only the display position is different from the hold icon of special figure 1 but also the display mode ( Here, the shapes are also different, and the player can tell the difference by just looking at it. The default display mode of the hold icon of special figure 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon of special figure 2 may be the same.

  In the present embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special symbol is performed in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → starting or extinguishing the fourth symbol blinking → starting or erasing the hold icon moving animation → changing the decorative symbol. However, this order may change.

  In FIG. 14B, the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon or decoration The pattern has not changed yet.

  In FIG. 14C, the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is started. The movement animation here is such that the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and the second hold The hold icon located at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. At this stage, the variable display of the decorative pattern is not started.

  In FIG. 14D, the moving animation continues, and in FIG. 14E, the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 before the start of change reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon, which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of variation, reached the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. The variable display of decorative patterns has not started. In addition, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon which was the first hold icon h11 until then may be viewed as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon until then. The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

  Then, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in FIG.

  On the decorative pattern display device 208 in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, as shown in FIG. 14 (g), an operation promotion notification image 136P that prompts the production button 136 to be pressed within the valid period is displayed. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the hero. The variable display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol 284 or the like. Note that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative pattern is not hidden.

  In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 14 (h), the valid period is reduced, and in FIG. 14 (i), the player is pressing the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period, as shown in FIG. 14 (j), the reachable state entry notice image 2071 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 instead of the operation promotion notification image 136P. .. In the reach state entry notice image 2071, the character display "Chance" is displayed on the right side of the character image of the hero.

  In FIG. 14 (k), the reach state advance notice image 2071 disappears, and the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes visible, and thereafter, the reach state is entered as shown in FIG. It should be noted that even if the reach state entry notice image 207 is displayed, the reach state may not be entered in some cases, but it is also possible to always enter.

  As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that triggers a notice regarding the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 14 (m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the variable display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c so far, is moved to the lower right corner and reduced, and in FIG. 14 (n). , Has developed into super reach (swordsman reach). An image of an enemy swordsman is displayed in large size on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 14 (n), and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 14 (o), a duel between the main character and the enemy swordsman. An animation of the scene is displayed.

  The reach state entry notice image 2071 is not limited to a notice of entering the reach state, and may be a notice of development of super reach.

  FIG. 15: is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 14 in steps.

  In FIG. 15 (p) continuing from FIG. 14 (o), the animation of the duel scene continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 15 (s). In FIG. 15 (s), the main character wins over the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 15 (t), all are temporarily hidden except the fourth symbol display area 284. Instead of non-display, a background image different from the conventional one may be displayed. Eventually, as shown in (u) of the figure, the fluctuation fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is displayed. The background here may be a non-displayed background image or a background image different from the previous one. Further, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains off, and only the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 15 (v), the combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" that is confirmed for the 15R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed. Further, the fourth design (round figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 15 (v) is lit. In FIG. 15 (v), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 15 (w), as a big hit game start effect, a character image of "probable variation big hit" is displayed together with a background image (omitted here) celebrating the big hit.

  On the other hand, when the reach state is reached by a different decorative design (substantially 5R probability variation big hit, 5R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit) in FIG. 14 (l), a case of another case continuing from FIG. 15 (t) In 15 (u ′), the fluctuation fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6” is displayed, and in FIG. 15 (v ′) following FIG. 15 (u ′), “decoration 6-decoration The combination of the jackpot decorative patterns "6-decoration 6" is stopped and displayed. Then, in FIG. 15 (w ′) subsequent to FIG. 15 (v ′), a character image of “big hit” is displayed together with a background image (here omitted) celebrating the big hit as a big hit game start effect.

  FIG. 16 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the effect in another case following FIG. 15 (q).

  In FIG. 16 (a), the animation of the duel scene started in FIG. 14 (o) continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 16 (b). In FIG. 16 (b), the main character is defeated by the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 16 (c), like FIG. 15 (t), all are temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. Eventually, in FIG. 16D, the fluctuation fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is started. Here, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is restored, and the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (e), the fourth symbol (circular figure) of Toku-zu 1 is turned on, and the combination of missing decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is stopped. It is displayed. Next, during the fixed display period of Toku-zu 1, in the variable icon display area 280, the erasing animation of the variable icon h0 is executed. In (f) of the figure, the erasing animation of the variable icon h0 is started, the erasing animation continues in (g) of the figure, and the varying icon h0 completely disappears in the (h) of FIG. It should be noted that the changing icon h0 may be erased before the confirmation display of the special figure 1 is performed.

  Next, the notice icon displayed in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. Here, FIG. 17A is a diagram illustrating a display example of a notice icon, and FIG. 17B is a diagram illustrating a notice icon display region information storage area stored in the RAM 408. FIG. 7C is a diagram illustrating an example of the timing of the notice icon being consumed, and FIG. 9D is a diagram illustrating an example of the timing of increasing the notice icon. Further, FIG. 18A is a diagram illustrating an example of the pre-change notice icon, and FIG. 18B is a diagram illustrating an example of the post-change notice icon.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17A, a notice icon display area 285 may be displayed on the upper portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. The notice icon display area 285 is divided into, for example, six areas, and from the left, the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon third display area YA3, and the notice icon fourth display. The area YA4, the notice icon fifth display area YA5, and the notice icon sixth display area YA6 are arranged side by side in the column direction. In the present embodiment, the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is four (or the number of hold icons that can be displayed when the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 is further displayed). Is 8 in total), so it can be said that the number of notice icons that can be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is different from the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area. The number of noticeable icons and the number of hold icons that can be displayed may be the same. Further, the number of areas forming the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to six, and may be one or may be set to any number of two or more. Further, the number of areas may be changed according to the progress of the game.

  In the notice icon display area 285, one notice icon may be displayed for one area. For example, as shown in FIG. 17A, a notice icon I6 of a hat composed of a hat pattern is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and a notice box second display area YA2 shows a box of a thousand boxes. The notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes made up of a design is displayed, the notice icon I10 of a fan made up of a design of a fan is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3, and the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is shown. A shuriken notice icon I7 consisting of a shuriken pattern is displayed, a ribbon notice icon I8 consisting of a ribbon pattern is displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5, and a notice icon sixth display area YA6 is indicated. It is blank. Which notice icon is displayed in each area in the notice icon display area 285 is based on the information stored in the notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408 shown in FIG. 17B. It is determined. In this embodiment, one advance notice icon is displayed for each area, but two or more advance notice icons may be displayed for each area.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, the respective notice icons displayed in the respective areas (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative pattern display device 208 are consumed at the timing shown in FIG. 17C, for example. Controlled to be done. This control information is stored in, for example, the RAM 408 of the sub-control unit 400 according to the progress of the game, and is appropriately read and executed. That is, 8 seconds after the variation display (variation) of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 17A is started, the ribbon notice icon I8 is consumed, and then the digested ribbon notice icon I8 is displayed. The corresponding effect may be executed. After that, when the variation ends, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 starts to move toward the variation icon display area 280, and when the variable display of the decorative symbol (the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1) is started, When 12 seconds have passed from the start of the symbol variation, the shuriken notice icon I7 is digested, and thereafter, the effect corresponding to the digested shuriken notice icon I7 may be executed. After that, when the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 ends, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 (in FIG. 17A, the hold icon h12 is moved to the hold icon h11) is moved toward the change icon display area 280. Along with the start of, when the variable display of the decorative symbol (the symbol variable corresponding to the hold 2) is started, 4 seconds after the symbol variable is started, the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, and then The effect corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the digested hat may be executed. Further, 10 seconds after the SP reach is started, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes may be consumed, and thereafter, the effect corresponding to the notice icon I9 of a consumed box may be executed. After that, when 2 seconds have elapsed after all the decorative patterns are in the temporarily stopped state, the fan advance notice icon I10 is consumed, and thereafter, the effect corresponding to the exhausted fan advance notice icon I10 may be executed. .. In this way, it can be said that the completion of the notice icon notifies the player in advance that the notice or effect will be executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 17A, the respective notice icons displayed in the respective areas (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative pattern display device 208 are, for example, timings shown in FIG. It is controlled to be increased by. This control information is stored in, for example, the RAM 408 of the sub-control unit 400 according to the progress of the game, and is appropriately read and executed. That is, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 17 (a) was started, the hall appearance appears on the decoration pattern display device 208 and the hall effect that increases the notice icon is executed. To be done. In this hall effect, an effect is displayed in which the hat notice icon I6, the ribbon notice icon I8, and the shuriken notice icon I7 are increased and displayed in the notice icon display area 285. After that, when the variation ends and the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 is started, DJ appears on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the DJ effect of increasing the notice icon is executed. In this DJ effect, an effect is displayed in which the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is increased and displayed in the notice icon display area 285. After that, when the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 ends and the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 2 is started, and 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the second pseudo continuous production, the hall production is executed and the fan The notice icon I10 is increased and displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Here, the pseudo continuous effect is a variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which the variation start and the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol are executed plural times in the variable display of one special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be configured to be larger than the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that is a big hit. For example, the maximum number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that is out of sync may be set to one, and the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be at least two or more.

  Next, the effect contents corresponding to the types of the notice icon displayed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18 (a), the notice icons include those in which the content of the corresponding effect is not clear and those in which the content of the corresponding effect is clear as shown in FIG. 18 (b).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 18A, the notice icon (the notice icon before change) for which the content of the corresponding effect is not clear is, for example, the notice icon I1 of the first lord and the notice icon I2 of the second lord. There is a third lord's notice icon I3 and a first button notice icon I4. The first notice icon I1 of the lord is a notice icon in which the silhouette of the lord's face is shown in white, and the reliability of the big hit is weak. Further, the second lord's notice icon I2 is a notice icon in which the silhouette of the lord's face is shown in green, and the jackpot reliability is medium. Further, the third lord's notice icon I3 is a notice icon in which the lord's face silhouette is represented in red, and the reliability of the big hit is high. Further, the first button notice icon I4 is a notice icon imitating the effect button 136, and the reliability of the big hit is either weak to strong. If the first notice icon I1, the second notice icon I2, and the third notice icon I3 are displayed at a predetermined change display timing (for example, the increase display timing of the notice icon), It changes to any of the changed notice icons shown in 18 (b). Further, the first button notice icon I4 changes to any of the changed notice icons shown in FIG. 18B at the timing when the player operates the effect button 136. It should be noted that the first button notice icon I4 may be changed to any of the notice icons before the change at the timing when the player operates the effect button 136.

  In this way, the first reminder notice icon I1, the second reminder notice icon I2, the third reminder notice icon I3, and the first button notice icon I4 start the symbol variation, which is the target of prefetching. It may be displayed before the warning and may function as a prefetch notice. Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, when the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, a character notation may be displayed together, and the notice icon I1 of the first lord, When the second palace's notice icon I2 and the third lord's notice icon I3 are displayed, a "question mark" may be additionally displayed.

  On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 18B, the notice icon (the notice icon after change) whose content of the corresponding effect is clear is, for example, a notice icon I6 for a hat, a notice icon I7 for a shuriken, and a ribbon icon. There are a notice icon I8, a thousand box notice icon I9, a fan notice icon I10, and a second button notice icon I11.

  The hat notice icon I6 is a notice icon imitating a hat worn by a Bancho character, and the reliability of the big hit is strong or weak. When the notice icon I6 of one hat is consumed, the pseudo-relational production may be performed only once. Here, the pseudo continuous production includes a strong pattern, a weak pattern, and a gasse pattern. In the strong pattern pseudo continuous production, for example, as described later, a character of a length appears when the pseudo continuous production starts, but the display mode of the character of the length is different from usual (for example, the length becomes aura). The display mode is wrapped) to notify that the degree of reliability is strong. Note that, for example, in spite of the second pseudo-reproduction, the third-time pseudo-reproduction may be informed to indicate that the reliability is strong. In addition, the pseudo pattern production of the weak pattern notifies that the degree of reliability is weak by displaying the appearing character of the length in a normal display mode. Further, the pseudo continuous effect of the gasse pattern is an effect of performing a false display while pretending that the pseudo continuous effect is performed, as described later. Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed in association with the hat notice icon I6, if the reliability is high, the pattern A is displayed as “continuation” in red or black. There are cases where Alternatively, the “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. If the reliability is weak, the pattern A may be displayed as “continuation” in black characters with “continuation” or “question mark”. Alternatively, the “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. It should be noted that when the notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed, the pseudo continuous effect may be performed without fail. Further, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

  The shuriken notice icon I7 is a notice icon that imitates a shuriken thrown by the Oniwaban (ninja) character, and the jackpot reliability is strong or weak. When one shuriken's notice icon I7 is digested, if the reliability of the big hit is strong, the notice effect being executed may be changed to a strong notice effect with high reliability through a freeze effect. Yes (freeze notice). On the other hand, if the reliability of the big hit is weak, a stop symbol notice may be given to notify a part or all of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in advance. Further, in the present embodiment, when a character notation is displayed along with the shuriken notice icon I7, “freeze” may be displayed as the A pattern if the reliability is high. Alternatively, the “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. In addition, if the reliability is weak, the pattern A may be displayed as “Cham”. Alternatively, the “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. When the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is exhausted, either one of the freeze notice and the stop symbol notice may be executed without fail. Further, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

  The ribbon notice icon I8 is a notice icon imitating a ribbon worn by Princess Chibi, and the jackpot reliability is strong or weak. When the notice icon I8 of one ribbon is consumed, if the reliability of the big hit is high, there is a case where the background moves to a special stage such as the look-ahead mode or the variation notice mode (stage change). Strong production). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is weak, an effect may be executed in which the displayed background is changed to one of a plurality of types of backgrounds used in a normal gaming state (stage change weak. Production). Further, in the present embodiment, when the text notation is displayed in association with the notice icon I8 on the ribbon, if the degree of reliability is strong, the pattern A is displayed in red or black as “STETCHEN”. There are cases where Alternatively, the “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. In addition, if the reliability is weak, the pattern A may be displayed in black characters as “STETCHEN”. Alternatively, the “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. When the notice icon I8 on the ribbon is exhausted, either one of the strong stage change effect and the weak stage change effect may be executed without fail. Further, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

  Thousands of box notice icon I9 is a notice icon that imitates a thousand boxes thrown by the lord's character toward the farmer, and the reliability of the big hit is determined to be a big hit, strong or weak. If the notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes is consumed, and the reliability of the big hit is strong, the notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes is consumed during the execution of the weak reach production with low reliability, and the reach transition production is performed. After that, an effect of shifting (promoting) to a highly reliable strong reach effect is performed (reach transfer effect). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is low, the alert icon I9 of the thousand boxes is digested after execution of the weak cut-in notification with low reliability, and then the strong cut-in notification with high reliability is executed (advance notification promotion). Production). If the jackpot is confirmed, either the reach transition effect or the notice promotion effect is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed in association with the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes, if the big hit is confirmed, the pattern A may be displayed as “large board behavior”. Alternatively, the “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. If the degree of reliability is strong, the pattern A may be displayed in red or black as “promotion”. Alternatively, the “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. In addition, if the reliability is low, the pattern A may be displayed in black characters as “promotion”. Alternatively, the “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. It should be noted that when the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is consumed, any one of the finalized effect, the reach transition effect, and the advance notice promotion effect may be executed without fail. Further, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

  The fan notice icon I10 is a notice icon that imitates a fan worn by a princess character, and the reliability of the jackpot is confirmed as a jackpot. When the notice icon I10 of one fan is consumed, a premiere notice for notifying in advance that the big hit is finalized or a premier reach in which the big hit is fixed is executed (premier effect). Alternatively, the notice icon I10 of the fan is exhausted after the out-of-reach is displayed, and a revival effect that is a big hit is executed (revival effect). Further, in the present embodiment, when a character notation is displayed in association with the fan advance notice icon I10, “blessing” may be displayed. It should be noted that when the fan advance notice icon I10 is exhausted, one of the premiere effect and the revival effect may be executed without fail. Further, in the present embodiment, the content to be produced differs depending on the timing at which the fan advance notice icon I10 is exhausted, but the exhaustion timing may be the same.

  The second button notice icon I11 is a notice icon imitating the effect button 136, and the reliability of the big hit is any of the weakest to the big hit confirmed. When one of the second button notice icons I11 is consumed, a button effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 136 is performed. At this time, the operation acceptance period is started, and when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation acceptance period, the second button notice icon I11 is displayed as the hat notice icon I6, the shuriken notice icon I7, and the ribbon. There may be a case where any one of the notice icon I8, the notice icon I8 of 1,000 boxes, and the notice icon I10 of the fan is changed to a digested display, and a corresponding effect is executed. Alternatively, it may be displayed without being changed in any of the notice icons.

  Note that in the present embodiment, the change notice of the notice icon is performed when the above-mentioned notice icon before change is changed to the notice icon after change, but via the change display of the notice icon from the change notice icon before change. It is also possible to perform a display for deleting the notice icon (“No” notice icon shown in item 5 of FIG. 18B: deletion effect). In this effect, it is notified that the change is out of alignment. In other words, it is a preliminary announcement indicating that the pattern is a loss confirmation pattern. Naturally, the reliability is the weakest. Even if the erase effect is executed, a big hit may occur.

  Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment.

  In FIG. 19, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a public symbol display device 210, a first special symbol reservation lamp 218, a second special symbol reservation lamp 220, a universal symbol display device. The figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are shown. Here, the fourth symbol display device 284a is a display device having the same function as the display of the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in FIG. 14, and, for example, displays the display result of the fourth symbol by the light emitting mode of the LED. It is possible to do. The fourth symbol display device 284a may be configured by an image display device such as an LCD or EL. The fourth symbol display device 284a is provided, for example, at a predetermined position on the game board 200, and is drive-controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. From the top, the fourth symbol display device 284a serves as a symbol variation notification area of a normal figure, a symbol variation notification area of special figure 1, and a symbol variation notification area of special figure 2. The LED in the area in which the quadrangle figure is displayed is lit while the symbol of the universal figure is stopped, but it is blinking or extinguished during the variation of the symbol of the regular figure. While the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped, the LED in the area where the round figure is displayed is lit and displayed, but during the change of symbol of special figure 1, it is blinking or turned off. While the symbol of special figure 2 is stopped, the LED in the area where the triangular figure is displayed is lit and displayed, but during the change of symbol of special figure 2, it is blinked or turned off. As described above, the fourth symbol is different not only in the display position but also in the display mode (here, the shape), and the player can discriminate it at a glance. The look-ahead notice may be given by changing the display mode, lighting mode, or blinking mode of the fourth symbol. Note that the fourth symbol may be displayed in a lighted state while the symbol is changing, and may be displayed in a lighted state while the symbol is stopped.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (1), the above-mentioned notice icon display area 285 is displayed on the upper part. It should be noted that in FIG. 19A, no notice icon is displayed in any area of the notice icon display area 285. Further, as shown in FIG. 19 (1), in the first special figure display device 212, the variable display of symbols is performed, and in response thereto, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of the decorative symbols. At the same time, in the fourth symbol display device 284a, the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 is performed. The advance notice icon display area 285 may be always displayed, or may not be displayed as necessary.

  In addition, in FIG. 19 (1), the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. Therefore, the two holding icons h11 and h12 and the variation icon h0 in FIG. 1 are both displayed in the default display mode (circular unpatterned and white display mode). In addition, in this effect example, the display of the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is omitted, but the second hold icon display area 282 may be displayed.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (2), when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, the number of lights in the first special figure holding lamp 218 is increased by 1 to 3 and is held. It is shown that the number has become three. Further, the third hold icon h13 of the special figure 1 is also displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. The third hold is a hold that is the target of prefetching, and is a hold that triggers whether or not to display the notice icon, as described later. For convenience of explanation, the third hold icon h13 of the special figure 1 which is the target of prefetching is shown by hatching, but in reality, it is the same as the hold icons h11 and h12 of the other special figure 1. The display mode is a round, non-patterned, and white display mode. The same applies to the following description.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 19C, the decorative pattern display device 208 stops and displays the combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 7”, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

  Then, in FIG. 19 (4), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but no change has occurred in the hold icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 19 (5), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of Toku-zu 1 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280. Change icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 is the special figure. It becomes the 1st second hold icon h12. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 19 (6), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord's effect is started. This is an effect executed when it is determined to display the notice icon based on the result of the prefetch. Here, the lord's character YM possesses the hat notice icon I6.

  Then, after the lord's character YM is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (7), the notice icon I6 of the hat he / she owns is displayed at the notice icon shown in FIG. 19 (8). An effect display that is thrown toward the area 285 is performed.

  Then, the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (9), and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 19 (10). On the decorative pattern display device 208, an effect display in which the lord's character YM succeeds in displaying the notice icon and has a happy expression is performed. Thereby, the player expects that an effect corresponding to the hat notice icon I6 will be executed in the future. That is, it can be said that by displaying the notice icon I6 of the hat in the notice icon display area 285, it is possible to give a notice that the pseudo-relation effect will be executed in the future.

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 19 (11) to 12 (12), display is performed in which the lord's character YM is framed out toward the lower part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 19 step by step.

  In FIG. 20 (14) continuing from FIG. 19 (13), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off. It has not yet occurred.

  In FIG. 20 (15), the hold icons h11 and h12 of Toku-zu 1 are moved and displayed by a moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon h0 becomes, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 20 (16), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord's effect is started. This is also an effect executed when it is determined to display the notice icon based on the result of pre-reading the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, the lord's character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10.

  Then, after the lord's character YM is moved and displayed to the predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (17), the notice icon I6 of the hat he / she has, and the 1,000-box notice are made at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (18). An effect display is performed in which the icon I9 and the fan advance notice icon I10 are thrown toward the advance notice icon display area 285.

  Then, the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. The fan advance notice icon I10 is displayed in YA3, and is displayed in the advance notice icon fourth display area YA4. After that, the same effect display as in FIGS. 19 (10) to 19 (12) is performed.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and notifies the display result of the deviation. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

  Then, in FIG. 20 (21), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but no change has occurred in the hold icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 20 (22), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and changes to the variable icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have passed after the variable display of the decorative symbol has started, as shown in FIG. 20 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays it in the notice icon first display area YA1. The display that the notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed is started. That is, a display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this embodiment, the notice icon digesting effect of digesting the notice icon is performed in this manner. Note that, as shown in FIG. 20 (23), when the same notice icon is displayed more than once in the notice icon display area 285, such as when two notice icons I6 of a hat are displayed, for example, on the left side. Although it is set in advance to preferentially consume the displayed notice icon, the order of digesting may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icon. Further, which of the notice icons is to be used may be randomly determined, or the notice icon displayed on the right side may be set to be preferentially consumed. That is, the order of digesting the notice icon is limited to the above-described order and can be set as appropriate.

  After that, when the notice icon I6 of the hat moves to the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (24), and then enlarged as shown in FIG. 20 (25). Below the notice icon I6 of the hat, a character display of "continuation" for announcing that the pseudo continuous effect will be performed is additionally displayed. It should be noted that this character display may be performed at the same time as the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged, displayed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display. Good. Further, when the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged and displayed, for example, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed from the default display mode to the look-ahead notice display mode. Further, when the hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

  Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the notice icon I6 of the hat disappears along with the character display of "Continue" at the timing of FIG. 20 (26), and then, as shown in FIG. 20 (27). The left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed. At this time, "decoration 1" is displayed on the left symbol and "decoration 2" is displayed on the right symbol. That is, it is shown that it is in the non-reach state.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 21 (28) continued from FIG. 20 (27), the bancho character BC appears outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is stopped and displayed in response to the digestion of the hat notice icon I6. The effect display that pushes up the design is performed, and the player is informed that the pseudo continuous effect may be started. In the present embodiment, after the bancho character BC pushes up the right symbol, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed again. For example, the right symbol is the same as the left symbol (for example, " It is also possible to form the reach state as decoration 1 ”) and start the reach effect.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (29), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left symbol and the right symbol are continuously stopped and displayed, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, a pseudo continuous symbol representing the lord's character is displayed. The display is moving slowly from top to bottom.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 21 (30), as shown in FIG. A cut-in display consisting of the character display and is displayed. In this embodiment, in this way, the pseudo-relational symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby informing that the pseudo-relational is being executed. In addition, if the pseudo-relational pattern is not stopped and displayed, and the frame is framed out downward, the pseudo-repetition is not started, and the combination of decorative symbols that are out of order is stopped and displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, the pseudo continuous effect may be executed even when the hat notice icon I6 is not digested.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (32), in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. At this time, in the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, “pseudo × 2” indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo continuous production is started is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (33), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of "decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. .. At this time, the reach effect has not started.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (34), the display that the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is consumed is started. That is, a display is made in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 moves from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After that, when the hat notice icon I6 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (35), and then enlarged as shown in FIG. 21 (36). Below the notice icon I6 of the hat, a character display of "continuation" for announcing that the pseudo continuous effect will be performed is additionally displayed.

  Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed, the notice icon I6 of the hat is erased together with the character display of "Continue" at the timing of FIG. 21 (37), and then, in FIG. In response to the end of the notice icon I6 of No. 6, the bancho character BC appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display that pushes up the stopped right symbol is performed, and the second pseudo continuous effect. The player is informed that there is a possibility that the game will be started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (39), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the bancho character BC pushes up the right symbol, the decorative symbol displayed in the right symbol display area 208c changes from "decoration 1" to " The decoration is changed to "2", a non-reach state is formed, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, a display in which the pseudo continuous symbol moves from the upper side to the lower side at a low speed is displayed. At this time, while the pseudo continuous pattern is displayed, the character information of “pseudo × 2” is erased, but the display may be continued. Further, while the pseudo continuous pattern is displayed, the character information of “pseudo × 2” may be displayed in another area. Further, the display mode of the character information of “pseudo × 2” may be changed while the pseudo continuous pattern is displayed. In this example of effect, after the bancho character BC pushes up the right symbol, the same decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed again to maintain the reach state, and the reach effect may be started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 21 (40), as shown in FIG. A cut-in display consisting of the character display and is displayed to inform that the pseudo-link is to be executed. In this embodiment, as the notice icon I6 of the hat is exhausted in one symbol variation display, the jackpot is more likely to be a big hit. That is, in the case where only one notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed and the pseudo continuous effect is performed once, and when the two notice icons I6 of the hat are consumed and the pseudo consecutive effect is performed twice, the hat is used. It is easier to get a big hit when the two notice icons I6 are digested, and when only two notice icons I6 of the hat are consumed and the pseudo continuous production is performed only twice, and three notice icons I6 of the hat are consumed. It can be said that when the pseudo continuous production is performed three times, it is more likely to be a big hit if the three notice icons I6 of the hat are digested.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (42), in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. At this time, in the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, “pseudo × 3” indicating that the third variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo continuous effect is started is displayed.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 21 step by step.

  In FIG. 22 (43) continued from FIG. 21 (42), the decorative pattern of “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, to form the reach state. Here, the reach effect is started.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (44), the above-mentioned super reach (swordsman reach) is developed. The variable display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and reduced. Is displayed. An image of the enemy swordsman is greatly displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (44), and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (45), the main character and the enemy swordsman duel. The animation display of the scene starts.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (46), the display is started in which the notice icon I9 of 1,000 boxes displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is consumed. That is, a display is made in which the 1,000-box notice icon I9 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 moves from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After that, when the notice icon I9 of the thousand box is moved to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I9 is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. A character display of "promotion" is additionally displayed to notify that the production is to have a higher degree of reliability. It should be noted that this character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is enlarged, displayed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display. Good.

  Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), in the decorative pattern display device 208, at the timing of FIG. 22 (48), the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is erased together with the character display of “promotion”, and then the figure. The reach transition effect described above is started at the timing of 22 (49). When the reach transition effect is started, as shown in FIG. 22 (49), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach effect display that has been executed is slightly darkened, and the lord's character appears in the cut-in display, A display for cutting off the reach effect display being executed is displayed, and thereafter, the background turns dark as shown in FIG.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (51), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a highly reliable strong reach effect (button reach effect) is started. When the button reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 22 (51), in the decorative pattern display device 208, after the character display "Is it too hot?" Is displayed on the dark background, FIG. 22 (52). At the timing shown in, the character display of "No" is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 22 (53), the character display of “one shot” is displayed to notify that the button effect will be performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (54), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter to notify that the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted, and inform the player. The operation of the effect button 136 is promoted.

  Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (55), as shown in FIG. 22 (56), the button image 136a is deleted in the decorative pattern display device 208. It shows that the button reach production has failed.

  22 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1".

  FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 22 step by step.

  In FIG. 23 (58) continued from FIG. 22 (57), all of the notice icon display area 285 is once hidden. Then, in FIG. 23 (59), the fluctuation fluctuation (temporary symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1” is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also restarted.

  After that, for example, when 2 seconds have elapsed from the temporary symbol stop display, the display in which the fan advance notice icon I10 displayed in the advance notice icon fourth display area YA4 is exhausted is started at the timing shown in FIG. 23 (60). .. That is, a display is performed in which the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After that, when the fan advance notice icon I10 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 23 (61). At this time, for example, a character display of "Blessing" may be added below the enlarged notice icon I10 of the fan to inform that the big hit is settled. In addition, when the character display is additionally displayed, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the fan advance notice icon I10 is enlarged and displayed, or may be performed before the enlarged display. , May be performed after the enlarged display.

  Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I10 of the fan is erased and the notice icon display area 285 is framed out upward at the timing of FIG. 23 (62). Is displayed. After that, at the timing of FIG. 23 (63), the variable display of the decorative symbols, which had been fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is restarted and re-variation effect is started. .. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is completely framed out. Note that the notice icon display area 285 may be continuously displayed even after the re-variation effect is started.

  In the re-variation effect, as shown in FIG. 23 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c so far, is moved to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is reduced and displayed. It

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 23 (65), the fluctuation fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (66), the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1", which is confirmed as a big hit, is stopped and displayed. At this time, in the 1st special figure display device 212, "special figure A" which is a 15R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed, and in the 4th symbol display device 284a, the 4th symbol (round figure) of special figure 1 Is lit. After that, although not shown, the big hit game is started after the big hit game start effect described above is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the fan advance icon I10 displayed in the advance notice icon display area 285 is exhausted to execute the re-fluctuation effect and become a big hit. However, the advance notice icon I10 for the fan is displayed in the advance notice icon display area. If it is not displayed in 285, the re-variation effect may not be performed and the display result of the outlier may be derived. That is, when the reach transition effect executed by digesting the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is not performed, the reach transition effect can be regarded as a false notice effect. In other words, when one notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is consumed, when a reach transition effect as a false notice of a type corresponding to the notice icon I9 of a consumed box is executed, the result of the variable display of symbols is displayed. It can be said that is out of range. The same applies to the notice effect corresponding to the hat notice icon I6, the notice effect corresponding to the shuriken notice icon I7, and the notice effect corresponding to the ribbon notice icon I8.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the notice effect can be executed according to the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. In other words, it can be said that the notice icon is configured to be displayed in a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed.

  It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, it is described that the notice icon is consumed only while the pattern variation display, which is the subject of the read-ahead notice, is executed, and the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon is executed. Even in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display, the notice icon may be consumed and the effect corresponding to the notice icon may be executed. In this case, the number of notice icons exhausted in the pattern variation display subject to the prefetching notice and the number of notice icons consumed in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display subject to the readahead notice are made different. Or they may be the same.

  Next, another example of the above-described effect of increasing the notice icon will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 26. Here, FIGS. 24 to 26 are diagrams showing, in stages, another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon. 24 to 26, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding device. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  24 (8a) to FIG. 24 (10a) show another example of effects shown in FIGS. 19 (8) to 19 (10). That is, in FIG. 24 (8a), not the notice icon I6 of the hat but the notice icon I1 of the first lord is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, and an effect display is displayed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (9a-1), the thrown first palace's notice icon I1 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Then, as shown in FIG. 24 (9a-2), after the display that the first palace's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 explodes, the timing shown in FIG. 24 (10a). Then, the exploding first lord's notice icon I1 is changed to a hat notice icon I6, and an effect display in which the lord's character YM succeeds in increasing the notice icons and makes a happy expression is displayed. Even with this example of effect, the player expects that the effect corresponding to the hat notice icon I6 will be executed in the future.

  24 (8b) to FIG. 24 (9b) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 19 (8) to 19 (9). That is, in FIG. 24 (8b), the effect display in which the first button notice icon I4 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed.

  Then, the thrown first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (9b). When the effect button 136 is operated during the period from the display of the first button notice icon I4 in the notice icon display area 285 to the exhaustion of the first button notice icon I4, the first button notice icon It changes to either the notice icon I1, the notice icon I2 of the second lord, or the notice icon I3 of the third lord. As described above, in this example of performance, it is difficult to recognize the reliability of the big hit indicated by the notice icon until the effect button 136 is operated. Therefore, the incentive to operate the effect button 136 in order to know the reliability of the big hit. May work, and the staging effect may be enhanced. Note that the period from the time the first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 until it is consumed may be the effective period of the operation of the effect button 136. Here, when the first button notice icon I4 is displayed over a plurality of symbol variable displays, the operation of the effect button 136 may be disabled during the symbol stop display period, or the symbol may be invalidated. The operation of the effect button 136 may be valid during the stop display period. If the effect button 136 is not operated until the first button notice icon I4 is consumed, the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed when the effect button 136 was operated during the notice effect of the notice icon was extinguished. A corresponding effect display may be performed, or when the button effect is performed when the first button notice icon I4 is consumed and the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period of the effect button 136, The effect display corresponding to the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed may be performed, or when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 ends without the effect button 136 being operated, the notice that was scheduled to be displayed. The effect display corresponding to the icon may be performed. Also, after the first button notice icon I4 is consumed and the button effect is started, the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed only when the effect button 136 was operated within the operation valid period of the effect button 136. The effect display corresponding to may be performed. Further, when the button effect is performed, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 may not be provided. In this case, the effect display corresponding to the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed after the button effect was started may be performed. Further, until the first button notice icon I4 is consumed, even if the effect button 136 is operated, the first button notice icon may not be changed to another notice icon.

  24 (8c) to FIG. 24 (9c) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 19 (8) to 19 (9). That is, in FIG. 24 (8c), as in the case of FIG. 19 (8), the effect display in which the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is displayed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 24 (9c), the state in which the notice icon I6 of the hat does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and the frame is out from the left of the display area is shown. That is, in the present embodiment, it is also possible to execute a sloppy increase effect that fails to increase the number of notice icons. It should be noted that a gall increase effect may be performed using a notice icon other than the hat notice icon I6. For example, a notice icon having a higher jackpot reliability may be less likely to execute the gase increase effect.

  24 (7d) to FIG. 24 (9d) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 19 (7) to 19 (9). That is, in FIG. 24 (7d), similar to FIG. 19 (7), a state in which the lord's character YM having the hat notice icon I6 is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position is shown. After that, in FIG. 24 (8d), not only one notice icon I6 of hats but also notice icons I6 of three hats are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 for effect display. The effect display may be thrown one by one instead of simultaneously.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (9d), the notice icons I6 of the three caps thrown are displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display in the notice icon display area 285. Each is displayed in the area YA3. As described above, in this effect example, it is possible to increase the plurality of notice icons by one increase effect. Therefore, the increase in the number of the notice icons at once improves the sense of expectation for the increase in the number of times the notice is executed, and it may be possible to enhance the effect. Note that, for example, as shown in FIG. 24 (9d), the same notice icon (for example, the notice icon I6 of a hat) is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 in a predetermined number (for example, three) or more, thereby quasi-linking. It may be possible to give an advance notice that the big hit is settled because the effect is guaranteed to be executed three times. The notice icon with high reliability is hard to be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (hard to be stocked), and the notice icon with low reliability is easy to be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (easy to be stocked). Or vice versa.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 24 (9 d ′), some or all of the three trailing notice icons I 6 of the thrown hats have not reached the notice icon display area 285, and from the left of the display area. It is also possible to execute a partly increased increase effect or an entirely increased increase effect that causes a frame out.

  24 (7e) to FIG. 24 (9e) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 19 (7) to 19 (9). That is, in FIG. 24 (7 e), unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 19 (7), the lord's character YM having the notice icon I 6 of one hat, the notice icon I 9 of 1,000 boxes, and the notice icon I 10 of a fan in addition to the notice icon I 6 of one hat. Is displayed to be moved to a predetermined throwing position. At this time, only one or two of the three notice icons may be displayed. Here, only the notice icon with the lowest reliability of the jackpot may be displayed, only the notice icon with the highest reliability of the jackpot may be displayed, or the notice icon randomly selected. You may make it display only. After that, in FIG. 24 (8 e), an effect display in which the hat notice icon I 6, the thousand box notice icon I 9 and the fan notice icon I 10 are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. The effect display may be thrown one by one instead of simultaneously. Further, as described above, the three notice icons do not have to be different from each other, and for example, a plurality of the same notice icons may be included.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (9e), the three notice icons thrown are displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display area YA3 in the notice icon display area 285. Displayed respectively. As described above, also in this example of effect, it is possible to increase the plurality of types of notice icons with one increase effect. Therefore, since the number of notice icons increases at a time, the expectation for the increase in the number of notice executions can be improved, and the expectation for the execution of a plurality of notices can be increased, so that the effect of the presentation can be further enhanced. There are cases.

  Even in this case, as shown in FIG. 24 (9 e ′), some or all of the thrown three notice icons do not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. It is also possible to execute a partial rubbish increase effect or a total rubbish increase effect that causes a frame-out from the left side of the area.

  24 (12f-1) to FIG. 24 (12f-2) show another example of the effect shown in FIG. 19 (12). That is, in FIG. 24 (12f-1), as in the case of FIG. 19 (12), the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed with the notice icon I6 of the hat being displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Is being done. After that, as shown in FIG. 24 (12f-2), the decorative pattern of "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed and the reach effect is started. It As described above, in this embodiment, the reach effect can be executed even when the notice icon is displayed. As a result of this reach effect, a big hit may be made. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the big hit ends.

  FIG. 25 (8g) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 19 (8). That is, in FIG. 25 (8g), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetching notice (display mode by the character of Savohani), the lord's character YM displays the notice icon I6 of the hat in the notice icon display area 285. A performance display that is thrown at is displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the increase effect of the notice icon even during the execution of the prefetch notice using the hold icon. Note that the increase effect of the notice icon and the pre-read notice using the hold icon may not be performed at the same time.

  FIG. 25 (8h) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 19 (8). That is, in FIG. 25 (8h), the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 are not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect hold lamp 286 is set at a predetermined position on the game board 200 (for example, It may be provided in the vicinity of the decorative symbol display device 208), so that the number of holdings is displayed. The effect holding lamp 286 includes, for example, a full-color LED and is drive-controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. For example, in addition to lighting in a default lighting mode (for example, lighting in white), pre-reading warning light is emitted. Drive control can be performed according to the mode (for example, lighting while switching between 7 colors). Note that, in FIG. 25 (8h), for convenience of description, the holding lamp of the second special diagram 1 which is the target of prefetching is hatched, but in reality, the first special diagram 1 is shown. Like the hold lamp of No. 2, the second hold lamp of Toku-zu 1 is also turned on by the default light emission mode.

  FIG. 25 (8i) to FIG. 25 (9i-2) show other effect examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 19 (8) to 19 (9). That is, in FIG. 25 (8i), as in the case of FIG. 19 (8), an effect display in which the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is displayed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 25 (9i-1), it is shown that the hat notice icon I6 does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (9i-2), the notice icon I6 of the hat acts on the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 to display the look-ahead notice. The effect display that changes to (holding change effect) is being performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the hat notice icon I6 may not be displayed as a notice icon in the notice icon display area 285, and may appear as a trigger for starting the prefetch notice by the hold icon. The hold change effect may be performed using a notice icon other than the hat notice icon I6. For example, the notice change icon having a higher reliability of the big hit may be less likely to be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (9i-2 ′), the variable symbol display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 are not displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and are held using the effect holding lamp 286. In the case of displaying the number, after the notice icon I6 of the hat drops below the display area, the light emitting mode of the first holding lamp of the special figure 1 may be changed to the light emitting mode of the prefetching notice.

  FIG. 25 (8j) to FIG. 25 (9j) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 19 (8) to 19 (9). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 19 (8), the lord's character YM appeared and threw the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 25 (8j), it differs from FIG. 19 (8). It is shown that the character BY of DJ having the notice icon appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area, not the character YM of the lord, (DJ effect). In the example shown in FIG. 25 (8j), the DJ character appears with the notice icon I6 of the hat. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 25 (9 j), the DJ character BY jumps toward the upper left corner and displays the hat notice icon I 6 on the notice icon first display area YA 1 in the notice icon display area 285. The effect display that is left on is displayed. Note that the number of the notice icons that the DJ character BY places in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one and may be two or more. In addition, a plurality of types of advance notice icons may be placed in the advance notice icon display area 285 in the effect of increasing the advance notice icon by the DJ character BY once. As described above, a plurality of types of increase effects of the notice icon may be prepared (for example, a first notice icon increase effect by the lord's character YM and a second notice icon increase effect by the DJ character BY). With the configuration, the production may be diversified to enhance the production effect.

  25 (8k) to FIG. 25 (9k) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 19 (8) to 19 (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 19 (8), the lord's character YM appeared and threw the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 25 (8k), the DJ with the notice icon is further added. Character BY appears on the flying carpet from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 25 (8k), the DJ character appears with the notice icon I9 of 1,000 boxes. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (9k), the hat notice icon I6 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the DJ character is While moving toward the upper left corner, the presentation display is performed in which the notice icon I9 of the one-thousand box that is held is placed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. The DJ character is arranged in a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, and is displayed as if it passes through the notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 25 (9k ′), the DJ character is placed in a layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 so that the DJ character passes behind the notice icon. You may display as if you are doing. Further, as shown in FIG. 25 (9k ″), the DJ character BY is displayed in a thousand boxes so as to be superimposed on the hat notice icon I6 thrown by the lord's character YM and displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. You may make it perform the effect display which puts the notice icon I9 in the notice icon 1st display area YA1. That is, the notice icon may be overwritten. As described above, the execution times of the increase effects of the plurality of types of notice icons may overlap with each other, which may enhance the effect of the effects.

  FIG. 25 (12l) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 19 (12). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 25 (12l), the character representations corresponding to the respective notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are displayed together. For example, the caption notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is additionally displayed with the word "Continue", and the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. "Promotion" is additionally displayed, and the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is additionally displayed with "blessing" and the notice icon fourth display. The notice icon I7 of the shuriken displayed in the area YA4 is additionally displayed with the characters "Chan eyes", and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5 is "STETCHEN". The characters are additionally displayed, and the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon sixth display area YA6 indicates “Continue” and “Question”. The character of over-click "is displayed note. This may make it easier to understand the contents of the notice effect that is predicted to be executed thereafter.

  As shown in FIG. 25 (12l ′) and FIG. 25 (12l ″), some or all of the characters additionally displayed on the notice icon are changed to “question mark” to clarify the corresponding notice effect. It may not be displayed in. As a result, it is possible to give a sense of expectation as to whether or not the notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon will be executed, which may improve interest.

  Further, it may be possible to give a notice that the effect display in which the big hit is determined by the combination of the plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 or the number of the notice icons displayed is executed, for example, FIG. As shown in (12l ″ ″), when three notice icons I6 of a hat with the character notation “continuation” added are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the big hit is confirmed four times. It may be possible to give a notice that the effect display including the continuous effect is performed. In addition, when the character additionally displayed on the notice icon does not correspond to the notice icon (for example, when the character "promotion" is additionally displayed on the notice icon I6 of the hat), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed. It may be a premier notice display for announcing that the result of the symbol variation display when "is exhausted" is a big hit confirmation (or that there is a big hit in the hold).

  In the above-described production example, the notice icon is increased by the appearance of the lord's character YM or the DJ character BY, but in the production example shown in FIG. 26, the notice icon is increased by displaying the decorative pattern. It is something to do.

  In FIG. 26 (A1), the decorative symbols of “decoration 6” are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed and the reach effect is started. This reach effect is, for example, normal reach.

  After the reach effect starts, the notice icon pattern imitating the notice icon is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (A2). In the example shown in FIG. 26 (A2), the notice icon pattern of the hat imitating the notice icon I6 of the hat is stopped and displayed. In the lower vicinity of the notice icon pattern of this hat, the word "stock" is added, and when the notice icon pattern is stopped and displayed, it is notified that the notice icon is increased and displayed in the notice icon display area 285. is doing.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (A3), the notice icon pattern of the hat is changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat, and the notice icon display area 285 is moved to the notice icon first display area YA1. As shown in (A4), the decorative pattern of "decoration 5" arranged on the back side of the notice icon pattern is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the display result is out of alignment. In the present embodiment, the effect of increasing the number of notice icons may be performed in this manner.

  In FIG. 26 (B1), similarly to the production example shown in FIG. 26 (A1), the decorative pattern of “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, to form the reach state. , Normal reach production is started.

  After the reach effect is started, at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (B2), the first paltry's notice icon pattern imitating the first lord's notice icon I1 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. In the production example shown in FIG. 26 (B2), the notice icon “Stock” is added to the notice icon design of the first lord, and the notice icon display area is displayed by stopping the notice icon design. In 285, it is informed that the notice icon will be increased.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (B3), the notice icon design of the first lord changes to the notice icon I1 of the first lord and moves to the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (B4), the decorative design of “decoration 5” arranged on the back side of the notice icon design is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result is a display defect. At this time, the notice icon I1 of the first lord has changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat. It goes without saying that the changed notice icon is not limited to the hat notice icon I6 and may be another type of notice icon. Further, the timing of changing the notice icon is not limited to the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed, and for example, the notice icon may be changed during the execution of the symbol variation display from the next time onward, or the notice may be changed. The icon may not be changed until it is exhausted. In the present embodiment, the effect of increasing the number of notice icons may be performed in this manner.

  Next, another example of the above-described notice icon digesting effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 30. Here, FIG. 27 to FIG. 30 are diagrams showing, in stages, another example of the notice icon digesting effect. 27 to 30, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  FIG. 27 (38 m) to FIG. 27 (40 m-3) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 21 (38) to 21 (40). 27 (38m) to (39m), the same effect as that of FIG. 21 (38) to (39) is performed, but in FIG. 27 (40m-1), the middle symbol display area 208b is operated at a low speed. Although the pseudo-relational pattern appears in a variably displayed manner, after that, as shown in FIG. 27 (40m-2), immediately before the pseudo-relational pattern comes to the stop display position of the decorative pattern, the variable display becomes high speed and the pseudo-relational pattern. Is scrolled out to the lower part of the display area, and as shown in FIG. 27 (40m-3), a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed, and fluctuations are displayed. , It is informed that it is the result of the stop display. As described above, in this embodiment, even if the hat notice icon I6 is exhausted, the pseudo-relation effect may not be performed.

  27 (23n) to (24n) show another example of the effects shown in (23) to (24) of FIG. That is, as shown in FIG. 27 (23n), the display that the notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed starts, but as shown in FIG. 27 (24n), the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is enlarged and displayed. There may be a case where a display that is erased as it is is displayed, and that the digested effect is not performed.

  FIG. 27 (23o) to FIG. 27 (24o-2) show other effect examples of the effects shown in FIG. 20 (23) to FIG. 20 (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 27 (23o), the display that the hat notice icon I6 is consumed starts and the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 27 (24o-1). The notice icon I6 of is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 27 (24o-2), the combination of decorative patterns that are not included in the pseudo continuous effect does not start (in FIG. 27 (24o-2), “decoration 1-decoration 2 -A combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 2") is displayed temporarily to display the fluctuation of fluctuation, and then the stop display is performed to notify that the result is a deviation. As described above, in this embodiment, even if the hat notice icon I6 is exhausted, the pseudo-relation effect may not be performed.

  FIG. 27 (22p) to FIG. 27 (23p) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 20 (22) to 20 (23). That is, as shown in FIG. 27 (22p), for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed after the variable display of the decorative pattern started, in FIG. 27 (23p), the leftmost side of the notice icon display area 285 (the notice icon Instead of the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the first display area YA1), another notice icon may be displayed. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 27 (23p), the effect that the notice icon I9 of 1,000 boxes displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is consumed is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the notice icons may not be sequentially consumed from the left. Further, in the present embodiment, the notice icons are consumed in the order in which they are displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (in other words, the stocked order), but the notice icons that are stocked later are digested first. There may be cases. For example, when the notice icon that has been stocked later is first consumed, it may be likely to be a big hit, or conversely, it may be difficult to be a big hit. In addition, regardless of the stock order, the order of digesting the notice icons may be determined. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may not be affected, or the reliability of the jackpot may change depending on the order of notice of the notice icons. You may do so. In addition, it may be possible to give a notice that the jackpot is settled by digesting the plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 in a specific order. For example, the notice icon I6 for a hat and a shuriken A rule may be set such that when the notice icon I7, the hat notice icon I6, the shuriken notice icon I7, the hat notice icon I6, and the shuriken notice icon I7 are digested in this order, the jackpot is confirmed. As a result, the player may be given an incentive to find out the rule of the digestion order of the notice icon that is a big hit, which may improve the motivation for the game.

  FIG. 27 (24q-1) to FIG. 27 (24q-2) show another example of the effect shown in FIG. 20 (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 27 (24q-1), the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested to the notice icon first display area YA1. After the vacancy has occurred, as shown in FIG. 27 (24q-2), the display positions of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 to the notice icon fourth display area YA4 are moved to the left side, respectively. You can At this time, for example, a moving animation for moving the display position of the notice icon to the left may be performed, or the display position may be changed without performing the animation. The timing of changing the display position of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be the same as when the digestion effect of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is started. However, it may be after the digestion effect of the notice icon is started or after the digestion effect of the notice icon is finished.

  FIG. 28 (Aa) to FIG. 28 (Ae) show effect examples in the case where the notice effect of the notice icon is increased and then the notice effect of the notice icon is increased. That is, as shown in FIG. 28 (Aa), after the shuriken's notice icon I7 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 of the notice icon display area 285 is exhausted, the stop symbol notice is executed, At the timing indicated by 28 (Ab), the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2", and it is informed that the display result is out of alignment. After that, as shown in FIG. 28 (Ac), after the hold is exhausted and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, as shown in FIG. 28 (Ad), an increase effect of the notice icon by the lord's character YM is performed. When the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, as shown in FIG. 28 (Ae), the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is exhausted to leave a blank notice icon third. The notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes thrown in the display area YA3 is displayed. As described above, the increasing number of the notice icons may be displayed in the notice icon display area that is blank due to the notice icon being consumed.

  FIG. 28B shows an example of an effect in which the number of notice icons is increased after a plurality of blanks appearing in the notice icon display area due to the consumption of a plurality of notice icons. That is, as shown in FIG. 28B, in the notice icon display area 285, after the notice icons displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 are consumed, the lord's character YM is displayed. When the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 which are blank are displayed. Of these, they are displayed in order from the left. In this way, the display of increasing the number of notice icons may be performed. When there are a plurality of blanks in the notice icon display area 285, the order of the display areas in which the increasing notice icons are displayed is not limited to the order described above, and may be another order. It may be preset in 400. Also, in this example of performance, the reliability of the big hit and the number of the notice icons are not changed depending on the place where the notice icon is displayed. It may be suggested that the reliability or the number of the notice icons displayed is different. For example, in the case where the increasing number of the notice icons are displayed in the notice icon sixth display area YA6 on the rightmost side of the blank display areas in the notice icon display area 285, at least six notice icons are displayed as the notice icons. It may be suggested to be displayed in the display area 285, or may be suggested to have the highest reliability of the big hit.

  FIG. 28C shows an example of an effect when the notice effect of the notice icon and the increase effect of the notice icon are executed during one execution of the symbol variation display. That is, as shown in FIG. 28 (C), while the effect of digesting the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is being performed, It is displayed that the notice icon I6 for the hat, the notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, and the notice icon I10 for a fan are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 when the notice YI icon is increased by the character YM. Here, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is a notice icon increased in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display is executed. As described above, the notice effect of the notice icon and the increase effect of the notice icon may be executed during one execution of the symbol variable display. At this time, the period in which the notice effect of the notice icon is performed may overlap with the period in which the notice effect of the notice icon is increased. Further, the increase effect of the notice icon may be started after the notice effect of the notice icon is started, the digest effect of the notice icon may be started after the increase effect of the notice icon is started, or the notice icon may be started. The digesting effect of and the increasing effect of the notice icon may be started at the same time. Here, the area in which the increasing notice icon is displayed may be an area that is blank at the time of starting the symbol variation display, or after the symbol variation display is started, the notice effect of the notice icon is increased. The area may be blank before the start.

  FIG. 28 (59r) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 23 (59). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 28 (59r), before the digestion effect of the notice icon is started, the effect of inspiring whether or not the notice icon is consumed is performed. Specifically, for example, of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285, whether or not the notice icon, which is the target of the digest, starts shaking and fluctuates to determine whether or not the notice icon is digested. I am trying to fuel it. After that, as shown in FIG. 23 (60), the fan advance notice icon I10 may be exhausted, or the fan advance notice icon I10 may not be exhausted. When not digested, the notice icon may be erased without being digested, or the notice icon may be maintained and the notice icon may be suspended. In the effect example shown in FIG. 28 (59r), when the fan advance notice icon I10 is erased without being consumed, thereafter, a stop display is performed with a combination of the decorative decorative patterns, and the display result is the defective. You may notify that.

  FIG. 28 (59 s) to FIG. 28 (60 s) show another effect example of the effects shown in FIG. 23 (59) to FIG. 23 (60). That is, in FIG. 28 (59 s), the notice icon display area 285 displays two hat notice icons I6, a thousand-box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10. Of these notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 after the fluctuation starts with the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1", the notice icon of the fan is displayed. When I10 is digested, it gives a notice of a big hit, and as shown in FIG. 28 (60s), when another notice icon (for example, hat notice icon I6) is digested, it is left as it is. The combination of the decorative symbols may be used to notify that the display is stopped and the display is lost.

  FIG. 28 (23t) to FIG. 28 (32t) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 20 (23) to 21 (32). That is, as shown in FIG. 28 (23t), in this example of presentation, an in-digestion notice icon display area YA0 for displaying the noticed icon that has been consumed is added to the notice icon display area 285. As shown in FIG. 28 (23t) to FIG. 28 (25t), when the digestion effect of the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is started, the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is started. Is displayed in the digesting notice icon display area YA0. As shown in FIG. 28 (28t) to FIG. 28 (32t), the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the digesting notice icon display area YA0 is continuously displayed even after being digested, and the corresponding effect (pseudo continuous effect) is displayed. ) Is displayed continuously until the end. Note that the timing of displaying the notice icon in the notice-during-advance icon display area YA0 may be after the notice effect of the notice icon is started or before the notice effect of the notice icon is started. It may be the same as the start of the digestion effect of the notice icon. Further, the timing at which the notice icon displayed in the notice-during-advance icon display area YA0 is erased may be after the notice effect of the notice icon is finished or before the notice effect of the notice icon is finished. Good, it may be at the same time as the end of the digestion effect of the notice icon, after the production corresponding to the digested notice icon has started, or after the production corresponding to the digested notice icon has ended. May be the same as the start of the production corresponding to the digested notice icon, may be before the production corresponding to the digested notice icon starts, or to the digested notice icon. It may be at the same time as the end of the corresponding effect, or may be deleted at the end of the symbol fluctuation in which the notice icon is erased (for example, the symbol stop timing of the special symbol), or during the digestion. The timing at which the notification icon display area YA0 is erased (for example, the notice icon display area 285 and the in-digestion notice icon display area YA0 are erased in FIG. 22 (44), or only the in-digestion notice icon display area YA0 is erased. Etc.) may be deleted. In addition, when a plurality of notice icons are exhausted during one-time symbol variation display, the notice icon a in the digesting notice icon display area YA0 corresponding to the notice icon A that has been digested first is the notice icon A digested. The effect may be erased after or at the same time as the end of the effect, and no notice icon may be displayed in the in-digestion notice icon display area YA0, or the digestion effect of the notice icon B to be digested next is started. May be deleted at the same time as or after being started, or may be deleted at the same time as or after the notice icon b displayed in the digesting notice icon display area corresponding to the notice icon B to be digested next is displayed. The notice icon a may be left as the history even during the production of the notice icon B, or the notice icon A and the notice icon may be left. At the end of symbol variation that Con B is digested (e.g., symbol stop timing of special symbol) may be deleted at. In addition, when the notice icon display area 285 is deleted when a specific effect display (for example, during a super reach effect, a big hit effect, an island simultaneous effect, etc.) is performed, only the notice icon display area 285 is deleted, and the notice is being consumed. The icon display area YA0 may be displayed as it is, or conversely, only the digesting notice icon display area YA0 may be deleted and the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed as it is. Both the area 285 and the in-digestion notice icon display area YA0 may be deleted.

  FIG. 29 (Aa) to FIG. 29 (Ae) show effect examples in which a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area are consumed at the same time. That is, in FIG. 29 (Aa), the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon third display area YA3 is displayed. A ribbon notice icon I8 is displayed, and a fan notice icon I10 is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4. Then, of these notice icons, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 are used respectively. The production is started. Here, the start timing of the digestion effect of each notice icon may be the same or different. In this case, the order of digesting the notice icons may be the order corresponding to the execution order of the effects.

After that, when the notice icon I6 of the hat and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon move to the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, as shown in FIG. .. Specifically, the character display of "Continue" is additionally displayed near the lower part of the notice icon I6 of the enlarged hat, and the character display of "Stetchen" is added near the lower part of the notice icon I8 of the enlarged ribbon. Is displayed.
Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the stage change effect is started in response to the completion of the notice icon I8 on the ribbon. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29 (Ac), after the shoji closes and Princess Chibi's character CH appears on the front side thereof, as shown in FIG. 29 (Ad), the shoji opens and the moon opens. The display of the background (moon surface) showing how the universe is viewed from the surface starts. In addition, during execution of the stage change effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c, is the lower right corner of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. Move to, and the thumbnail is displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 29 (Ae), the decorative design that has been reduced and displayed is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display area, and then, in response to the notice of the hat notice icon I6, the Bancho character BC. Appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect display that pushes up the stopped right symbol is displayed, and the player is informed that the pseudo continuous effect may be executed thereafter. .

  In this example of effect, the start timings of the effects corresponding to the digested notice icon are made different, but they may be started at the same time.

  FIG. 29 (66u-1) to FIG. 29 (66u-3) show another example of the effect shown in FIG. 23 (66). That is, in FIG. 29 (66u-1), a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that it is a big hit, but the notice icon display area 285 is continuously displayed. It is indicated that there is an undigested notice icon. After that, as shown in FIG. 29 (66u-2), after the jackpot start effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 29 (66u-3), even after the jackpot round game is started, it is still undigested. A notice icon is displayed. In this example of performance, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed below the display area during the big hit game, but it may be displayed above the display area. Further, in this effect example, the undigested notice icon may be used, for example, in a promotion effect during a big hit (for example, an effect for notifying that the probability variation big hit is confirmed). In the example shown in -3), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is exhausted during execution of the jackpot game, it is notified that the probability variation jackpot is confirmed, and when the notice icon I10 of the fan is consumed. May notify that the 15R jackpot is confirmed. Further, when the other notice icon is consumed, for example, it may have a meaning indicating that it may be promoted. In this way, even with the same notice icon, when it is exhausted during the execution of the big hit game, an effect of giving another meaning may be performed. Further, in this effect example, the notice icon displayed during execution of the big hit game may be different from the notice icon displayed during execution of the symbol variation display. That is, a notice icon specific to a big hit may be prepared. Further, the notice icon displayed during the execution of the jackpot game may be the same as the notice icon displayed during the execution of the variable display, or only some notice icons may be commonly used. .

  FIG. 29 (Ba) to FIG. 29 (Bc) are display examples before and after the stage change. That is, as shown in FIG. 29 (Ba), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and thereafter, the hold is exhausted and symbol variation. When the display is started, the stage change effect is started as shown in FIG. 29 (Bb). When the stage change effect is started, the notice icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden together with the notice icon display area 285. After that, when the stage change effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 29 (Bc), although not shown, the background is changed and the symbol variable display is continuously performed. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed again, but all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be erased when the stage is changed. It should be noted that after the stage change is performed, the notice icon may be erased without fail, or only a part of the plurality of notice icons may be erased, or the notice icon may not be erased. Good.

  FIG. 29 (22v-1) to FIG. 23 (23v) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 20 (22) to 20 (23). That is, as shown in FIG. 29 (22v-1), when the symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 29 (22v-2), a lord's character YM2 with a placard appears and is digested. Notify in advance the type of notice icon that will be displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 29 (23v), the notice effect of the notice icon, in which the notice icon of the type notified in advance (the notice icon I6 of the hat) is consumed, is started. Even when the type of the notice icon to be digested is announced in advance, the notice icon may not be digested, or a notice icon of a different type from the notice icon that was announced in advance is digested. May be done. When a notice icon of a different type from the notice icon notified in advance is consumed, it may be suggested that the reliability of the big hit is high.

  FIG. 29 (22w) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 20 (22). That is, as shown in FIG. 29 (22w), after the variable display of the symbols is started, the notice icon that may be digested is highlighted so that the player pays attention to the notice icon's digestion. Good.

  In the above-described embodiment, for example, when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the bancho character BC appears and the pseudo continuous effect is executed, and other effects are not executed. Although the production corresponding to is executed and the other productions are not executed, for example, even though the notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed, the bancho character BC does not appear, and the princess character appears. The big hit may be settled when an effect that does not correspond to the digested notice icon is executed (a so-called big break is set) (so-called breaking the law).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the notice icon to be digested is predetermined and is configured so that it cannot be selected by the player. However, for example, by operating the effect button 136 or the like, the notice icon to be digested is displayed. You may make it selectable.

  In addition, when the big hit in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it is erased when the big hit game is started, and the notice icon is carried over when shifting to the probability change state or the time saving state. It may be configured not to be performed. In addition, when the big hit in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it is once hidden when the big hit game is started, and is displayed again after the probability variation state or the time saving state is finished. May be configured as follows. Further, it may be configured so as not to be carried over even after the probability variation state or the time saving state is completed.

  Next, a description will be given of an example of an effect that gives advance notice of the content of the reach effect that is to be subsequently transferred depending on the type of the notice icon that is consumed.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (Aa), when "decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a, respectively, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. May be digested. For example, as shown in FIG. 30 (Ab-1), when the hat notice icon I6 has been digested, thereafter, as shown in FIG. 30 (Ac-1), the enlarged character length character BC2 is displayed. Appears, and then shifts to the Bancho reach that corresponds to the appeared character. Further, as shown in FIG. 30 (Ab-2), when the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is consumed, thereafter, as shown in FIG. 30 (Ac-2), the enlarged lord's character YM3 is displayed. Appears, and then shifts to the lord's reach corresponding to the appeared character. Further, as shown in FIG. 30 (Ab-3), when the fan advance notice icon I10 is consumed, thereafter, the enlarged princess character HM is displayed as shown in FIG. 30 (Ac-3). Appears, and then shifts to Princess Reach corresponding to the appeared character. In addition, in this example of performance, it corresponds to the reliability of the big hit that the notice icon means, and the reliability of the big hit of these reach effects is configured in the order of princess reach> lord's reach> bancho reach. There is. In addition, when a character other than the character corresponding to the digested notice icon appears (for example, a lord's character enlarged and displayed after the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested) appears (when a so-called law break occurs). May be configured so that a jackpot is confirmed. Further, a plurality of notice icons may be combined and digested, and a plurality of characters may appear in response to the notice icons so that the combined notice is executed. In addition, a specific effect for digesting a plurality of notice icons (dedicated effect for multiple digestion) may be executed, and it is a big hit if a plurality of notice icons are consumed rather than one notice icon. May be configured to have high reliability.

  Next, a button effect executed after the second button notice icon I11 is consumed will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (Ba), the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and after the pattern variation display is started, At the timing shown in (Bb), the display of consuming the second button notice icon I11 is started. That is, the display is performed in which the second button notice icon I11 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, when the second button notice icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 30 (Bc), the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter and the effect button 136 is displayed. The player is informed that the operation can be accepted, and the player is prompted to operate the effect button 136.

  Next, another effect example of the button effect executed after the second button notice icon I11 is consumed will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (Ca), a second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Further, the above-mentioned button reach effect is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter to notify that the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted. Then, at the timing of FIG. 30 (Cb), the display in which the second button notice icon I11 is consumed is started. That is, the display is performed in which the second button notice icon I11 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, when the second button notice icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it overlaps with the button image 136a already displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and is shown in FIG. 30 (Cc). As described above, the projected button image 136b is changed to the projected button image 136b. That is, it is shown that the button has been promoted to a button reach effect with higher reliability of the big hit.

  Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  31: is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment stepwise, and FIG. 32 is a continuation of the example of an effect shown in FIG. 31 stepwise. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 32, and FIG. 34 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 35 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 34.

  31 (1) to 32 (14), the notice icon I6 of the hat was changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord, which was the notice icon used in the effect of increasing the notice icon. Since it is the same as FIG. 19 (1) to FIG. 20 (14) except for the points, the description thereof is omitted here. 32 (14) and 32 (20), all the notice icons used in the notice effect increase production are changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord. 20 (15) to (19) except for.

  In FIG. 32 (20), the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the result of the deviation is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also erased.

  Then, in FIG. 32 (21), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but no change has occurred in the hold icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 32 (22), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and changes to the variable icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have passed after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, as shown in FIG. 32 (23), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays it in the notice icon first display area YA1. In addition, the display that the first notice icon I1 of the Lord is consumed is started. That is, the display is performed in which the first palace's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that, as shown in FIG. 32 (23), when a plurality of the same notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, for example, four notice icons I 1 of the first lord are displayed, for example, Although it is set in advance to preferentially consume the notice icon displayed on the leftmost side, the order of digesting may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icon. Further, which of the notice icons is to be used may be randomly determined, or the notice icon displayed on the rightmost side may be set to be preferentially consumed. That is, the order in which the notice icons are consumed is not limited to the order described above, and can be set appropriately.

  After that, when the first palace's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the hat notice icon I6 at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (24) and is enlarged and displayed. As shown at 32 (25), a character display of "continuation" for announcing that the pseudo continuous effect is to be performed is additionally displayed below the enlarged notice icon I6 of the hat. It should be noted that this character display may be performed at the same time as the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged, displayed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display. Good.

  Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (26), the character display of "continuation" attached to the hat notice icon I6 disappears and the hat notice icon is displayed. After I6 is reduced and displayed, the display is moved to the original display position, that is, the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. As described above, in the present embodiment, the digested notice icon may be displayed again at the original position. It should be noted that when the digested notice icon is re-displayed in the original position, it may be displayed so that it can be recognized that it has been digested, for example, by displaying a display area where the digested notice icon is displayed. The display may be grayed out, or the character information “done” may be added. Further, the digested notice icon may be deleted after being displayed in the notice icon display area 285.

  32 (27) to 33 (33), the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and the notice icon second display area YA2 to notice icon is displayed. 20 (27) to FIG. 21 (33) except that the notice icons displayed in the fourth display area YA4 are all changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord, so here Is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, display is started at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (34), in which the notice icon I1 of the first palace displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is consumed. That is, a display is performed in which the first palace's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 moves from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After that, when the first palace's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the hat notice icon I6 at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (35) and is enlarged and displayed. As shown at 33 (36), the character display of "continuation" for announcing that the pseudo continuous effect is performed is additionally displayed below the notice icon I6 of the enlarged hat.

  Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (37), the word "Continue" attached to the hat notice icon I6 disappears and the hat notice icon is deleted. After I6 is reduced and displayed, the display is moved to the original display position, that is, the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285.

  33 (38) to (45), the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 respectively, and the notice content is displayed. 21 (38) to FIG. 22 (except that the notice icon displayed in the third icon display area YA3 and the notice icon fourth display area YA4 are both changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord. Since it is the same as that of (45), the description thereof is omitted here.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, display is started at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (46), in which the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is consumed. That is, a display is made in which the first palace's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 moves from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After that, when the notice icon I1 of the first hall moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes and is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (47). Above the notice icon I9 of the displayed 1000-box, a character display of "promotion" is additionally displayed to give notice that the production will shift to a production with higher reliability. It should be noted that this character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is enlarged, displayed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display. Good.

  Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the character display of "promotion" added to the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is deleted, and the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is reduced and displayed, as shown in FIG. 33 (48). The display is moved to the original display position, that is, the notice icon third display area YA3 of the notice icon display area 285.

  Then, the reach transition effect described above is started at the timing of FIG. 34 (49). In the present production example, when the reach transition production is started, as shown in FIG. 34 (49), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the production display such as the occurrence of the power failure and then the highly reliable reach. Production (button reach production) is started. When the button reach effect in this effect example is started, as shown in FIG. 33 (50-1), after the character display "Is it a chance?" Is displayed on the dark background in the decorative pattern display device 208. , (50-2), the character display of "No" is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 34 (51), the character display “Is it too hot?” Is displayed, and then the character display “No” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (52). After that, as shown in FIG. 34 (53), the character display of “one shot” is displayed to notify that the button effect will be performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 34 (54), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter to inform that the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted, and inform the player. The operation of the effect button 136 is promoted.

  Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (55), as shown in FIG. 34 (56), the button image 136a is deleted in the decorative symbol display device 208, It shows that the button reach production has failed.

  34 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1".

  In FIG. 34 (58), everything including the notice icon display area 285 is once hidden. Eventually, in FIG. 34 (59), the fluctuation fluctuation (temporary symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1” is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also restarted.

  Then, for example, when 2 seconds have elapsed from the temporary symbol stop display, the display that the first palace's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is consumed at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (60). Be started. That is, a display is performed in which the first palace's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After that, when the first palace's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, it changes to the fan notice icon I10 at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (61) and is enlarged and displayed. At this time, for example, a character display of "Blessing" may be added below the enlarged notice icon I10 of the fan to inform that the big hit is settled. In addition, when the character display is additionally displayed, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the fan advance notice icon I10 is enlarged and displayed, or may be performed before the enlarged display. , May be performed after the enlarged display.

  Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208, after the fan notice icon I10 is reduced and displayed, as shown in FIG. 35 (62), the original display position, that is, the notice icon fourth display area of the notice icon display area 285. A display for moving to YA4 is displayed. After that, at the timing of FIG. 35 (63), the variable display of the decorative symbols that have been swinging and varying in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is restarted, and the revariation effect is started. . At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is still displayed.

  In the re-changing effect, as shown in FIG. 35 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c so far, is moved to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is reduced and displayed. It

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 35 (65), the fluctuation fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (66), the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" which is confirmed as a big hit is stopped and displayed. At this time, in the 1st special figure display device 212, "special figure A" which is a 15R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed, and in the 4th symbol display device 284a, the 4th symbol (round figure) of special figure 1 Is lit. After that, although not shown, the big hit game is started after the big hit game start effect described above is executed.

  Next, another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. Here, FIG. 36 to FIG. 38 are diagrams showing stepwise other effect examples of the effect of increasing the notice icon. 36 to 38, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  FIG. 36 (8a) to FIG. 36 (9a) show another effect example of the effects shown in FIG. 31 (8) to FIG. 31 (9). That is, in FIG. 36 (8a), the effect display in which the notice icon I3 of the third palace is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed. Note that the same can be done for the second palace's notice icon I2. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (9a), the thrown third palace's notice icon I3 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285.

  FIG. 36 (8b) to FIG. 36 (9b) show another example of the effects shown in FIG. 31 (8) to FIG. 31 (9). That is, in FIG. 36 (8b), as in the case of FIG. 31 (8), the effect display in which the first palace's notice icon I1 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 36 (9b), it is shown that the notice icon I1 of the first lord does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and the frame is out from the left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. That is, in the present embodiment, it is also possible to execute an increase in the effect using the notice icon of the lord.

  FIG. 36 (8c) to FIG. 36 (9c) show another effect example of the effects shown in FIG. 31 (8) to FIG. 31 (9). That is, in FIG. 36 (8c), not only one notice icon I1 of the first palace but also three notice icons I1 of the first lord are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 for effect display. ing. The effect display may be thrown one by one instead of simultaneously.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 36 (9c), the three first palace's notice icons I1 thrown are the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285. Each is displayed in the third display area YA3. As described above, in this effect example, it is possible to increase the plurality of notice icons by one increase effect. Therefore, the increase in the number of the notice icons at once improves the sense of expectation for the increase in the number of times the notice is executed, and it may be possible to enhance the effect. Further, a highly reliable notice icon (for example, the notice icon I3 of the third lord) is hard to be displayed (hard to be stocked) in the notice icon display area 285, and has a low reliability (for example, the first lord's notice). The notice icon I1) may be easily displayed (prone to be stocked) in the notice icon display area 285, or vice versa. In this example of performance, the same notice icon (the notice icon I1 of the first hall) is increased by three, but a plurality of types of notice icons having different degrees of reliability may be increased at the same time. The notice icon I1 of the first palace and the notice icon I3 of the third lord may be simultaneously increased.

  In addition, in this case, as shown in FIG. 36 (9 c ′), some or all of the thrown notice icons I1 of the first hall do not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the decorative pattern It is also possible to execute a partial gall increase effect or an all gase increase effect that causes a frame out from the left of the display area of the display device 208.

  FIG. 36 (8e) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 31 (8). That is, in FIG. 36 (8e), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetching notice (display mode by the character of Savohani), the lord's character YM gives the first notice of the lord's notice icon I1. An effect display that is thrown toward the display area 285 is displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the increase effect of the notice icon even during the execution of the prefetch notice using the hold icon. Note that the increase effect of the notice icon and the pre-read notice using the hold icon may not be performed at the same time.

  FIG. 36 (8f) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 31 (8). That is, in FIG. 36 (8f), the variable symbol display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 are not displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold number is displayed by the effect hold lamp 286. Note that, in FIG. 36 (8f), for convenience of description, the holding lamp of the second special figure 1 which is the target of prefetching is hatched, but in reality, the first special figure 1 is shown. Like the hold lamp of No. 2, the second hold lamp of Toku-zu 1 is also turned on by the default light emission mode.

  FIG. 36 (8g) to FIG. 36 (9g-2) show other effect examples of the effects shown in FIG. 31 (8) to FIG. 31 (9). That is, in FIG. 36 (8g), as in the case of FIG. 31 (8), an effect display in which the first palace's notice icon I1 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is displayed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 36 (9g-1), it is shown that the notice icon I1 of the first lord does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (9g-2), the notice icon I1 of the first lord acts on the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 to read the advance notice. The effect display (holding change effect) that changes to the display mode is being performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the first palace's notice icon I1 may not be displayed as a notice icon in the notice icon display area 285, and may appear as an opportunity to start the prefetch notice with the hold icon. Note that the hold change effect may be performed using a notice icon other than the notice icon I1 of the first person, for example, the notice change icon having a higher reliability of the jackpot may be less likely to be executed. Good.

  FIG. 36 (12h-1) to FIG. 36 (12h-2) show another example of the effect shown in FIG. 31 (12). That is, in FIG. 36 (12h-1), as in the case of FIG. 31 (12), the decorative pattern in the state where the first palace's notice icon I1 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. The fluctuation display of is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 36 (12h-2), the decorative pattern of "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed and the reach effect is started. It As described above, in this embodiment, the reach effect can be executed even when the notice icon is displayed. As a result of this reach effect, a big hit may be made. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the big hit ends.

  FIGS. 37 (8i) to (9i) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to 31 (9). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 31 (8), the lord's character YM appeared and threw the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 37 (8i), it differs from FIG. 31 (8). , Not the lord's character YM, but a DJ character BY having a notice icon appears on the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 on a flying carpet. In the example shown in FIG. 37 (8i), the DJ character BY appears with the first palace's notice icon I1. After that, as shown in FIG. 37 (9i), the DJ character BY jumps toward the upper left corner and changes the notice icon I1 of the first lord's possession to the notice icon first in the notice icon display area 285. The effect display that is placed in the display area YA1 is performed. Note that the number of the notice icons that the DJ character BY places in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one and may be two or more. In addition, a plurality of types of advance notice icons may be placed in the advance notice icon display area 285 in the effect of increasing the advance notice icon by the DJ character BY once. As described above, a plurality of types of increase effects of the notice icon may be prepared (for example, a first notice icon increase effect by the lord's character YM and a second notice icon increase effect by the DJ character BY). With the configuration, the production may be diversified to enhance the production effect.

  FIG. 37 (8j) to FIG. 37 (9j) show other effect examples of the effects shown in FIG. 31 (8) to FIG. 31 (9). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 31 (8), the lord's character YM appeared and threw the notice icon to the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 37 (8j), the DJ with the notice icon is further added. Character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 37 (8j), the DJ character BY appears with the first lord's notice icon I1. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (9j), the first palace's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the DJ's While the character BY is flying toward the upper left corner, the effect display is performed in which the first palace's notice icon I1 he / she has is placed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. The DJ character BY is arranged in a layer on the front side of the advance notice icon displayed in the advance notice icon display area 285, and is displayed as if it passes through the front side of the advance notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 37 (9j ′), by placing the character BY of DJ on a layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the back side of the notice icon is displayed. It may be displayed as passing.

  FIG. 37 (8k) to FIG. 37 (9k) show another example of the effects shown in FIG. 31 (8) to FIG. 31 (9). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 31 (8), the lord's character YM appeared and threw the notice icon to the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 37 (8k), the DJ with the notice icon is further added. Character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 37 (8k), the DJ character BY appears with the third lord's notice icon I3. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (9k), the first palace's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and then the DJ's While the character BY is flying toward the upper left corner, the third lord's notice icon I3 is thrown by the lord's character YM and displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The effect display in which the DJ character BY places the third palace's notice icon I3 in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to be superimposed on the notice icon I1. That is, an effect of promotion may be performed by overwriting the notice icon with a low reliability of the jackpot over the notice icon of a high reliability with the jackpot. As described above, the execution times of the increase effects of the plurality of types of notice icons may overlap with each other, which may enhance the effect of the effects. It should be noted that this promotion effect may be performed during the execution of the same symbol variable display, or may be performed in a plurality of symbol variable displays. Further, the promotion effect may be executed every time the pseudo-relational effect is performed.

  FIG. 37 (12l) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 31 (12). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 37 (12l), the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are displayed in association with the character notation "question mark". For example, the notice icon I1 of the first visitor is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon I2 of the second visitor is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display area is displayed. The notice icon I1 of the first palace is displayed in YA3, the notice icon I2 of the second lord is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4, and the notice icon I2 of the third lord is shown in the notice icon fifth display area YA5. The notice icon I3 is displayed, and the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in the notice icon sixth display area YA6, and the letter notation of “question mark” is added to each notice. According to this effect example, it may be possible to give an expectation to the changed notice icon.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 37 (12 l ′), some of the pre-change notice icons may be given in advance in advance in a character notation of the type of the change notice icon. For example, the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon I2 of the second lord displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon fourth The second palace's notice icon I2 displayed in the display area YA4 is labeled with a question mark, and the changed notice icon cannot be recognized, but the notice icon third display area is displayed. The first palace's notice icon I1 displayed on YA3 is annotated to be changed to a shuriken notice icon I7 by adding the character notation "Chan eyes", and is displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5. The notice icon I3 of the third lord, which is displayed, is annotated with the word notation "Continue" to change to the notice icon I6 of the hat. The notice icon I1 of the first lord who is displayed in the icon 6th display area YA6 is annotated with “Continue” and the character notation of “question mark”, and is changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat. There is. These character notations may be notified at once for all or some of the notice icons, or may be notified gradually over time.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 37 (12l ″), all or some of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are changed to change notice icons, and the changed notice icons are displayed. You may make it add the corresponding character notation only about things.

  38 (8m-1) to FIG. 38 (9m) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to 31 (9). That is, in the example of the production shown in FIG. 31 (8), the lord's character YM appeared and threw the notice icon to the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 38 (8m-1), the notice icon is further provided. It is shown that the DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 38 (8m-1), the DJ character BY appears with the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (8m-2), after the first palace's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, As shown in FIG. 38 (9 m), the character BY of DJ is thrown toward the upper left corner and the notice icon I 9 of a thousand boxes is thrown by the lord's character YM and the notice icon first display area is displayed. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY places the notice icon I9 of 1,000 boxes in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to be superimposed on the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in YA1. According to this effect example, the pre-change notice icon may be overwritten with the post-change notice icon. As described above, the execution times of the increase effects of the plurality of types of notice icons may overlap with each other, which may enhance the effect of the effects. In addition, this overwriting effect may be performed during the execution of the same symbol variable display, or may be performed in a plurality of symbol variable displays. Further, the overwriting effect may be executed each time the pseudo continuous effect is performed.

  FIG. 38 (8n-1) to FIG. 38 (9n) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to 31 (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 31 (8), the lord's character YM appeared and threw the notice icon to the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 38 (8n-1), the notice icon is further provided. It is shown that the DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 38 (8n-1), the DJ character BY appears with the first palace's notice icon I1. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (8n-2), the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and then, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 9n), while the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, the first lord's notice icon I1 is thrown by the lord's character YM and the notice icon first display area is displayed. A performance display is performed in which the DJ character BY places the first palace's notice icon I1 in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to be superimposed on the thousand-box notice icon I9 displayed in YA1. In this way, the notice icon after the change may be overwritten on the notice icon before the change. As described above, the execution times of the increase effects of the plurality of types of notice icons may overlap with each other, which may enhance the effect of the effects. In addition, this overwriting effect may be performed during the execution of the same symbol variable display, or may be performed in a plurality of symbol variable displays. Further, the overwriting effect may be executed each time the pseudo continuous effect is performed. In addition, when the pre-change notice icon after overwriting (for example, the first lord's notice icon I1) is consumed, the post-change notice icon becomes the pre-overwrite icon (for example, 1,000-box notice icon I9). May be another notice icon. At this time, it may be configured such that the jackpot reliability is higher or the jackpot reliability is lower than when the notice icon before overwriting is consumed. Alternatively, the reliability of the big hit may not change.

  Next, an example of an effect in which the notice icon changes will be described with reference to FIG. 39. Here, FIG. 39 is a diagram showing in stages an example of an effect in which the notice icon changes. In FIG. 39, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth figure. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 39 (A), in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is being performed. Then, two holding icons (holding icons h11 and h12 of the special drawing 1) are displayed in the holding icon display area 281 of the special drawing 1, and it is shown that the start of the two symbol variations is held. ing. Note that both of these two hold icons are in the default display mode. Note that the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold that is a target of prefetching and is hatched for convenience of description, but is displayed as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. The aspects are the same. Further, the notice icon I1 of the first palace is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon I3 of the third lord is shown in the notice icon second display area YA2. Is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 39 (A), the lord's character YM2 holding the placard appears during the variable display of the decorative pattern. This placard is given the character notation "I'll be changing" to announce that the display mode of either the notice icon or the hold icon will change.

  After that, when the display mode of the notice icon changes after the predetermined effect is displayed, it is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285 as shown in FIG. 39 (B1). The notice icon I3 of the third lord changes to the notice icon I9 of 1,000 boxes. It should be noted that the display mode of the first notice icon I1 of the person displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 may change, or both notice icons may change. On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold icon changes, as shown in FIG. 39 (B2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold that was displayed in the default display mode is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Changes to. Note that the display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may change, any display mode of the two hold icons h11, h12 may change, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change. May change. In this way, in the present production example, as a result of a certain production, the notice icon may be changed without changing the hold icon, and as a result of the certain production, the notice icon may be held without being changed. It can be said that the icon may change. It should be noted that there may be a case where the display forms of both the hold icon and the notice icon change due to this effect.

  Further, as shown in 39 (C), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variable of the decorative symbol, but the variable symbol is reduced and displayed at the lower right. Then, two holding icons (holding icons h11 and h12 of the special drawing 1) are displayed in the holding icon display area 281 of the special drawing 1, and it is shown that the start of the two symbol variations is held. ing. Note that both of these two hold icons are in the default display mode. Note that the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold that is a target of prefetching and is hatched for convenience of description, but is displayed as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. The aspects are the same. Further, the notice icon I1 of the first palace is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon I3 of the third lord is shown in the notice icon second display area YA2. Is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 39C, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the Chibihime chance effect is performed. The Chibihime chance effect is an effect that may be started when the above-mentioned universal figure variation game is executed. The Chibihime chance production is a production that imitates an Amida lottery, in which the Chibihime character selects one of five start points, moves from the selected start point along the Amida route, and reaches the goal point. It is foretold that the effect corresponding to the icon shown will be executed. For example, when the character of Princess Chibi reaches the goal point indicated by the double circle icon, it is announced that the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 will be opened for a long time. When reaching the goal point indicated by the letter notation, it is highly possible that the result of the symbol variation display being executed is a big hit, and when reaching the goal point indicated by the cross icon Indicates that the variable display result of the general map is off.

  Further, in this example of performance, when the player reaches the goal point where the lord's notice icon is displayed, as shown in FIG. 39 (D1), one of the pre-change notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. At least one of them changes to the changed notice icon. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 39 (D1), the notice icon I3 of the third palace displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is changed to the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes. It should be noted that the display mode of the first notice icon I1 of the person displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 may change, or both notice icons may change.

  In addition, when the character Sabohani reaches the indicated goal point, at least one of the hold icons in the default display mode in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 39 (D2). Changes to the display mode of the prefetch notice. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 39 (D2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold, which is the default display mode, is changed to the prefetch advance notification display mode. Note that the display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may change, any display mode of the two hold icons h11, h12 may change, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change. May change.

  In this way, in the present production example, as a result of a certain production, the notice icon may be changed without changing the hold icon, and as a result of the certain production, the notice icon may be held without being changed. It can be said that the icon may change. It should be noted that there may be a case where the display forms of both the hold icon and the notice icon change due to this effect.

  Next, a display example in the case where the notice icon is displayed and the power is cut off / restored will be described with reference to FIG. 40. Here, FIG. 40 is a diagram showing, step by step, a display example when the power is cut off or restored while the notice icon is being displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (A), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Then, two holding icons (holding icons h11 and h12 of the special drawing 1) are displayed in the holding icon display area 281 of the special drawing 1, and it is shown that the start of the two symbol variations is held. ing. Note that, of these two hold icons, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold is in the display mode of the prefetch notice, and the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is the default display. It is a mode. Further, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, respectively, and the notice icon third display area YA3 includes a thousand box. The notice icon I9 is displayed, and the notice icon I10 of the fan is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4.

  In FIG. 40 (B), a power failure occurs for some reason, and FIG. 40 (C) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the power is restored instantaneously. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (C), a character display of "restore, please wait for a while" which is a return display is displayed. At this time, the first special figure display device 212 restarts the variable display, and the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220 and the general figure reservation. The lamp 216 has returned to the state before the power failure. Then, as shown in FIG. 40 (D), the variable display of the symbols is finished, and the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed "Special figure I" which is the display result of the deviation. In the decorative symbol display device 208, when the variable display of the symbols is finished, the display is stopped and displayed as "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 7" which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the deviation. Then, when the power is cut off or restored, all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are erased. In addition, when the power is cut off or restored, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold, which was the display mode of the prefetch notice, also becomes the default display mode. In the present embodiment, when the power is cut off or restored, the prefetch result information stored in the special diagram 1 prefetch result storage unit or the special diagram 2 preread result storage unit in the RAM 308 is “undetermined” information. You may comprise so that it may become. Here, if there is at least one hold in which the “undetermined” information is included in the subcommand including the prefetch result information transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit, the “undetermined” information is included. The pre-reading notice including the notice effect and the increase effect of the notice icon may not be performed until all the reserved reservations have been consumed. In addition, the pre-reading notice will not be given for the newly increased hold (holding that the pre-reading result was saved) after the power interruption / recovery, but the pre-reading notice will be given after all the holdings including "undetermined" information have been exhausted. Alternatively, the pre-reading notice may be given before the suspension including the “undetermined” information is exhausted for the suspension that is newly increased after the power interruption / recovery.

  Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of the effect centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and stepwise other effect examples of the increase effect and the digestion effect of the notice icon. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing in sequence the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 41. 41 to 42, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 41, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is the hold of the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching, but the display mode is For example, like the first hold icon h11, it has a default display mode.

  FIG. 41 (1) is a display corresponding to FIG. 19 (5) described above. However, in the decorative symbol display device 208, in the center of the display screen, a large decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) is displayed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, A second decorative symbol display area is formed above the hold icon display area 281, and the third decorative symbol is displayed in a small size, which is different from FIG. 19 (5). The second decorative symbol displayed in the second decorative symbol display area is configured such that, after the variation starts, the decorative symbols in any of the symbol rows continue to vary until the fixed stop.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 41 (2), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord's effect is started. Here, unlike the case of FIG. 19 (6), the lord's character YM possesses the notice icon I21 of "house" in which the letters "house" are circled.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 41 (3), the lord's character YM is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position, and then at the timing shown in FIG. An effect display that is thrown toward the area 285 is performed.

  Then, the notice icon I21 of the thrown "house" is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (5), and then as shown in FIG. 41 (6). In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect display in which the lord's character YM succeeds in displaying the notice icon and has a happy expression is performed. Thus, it can be said that the notice icon I21 of “house” is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, which at least suggests that a family crest effect described later may be executed in the future.

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 41 (7) to 41 (8), a display in which the lord's character YM is framed out toward the lower side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (9), the decorative pattern display device 208 stops and displays the combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is determined. The second decorative pattern is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

  After that, the variable display of the symbols on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 41 (10), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved by moving animations. The hold icon displayed and at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the special icon 1 Becomes the first hold icon h11. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 41 (11), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord's effect is started. This is also an effect executed when it is determined to display the notice icon based on the result of pre-reading the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, the lord's character YM possesses a "crest" notice icon I22 in which the character "crest" is circled.

  Then, after the lord's character YM is moved and displayed to the predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (12), the notice icon I22 of the “crest” possessed is foretold at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (13). An effect display that is thrown toward the icon display area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (14), the thrown "montle" notice icon I22 is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. After that, after the same effect display as in FIG. 41 (6) is performed, the same effect display as in FIG. 41 (7) to FIG. 41 (8) is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (16), the decorative pattern display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and notifies the display result of the deviation. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, the variable display of the symbols on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 41 (17), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 41 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of "decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. ..

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (19) following FIG. 41 (18), the “house” notice icon I21 and notice icon displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 are displayed. The display in which the notice icon I22 of the “crest” displayed in the second display area YA2 is simultaneously consumed is started. That is, the notice icon I21 of "house" displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I22 of "crest" displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 are the notice icon first display area YA1 and A display for moving from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. The notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the notice icon I21 of “house” and the notice icon I22 of “crest” have been consumed. The timing for deleting the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted when the effect corresponding to the end of the notice icon is started, or the effect corresponding to the end of the notice icon is started. The display may be continued after that. In addition, the movement of the notice icon I21 of “house” and the notice icon I22 of “crest” may start at the same time, or the notice icon I21 of the “house” starts to move is a notice icon I22 of “crest”. May be earlier than the start of the movement, or the movement of the notice icon I22 of the “crest” may be earlier than the movement of the notice icon I21 of the “house”.

  After that, when the "house" notice icon I21 and the "crest" notice icon I22 move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, they are enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 21) At the timing shown in 21), the family crest accessory 224B, which is one of the effect movable bodies 224, descends from above the decorative pattern display device 208, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an effect image to that effect. A fall production is performed. At this time, the first decorative symbol is displayed small in the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (22), the super reach (swordsman reach) is developed. It should be noted that the effect contents of the swordsman reach are as described above with reference to FIGS.

  In the present embodiment, when the two specific notice icons (for example, the notice icon I21 for "house" and the notice icon I22 for "crest") are consumed, the corresponding notice effect (decline for crest fall effect) is performed. Is configured. Even if these notice icons are consumed, the family crest fall effect may not be performed, or another effect may be performed. In addition, when the family crest drop effect is performed, it may be guaranteed that a big hit will occur in the symbol variation display, or there may be a result of a loss. In addition, the case where the crest fall effect is performed may be configured to be easier to hit than the case where the crest fall effect is not performed. In addition, the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be configured so that the family crest drop effect is performed more frequently than the symbol variation display that is a big hit. In addition, it is easier to consume the two specific notice icons (for example, the notice icon I21 for the "house" and the notice icon I22 for the crest) in the symbol variation display that is a big hit than in the symbol variation display that is a loss. May be configured.

  43 and 44 are diagrams showing, in stages, another effect example of the notice icon digesting effect. 43 to 44, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In FIG. 43 (a1), unlike FIG. 41 (5), the notice icon I22 of “Crest” appears before the notice icon I21 of “house” and is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. As shown in FIG. 43 (a2), the notice icon I21 of “house” appears and is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 43 (a3), the notice icon I22 of the "crest" displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 are displayed. The display that the notice icon I21 of the "house" that has been used is simultaneously consumed is started. That is, the notice icon I22 of "crest" displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I21 of "house" displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 are the notice icon first display area YA1 and A display for moving from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the reach state by "decoration 1" is formed and the reach effect is started.

  After that, when the "crest" notice icon I22 and the "house" notice icon I21 move to the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 in this arrangement order, they are enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 43 (a4-1). It At this time, it is displayed in the correct order (that is, the order in which the “house” and the “crest” are arranged) instead of the order in which the “crest” and the “house” are arranged. Further, as shown in FIG. 43 (a4-2), the notice icon I22 of “monk” and the notice icon I21 of “house” may be enlarged and displayed in the order of arrangement of “monk” and “house”. In this effect example, the family crest fall effect described above is performed after that, regardless of the case shown in FIG. 43 (a4-1) or the case shown in FIG. 43 (a4-2). For example, when the notice icons are enlarged and displayed in the arrangement order of the "house" and the "crest" (that is, the correct arrangement order), the crest fall effect is performed, and the arrangement order of the "crest" and the "house" (that is, When the notice icons are enlarged and displayed in an incorrect order), the crest drop effect may not be performed. In addition, when the notice icon is enlarged and displayed in the order of "Crest" and "House", the family crest fall effect is more likely to be started than when the notice icon is enlarged and displayed in the order of "House" and "Crest". May be configured as.

  FIG. 43 (b1) to FIG. 43 (b6) show another effect form of the crest drop effect.

  First, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (b1), only the notice icon I21 of “house” is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the “crest” is displayed. The notice icon I22 is being consumed without waiting for it to be displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (b2), when only the notice icon I21 of “house” is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, as shown in FIG. The object 224B slightly descends from above the decorative pattern display device 208, and vertically while overlapping part of the front side of the notice icon display area 285 arranged at the upper part of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. It is operating (stirring) as if it is vibrating in the direction. At this time, in the upper right part of the center of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the character display of "preparing for family crest" indicating that there is a possibility that the crest fall effect will be performed. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (b2), the notice icon I21 of “house” is enlarged and displayed, while the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208. However, the director's production has started. At this time, the lord's character YM possesses the notice icon I22 of "crest". Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (b 4), when the lord's character YM moves to a predetermined throwing position and the notice icon I 22 of “crest” is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. The notice icon is displayed in the second display area YA2.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 43 (b5), the decorative pattern display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. The second decorative pattern is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, the notice icon I22 of the "crest" is still displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. At this time, the family crest monument 224B is temporarily retracted to the initial position to make it easy to recognize that the symbol is definitely stopped. However, it is not retracted to the initial position and the flapping motion is continued. Good. On the other hand, the character display of "preparing for family crest" is continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, the variable display of the symbols on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 43 (b6), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At this time, the family crest monument 224B that has been retracted descends again, and the tilting operation is restarted. In this example of performance, after that, for example, when the notice icon I22 of the “crest” displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested, the family crest cast 224B descends, and FIG. The family crest fall effect shown in (21) is performed. It is possible that the notice icon I22 of “Crest” is not digested and the family crest fall effect is not performed. Further, in FIG. 43 (b2), the notice icon I21 of "house" may be displayed in an enlarged state until the notice icon I22 of "crest" displayed later is consumed. At that time, the notice icon I22 of the “crest” may be stocked, but may be digested without being stocked.

  FIG. 43 (c1) to FIG. 43 (c2-3) show another example of the notice icon digesting effect. In this example of performance, a background notice in which the background is changed is shown by digesting the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (c1), in the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative pattern display device 208, the notice icon I31 of "donor" in which the letters "donor" are circled is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The notice icon I32 of "Princess", which circles the characters of "Princess", is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon I33 of "Grandpa," which circles the characters of "Grandpa" is a notice. It is displayed in the icon third display area YA3.

  In FIG. 43 (c2-1), the state of the background display is shown after the three notice icons of the notice icon I31 of "donor", the notice icon I32 of "princess" and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" have been consumed. ing. As shown in FIG. 43 (c2-1), when these three notice icons are consumed, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an image of the grandfather's face up from the left side of the display screen and the lord's face. A background display in which the updated image and the image of the princess's face are divided into three equal parts is displayed. In the present embodiment, when all of the three notice icons of the notice icon I31 of "donor", the notice icon I32 of "princess" and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" are exhausted, the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display is high. Is configured to be displayed as a background display that indicates that is the highest. Further, the three notice icons may be simultaneously digested, or may be digested one by one. Here, when the three notice icons are consumed one by one, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the order of the notice icons that are consumed. For example, the notice icon I31 of “Den”> “Hime” It is possible that the highest degree of reliability is achieved when the notice icon I32 of ">" and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" are digested in this order, but the relationship between the digestion order and the reliability for the jackpot can be set appropriately. .

  In addition, in FIG. 43 (c2-2), among the three notice icons, that is, the notice icon I31 of "donor", the notice icon I32 of "princess" and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa", the notice icon I32 of "princess" and The state of the background display after only the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" has been consumed is shown. As shown in FIG. 43 (c2-2), when these two notice icons are digested, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an image of the princess's face up from the left side of the display screen and the grandfather's face. A background display in which the uploaded image is bisected is displayed. In the present embodiment, when two notice icons out of the three notice icons of the notice icon I31 of "donor", the notice icon I32 of "princess" and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" are consumed, the symbol variable display is performed. The background display indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is relatively high but the reliability is lower than when the three notice icons are consumed is displayed. In addition, in the present embodiment, an example in which the notice icon I32 of “Princess” and the notice icon I33 of “Grandpa” have been digested among the three notice icons has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, “Denshi” The notice icon I31 of “No” and the notice icon I32 of “Princess” may be consumed, or the notice icon I31 of “Tono” and the notice icon I33 of “Grandpa” may be consumed. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be changed depending on the combination of the notice icons to be digested. For example, when the notice icon I31 of "donor" and the notice icon I32 of "princess" are consumed, "donor" The notice icon I31 of "Grandpa" and the notice icon I33 of "Grandpa", the notice icon I32 of "Princess" and the notice icon I33 of "Grandpa" have higher jackpot reliability than when they are consumed, and the notice icon I31 of "Den" When the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" is consumed, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher than when the notice icon I32 of "princess" and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" are consumed. These can be set appropriately.

  In addition, in FIG. 43 (c2-3), among the three notice icons, that is, the notice icon I31 of "donor", the notice icon I32 of "princess", and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa", only the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" is shown. The state of the background display after the is digested is shown. As shown in FIG. 43 (c2-3), when this one advance notice icon is consumed, the background display in which the image with the face of the grandfather is displayed on the entire display screen is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, when one of the three notice icons, that is, the notice icon I31 of "donor", the notice icon I32 of "princess", and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" is consumed, the symbol variable display is performed. Is configured to display a background display indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is lower than that when the two notice icons are exhausted. Further, in the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the "grandpa" notice icon I33 of the three notice icons is consumed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, the "donor" notice icon I31 is consumed. The notice icon I32 of "Princess" may be digested. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be changed depending on the notice icon to be digested. For example, when the notice icon I31 of "donor" is digested, the notice icon I32 of "princess" or the notice of "grandpa" is announced. The reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the icon I33 is consumed, and the reliability of the jackpot is higher when the notice icon I32 of "Princess" is consumed than when the notice icon I33 of the "grandpa" is consumed. However, these can be set appropriately.

  Further, in this effect example, an example in which all three notice icons are displayed has been described, but only one or two may be displayed. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the type of the notice icon displayed. For example, when the notice icon I31 of "Denjo" is displayed, the notice icon I32 of "hime" or "grandpa" is displayed. The reliability of the big hit is higher than when the notice icon I33 of "is displayed", and when the notice icon I32 of "Princess" is displayed, the reliability of the jackpot is larger than when the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" is displayed May be set higher, or, for example, when the notice icon I31 of "donor" and the notice icon I32 of "princess" are displayed, the notice icon I31 of "donor" and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" are displayed. Also, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the notice icon I32 of "Princess" and the notice icon I33 of "Grandpa" are displayed. When the notification icon I33 is displayed, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the "princess" notification icon I32 and the "grandpa" notification icon I33 are displayed, but these are set appropriately. can do.

  In addition, in this production example, the background display corresponding to the type of the noticed icon that has been consumed is configured to be displayed, but a background display different from the background display corresponding to the type of the noticed icon that has been consumed is displayed. In some cases, the background display may not change, and in this case, a so-called breaking of the law may be used to notify that the big hit is confirmed.

  Further, when displaying the three notice icons, the three notice icons may be displayed in one symbol variation display, or one notice icon may be displayed each time the symbol variation display is performed. You can In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be different depending on the display order.

  Further, in this example of performance, when the notice icon I31 of "donor" has been digested, the character of the lord appears and lord reach is started, and when the notice icon I32 of "princess" is consumed, When the princess character appears and the princess reach is started, and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" is consumed, the grandpa character may appear and the grand reach is started. In addition, when the "grandpa" notice icon I33 and the "princess" notice icon I32 are exhausted, the grandfather character and the princess character appear and the grandfather & princess reach are started, and the "donor" notice icon. When I31 and the notice icon I32 of "Princess" are digested, the character of the lord and the princess character appear and the lord & princess reach is started, and the notice icon I31 of the lord and the notice icon of the grandfather When I33 is digested, the character of the lord and the character of the grandfather may appear and the lord & grandfather reach may be started. In addition, when the notice icon I31 of "lord", the notice icon I32 of "princess" and the notice icon I33 of "grandfather" are exhausted, the character of the lord, the character of the princess, and the character of the grandfather will appear. Hime & Grand Reach may be started. In this way, the reach effect display corresponding to the character indicated by the digested notice icon may be performed.

  Further, what these notice icons are displayed after being digested is not limited to the notice of the reach effect and the background display described above, and for example, the effect mode in the big hit game or the mode during pattern change may be changed. Alternatively, other notices (for example, various notices such as a character increasing the notice icon) may be given. In addition, the production performed by digesting the notice icon is not limited to the effect display, and a sound output (for example, a music piece) corresponding to the digested notice icon may be performed. You may make it produce by the corresponding light emission pattern.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, regarding an example in which effects may be performed for each of when the “house” notice icon I21 is consumed and when the “crest” notice icon I22 is consumed explain.

  First, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (d1), the notice icon I21 of “house” is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon of “crest” is displayed. I22 is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol forms the reach state by “decoration 1”, and the reach effect is started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (d2), in the decorative pattern display device 208, only the "house" notice icon I21 of the "house" notice icon I21 and the "crest" notice icon I22 is digested. Is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (d3), the notice icon I21 of "house" is enlarged and displayed as a middle symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, it is shown that the notice icon I21 of “house” is digested to change to the chance symbol which is the special symbol.

  After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 44 (d4-1), the effect image is displayed in association with the display of the chance pattern, or as shown in FIG. 44 (d4-2), the family crest together with the effect image is displayed. There is a case where a crest fall effect for dropping the accessory 224B is performed. After such an effect is performed, for example, the swordsman reach described above may be moved to. In addition, you may make it move to the swordsman reach after performing the effect of dropping the family crest actor 224B without displaying the effect image. Alternatively, the effect image may be changed to the swordsman reach without dropping the family crest actor 224B. You may make it shift. Further, as shown in FIG. 44 (d4-3), the normal reach effect may be started without performing any effect due to the digestion of the notice icon I21 of “house”.

  Further, when the chance symbol is stopped and displayed, another super reach (family crest challenge reach) may be performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 44 (d3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after being stopped and displayed in the combination of “decoration 1-chance symbol-decoration 1”, at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (d4-4). On the decorative pattern display device 208, the character display of “family crest challenge” indicating that the family crest challenge reach has been made is displayed. The first decorative pattern is shaken and changed while maintaining the combination of "decoration 1-chance pattern-decoration 1" at the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 44 (d5-4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the lord's character YM pulls the notice icon I22 of the "crest" with a rope, and the notice of the "crest" is shown. It is suggested that attracting the icon I22 increases the expectation for a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (d6-4), when the lord's character YM succeeds in attracting the notice icon I22 of the "crest", as shown in FIG. 44 (d7-4), the family crest actor 224B falls. At the same time, a family crest fall effect in which a predetermined effect image is displayed is performed. That is, it can be said that the notice icon I22 of the “crest” has been successfully digested. In addition, after the family crest fall effect is performed, for example, the process moves to the above-mentioned swordsman reach.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 44 (d6-4a), the rope pulled by the lord's character YM may break and fail to pull the notice icon I22 of the "monkey". In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 44 (d7-4a), after only a predetermined effect image is displayed, the above-mentioned swordsman reach may be shifted to. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be lower than that in the case where the notice icon I22 of the "crest" is successfully drawn. In addition, as shown in FIG. 44 (d6-4b), when the rope pulled by the lord's character YM is broken and the pulling of the notice icon I22 of the “crest” fails, the result is shown in FIG. 44 (d7-4b). As shown, the result of loss may be displayed as it is. The same may be applied to the case where the notice icon I22 of the “crest” is first consumed. In addition, it may be configured such that the family crest fall effect is more likely to occur when the "monger" notice icon I22 is consumed than when the "house" notice icon I21 is consumed. The reverse is also possible.

  In addition to the "house" notice icon I21, the "crest" notice icon I22, the "donor" notice icon I31, the "princess" notice icon I32, and the "grandfather" notice icon I33 described above, There may be a gaze notice icon that resembles an icon, such as a "U" notice icon, a "shark" notice icon, an "old" notice icon, a "subject" notice icon, or an "aunt" A notice icon or the like of “” may be prepared. For example, even if the "house" notice icon and the "shark" notice icon are consumed, the crest fall effect may not be performed, or the "house" notice icon and the "crest" notice icon may be consumed. The crest dropping effect may be performed at a lower frequency when the notice icon of “house” and the notice icon of “shark” are consumed than when it is performed. In addition, the notice icon of Gase such as “shark” may be changed to the notice icon such as “crest”.

  Further, in the above-mentioned example of the effect, one word is formed by two characters of "house" and "mon", and the predetermined effect is performed by satisfying the requirement for forming the word. However, for example, a word composed of three characters or more may be used to apply this effect example. For example, a “suspect” notice icon, a “like” notice icon, and a “run” notice may be used. The pseudo-relational effect may be performed when the three icons, namely the icons, are consumed.

  Further, in this example of performance, for example, when it is desired to stock the notice icon I21 of “house” and the notice icon I22 of “crest”, and there is only one available stock in the notice icon display area 285, Alternatively, neither the "house" notice icon I21 nor the "crest" notice icon I22 may be displayed. In addition, only one of the "house" notice icon I21 and the "crest" notice icon I22 may be displayed. In this case, the notice icon of the one that could not be displayed is displayed as the notice icon. If there is a space in the area 285, the increase display may be performed. If there is no space in the notice icon display area 285, the displayed notice icon may not be consumed in the first place. Further, even if the notice icon display area 285 becomes empty, the notice icon may not be stocked and the notice icon may be used as it is.

  Further, in the case where there is no space in the notice icon display area 285 until at least one of the notice icon I21 for the “house” and the notice icon I22 for the “crest” is consumed and at least one of them is not displayed, for example, “house” When the notice icon I21 of “No” is consumed, the effect that the notice icon I22 of “Crest” is also consumed may be performed, or the notice icon I21 of “house” alone may be performed.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a step-by-step example of the effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and shows the increase effect and the digest effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows a modification in stages. In FIG. 45, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In addition, in FIG. 45 (e1), the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is a hold icon that is the target of the prefetch notice, and its display mode is another hold icon (for example, the first hold icon). It is displayed in a larger size than the hold icon h11), which is a display mode of the prefetch notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (e1), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are variably displayed. The first decorative symbol is variably displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a manner in which the decorative symbol is largely displayed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. ing. Further, the second decorative symbol is displayed small in the left end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon is not displayed in any display area. In this effect example, various parts are added to the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the pre-reading notice, and is shown in the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 45 (e1). The second hold icon h12 that is displayed constitutes the first notice part P1. The first notice part P1 is an image simulating the body part of a snowman. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (e1), it is shown that the character EC of the unscrupulous merchant is framed in from the left side of the display screen. It carries the second notice part P2 to be given to the notice part P1. The second notice part P2 is an image simulating the head of a snowman.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (e2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the character EC of the unscrupulous merchant attaches the second notice part P2 to the upper part of the first notice part P1. On the other hand, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the lord's effect is started. Here, the lord's character YM possesses the third notice part P3. The third notice part P3 is an image of a bucket put on the head of a snowman.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 45 (e3), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the character EC of the unscrupulous merchant is framed out, and eyes and mouth are drawn on the second notice part P2. On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (e4) after the lord's character YM is moved to the predetermined throwing position and displayed, at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (e4), the third display part P3 in possession is thrown toward the notification icon display area 285 for effect display. Is done.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (e5), the thrown third notice part P3 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. That is, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the notice icon display area 285 has a function of stocking notice parts forming the hold icon. After that, the lord's character YM is framed out in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 41 (6) to 41 (8).

  FIG. 45 (e6) shows that the display result of the loss is derived, one pending variable display of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and the symbol variable display is started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 45 (e7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a chance roulette display area 287 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. The chance roulette display area 287 notifies, for example, that the hold icon is changed from the default display mode to the read-ahead notice display mode, or the hold icon display mode that is already the read-ahead notice display mode is a more reliable jackpot. For example, the fact that the display mode is changed frequently is notified. In addition, the big hit announcement display is also performed in the symbol variation display being executed. Further, in the present embodiment, it may be notified that the notice icon is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (e7), variable display of symbols is started in the chance roulette display area 287.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45 (e8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the third notice part P3 is being consumed. The third notice part P3 is moving toward the first hold icon, which is the display mode of the snowman. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet from the right side of the display screen and flies from the right side to the left side of the display screen is shown. This DJ character BY possesses the fourth notice part P4. The fourth notice part P4 is an image simulating a muffler wrapped around the neck of a snowman.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45 (e9), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the third notice part P3 is a second model of the head forming the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the snowman. Of the DJ, the character BY of the DJ flies toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the fourth notice part P4 possessed by the DJ character BY is displayed on the notice icon display area 285 of the notice icon No. The effect display to be placed in the 2 display area YA2 is performed. In the chance roulette display area 287, variable display of symbols is still displayed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (e10), the display result in which the character “Get” is displayed together with the fifth notice part P5 in the chance roulette display area 287 is derived. That is, it is informed that the fifth notice part P5 will be displayed. The fifth notice part P5 is an image simulating a pair of twigs that function as both arms of a snowman.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 45 (e11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fifth notice part P5 is a first model imitating the body part of the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the snowman. It is attached to the upper left and right of the notice part P1. Note that, as shown in FIG. 45 (e11 ′), the fifth notice part P5 is not immediately mounted, but the third notice icon P3 is once displayed, and the notice icon first area of the notice icon display area 285 is temporarily displayed. You may make it display once (stock) in the display area YA1. In this case, instead of displaying in the first notice icon display area YA1, it may be displayed in another display area (for example, the third notice icon area YA3 in advance).

  After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, as shown in FIG. 45 (e12), the decorative pattern display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and is removed. The display result of is confirmed. The second decorative pattern is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". In this example of effect, the variable icon h0 is still displayed at this time, but it may be deleted. The fourth notice part P4 remains displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 45 (e13), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special symbol 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45 (e14-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the fourth notice part P4 is being digested. The fourth notice part P4 is moving toward the variable icon h0 which is the display mode of the snowman. After that, as shown in FIG. 45 (e15-1), the fourth notice part P4 is wrapped around the neck of the variation icon h0 that is the display mode of the snowman, and the variation icon h0 (or the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of the snowman). ) Is completed. As a result, it is notified that the reliability of the big hit in the symbol variation display is high. When the display mode of the completed snowman is the hold icon, it is displayed as a pre-reading notice, and moreover, it is notified that the reliability of the big hit in the variation is high.

  In addition, the fourth notice part P4 is not limited to being displayed during the normal symbol variation display, but may be mounted, for example, when the super reach effect is being performed, and for example, FIG. 45 (e14-2). As shown in, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth notice part P4 is digested in the swordsman reach, and is attached to the variation icon h0 of the snowman display mode at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (e15-2). You may do it. Here, since the variable icon h0 shifts to the super reach, the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are framed out downward, and accordingly, the display position is displaced downward.

  In this example of performance, all the displayed notice parts are attached to the hold icon that is the target of the prefetch notice. For example, the displayed notice parts are consumed, but attachment to the hold icon fails. Display may be performed. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be reduced. In addition, when the displayed advance notice part is consumed, it is attached to a hold icon other than the hold icon that is the target of read ahead, functions as another read ahead notice of hold, or is attached to a variable icon that is not the target of read ahead. , It may function as a notice display in the symbol variation display.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, a modified example of the effect centered on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment, and an increase effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment and It is a figure which shows the modification of a digestive production in steps, and FIG. 47 is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 46 in steps. 46 to 47, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Also, in FIG. 46, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is the hold that is the target of the prefetch notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the second hold icon h11, it has a default display mode. 46 to 47 are different from the above-described embodiment in that a first decorative symbol display device 208A as a main display device and a second decorative symbol display device 208B as a sub display device are provided. . The second decorative symbol display device 208B is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the lower edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208B is the upper edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. It overlaps part of the front side. Then, the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the upper left corner of the display screen. Then, the first decorative design is displayed in a large size across the first decorative design display device 208A and the second decorative design display device 208B, and the visibility of the decorative design may be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (1), the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B perform variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol display device 208A displays the second symbol. The variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed. As shown in FIG. 46 (1), neither the first decorative symbol display device 208A nor the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the notice icon display area.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 46 (2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the lord's effect is started. Here, the lord's character YM possesses the hat notice icon I6. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the background display is switched to the display including the notice icon display area 285A according to the appearance of the lord's character YM. The notice icon display area 285A is divided into four display areas: a notice icon first display area YA1, a notice icon second display area YA2, a notice icon third display area, and a notice icon fourth display area YA4. The display area in which the notice icon is displayed is not limited to this, and may be three or less, or five or more. Further, for example, the maximum number of display areas in which the notice icon can be displayed is eight, but in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, when four display areas less than eight are displayed, the second When the notice icon is displayed in all of the four display areas being displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208B, the display area is increased and even if it is notified that the notice icon can be stocked. Well, for example, the display area may be increased by one each time the display area being displayed is filled with the notice icon, or when the four display areas are filled with the notice icon. May display all the remaining four display areas that have not been displayed. Further, when the lord's character YM appears, the display area may be increased by the number of notice icons possessed by the lord's character YM. Specifically, for example, when the number of display areas in the notice icon display area being displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is four, and these four display areas are filled with the notice icon. In the case where the lord's character YM has one notice icon when the lord's effect is started, one display area is displayed when the lord's character YM throws the notice icon. It may be increased only by this, or all four displayable remaining display areas may be displayed. If the lord's character YM possesses three notice icons, the display area may be increased by only three when the lord's character YM throws the notice icon. The remaining four display areas that can be displayed may be displayed. Further, for example, the maximum number of display areas in which the notice icon can be displayed is eight, but in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, when four display areas less than eight are displayed, the second When the notice icon is displayed in all of the four display areas being displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208B, the notice icon display area including the four notice areas (first notice) is displayed. The icon display area) is reduced and a new notice icon display area (second notice icon display area) including four new display areas in which the notice icon is not yet displayed is newly displayed, and the second notice icon is displayed. A new stock icon may be displayed in the display area. Here, the timing for displaying the second notice icon display area may be the timing when the first notice icon display area is full, or the timing when the notice icon is newly stocked. Good. Further, the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285A may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A or the second decorative symbol display device 208B. In addition, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, for example, when performing a super reach effect, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed in a reduced size, or the notice icon display area 285 is replaced with the notice icon stock number. Alternatively, the notice icon display area 285A may be deleted. As described above, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, it may be possible to give a pre-reading notice by switching from the background display to the display including the notice icon display area 285A.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 46 (3), the lord's character YM is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position, and then at the timing shown in FIG. A performance display that is thrown at is displayed. In this example of performance, the notice icon I6 of the hat thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, it can be said that the notice icon I6 of the hat may be displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B. In addition, when displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285A, it may be arranged so as not to straddle the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, for example, the first decorative symbol display device. The notice icon entered in the predetermined warp entrance displayed in 208A may be displayed in the notice icon display area 285A after appearing in the predetermined position of the second decorative symbol display device 208B.

  Then, the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (5), and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 46 (6). On the first decorative pattern display device 208A, an effect display in which the lord's character YM succeeds in displaying the notice icon and has a happy expression is performed. Accordingly, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285A, thereby giving a notice that the pseudo-relation effect may be executed in the future. After that, the lord's character YM is framed out toward the lower side of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

  In FIG. 46 (7), the first decorative symbol display device 208A is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. The second decorative pattern is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display including the notice icon display area 285A is continued, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1.

  After that, as a result of the symbol variable display based on the suspension of the variable display of the first special diagram 1, as shown in FIG. 46 (8), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, "decoration 7-decoration 6 -It is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 2", and the display result of the off is confirmed. The second decorative pattern is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display including the notice icon display area 285A continues to be continued, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1.

  After that, when the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 46 (9), on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the hold icon h11 of the special symbol 1 is moved by the movement animation. The displayed hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed after the variable display of the decorative symbol has started, as shown in FIG. 46 (10), the notice icon first in the notice icon display area 285A of the second decorative symbol display device 208B is displayed. The display that the hat icon I6 displayed in the display area YA1 is consumed is started. That is, a display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208B and the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, it can be said that the hat notice icon I6 may be displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. In addition, when the notice icon is consumed, the notice icon may be displayed so as not to extend over the second decorative symbol display device 208B and the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be switched to the background display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 46 (11), the notice icon I6 of the digested hat moves to the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and then is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (12). To be done. It should be noted that the timing of switching from the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the background display is such that the digested notice icon shown in FIG. 46 (11) is the first decorative symbol display. It may be the timing of moving to the center of the device 208A, or may be the timing of displaying the notice icon in an enlarged manner as shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 47 (13) continued from FIG. 46 (12), a character display of “continuation” for announcing that the pseudo continuous effect is performed is additionally displayed below the notice icon I6 of the enlarged hat. The timing at which the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is switched to the background display may be the timing at which the character display of "continuation" is additionally displayed. It may be the timing after the character display of "continuation" is additionally displayed, or the timing before the character display of "continuation" is additionally displayed.

  After that, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the notice icon I6 of the hat is erased together with the character display of "Continue" at the timing of FIG. The display including the icon display area 285A is switched to the background display. At this time, the first decorative symbol is variably displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, the first decorative pattern is displayed over the two display screens. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, the second decorative pattern is displayed on one display screen. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47 (15), the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed. At this time, "decoration 1" is displayed on the left symbol and "decoration 2" is displayed on the right symbol. That is, it is shown that it is in the non-reach state.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (16), the enlarged and displayed Bancho character BC2 appears, and is displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B. As shown in (17), in response to the digestion of the hat notice icon I6, the banquet character BC appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display that pushes up the stopped right symbol is displayed. The player is informed that the pseudo continuous effect may be started. At this time, the right symbol pushed up by the length-long character BC is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. In the case shown in FIG. 47 (16), the length-long character BC2 does not have to be displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Here, "display across" is displayed in cooperation with each other in the image display area (display panel) of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the image display area (display panel) of the second decorative symbol display device 208B. It may be that. Further, the image display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the image display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be integrally displayed. Further, display may be performed by moving from the image display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47 (18), the pseudo continuous symbol is framed in from above the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and a display is displayed in which it moves slowly downward. At this time, the pseudo continuous symbol is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208B and the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (19), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (19). After that, for example, the pseudo continuous effect is performed in the manner described above and shown in FIG.

  48 and 49 are diagrams showing, in stages, another modified example of the increase effect and the digest effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 50 shows the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows another modification of a digestive effect in steps. 48 to 50, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding device. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In addition, in FIG. 48 and FIG. 49, the hold icon that is the target of the prefetching notice in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to facilitate understanding, but the display mode is the default display mode. ing.

  48 (a1) to FIG. 48 (a7-2), the configuration is the same as that shown in FIGS. 46 to 47, but the second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured to be vertically movable, When the second decorative symbol display device 208B is lowered, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is different in that it can be overlapped with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed, and the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. ing. In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the upper left corner of the display screen. Then, the first decorative design is displayed in a large size across the first decorative design display device 208A and the second decorative design display device 208B, and the visibility of the decorative design may be improved. In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a chance roulette display area 287 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and variable display of symbols is performed. The contents displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 are as described above with reference to FIG. 45, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. As shown in FIG. 48 (a1), neither the first decorative symbol display device 208A nor the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the notice icon display area.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the hat notice icon I6 is derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287. Then, as shown in FIG. 48 (a3), the second decorative symbol display device 208B descends and overlaps with the substantial center of the front surface side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the background display is switched to the display including the notice icon display area 285A. In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, an effect image surrounding the second decorative symbol display device 208B is displayed to make the second decorative symbol display device 208B stand out. The advance notice icon display area 285A shown in FIG. 48 (a3) is the same as that shown in FIG. 46 (2) and described above, and therefore detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 48 (a4), after the notice icon I6 of the hat derived and displayed in the chance roulette display region 287 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A, FIG. As shown in (a5-1), the second decorative symbol display device 208B moves up and returns to the initial position. At the timing shown in FIG. 48 (a5-1), the variable display of Toku-zu 1 ends and the display is stopped with the combination of "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2" which is the result of the loss. At this time, the variable icon h0 is not erased, but it may be erased at a timing before the variable display of the special figure 1 ends. Further, in FIG. 48 (a5-1), the result of losing is displayed only in the second decorative pattern, and the first decorative pattern is not displayed, but the first decorative pattern is displayed, and also in this first decorative pattern. The result of loss may be displayed. In this example of performance, when the notice icon is displayed (stocked), it may be possible to easily recognize that the notice icon is stocked by moving the second decorative symbol display device 208B. The second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured not to operate during the symbol stop display, but may be configured to operate during the symbol stop display. In addition, the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be continuously performed without interruption, regardless of whether the symbol stop display or the symbol variation display is being performed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 48 (a5-2), even after the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is raised. Instead, the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A may be maintained in the overlapping state. In this example, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is maintained in the lowered state until the pattern variation display in which all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285A are exhausted is finished, but at any timing 2 Whether to raise the decorative pattern display device 208B can be set appropriately. At the timing shown in FIG. 48 (a5-2), the variable display of the special figure 1 is finished, and both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are the result of the loss "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". Is displayed in combination. Here, the first decorative design is displayed in the upper right corner of the second decorative design display device 208B, and the second decorative design is displayed in the upper left corner of the first decorative design display device 208A. The display position of the symbol can be set arbitrarily.

  FIG. 48 (a6-2) shows that after that, the two reservations are exhausted and the symbol variation display, which is the target of prefetching, is started. Specifically, in the upper right corner of the second decorative design display device 208B, the variable display of the first decorative design is performed, and in the upper left corner of the first decorative design display device 208A, the variation of the second decorative design. The display is being done.

  Then, when the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A is consumed, the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged as shown in FIG. 48 (a7-2). Then, it is displayed so as to extend from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. Further, below the enlarged notice icon I6 of the hat, the character display of "continuation" for notifying that the pseudo continuous effect is performed is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. It is displayed throughout. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is moved to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A so as to be easily visible to the player. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208B may thereafter be raised and returned to the initial position, or may be kept in the lowered state until the symbol variation is completed.

  48 (b1) to FIG. 48 (b4), in place of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, a notice icon display number display at a predetermined position of the game board 200 (for example, a position near the lower portion of the decorative symbol display device 208). An example is shown in which a device 288 is provided. The notice icon display number display device 288 includes, for example, two 7-segments, and can display the number (stock number) of the notice icons displayed.

  48 (b1) to FIG. 48 (b3) have the same effect contents as in FIG. 20 (17) to FIG. 19 (19), but with the notice icon display number display device 288 applied in this effect example, It is shown that the numerical value is changed according to the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. That is, in FIG. 48 (b1), since only one hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon display number display device 288 displays “01” indicating the number. There is. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (b2), the lord's character YM throws three notice icons (a notice icon I6 for a hat, a notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, and a notice icon I10 for a fan). Since it is not yet displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the value displayed in the notice icon display number display device 288 remains “01”. The value of the notice icon display number display device 288 may be updated at the timing when the lord's character YM throws these notice icons. In addition, a number different from the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed (so-called gasse is displayed). Then, when the three notice icons described above are displayed in the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (b3), the value is updated and "04" is displayed on the notice icon display number display device 288. To be done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 48 (b4), when the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is exhausted, it is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Since the number of notice icons displayed is reduced by one, the notice icon display number display device 288 updates the value and displays "03". The timing at which the value of the notice icon display number display device is reduced may be the timing before the notice icon is consumed, may be the same as the notice icon is consumed, or the notice icon may be displayed. It may be the timing after being digested. It should be noted that, as shown by enclosing with a broken line, the value does not decrease even if the notice icon is exhausted, and the total number (four in this example) of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is counted and displayed. You may do it. In this example of performance, the number of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed by 7-segment. However, for example, an operation by a light emitting means such as an LED or a movable means such as a production movable body, for example, , A transparent plate member is provided on the front surface side of the decorative pattern display device 208 to emit light in a predetermined pattern, voice, or a decorative pattern display device (a decorative pattern display device in which the notice icon display area 285 is displayed, or other) The display number of the notice icon may be notified by a decorative pattern display device or the like).

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 49 (c1) to (c9) use two display devices (the first decorative pattern display device 208C and the second decorative pattern display device 208D) as in FIGS. 46 to 47. However, they are different in that they use the same size display device. 49, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 49 (c1), the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to show that it is the hold of the variable pattern display, which is the target of prefetching. The mode is a default display mode, like the first hold icon h11. The second decorative symbol display device 208D is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and the lower edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208D and the upper edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208C are It is arranged so as to substantially overlap. Then, the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208D, the special figure 1 second reserved number display H1 and the special figure 2 second reserved number display H2 are displayed in the upper right corner, and the special figure 1 and special figure 2 are reserved. “2” and “0” are displayed corresponding to the numbers, respectively. Further, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed in a large size from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D, and FIG. 49 (c1). At the timing shown by, the decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner. The chance roulette display area 287 described above is displayed in the lower right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is derived and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (c1). It is shown. Further, the background display is also greatly displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. That is, the background is displayed on the entire two screens.

  When the hat notice icon I6 is derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 as shown in FIG. 49 (c1), as shown in FIG. 49 (c2), the second decorative pattern display device 208D displays the first decorative pattern. It descends to a position that covers the upper half of the display device 208C. At this time, the first decorative symbol display device 208C, which was performing the background display, is switched to a display including the notice icon display area 285B, and is displayed in the notice icon first display area Y1 of the notice icon display area 285B. The notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed (stocked). That is, when the notice icon is displayed, the display mode at the time of displaying the notice icon is changed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208D, the variable display of the decorative symbol is continuously performed, but the size of the symbol becomes small and is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

  In FIG. 49 (c3), three notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285B. That is, a notice icon I6 for a hat is displayed in each of the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, and a notice icon I7 for shuriken is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3. .. It should be noted that at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (c3), since the number of reservations is one, the special reservation 1 second reservation number display H1 displays "1" to that effect.

  FIG. 49 (c4) shows a state when the notice icon I7 of the shuriken has been digested. That is, it is notified that the notice of the chance eye is given by digesting the notice icon I7 of the shuriken. At this time, the effect display in which the notice icon is consumed is performed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

  After that, when the variable display of the special figure 1 ends, as shown in FIG. 49 (c5), the second decorative symbol display device 208D stops at the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1" which is the result of the loss. it's shown. However, the combination of the results of this loss is an opportunity, and it is notified that the symbol variation display, which is likely to be a big hit, is suspended. That is, the pre-reading notice is given by displaying this chance.

  FIG. 49 (c6) shows a state where the notice icon I6 of the second hat has been digested after the symbol variation of the special figure 1 has started. That is, it announces that the second pseudo-announcement will be made. As the notice icon I6 of the second hat is consumed, no notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285B.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (c7), the notice icon display area 285B displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C is erased, and the second decorative symbol display device 208D rises and returns to the initial position. ..

  Then, as shown in FIG. 49 (c8), the decorative symbol is displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D, and the background display is also the first decorative symbol display device 208C. And, it will be displayed on the entire two screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 49 (c9), the bancho character BC appears outside the lower right frame of the first decorative symbol display device 208C in response to the completion of the second hat notice icon I6, and the stop display is displayed. The effect display that pushes up the right symbol being displayed is performed, and the player is informed that the second pseudo continuous effect may be started. At this time, the length character BC is displayed in a large size from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 49 (c9), when the decorative design is displayed large, for example, a large design in which the numerical design and the character image are integrated is displayed, and the notice icon display area 285B is displayed. When the decorative design is displayed small, the small design consisting of only the numerical design is displayed, and the large design and the small design are displayed in different display modes, but the large design and the small design are displayed. The sizes may be changed so that the display modes are the same.

  In addition, in this example of performance, when the notice icon display area 285B is displayed, only the second decorative symbol display device 208D is movable, but the first decorative symbol display device 208C may be movable. The first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D may both be movable. In this case, the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D may be moved in respective directions in which they are separated from each other, and in this case, the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display. When the device 208D is separated, it may be configured such that the character objects arranged on the back side thereof can be visually recognized, and further, the character objects can be moved so as to project forward. You may. You may make it maintain such a state until all the notice icons are exhausted.

  FIG. 49 (d) shows an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, in FIG. 49 (d), a first decorative symbol display device 208E arranged in the center of the three decorative symbol display devices and a second decorative symbol display arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. The display is performed by the device 208F and the third decorative symbol display device 208G arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. The second decorative symbol display device 208F and the third decorative symbol display device 208G have the same height as the first decorative symbol display device 208E, but have a slightly smaller width. Note that the three decorative symbol display devices may have the same size.

  The variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed at the lower end of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. On the other hand, the notice icon display area 285C is displayed across three screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208F, the first decorative symbol display device 208E, and the third decorative symbol display device 208G. In the example shown in FIG. 49D, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in each of the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, and particularly, the notice icon second display area YA2. The hat notice icon I6 displayed in is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208F and the first decorative symbol display device 208E. In addition, a notice icon I9 of 1,000 boxes is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3, and a fan notice icon I10 is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4. Further, the decorative symbols are displayed on one decorative symbol display device for one symbol row. That is, the left symbol display area 208a is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208F, the middle symbol display area 208b is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208E, and the right symbol display area 208c is the third decorative symbol display. It is displayed on device 208G. Note that there may be a decorative pattern display device in which the notice icon display area 285C is not displayed. Further, there may be a decorative pattern display device in which the effect display related to the notice icon is not displayed. This is applicable to the embodiments described so far as well as the embodiments described below.

  FIG. 50 shows an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, in FIG. 50, a first decorative symbol display device 208H arranged in the center of the three decorative symbol display devices and a second decorative symbol display device 208I arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. , And the third decorative symbol display device 208J arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. Compared to the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J have the same display area in the vertical direction, but are slightly shorter in the horizontal direction. Then, the second decorative symbol display device 208I is provided with the frame portions projecting from the upper end side, the lower end side, and the left end side, respectively, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J has the upper end side, the lower end side, and the right end side. A frame portion is provided so as to protrude from each. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are respectively configured to be slidable along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and when they are at positions closest to each other, It is possible to perform a display as if one screen is being displayed on the two display screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, and further, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. The whole can be coated.

  Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H when they are in the state of being closest to each other. It is configured to be able to.

  FIG. 50 (e1) is a display corresponding to FIG. 22 (47) and covers the entire display screens of the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. Swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in FIG. 50 (e1), while the swordsman reach is being executed, the 1,000-box icon I9 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is consumed, and a notice is given that the production will shift to a more reliable production. Is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 50 (e2), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J start moving in the directions in which they approach each other. At this time, since both end portions of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H are covered by the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the display state is difficult to visually recognize. As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may be started by digesting the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 50 (e3), when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move to the positions closest to each other, the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208H is almost invisible. It becomes a state. Then, at this time, the reach transition effect as shown in FIG. 22 (49) and described above is performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. That is, the reach effect display that has been executed over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J becomes slightly darker, and the lord's character appears in the cut-in display, and the reach effect being performed. The display is cut. This display is a display rotated 90 degrees to the right. At this time, the decorative pattern and the notice icon display area 285 are not displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 50 (e3) to FIG. 50 (e5), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are integrally formed on the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. Rotate counterclockwise along. That is, it can be said that the display of the reach transition effect is started before the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J start rotating.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 50 (e6), a button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, and the operation of the effect button 136 is accepted. Is notified that the player can operate the effect button 136. At this time, the variable display of the reduced decorative pattern is displayed at the lower right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208I.

  After that, when the production button 136 is operated by the player, as shown in FIG. 50 (e7), "decoration 1-decoration 2- The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1".

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 50 (e8) to (e9), all are once hidden, and in that state, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are integrated. And rotates 90 degrees clockwise along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H.

  Then, when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move in the directions away from each other and return to the initial position, at the timing shown in FIG. 50 (e10), the first decorative symbol display device 208H, Over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the display of the fluctuation fluctuation (temporary symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1" is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also restarted.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 50 (e11-1), the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is erased, and the decoration of “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1” that has fluctuated. The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, and is displayed as a result of the loss.

  On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, the display in which the fan advance notice icon I10 displayed in the advance notice icon fourth display area YA4 is consumed starts at the timing shown in FIG. 50 (e11-2). That is, a display is made in which the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208H. In this way, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may not operate even if the notice icon is consumed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (e12-2), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The decorative pattern is reduced and displayed on the first decorative pattern display device 208H and the third decorative pattern display device 208J, and the variable display is performed again, and then the combination of the decorative patterns of the big hit (for example, "decoration 1-decoration The combination of decorative patterns of "1-decoration 1" is derived and displayed.

  FIG. 50 (e7 ′) shows an example in which a combination of large-decoration decorative symbols is derived and displayed when the player operates the effect button 136 after the display shown in FIG. 50 (e6) is performed. It is a figure. That is, when the player operates the effect button 136, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move in a direction away from each other. In the example shown in FIG. 50 (e7 ′), the second decorative symbol display device 208I moves downward and the third decorative symbol display device 208J moves upward. Then, the first decorative symbol display device 208H appears, and the background display including the grandfather character is displayed over the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and the second decorative symbol display device 208I. At the same time, a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" is displayed over the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and the second decorative symbol display device 208I. That is, it is also possible to derive the jackpot display result without rotating the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J to the original position (for example, the initial position).

  FIG. 50 (e7 ″) is configured such that when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J rotate integrally, the first decorative symbol display device 208H can also rotate together. The example of production when it is performed is shown. That is, as shown in FIGS. 50 (e3) to (e5), when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J rotate integrally, the first decorative symbol display device 208H also has these. It is also possible to rotate together with. In this case, for example, a mechanism for driving the first decorative symbol display device 208H and a mechanism for driving the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may be integrally configured, or separately. It may be configured as a body and configured to be driven and controlled by each. According to such a configuration, for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208H may be rotated in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. is there. Further, according to such a configuration, when the player operates the effect button 136 after the display shown in (e6) of the figure is performed, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display The devices 208J move in directions away from each other. Then, the first decorative symbol display device 208H appears in a state of being rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees, and unlike FIG. 50 (e7 ′), the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third. The decorative pattern display device 308J can be displayed in a state where the horizontal widths of the respective display screens are aligned.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram showing, in stages, another modified example of the increase effect and the digest effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. In the effect example shown in FIG. 51, a transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 through the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL is formed by stacking two layers of panels in the depth direction, and a predetermined lens cut is made in each of the transmission regions of each layer. A light emitting means such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of each layer of the light guide plate IL, and light from the light emitting body is reflected forward at the lens cut portion, so that the transmissive region has a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear as if it is emitting light. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 51, the panel of the first layer arranged on the front side is provided with a lens cut having the same pattern as the hat icon I6, and is arranged on the back side of the panel of the first layer. The second layer panel is provided with a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. Note that, in FIG. 51, the light guide plate IL is shown surrounded by a broken line. Moreover, the number of layers of the panel of the light guide plate IL is not limited to two layers, and may be one layer or three or more layers. Here, in the case of being configured by one layer, for example, the pattern formed on the light guide plate when light is emitted may be configured to be different by changing the pattern of lens cut. Further, in FIG. 51, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 51, the hold icon in the hold icon display area 281 which is the target of the prefetching notice is hatched for preparation of understanding, but the display mode is the default display mode.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (f1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable symbol display region 280 and the hold icon display region 281 are displayed while the decorative symbol variable display is being performed, and the variable icon display region 280 and In the hold icon display area 281, a change icon h0 and hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed on the upper part of the display screen, and the chance roulette display area 287 is displayed on the lower right corner of the display screen. The contents displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 are as described above with reference to FIG. 45, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. As shown in FIG. 51 (f1), when the hat notice icon I6 is derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287, as shown in FIG. 51 (f2-1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a dark display is displayed. At the same time, the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image. That is, in FIG. 51 (f2-1), a dark display and a stock effect of the notice icon by the light emission of the light guide plate IL are performed. After that, the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends (lights off), and the dark display in the decorative symbol display device 208 ends. The dark display of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be ended after the light guide plate IL is turned off, or the light guide plate IL may be turned off after the dark display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended. ..

  Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (f2-2), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 is the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. While displaying the movement toward, the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image, thereby performing the stock production of the notice icon. You may be allowed to.

  Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 51 (f2-3), the light guide plate IL is configured to be rotatable along the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, dark display is performed and guidance is performed. Stock production of the notice icon is performed by rotating the light plate IL 90 degrees counterclockwise to cause the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern simulating an effect image. You may do it. Here, the light guide plate IL may be configured to be separated into a first layer panel and a second layer panel. In this case, for example, only the second layer panel is rotated to rotate the first layer panel. The layer panel may not be rotated, or the first layer panel may be rotated together with the second layer panel.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 51 (f3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 to thereby simulate the future. It announces that continuous production will be executed.

  FIG. 51G shows a state where the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 has been consumed. As shown in FIG. 51 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is moved to the center of the display screen and then deleted, at that timing. The notice icon digesting effect is performed by causing the light emitting means corresponding to the first layer panel of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating the notice icon I6 of the hat.

  In FIG. 51 (h), the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed before the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (before the stock effect of the notice icon is executed). It shows the situation of giving advance notice. As shown in FIG. 51 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of symbols is performed in the chance roulette display area 287 displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. At this time, the light emitting means corresponding to the first layer panel of the light guide plate IL is caused to emit light to form a pattern simulating the notice icon I6 of the hat, and as a result of the variable display of the symbols in the chance roulette display area 287, Of the notice icon I6 is announced.

  FIG. 51 (i) shows another effect example of the notice icon digesting effect. As shown in FIG. 51 (i), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon display area is moved to the center of the display screen and then deleted, and at that timing, the light guide plate. A pattern imitating the effect image is formed by illuminating the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer of IL to form a pattern imitating the notice icon I6 of the hat and also illuminating the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer. The notice icon is being digested as well. At this time, when the emission color of the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer and the emission color of the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer are made different, the pattern formed on the panel of the first layer and the second layer In some cases, the pattern formed on the panel and the pattern formed on the panel can be conspicuous.

  FIG. 51 (j) shows another example of the notice icon digesting effect. As shown in FIG. 51 (j), in the decorative pattern display device 208, after moving the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon display area 285 to the center of the display screen, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed. The screen is enlarged and displayed, and at that timing, the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel of the light guide plate IL is caused to emit light to form a pattern imitating an effect image, thereby performing the notice icon digesting effect. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is erased, but it may be displayed.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing, in stages, another effect example of the notice icon digesting effect. 52 (1) to (11) except that the notice icon displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is changed to the notice icon I10 for the fan and changed to the notice icon I31 for the drink. 22 (44) to (54), the description will be given only of the portions different from the above description with reference to FIG. 22, and the description of the common portions will be omitted. Further, in this example of effect, the effect button 136 can be projected upward by an actuator such as a motor, and its position can be displaced according to the content of the effect. That is, the effect button 136 can be changed between the normal position (default position) and the protruding position.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I31 of the drink is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 in the notice icon display area 285. The notice icon I31 for this drink is a notice icon for giving a notice that the content to be rendered is changed by digestion.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 52 (11), the effect button 136 is in the default position as shown in FIG. 52 (12). Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the drink notice icon I31 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 in the notice icon display area 285 is consumed, and the drink notice icon is displayed. I31 moves toward the center of the display screen.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I31 of the drink is enlarged and displayed, and the effect image of sprinkling the contents of the drink on the button image 136a is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display in which the liquid spilled from the drink container spreads and the button image 136a is hidden.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (16), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the liquid image disappears, a protrusion button image 136b indicating that the effect button 136 is in the protrusion position is displayed. At this time, the state is before the start of operation reception of the effect button 136.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 52 (17), after the effect button 136 is displaced from the default position to the protruding position, as shown in FIG. 52 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button reception time meter decreases. Then, it is notified that the operation reception of the effect button 136 has started. The timing at which the effect button 136 is displaced from the default position to the protruding position may be the same as the timing at which the protruding button image 136b is displayed, as shown in FIG. 52 (16), or the protruding button image 136b. The timing may be before the display of, or the timing after the protruding button image 136b is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 52 (13), the effect button 136 may be displaced from the default position to the protruding position with the start of the digestion effect of the notice icon I31 of the drink. In addition, in this example of performance, the chance button lamp 138 may be turned off during a period other than the operation acceptance period of the production button 136. In addition, during a period other than the operation reception period of the effect button 136, for example, it lights up in a mode of notifying that it is a period other than the operation reception period (for example, lights in blue). You may make it light in the mode which notifies that (for example, it lights in red).

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect using the movable means applicable to this embodiment.

  53 (a1) to (a3), when the notice icon is stocked, the effectable movable body 224C is moved to a position overlapping the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208 to notify the stock of the notice icon. There is. FIG. 53 (a1) shows the same display as that of FIG. 41 (1), but the production movable body 224C imitating a placard with the character display of "STOCK" on the right side of the decorative pattern display device 208. It is arranged so as to be hidden behind the 206.

  FIG. 53 (a2) shows that the effect movable body 224C has moved from the initial position hidden by the effect device 206 to the visible position which is a position overlapping the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, a notice is given that any one of the plurality of types of notice icons will be stocked. At this time, the type of the notice icon to be stocked may be notified, for example, the type of the notice icon may be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, or a notification may be given by voice or a lamp. A plurality of effect movable bodies 224C may be prepared according to the type of the notice icon, and the type of the notice icon stocked depending on the type of the effect movable body 224C that appears may be notified.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 53 (a3), when the effect movable body 224C returns from the visible position to the initial position, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the stocked notice icon. In FIG. 53 (a3), the manner in which the hat notice icon I6 is stocked is shown.

  In FIG. 53 (b), effect movable bodies 224Da to 224Df that are rotatable around the depth direction as rotation axes are arranged in the upper and lower neighborhoods of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. More specifically, in the vicinity of the upper portion of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first effect movable member 224Da with the character "large" attached, the fifth effect movable member 224De with the asterisk symbol, and the "board". The second effect movable bodies 224Db to which the characters are attached are arranged side by side in the lateral direction, and near the lower portion of the decorative symbol display device 208, the third effect movable bodies 224Dc to which the characters “shake” are attached, A sixth effect movable body 224Df marked with an asterisk and a fourth effect movable body 224Dd marked with the character “Mai” are arranged side by side in the lateral direction. The first effect movable body 224Da to the sixth effect movable body 224Df rotate according to the number of notice icons displayed (stocked) in the notice icon display area 285. For example, as shown in FIG. 53B, when four notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, four effect movable bodies of the first effect movable body 224Da to the fourth effect movable body 224Dd. Rotates. In addition, when the notice icon is consumed, the rotation of the produced movable bodies may be stopped, or the number of produced movable bodies corresponding to the total number of the notice icons stocked may be rotated. Good.

  FIG. 53 (c1) to FIG. 53 (c6) show a state of notifying that the prefetch mode has been entered by operating the production movable body 224. In this example of performance, a special training notice icon I41 may be displayed as a notice icon. When the special training notice icon I41 is exhausted, the mode shifts to the prefetch mode informing that the variable display of the special map which is likely to be a big hit is suspended.

  FIG. 53 (c1) shows a state in which the special notice icon I41 has been digested. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the special training notice icon I41 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is consumed and moved to the center of the display screen. An effect movable body 224 simulating an arm is arranged on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The production movable body 224 is configured by an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b, and the base end portion of the upper arm portion 224a is rotatably attached to the production device 206 via the rotation axis ax1. .. Further, the forearm portion 224b is rotatably attached to the tip end portion of the upper arm portion 224a via the rotation axis ax2.

  When the special training notice icon I41 is digested and the prefetch mode is started, as shown in FIG. 53 (c2), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the character display “special training in preparation” is displayed on the right in the strip-shaped scroll display area. To scroll to the left. As a result, the player is notified of the shift to the prefetch mode. On the other hand, in the production movable body 224, an initial position where the upper arm portion 224a does not overlap the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a position (first position) that covers the front surface side of the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. A reciprocating operation (prefetch operation) is performed between the two. The pre-reading operation by the effect movable body 224 is made to return to the initial position once during the stop display of the symbol, but the operation may be continued even during the stop display of the symbol. Further, during execution of the prefetching operation, only the upper arm 224a operates and the forearm 224b does not operate, but the forearm 224b may operate in addition to the upper arm 224a, or the upper arm 224a does not operate and the forearm does not operate. Only the part 224b may operate.

  FIG. 53 (c3) shows a state in which the reach state is formed by aligning two "decorations 1" during the variable display of the special figure 1 that is the target of prefetching. The look-ahead operation is also continued here.

  FIG. 53 (c4) shows a state in which special training reach as a super reach effect is started. That is, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of "preparing for special training" is finished, and the character display of "starting special training" indicating that special training reach has been started is displayed. In addition, after the production movable body 224 once returns to the initial position, the upper arm portion 224a moves from the initial position to the maximum movement position as shown in FIG. 53 (c5), and then as shown in FIG. 53 (c6). Then, the forearm 224b moves from the initial position to the maximum movement position. At this time, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a predetermined effect image to notify that the reliability of the big hit is high.

  FIG. 54 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing stepwise another effect example of the notice icon increasing effect. Is. 54, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Also, in FIG. 54, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is a hold that is the target of the prefetching notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the second hold icon h11, it has a default display mode.

  Since FIG. 54 (1) shows the same display as FIG. 41 (1), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 54 (2), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hall effect is started. Here, the lord's character YM possesses the hat notice icon I6.

  In this effect example, the lord's character YM is moved to the predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 54 (3), but the notice icon I6 of the hat he is carrying has not been thrown yet, and FIG. 54 (4) is displayed. As shown in, while the lord's character YM is standing by at the throwing position, the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, the variable display of the symbols on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 54 (5), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are respectively moved by the movement animation. The hold icon displayed and at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the special icon 1 Becomes the first hold icon h11. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. The lord's character YM is still waiting at the throwing position.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 54 (6), an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I6 of the possessed hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. That is, in this effect example, when the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended, the notice icon is announced during the symbol variation display being executed, but the notice icon is not stocked. Not, the notice icon is stocked after the symbol variable display ends and the next symbol variable display starts. It should be noted that when the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended, a notice is displayed that the notice icon will be displayed during the symbol variation display being executed, but a so-called gaze notice that does not display the notice icon is given. May be. In this case, for example, the lord's character YM may be terminated before the variable display of the symbols to be read ahead starts, for example, one symbol before the variable display of the symbols to be read ahead. The display may be ended at the timing when the result of the symbol variation display to be performed is derived. Further, the display of the lord's character YM may be terminated before the symbol variation display which is the target of prefetching is terminated, for example, the super reach performed during the symbol variation display which is the target of prefetching is started. The display of the lord's character YM may be ended before. Further, when the notice icon is stocked, the lord's character YM may be continuously displayed even after the notice icon is stocked. Also, in the state where the character of Tonosama is on standby, when the big hit occurs in the symbol variation display that is performed before the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is thrown, the timing of deriving the jackpot symbol after super reach (for example, , While the shaking fluctuation is being displayed), the character of the lord may continue the standby display with the notice icon, or may be deleted.

  Then, after that, the effects shown in FIGS. 54 (7) to (10) are performed, but the effects shown in FIGS. 54 (7) to (10) are shown in FIGS. Since it is the same as (12) except that the variable display of the second decorative symbol is displayed, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 54 (11) shows a state in which the result of the symbol variable display that is performed immediately before the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching is derived. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54 (11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. There is. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

  In FIG. 54 (12), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and changes to the variable icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed after the variable display of the decorative pattern has started, as shown in FIG. 54 (13), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays it in the notice icon first display area YA1. The notice icon digestion effect of digesting the notice icon I6 of the hat is performed.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the notice icon increase effect. In FIG. 55, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 55, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is the hold of the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching, but the display mode is For example, like the first hold icon h11, it has a default display mode.

  FIG. 55 (a1) to FIG. 55 (a6) show a situation in which the notice icon is stocked after the effect of giving notice that the notice icon is stocked is performed.

  FIG. 55 (a1) shows a state in which the boring effect that is performed during the symbol variation display that is being executed is started when the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 55 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an explanation display unit 288 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the mission and its success reward are shown. In the explanation display unit 288 shown in FIG. 55 (a1), when the strike is obtained in the bowling game, the character display of "Strike item Get" indicates that the item can be obtained as the reward. In this example of performance, a notice item is stocked when a strike is won in the bowling game. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, bowling effect by the lord's character is started. The contents of the mission and the success reward displayed in the explanation display unit 288 are related to the stock of the advance notice item, for example, the pending display is related to the change to the display mode of the prefetch advance notice, and It may be related to a notice about the symbol variable display. Further, the content displayed on the explanation display unit 288 may be a special effect display that is displayed only for the notice regarding the stock of the notice icon. In this example of production, it can be said that the advance notice of stocking of the advance notice icon is given by performing the bowling effect as shown in FIG. 55 (a1). In addition, this bowling effect may be a special effect that is provided only for the advance notice regarding the stock of the advance notice icon, may be used in the advance notice effect in the symbol variation display that is being executed, or may be used as another prefetch advance notice. You may be asked.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55 (a2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the outlier is confirmed. At this time, the bowling effect has not ended, and the character display of "following the next change" is displayed, which indicates that the boring effect is continuously performed in the next symbol change display. It is to be noted that “Strike item Get” indicating the mission and its reward is also displayed on the upper portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55 (a3), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the ball thrown by the lord's character rolls on the lane toward the ten aligned bowling pins. , Is fueling the expectation that the notice icon may be stocked.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55 (a4), on the decorative pattern display device 208, the image of the scene where the strike has been taken is displayed together with the character display of “strike”, and it is assumed that the mission has been achieved, and as shown in FIG. 55 (a5). As shown in the figure, the character display of "GET" is displayed together with the enlarged notice icon I6 of the hat to notify that the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 55 (a6), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the hat notice icon I6 is displayed. It is reported that stock has been made. In this way, in this effect example, the notice item is not displayed (stock) and the notice item is displayed during the symbol variation display that is being executed when the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended. Has been announced.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (b), a wipe display area WP1 may be displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the above-mentioned bowling effect may be performed in the wipe display area WP1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 55 (c), in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 208K is arranged side by side on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and wiped to the upper half of the display screen of the sub display device 208K. The display area WP2 is displayed, and the notice icon display area 285C that displays the notice icon in the lower half is displayed to perform the above-mentioned bowling effect in the wipe display area WP2 and the notice icon to be stocked is displayed in the notice icon display area 285C. May be displayed on the screen.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 55, when a big hit occurs during the bowling effect, when the bowling effect is started at the timing of displaying the big hit symbol derived after the super reach (for example, during fluctuation display). Background display may be displayed, or a background display different from this may be displayed, and for example, the state shown in FIG. 55 (a2) may be displayed.

  Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 55 (b), when a big hit occurs during the bowling effect, the display of the wipe display area WP1 may be ended, but the display may be continued as it is. .. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 55 (c), if a big hit occurs during the bowling effect, the display of the bowling effect on the sub display device 208K may be ended, but the display is continued as it is. May be.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another modified example of the effect of increasing the number of advance notice icons applicable to this embodiment. In the above-described embodiment, the one in which the special display of the special figure 2 is preferentially displayed over the special figure 1 has been described, but in this example of performance, the special figure 1 variation game or the special figure 2 variation game is prioritized. Nonetheless, the special figure variation game according to each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is applied to the variation of the starting mouth winning order in which the starting mouth winning order is started. It should be noted that this production example can also be applied to the case where the special figure 2 priority variation is performed. Further, in FIG. 56, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 56, the fifth hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is the hold that is the target of the prefetch notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the second hold icon h11, it has a default display mode. Further, among the hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 281, the first hold icon h11, the third hold icon h12, and the fifth hold icon h13 are displayed in the first special figure starting port 230. The second holding icon h21 and the fourth holding icon h22 are the holding icons showing the variable display of the special figure 1 that has been won and held, and the second special figure starting port 232 has been won and held. It is a hold icon showing a variable display of special figure 2.

  The effect shown in FIG. 56 is an effect that may be started after the symbol variable display, which is the target of prefetching, is suspended, and the character SB of Sabohani moves on the line according to the rule of the Midaduji and reaches the destination. It is a production (Amida production) for acquiring a notice item.

  First, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed. It is reported that the result is a loss. On the other hand, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the Amida effect has been started. Specifically, when the Amida effect is started, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-1), the character SB of the sabotani is placed at one of the starting points of the three horizontal lines extending in the horizontal direction. And a notice icon I6 for a hat, a notice icon I10 for a fan, and an icon IX for a loss are placed for each end point of the three horizontal lines. In addition, a number of vertical lines connecting adjacent horizontal lines are set appropriately, and the central portion of these vertical lines is hidden by smoke. The number of vertical lines to be set is determined according to, for example, the number of holdings at the time when the Amida effect is started, but is not limited to this. In this Amida production, when the character of Sabohani moves along the line according to the rule of Mida and, as a result, the notice icon I6 of the hat or the notice icon I10 of the fan reaches the end point, the notice icon is stocked. Then, when the end point where the lost icon IX is arranged is reached, it is notified that the notice icon is not stocked. Then, every time the symbol variable display is started, the character SB of the sabotani moves to the position where the vertical line is arranged. It should be noted that the character SB of the sabotani may be moved to the position where the vertical line is arranged every time the pseudo-repeating is performed. You may do the same. Further, it is also possible to proceed to a vertical line two or more ahead for each symbol variation display. The effect as shown in FIG. 56 can be performed in the wipe display area WP1 or the sub display device 208K as described above with reference to FIGS. 55 (c) and 55 (d). is there. In this case, for example, it is possible to continue displaying the mami production even during execution of the super reach. Then, for example, in some cases, the effect of increasing the number of notice icons during the super reach can be performed in parallel.

  Then, when the variable display of the special figure 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 56 (a2-1), the hold icons h11, h21, h12, h22, and h13 are moved by the moving animation, respectively, and the first hold icon is displayed. The hold icon at the display position of h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0, and the other hold icons move one by one to the right. On the other hand, the decorative pattern starts variable display. Further, as shown in FIG. 56 (a2-1), when the symbol variable display is started, the character SB of Sabohani starts moving from the starting point of the horizontal line in the upper row of the three horizontal lines, and the first vertical line. When the line is reached, the smoke that hides the vertical line is erased, and a state in which the horizontal line in the upper row and the horizontal line in the middle row are connected by the vertical line is displayed, and the character SB of Sabohani moves on the vertical line. At the timing shown in FIG. 56 (a2-1), the middle horizontal line is reached halfway.

  After that, when the variable display of the special map 1 ends, the variable display of the special map 2 continues, and the four hold icons h21, h12, h22, h13 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 are moved by moving animations. To be done. Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (a3-1), when the character SB of the sabotani reaches the second vertical line connecting the horizontal line in the middle row and the horizontal line in the lower row, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased. . As a result of the smoke being erased, it was found that this vertical line was cut in the middle, and the vertical line cannot move from the horizontal line in the middle row to the horizontal line in the lower row. Therefore, the character SB of Sabohani is in the middle row. Continue straight on the horizontal line toward the end point.

  Then, when the variable display of the special map 2 ends, the variable display of the special map 1 is continuously started, and the three hold icons h12, h22, and h13 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 are moved by the moving animation. . Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (a4-1), when the character SB of the sabotani reaches the third vertical line connecting the horizontal line in the middle row and the horizontal line in the upper row, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased. . As a result of the smoke being eliminated, this vertical line connects the middle horizontal line and the upper horizontal line. Therefore, the Sabohani character SB follows the middle horizontal line to the upper horizontal line according to the Amida Lottery rule. Move to the horizontal line. As a result, the character SB of Sabohani reaches the end point of the upper horizontal line where the hat notice icon I6 is arranged, and as shown in FIG. 56 (a5), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the hat notice icon I6. After the display indicating that the information has been acquired is performed, the Amida effect is terminated, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 as shown in FIG. 56 (a6). To be done.

  In addition, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-1) and described above, one of the plurality of different types of notice icons is selected, but, for example, FIG. 56 (a1-) As shown in 2), the notice icon I6 of the hat is arranged at all the end points of the horizontal line, or the notice icon I10 of the fan is arranged at all the end points of the horizontal line as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-3). Good. In this way, by arranging the same type of the notice icon at all the end points of the horizontal line, it is possible to notify the player that it is confirmed that the displayed notice icon will be stocked. In particular, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-3), the fan advance notice icon I10 is, as described above, the advance notice icon indicating that the effect of giving an advance notice that the big hit will be settled is performed, so the player It may be possible to further increase the expectation for a big hit. The effect shown in FIG. 56 (a1-3) is a kind of premier effect that rarely appears.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-4), the icon IX for losing is not arranged, but the notice icon I6 for the hat, the notice icon I10 for the fan, and the notice icon I9 for the thousand boxes are arranged at the end points of the horizontal lines. It may be determined that one of the notice icons is always stocked. According to this, the player may be able to enjoy the Amida production at ease.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-5), the sabotani character SB is arranged at all the starting points of the horizontal lines, and the notice icons (the hat notice icon I6 and the fan notice icon I10) arranged at the end points of the respective horizontal lines. Alternatively, it may be determined that all the notice icons I9) of the thousand boxes are stocked. Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 56 (a1-5), since the fan advance notice icon I10 is included, it is assured that the effect of giving an advance notice that the big hit will be settled is performed, so that the player makes a big hit. It may be possible to further increase the expectation of.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-6), the notice icon of the lord of which the type of the notice icon is not clear at the end of each horizontal line (the notice icon I1 of the first lord, the notice icon I2 of the second lord, The notice icon I3) of the Lord of 3 may be arranged. In this way, the player does not know what kind of notice icon will be stocked until the end point is reached. In some cases, expectations can be improved. Further, the notice icon of the lord has different colors depending on the types as described above, and the reliability of the big hit differs depending on the color. Therefore, the player may be able to increase the expectation for the notice icon after the change from the notice icon of the lord, depending on which color the notice icon of the lord is acquired. For example, the third palace's notice icon I3, which is the red lord's notice icon, is more likely to be changed to the "pseudo-relation" confirmation notice icon than the "pseudo-relation" confirmation notice icon. The notice icon I1 of the first lord, which is the notice icon of, can be changed to the notice icon in which "pseudo-ream" is not fixed.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a3-1) and as described above, it is difficult to identify the traveling route of the character SB of the sabotani by hiding the central portion of the vertical line with smoke, but for example, FIG. As shown in (a3-2), the vertical line may not be hidden by smoke, and the traveling route of the character SB of Sabohani may be specified at the time when the Amida effect is started. As a result, the player can recognize in advance which of the notice icons will be stocked, and thus may be able to enjoy the Amida production with peace of mind. Furthermore, in this case, a roulette effect for determining the starting point of the horizontal line on which the character SB of the sabotani is arranged may be performed to further enhance the effect.

  Further, in this example of production, as described above with reference to FIG. 56 (a2-1), the notice icon that may be stocked at the start of the Amida production is displayed in a recognizable manner. As shown in FIG. 56 (a2-2), during execution of the Amida effect, the areas in which the notice icons respectively arranged at the end points of the horizontal lines are displayed are hidden by smoke, and then, shown in FIG. 56 (a2-2a). ), The notice icons respectively arranged at the end points of the horizontal lines may be changed. In the example shown in FIG. 56 (a2-2a), the lost icon IX has been changed to the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes, and the contents of the Amida effect have been promoted. Note that, for example, some or all of the notice icons placed at the end points of the horizontal lines are changed to the missing icon IX or the notice icon having a lower rank, so that the contents of the Amida production are demoted. You can

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a4-1), the central portion of the vertical line is hidden by smoke so that the traveling route of the character SB of the sabotani can be predicted to some extent. As shown in a4-2), during execution of the Amida effect, smoke that has hidden a part of the vertical line extends in the vertical direction, and the smoke disappears as shown in FIG. 56 (a4-2a). The vertical line may increase or decrease before and after. In the example shown in FIG. 56 (a4-2a), before the smoke is extended, it is suggested that the notice icon I6 of the hat or the notice icon I10 of the fan may be acquired. Then, the third vertical line is deleted, and it is assured that the fan notice icon I10 is stocked.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a4-1), since the second vertical line is cut midway, the lost icon IX is not selected. As shown in FIG. 56 (a4-3), the second vertical line is not cut, so that the icon IX of the loss is selected, and after the Amida effect is finished, FIG. 56 (a4-3a). As shown in FIG. 5, it may be notified that no notice icon is stocked in any display area of the notice icon display area 285.

  It should be noted that in the above-described Amida effect, it is possible to give a pre-reading notice for the variable display of symbols that is the target of the pre-reading, depending on the type of the notice icon arranged at the end point of the horizontal line.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing stepwise another effect example of the notice icon increasing effect. is there. 57, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In addition, in FIG. 57, the third hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is the hold of the symbol variable display that is the target of the prefetch, and the hold display is the display mode of the prefetch notice (the hold icon of Sabohani). The present embodiment is different from the above-described embodiment in that

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (1), the above-mentioned notice icon display area 285 is displayed on the upper part. Note that in FIG. 57 (1), no notice icon is displayed in any area of the notice icon display area 285. Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (1), in the first special symbol display device 212, the symbol variable display is performed, and accordingly, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol and the second ornament. The variable display of the symbols is being performed.

  In addition, in FIG. 57 (1), the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. Therefore, the two holding icons h11 and h12 and the variation icon h0 in FIG. 1 are both displayed in the default display mode (circular unpatterned and white display mode).

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (2), when a game ball wins the first special figure starting opening 230, the third hold icon h13 of special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1. It is displayed to inform that the number of holdings has become three. Here, the third hold is a hold that is the target of prefetching. In this effect example, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice (the display mode of Sabohani) instead of the default display mode.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (3), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 1", and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

  Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 57 (4), the hold icons h11, h12, h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, respectively. The hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 is moved to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold of the special figure 1. It becomes the icon h11, the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 57 (5) shows that the symbol variable display is being continued.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (6), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord's effect is started. Here, the lord's character YM possesses the hat notice icon I6. In this way, in this effect example, in the effect that the notice icon is displayed (stock) in the symbol variation display started next to the symbol variation display that is performed when the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended. The production of a certain lord has started.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (7), the lord's character YM is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position, and then at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (8), the notice icon I6 of the possessed hat is displayed as a notice icon. An effect display that is thrown toward the area 285 is performed.

  Then, the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (9), and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57 (10). On the decorative pattern display device 208, an effect display in which the lord's character YM succeeds in displaying the notice icon and has a happy expression is performed.

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 57 (11) to 57 (12), a display in which the lord's character YM is framed out toward the lower side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (13), the decorative pattern display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

  Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 57 (14), the hold icon which is moved and displayed by the movement animation and which is at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. It moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. ..

  After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (15), the decorative pattern display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and is dislocated. The display result of is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

  Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 57 (16), the hold icon which is moved and displayed by the moving animation and which is at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. It moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. That is, the variable display of the symbols that have been read ahead is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have passed since the variable display of the decorative symbol was started, as shown in FIG. 57 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 is displaying the notice icon first display area YA1. The notice icon digestion effect of digesting the notice icon I6 of the hat is performed. As described above, according to this effect example, it can be said that the prefetching notice by the notice icon and the prefetching notice by the hold icon are simultaneously performed.

  FIG. 58 is a diagram showing step by step an example of the effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and step by step other effect examples of the notice icon increasing effect and digestion effect. FIG. 58, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 58, the third hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is the hold of the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching, but the display mode is For example, like the first hold icon h11, it has a default display mode.

  FIG. 58 (a1) to FIG. 58 (a3-1) show a situation in which a notice effect is given in advance that the notice icon is stocked. As shown in FIG. 58 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 1", and the display of the deviation The result is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also erased. Further, in the notice icon display area 285, no notice icon is displayed in any display area.

  After that, when the symbol variation on the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 58 (a2-1), it is moved and displayed by a moving animation, and the hold is at the display position of the first hold icon h11. The icon moves to the variable icon display area 280 to become the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of special figure 1 and the third hold icon h13. The hold icon at the display position becomes the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 58 (a2-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the placard PL1 for notifying that the notice icon will be stocked in the symbol variation display to be started next. Specifically, on this placard PL1, a notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed following "at the next change", and further, a notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed following this. Warns that the product will be stocked during the next symbol fluctuation display.

  After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses and the variation display is finished, and the next variation display of the special figure 1 is started, for example, a hall effect is performed during the execution of the symbol variation display, As shown in 58 (a3-1), the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. As a result, the player can recognize in advance that the hat notice icon I6 will be stocked, which may allow the player to enjoy the game with peace of mind.

  In addition, in the above-described production example, the placard PL1 is displayed to notify that the notice icon is always stocked. However, for example, a placard PL2 as shown in FIG. 58 (a2-2) is displayed. It may be displayed to notify that the notice icon may not be stocked. Specifically, on this placard PL2, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed following "In the next change", and further, "ga stock" is displayed following this, but the question mark is added. In this case, the notice icon I6 of the hat may be stocked during the next symbol variation display.

  If the notice icon I6 of the hat is not stocked during the next symbol variation display, no production is performed regarding the stock of the notice icon, as shown in FIG. 58 (a3-2). It should be noted that, although production related to the stock of the notice icon (for example, hall effect) may be performed, in this case, so-called gasse stock production in which the notice icon is not stocked is performed.

  FIGS. 58 (b1) to (b3) show that the pre-reading mode, which is one of the pre-reading notices, is being performed during the symbol changing display being executed at the time when the symbol changing display as the pre-reading target is suspended. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (b1), a game ball is won in the first special figure starting port 230 and the symbol variation display which is the target of the prefetch is suspended, and the prefetch notice is displayed as the display mode of the third suspension icon h13. The hold icon in the display mode of Sabohani as the display mode of is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is performed corresponding to the variable display of the special figure 1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (b2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the look-ahead mode, which is an effect of notifying that the symbol variable display that is likely to be a big hit is being held, is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 (b2), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the characters "intense heat approaching" scroll from the right to the left in each of the two strip-shaped scroll display areas. Is displayed.

  After that, when the variable time of the special figure 1 elapses and the variable display ends, and the next variable display of the special figure 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 58 (b3), during the execution of the symbol variable display. The lord's presentation is performed, and the hat notice icon I6 is stocked in the notice icon display area 285. As described above, according to this effect example, it is possible to give a pre-reading notice by changing the background display, in addition to the pre-reading notice by the stock of the notice icon and the pre-reading notice by changing the display mode of the hold icon.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 58 (c1) to 58 (c2), while the symbol variation display which is the target of the look-ahead is suspended, during the symbol variation display that is being executed, the hall effect is performed and the notice icon May be stocked.

  FIG. 58 (d1) to FIG. 58 (d3) show a state in which the notice icon is stocked and consumed while the same symbol variation display is being executed. That is, the stocking and digesting of the notice icon relating to the notice effect being performed during the variable display of the symbol is also executable.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (d1), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 by the lord's effect, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed as the notice icon as shown in FIG. 58 (d2). It is temporarily stocked in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the area 285. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), as shown in FIG. 58 (d3), the notice icon digesting effect is performed and the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (e1) to FIG. 58 (e2), the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown to the notice icon display area 285 by the production of the lord, but it is digested without being stocked in the notice icon display area 285. You may do it.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and shows the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of stepwise. 59, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the public figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 59, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to show that it is the hold of the symbol variable display which is the target of prefetching, but the display mode is For example, like the first hold icon h11, it has a default display mode.

  FIG. 59 (a1) to FIG. 59 (a3) show that the notice icon display area is also used as the area for displaying the stage name for explaining the background display.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (a1), in the decorative pattern display device 208, a stage display area 289 indicating the current stage is provided in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the current stage is “castle town”. There is. In this stage display area 289, in addition to displaying the current stage name, for example, a tutorial display such as the contents of the notice or explanation of the appearing characters may be performed, or the notice may be displayed. Good. In this way, it can be said that the stage display area 289 functions as the explanation display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (a1), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the above-mentioned hall effect is performed and the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (a2), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and displayed, and the notice of "stock" is additionally displayed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked. Is notified.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (a3), the stage display area 289 displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to the notice icon display area 285D, and the notice in the notice icon display area 285D is changed. A hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the first icon display area YA1.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (b1) to FIG. 59 (b3), the stage display area 289 is not changed to the notice icon display area 285D, and the notice icon I6 of the hat that appears due to the lord's effect is not stocked and is kept as it is. It may be digested. As a result, it is possible to perform the digesting effect of the notice icon relating to the notice that is being displayed in the symbol variation display.

  59 (c1) to FIG. 59 (c2) show that a plurality of notice icon display areas are provided and the notice icon display area for displaying the notice icon is selected according to the type of the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (c1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a first notice icon display area 285E is provided at the left end portion of the display screen, and a second notice icon display area is provided at the right end portion of the display screen. 285F is provided. In this effect example, the first notice icon display area 285E is an area in which notice icons other than the button notice icon are displayed, and the second notice icon display area 285F is a display area dedicated to the button notice icon. However, it is not limited to this. The first notice icon display area 285E is provided with four display areas (a notice icon first display area YAL1, a notice icon second display area YAL2, a notice icon third display area YAL3, and a notice icon fourth display area YAL4). The notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YAL1 and the notice icon second display area YAL2, respectively, and the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is shown in the notice icon third display area YAL3. It is displayed. Further, the second notice icon display area 285F also has four display areas (a notice icon first display area YAR1, a notice icon second display area YAR2, a notice icon third display area YAR3, and a notice icon fourth display area YAR4). Is provided, and the notice icon is not displayed in any of the display areas. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, two second button notice icons I11 are enlarged and displayed side by side in the approximate center of the display screen, and a state in which these second button notice icons I11 are stocked is shown. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (c2), the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in each of the notice icon first display area YAR1 and the notice icon second display area YAR2 of the second notice icon display area 285F. In this example of performance, the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in each of the notice icon first display area YAR1, the notice icon second display area YAR2, the notice icon third display area YAR3, and the notice icon fourth display area YAR4. That is, that is, when the second button notice icon I11 is exhausted after the second button notice icon I11 is full in the second notice icon display area 285F, and when the number is smaller than that. Even if the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the second notice icon display area 285F and the second button notice icon I11 is exhausted, the reliability of the jackpot may be different. Well, for example, the greater the number of stocked second button notice icons I11, the greater the It may be configured so as to be easy with. It should be noted that all of the stocked button notice icons I11 may not be consumed, and for example, four button notice icons I11 may be displayed or only two may be consumed. In this case, In, the remaining two button notice icons I11 may be kept in stock until the next symbol variation display, or may be erased without being consumed. The first notice icon display area 285E may also be configured so that the reliability of the big hit varies depending on the number of the notice items stocked.

  59 (d1) to FIG. 59 (d3) show another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (d1), the hat notice icon I6s is displayed in a small size overlapping the change icon h0 and the second hold icon h12, respectively, and the shuriken notice icon I7s is displayed as the first hold. It is displayed in a small size overlaid on the icon h11. That is, in this effect example, an example in which the notice icon is included in the hold icon and may be displayed is shown.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 59 (d2), the notice icon I6s of the reduced-size hat displayed in the variable icon h0 pops out and moves toward the center of the display screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (d3), the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and the word "stock" is additionally displayed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon display area 285. To be done. In addition, in this effect example, the effect of stocking the notice icon displayed in the change icon h0 is performed every time the suspension of the variable display of the symbol is exhausted, but the timing of stocking the notice icon is set to this. Not limited.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 59 (e1), the notice icon may not be displayed on all the variation icons and the hold icons, but may be displayed only on some of the variation icons or the hold icons.

  59 (f1) to FIG. 59 (f3) show an example in which the advance notice icon may not be stocked even though the advance notice icon is displayed on the variable icon h0.

  59 (f1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 59 (d1), and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In this effect example, thereafter, the erasing animation of the variation icon h0 is started at the timing at which the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped at the timing shown in FIG. 59 (f2), and then, as shown in FIG. 59 (f3), the variation icon. Although h0 is deleted, at this time, the notice icon I6s of the hat displayed on the change icon h0 is also deleted together with the change icon h0, and it is notified that the notice icon I6 of the hat is not stocked. As described above, even if the notice icon is displayed on the variable icon or the hold icon, the displayed notice icon may not be stocked.

  59 (g1) to FIG. 59 (g3) show that, when a certain notice icon is consumed, an effect is obtained in which the same effect as when a plurality of notice icons are consumed is obtained.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (g1), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the bouquet notice icon I51 as the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. The notice icon I51 of this bouquet includes two or more icons of the plurality of types of notice icons described above with reference to FIG. 18B. Regarding which notice icon is included, It is difficult to identify.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (g2), when the bouquet notice icon I51 is consumed, the bouquet notice icon I51 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display screen and then is enlarged and displayed. It

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59 (g3), the notice icon I51 of the bouquet changes to the notice icon I6 of the hat and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon, and the kind of the notice icon included in the notice icon I51 of the bouquet is changed. Can be recognized. Therefore, the player may be able to have a sense of expectation as to which type of notice icon is included, while having the pleasure of stocking the notice icon.

  In the embodiments described so far and in the embodiments described below, the notice icon may be continuously displayed even after the symbol is stopped and displayed, and for example, the variable display of symbols is suspended. Not only when the symbol is stopped and displayed in a certain state, but when the notice icon is stocked when the symbol is stopped and displayed in the state where the variable display of the symbol is not held, the stock state even during the demo display May be maintained. Further, the stock state may be maintained as long as the notice icon is stocked, regardless of whether the variable display of symbols is held or not.

  Further, it may be possible to give a notice of the time until the notice icon is displayed.

  Also, the stocked notice icon may be changed or promoted (leveled up). For example, the stocked notice icon I6 of the hat may be changed to the fan notice icon I10. , When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of chances while the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked, the notice icon I6 of the hat may be changed to the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes. .. On the contrary, the stocked notice icon may be demoted (downgraded).

  In addition, the effect display that is performed when the notice icon is consumed may be changed or promoted (leveled up). For example, the effect that the notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed is performed. The production may be changed to the fan advance notice icon I10 while it is being performed, or the pseudo continuous production number may be increased in the pseudo continuous production executed by digesting the hat advance notice icon I6. Good. In addition, conversely, an effect that the effect display performed when the notice icon is consumed may be demoted (level down).

  Even when the button notice icon is displayed, the button hold icon may be displayed, but may not be displayed.

  When the button notice icon is displayed, the button notice may be displayed, but may not be displayed.

  Further, depending on the length of the symbol variation display time, whether or not to give a notice of stocking the notice icon may be determined.

  The length of the variable display time may be the same or different when the notice of stocking the notice icon is not given to the symbol variation display which is a big hit and the symbol variation display which is a loss.

  Further, as the variation display time of the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 2 which is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 1, a variation time of a length in which the notice icon is not stocked may be selected.

  Further, when the symbol variable display of the special figure 1 is interrupted and the symbol variable display of the special figure 2 is executed, the notice of stocking the notice icon may be controlled in a controlled manner.

  Further, when the symbol variable display of the special diagram 1 is interrupted and the symbol variable display of the special diagram 2 is executed, the effect data table may be set not to give the notice of stocking the notice icon.

  Further, in the case where the symbol variable display of the special diagram 1 is interrupted and the symbol variable display of the special diagram 2 is executed, it is possible to select the variation time of the length of stocking the notice icon. Here, the stocked notice icon may be consumed in the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 that has been interrupted, or may be consumed during the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 that has been interrupted.

  When the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of special figure 1, the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display of special figure 1 before the interruption is stocked in the symbol variation display. The notice icon may be kept in stock and not digested, or may be configured to be digested.

  Further, the types of the notice icons are not limited to those described above or those described below, and various types can be adopted.

  For example, an item for customization may be displayed as the notice icon, and when this item for customization is consumed, for example, the number of selectable BGMs, the number of selectable backgrounds, and the selection by the player are made. The number of possible effect modes (for example, one-shot notification mode) may be increased.

  Further, for example, an item for effect selection may be displayed, and when the item for effect selection is consumed, for example, the BGM can be changed, the effect mode can be changed, the volume can be set, and the like. The brightness may be settable.

  Also, for example, a user setting clear item may be displayed, and when this user setting clear item is exhausted, for example, the user setting may be made clear, or the user setting may be cleared. It may be possible to clear after confirming whether or not to do it.

  Further, for example, the effect mode end item may be displayed, and when the effect mode end item is consumed, for example, it is possible to end the look-ahead mode or the effect mode. Alternatively, the end of the prefetch mode or the end of the effect mode may be confirmed before the end.

  In addition, for example, points-acquiring items and level-up gift items may be displayed. When these items are consumed, for example, points may be gifted or the level may be increased. You can

  Further, for example, the reach effect corresponding to the notice icon may be started, and, for example, when the lord's icon is consumed, the lord's VS swordsman reach may be performed.

  Further, for example, the notice effect corresponding to the notice icon may be started. For example, when the present icon is exhausted, the icon of "next notice" is displayed, and the notice effect of "next notice" is displayed. May be started.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon (divination icon) in which fortune-telling is started when digested. In this case, the fortune-telling icon may be displayed only during the customer waiting demonstration effect, or may be displayed other than during the customer waiting demonstration effect.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon that displays information about the island simultaneous production when it is consumed. For example, the countdown to the start of the island simultaneous production may be started, the time until the island simultaneous production is started may be displayed, or the content of the next island simultaneous production may be displayed. Good.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon that can be customized by the store when it is consumed. For example, even if it is possible to set a setting for producing an effect associated with the area of the installed game shop (for example, setting of the Tohoku region mode or the Chubu region mode) or the name of the installed game shop. Good. For example, depending on the setting, a group notice character that appears in the Tohoku region mode (for example, Namahage group) can be different from a group notice character that appears in the Chubu region mode (for example, Sachihoko group). There are cases.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon for which the tutorial display is started when it is consumed.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon for which the roulette effect is started when it is consumed. In the roulette effect, for example, a result indicating that the promotion effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed, a result indicating that a notice about the symbol variable display is given, and the like are displayed.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon that changes the display mode of the symbol or returns to the original state when it is consumed.

  Next, a modified example of the above-described embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. Here, FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of effects that can be executed in the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in stages, and FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating a lottery table related to the notice item. Is.

  FIG. 60 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a first special figure holding lamp 218, and a second special figure holding lamp 220. It should be noted that the universal figure display device 210, the universal figure holding lamp 216, and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 60 (a), the reserved icon display area 281A of special figure 1 and the reserved icon display area 282A of special figure 2 are adjacent to each other below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed as if. In FIG. 60A, the number of reservations is 0 in both special figure 1 and special figure 2. Then, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is stopped and displayed as "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the deviation. Further, a notice icon display area 285A is arranged above the hold icon display area 282A of the special figure 2, and the notice icon Ih of the princess is displayed. Although the notice icons are displayed in the left-justified manner in the notice icon display area 285A, the display position of the notice icon is not limited to this. Further, the notice icon display area 285 may be always displayed, or may not be displayed as necessary.

  In FIG. 60 (b), a state where two game balls have won the first special figure starting port 230 is shown. In the hold icon display area 281A of special figure 1, a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold and a hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold are displayed side by side in the left alignment. Both of these hold icons h11 and h12 have default display modes.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 60 (c), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. In the hold icon display area 281A of Toku-zu 1, since the first hold is exhausted, the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold moves to the left and becomes the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. Is displayed. Further, at this time, since the game ball has won in the second special figure starting port 232, the hold icon h21 corresponding to the first hold is displayed in the left-justified manner in the hold icon display area 282A of the special figure 2. This hold icon h21 has a default display mode.

  Then, when the timing shown in FIG. 60 (d) is reached, the display mode of the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold in FIG. 1 is the display mode of the prefetch notice (the display mode displayed as "heat"). ).

  After the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed, when the timing shown in FIG. 60 (e) is reached, the notice icon It of the lord and the notice icon Ih of the princess are additionally displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. It That is, a display in which the number of advance notice icons increases is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (f), "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the princess notice icon Ih increased after the two princess notice icons Ih is consumed. Then, the princess character HI accompanied by the balloons of "Atari" and "Question mark" is displayed. The appearance timing of the princess character HI may be before, after, or simultaneously with the stop display timing of the left symbol.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (g), after "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, which means that the result is out of alignment. Is notified.

  In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 2 is executed prior to the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 1, so at the timing shown in FIG. 60 (h), the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 2 is started. It In the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, if the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is out of order, the notice icon Will not be digested and the notice icon will not be displayed. Therefore, the notice icon may not be displayed or the notice icon display area 285A may not be displayed while the symbol variable display of the special figure 2 is being performed. In addition, when the result of the variable display of the special figure 2 is a big hit, it is possible not to display the notice icon and increase the display, or to display the notice icon and increase the display. There may be. On the other hand, the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be continuously displayed, or any of the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be hidden, or the hold icon display of special figure 2 may be displayed. Only the area 282A may be displayed. When the symbol variable display of special figure 2 is interrupted and performed, the background may be changed to a dedicated background. When the dedicated background is displayed, the notice icon display area 285A may be hidden and only the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (i), the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3", and it is notified that the result of the variable display of symbols of special figure 2 is out of alignment. ..

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 60 (j), after the suspended variable display of the special figure 1 is started, the notice icon It of the lord is consumed and the "Atari" and "Question mark" are displayed. A lord's character YI appears with a balloon of character notation. The appearance of the lord's character YI may be before, after, or at the same time as the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols. Further, in FIG. 60 (j), the notice icon Id of the evil officer is additionally displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. That is, a display in which the number of advance notice icons increases is displayed. Here, the timing of additionally displaying the notice icon Id of the evil officer may be before or after the display display of the notice icon It of the lord is started, or at the same time. May be

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the notice icon Ih of the princess and the notice icon of the evil officer are displayed. Id is digested, and the princess character HI and the evil protagonist character DI appear. The appearance timing of the princess character HI may be before, after, or simultaneously with the stop display timing of the left symbol. Further, the timing of appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after, or at the same time as the timing of appearance of the evil proxy character DI.

  Then, at the timing of FIG. 60 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display region 208c, "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display region 208b. , It is reported that the big hit.

  Next, the configuration of the lottery table relating to the notice icon for determining whether to execute the increase display and the exhaustion display of the notice icon in this effect example will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (A), when the jackpot determination result executed along with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is a big hit, regardless of the result of the prefetch of the pending of the special figure 1, 4 There is a 50/50 chance of displaying the increase of the lord's notice icon, a 3/50 chance of increasing the princess notice icon, and a 2/50 chance of increasing the evil substitute notice icon. .. On the other hand, 40/50 has a probability of executing the notice display of the Lord's notice icon, 35/50 has a probability of executing the princess notice icon, and has a probability of 25/50 the evil prominent notice icon. Perform the digest display of. In addition, since the execution lottery of the increase display and the exhaustion display is performed for each notice icon, when the increase display is performed for two or more notice icons at the same time, or when the digest display is performed for two or more notice icons at the same time. There is.

  Further, when the result of the big hit determination executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is out of alignment, as a result of the prefetch of the hold in FIG. 1, when the symbol variation display of the big hit is suspended Has a 3/50 chance of displaying the increase of the Lord's notice icon, a 2/50 chance of displaying the increase of the Princess notice icon, and a 1/50 chance of increasing the evil prominent notice icon. Execute the display. Also, on the other hand, there is a 1/50 chance to execute the display of the Lord's notice icon, a 10/50 chance to execute the display of the Princess notice icon, and a 15/50 chance to show the evil representative notice icon. Perform the digest display of.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 61 (B), when the jackpot determination result executed along with the start of the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 2 is a jackpot, regardless of the result of the pending look-ahead of Toku-zu 1 , With a probability of 25/50, increase the notice icon of Tonosama, with a probability of 20/50, increase the notice icon of Hime, and with a probability of 7/50, increase the notice icon of evil officer. Run. On the other hand, there is a 20/50 probability that the Lord's notice icon will be consumed and displayed, a 15/50 probability that the Princess notice icon will be consumed, and a 5/50 probability that the evil representative notice icon will be displayed. Perform the digest display of. In addition, for example, in a normal game state (non-electric power support state), in a pachinko machine that is not supposed to win the second special figure starting port 232, even if the big hit determination result is a big hit, It is also possible not to increase the display of the notice icon of No. and not display the notice of any notice icon.

  Further, if the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the variable display of special figure 2 is out of alignment, regardless of the result of the prefetch of the hold of special figure 1, an increase display is displayed for any of the notice icons. Not performed, and the notice display is not performed for any of the notice icons.

  Note that, for example, when the electric power support state is terminated and one or more suspensions of the symbol variation display of special figure 2 are left, the notice icon is not displayed as a prefetch notice for the special figure 2 suspension. Alternatively, the notice display may be increased and the display may be reduced in accordance with the big hit determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2.

  Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 73.

  62 to 73 are diagrams showing, in a step-by-step manner, modification examples of effects centered on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 62 to 73, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, FIGS. 62 to 73 show an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side in a row. That is, the first decorative pattern display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative pattern display devices, the second decorative pattern display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative pattern display device 208L, and the first decoration The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub display device, and the second decorative symbol display device. The width of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the width direction, and the height is also slightly shorter. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the right edge portion thereof overlaps the front side of the left edge portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has its left edge portion the first. 1 The decorative pattern display device 208N overlaps with the front surface side of the right end portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are respectively configured to be slidable in the directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are in the state of being closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. Note that the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily variable display of the decorative symbol for each display device, and are named for convenience. However, it should be noted that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. Further, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate. . The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light-emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate, and the light from the light-emitting body is reflected forward at the lens cut portion, so that the transmissive region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear as if In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 62 to 73, the light guide plate is provided with a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. In addition, the light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the region where the light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of the light irradiation. Therefore, the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the front side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. 62 to 72, the appearance of the speaker 120 and the effect button 136 is shown.

  FIG. 62: is a figure which shows step by step the other example of the notice icon increase production | generation and digestion production which can be applied to this embodiment, and FIG. 63 is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the production shown in FIG. 62 stepwise. Is.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the variable icon h0 is located at the center thereof. It is displayed in a state of being placed on the pedestal, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 62 (a), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 both have default display modes. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a tutorial display section TT1 serving as an explanation display section is arranged, various information relating to games and effects is displayed (tutorial display), and the content is updated at an appropriate timing. To be done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 62 (a), "The lord is the Yatsushiro Shogun" is displayed, and the explanation about the lord's character is given. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The UI portion is displayed with priority during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and is provided in a region that does not overlap the display region of the first decorative symbol, but with the display region of the first decorative symbol. May overlap. Here, the explanation display section (or the explanation display area) may be a place where a certain thing is displayed, in addition to the pattern of the place itself. Specifically, in a configuration in which the stage name is displayed and it is hot when the stage moves to a certain stage, when the stage name is displayed in red, the display may be an explanation display rather than a notice. Conversely, when the normal stage name is displayed in white, it is not so hot compared with the red stage name display, and this may also be a kind of notice.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display portion ST1 as an explanation display portion for displaying the currently performed stage name and reach name is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 62 (a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the appearance of the lord's character on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are displayed. The lord's character may or may not always be displayed.

  In addition, a family crest accessory 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. ing. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E has a light emitting means such as a full-color LED built therein, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the content of the effect. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a Yashiro actor 224Fa and a general actor 224Fb, which are one of the production movable bodies, are arranged, and can be moved vertically depending on the production contents. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the Yatsushiro 224Fa and the general officer 224Fb each have a light emitting means such as a full-color LED built therein, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the contents of the effect.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (b), when the game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, the third hold icon h13 (third hold icon) of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed to notify that the number of holdings has become three. Here, the third hold is hold of the variable display of symbols that is the target of prefetching. In this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed not in the default display mode but in a prefetch advance notice display mode (for example, a display mode with a blue circle). At this time, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "Pong" to notify that the prefetching notice is displayed by the hold display.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1", and the result of the display is off. Is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1".

  Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 62 (d), the hold icons h11, h12, h13 are respectively moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon in the display position of is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed to be the change icon h0, and the hold icon in the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold icon h11. , The hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and moves to the corresponding pedestal. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62D, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. To be done. In addition, in the tutorial display section TT1, the character display "Tonosama is Yatsushiro Shogun" is still displayed. In this way, the explanation display on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be performed across a plurality of symbol variable displays.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62 (e), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character is started, and the lord's character sets a bomb-like icon (bomb icon) I61. It is shown trying to throw. The bomb icon I61 is an icon that, when thrown by the lord's character, has various effects on the effect. The throwing of the bomb icon I61 may be displayed as an animation in which the displayed notice icon can be specified or cannot be specified. In this case, it may be identifiable from the middle of throwing or may be identifiable from the beginning. In addition, there is an animation related to the notice icon with high jackpot expectation when digested (high expectation notice icon) and an animation related to the notice icon with lower expectation of jackpot when digested than the high expectation notice animation. The animation display modes may be the same or different.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 62 (f), the appearance of the lord's character throwing the bomb icon I61 is shown.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (g), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as "The Lord is Yatsushiro Shogun" has been changed to "Due to the notice icon being exhausted ..." There is an explanation of what happens. The timing at which the display on the tutorial display section TT1 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or the bomb icon I61. The timing may be before the movement from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L of the bomb icon I61. The timing may be after the movement to. In this way, in the tutorial display section TT1, a plurality of types of explanation display may be displayed in one symbol variable display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62 (h), after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character bursts, the burst bomb icon I61 changes to a swordsman's notice icon I62 at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (i). .. The swordsman's notice icon I62 is an icon for giving a notice to shift to the swordsman reach, as described later. Further, when the swordsman's notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “Don” to inform that effect. Here, the notice icon may have a combination of 1 to 1 to many to many (for example, N to N).

Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (j), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed in a reduced size and is arranged at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display section TT1. Then, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "paquin" to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62 (k), the character's character throws the bomb icon I61. The animation ends. In this way, since the swordsman's notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, it may be difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display section TT1. Here, it is difficult to visually recognize that it is more difficult to visually recognize than when the notice icon is not in a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. To put it another way, by making the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlap the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, it is easy for the player to draw attention to the display of the tutorial display section TT1 and the swordsman's notice icon I62. May be possible. In addition, it may be possible to notice the existence of the tutorial or to concentrate on the symbol variation display rather than the presentation explanation that may occur in the future.
The position of the swordsman's notice icon I62 may be arranged not only at the position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1 but also at a position near the tutorial display section TT1. Sometimes you can get. Further, the content indicated by the character display displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 may be, for example, the content related to the swordsman's notice icon I62, or the content not related to the swordsman's notice icon I62 at all. The content may be content related to the current performance, or content not related to the current performance. In FIG. 62 (j), although the content of the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is a display relating to the notice icon and is related to the notice icon I62 of the swordsman, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is displayed. Although it is not displayed in connection with, but is related to the content of the explanation by accident, the content of the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is determined in accordance with the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62. It may be configured to be performed. When displaying the tutorial display along with the notice icon, the tutorial display may be displayed before the notice icon, the notice icon may be displayed before the tutorial display, or the tutorial display and the notice icon may be displayed. You may display simultaneously. The swordsman's notice icon I62 arranged so as to overlap the tutorial display portion TT1 is digested in the pattern variation display which is the target of prefetching, as described later. In addition, the swordsman's notice icon I62 may be consumed in the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display of the prefetch target. As a result, the overlap with the tutorial display section TT1 is resolved before the pattern variation display, which is the target of prefetching, is started. It should be noted that, in this example of performance, the one in which the notice icon is stocked in the tutorial display portion TT1 has been described, but the notice icon may be stocked in the stage name display portion ST1.

  After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (l), in the first decorative pattern display device 208L, the first decorative pattern is the decorative pattern of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". The combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". Further, as shown in FIG. 62 (l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the tutorial display portion TT1 is changed from "the notice icon is exhausted ..." to "Panda is the master of the lord". , The relationship between the lord's character and the panda character is explained. That is, in this effect example, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 may be changed to a new content while the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed overlapping the tutorial display section TT1. In other words, it can be said that a new explanation display is started with the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlapping the tutorial display portion TT1. Note that the display change timing of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the decorative design is stopped and displayed, or may be the timing before the timing at which the decorative design is stopped and displayed, The timing may be later than the timing at which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. If the display change timing of the tutorial display section TT1 is earlier than the timing at which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the tutorial display section TT1 displays a plurality of explanatory displays in one symbol variable display. It can be said that it may be started.

  FIG. 62 (m) shows a state in which the symbol variation display that is performed immediately before the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 5-decoration 6", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also erased. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 5-decoration 6". Further, as shown in FIG. 62 (m), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 is changed from "Panda is the master of the lord" to "When Yatsushiro moves ..." It is explained that something happens when the Yatsushiro 224Fa and the general 224Fb operate.

  Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 62 (n), the hold icon h11 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and is displayed at the display position of the first hold icon h11. The suspended icon is placed on the pedestal on which the variable icon is displayed to become the variable icon h0. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (n), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. To be done.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (o), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol of "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, to form the reach state. To be done.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (p), the swordsman's notice icon I62 starts swinging, which fuels an expectation as to whether or not the swordsman's notice icon I62 will be consumed. By doing so, it may be possible to make the player long for the notice icon to be used soon. At this time, the effect display is performed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in accordance with the swing of the swordsman's notice icon I62. The effect display may not be performed. This effect display depends on the character display portion of the tutorial display section TT1, and therefore, the explanation display may be able to be focused on.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (q), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the swinging swordsman's notice icon I62 moves upward and is shown to be digested. At this time, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “paquin” to notify that the notice icon has been consumed. As a result, the overlapping state due to the swordsman's notice icon I62 on the tutorial display section TT1 may be resolved, and the player may be able to easily see the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 63 (a) subsequent to FIG. 62 (q), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays to notify that the super reach (swordsman reach) will be developed. That is, in this example of performance, the development of the swordsman reach is announced by the digestion of the swordsman notice icon I62. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image, which shows that the swordsman reach has a high reliability for the big hit. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate overlaps the tutorial display section TT1, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize.

  FIG. 63 (c) shows that a swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to Swordsman Reach, and the second decorative symbol display. On the stage name display portion ST1 of the device 208M, the character display of "Swordsman Reach" is displayed. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation of a duel scene is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 63 (c), a state in which the lord's character and the swordsman character confront each other is displayed. In the swordsman reach, the UI portion is framed out downward, and therefore the display position of the variable icon h0 is moved downward. At this time, the UI unit may frame out after the hold icon is erased, or the UI unit may frame out together with the hold icon. In addition to the hold icon, when the explanation display is being performed, the UI may be framed out after the hold icon and the explanation display are erased at the same time. Here, the timing at which the hold icon and the explanation display are deleted may be different.

  In FIG. 63 (d), the animation of the duel scene continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 63 (e), the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It notifies that the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 has started, and prompts the player to operate the effect button 136. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 built in the effect button 136 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, light emission in red) indicating that it is in the operation acceptance state. The timing at which the light emission mode of the chance button lamp 138 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed, or may be before the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed. Alternatively, it may be after the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 63 (f), as shown in FIG. 63 (g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the player goes up with "Iku". The cut-in image to which the character display of "ze" is added is displayed over the animation display of the duel scene.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63 (h), the protagonist's lord is defeated by the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 63 (i), both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2". The combination of decorative patterns is derived and the swing fluctuation is started.

  After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 has elapsed, the first decorative pattern displayed on the third decorative pattern display device 208N is displayed as “decoration 2” on the first decorative pattern display device 208L at the timing shown in FIG. 63 (j). -Decoration 3-decoration 2 "is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns, and the display result of the off is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2". If a notice icon for displaying a lost image and then performing a revival (for example, the fan notice icon I10 described above) is stocked, the background display is changed from the background of the swordsman reach to the background of the castle town, which is a normal background. It may be digested after returning.

  64: is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the notice icon increase production | generation and digestion production which can be applied to this embodiment, and FIG. 65 is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the production shown in FIG. 64 in stages. Is. Since FIGS. 64 (a) to 64 (l) are the same as FIGS. 62 (a) to 62 (l), the description thereof is omitted here.

  FIG. 64 (m) shows a state in which the symbol variable display that is performed immediately before the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 64 (m), the notice icon pattern CS (may be referred to as "decoration C") displayed as "C" in the middle symbol display area 208b is stopped and displayed, and "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration" The temporary stop display is made with a combination of decorative patterns of "6". When this notice icon pattern CS is displayed in a derived manner, it has a function of notifying that a chance-up notice icon I63 described later is stocked. When the notice icon design CS is displayed, the chance-up notice icon I63 may be always stocked, or the chance-up notice icon I63 may not be stocked. Further, the notice icon design CS may include an image (including the enlarged / reduced image itself) imitating the notice icon I63 of increasing the chance, and it may be moved to the notice icon display area. That is, unlike the throwing animation, the notice icon acquisition animation based on the pattern may be any noticeable display of the notice icon. In addition, there may be some that do not correspond, such as the notice icon design CS and the chance-up notice icon I63. Further, the types of notice icons displayed as symbols may be larger or smaller than the types of notice icons not displayed as symbols. The type of the notice icon displayed at the moment of the animation (for example, throwing animation) related to the lord's character is the notice displayed at the moment of the animation related to the symbol (for example, animation performed when the notice icon symbol CS is displayed). It may be different from the type of icon, and at least some of the notice icons may be icons that are displayed when both animations are triggered. A certain notice icon may be displayed as both a design and a mini character. For example, the pseudo-announcement icon may be displayed at two triggers, and two fluctuations may be stocked at different triggers with one change, or may not be displayed. Further, in the second decorative symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in any symbol row. Although the variable icon h0 is erased here, it may be displayed. Further, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 has been changed from "Panda is the master of the lord" to "When General Yatsushiro moves ...".

  As described above, when the notice icon design CS is derived and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, as shown in FIG. 64 (n), the chance up notice icon I63 pops out from the notice icon design CS, and FIG. ), It is moved to the right side of the swordsman's notice icon I62 at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1 and arranged (stock). Then, the speaker 120 outputs a voice of "Paquine" to notify that the advance notice icon I63 for increasing the chance is stocked. At the timing when the chance-up notice icon I63 pops out, there is no particular notification by voice output. This is because it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the advance notice icon I63 for increasing the chances of being stocked is derived by deriving the advance notice icon design CS, but it is also possible to give a notification by voice. As described above, in this effect example, it may be possible to make it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the characters displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 by using the plurality of notice icons. Further, according to this effect example, a plurality of notice icons can be stocked. In addition, in this example of performance, the swordsman's notice icon I62 and the chance up notice icon I63 have different triggers for stocking. Therefore, the contents of the production until stocking differ from each other.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 64 (p), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration 6", and the result of the display is off. Is confirmed. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration 6".

  Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 64 (q), the hold icon h11 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and is at the display position of the first hold icon h11. The suspended icon is placed on the pedestal on which the variable icon is displayed to become the variable icon h0. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (q), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. To be done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (a) following FIG. 64 (q), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol of “decoration 2” is stopped in each of the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c. It is displayed and the reach state is formed.

  Thereafter, the swordsman's notice icon I62 starts swinging at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (b). At this time, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect display displayed in accordance with the swing of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed on the right side of the swordsman's notice icon I62 in addition to the character display portion of the tutorial display section TT1. In some cases, it can be noted that the chance-up notice icon I63 is stocked in addition to the explanation display.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the swinging swordsman's notice icon I62 moves upward and is shown to be digested. At this time, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “paquin” to notify that the notice icon has been consumed. In this production example, the overlapping state of the swordsman's notice icon I62 on the tutorial display section TT1 is eliminated, but the chance-up notice icon I63 is still overlapping the tutorial display section TT1. Further, when the swordsman's notice icon I62 is consumed, a predetermined effect display is displayed around the swordsman's notice icon I62 to make the swordsman's notice icon I62 stand out. As shown, this effect display is on the tutorial display section TT1 and the chance-up notice icon I63, and in some cases, the explanation display and the chance-up notice icon I63 can also draw attention.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 65 (d), the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L gives a display notifying that the swordsman reach will be developed. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (e), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate overlaps the tutorial display section TT1, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize. In addition, the pattern formed on this light guide plate also overlaps with the chance-up notice icon I63 that was not digested by the time the super-reach (swordsman reach) transitioned, and the display state of the chance-up notice icon I63. May be difficult to see. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 65 (e), a part of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is hidden by the pattern formed on the light guide plate and the chance-up notice icon I63. There is. Here, since a predetermined interval is provided between the light guide plate and the decorative pattern display device, it is possible to avoid the overlap due to the pattern formed on the light guide plate depending on the position viewed by the player, In some cases, the chance-up notice icon I63 can be made easily visible.

  FIG. 65 (f) shows that a swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to Swordsman Reach, and the second decorative symbol display. On the stage name display portion ST1 of the device 208M, the character display of "Swordsman Reach" is displayed. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation of a duel scene is being performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (f), a state in which the lord's character and the swordsman character confront each other is displayed. In the swordsman reach, the UI part is framed out downward, and therefore the display position of the change icon h0 is moved downward, but the advance notice icon I63 of chance up is not affected by it and the display position is changed. Not changed.

  In FIG. 65 (g), the animation of the duel scene continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (h), the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. .. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a light emission mode (e.g., red light emission) indicating that it is in the operation acceptance state. Here, the chance-up notice icon I63 starts oscillating, which fuels an expectation as to whether or not the chance-up notice icon I63 is consumed. At this time, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect display is performed in accordance with the swing of the advance icon I63 of the chance up.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (i), as shown in FIG. 65 (j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the “up The cut-in image (first cut-in image) to which the character display of “ze” is added is displayed in an overlapping manner on the animation display of the duel scene.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the swaying chance advance notice icon I63 moves upward and is shown to be digested.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (l), the second cut-in image in which the display image extends in the upper right direction is displayed in an overlapping manner on the first cut-in image because the angle of the lord's face is different, and the big hit occurs. It has been reported that the reliability of That is, it is shown that the notice by the cut-in image is ranked up by digesting the notice icon I63 for increasing the chance. The first cut-in image may be deleted when the second cut-in image is displayed, that is, the first cut-in image may be replaced with the second cut-in image for display. May be. When another notice icon is stocked when the second cut-in image is displayed, the second cut-in image may overlap the notice icon that is stocked. , The second cut-in image may be overlapped with the stocked notice icon, or the second cut-in image may not be overlapped with the stocked notice icon, The second cut-in image may not be overlapped with the stocked notice icon. In the embodiment described so far and the embodiment described below, the timing at which the digested notice icon is deleted is the same as the timing at which execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started. It may be the timing before the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started, or the timing after the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started. Further, in this example of performance, the notice icon overlaps the tutorial display section TT1 when the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed, but is displayed when the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed. However, they do not overlap. That is, the stocked notice icon has a predetermined area to be displayed, and may overlap with another image at one trigger, but may not overlap with another image at one trigger. You can When the chance-up notice icon I63 is used for the promotion of the button display shown in FIG. 65 (h), the notice icon is consumed and disappeared before the start of the cut-in display which is another promotion target. It may or may not disappear.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (m), the main character wins over the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 65 (n), both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". The combination of the decorative patterns is derived and the swing fluctuation is started.

  After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed as "decoration 2" on the first decorative symbol display device 208L at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (o). -Decoration 2-decoration 2 "is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative patterns, and the jackpot display result is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2".

  FIG. 66 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the notice icon increasing effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 66, after the notice icon is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slid so that the displayed notice icon is conveyed to the stock position. It shows how they are doing.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 66 (a1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 66 (a1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the treasure box image TR is displayed above the display screen, and as described later, there is a case where an effect display in which the notice icon appears from the treasure box image TR is performed. In addition, in this effect example, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged below the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and is displayed as "Due to announcement of notice icon ...". In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned family crest actor 224E is arranged, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yashiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb are disposed. Has been done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (a2), in the third decorative pattern display device 208N, the lid of the treasure chest image TR is opened, and the bomb icon I61 is shown protruding downward from the inside. In the tutorial display section TT1, the explanation display has been changed from "Due to the announcement of the notice icon ..." to "Swordsman is your nemesis." The timing of changing the explanation display on the tutorial display section TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure chest image TR, or may be the timing before the timing at which the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure chest image TR. It may be present, or may be at a timing later than the timing at which the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure chest image TR.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (a3), the bomb icon I6 that pops out of the treasure chest image TR bursts. This burst effect display overlaps the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, and it may be difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display section TT1. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 66 (a4), the exploded bomb icon I61 changes to the swordsman's notice icon I62. At this time, since the swordsman notice icon I62 overlaps the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, at least a part of the characters displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to see. Then, when the swordsman's notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "PAKINE" to notify that effect, indicating that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (a5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides leftward along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (a6), the third decorative symbol display device 208N heads toward the initial position so that the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is maintained on the display coordinates in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Slide to the right. That is, a mode in which the swordsman's notice icon I62 is not moving at a certain position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (that is, the swordsman's notice icon I62 is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L). The swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed while moving the third decorative symbol display device 208N in a manner (as if going forward). At the timing shown in FIG. 66 (a6), a state in which the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown. When the swordsman's notice icon I62 completely moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the overlap of the swordsman's notice icon I62 on the tutorial display portion TT1 is eliminated. After that, the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to slide rightward toward the initial position and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. 66 (a7).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 66 (b1) to 66 (b8), another example of the notice icon increasing effect performed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 66 (b1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode. In addition, in this example of production, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged in the lower right portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the explanation display "Swordsman is the Lord's nemesis" is displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 66 (b1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the treasure box image TR is displayed below the display screen, and an effect display in which the notice icon appears from the treasure box image TR may be displayed. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned family crest actor 224E is arranged, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yashiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb are disposed. Has been done.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (b2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the lid of the treasure chest image TR is opened, and a state in which the bomb icon I61 jumps out upward is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (b3), the bomb icon I6 jumping out of the treasure box image TR is changed to the enlarged swordsman notice icon I62, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (b4), the treasure box image TR. Is erased. At this time, the speaker 120 outputs a sound "PAKINE" for notifying that, and notifies that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked. The timing of voice output from the speaker 120 may be the same as the timing of changing from the bomb icon I6 to the swordsman's notice icon I62, or more than the timing of changing from the bomb icon I6 to the swordsman's notice icon I62. It may be the previous timing, the timing later than the timing of changing from the bomb icon I6 to the swordsman's notice icon I62, or the timing before the treasure chest image TR is erased. The timing may be the same as the timing at which the treasure box image TR is deleted, or may be the timing after the treasure box image TR is deleted.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (b5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides leftward along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, the lower end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps with the UI portion on the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed in the lower right portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, as shown in FIG. 66 (b5), the portion overlapping the UI unit displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed, and the tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed. Therefore, the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, so that at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 is difficult to see. May be

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (b6), the third decorative symbol display device 208N is heading toward the initial position so that the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is maintained on the display coordinates in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Slide to the right. That is, a mode in which the swordsman's notice icon I62 is not moving at a certain position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (that is, the swordsman's notice icon I62 is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L). The swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed while moving the third decorative symbol display device 208N in a manner (as if going forward). At the timing shown in FIG. 66 (b6), the state in which the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown. Even after that, the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to slide rightward toward the initial position and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. 66 (b7). When the third decorative symbol display device 208N returns to the initial position, the overlap by the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the tutorial display section TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 108L is eliminated, and the player is The explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be easily visible.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (b8), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed in a reduced size and is arranged at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display section TT1. Then, the speaker 120 outputs a sound of "Paquine" to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked. In this way, since the swordsman's notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, it may be difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display section TT1.

  In addition, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 66 (b5 ′), for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (b5 ′), the heights of the lower end edges of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are at least the first decorative symbol display device. When the tutorial display section TT1 displayed on 208L is higher than the displayed position, even if the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides and overlaps the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed. On the other hand, since it is possible to create a state in which they do not overlap, for example, the third decorative symbol display device 208N displaying the notice icon is in the vicinity of the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Since it slides with, the third decorative pattern is displayed while visually checking the display state of the tutorial display section TT1. There is a case that can be seen also directed by location 208N.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 66, when the notice icon is displayed in the tutorial display portion TT1, after sliding the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the notice icon is displayed as the third decorative symbol display device 208N. May be overlapped with each other, and an effect display may be performed such that the notice icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N and carried. As a result, when the notice icon is carried by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the overlapping state of the notice icon on the tutorial display section TT1 is eliminated, and the explanation display may be easily visible.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 67, the tutorial display unit TT1 is normally framed out, and when the explanation display is performed, it is shown that it is framed in from below.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI section is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI section, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 67 (a1), since three variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, three suspension icons h11, h12, h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the read-ahead notice display mode. There is. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 67 (a1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

  Further, the family crest actor 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb described above. Are arranged. At the timing shown in FIG. 67 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed on any of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. ..

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 67 (a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-in of the tutorial display unit TT1 is started from below the right frame of the display screen, and then shown in FIG. 67 (a3). The tutorial display section TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position at a timing, and "Torama is Yatsushiro Shogun" is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 at a timing shown in FIG. 67 (a4).

  After that, when the display by the tutorial display unit TT1 is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the tutorial display unit TT1 moves downward as shown in FIGS. 67 (a5) to (a6), and the first decorative pattern. Frame out from the display device 208L. The explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be deleted before the animation for frame-out starts, may be deleted at the timing when the animation for frame-out starts, or frame-out. It may be deleted at a timing after the animation starts, or may be displayed until the frame out of the tutorial display section TT1 is completed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (a7), for example, after the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked in the same manner as shown in FIG. 62 (e) to FIG. 62 (j) and then shown in FIG. 67 (a8). As shown, the dropping animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character ends.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 67 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-in by the tutorial display unit TT1 is restarted from below the right side frame of the display screen, and then, in FIG. 67 (a10). At the timing shown, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position. At this time, the tutorial display portion TT1 is arranged on the back side of the stocked swordsman's notice icon I62, and as a result, overlaps with the swordsman's notice icon I62.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 67 (a11), the tutorial display section TT1 displays the explanation display "Due to the completion of the notice icon ...", but the tutorial display section TT1 is overlapped by the notice icon I62 of the swordsman. Therefore, at least a part of the explanation display is hidden, which makes it difficult to visually recognize.

  After that, when the display by the tutorial display section TT1 is performed for a predetermined time, an animation in which the tutorial display section TT1 is framed out starts, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67 (a12), the tutorial display section by the swordsman's notice icon I62. The overlap condition with TT1 is eliminated. If the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is maintained until the tutorial display section TT1 is framed out, the explanation display may be easily visible due to the elimination of the overlap state. Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (a13), when the tutorial display unit TT1 completely frames out from the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-out animation ends.

  Further, also in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 67 (b1) to FIG. 67 (b2), even if the notice icon is consumed and rises during the period in which the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed, the notice icon is used. The overlapped state on the tutorial display section TT1 is eliminated. 67 (b1) to FIG. 67 (b2) are as described above with reference to FIGS. 62 (p) to 62 (q), and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 68 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 68, in addition to the tutorial display on the tutorial display unit TT1, the tutorial display is also shown in the conversation effect of the character.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a1), since three variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, three suspension icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the read-ahead notice display mode. There is. In addition, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 68 (a1) displays that "Tonosama is a Yatsushiro shogun". In this production example, the tutorial display section TT1 may be referred to as a first tutorial display section. Furthermore, in this effect example, a balloon CH TT2 as a second tutorial display section (explanation display section) is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L together with the character CH1 of Princess Chibi. The princess Chibi character CH1 and the balloon portion TT2 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a dialogue effect) is performed, such as a tutorial display (explanation display) or a notice display. At the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a1), the balloon section TT2 displays the explanation that “gold is hotter than red”, and the explanation about the advance notice to be given in the pachinko machine 100 is given. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The blowing portion TT2 may overlap the first decorative pattern in some cases, but may be arranged at a position where they do not overlap. Further, the hold icon is not displayed in the balloon section TT2 or the balloon section TT3 described later. Further, the same display as the display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed on the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. Further, the tutorial display section TT1 may have a display area larger or smaller than that of the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. Further, the tutorial display section TT1 may have a character font larger or smaller than that of the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. The fonts may be the same or different between the tutorial display section TT1 and the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. Although the balloons TT2 and TT3 may overlap with the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern is configured not to overlap in the display area for performing other description display, but may overlap. In the tutorial display section TT1, the frequency of explanation display may be lower or higher than that in the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. Further, both the tutorial display section TT1 and the balloon sections TT2 and TT3 may be display areas partitioned by lines, or one or both of them may be display areas not partitioned by lines.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 68 (a1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

  Further, the family crest actor 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb described above. Are arranged.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a2), the balloon portion TT2 is erased together with the Chibihime character CH. Also, the decorative pattern is still in variable display. Thus, unlike the tutorial display section TT1, the balloon section TT2 is configured not to be displayed across a plurality of symbol variable displays. The balloon section TT2 may also be configured to be able to be displayed across a plurality of symbol variable displays.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the first decorative symbol as a stop in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1", and the display result is out of alignment. Is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1". The tutorial display section TT1 still displays "Tonosama is Yatsushiro Shogun".

  Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 68 (a4), the hold icons h11, h12, h13 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, respectively, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon in the display position of is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed to be the change icon h0, and the hold icon in the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold icon h11. , The hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and moves to the corresponding pedestal. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (a4), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. To be done. In addition, in the tutorial display section TT1, the character display "Tonosama is Yatsushiro Shogun" is still displayed. In this way, the explanation display on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be performed across a plurality of symbol variable displays.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68 (a5), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character is started, and the state that the lord's character tries to throw the bomb icon I61 is shown. Has been done. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the princess Chibi character CH1 is displayed again together with the balloon portion TT2 on the left side of the display screen, and the conversation effect is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a5), an explanation display "Swordsman reach is hot" is displayed in the balloon portion TT2, and an explanation regarding a specific super reach is given. The timing at which the balloon portion TT2 is displayed may be the timing before the throwing animation is started, the timing at which the throwing animation is started, or the timing after the throwing animation is started. It may be.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a6), a state in which the lord's character has thrown the bomb icon I61 is shown. Further, as shown in FIG. 68 (a6), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the balloon GTT1 and the balloon portion TT3 as the third tutorial display portion (explanation display portion) are displayed on the right side of the display screen. ing. The grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 are displays that may be displayed when the conversation effect (or the dialogue effect) is performed, and a tutorial display (explanation display), a notice display, or the like is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a6), the explanation display "When the panda rushes in" is displayed in the balloon unit TT3, and the notice effect is explained. Here, the blowing portion TT3 overlaps on the front surface side of the first decorative pattern, but may be arranged at a position that does not overlap. The timing at which the balloon portion TT3 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the lord's character throws the bomb icon I61, or the timing before the timing at which the lord's character throws the bomb icon I61. Alternatively, the timing may be later than the timing at which the lord's character throws the bomb icon I61. The conversation effect by the princess Chibi character CH1 and the grandfather character GY1 may be performed by operating the effect button 136.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a7), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as "The Lord is the Yatsushiro Shogun" is changed to "Due to the notice icon being exhausted ...". Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a7), the bomb icon I61 is at a position overlapping the front side of the balloon TT3, and at least a part of the characters displayed in the balloon TT3 may be difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to draw attention to the display of the balloon TT3 and the bomb icon I61. The timing at which the explanation display on the tutorial display section TT1 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon section TT3, or the bomb icon I61 overlaps on the front side of the balloon section TT3. The timing may be before the timing, or may be after the timing when the bomb icon I61 overlaps with the front surface side of the blowing portion TT3.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68 (a8), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character bursts. At this time, the effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded may be located at a position overlapping the front side of the balloon TT3, and at least a part of the characters displayed in the balloon TT3 may be difficult to visually recognize.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a9), the exploded bomb icon I61 changes to a swordsman's notice icon I62. At this time, the swordsman's notice icon I62 may be positioned so as to overlap the front side of the balloon TT3, and at least part of the characters displayed in the balloon TT3 may be difficult to see. Further, when the swordsman's notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “Don” to inform that effect. As described above, in this effect example, there is a case where only one of the two displayed conversation effect displays (speech bubble section TT2 and speech bubble section TT3) is overlapped by another image. It is configured.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (a10), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed in a reduced size, and is arranged at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display section TT1. Then, the speaker 120 outputs a voice of "Paquine" to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked. At this time, the swordsman notice icon I62 overlaps at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. As described above, the swordsman's notice icon I62 may overlap with the plurality of display units (the tutorial display unit TT1 and the balloon unit TT3) on which the explanation is displayed.

  68 (a1) to FIG. 68 (a10), an explanation display (tutorial display) for explaining the effect is displayed in the balloon (the balloon section TT2 and the balloon section TT3) displayed together with the character. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), the display mode of the balloon TT2 is changed (for example, the background color of the balloon TT2 is changed to red), and the word "intense heat" is displayed. In some cases, such as displaying, the notice display or the prefetch notice display in the symbol variation display may be performed.

  68 (c1) to 68 (c3) show another example of the contents displayed in the tutorial display section TT1.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (c1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol of “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. It is shown that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has started rocking. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1, the explanation display "Panda is master of lord" is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (c2), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the swinging swordsman's notice icon I62 has moved upward and is being digested. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (c3), the display on the tutorial display section TT1 has been changed from "Panda is Master of the Lord" to "Development into Swordsman Reach", and an explanation display of the event that will occur (live commentary) Is displayed). With this configuration, the player may be able to easily understand what happens when the swordsman's notice icon I62 is digested. Note that at the timing of FIG. 68 (c3), the speaker 120 outputs a voice of "Paquine" to notify that the notice icon has been consumed.

  It should be noted that, in the above-described production example, the tutorial display unit TT1 has been described as having a function of performing an explanation display of the production, but for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (d), the display mode of the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed. While changing (for example, making the background color of the tutorial display section TT1 red) and displaying the character "intense heat", a notice display or a look-ahead notice display in the symbol variation display may be performed. Good.

  FIG. 69 is a diagram showing, in stages, another effect example of the notice icon increasing effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 69, it is shown that the UI unit is displayed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L with the variable icon display region, the hold icon display region, the tutorial display unit TT4, and the stage name display unit ST2 being integrated. Has been done. Further, when the notice icon is stocked, it is shown that the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2 is erased. Even in this example of performance, when the super reach is reached, the UI portion is framed out below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but is displayed without being framed out even when the super reach is reached. You can leave it alone.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit surrounded by a rectangular frame is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. The UI section shown in FIG. 69 (a1) has a hold icon display area formed in the center thereof. The hold icon display area is partitioned by four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. Further, a variable icon display area is formed in the upper center of the UI section, and the variable icon is displayed in such a manner that it is placed on a frame formed by the UI section. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (a1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 both have default display modes. Further, a tutorial display section TT4 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display section ST2 is arranged on the left side of the hold icon display area. Since the functional configurations of the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display section TT1 and the stage name display section ST1 described above, the description thereof is omitted here. Note that the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 69 (a1) displays "Due to the notice icon being exhausted ...", and the stage name display section ST2 displays "Castle town stage". It is reported that the current stage is a castle town. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the appearance of the lord's character on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest actor 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general actor symbol. 224Fb is arranged.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (a2), when the game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, the third hold icon (third hold icon h13) of the special figure 1 in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed to notify that the number of holdings has become three. Here, the third hold is hold of the variable display of symbols that is the target of prefetching. In this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed not in the default display mode but in a prefetch advance notice display mode (for example, a display mode with a blue circle).

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (a3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1", and the result of the display is off. Is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is not deleted, but it may be deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1".

  Thereafter, the symbol variation on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 69 (a4), the throwing animation is performed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This throwing animation is similar to the throwing animation shown in FIGS. 62 (e) to 62 (k) and described above.

  In FIG. 69 (a5), after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character ruptures, the blasted bomb icon I61 changes to a princess's notice icon I64, and while being reduced, it moves to the stage name display portion ST2. 69 (a5), although it overlaps with the stage name display portion ST2 at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (a5), it does not reach the predetermined display position (stock position). .. In this case, since the princess' notice icon I64 is not yet displayed on the stage name display portion ST2, the explanation display of "Castle Town Stage" is displayed, and at least a part of the princess notice icon I64 is displayed. It is difficult to see. Note that the explanation display may be erased before the notice icon overlaps the stage name display portion ST2. Further, in the case of the notice icon related to the notice icon pattern CS (see FIG. 64), the explanation display is erased based on the opportunity of acquisition of the notice icon, such as the explanation display being erased before overlapping with the stage name display portion ST2. May be erased at different timings. The throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 may be an animation in which the bomb icon moves to the stage name display unit. Further, a pattern (so-called gasse) in which the notice icon is not acquired may be provided after the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61. For example, the bomb icon I61 may not pass through the stage name display portion ST2 and the notice icon may not be acquired. In this case, the explanation display may not be erased even when the bomb icon I61 overlaps with the stage name display portion ST2 (that is, in the case of a gasse pattern, the explanation display is not erased. In the true pattern in which the notice icon is acquired, for example, the explanation display may be erased when the bomb icon I61 overlaps the stage name display portion ST2. In the case where the UI part is hidden during the darkening effect, at least part of the process from the start of the bomb icon throwing animation to the acquisition of the notice icon and the gaze are executed when the darkening effect is being executed. Specifically, after the bomb icon I61 throwing animation is started, the blackout effect is displayed. When the darkening effect is finished and the UI part is re-displayed, the notice icon is acquired (state in which the explanation display is disappeared from state in which the explanation display is displayed). At this time, at least one of the sound and the lamp effect may be performed, or both may not be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69 (a6), when the princess notice icon I64 is displayed at a predetermined display position on the stage name display portion ST2, the “castle town” that has been displayed until now on the stage name display portion ST2. The explanation display of “Stage” is deleted, and it functions as an area for displaying the notice icon. Therefore, the characters "STOCK" are displayed above the stage name display portion ST2. That is, according to this effect example, when the notice icon is stocked in the stage name display portion ST2, the stage name is not displayed. Note that the scene in which the notice icon is consumed and the execution of the above-described darkening effect may be configured to overlap. Further, when the notice icon is acquired, the movable means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.) performs an effect of moving, so that the movable means acquires the notice icon. Or configured to overlap with at least a part of the previously-obtained notice icons (at least one of the plurality of notice icons, the whole notice icon, a part of one notice icon, etc.) You may. Further, the movable means is moved so as to move during at least a part of the period from the start to the end of the bombing animation of the bomb icon I61, and at least a part of the explanation display is overlapped by the movable means. Good. That is, the visibility of the explanation display may be changed by the movable means before the notice icon is displayed, and the visibility of the explanation display may be changed by the notice icon after the notice icon is displayed.

  After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (a7), in the first decorative pattern display device 208L, the first decorative pattern is the decorative pattern of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". The combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. Further, also on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2".

  Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 69 (a8), the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by a moving animation, respectively, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the position becomes the change icon h0 in the change icon display area, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69 (a8), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. To be done. Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a8), the stage is changed with the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the background display is changed from the castle town to the coast. That is, in this production example, the stage can be changed even when the stage name display portion ST2 is in the non-display state, and when the stage name display portion ST2 is in the non-display state, the stage name after the change is displayed. No display is made. When the stage is changed, the changed stage name may be displayed for a predetermined time on the stage name display portion ST2, and then the stage name may be erased and the notice icon may be displayed.

  FIG. 69 (a9) shows a state in which five notice icons are stocked. That is, up to three notice icons can be displayed on the stage name display portion ST2, but when the fourth notice icon is stocked, it is also displayed on the tutorial display portion TT4. In this case, the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 is erased, and it functions as an area for displaying the notice icon. That is, according to this effect example, when the notice icon is stocked in the tutorial display section TT4, the tutorial display (explanation display) is not performed. In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 69 (a9), first, the stage name display portion ST2 is stocked with the princess notice icon I64 and the two pseudo-repeated notice icons I65, and then the tutorial display portion. In TT4, a swordsman's notice icon I62 and a chance up notice icon I63 are stocked.

  In addition, in the example of the effect, for example, when the notice icons are consumed from the left side, an animation for changing the display position of the notice icons other than the consumed notice icons may be performed. Specifically, for example, in the case shown in FIG. 69 (a9), when the princess's notice icon I64 is exhausted, the two pseudo-repeated notice icons I65 move to the left one by one, and the tutorial display The swordsman notice icon I62 displayed on the left side of the section TT4 moves to the rightmost side of the stage name display section ST2, and the chance up notice icon I63 displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 moves to the left side. To do. When the notice icon displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 moves to the stage name display section ST2, it may be moved instantaneously so as not to affect the visibility of other displays.

  When all the notice icons displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 have been consumed, the explanation display is resumed on the tutorial display section TT4 and all the notice icons displayed on the stage name display section ST2 have been consumed. In this case, the display of the stage name is restarted on the stage name display portion ST2. The explanation display and the display of the stage name may not be restarted. The restart of the explanation display may be restarted within the same variable display as the symbol variable display in which the notice icon has been exhausted (for example, restarting after the super reach). Further, when the explanation display is restarted, the exact same display may be restarted, or the telop type (scroll type) display may be resumed from a different part.

  Further, the type of the notice icon displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 and the type of the notice icon displayed on the stage name display section ST2 may be predetermined. In this case, when the notice icon is consumed, the other notice icons may not be moved.

  The execution time of the animation for changing the display position of the notice icon may be the same as the execution time of the movement animation of the hold icon, may be shorter than the execution time of the movement animation of the hold icon, or may be changed to hold. It may be longer than the execution time of the icon movement animation.

  Also, in this example of performance, when the notice icon is stocked, it is first stocked in the stage name display section ST2, and when the number of stocked icons is three, the notice icon to be stocked afterwards is displayed in the tutorial display section. It is configured that up to 3 more can be stocked in TT4, but when the number of stocks is initially 3 in the tutorial display section TT4 and the number of stocks is 3, the notice icon to be stocked thereafter is further 3 in the stage name display section ST2. It may be configured such that up to three can be stocked.

  In addition, in this example of performance, before the notice icon completely fits in the stage name display portion ST2 or the tutorial display portion TT4 (a part of the notice icon is displayed in a part of the stage name display portion ST2 or the tutorial display portion TT4. In the (state), the explanation display may or may not be displayed. Immediately after the notice icon is completely set in the stage name display portion ST2 or the tutorial display portion TT4, the explanation display may or may not be displayed. Immediately after starting the upward movement when the notice icon is consumed, the explanation display may or may not be displayed. Further, the explanation display is displayed before the notice icon completely fits in the stage name display portion ST2 or the tutorial display portion TT4, and immediately after the notice icon starts moving upward when the notice icon is consumed, the explanation display is displayed. You may not be allowed to.

  Further, in this example of production, the above-mentioned thing shown in FIG. 62 is referred to as an example of the throwing animation, but it goes without saying that it is also possible to combine the modes shown in other figures.

  Further, in the embodiments described so far and the embodiments described below, there may be a display area dedicated to the notice icon to be consumed, such as a variable icon display area.

  In addition, the notice icons do not have to be displayed in the order in which they are consumed, and for example, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed in a toothless manner, and other notice icons may be moved so as to fill the empty space. You don't have to move.

  In addition, a so-called MAX8 machine (8 which can be assigned to the first special prize winning opening and the second special prize winning opening per starting opening and can hold eight symbol variation displays in a normal gaming state (8 (Although it may be called a maintenance order machine), the hold icon display area has a display area for four reservations in advance, and when there are four reservations, the display area expands to five. It may be enlarged or expanded to eight. At this time, for example, the enlarged hold icon display area may be displayed in the tutorial display area TT4 or the stage name display portion ST2, and the explanation display may be hidden.

  FIG. 69 (b1) to FIG. 69 (b2) show a situation where the stocked notice icon is consumed.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the chance-up notice icon I63 is displayed in the stage name display portion ST2. Both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are being variably displayed.

  Then, after that, at the timing when the advance notice icon I63 for increasing the chance is consumed, as shown in FIG. 68 (b2), the advance notice icon I63 for increasing the chance is moving upward. In this example of performance, even when the chance-up notice icon I63 is moved from the display position in the stage name display portion ST2, at least a part of the notice icon overlaps the stage name display portion ST2, an explanation is displayed. The display of stage names has not resumed. This also applies to the tutorial display section TT4. The display of the stage name may be restarted immediately after the advance notice icon moves from the display position on the stage name display portion ST2.

  FIG. 70 is a diagram showing, in stages, another effect example according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 70 (a1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the read-ahead notice display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 70 (a1) displays “Due to the announcement of the notice icon ...”. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 70 (a1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

  Further, the family crest actor 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb described above. Are arranged.

  FIG. 70 (a1) to FIG. 70 (a3) show how the display mode of the UI unit changes depending on the stage.

  FIG. 70 (a1) shows a state of the castle town stage. Note that the display mode of this castle town stage is the same as the mode shown in FIG. 62 (a), so description will be omitted.

  FIG. 70 (a2) shows a state of the space stage. The first decorative symbol display device 208L on the space stage is different from the castle town stage described above in that the UI portion is formed on the lower left side of the display screen. That is, in the UI section on the space stage, the variation icon display area is arranged in the lower center of the display screen, and the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal, and the hold icon is displayed on the left side of the variation icon display area. The area and the tutorial display area TT1 are arranged side by side vertically. Note that the display position of the stocked notice icon is the same as the display position of the notice icon on the castle town stage shown in FIG. 62 and described above. The hold icon display area has a display mode in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 70 (a2), since three variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, three suspension icons h11, h12, h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 on the space stage is a pentagon, unlike the display modes of the change icon and the hold icon on the castle town stage, and in the default display mode, for example, The white pentagonal display mode, and the look-ahead notice display mode is, for example, a blue pentagonal display mode. At the timing shown in FIG. 70 (a2), the variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are in the default display mode, and the third hold icon h13 is in the look-ahead notice display mode. Is becoming In the tutorial display area TT1 arranged below the hold icon display area, "Panda is master of master" is displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. As described above, since the display position of the notice icon and the display position of the tutorial display area TT1 are different on the space stage, the notice icon does not overlap the tutorial display area TT1.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the appearance of the lord's character on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

  FIG. 70 (a3) shows a state immediately after shifting from another stage to the castle town stage. As shown in FIG. 70 (a3), in the tutorial display area TT1, the explanation display is hidden immediately after the transition to the castle town stage, and remains hidden until a new explanation display is performed. To be done. As shown in FIG. 70 (a3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps the tutorial display area TT1 in the non-display state. Note that the explanation display may be displayed in the tutorial display area TT1 immediately after the stage transition. Further, when the tutorial display area TT1 is hidden in a certain stage (for example, a castle town stage), if the stage is moved to another stage (for example, a space stage), the explanation display is displayed in the tutorial display area TT1 in the stage after the transition. May be displayed.

  70 (b1) to 70 (b2) show that the tutorial display area TT1 is arranged in the third decorative pattern display device 208N, and when the notice icon is stocked, the tutorial display area TT1 is erased. Has been done.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI section is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI section, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 70 (b1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 70 (b1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged below the display screen, and it is displayed as "Due to the end of notice icon ...". In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

  In such a configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (b2), when the button icon IBT is stocked, it is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, but in this case, the third The tutorial display section TT1 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208N is deleted. Here, a plurality of button icons IBT can be stocked, and, for example, is an icon that gives advance notice of the number of times the effect of operating a button during a particular effect is generated, and for example, the number of times of the button operation effect is high. It can be said that the higher the reliability of the big hit is, that is, the larger the stock number of the button icon IBT is, the easier it is to win the big hit.

  In this way, according to this effect example, when the notice icon is displayed, it can be said that another display is sacrificed.

  FIG. 71 is a diagram showing, in stages, another effect example of the notice icon increasing effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 71, another example of effect using the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord is shown.

  FIGS. 71 (a1) to 71 (a6) show that the notice icon already stocked changes due to the throwing animation.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 71 (a1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the read-ahead notice display mode. In addition, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 71 (a1) displays that "Dono is the Yatsushiro Shogun". Further, as shown in FIG. 71 (a1), the notice icon I66 of Hatena is displayed (stock) so as to overlap with the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. Hatena's notice icon I66 is an icon that may change to another notice icon before the timing to be digested, but it does not change to another notice icon and nothing happens even if it is digested, so-called gasse It may also function as a notice icon. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 71 (a1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

  Further, the family crest actor 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb described above. Are arranged.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (a2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character is started, and the state that the lord's character tries to throw the bomb icon I61 is shown. Has been done.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (a3), the appearance of the lord's character throwing the bomb icon I61 is shown.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (a4), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as "The Lord is the Yatsushiro Shogun" is changed to "Due to the notice icon being exhausted ...".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71 (a5), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character reaches the notice icon I66 of Hatena and explodes. At this time, the effect image showing that the bomb icon I61 has exploded overlaps the front side of the Hatena's notice icon I66, and at least a part of the Hatena's notice icon I66 is difficult to see. The size of the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is such that it at least covers the notice icon I66 of Hatena. That is, the effect image is applied only to the notice icon that is the change target.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (a6), the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is erased, and Hatena's notice icon I66 is changed to Swordsman's notice icon I62. Then, the speaker 120 outputs a sound of "Paquine" to notify that the Hatena's notice icon I66 has been changed to the swordsman's notice icon I62. At this time, since the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, at least a part of the explanation display of the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize. Further, in the tutorial display portion TT1 shown in FIG. 71 (a6), what was displayed as "Due to the notice icon being exhausted ..." is changed to "Swordsman is the Lord's nemesis." The timing of changing the explanation display of the tutorial display section TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is started, or may be changed from the timing at which the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is started. May be before the timing, or may be after the timing when the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is started. In this way, it can be said that a part of the stock production of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change production of the stocked notice icon.

  FIGS. 71 (b1) to 71 (b3) show how the notice icon already stocked changes due to the throwing animation. 71 (b1) is the same as FIG. 71 (a4), and FIG. 71 (b3) is the same as FIG. 71 (a6), and therefore description of these drawings will be omitted. In the tutorial display portion TT1 in FIG. 71 (b3), "Due to announcement of notice icon ..." is displayed.

  After the effect shown in FIG. 71 (b1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 71 (b2), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character reaches the notice icon I66 of Hatena and bursts. At this time, an effect image showing that the bomb icon I61 has exploded is displayed overlapping the front surface of the tutorial display section TT1 so as to cover substantially the entire tutorial display section TT1. As a result, at least a part of Hatena's notice icon I66 and the tutorial display portion TT1 are difficult to visually recognize, and the overlapping range is larger than the effect image shown in FIG. 71 (a5). When a plurality of notice icons are stocked, they may be overlapped with all the notice icons. In this way, it can be said that a part of the stock production of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change production of the stocked notice icon.

  FIGS. 71 (c1) to 71 (c3) show how the notice icon already stocked changes due to the throwing animation. 71 (c1) is the same as FIG. 71 (b1) and FIG. 71 (c2) is the same as FIG. 71 (b2), and therefore description of these drawings will be omitted.

  After the bomb icon I61 bursts at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (c2), as shown in FIG. 71 (c3), the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is erased, and Hatena's notice icon I66 informs the swordsman. The icon I62 and the chance up notice icon I63 have changed. That is, one notice icon is changed to two notice icons. In other words, it can be said that the change of the notice icon and the stock of the new notice icon are simultaneously performed by one throwing animation. Thus, it can be said that a part of the stock production of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the production of changing the stocked notice icon and stocking the new notice icon.

  71 (d1) to 71 (d3) show how the display mode of the hold icon changes due to the throwing animation. Since FIG. 71 (d1) is the same as FIG. 71 (a4), description of this drawing is omitted.

  After the effect shown in FIG. 71 (d1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 71 (d2), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character becomes a second hold icon h12 which is a display mode of the prefetch notice. Reach and burst. At this time, the effect image showing that the bomb icon I61 has exploded overlaps the front side of the second holding icon h12, and at least a part of the second holding icon h12 is difficult to visually recognize. The size of the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is such that it at least covers the second hold icon h12. That is, the effect image is applied only to the hold icon that is the change target.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (d3), the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is erased, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes (for example, from the blue display mode to the red display mode). )is doing. Then, the speaker 120 outputs a sound "Pong" to notify that the display mode of the hold icon h12 has changed. In this way, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon.

  As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 71, at least a part of the animation when the notice icon is acquired is the same as a part of the other animation. For example, when the display is performed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N), a certain decorative symbol display device (for example, the third decorative symbol) The same applies to the animation performed on the display device 208N).

  FIG. 72 is a diagram showing, in stages, another effect example of the notice icon increasing effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 72 (a1) to FIG. 72 (a7) show that a specific notice icon has been stocked, and by displaying that fact, notification that the mission has been achieved is shown. Note that FIGS. 72 (a1) to 72 (a3) are the same as FIGS. 62 (h) to 62 (j), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  After the effect shown in FIG. 72 (a3) is performed, as shown in FIG. 72 (a4), the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character ends. Further, as shown in FIG. 72 (a4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an achievement display section KM1 as an explanation display section for notifying that a specific effect has been performed is provided above the tutorial display section TT1. It is displayed. The achievement display section KM1 displays "Swordsman Stock", which indicates that the swordsman notice icon I62 has been stocked. That is, when a mission to acquire the swordsman's notice icon I62 is imposed, and if the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked, the fact is displayed in the achievement display section KM1 to notify the achievement of the mission. be able to. Alternatively, for example, the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed in order to explicitly notify that the swordsman's notification icon I62 for predicting that a production with an extremely high expectation for a big hit will be performed. Good. The timing at which the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed may be the same as the end of the throwing animation, the timing before the end of the throwing animation, or the end of the throwing animation. It may be timing. Since the achievement display section KM1 is displayed in the vicinity of the stocked swordsman's notice icon I62, the achievement display section KM1 may be noticeable in some cases. The notice icon to be stocked may be displayed overlapping the achievement display section KM1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, "decoration C" as the notice icon symbol CS is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration" The temporary stop display is made by the combination of the decorative patterns of "6". Although the variable icon h0 is erased here, it may be displayed.

  As described above, when the notice icon design CS is derived and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, as shown in FIGS. 72 (a6) to (a7), the notice icon I63 indicating a chance up from the notice icon design CS is displayed. It jumps out toward the display position on the right side of the swordsman's notice icon I62 on the tutorial display section TT1. At the timing shown in FIG. 72 (a6), the chance-up notice icon I63 overlaps the front side of the achievement display section KM1, making at least part of the explanation display on the achievement display section KM1 difficult to see.

  In this example of performance, in the case where the display position of the notice icon is preset depending on the type of the notice icon when the notice icon is stocked, for example, the achievement display unit KM1 depends on the type of the notice icon to be consumed. May be eliminated. Further, for example, when a plurality of notice icons are stocked and the notice icons are exhausted so that the remaining notice icons are moved to be arranged at predetermined intervals, among the notice icons, When the predetermined number of notice icons are consumed, the overlap of the notice icons with the achievement display portion KM1 may be eliminated.

  In FIG. 72 (b1) to FIG. 72 (b3), for example, an example of the operation mode of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N that operates when developing into a super reach or when it becomes a big hit It is shown.

  FIG. 72 (b1) shows a state in which super reach is being performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the background screen of super reach is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is displayed in the lower center of the display screen. .. As described above, the UI unit is framed out downward during super reach. Therefore, the display position of the variable icon h0 is lower than that when the UI unit is displayed. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, while the variable display of the first decorative symbol is being performed above the display screen, the second reserved number display of the special symbols 1 and 2 and the special symbols 1 and 2 of FIG. The fourth symbol is also displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 72 (b2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slide along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in a direction in which they approach each other. Moving. At this time, for example, when the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, at least a part of the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N is overlapped. There are cases. According to this, due to the phenomenon that the movable operation and the explanation display by the decorative symbol display device are hidden, it may be possible to make the explanation display pay attention while having an expectation for the big hit.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (b3), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N which are close to each other are integrally formed along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It rotates 90 degrees clockwise. Further, the variable icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the left end portion of the display screen across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and has a rectangular shape. The image in which the character "Holiday" is given in the frame is also displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, in the third decorative symbol display portion 208N, in the lower right corner of the display screen, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 72 (b3), the family crest accessory 224E disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves upward and overlies the lower center of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The 8th character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L are moved downward and overlap the upper end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. At this time, for example, when the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, at least a part of the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N is overlapped. There are cases. In addition, when the tutorial display portion TT1 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, it may be overlapped with the Yatsushiro character 224Fa or the general character 224Fb. In addition, when the tutorial display portion TT1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be overlapped with the family crest monument 224E. According to this, due to the phenomenon that the decorative pattern display device or the movable effect by the effect movable body and the explanation display are hidden, it may be possible to make the explanation display pay attention while having an expectation for the big hit.

  In FIG. 72 (c1) to FIG. 72 (c4), in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the button image 136a is constantly or at least displayed for a certain period of time, and the display state of the button image 136a is changed, whereby the effect button 136 is displayed. It is shown that the state is notified.

  FIG. 72 (c1) shows the animation of the duel scene in Swordsman Reach. FIG. 72 (c1) corresponds to FIG. 63 (d), but the stage name display portion ST1 is displayed in the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L instead of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, The difference is that the button image 136a is constantly or at least displayed for a certain period below the second decorative pattern display device 208M. The button image 136a displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is displayed in the normal state (default display state).

  In FIG. 72 (c2), the animation of the duel scene continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 72 (c2), a button reception time meter is displayed and a button image is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208L. The display mode of 136a is displayed in a display mode that prompts the player to press the effect button 136. This display notifies that the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 has been started, and prompts the player to operate the effect button 136. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 built in the effect button 136 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, light emission in red) indicating that it is in the operation acceptance state.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 72 (c3), as shown in FIG. 72 (c4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the player goes up with The cut-in image to which the character display of "ze" is added is displayed over the animation display of the duel scene. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the button image 136a is changed to the default display mode, assuming that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has ended. In this effect example, with the above-described configuration, for example, when the operation of the above-mentioned button notice icon (first button notice icon I4 or second button notice icon I11) is enabled, In some cases, the player can be prompted to operate the effect button 136.

  FIG. 72D shows an example of the notice icon applicable in this embodiment. For example, in addition to the above-mentioned notice icon I66 of Hatena, notice icon I65 of pseudo-relation, notice icon I63 of up chance, notice icon I64 of princess, notice icon I62 of swordsman, notice icon I67 of hold promotion, notice icon I68 of chance. , Panda notice icon I69 is prepared. Here, the hold promotion notice icon I67 is an icon for notifying that the display form of the hold icon or the variable icon will be changed to a display form with higher reliability for the big hit when it is consumed. Further, the pseudo-reminder icon is an icon for notifying that the pseudo-representation will be performed when it is consumed. In addition, the notice icon I68 of the chance eye is an icon that gives a notice that the chance eye will be derived as a result of displaying the decorative pattern when it is consumed. In addition, the princess's notice icon is an icon for notifying that the player will move to the look-ahead zone when it is consumed. Further, the panda notice icon I69 is an icon for notifying that, when digested, an effect that pandas intrude is performed, and that a big hit (win) is surely made.

  FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the notice icon and the tutorial display.

  FIG. 73 (a1) to FIG. 73 (a7) show that the explanation display (for example, “Swordsman is Lord's nemesis” display) displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is scroll-displayed. The left side of the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 73 is overlapped with the swordsman notice icon I62.

  FIG. 73 (a1) shows a state before the start of the scroll display of the explanation display.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (a2), when the scroll of the explanation display is started, the display of “Swordsman is the Lord's nemesis” scrolls in sequentially from the right side of the tutorial display section TT1. At the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a2), only the “Swordsman is” part is scrolled in, and at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a3), only the “Swordsman is lord's part” is scrolled in. There is. In these cases, since neither character overlaps the swordsman's notice icon I62, the explanation display may be clearly recognizable in some cases.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a4), the entire text "Swordsman is the Lord's nemesis" is displayed. In this case, at least the character part of "Swordsman" is overlapped with the notification icon I62 of the swordsman, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a visually difficult state.

  At the timing shown in Fig. 73 (a5), the "Swordsman" part scrolls out from the left side of the tutorial display part TT1, and the "I'm Lord's nemesis" part is displayed in the tutorial display part TT1. .. In this case, at least a part of the word "Tonosama" overlaps the swordsman's notice icon I62, so that at least a part of the explanation display is difficult to see.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a6), the "Swordsman is the Lord" scrolls out from the left side of the tutorial display section TT1, and the "Nemesis" section is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1. .. In this case, at least a part of the word "nemesis" is overlapped with the swordsman's notice icon I62, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a visually difficult state.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a7), the scroll of the explanation display ends. As described above, in this example of performance, the characters overlapped by the notice icon are continuously changed by scrolling the explanation display. In addition, scrolling the explanation display causes a period in which the notice display overlaps with the notice icon and a period in which the explanation display does not overlap. When the scroll of the explanation display is repeated, these periods also occur repeatedly.

  FIG. 73 (b1) to FIG. 73 (b7) show that while the scrolling display of the explanation display (for example, “Swordsman is Lord's nemesis”) displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 A state in which a display (for example, a notice display of "intense heat") is performed is shown. 73 (b1) to FIG. 73 (b3), FIG. 73 (b6) to FIG. 73 (b7), and FIG. 73 (a1) to FIG. 73 (a3) and FIG. Since it is the same as FIG. (A7), detailed description is omitted.

  After the explanation display is performed in the mode shown in FIG. 73 (b3), the preview display is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 as shown in FIGS. 73 (b4) to 73 (b5). As for the notice display, the background color of the tutorial display section TT1 is set to red, and the characters "intense heat" are displayed to perform the notice display or the prefetch notice display in the symbol variation display. During the notice display, the scroll display of the explanation display is interrupted. For example, the above-mentioned notice display may be overlapped with the explanation display to make the explanation display difficult to view, or the scroll display of the explanation display may be switched to the notice display.

  Thereafter, when the notice display ends, as shown in FIG. 73 (b6), the scroll display of the explanation display restarts. The scroll display of the explanation display is proceeding in the background even while the notice display is being performed, and the display mode of the explanation display when the explanation display is restarted is the display after proceeding in the background. It is a mode. The display mode of the explanation display at the time when the display of the explanation display is restarted may be the display mode at the time of interruption. Thereafter, when the timing shown in FIG. 73 (b7) comes, the scroll display of the explanation display ends. Although the notice display is described as an example in which the scroll display of the explanation display is interrupted and displayed, the scroll display of the explanation display may be interrupted by a display other than the notice display.

  FIGS. 73 (c1) to 73 (c5) are explanatory views (for example, “Swordsman is the Lord's nemesis” display) displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 when multiple notice icons are stocked. During the display, it is shown that other notice icons move as part of the notice icons are exhausted.

  In FIG. 73 (c1), the chance-up notice icon I63, which is the notice icon to be first digested, and the swordsman's notice icon I62, which is the notice icon to be secondly digested, are the notice-icon I63 of chance-up. , Which are arranged side by side on the right side of, and the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is shown overlapping on the left side of the tutorial display section TT1. Therefore, a part of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize it.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 73 (c2), when the notice icon I63 for increasing the chance is consumed, as shown in FIGS. 73 (c3) to (c5), the notice icon I62 for the swordsman increases the chance. The notice icon moving animation of moving to the position where the notice icon I63 of 6 is displayed. As a result, after the range of the overlap with the tutorial display section TT1 by the swordsman's notice icon I62 changes continuously, the overlap state is released, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is easy to see. May be. That is, in this effect example, the notice icon may or may not overlap the tutorial display section TT1 depending on the number of the notice icons stocked. When the explanation display is scroll-displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, the movement display of the notice icon in the movement animation of the notice icon and the scroll display of the explanation display may overlap with each other.

In the above description,
[Image display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
Symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display [eg, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],
A notice means capable of executing a plurality of types of notice [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 120, a shielding device 246, a production movable body 224, various lamps 418, a game board lamp 532, a game underframe lamp 542, etc.] ,
A gaming machine equipped with
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a hold display [for example, a hold icon or the like],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons,
The hold display is a display displayed in a hold display area [for example, a hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1, a hold icon display area of special figure 2, a variable icon display area 280, etc.] in the image display means,
The hold display is a display according to the number of operations of the symbol variable display (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) [for example, in the holding icon display area 281 of the special figure 1]. , The number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of special figure 1 is held is displayed],
The symbol variation display is a display that can be started when the hold is exhausted,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, a notice icon display area 285 or the like] in the image display means,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold display,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area in which one or a plurality of notice icons can be displayed [for example, the notice icon display area 285 includes the notice icon first display area YA1 to the notice icon sixth display area YA6. , It is configured to display a notice icon in each area],
The notice means is means for executing, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, executing the notice of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed [eg, , When the notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed, the pseudo-relation effect may be executed, and when the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is consumed, the reach transition effect may be executed, etc.] ,
During the period in which the symbol variable display is executed once, the first notice icon [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat] of the plurality of types of notice icons has the first number [for example, two, etc.]. ] A second number larger than the first number [eg, three, etc.] is more likely to be a big hit than a digested case,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the image display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table characterized by the image display means.

  In addition, according to this gaming table, it may be possible to increase the variation of the effect.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, since the notice icon is displayed, it is easy to recognize that there is a change in which the notice icon may be consumed, so the player pays attention to the display in the hold. , It may be possible to prevent missing the notice display corresponding to the notice icon.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, the player may be able to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the increase or the digestion of the notice icon.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the symbol variable display, or may be capable of executing other than the symbol variable display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the symbol variable display, or may not execute the symbol variable display.

  Further, the advance notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of advance notices, or may be capable of executing other than the plurality of types of advance notices. Further, the advance notice means may execute a plurality of types of advance notices, or may not execute a plurality of types of advance notices.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the hold display, or may be capable of displaying other than the hold display. Further, the image display means may always display the hold display or may not display the hold display.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notice icons, or may be capable of displaying an image other than the plurality of types of advance notice icons. Further, the image display means may always display a plurality of types of advance notice icons, or may not display a plurality of types of advance notice icons.

  Further, the hold display may be displayed only in the hold display area of the image display means, or may be displayed other than the hold display area of the image display means.

  Further, the hold display may be a hold icon or may not be the hold icon, and may be represented by letters, numbers, or symbols, for example.

  Further, the hold display may display only the hold number or may display other than the hold number.

  Further, the symbol variation display may be started only when the hold is exhausted, or may be started other than when the hold is exhausted. Further, the symbol variation display may be always started when the hold is exhausted, or may not be started when the hold is exhausted.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area in the image display means, or may be displayed in areas other than the notice icon display area in the image display means. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the notice icon display area of the image display means, or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area of the image display means.

  Further, the notice icon display area may be capable of displaying only one or a plurality of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying a matter other than the one or a plurality of notice icons. Further, the notice icon display area may always display one or a plurality of notice icons, or may not display one or a plurality of notice icons.

  Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only a notice of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed. When one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, a notice other than the type of notice corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be executable. Further, the notice means may be one that always executes a notice of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed. When one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area has been consumed, the notice of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may not be executed.

In addition, “the notice icon is configured to be displayed in a number corresponding to the number of times the notice may be executed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is equal to that of the notice icons. A notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be executed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it is possible to expect the number of times to execute the notice displayed from the change in which the notice icon is displayed to the change to be exhausted, so that the player should not miss the notice display. In some cases, it can be done.

  Here, the notice icon may be displayed only in a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed, or may be displayed in a number other than the number according to the number of possibilities of the notice being executed. Things may also be displayed. Further, the notice icon may always display a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed, or may not display a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed. There may be.

In addition, the "previous notice means" gives a false notice [for example, a pseudo continuous production or a reach transition production which is a failure] in the same manner as the aspect of the previous notice [for example, a pseudo continuous production or a reach transition production that is a big hit]. Is a viable means,
When the one of the notice icons (for example, the notice icon I6 for a hat, the notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, etc.) displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, the notice means is a type of the notice icon that has been consumed. Is a means capable of executing the false notice of the type corresponding to [for example, a false consecutive notice or a reach transition effect that is out of sync],
After the false notice is executed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be out of order,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give the player a sense of tension until the notice icon is consumed and the notice is executed.

  Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only a fake notice in the same manner as the notice manner, or may be a means other than a false notice in the same manner as the notice manner. May be. Further, the advance notice means may necessarily execute a fake advance notice in the same mode as the advance notice mode, or may not execute the fake advance notice in the same mode as the advance notice mode.

  Even if the notice means is capable of executing only fake notice of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed. Or, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, it may be possible to execute something other than a fake notice of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed. .. Further, the notice means may be one that always executes a false notice of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed. However, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area has been consumed, a false notice of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may not be executed.

  In addition, after the false notice is executed, the result of the variable display of symbols may be configured to be always off, or after the false notice is executed, the result of the variable display of symbols may be a big hit. It may be.

  It should be noted that there may be a case where, after the false notice is executed, the notice in which the big hit symbol is highly likely to be displayed on the symbol display means is executed.

Further, “the number of the notice icons started to be displayed in the notice icon display area during the period in which the one-time symbol variable display is executed is more than the third number [for example, one, etc.] The fourth number [for example, three, etc.] that is larger than the third number is more likely to be a big hit,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to pay attention to the number of notice icons displayed in the variable display of symbols.

In addition, “holding display means capable of executing display according to the number of holdings [for example, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, production holding lamp 286, etc.],
The holding display means is a display means different from the image display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to clearly distinguish the hold display and the display of the notice icon.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of executing only the display corresponding to the number of reservations, or may be capable of executing other than the display corresponding to the number of reservations. Further, the hold display means may always perform display according to the number of reservations, or may not perform display according to the number of reservations.

In addition, “the holding display means is a display means including a light emitting means [for example, a lamp, an LED, or the like],
A game table characterized by that.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to clearly recognize the hold display.

  Here, the hold display means may be configured to include only the light emitting means, or may be configured to include a portion other than the light emitting means (for example, an image display means).

  The light emitting means may be configured to include a plurality of LEDs. Further, the light emitting means may be configured by LEDs of a plurality of colors, and for example, a single package including a plurality of LEDs such as a full-color LED may be required. Further, it may be composed of a single color LED.

  Further, in addition to the hold display means, the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, the firing operation informing means for informing about the operation of the firing operation means may be realized by the light emitting means.

In addition, “a pre-reading notice means capable of executing a pre-reading notice [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 120, a shielding device 246, a performance movable body 224, various lamps 418, a game board lamp 532, a game underframe lamp 540, etc. ],
The prefetching notice means is a means capable of executing the prefetching notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the advance notice icon may be displayed, which may increase the expectation of a big hit.

  Here, the pre-reading notice means may be capable of executing only the pre-reading notice, or may be capable of executing other than the pre-reading notice. Further, the prefetching advance notice means may always execute the prefetching advance notice, or may not execute the prefetching advance notice.

  Further, the prefetching notice means may be capable of executing the prefetching notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or by means other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. The pre-reading notice may be executable. Further, the prefetching notice means may be one that always executes the prefetching notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or does not execute the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

In addition, “the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter,“ second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 19 (2)] ”) ".") Is being executed, the notice icon may be consumed by a fifth number [for example, three, etc.],
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, "first symbol variation display [eg, 3 which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 19 (2). There is a case where the notice icon is consumed by a sixth number [for example, one, etc.] during the period in which the “variable display of symbols based on the reservation held before the eye is held]” is executed. Yes,
The sixth number is a number different from the fifth number,
The suspension display is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed [for example, in FIG. 19 (4) The hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold that is the target of prefetching is displayed during the period in which the variable display of symbols based on the hold that is held before the second hold that is the target of prefetch is displayed. Displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the number of times the notice icon is consumed differs between the case where the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is being performed and the case where the symbol variation display that is executed before the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is performed. Therefore, it may be possible to make it easy to understand the symbol variation display that the player should pay attention to.

  Here, in the period in which the second symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be exhausted only in the fifth number, or the period in which the second symbol variable display is being executed. In, there may be a case where the notice icon is consumed by a number different from the fifth number. Further, in the period when the second symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be surely consumed by the fifth number, or in the period when the second symbol variable display is being executed. , The notice icon may not be digested in the fifth number.

  Further, in the period when the first symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be consumed only in the sixth number, or in the period when the first symbol variable display is being executed. The notice icon may be used in a number different from the sixth number. In addition, during the period when the first symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be surely consumed by the sixth number, or during the period when the first symbol variable display is being executed. , The notice icon may not be digested in the sixth number.

  Further, the hold display may be able to inform only that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, or the first During the period in which the symbol variable display is being executed, it may be possible to notify other than the fact that the operation of the second symbol variable display is suspended. In addition, the hold display, in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, may necessarily inform that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the first symbol In the period in which the variable display is executed, there may be a case where the fact that the operation of the second symbol variable display is suspended is not notified.

Further, there is a case where the notice icon starts to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is consumed (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) is being executed [eg, As shown in FIG. 28 (C), the digest display of the hat notice icon I6 and the increase of the hat notice icon I6, the thousand-box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are displayed in one pattern variation display. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the notice icons may increase even in the variable display in which the notice icons are consumed, it may be possible to make the player have expectations until all the notice icons are consumed.

  Here, in the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, the advance notice icon may be always displayed, or in the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, the advance notice icon is displayed. The display may not be started in some cases. Further, the notice icon may start to be displayed only during the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, or the notice icon may be displayed during a period other than the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being performed. May start to be displayed.

  Note that the notice icon may be configured not to increase in the variable display in which the notice icon is consumed.

Further, in the period in which the “symbol fluctuation display executed before the fourth symbol fluctuation display is executed (hereinafter, referred to as“ third symbol fluctuation display ”) is being executed, The notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed may start to be displayed [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat that is consumed at the timing shown in FIG. 28 (C) is the symbol variation display. Is increased during the execution of the variable display of symbols that is executed before],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, only during the period when the third symbol variable display is being executed, it is possible to display the notice icon that is consumed during the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, Even in a period other than the period in which the third symbol variable display is executed, the notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the fourth symbol variable display is executed may be displayed. Further, in the period in which the third symbol variable display is being executed, it may be configured so that the notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the fourth symbol variable display is being executed is always started, In the period in which the third symbol variable display is being executed, there may be a case where the notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the fourth symbol variable display is being executed is not started to be displayed.

  It should be noted that the notice icon that is consumed during the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed may not start to be displayed during the period when the third symbol variable display is being executed.

In addition, “the hold display area is an area capable of displaying the hold display up to a seventh number [for example, four or eight],
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying the notice icons up to an eighth number [eg, six, etc.],
The seventh number is a different number than the eighth number,
It is characterized by ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the displayable number of the hold display and the displayable number of the notice icon are different, it may be possible to clearly distinguish the display of the notice icon.

  Here, the hold display area may always display the hold display up to the seventh number, or may not display the hold display up to the seventh number.

  Further, the notice icon display area may always display the notice icons up to the eighth number, or may not display the notice icons up to the eighth number.

  The maximum displayable number of the hold display and the maximum displayable number of the notice icon may be the same.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of the notice icons may be larger than the maximum displayable number of the pending display of the special figure 1, or at least the same may be the same.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of the notice icons may be larger than the maximum displayable number of the pending display of the special figure 2, at least, or the same.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of the notice icons may be greater than the total displayable maximum number of the pending displays of the special diagrams 1 and 2, and at least the same may be the same.

In addition, "a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of production [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 210, a shielding device 246, a production movable body 224, various lamps 418, a game board lamp 532, a game underframe lamp 542]. Etc.],
One of the plurality of types of advance notices is a first advance notice [for example, FIG. 22 (49) to FIG. 22 (50) or the reach transition effect shown in FIG. 34 (49)]
One of the plurality of types of advance notices is a second advance notice [for example, a stage change effect shown in FIG. 29 (Ac) or FIG. 29 (Bb)],
The first notice is a notice different from the second notice,
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIGS. 22 (51) to (57) and FIGS. 34 (50-1) to (57). Production etc.],
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of a moon background, etc.],
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice is a notice notifying that the first effect will be executed,
The second notice is a notice notifying that the second effect will be executed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since the contents of the effect to be executed can be known in advance, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

  Here, the production means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of productions, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of productions. In addition, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of productions, or may not execute a plurality of types of productions.

  Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice and the second notice, or may execute notices other than the first notice and the second notice. Further, the advance notice means may execute the first advance notice and the second advance notice without fail, or may not execute the first advance notice and the second advance notice.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect and the second effect. .. In addition, the production means may always execute the first production and the second production, or may not execute the first production and the second production.

  The first notice may notify only that the first effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the first effect is executed. .. In addition, the first notice may always notify that the first effect will be executed, or may not notify that the first effect is executed.

  In addition, the second notice may notify only that the second effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the second effect is executed. .. In addition, the second notice may necessarily notify that the second effect will be executed, or may not notify that the second effect is executed.

In addition, “the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be always consumed [for example, FIG. 19 (1) to FIG. 23 (66) or FIG. 31 (1) to As shown in FIG. 35 (66), the increased notice icons are all consumed, etc.]. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the notice corresponding to the notice icon displayed by the notice icon being displayed is always executed, which may improve the player's expectation.

In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],"
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
[First display means capable of performing symbol variable display [eg, first special figure display device 212, second special figure display device 214, etc.],
Second display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, or a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 or the production holding lamp 286],
A gaming machine equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays [for example, pseudo continuous production, freeze production, stop design notice, stage change production, reach transition production, premiere announcement production, re-variation production, etc.]. And
The second display means displays a display corresponding to the number of the operations of the symbol variable display (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) that is held (for example, the holding icon display area 281 of special figure 1). , The hold icon display area of the special figure 2, the variable icon display area 280, the hold display area of the effect holding lamp 286, etc.] [for example, the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, The number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of special figure 1 is held is displayed],
The symbol variation display is a display started when the hold is exhausted,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area [for example, the notice icon display area 285 or the like] of the second display means,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the pending number depending on the number displayed,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area in which one or a plurality of notice icons can be displayed [for example, the notice icon display area 285 includes the notice icon first display area YA1 to the notice icon sixth display area YA6. , It is configured to display a notice icon in each area],
The second display means, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area has been consumed, a display capable of displaying the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed. This is a means [for example, when the hat notice icon I6 is exhausted, a pseudo-link effect may be executed, and when the 1000-box notice icon I9 is exhausted, a reach transition effect is executed. Etc.],
During the period in which the symbol variable display is being executed once, a second number [eg, three, etc.] that is larger than the first number is consumed than when the notice icon is exhausted by the first number. If it is done, it is structured so that it is more likely to be a big hit,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the image display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table characterized by the image display means.

  In addition, according to this gaming table, it may be possible to increase the variation of the effect.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, since the notice icon is displayed, it is easy to recognize that there is a change in which the notice icon may be consumed, so the player pays attention to the display in the hold. , It may be possible to prevent missing the notice display corresponding to the notice icon.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, the player may be able to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the increase or the digestion of the notice icon.

  Here, the first display means may be capable of executing only the symbol variable display, or may be capable of performing other than the symbol variable display. Further, the first display means may always execute the symbol variable display, or may not execute the symbol variable display.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of advance notice icons. Further, the second display means may always display a plurality of types of advance notice icons, or may not display a plurality of types of advance notice icons.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notice displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of advance notice displays. In addition, the second display means may always display a plurality of types of advance notice displays, or may not display the plurality of types of advance notice displays.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying a display according to the number of holdings only in the holding display area, or may display a display according to the number of holdings other than the holding display area. It may be. Still, the second display means may always display the display according to the number of holdings in the holding display area, or may not display the display according to the number of holdings in the holding display area. ..

  Further, the symbol variation display may be one that can be started only when the hold is exhausted, or may be one that can be started even when the hold is not exhausted. Further, the symbol variation display may be always started when the hold is exhausted, or may not be started even when the hold is exhausted.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area of the second display means, or may be displayed in areas other than the notice icon display area of the second display means. Good. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the notice icon display area of the second display means, or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area of the second display means.

  Further, the notice icon display area may be capable of displaying only one or a plurality of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying a matter other than the one or a plurality of notice icons. Further, the notice icon display area may always display one or a plurality of notice icons, or may not display one or a plurality of notice icons.

  Also, the second display means is capable of displaying only the type of notice display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area has been consumed. However, if one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area has been consumed, a notice display other than the type of notice display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed can also be displayed. Good. In addition, the second display means, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, always displays a notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed. Alternatively, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area has been consumed, the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may not be displayed.

Further, “the notice icon is configured to be displayed in a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Only the notice icon corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it is possible to expect the number of times to display the notice display displayed from the change in which the notice icon is displayed to the change to be consumed, so that the player does not miss the notice display. You may be able to

  Here, the notice icon may be displayed only in the number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed, or may be displayed in accordance with the number of times the notice display may be displayed. Other items may also be displayed. Further, the notice icon may always display a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed, or may display a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed. You may not.

In addition, "the second display means is a false notice display in the same mode as the notice display mode [for example, a pseudo continuous production that is a big hit, a reach transition production, or the like] [for example, a pseudo continuous production or reach that is an outlier]. Transition effect, etc.] can be displayed,
The second display means, when one of the notice icons [for example, the notice icon I6 for a hat, the notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, the notice that has been consumed A display unit capable of displaying the false notice display of a type corresponding to the type of icon [for example, a false consecutive notice or a reach transition effect, etc.
After the false notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be out of alignment,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give the player a sense of tension until the notice icon is consumed and the notice display is displayed.

  Here, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a fake advance notice display in the same mode as the advance notice display, or other than a fake advance notice display in the same mode as the advance notice display mode. May be displayable. Further, the second display means may necessarily display a fake notice display in the same manner as the notice display, or may not display a fake notice display in the same manner as the notice display. It may be.

  In addition, the second display means is capable of displaying only a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area has been consumed. Or, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, it is possible to display other than the fake notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed. May be In addition, the second display means, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, always displays a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed. There may be cases where, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, a fake notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may not be displayed. ..

  Further, after the false notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol variation display may be configured to be always off, or after the false notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol variation display becomes a big hit. There may be cases.

  In addition, after the fake notice display is displayed, there is a case where the notice display in which the jackpot symbol is highly likely to be displayed is displayed on the symbol display means.

Further, “the number of the notice icons started to be displayed in the notice icon display area during the period in which the one-time symbol variable display is executed is more than the third number [for example, one, etc.] The fourth number [for example, three, etc.] that is larger than the third number is more likely to be a big hit,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to pay attention to the number of notice icons displayed in the variable display of symbols.

In addition, "the second display means is a display means composed of a plurality of display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like],
One of the plurality of display means is a hold display means [for example, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure hold lamp 220, a production hold lamp 286, etc.],
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area,
The holding display means is a display means capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holdings in the holding display area [for example, lighting a number of holding lamps corresponding to the number of holdings].
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of decorative symbols,
The holding display means is a display means different from the image display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to clearly distinguish the hold display and the display of the notice icon.

  Here, the second display means may be configured by two display means or may be configured by three or more display means.

  Further, the second display means may be configured by only the image display means and the hold display means, or may be configured by including other than the image display means and the hold display means. In addition, the second display means may necessarily include the image display means and the hold display means, or may not include at least one of the image display means and the hold display means.

  Further, the hold display means may be configured to include only the hold display area, or may be configured to include other than the hold display area. Further, the hold display means may be configured to always include the hold display area, or may not include the hold display area.

  Further, the hold display means may be capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of hold only in the hold display area, or may display a display corresponding to the number of hold other than the hold display area. Good. Further, the hold display means may always display a display corresponding to the number of hold in the hold display area, or may not display a display corresponding to the number of hold in the hold display area.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the variable display of the decorative design, or may be capable of displaying other than the variable display of the decorative design. Further, the image display means may always display the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may not display the decorative symbol display device.

In addition, “the holding display means is a display means including a light emitting means [for example, a lamp, an LED, or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to clearly recognize the hold display.

  Here, the hold display means may be configured to include only the light emitting means, or may be configured to include a portion other than the light emitting means (for example, an image display means).

  The light emitting means may be configured to include a plurality of LEDs. Further, the light emitting means may be configured by LEDs of a plurality of colors, and for example, a single package including a plurality of LEDs such as a full-color LED may be required. Further, it may be composed of a single color LED.

  Further, in addition to the hold display means, the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, the firing operation informing means for informing about the operation of the firing operation means may be realized by the light emitting means.

In addition, "the second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of decorative symbols,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since the variable display of the decorative pattern and the hold icon are displayed on the same image display means, it may be possible to easily confirm the number of holding while visually observing the variable display of the decorative pattern.

  Here, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the variable display of the decorative design, or may be capable of displaying other than the variable display of the decorative design. Further, the image display means may always display the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may not display the variable display of the decorative symbol.

In addition, “a pre-reading notice means capable of executing a pre-reading notice [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 120, a shielding device 246, a performance movable body 224, various lamps 418, a game board lamp 532, a game underframe lamp 540, etc. ],
The prefetching notice means is a means capable of executing the prefetching notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the advance notice icon may be displayed, which may increase the expectation of a big hit.

  Here, the pre-reading notice means may be capable of executing only the pre-reading notice, or may be capable of executing other than the pre-reading notice. Further, the prefetching advance notice means may always execute the prefetching advance notice, or may not execute the prefetching advance notice.

  Further, the prefetching notice means may be capable of executing the prefetching notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or by means other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. The pre-reading notice may be executable. Further, the prefetching notice means may be one that always executes the prefetching notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or does not execute the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

In addition, “the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter,“ second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 19 (2)] ”) ".") Is being executed, the notice icon may be consumed by a fifth number [for example, three, etc.],
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, "first symbol variation display [eg, 3 which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 19 (2). There is a case where the notice icon is consumed by a sixth number [for example, one, etc.] during the period in which the “variable display of symbols based on the reservation held before the eye is held]” is executed. Yes,
The sixth number is a number different from the fifth number,
The display according to the number of holdings is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is executed [eg, FIG. 19]. Corresponding to the second hold that is the target of prefetch in the period in which the variable display of symbols based on the hold that is held before the second hold that is the target of prefetch shown in (4) is being executed. The hold icon h12 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1], etc.]. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the number of times the notice icon is consumed differs between the case where the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is being performed and the case where the symbol variation display that is executed before the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is performed. Therefore, it may be possible to make it easy to understand the symbol variation display that the player should pay attention to.

  Here, in the period in which the second symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be exhausted only in the fifth number, or the period in which the second symbol variable display is being executed. In, there may be a case where the notice icon is consumed by a number different from the fifth number. Further, in the period when the second symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be surely consumed by the fifth number, or in the period when the second symbol variable display is being executed. , The notice icon may not be digested in the fifth number.

  Further, in the period when the first symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be consumed only in the sixth number, or in the period when the first symbol variable display is being executed. The notice icon may be used in a number different from the sixth number. In addition, during the period when the first symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be surely consumed by the sixth number, or during the period when the first symbol variable display is being executed. , The notice icon may not be digested in the sixth number.

  Further, the display according to the number of hold may be able to inform only that the operation of the second symbol variable display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variable display is being executed. In the period in which the first symbol variable display is being executed, it may be possible to notify other than the fact that the operation of the second symbol variable display is suspended. In addition, the display according to the number of holdings may be one that always informs that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, In the period in which the first symbol variable display is being executed, there may be a case where the fact that the operation of the second symbol variable display is suspended is not notified.

Further, there is a case where the notice icon starts to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is consumed (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) is being executed [eg, As shown in FIG. 28 (C), the digest display of the hat notice icon I6 and the increase of the hat notice icon I6, the thousand-box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are displayed in one pattern variation display. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the notice icons may increase even in the variable display in which the notice icons are consumed, it may be possible to make the player have expectations until all the notice icons are consumed.

  Here, in the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, the advance notice icon may be always displayed, or in the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, the advance notice icon is displayed. The display may not be started in some cases. Further, the notice icon may start to be displayed only during the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, or the notice icon may be displayed during a period other than the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being performed. May start to be displayed.

  Note that the notice icon may be configured not to increase in the variable display in which the notice icon is consumed.

Further, in the period in which the “symbol fluctuation display executed before the fourth symbol fluctuation display is executed (hereinafter, referred to as“ third symbol fluctuation display ”) is being executed, The notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed may start to be displayed [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat that is consumed at the timing shown in FIG. 28 (C) is the symbol variation display. Is increased during the execution of the variable display of symbols that is executed before],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, only during the period when the third symbol variable display is being executed, it is possible to display the notice icon that is consumed during the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, Even in a period other than the period in which the third symbol variable display is executed, the notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the fourth symbol variable display is executed may be displayed. Further, in the period in which the third symbol variable display is being executed, it may be configured so that the notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the fourth symbol variable display is being executed is always started, In the period in which the third symbol variable display is being executed, there may be a case where the notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the fourth symbol variable display is being executed is not started to be displayed.

  It should be noted that the notice icon that is consumed during the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed may not start to be displayed during the period when the third symbol variable display is being executed.

In addition, “the hold display area is an area capable of displaying a display corresponding to the hold number up to a seventh number [for example, four or eight],
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying the notice icons up to an eighth number [eg, six, etc.],
The seventh number is a different number than the eighth number,
It is characterized by ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since the displayable number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings and the displayable number of the notice icon are different, it may be possible to clearly distinguish the display of the notice icon.

  Here, the hold display area may always display up to the seventh number according to the hold number, or may not display up to the seventh number according to the hold number. Good.

  Further, the notice icon display area may always display the notice icons up to the eighth number, or may not display the notice icons up to the eighth number.

  Note that the maximum displayable number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings and the maximum displayable number of advance notice icons may be the same.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of advance notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the maximum displayable number of displays in accordance with the number of reservations of special figure 1 may be the same.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of advance notice icons may be greater than the maximum displayable number of the displays corresponding to the number of holdings of special figure 2, or at least the same may be the same.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of the notice icons may be greater than the total displayable maximum number of the displays corresponding to the number of holdings of the special maps 1 and 2, or at least the same or the same. Good.

In addition, "a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of production [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 210, a shielding device 246, a production movable body 224, various lamps 418, a game board lamp 532, a game underframe lamp 542]. Etc.],
One of the plurality of types of advance notice display is a first advance notice display [for example, FIG. 22 (49) to FIG. 22 (50) or the reach transition effect shown in FIG. 34 (49)],
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a second notice display [for example, stage change effect shown in FIG. 29 (Ac) or FIG. 29 (Bb)],
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIGS. 22 (51) to (57) and FIGS. 34 (50-1) to (57). Production etc.],
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of a moon background, etc.],
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice display is a notice display for notifying that the first effect is executed,
The game machine, wherein the second notice display is a notice display for notifying that the second effect is to be executed. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since the contents of the effect to be executed can be known in advance, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

  Here, the production means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of productions, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of productions. In addition, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of productions, or may not execute a plurality of types of productions.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display and the second notice display, or may display a notice display other than the first notice display and the second notice display. It may be possible. Further, the second display means may necessarily display the first notice display and the second notice display, or may not display the first notice display and the second notice display. Good.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect and the second effect. .. In addition, the production means may always execute the first production and the second production, or may not execute the first production and the second production.

  Further, the first notice display may notify only that the first effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the first effect is executed. Good. In addition, the first notice display may necessarily notify that the first effect is executed, or may not notify that the first effect is executed.

  Further, the second notice display may notify only that the second effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the second effect is executed. Good. In addition, the second notice display may necessarily notify that the second effect is executed, or may not notify that the second effect is executed.

In addition, “the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be always consumed [for example, FIG. 19 (1) to FIG. 23 (66) or FIG. 31 (1) to As shown in FIG. 35 (66), the increased notice icons are all consumed, etc.]. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the notice corresponding to the notice icon displayed by the notice icon being displayed is always executed, which may improve the player's expectation.

In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],"
A game table characterized by that.

  Although the notice icon functions as a prefetch notice in the above-described embodiment, it may be displayed separately from the prefetch notice. Alternatively, the display of the notice icon may be different from that displayed in the prefetch mode. For example, the notice icon may increase or disappear even in the normal background display, and the notice icon may increase or disappear even while the special background mode for prefetching is being executed. Good.

  Further, for example, when the notice icon A is displayed, the notice display a is always displayed, when the notice icon B is displayed, the notice display b or the notice display c is displayed, and when the notice icon C is displayed, When the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed and the notice icon D is displayed, the notice icon a is consumed in the notice display a when the notice c is configured to be displayed. It is a display that is displayed in the case of, and is a notice display that is not displayed even if the other notice icons (B, C, D) are exhausted, "the pattern in which the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed. The jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed when the "variable display in which the notice display a is displayed" is performed rather than the "variable display". Further, the notice display b is a display displayed when the notice icon B or the notice icon C is consumed, and the notice display c is displayed when the notice icon B, the notice icon C, or the notice icon D is consumed. It is a display, and the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when "the symbol variable display with the notice display b" is executed than with "the symbol variable display with the notice display c" executed. May be configured. Further, the notice display d is a display that is displayed when the notice icon C is displayed, and is a notice display that is not displayed even if the other notice icons (A, B, D) are exhausted. When digested, either the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed. The jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed more when "Preliminary icon A, notice icon B, or symbol variable display that notice icon D is consumed" is executed than when "Preliminary icon C is consumed symbol variation display" It may be configured to be easy. In addition, a big hit symbol is obtained when the "variable symbol display in which the notice display a, the notice display b, or the notice display c is displayed" is executed, rather than the "symbol change display in which the notice display d is displayed" It may be configured such that the finalized display is facilitated.

Also, in the above description,
"First display means [eg, first special figure display device 212, second special figure display device 214, etc.] capable of executing symbol variation display,
Second display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, or a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 or the production holding lamp 286],
A gaming machine equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays [for example, pseudo continuous production, freeze production, stop design notice, stage change production, reach transition production, premiere announcement production, re-variation production, etc.]. And
The second display means displays a display corresponding to the number of the operations of the symbol variable display (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) that is held (for example, the holding icon display area 281 of special figure 1). , The hold icon display area of the special figure 2, the variable icon display area 280, the hold display area of the effect holding lamp 286, etc.] [for example, the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, The number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of special figure 1 is held is displayed],
The symbol variation display is a display started when the hold is exhausted,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area [for example, the notice icon display area 285 or the like] of the second display means,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the pending number depending on the number displayed,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying a plurality of notice icons [for example, the notice icon display area 285 includes the notice icon first display area YA1 to the notice icon sixth display area YA6. Each area can be configured to display a notice icon],
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying, when the notice icon in the notice icon display area is consumed, the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed [eg, , When the notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed, the pseudo-relation effect may be executed, and when the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is consumed, the reach transition effect may be executed, etc.] ,
In the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed once, the second number larger than the first number [than the case where the first number [eg, one, etc.] of the notice icon is consumed [ For example, 3 etc.] It is configured so that it is more likely to be a big hit when it is digested,
The second display means displays the symbol variation display (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [for example, based on the third hold which is the target of the prefetch shown in FIG. 19 (2)) which is the target of the prefetch. The display means is capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area as a read-ahead notice display prior to the start of ".
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In addition, “the notice icon is configured to be displayed in a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Only the notice display corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the second display means is a false notice display in the same mode as the notice display mode [for example, a pseudo continuous effect or a reach transition effect that is a big hit] [for example, a pseudo continuous effect or reach that is an outlier]. Transition effect, etc.] can be displayed,
The second display means, when one of the notice icons [for example, the notice icon I6 for a hat, the notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, the notice that has been consumed A display unit capable of displaying the false notice display of a type corresponding to the type of icon [for example, a false consecutive notice or a reach transition effect, etc.
After the false notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be out of alignment,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the second display means includes a plurality of display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, a production holding lamp 286, etc.]. Display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “one display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
One of the plurality of display means is a hold display means [for example, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure hold lamp 220, a production hold lamp 286, etc.], and the hold display means. Is a display unit configured to include the reserved display area,
The holding display means is a display means capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holdings in the holding display area [for example, lighting a number of holding lamps corresponding to the number of holdings].
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of decorative symbols,
The image display unit is a display unit capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (9) to 20 (20), a notice icon is displayed as a prefetch notice). Is performed by the decorative pattern display device 208, etc.],
The holding display means is a display means different from the image display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, the "holding display means is a display means including a light emitting means [for example, a lamp, an LED, or the like],"
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of decorative symbols,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, in the period in which the "second symbol variation display [eg, symbol variation display based on the third hold which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 19 (2)] is being executed, the notice icon is displayed. May be digested in the fifth number [eg three, etc.],
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, "first symbol variation display [eg, 3 which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 19 (2). There is a case where the notice icon is consumed by a sixth number [for example, one, etc.] during the period in which the “variable display of symbols based on the reservation held before the eye is held]” is executed. Yes,
The sixth number is a number different from the fifth number,
The display according to the number of holdings is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is executed [eg, FIG. 19]. Corresponding to the second hold that is the target of prefetch in the period in which the variable display of symbols based on the hold that is held before the second hold that is the target of prefetch shown in (4) is being executed. The hold icon h12 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1], etc.]. ]
Was also explained.

Further, "the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be surely consumed before the end of the symbol variation display which is the target of the prefetching [for example, FIG. 19 (1) As shown in FIG. 23 (66) and FIG. 31 (1) to FIG. 35 (66), the increased notice icons are all consumed until the end of the pattern change display that is the target of prefetching. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, "the notice icon may be started during the period in which the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is consumed (hereinafter, referred to as" fourth symbol variation display ") is being executed [eg, As shown in FIG. 28 (C), the digest display of the hat notice icon I6 and the increase of the hat notice icon I6, the thousand-box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are displayed in one pattern variation display. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, "in the period in which the symbol variable display is executed before the fourth symbol variable display is executed, is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variable display is executed There is a case where the notice icon is started to be displayed [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat that is consumed at the timing shown in FIG. Increased display etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, the "holding display area is an area capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holdings up to a seventh number [eg, four or eight],
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying the notice icons up to an eighth number [eg, six, etc.],
The seventh number is a different number than the eighth number,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of productions [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 210, a shielding device 246, a production movable body 224, various lamps 418, a game board lamp 532, a game underframe lamp 542]. Etc.]
As the notice icon, a first notice icon [for example, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes shown in FIG. 22 (47) or FIG. 33 (47)] can be displayed,
As the notice icon, a second notice icon [for example, a ribbon notice icon I8 or the like shown in FIG. 29 (Ab)] can be displayed.
The first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon,
One of the plurality of types of advance notice display is a first advance notice display [for example, FIG. 22 (49) to FIG. 22 (50) or the reach transition effect shown in FIG. 34 (49)],
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a second notice display [for example, stage change effect shown in FIG. 29 (Ac) or FIG. 29 (Bb)],
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
When the first notice icon is consumed, the first notice display is configured to be displayed,
When the second notice icon is consumed, the second notice display is configured to be displayed,
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIGS. 22 (51) to (57) and FIGS. 34 (50-1) to (57). Production etc.],
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of a moon background, etc.],
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice display is a notice display for notifying that the first effect is executed,
The game machine, wherein the second notice display is a notice display for notifying that the second effect is to be executed. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "main control means [for example, main control unit 300 or the like],
Production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500, etc.],
Equipped with
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is a means capable of executing control of the first display means [eg, first special figure display device 212, second special figure display device 214, etc.],
The effect control unit is a unit capable of executing control of the second display unit [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208 or the like].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
"A gaming table equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display based on the pending held before the third pending which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 19 (2)]. As a result, the display of the first notice icon [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat] may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 19 (9), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285]. Etc.],
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may not be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display [eg, FIG. 19 (9) to FIG. 20]. As shown in (14), the hat notice icon I6 which has started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (9) has not been digested even if the next symbol variation display is started at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (14). ],
Symbol variation display that is displayed after the first symbol variation display (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [eg, a symbol based on the third hold which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 19 (2)) Variable display, etc.] ") is configured so that the first notice icon that has not been digested during the display of the first symbol variable display may be digested [for example, FIG. 9) to FIG. 20 (25), the notice icon I6 of the hat, which has started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (9), is the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching, as shown in FIG. 20 (23). Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In addition, "the first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may be exhausted during the display of the first symbol variation display [eg, a notice icon for a hat] The notice icon I6 of this hat is consumed in the pattern variation display in which the display of I6 is started],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "As a pre-reading notice of the second symbol variation display, the first notice icon may be started to be displayed while the first symbol variation display is being displayed [for example, FIG. As shown in 20 (25), the change in the symbol which is the target of prefetching is performed so that the notice icon I6 of the hat, which has started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (9), is consumed at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (23). A hat notice icon I6 is displayed as a read-ahead notice for display, etc.]. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “during the display of the one-time symbol variable display, the second number [eg, three, etc.] is more than the case where the first number [eg, one, etc.] of the first notice icon is consumed. ] If the first notice icon of [] is digested, it is easier to get a big hit,
The second number is a number greater than the first number,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, "a second notice icon [for example, a fan notice icon I10 or the like] can be displayed as the notice icon,
The second notice icon is configured to be a big hit in the digested variable display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 23 (60) to (66), the notice icon I10 of the fan is consumed. Then, the result of the symbol variation display is a big hit, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of display is a notice display [for example, pseudo continuous production, freeze production, stop pattern announcement, stage change production, reach transition production, premier announcement production, re-variation production, etc.] ,
When the first notice icon [for example, the hat notice icon I6, etc.] has been consumed, the first notice display [for example, the pseudo shown in FIGS. , Etc. may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of display is a false notice display [for example, a false continuous production or a reach transition production that is out of order],
When the first notice icon [for example, the notice icon for hat I6, etc.] is consumed, a first false notice table [for example, a false continuous production, etc.] is displayed as the false notice display. Sometimes,
The display mode of the first false notification display is the same display mode as the display mode of the first notification display,
The first fake advance notice display is configured to be displaced in the symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a look-ahead effect display [for example, a look-ahead mode effect that is an effect that shifts to a special stage shown in FIG.
As the notice icon, a third notice icon [for example, a notice icon I8 on a ribbon] can be displayed.
When the third notice icon is consumed, the prefetch effect display may be started [for example, when one ribbon notice icon I8 is consumed, if the reliability of the big hit is strong, The effect that the background shifts to the prefetch mode is performed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the display means includes a plurality of display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, a production holding lamp 286, etc.] Is,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, "One of the plurality of types of display is a decorative pattern variable display [for example, as shown in FIG. 19 (1), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a variable display of the decorative pattern, etc.]. Is,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variable display [for example, based on the hold three orders before the hold that is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 19 (9)] The notice icon I6 of the hat which is started to be displayed during the variable display of symbols] is configured to be surely consumed by the end of the display of the second variable display of the symbols [for example, the hold that is the target of prefetching] The notice icon I6 of the hat has been digested while the pattern change display based on
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area [for example, the notice icon display area 285 or the like] of the display unit,
The notice icon display area is an area in which a plurality of notice icons can be displayed [for example, the notice icon display area 285 includes the notice icon first display area YA1 to the notice icon sixth display area YA6. Each area can be configured to display a notice icon],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500, etc.] is provided,
The effect control unit is a unit capable of executing control of the display unit [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208 or the like].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "main control means [for example, main control unit 300 or the like],
With a symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, etc.],
Equipped with
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is a means capable of executing control of the symbol display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
"A gaming table equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIGS. 18 (a) and 18 (b), a notice icon I21 for "house", a notice icon I22 for "monkey". , A notice icon I31 of "donor", a notice icon I32 of "princess", a notice icon I33 of "grandpa", etc.],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
Large-scale jackpot variable display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, "second symbol variable display [for example, symbolic variation display that becomes a jackpot based on the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 41 (1)]) ") Is suspended, and the display of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as" a plurality of notice icons ") is started in a period from the end of the display of the second symbol variable display. In some cases, [for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 to 42, “house” is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 during the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching to the end of the symbol variation display. And the notice icon I22 of "Crest" are displayed, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of display is a performance display,
When the notice icon is consumed, the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (23) to 21 (32), a hat is displayed). When the notice icon I6 of No. 16 is consumed, pseudo-linking may be performed. As shown in FIGS. 22 (46) to (57), when the notice icon I9 of 1,000 boxes is consumed, a strong reach effect is produced. May be started],
The first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons (for example, the combination of the notice icon I21 of "house" and the notice icon I22 of "monkey" shown in FIG. 41) is one symbol variation. By being consumed in the display, a first effect display [for example, an effect image displayed in the crest drop effect shown in FIG. 42 (21)] is displayed as the effect display. ,
A game table characterized by that.

  In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a display means.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to continue to give a sense of expectation that the first effect display may be displayed until the first combination notice icon is consumed.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons can be shown in the pattern variation display prior to the start of the pattern variation display which is the object of prefetching, and the expectation for a big hit can be given. Sometimes you can.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of display, or may not display a plurality of types of display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. Further, the display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed only as the prefetch advance notice display, or may be other than displayed as the prefetch advance notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as the prefetch notice display, or may not be displayed as the prefetch notice display.

  Further, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display is suspended, until the display of the second symbol variable display is finished, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be always started, There may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is not started in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

  Further, the display of a plurality of advance notice icons may be started only during the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, The display of the plurality of advance notice icons may be started during a period other than the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

  Further, when the notice icon is consumed, only the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed. When the notice icon is consumed, the type of notice icon that is consumed may be displayed. There may be a case where a display other than the effect display corresponding to is displayed. In addition, when the notice icon is consumed, a display effect corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be always displayed, and when the notice icon is consumed, the type of notice icon that is consumed There may be a case where the effect display corresponding to is not displayed.

  Further, even if the first combination of the plurality of notice icons displayed is exhausted in one symbol variable display, only the first effect display may be displayed as the effect display. Good, the first combination of the plurality of notice icons displayed is exhausted in one symbol variation display, so that a display other than the first effect display is also displayed as an effect display. May be done. Further, even if the first combination of the plurality of notice icons displayed is exhausted in one symbol variable display, the first effect display is always displayed as the effect display. It is possible that the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons may be exhausted in one symbol variable display, so that the first effect display may not be displayed as the effect display.

  Further, the first combination of the plurality of displayed notice icons may be configured to display the first effect display as the effect display only by being consumed in the one-time symbol variable display. Good, the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is configured to display the first effect display as the effect display, in addition to the fact that the first combination is exhausted in the single symbol variation display. May be done.

In addition, “the first combination is a combination of a first number [for example, two, etc.] of the notice icons,
A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the first effect display is displayed from when one of the first combination icons including the first number of the notification icons is displayed until the first number of the notification icons is consumed. It may be possible to continue to have a sense of expectation that may be displayed.

In addition, “the first combination is a combination including a first notice icon [for example, a notice icon I21 of“ house ”and the like] and a second notice icon [for example, a notice icon I22 of crest” and the like]. ,
The first notice icon and the second notice icon are different notice icons,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the first notice icon and the second notice icon are visually different, it may be possible to enhance the effect.

  Here, the first combination may be a combination of only the first notice icon and the second notice icon, or a combination including notice icons other than the first notice icon and the second notice icon. May be. The first combination may be a combination that always includes the first notice icon and the second notice icon, or a combination that does not include at least one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon. May be.

In addition, “the second symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display which is a big hit based on the second suspension which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 41 (1)] is suspended, and then the second In the period until the display of the symbol variable display is finished, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [for example, as shown in FIG. 42 (19), the symbol variable display which is the target of prefetching is suspended. In the period from the start to the end of the variation display of the symbol, the notice icon I21 of “house” and the notice icon I22 of “crest” displayed in the notice icon display area 285 have been consumed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, a plurality of notice icons are digested in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, thereby responding to these. Since a plurality of effects may be performed, the effect of the effect may be improved.

  Here, in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, some icons other than the plurality of notice icons may be consumed. Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be surely consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  Further, there may be a case where a plurality of notice icons are consumed only during the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

Further, in the "one-time symbol variation display, even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are exhausted, the first effect display is configured not to be displayed [eg, The effect image shown in FIG. 42 (21) is not displayed even if only one of the "house" notice icon I21 and the "monkey" notice icon I22 is consumed.], Stand. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, if the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is not consumed in the one-time symbol variation display, the first effect display is not displayed, so the first effect display It may be possible to give a feeling of superiority to the player who has been able to see.

  Here, in the one-time symbol variable display, even if only some of the notice icons of the first combination are consumed, it may be configured such that only the first effect display is not displayed. In the symbol variable display, even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are consumed, the display other than the first effect display may not be displayed. Further, in the one-time symbol variable display, even if only some of the notice icons of the first combination are consumed, the first effect display may not necessarily be displayed, or only one notice icon may be displayed. In the symbol variation display, even if only some of the first notice icons in the first combination are consumed, the first effect display may be displayed.

  Further, only in the one-time symbol variation display, even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are exhausted, the first effect display may not be displayed, or only once. Even in a symbol variation display other than the symbol variation display, the first effect display may not be displayed even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are consumed.

In addition, when the third notice icon [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat shown in FIG. 20 or the like] is consumed as the notice icon, the third effect display [for example, as shown in FIG. ) Shown in FIG. 7B), the banchou character BC displayed corresponding to the digestion of the hat notice icon I6 pushes up the right symbol, etc.] is displayed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases in which variations in production are increased and the production effect can be enhanced.

  Here, it may be configured such that only the third effect display is displayed by digesting the third notice icon, or by the third notice icon being digested, The display other than the effect display may be displayed. Further, the third effect display may be configured to be always displayed when the third notice icon is consumed, or the third effect display may be configured to be displayed without fail. The display may not be displayed in some cases.

  Further, the third effect display may be displayed only by digesting the third notice icon, or in addition to the fact that the third notice icon is consumed, It may be configured to display the third effect display.

In addition, “The pre-reading target is a symbol variation display (hereinafter,“ the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 20 (21) to 23 (66) is a symbol to be lost. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the suspension of the display of the variable display etc.]) to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display [eg, FIG. As shown in (2) to FIG. 23 (66), four notice icons are stocked from the time when the symbol variable display, which is the target of prefetching, is suspended to the time when the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching ends. ],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching ends.

  Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. The display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be always started, The display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

  Further, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

In addition, after the “fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. 23 (66), which is a symbol variation display that is lost, etc.] is suspended, In the period until the display of the four symbol variable display ends, the plurality of notice icons may be exhausted [for example, as shown in FIGS. Four notice icons have been consumed from the time when a certain pattern variation display is suspended until the time when the pattern variation display, which is the target of prefetching, ends, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is exhausted, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching ends.

  Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the icons other than the plurality of notice icons are also consumed. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the plurality of notice icons may be surely consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the fourth In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

Further, "holding display means [for example, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the decorative pattern display device 208, etc.],
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) of which the start of the variable display of the symbols is held [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 41. In the display area 281, the number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. . Further, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations.

In addition, "The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the displayed number [for example, a notice icon (a notice icon I21 of a" house "or a notice of a crest) shown in FIG. The icon I22 etc.) is not an icon indicating the number of operations of the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 1 that are suspended, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
[First display means [eg, first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 46, first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 49],
Second display means [for example, a second decorative pattern display device 208B shown in FIG. 46, a second decorative pattern display device 208D shown in FIG. 49],
A gaming machine equipped with
The first display means displays a notice icon [for example, a display in which the notice icon I6 of the hat shown in FIGS. 46 (10) to 47 (13) is exhausted, or FIGS. 47 (16) to 47 (19). ), The display of the banchou character BC performed corresponding to the hat notice icon I6, or the pseudo continuous production, or the display of the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIGS. 49 (c1) to (c5). Etc.] can be displayed,
The second display means displays the notice icon [for example, the notice icon display area 285A shown in FIGS. 46 (2) to 47 (13) or the notice icon display area 285A shown in FIGS. 46 (5) to 46 (9)). Display of the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIG. 49, or the display of the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIG. 49 (c6), etc.] can be displayed.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a read-ahead notice display [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 18 may function as a read-ahead notice display],
Large-scale jackpot variable display that is the object of prefetching (hereinafter, "second symbol variable display [for example, symbolic variation display that becomes a jackpot based on the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 49 (c1)]) ") Is suspended, and the display of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as" a plurality of notice icons ") is started in the period from the end of the display of the second symbol variable display. There is a case [for example, as shown in FIG. 49 (c1) to FIG. 49 (c9), a notice icon is displayed during the period from the suspension of the pre-reading target variable display until the end of the variable display. Two hat notice icons I6 and one shuriken notice icon I7 are displayed in the area 285B],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

  In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a display means.

  Further, according to this gaming table, since the display relating to the notice icon may be displayed on the plurality of display means, the line of sight of the player who sees the display regarding the notice icon should not be concentrated on one display means. Sometimes it can entertain the player.

  Here, the display means may consist only of the first display means and the second display means, or may be provided with a display means other than the first display means and the second display means. .. Further, the display means may necessarily include the first display means and the second display means, or may not include the first display means and the second display means.

  Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the display relating to the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display relating to the notice icon. Further, the first display means may always display the display regarding the notice icon, or may not display the display regarding the notice icon.

  The second display means may be capable of displaying only the display regarding the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display regarding the notice icon. Further, the second display means may always display the display regarding the notice icon, or may not display the display regarding the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the prefetch notice display, or may be displayed as something other than the prefetch notice display. The advance notice icon may be always displayed as the prefetch advance notice display, or may not be displayed as the prefetch advance notice display.

  Further, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display is suspended, until the display of the second symbol variable display is finished, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be always started, There may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is not started in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

  Further, the display of a plurality of advance notice icons may be started only during the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, The display of the plurality of advance notice icons may be started during a period other than the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

In addition, “the second symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display which is a big hit based on the second suspension which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 49 (c1)] is suspended, and then the second In the period until the display of the symbol variable display is finished, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 49 (c1) to (c9), it is a target of prefetching. The notice icon I7 of the shuriken and the notice icon I6 of the two hats have been consumed in the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the variable display of symbols],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, a plurality of notice icons are digested in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, thereby responding to these. Since a plurality of effects may be performed, the effect of the effect may be improved.

  Here, in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, some icons other than the plurality of notice icons may be consumed. Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be surely consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  Further, there may be a case where a plurality of notice icons are consumed only during the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

Further, in the "second display means [eg, the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 46, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 49, etc.], the notice icon is displayed. It is configured [for example, as shown in FIG. 46 (5), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since the display means capable of performing the stock production is determined, it may be possible not to miss the notice icon that has been stocked.

  Here, the second display means may be configured to display only the notice icon, or the second display means may be configured to display other than the notice icon. Good. Further, the second display means may be configured to always display the advance notice icon, or the second display means may be configured to not display the advance notice icon in some cases.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only on the second display means, or the notice icon may be displayed on the display means other than the second display means. Good.

Further, in the "first display means [eg, the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 46, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 49, etc.], the notice icon is displayed. A notice may be displayed [For example, as shown in FIGS. 46 (2) to 46 (5), a notice indicating that the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285A is displayed. Effect) is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the advance notice icon may be displayed in advance, so that it may be possible to keep the player focused on the display means and prevent the player from missing the advance notice icon. is there.

  Here, in the first display means, there may be a case in which only a display for notifying that the notice icon is displayed may be performed, or in the first display means, a display for notifying that the notice icon is displayed. Other displays may be displayed. In addition, there may be a case where a display for announcing that the notice icon is displayed is always displayed on the first display means, and a display for announcing that the notice icon is displayed may be displayed on the first display means. You may not do it.

  In addition, there may be a case where a notice is given that the notice icon is displayed only on the first display means, and the notice icon is also displayed on the display means other than the first display means. There may be a case in which a display for announcing is displayed.

In addition, “the first display means has a first display area [for example, a display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 46, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 49, etc.] Is the means provided,
The second display means is provided with a second display area [for example, the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 46, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 49, etc.]. Means,
The advance notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 46 (4) or FIG. 1 is displayed over the decorative pattern display device 208A and the second decorative pattern display device 208B, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it is possible to produce a notice icon with a high impact and entertain the player in some cases.

  Here, the first display means may be provided with only the first display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the first display area. Further, the first display means may be always provided with the first display area, or may not be provided with the first display area.

  Further, the second display means may be provided with only the second display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the second display area. Further, the second display means may be always provided with the second display area, or may not be provided with the second display area.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area and the second display area, and the notice icon may be displayed in areas other than the first display area and the second display area. It may be displayed over the area. In addition, the notice icon may be always displayed over the first display area and the second display area, or the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. It may not be displayed.

  In addition, only the notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area, or the notice icon other than the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area and the second display area. It may be displayed over the entire range.

In addition, “the first display means has a first display area [for example, a display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 46, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 49, etc.] Is the means provided,
The second display means is provided with a second display area [for example, the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 46, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 49, etc.]. Means,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type [for example, a plurality of types of notice icons according to the type of effect shown in FIG. 18, etc.],
When the notice icon is consumed, a performance display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area [eg, FIG. 47 (16) to (18), when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the enlarged and displayed Bancho character BC2 changes from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device. In the effect display in which the length-long character BC pushes up the right symbol, the right symbol is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the pseudo continuous symbol is the second symbol. And the like displayed from the decorative pattern display device 208B to the first decorative pattern display device 208A],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it is possible to produce a notice icon with a high impact and entertain the player in some cases.

  Here, the first display means may be provided with only the first display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the first display area. Further, the first display means may be always provided with the first display area, or may not be provided with the first display area.

  Further, the second display means may be provided with only the second display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the second display area. Further, the second display means may be always provided with the second display area, or may not be provided with the second display area.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in a display mode according to the type, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode according to the type. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the display mode according to the type, or may not be displayed in the display mode according to the type.

  Further, when the notice icon is consumed, the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed only over the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is consumed, the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area and the second display area. Good. Further, when the notice icon is consumed, the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be always displayed in the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is consumed, the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may not be displayed across the first display area and the second display area.

  Further, when the notice icon is consumed, only the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is consumed, even if the effect display other than the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed is displayed over the first display area and the second display area, Good.

In addition, “The pre-reading target is a symbol variation display (hereinafter,“ the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 20 (21) to 23 (66) is a symbol to be lost. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the suspension of the display of the variable display etc.]) to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display [eg, FIG. As shown in (2) to FIG. 23 (66), four notice icons are stocked from the time when the symbol variable display, which is the target of prefetching, is suspended to the time when the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching ends. ],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching ends.

  Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. The display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be always started, The display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

  Further, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

In addition, after the “fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. 23 (66), which is a symbol variation display that is lost, etc.] is suspended, In the period until the display of the four symbol variable display ends, the plurality of notice icons may be exhausted [for example, as shown in FIGS. Four notice icons have been consumed from the time when a certain pattern variation display is suspended until the time when the pattern variation display, which is the target of prefetching, ends, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is exhausted, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching ends.

  Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the icons other than the plurality of notice icons are also consumed. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the plurality of notice icons may be surely consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the fourth In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

Further, "holding display means [for example, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the decorative pattern display device 208, etc.],
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) for which the start of the symbol variable display is held [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 46. In the display area 281, the number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
A game table characterized by that.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. . Further, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations.

In addition, “The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the displayed number [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. It is not an icon that indicates the number of symbols whose variable display is activated, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
“Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
A first movable means [for example, an actuator for displacing the position of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 52 (12), a family crest part 224B shown in FIG. 44 (d4-2), and the like,
A gaming machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIGS. 18 (a) and 18 (b), a notice icon I21 for "house", a notice icon I22 for "monkey". , Drink notice icon I31, etc.]
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
Large-scale jackpot variable display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, "second symbol variable display [for example, symbolic variation display that becomes a big hit based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 19 (2)]) ") Is suspended, and the display of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as" a plurality of notice icons ") is started in a period from the end of the display of the second symbol variable display. In some cases [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (2) to 23 (66) and FIG. 52, in the period from the suspension of the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching to the end of the symbol variable display, In the notice icon display area 285, two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a drink notice icon I31 are displayed, etc.],
The first movable means provides a first movable effect [eg, a movable effect for displacing the effect button 136 from the default position to the protruding position as shown in FIGS. 52 (12) to 52 (17)]. Is a viable means,
The first movable effect may be executed when the fourth notice icon [for example, the notice icon I31 of a drink] of the displayed notice icons is consumed. ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

  In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the movable means, but according to this game table, a game table characterized by the movable means can be realized.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, when the fourth notice icon is consumed on the display means, the first movable effect may be performed by the first movable means, so that variations of the effect can be increased. There are cases.

  Further, according to this gaming table, the player's line of sight can be focused on not only the display means but also the movable means, and the staging effect may be enhanced.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of display, or may not display a plurality of types of display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in a display mode according to the type, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode according to the type. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the display mode according to the type, or may not be displayed in the display mode according to the type.

  Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed only as the prefetch advance notice display, or may be other than displayed as the prefetch advance notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as the prefetch notice display, or may not be displayed as the prefetch notice display.

  Further, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display is suspended, until the display of the second symbol variable display is finished, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be always started, There may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is not started in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

  Further, the display of a plurality of advance notice icons may be started only during the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, The display of the plurality of advance notice icons may be started during a period other than the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

  Further, the first movable means may be capable of executing only the first movable effect, or may be capable of executing movable effects other than the first movable effect. In addition, the first movable means may always execute the first movable effect, or may not execute the first movable effect.

  Further, when the fourth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is exhausted, it may be configured such that only the first movable effect may be executed. A movable effect other than the first movable effect may be executed in some cases when the fourth notice icon is exhausted. Further, when the fourth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is exhausted, the first movable effect may be executed without fail, or the first notice effect may be displayed. The first movable effect may not be executed when the fourth notice icon is exhausted.

  Further, it may be configured such that the first movable effect may be executed only when the fourth notice icon of the notice icons displayed has been exhausted, or the notice icon displayed may be changed. It may be configured such that the first movable effect may be executed even when the fourth notice icon is not consumed.

In addition, after the "second symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display which is a big hit based on the third suspension which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 19 (2)] is suspended, the second The plurality of advance notice icons may be consumed in the period until the display of the symbol variable display is finished [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (2) to 23 (66) and FIG. During the period from the suspension of the target variable display of symbols to the end of the variable display of symbols, the notice icon I6 of the two hats, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes, and the notice icon I31 of the drink are consumed, etc.] ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, a plurality of notice icons are digested in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, thereby responding to these. Since a plurality of effects may be performed, the effect of the effect may be improved.

  Here, in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, some icons other than the plurality of notice icons may be consumed. Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be surely consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  Further, there may be a case where a plurality of notice icons are consumed only during the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

In addition, when the fifth notice icon [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 18, the notice icon I21 of "house", etc.] among the displayed notice icons is consumed, the first movable icon is displayed. The production is configured not to be executed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, when the fifth notice icon among the notice icons displayed is consumed, only the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed, or among the notice icons displayed. When the fifth notice icon is exhausted, the movable effect other than the first movable effect may not be executed. Further, when the fifth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is exhausted, the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed without fail, or the first notice effect of the displayed notice icons may be executed. The first movable effect may be executed when the five notice icons are exhausted.

  Further, the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed only when the fifth notice icon of the displayed notice icons has been exhausted, or the first notice effect of the displayed notice icons may be executed. The first movable effect may be configured not to be executed even in cases other than the case where the five notice icons are exhausted.

In addition, “operating means [for example, effect button 136, etc.] that can be operated by the player is provided,
The first movable means is a means for moving the operating means,
The first movable effect refers to the aspect of the operation means from the first aspect [eg, the default position shown in FIG. 52 (12)] to the second aspect [eg, shown in FIG. 52 (17)]. The projected position, etc.]
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the change of the operation means may be notified by the notification icon, so that the operation means may also be noticed.

  Here, the operating means may be operable only by the player, or may be operable by anyone other than the player. Further, it may be always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

  Further, the first movable means may be movable only the operating means, or may be movable other than the operating means. Further, the first movable means may be one that can always move the operating means, or may not move the operating means.

In addition, “second movable means [for example, a family crest part shown in FIG. 44 (d4-2)] is provided,
The second movable means is a means capable of executing a second movable effect [for example, a family crest fall effect shown in FIG. 44 (d4-2)].
The second movable effect may be executed when a sixth notice icon [for example, the notice icon I21 of "house", etc.] of the notice icons displayed is exhausted. ing,
A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the variety of effects by the movable means becomes rich, and the interest may be improved.

  Here, the second movable means may be capable of executing only the second movable effect, or may be capable of executing movable effects other than the second movable effect. In addition, the second movable means may always execute the second movable effect, or may not execute the second movable effect.

  In addition, when the sixth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is exhausted, only the second movable effect may be executed, or the displayed notice icon may be displayed. It may be configured such that a movable effect other than the second movable effect may be executed when the sixth notice icon of the above is exhausted. Further, when the sixth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is consumed, the second movable effect may be configured to be executed without fail. The second movable effect may not be executed when the sixth notice icon is consumed.

  Further, the second movable effect may be executed only when the sixth notice icon of the notice icons displayed has been exhausted, or the notice icon displayed may be displayed. The second movable effect may be executed even when the sixth notice icon is not consumed.

In addition, “The pre-reading target is a symbol variation display (hereinafter,“ the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 20 (21) to 23 (66) is a symbol to be lost. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the suspension of the display of the variable display etc.]) to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display [eg, FIG. As shown in (2) to FIG. 23 (66), four notice icons are stocked from the time when the symbol variable display, which is the target of prefetching, is suspended to the time when the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching ends. ],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching ends.

  Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. The display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be always started, The display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

  Further, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

In addition, after the “fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. 23 (66), which is a symbol variation display that is lost, etc.] is suspended, In the period until the display of the four symbol variable display ends, the plurality of notice icons may be exhausted [for example, as shown in FIGS. Four notice icons have been consumed from the time when a certain pattern variation display is suspended until the time when the pattern variation display, which is the target of prefetching, ends, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is exhausted, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching ends.

  Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the icons other than the plurality of notice icons are also consumed. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the plurality of notice icons may be surely consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the fourth In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

Further, "holding display means [for example, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the decorative pattern display device 208, etc.],
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) of which the start of the variable display of the symbols is held [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 41. In the display area 281, the number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. . Further, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations.

Further, “The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the displayed number [for example, a notice icon shown in FIG. 52 (a notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes or a notice icon I31 of a drink, etc.). Is not an icon that indicates the number of operations of the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 1], etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
"A gaming table equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 18 (a) and FIG. 18 (b)],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
Large-scale jackpot variable display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, "second symbol variable display [for example, symbolic variation display that becomes a big hit based on the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 54 (1)]) ") Is suspended, and the display of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as" a plurality of notice icons ") is started in the period from the end of the display of the second symbol variable display. In some cases [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (2) to 23 (66), the notice icon display is displayed during the period from the suspension of the pre-reading target variable display until the end of the variable display. In the area 285, two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10 are displayed, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon display suggestion display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 54 (2) to 54 (6), a notice that a notice icon by a lord's effect is displayed, etc.] ],
The notice icon display suggestion display is a display indicating that the notice icon display may be started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

  In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a display means.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be suggested in advance that the display of the notice icon may be started, so that it may be possible to enjoy the process until the notice icon is displayed.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of display, or may not display a plurality of types of display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the display means may display only the notice icon display suggestion display, or may display a display other than the notice icon display suggestion display. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon display suggestion display, or may not display the notice icon display suggestion display.

  Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed only as the prefetch advance notice display, or may be other than displayed as the prefetch advance notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as the prefetch notice display, or may not be displayed as the prefetch notice display.

  Further, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display is suspended, until the display of the second symbol variable display is finished, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be always started, There may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is not started in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

  Further, the display of a plurality of advance notice icons may be started only during the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, The display of the plurality of advance notice icons may be started during a period other than the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

  Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may be capable of only indicating that the notice icon may be displayed, or may be other than the notice icon display being sometimes started. It may be suggestable. Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may necessarily indicate that the notice icon may be displayed, or may not indicate that the notice icon may be displayed. It may be.

In addition, “the second symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display that is a big hit based on the second suspension that is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 54 (1)] is suspended, and then the second The plurality of notice icons may be consumed in the period until the display of the symbol variable display is finished [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (2) to 23 (66), it is a target of prefetching. During the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the variable display of symbols, the notice icon I6 of the two hats, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes and the notice icon of the fan displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are exhausted. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, a plurality of notice icons are digested in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, thereby responding to these. Since a plurality of effects may be performed, the effect of the effect may be improved.

  Here, in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, some icons other than the plurality of notice icons may be consumed. Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be surely consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  Further, there may be a case where a plurality of notice icons are consumed only during the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

In addition, “The notice icon display suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variable displays [for example, twice as shown in FIGS. 54 (2) to 54 (5)]. The notice that the notice icon by the lord's production is displayed over the variable display of
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the notice icon display suggestion display may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, so that it may be possible to enjoy the process until the notice icon is displayed.

  Here, the notice icon display suggestive display may be displayed only over a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays other than the symbol variation display. There may be cases where Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may be always displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may not be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

Further, "the display of the notice icon display suggestion display is configured to be terminated during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 54 (2) ~ As shown in (5) of the same figure, the advance notice that the advance notice icon by the lord's effect is displayed is finished before the symbol variable display, which is the target of prefetching, is started, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the notice icon display suggestive display is terminated before the symbol variation display which is the target of prefetching is started, so that it may be possible to concentrate on the symbol variation which is the target of prefetching.

  Here, during the display of the symbol variation display that is displayed before the second symbol variation display, only the notice icon display suggestion display may be configured to end, or the second symbol variation display The display other than the display of the notice icon display suggestion may be configured to be terminated during the display of the variable display of symbols displayed prior to the display. Further, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be configured to always end during the display of the symbol variation display that is displayed before the second symbol variation display, or the second symbol variation display. It may be configured such that the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may not be finished during the display of the symbol variable display that is displayed before.

  Further, the display of the notice icon display suggestive display may be configured to end only during the display of the symbol variation display that is displayed before the second symbol variation display, or the second symbol variation display. The display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be terminated even when the symbol variable display that is displayed before is displayed.

In addition, "the notice icon display suggestion display is a display that may indicate that at least one of the notice icons of a third number [eg, three] may be started. [For example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-4), in the Amida production, display of at least one of the hat notice icon I6, the fan notice icon I10, and the thousand-box notice icon I9 may be started. Suggesting that there is such a thing],
The third number is a number greater than or equal to 2,
A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, at least one of the previously-predicted notice icons may be displayed, so that the player can grasp which notice icon may be displayed. There is a case where it is possible to entertain the fluctuation of the design in which the notice icon is displayed.

  Here, the notice icon display suggestion display may indicate only that at least one of the notice icons of the third number may be displayed, or It may also indicate something other than that the display of at least one of the number of notice icons may be started. Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may necessarily indicate that at least one of the notice icons of the third number may be started, or the notice icon of the third number may be displayed. It may not indicate that the display of at least one of these may be initiated.

In addition, “at least one of the third number of the notice icons suggested that the notice may be started by the notice icon display suggestion display may be started [eg, 56 (a1-1) to 56 (a-6), as a result of the Amida effect, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, there may be a case where only the display of at least one of the third number of the notice icons suggested that the display may be started by the notice icon display suggestion display may be started. There may be a case where a display other than the display of at least one of the third number of advance notice icons suggested that the display may be started by the icon display suggestion display may be started. Further, it may be configured such that the display of at least one of the third number of the notice icons, which has been suggested that the notice may be started by the notice icon display suggestion display, is always started. There may be a case where the display of at least one of the third number of advance notice icons, which has been suggested that the display may be started by the icon display suggestion display, may not be started.

In addition, “The pre-reading target is a symbol variation display (hereinafter,“ the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 20 (21) to 23 (66) is a symbol to be lost. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the suspension of the display of the variable display etc.]) to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display [eg, FIG. As shown in (2) to FIG. 23 (66), four notice icons are stocked from the time when the symbol variable display, which is the target of prefetching, is suspended to the time when the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching ends. ],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching ends.

  Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. The display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be always started, The display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

  Further, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

In addition, after the “fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. 23 (66), which is a symbol variation display that is lost, etc.] is suspended, In the period until the display of the four symbol variable display ends, the plurality of notice icons may be exhausted [for example, as shown in FIGS. Four notice icons have been consumed from the time when a certain pattern variation display is suspended until the time when the pattern variation display, which is the target of prefetching, ends, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is exhausted, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching ends.

  Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the icons other than the plurality of notice icons are also consumed. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the plurality of notice icons may be surely consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the fourth In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

Further, "holding display means [for example, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the decorative pattern display device 208, etc.],
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) of which the start of the symbol variable display is held [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 54. In the display area 281, the number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. . Further, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations.

In addition, “The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the displayed number [for example, the notice icon (the notice icon I6 of the hat, etc. shown in FIG. 54) of FIG. It is not an icon that indicates the number of symbols whose variable display is activated, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
"A gaming table equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 18 (a) and FIG. 18 (b)],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as the first prefetch notice display,
Large-scale jackpot variable display that is the object of prefetching (hereinafter, "second symbol variable display [for example, symbolic variation display that becomes a jackpot based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 57 (2)]) Display) is held after the "." Is suspended. (Hereinafter, referred to as "first symbol display variation [for example, symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 57 (4) to (13)]"). May be started,
In the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “plural notice icons”) The display may be started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (4) to 23 (66), the pattern variation display which is started after the design variation display which is the big hit that is the target of prefetching is suspended. From the start of the display of No. until the end of the pattern variation display, which is the big hit, which is the target of the prefetch, the notice icon I6 of the two hats, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes, and the notice icon I10 of the fan are displayed. etc],
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that is started to be displayed next to the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

  In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a display means.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, while the symbol variation display displayed when the hold display related to the second symbol variation display which is the target of prefetching is displayed can be enjoyed to the end, it starts after that. In some cases, it is possible to enjoy the display of the notice icon as the read-ahead notice display related to the second symbol change display that is the target of the read-ahead.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of display, or may not display a plurality of types of display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the first look-ahead notice display, or may be displayed other than as the first look-ahead notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as the first look-ahead notice display, or may not be displayed as the first look-ahead notice display.

  Further, there may be a case where only the display of the first symbol variation display is started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the first symbol variation after the second symbol variation display is suspended. There may be a case where a symbol variable display other than the display of the display is also started. Also, the display of the first symbol variation display may be always started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the display of the first symbol variation display after the second symbol variation display is suspended. It may not be started.

  In addition, there may be a case where only the display of the first symbol variation display is started only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, and the second symbol variation display is also retained after the second symbol variation display is suspended. There may be a case where only one symbol variable display is started.

  Further, there may be a case where only a plurality of notice icons are started in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, In some cases, the display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the start of the display of the one symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display. Further, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started without fail during the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, or the first symbol variation There may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is not started in the period from the start of the display of the display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

  Further, there may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is started only during the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the start of the display of the one symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

In addition, in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [eg, As shown in FIGS. 19 (4) to 23 (66), the target of the prefetch is started after the display of the symbol variable display started after the symbol variable display which is the big hit that is the target of the prefetch is suspended. By the end of the symbol variation display which is a big hit, the notice icon I6 of two hats, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes, and the notice icon I10 of a fan are consumed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, while the symbol variation display displayed when the hold display related to the second symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is displayed to the end, it is started after that. It may be possible to enjoy digesting the notice icon as a prefetching notice display related to the second symbol variation display, which is the target of prefetching from the symbol variation display.

  Here, in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, there may be a case where only a plurality of notice icons are consumed, In the period from the start of the display of the one symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, there may be a case where the icons other than the plurality of notice icons are consumed. Also, in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, a plurality of notice icons may be surely consumed, or the first symbol variable display There may be a case where a plurality of notice icons are not digested during the period from the start of display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display. In a period other than the period from the start of the display of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, a plurality of the notice icons may be consumed.

Further, "holding display means [for example, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the decorative pattern display device 208, etc.],
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) of which the start of the variable display is held [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 57. In the display area 281, the number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. . Further, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations.

In addition, "The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the number displayed [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 57 (the notice icon I6 of a hat, etc.) It is not an icon that indicates the number of symbols that the variable display operation has been suspended, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.

In addition, in the case where the “second symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display that is a big hit based on the third suspension that is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 57 (2)] is suspended, the second The display of the hold display [for example, display of the third hold icon h13 shown in FIG. 57 (2)] is started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to recognize that the second symbol variable display has been suspended.

  Here, the display of the second hold display may be started only when the second symbol variable display is suspended, or in the case other than the case where the second symbol variable display is suspended. The display of the hold display may be started. In addition, the display of the second hold display may be started without fail when the second symbol variable display is held, and the display of the second hold display is displayed when the second symbol variable display is held. It does not have to be started.

Also, as the second prefetching notice display, the second hold display is displayed in the second prefetching display mode [for example, the display mode of the prefetching notice shown in FIG. 57 (2) (display mode of Sabohani)] May be
In the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed in the second prefetch display mode [for example, FIG. 57 (2 ), The third hold icon h13 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode (display mode of Sabohani) when the symbol variation display, which is a big hit based on the third hold that is the target of read-ahead, is suspended. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, there are cases in which variations of the prefetching notice display are increased and interest is improved.

  Here, the second hold display may be displayed only in the second read-ahead display mode as the second read-ahead notice display, or the second hold display may be displayed as the second read-ahead notice display. It may be displayed in a display mode other than the second prefetch display mode. Further, as the second look-ahead notice display, the second hold display may be always displayed in the second look-ahead display mode, and as the second look-ahead notice display, the second hold display is the second look-ahead display. It may not be displayed in the form.

  Further, in the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed only in the second prefetch display mode. In the symbol variable display that is displayed when the symbol variable display is suspended, the second suspended display may be displayed in a display mode other than the second prefetch display mode. Further, in the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be always displayed in the second prefetch display mode, or the second symbol variation display. The second variable display may not be displayed in the second read-ahead display mode in the symbol variable display that is displayed when is suspended.

  Also, only in the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed in the second look-ahead display mode. Even in the symbol variable display other than the symbol variable display displayed when the symbol variable display is suspended, the second suspended display may be displayed in the second prefetch display mode.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a third prefetching notice display [for example, effect display of prefetching mode shown in FIG. 58 (b2) to FIG. 58 (b3)],
The third prefetching notice display is a display that may be displayed after the second symbol variation display is suspended [for example, shown in FIGS. 58 (b1) to (b3). As described above, the effect display in the prefetch mode is started after the symbol variation display, which is a big hit based on the third preserving target, is suspended],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the variation of the prefetching notice display is increased, so that the interest may be improved.

  Here, the third look-ahead notice display may be displayed only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or after the second symbol variation display is suspended. Other than that, the display may be started. Further, the third look-ahead notice display may be always started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or may not be displayed after the second symbol variation display is suspended. There may be cases.

In addition, "a loss symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter," the fourth symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation that becomes a loss based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 57 (2) ""Displayetc.]" is suspended and is referred to as a symbol variation display (hereinafter, "third symbol variation display [eg, symbol variation display etc. shown in FIGS. 57 (4) to 57 (13)]". ) May be displayed,
The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variable display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display [eg, the figure As shown in 19 (4) to FIG. 23 (66), in the target of the prefetch after the display of the symbol variable display started after the symbol variable display that is the target of the prefetch is suspended By the end of the pattern variation display that is a certain loss, the notice icon I6 of two hats, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes, the notice icon I10 of a fan, etc. are displayed],
The third symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that is started to be displayed next to the symbol variation display displayed when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching ends.

  Further, only the display of the third symbol variation display may be started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the third symbol variation after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. There may be a case where a symbol variable display other than the display of the display is also started. Also, the display of the third symbol variation display may be always started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the display of the third symbol variation display after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. It may not be started.

  In addition, there may be a case where only the display of the third symbol variation display is started only after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, and also after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. There may be a case where only the display of the third symbol variable display is started.

  Further, it is possible that only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variable display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, In some cases, the display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variable display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display. Further, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started without fail during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, or the third symbol variation There may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is not started in the period from the start of the display of the display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

  Further, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variable display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variable display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

In addition, after the “fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. 23 (66), which is a symbol variation display that is lost, etc.] is suspended, In the period until the display of the four symbol variable display ends, the plurality of notice icons may be exhausted [for example, as shown in FIGS. Four notice icons have been consumed from the time when a certain pattern variation display is suspended until the time when the pattern variation display, which is the target of prefetching, ends, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is exhausted, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching ends.

  Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the icons other than the plurality of notice icons are also consumed. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the plurality of notice icons may be surely consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the fourth In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
A gaming table provided with a display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, notice icons shown in FIGS. 18 (a) and 18 (b), notice icons shown in FIG. 72 (d), and the like],
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
The notice icon is a different icon from the hold icon [for example, hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. displayed in the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 69],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, a character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 69],
The first display is an explanation display [for example, the display of "advance notice icon is exhausted ..." displayed in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 69 (a1), the tutorial display shown in FIG. 62 (a). "The lord is Yatsushiro Shogun" displayed in the department TT1 and "Panda is the master of the lord" displayed in the tutorial display part TT1 shown in FIG.
The first display is a display displayed in a first display area [for example, the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 69] in the display means,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the first display area when displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a7), the tutorial display unit TT4 has a notice icon I62 of a swordsman). And the notice icon I63 for increasing the chance is displayed (stock), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

  In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a display means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed only as the prefetch advance notice display, or may be other than displayed as the prefetch advance notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as the prefetch notice display, or may not be displayed as the prefetch notice display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of display, or may not display a plurality of types of display.

  Further, the first display may be capable of being displayed only in the first display area of the display means, or may be capable of being displayed in a display area other than the first display area of the display means. Good. Further, the first display may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means, or may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means.

  Further, the notice icon may be able to be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be one. Further, when the notice icon is displayed, it may be always displayed in the first display area, or when it is displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area. ..

Also, “the first display is not displayed when the notice icon is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a7), when the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4, The explanation is not displayed on the tutorial display section TT4],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the first display may not be displayed only in the state in which the notice icon is displayed, or may not be displayed in any state other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed. Further, the first display may not necessarily be displayed when the notice icon is displayed, or may be displayed when the notice icon is displayed.

In addition, “When the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may be restarted [for example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. 69 (a7), the notice display icon TT4 is displayed. When all the notice icons are exhausted, the explanation display will resume, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, when the notice icon is consumed, only the first display may be resumed. When the notice icon is consumed, displays other than the first display may be resumed. There may be. Moreover, when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may be restarted without fail, and when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may not be restarted.

In addition, "one display of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a character display of" intense heat "in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 68 (d), etc.],"
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display that is displayed in the first display area when it is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (d), the tutorial display section TT1 displays a message of "intense heat"]. Character display is displayed, etc.],
The explanation display is an explanation display relating to the notice icon [for example, a character display such as “Due to notice notice icon ...” in the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 69 (a1)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the second display may be one that can be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be displayable. Further, the second display may be always displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed. Good.

  Further, the explanation display may include only the explanation display regarding the notice icon or may include a display other than the explanation display regarding the notice icon. Further, the explanation display may necessarily include the explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may not include the explanation display regarding the notice icon.

In addition, "the display means is a means configured by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, etc.],
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like],
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means [for example, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display [for example, a variable display of decorative symbols shown in FIG. 66],
The third display means displays a display matched with the display of the second display means [for example, a bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure box image TR shown in FIGS. 66 (a2) to (a4), and a notice of the swordsman is displayed. The display that the icon I62 is stocked, etc.]
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the area of the third display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (a1), the tutorial display section TT1 has a third decoration area]. It is arranged below the symbol display device 208N, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the display means may be configured to include only the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. It may be configured to include display means other than the display means. Further, the display means may be configured to necessarily include the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. There may be a case in which at least one of the means is not included.

  Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variable display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variable display. Further, the first display means may always display the symbol variable display, or may not display the symbol variable display.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. In addition, the second display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the third display means may be capable of displaying only a display that matches the display of the second display means, or may display a display other than the display that matches the display of the second display means. It can be anything. Further, the third display means may necessarily display the display matched with the display of the second display means, or may not display the display matched with the display of the second display means. Good.

  The first display area may be provided in a partial area of the third display means, or may be provided in the entire area of the third display means. ..

  The first display area may be provided only in at least a part of the area of the third display means, or may be provided in an area other than at least a part of the area of the third display means. It may be one that has been created. Further, the first display area may be necessarily provided in at least a part of the area of the third display means, or may not be provided in at least a part of the area of the third display means. It may be.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, a character display displayed in the stage name display portion ST2 shown in FIG. 69],
The third display is an explanation display [for example, a display of "Castle Town Stage" displayed on the stage name display portion ST2 shown in FIG. 69 (a1), a stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 63 (c). Display of "Swordsman Reach" etc.]
The third display is a display displayed in the second display area [for example, the stage name display portion ST2 or the like shown in FIG. 69 (a1)] in the display means,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the second display area as well [for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a7), the stage name display portion ST2 displays a princess notice icon I64. Two pseudo-reminder icons I65 are displayed (stock), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the third display may be displayable only in the second display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the second display area of the display means. May be. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the second display area of the display means, or may not be displayed in the second display area of the display means.

  The notice icon may be displayed only in the second display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the second display area. Good. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the second display area, or may not be displayed in the second display area.

In addition, “the third display is not displayed when the advance notice icon is displayed in the second display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a7), the advance notice icon is displayed in the stage name display portion ST2. Is displayed, the stage name display section ST2 does not display the stage name, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the third display may not be displayed only in the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, or other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. It may not be displayed even in the state of. The third display may not necessarily be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, or may be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. It may be done.

In addition, “the first display area is a display area partitioned by a line [eg, as shown in FIG. 69 (a1), the tutorial display section TT4 is partitioned by a line into a square shape, etc.] ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the first display area may be partitioned only by a line, or may be partitioned by including other than the line. The first display area may be always partitioned by a line, or may not be partitioned by a line.

Further, "holding display means [for example, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the decorative pattern display device 208, etc.],
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variable display being held (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 69. In the display area, the number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed, etc.],
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the displayed number [for example, the notice icon (princess notice icon I64, pseudo notice notice icon I65 shown in FIG. 69 (a7), The swordsman's notice icon I62, the chance up notice icon I63, etc.) is not an icon that indicates the number of pending operation of the symbol variation display of special figure 1 etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. . Further, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
A gaming table provided with a display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.], wherein the display means is a notice icon [for example, 18A and 18B, each notice icon shown in FIG. 18B, each notice icon shown in FIG. 72D, etc.].
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
The display area in which the notice icon is displayed [for example, the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 69] is displayed in the hold icon [for example, the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 69. The hold icon h11, h12, h13, etc.] is a display area different from the display area [for example, the hold icon display area etc. shown in FIG. 69],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, a character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 69],
The first display is an explanation display [for example, the display of "advance notice icon is exhausted ..." displayed in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 69 (a1), the tutorial display shown in FIG. 62 (a). "The lord is Yatsushiro Shogun" displayed in the department TT1 and "Panda is the master of the lord" displayed in the tutorial display part TT1 shown in FIG.
When the first display is displayed, the first display is a display displayed in the first display area [for example, the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 69] in the display means,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display area. [For example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a9), the tutorial display section TT4 displays a swordsman notice icon I62 and a chance up. The notice icon I63 of is displayed (stock), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

  In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a display means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed only as the prefetch advance notice display, or may be other than displayed as the prefetch advance notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as the prefetch notice display, or may not be displayed as the prefetch notice display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of display, or may not display a plurality of types of display.

  Further, the first display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when it is displayed, or when it is displayed other than the first display area of the display means. May be displayed in the display area of. Further, the first display may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed. It may not be displayed.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

Further, “the first display is not displayed in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a9), the notice icon is displayed in the tutorial display section TT4. In the displayed state, the explanation is not displayed on the tutorial display section TT4, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, only the first display may not be displayed in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, or the first display is not displayed in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. The display other than the display may not be displayed. Further, the first display may not necessarily be displayed in the state in which the notice icon first display area is displayed, or the first display may not be displayed in the state in which the notice icon first display area is displayed. The display may be displayed in some cases.

  Further, the first display may not be displayed only in the state in which the notice icon first display area is displayed, or in a state other than the state in which the notice icon first display area is displayed, Only the first display may not be displayed.

In addition, when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may be restarted [for example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. 69 (a9), the notice display icon TT4 When all the notice icons are exhausted, the explanation display is resumed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, when the notice icon is consumed, only the display of the first display may be resumed, and when the notice icon is consumed, displays other than the display of the first display are also resumed. There may be cases where Moreover, when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may be restarted without fail, and when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may not be restarted.

  In addition, when the first display is, for example, an explanation of the first character, a tenth display which is an explanation display different from the first display may be displayed.

In addition, "one display of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a character display of" intense heat "in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 68 (d), etc.],"
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display that is displayed in the first display area when it is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (d), the tutorial display section TT1 displays a message of "intense heat"]. Character display is displayed, etc.],
The explanation display is an explanation display relating to the notice icon [for example, a character display such as “Due to notice notice icon ...” in the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 69 (a1)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the second display may be one that can be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be displayable. Further, the second display may be always displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed. Good.

  Further, the explanation display may include only the explanation display regarding the notice icon or may include a display other than the explanation display regarding the notice icon. Further, the explanation display may necessarily include the explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may not include the explanation display regarding the notice icon.

  The notice display in this description may be one of many notice displays.

  Further, the notice display may be a notice display by displaying characters. On the other hand, the other notice display may be a display by displaying an image.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [for example, a character display of“ hotter than red is hot ”in the balloon TT2 shown in FIG. (A6) is a character display such as "Swordsman Reach is hot" in the balloon portion TT2, and a character display such as "Panda breaks in" in the balloon portion TT3].
The third display is an explanation display,
The display content of the third display is display content different from the display content of the first display,
The third display is a display displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed [for example, the balloon TT2 and the balloon TT3 shown in FIG. 68 (a6)]. ,
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the display content of the third display may be partially different from the display content of the first display, or may be different entirely.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only in the second display area of the display means when it is displayed, or when it is displayed other than the second display area of the display means. May be displayed in the display area of. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed. It may not be displayed.

  Further, the second display area may be partially different from the first display area, or may be entirely different from the first display area.

In addition, “the third display may be displayed even when the advance notice icon is displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (a10), Even if the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed in the tutorial display section TT4, the word display "Swordsman reach is hot" is displayed in the balloon display section TT2 and "Panda breaks in" in the balloon display section TT3. Character display is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, only the third display may be displayed, or the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area. Even when the display is on, a display other than the third display may be displayed. Further, even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the third display may be always displayed, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. However, the third display may not be displayed.

  Also, the third display may be displayed only when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, or other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Even in this state, the third display may be displayed.

  The introduction animation of the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area, and the stock display of the notice icon may not be displayed in the second display area.

  In addition, a notice display different from the first notice display (second notice display) may be displayed in the second display area. In addition, the notice display and the explanation display may be displayed alternatively.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [for example, a character display displayed on the stage name display portion ST2 shown in FIG. 69],
The fourth display is an explanation display [for example, a display of "Castle Town Stage" displayed in the stage name display portion ST2 shown in FIG. 69 (a1), a stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 63 (c). Display of "Swordsman Reach" etc.]
The display content of the fourth display is a display content different from the display content of the first display,
The fourth display is a display displayed in the third display area [for example, the stage name display portion ST2 shown in FIG. 69 (a1)] in the display means,
The third display area is a display area different from the first display area,
When the first number [for example, three, etc.] of the notice icons are displayed in the first display area, the new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area. [For example, when the three preview icons are displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 69, a new preview icon is displayed on the stage name display section ST2, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the display content of the fourth display may be partially different from the display content of the first display, or all of the display content may be different.

  The fourth display may be displayable only in the third display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the third display area of the display means. Good. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed in the third display area of the display means, or may not be displayed in the third display area of the display means.

  Further, the third display area may be partially different from the first display area, or may be entirely different from the first display area.

  Further, in the state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed only in the third display area. In the state where a number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed in a display area other than the third display area. Further, in the state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be always displayed in the third display area, or In the state where the number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may not be displayed in the third display area.

  In addition, a new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area only when the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area. Even in a state other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the new notice icon may be displayed only in the third display area.

  Further, here, a type in which a stage name or the like is displayed on a plurality of display means is also included.

In addition, “the fourth display is not displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the third display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a9), the notice icon is displayed in the stage name display portion ST2. Is displayed, the stage name is not displayed on the stage name display portion ST2],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the fourth display may not be displayed only in the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, or other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the third display area. It may not be displayed even in the state of. The fourth display may not necessarily be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, or may be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the third display area. It may be done.

In addition, "the display means is a means configured by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, etc.],
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like],
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means [for example, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display [for example, a variable display of decorative symbols shown in FIG. 66],
The third display means displays in cooperation with the second display means [for example, a bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure chest image TR shown in FIGS. Are displayed in stock, etc.],
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the area of the third display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (a1), the tutorial display section TT1 has a third decoration area]. It is arranged below the symbol display device 208N, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the display means may be configured to include only the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. It may be configured to include display means other than the display means. Further, the display means may be configured to necessarily include the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. There may be a case in which at least one of the means is not included.

  Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variable display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variable display. Further, the first display means may always display the symbol variable display, or may not display the symbol variable display.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. In addition, the second display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the third display means may be capable of displaying only a display associated with the display of the second display means, or a display other than the display associated with the display of the second display means. It can be anything. Further, the third display means may necessarily display the display associated with the display of the second display means, or may not display the display associated with the display of the second display means. Good.

  The first display area may be provided in a partial area of the third display means, or may be provided in the entire area of the third display means. ..

  The first display area may be provided only in at least a part of the area of the third display means, or may be provided in an area other than at least a part of the area of the third display means. It may be one that has been created. Further, the first display area may be necessarily provided in at least a part of the area of the third display means, or may not be provided in at least a part of the area of the third display means. It may be.

In addition, “the first display area is a display area partitioned by a line [eg, as shown in FIG. 69 (a1), the tutorial display section TT4 is partitioned by a line into a square shape, etc.] ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the first display area may be partitioned only by a line, or may be partitioned by including other than the line. The first display area may be always partitioned by a line, or may not be partitioned by a line.

  Also, the second display area may be partitioned by a line, and the third display area may be partitioned by a line.

Further, "holding display means [for example, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the decorative pattern display device 208, etc.],
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variable display being held (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 69. In the display area, the number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed, etc.],
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the displayed number [for example, the notice icon (princess notice icon I64, pseudo notice notice icon I65 shown in FIG. 69 (a9), The swordsman's notice icon I62, the chance up notice icon I63, etc.) is not an icon indicating the number of pending operation of the symbol variation display of special figure 1 etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. . Further, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations.

  Note that the number of holdings and the number of notice icons may happen to match.

  Further, the maximum number of holdings and the maximum number of stocks of the notice icon may be the same or different.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74 to FIG. 143, another game table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail. To do. It should be noted that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 74 to 143 are basically used only in the description using FIGS. 74 to 143, and even if the duplicated reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. In the description using FIG. 143, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 74 to 143 are given priority.

<Overall structure>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game table that allows a player to obtain a profit when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106 as a door body, and a ball storage tray door. 108, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side) thereof.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and is a vertically rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge 112. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk of a store (gaming store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor 1041 that detects that the main body 104 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and to be opened / closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. A clerk of the game shop can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor that detects that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which the game area 124 is provided. In addition, in the present embodiment, an LED as a light source is also called a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage dish is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is opened by pressing an opening lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. A door sensor with a ball storage tray that detects that the door with a ball storage tray 108 has been opened may be provided. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a top plate 126 capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “ball”) and provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launcher 110. , A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation, and a player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game ball that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the player's operation. A ball firing handle 134 to be launched into the game area 124, a production button 136 as an example of an operation means for changing the production mode of various production devices 206 (see FIG. 76) by the operation of the player, and a production button Chance button lamp 138 built in 36, which makes the effect button 136 emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 for giving a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store, and a card unit A return operation button 142 for instructing the player to return the balance and a ball lending display section (not shown) for displaying the player's balance and the state of the card unit are provided. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 74 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is filled with a game ball. Furthermore, an operation key unit 137 as an example of operation means is also provided, and the effect button 136 and each button of the operation key unit 137 are provided close to each other so that the player can operate with one hand. In addition, in the present embodiment, each button forming the operation key unit 137 may be referred to as a first operation means, and the effect button 136 may be referred to as a second operation means.

  Here, a specific configuration of the operation key unit 137 will be described with reference to FIG. 106. 106 is a diagram showing the operation key unit 137 shown in FIG. 74.

  As shown in FIG. 106, the operation key unit 137 is configured to have six buttons, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an enter button 137e, and a cancel button 137f. Each of these buttons is smaller than the effect button 136, that is, the operation area is small. In other words, it can be said that the effect button 136 is larger than the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c, the right button 137d, the enter button 137e, and the cancel button 137f.

  The effect button 136 can be operated by the effect button drive motor 434 (see FIG. 77) as an example of a driving unit and can be operated at a position (first position) protruding from the upper surface of the door 108 with ball storage tray, and the door with ball storage tray. It is displaceable between the upper surface of 108 and an inoperable position (second position) that enters inside. The effect button 136 can be pressed by the player at the operable position, and cannot be pressed by the player at the inoperable position. The effect button 136 may be configured to vibrate during operation.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided. This launching device 110 sends a game ball to the game area 124 of the game board at every elapse of a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) while the ball firing handle 134 is continuously operated to be fired by the player. It fires toward and corresponds to an example of a firing means. It should be noted that a right hit button capable of maximizing the firing intensity by pressing the ball firing handle 134 while it is being operated may be provided.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. Note that the specific structure of the game area 124 is omitted in FIG. 74, and the specific structure is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 75 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 74 viewed from the back side.

  At the upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls and an opening that opens upward, and a ball tank 150 positioned below the ball tank 150 are provided at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side in rear view.

  The payout device 152 is made of a tubular member, and has a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside thereof. The dispensing device 152 is detachable, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have temporarily stayed are delivered one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that gives a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either one of a high signal and a low signal, when the game ball is not passing, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) to reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined amount. Based on the satisfaction of the condition, a game value (gaming ball) of an amount according to the grant condition is granted (paid out) to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, there is a main board case 158 for accommodating a main board 156 which constitutes the main control section 300 (see FIG. 77) for performing control processing of the whole game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that forms the first sub-board 400 (see FIG. 77) that performs control processing related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control section 500 (see FIG. 77) that performs control processing related to the effect, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of gaming balls ( (Refer to FIG. 77) and has a payout board case 172 for housing a payout board 170 provided with an error canceling switch 168 for canceling an error by the operation of a game shop staff, a gaming ball A firing board case 176 accommodating a firing board 174 that constitutes a firing control section 630 (see FIG. 77) that performs control processing relating to the above, and a power supply control section 660 (see FIG. 77) that supplies power to various electric gaming machines are configured. A power supply board case 184 for accommodating a power supply board 182 having a power switch 178 for turning the power on and off by an operation of a game shop staff and a RAM clear switch 180 for outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on , And a CR interface section 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section 600 and the card unit.

  FIG. 76 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to define a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll.

  A rendering device 206 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged in the approximate center, and around it, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary The symbol reserve lamp 216, the first special symbol reserve lamp 218, the second special symbol reserve lamp 220, and the high-precision middle lamp 222 are arranged. In addition, hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "universal symbol", and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

  The effect device 206 operates the effect movable bodies 224 and 225 to perform effect, and the details will be described later.

  The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. This decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a and a middle symbol display region 208b. And the right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it is configured to be able to display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative design displayed on the decorative design display device 208 is a design representing the design displayed on the first special design display device 212 or the second special design display device 214 in an enhanced form, and is a decorative design. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of a predetermined first variable game (detailed variable game which will be described later in detail) that is being held, and in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of variable variable games. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

  The 1st special figure reservation lamp 218 and the 2nd special figure reservation lamp 220 are the lamps for showing the number of the predetermined 2nd fluctuation game which has been reserved (details fluctuation game which details are mentioned later), this execution In the form, it is possible to hold the special figure variation game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, and if the first special figure and the second special figure are combined, eight). The term "hold" here means to hold the start of various determination processes (lottery process, etc.) based on start information described later.

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notifying means) for making a notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-accuracy middle lamp 222 is configured to notify the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the big hit game is started, and thereafter not to notify the current symbol control state. There is. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is cut off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but as the symbol control state here, it may be any state of a normal state, a time saving state (electric support state), and a probability variation state, and a state with a special symbol probability variation and It may be one of the states in which there is no special figure probability change.

  It should be noted that in the present specification, description will be made using a word that refers to a state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100) called a control state, but the term "control state" includes a concept of a so-called game state.

  In addition, a general winning opening 226, a universal drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged around the rendering device 206. ing.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (in the general winning opening 226). When the prize is won), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 75 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. 74 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, the balls to be paid out to the player may be referred to as "prize balls" and the balls to be lent to the player may be referred to as "rental balls" in consideration of the prize. And call it "ball (gaming ball)".

  The universal figure starting port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through-chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200. One is installed in each. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided in the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 75 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are used as prize balls and the upper plate is used. Along with discharging to 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of itself does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is provided below the universal figure starting port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. A pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided in the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232. It corresponds to a variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (den Chu). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning the prize in the second special figure starting port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232 when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, and the closed state of the pair of blade members 2321 is an opening / closing mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure variation game is won and the universal figure display device 210 hits and displays the symbol as a stop, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times to the second special figure starting port 232. The ball can be entered (the prize winning state is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is the state where the prize is easy. That is, the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball) of the second special figure starting port 232 is either small (corresponding to the first size) or large (corresponding to the second size). It is a variable starting region in which the easiness of entering the game ball is variable, which changes from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of the second starting region. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. With the pair of blade members 2321 open, of the game balls that have entered the game region 124, the second special region that is the variable starting region is more than the game ball that enters the first special diagram starting port 230 that is the fixed starting region. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or less than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is arranged below the center of the game board 200. The variable winning port 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 that can open and close the variable winning opening with a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be called a special winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be called an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from any one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which the game ball can enter the variable winning opening more easily than the closed state to the other state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state, and the closed state in the variable winning a prize port 234 of this embodiment is such that the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is in a static state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state at the variable winning a prize mouth 234 of the present embodiment is rotated to the player side until the door member 2341 becomes substantially vertical to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning a prize mouth 234 maintains a closed state until the big hit game described later is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. Note that the closed state may be a state in which the game ball is slightly closed to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a state in which it is completely closed. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 76 as long as the gaming ball is won by passing or entering the gaming ball. The door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times when the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol in the special figure variation game. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball that has entered the variable winning port 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged near these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The balls contained in the upper plate 126 are supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength according to the operation amount of the ball launch handle 134 of the player, and the launch rod 146 and the launch mall 148 pass the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the ball striking direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and wins the prize (general winning prize 226, variable winning prize 234) or starting mouth. Outgoing outlet 240 by winning in (first special figure starting port 230, second special figure starting port 232), without winning any winning port or starting port, or simply passing through universal figure starting port 228. To reach.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, the warp device 242 and the stage 244 are arranged in the area where the game ball can roll, and the effect movable body 224 is arranged in the area where the game ball cannot roll. . Further, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are arranged on the back side of the rendering device 206. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative pattern display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the effect device 206, from the warp exit 242b to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball ridden by a game nail 238 or the like. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

  In the present embodiment, the production movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm. A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm 224b is provided at the position. The production movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The effect movable body 225 is formed in a circular shape imitating a family crest, is arranged on the back surface side of the game board 200, and can be moved vertically by a family crest motor (not shown). The production movable body 225 can be displaced between a position retracted above the decorative symbol display device 208 (retracted position) and a position overlapping on the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (advanced position). There is.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b respectively move to the left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The shielding device 246 shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208, when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the respective inner ends overlap. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner ends of the left door 246a and the right door 246b are slightly overlapped with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can see all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can each be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern the displayed decorative pattern is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may make a part of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 visible through the holes of the lattice, or the shoji part of the holes of the lattice is closed with a semitransparent lens body, The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji portions of the holes of the lattice are completely blocked (shielded), and the rear decorative pattern display device 208 is completely invisible. Good.

  The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 74, the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable bodies 224 and 225, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 76 correspond to the effect means, and among them, the decorative symbol display. The device 208 corresponds to an example of a display unit or a decorative symbol display unit.

  Further, on the game board 200, a specification sticker 290 showing the specifications of the game table is attached at a position visible to the player.

<Control part>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control part of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control part 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control part 300. According to a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 and a second sub control unit 500 controlling various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400. Mainly includes a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power management unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is. In the present embodiment, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 are made of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are It may be composed of one common circuit board, or the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 are composed of one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. It may be one. Therefore, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control unit, or one of these three control units (300, 400, 500) is combined. One may be regarded as a predetermined control means, or one combined first sub-control section 400 and second sub-control section 500 may be regarded as a predetermined control means. In addition, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 has a plurality of substrates (for example, a plurality of control substrates, one or a plurality of relay substrates and one or a plurality of control substrates, etc.). It may be composed of Further, when the combination of the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 is regarded as a sub control unit, in the pachinko machine 100 described here, the main control unit 300 and the sub control unit (the first sub control unit). The unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500) are provided on different substrates and are directly connected to each other by an electric signal line, but an electric signal between the substrates is further connected by another relay substrate. It may be configured to relay the transmission / reception of.

<Main control unit>
First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and a temporary data A RAM 308 for storing the data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. There is. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308. Various data representing predetermined information and the like are stored in the ROM 306 for each address. When referred to as a table in the following description, a condition for determining which address in the ROM 306 is specified is in a table format. It may refer to a collection. These points are the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number generation circuit 318 that derives a numerical value within a range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit has three built-in random number value generation circuits. 74), a main body opening sensor, a front frame door sensor, a ball sensor with a ball storage tray, and a lower tray full tank detection for detecting that the lower tray 128 shown in FIG. 74 is filled with game balls. A random number generation circuit that receives signals output from the sensors and various sensors 320 including a starting opening, a winning opening, and a ball detection sensor provided inside the variable winning opening, and outputs the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage. 318 and a sensor circuit 322 for outputting to the basic circuit 302, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, and a general figure display device A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of 10 and various status display sections 328 (for example, the universal figure holding lamp 216, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.). The drive circuit 330 for performing the display control of No. 2 and the drive circuit 334 for controlling the various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the second special figure starting port 232, the variable winning port 234 and the like are connected.

  The main control unit 300 is a game control means for performing game control, and has a win / loss determination means, a start information prefetching means, and a pre-determination means which will be described later.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random number value generation circuit 318 can be roughly divided into two types: a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that counts up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two additional methods for the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode uses a seed of a random number to perform an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) and derives the operation result as a random number. The second method reads a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derives the read numerical value as a random number. The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value by using white noise superimposed on the signals input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random number generation circuit 318 uses the value thus obtained as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, as a seed of a random number, or when determining a read start position of a random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor of the various sensors 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to a random value generation circuit. Output to 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value of the random number generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and the latched value is built in the random number value generation circuit 318. It is stored in the random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random value generating circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is also the same. Value is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random value storage register incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318 and corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232. Further, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives the signal indicating that the ball has won the universal figure starting port 228, similarly, the random value generating circuit 318 latches the value at that timing of the random number value generating circuit corresponding to the universal figure starting port 228. Then, the latched value is stored in the random value storage register incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318 and corresponding to the universal figure starting port 228.

  Further, as the sphere detection sensor referred to in this specification, specifically, a predetermined winning opening such as a general winning opening 226, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234. Examples thereof include a sensor for detecting a sphere that has struck and a sensor for detecting a sphere that passes through the universal figure starting port 228.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 uses the information output circuit 336 to pachinko the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the control state) is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 for monitoring the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source management unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is provided with the voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302. The low voltage signal is an electrical system abnormality signal indicating that the electrical system for operating the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 is abnormal, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 corresponds to an example of an electrical system abnormality signal output means. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 may be provided in the power management unit 660.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started). The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of game control means.

  Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an input / output interface for transmitting and receiving a command to and from the payout control unit 600. It is possible to communicate with the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Here, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. In addition, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is bidirectional communication, the main control unit 300 can send a signal such as a command to the payout control unit 600, and the payout control unit 600 is the main control unit. It is configured so that a signal corresponding to a command can be transmitted to 300. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by bidirectional communication. Further, the information communication between the main control unit 600 and the payout control unit 600 may be one-way communication so that the payout control unit 600 cannot transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and a CPU 404. A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and the number of times are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 402 is connected to a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in different ROMs.

  Further, in the basic circuit 402, a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling the various lamps 418, an effect button 136 shown in FIG. 74, and an operation key unit. A detection signal from a button sensor 426 that detects pressing of various buttons that form the 137 and a production button initial position sensor 427 as a detection unit that detects that the production button 136 is located at the initial position is sent to the basic circuit 402. A sensor circuit 428 for outputting, an upper arm motor and a forearm motor for driving the effect movable body 224, a drive circuit 430 for controlling the family crest motor for driving the effect movable body 225, and an effect button drive for driving the effect button 136. A drive circuit 432 for controlling the motor 434 is connected. Here, although the initial position of the effect button 136 is set to the operable position described above, it is not limited to this and may be set to an appropriate position. For example, the initial position is set to the inoperable position described above. You may do so.

  Further, the first sub control unit 400 is connected to the second sub control unit 500 for controlling the decorative symbol display device (liquid crystal display device) 208 and the shielding device 246.

  The sub-control unit including the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 receives the command signal from the main control unit 300 which is the game control unit, and based on the received command signal, the decorative symbol display device. Control the production means such as 208.

  Thus, the 1st sub control part 400 and the 2nd sub control part 500 are functioning as an example of production control means.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power management unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power management unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 75 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout of the ball or the ball has been completed, and communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 pays out prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of ball rentals. Ball rental information indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 349. A frame sensor (not shown) may be connected to the payout controller 600. The frame sensor detects when the front frame door 106 and / or the main body 104 is open and outputs an open signal. Here, the payout controller 600 may output the door opening information to the main controller 300 when the opening signal from the frame sensor is input.

  The launch control unit 630 is a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 for instructing launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 outputs the operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the amount, control of the firing motor 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the firing mall 148 shown in FIG. The device 634 is controlled.

  The power supply management unit 660 converts the alternating current power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies the predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500. The main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the firing control unit 630 are supplied with a predetermined voltage from the payout control unit 600. The power management unit 660 also stores a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) that supplies power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Condenser). In the present embodiment, the power supply management unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 causes the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the firing control unit. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

  Next, using FIGS. 78 (a) to (d), the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative pattern display device 208, and the general figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be performed will be described.

  The special figure 1 variation game is started on condition that the first starting mouth sensor which is the ball detection sensor detects that the ball has entered the special opening 1 starting opening 230, and the ball enters the special opening 2 starting opening 232. The special figure 2 variation game is started on condition that the second starting opening sensor which is a ball detection sensor has detected that the ball has been hit. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment "variable display of special figure 1" (special figure Fluctuating game). Further, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment "variable display of special figure 2" ( Special figure fluctuation game). Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 2 When, passes, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of this "variable display of special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stopped symbol aspect of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variable display of special figure. The variable display of the special map may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 78 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1. In FIG. 78 (a), nine types of special drawings from "special drawing A" to "special drawing I" are shown. In FIG. 78 (a), the white parts in the figure show the positions of the segments that are turned off, and the black parts are the positions of the segments that are turned on.

  In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols (“special symbol A” to “special symbol G”) are prepared as stop symbol modes of the special symbol. "Special map A" is a 15-round (R) jackpot design, 15R probable variation big hit pattern that can be expected to win balls in all rounds of 15 rounds, and "Special map B" is a 15R jackpot pattern. So, while you can expect to win balls in 5 out of 15 rounds, you can't expect to win balls in the remaining rounds, which is a real 5R probability variable jackpot design. There is a 15R-rank up bonus (RUB) design that can be expected to win balls in all rounds of 15 rounds, and "Special drawing D" is a 15R jackpot design, 8 out of 15 rounds. You can expect to win balls in one round, but you can't expect to win balls in the remaining rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB. You can expect to win balls in four of the rounds, but you can't expect to win balls in the remaining rounds. It is a real 4R-RUB, and "Special Figure F" is a 5R normal jackpot design. "G" is a 2R jackpot pattern, which is called a latent probability variation or hidden probability variation in which winning of a ball cannot be expected in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit that is produced by a player in a manner that makes it difficult to specify how long a round in which a win can be expected at the start of a big hit lasts. This is a jackpot that directs the player as to whether or not the round in which the winning of balls can be expected to continue continues when the player's eyes reach the 9th round).

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, determination of whether or not to be a big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not to be a special jackpot is performed by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the regular jackpot and the probability jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state with a low probability is special This is called a low probability state. In addition, there is a case where the game is transferred to a time saving state (electric support state) after the big hit game is over. Here, the electric support state is a predetermined advantage that the player is higher than the non-electric support state, such as shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. The state. Although the time saving will be described later in detail, the time saving state is referred to as a high probability state of universal figure (hereinafter, may be referred to as “probability change of normal figure”), and the state not in the short period of time is referred to as low probability state of universal figure. In this way, the power support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric power support state” is a state where the general map is concerned, and the “time saving state” is a state where the special map is concerned or a state where the general map and the special figure are concerned. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a time saving flag, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the electric power support state and the universal figure high probability state. It is easier to win the universal figure fluctuation game in the universal figure high probability state than in the universal figure low probability state (normal figure probability variation). For example, the winning probability of the universal figure fluctuation game is 1/100 in the universal figure low probability state (non-electric power support state), while it increases to 99/100 in the universal figure high probability state (electric power support state). Further, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the universal figure fluctuation game becomes shorter than in the non-electric power support state (general figure variation short). For example, in the non-electric power support state, the fluctuation time of the universal figure fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric power support state. Further, in the electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer than in the non-electric support state (extension of the electric Chu opening period). For example, in the non-electrically-supported state, the electric power open period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric-powered support state. Further, the blade member 2321 is more likely to open in the electrically supported state than in the non-electrically supported state (the number of times of opening the electrically-powered chewing increases). For example, the blade member 2321 that opens only once in the non-electrically supported state for one winning in the universal figure starting port 228 opens twice in the electrically supported state (2 seconds open and 1 second closed and 2 seconds again). Open). Due to the extension of the electric-chew opening period and the increase in the number of electric-chew opening, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases. The time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric power support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, particularly in a big hit game, if a game ball is picked up by an electric chu with a small number of prize balls, and the number of game balls to the variable winning port (attacker) 234 is reduced, a player may be disadvantaged. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (time saving state), all of the normal figure probabilistic change, the general figure short cut, the electric Chu open period extension, and the electric Chu open count increase are all performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's advantage is high, and the player may be in a power support state (time saving state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew opening period and the increase in the number of electric chew opening is performed, which increases the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232, the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. In the non-electrically-supported state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electrically-supported state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes between the difficult winning state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and the easy winning state in which the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is in the easy winning state in the electric support state for a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when "special map A" to "special map E" are stopped and displayed, after the big hit game that is performed thereafter, until the next big hit game is started, the electric power support state (universal figure high probability state) ) Is maintained, and "Special map F" is stopped and displayed, after the big hit game that is performed after that, the special support variable game is maintained for 100 times while the electric power support state is maintained, and the non-electric power is displayed for the 101st time. Transition to support state (universal figure low probability state). On the other hand, when the big hit without the electric power support (“special figure G”) is won, the electric power support state does not shift after the big hit game ends.

  In this way, in this embodiment, when "special map A" to "special map E" are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special map high probability general figure high probability state after the jackpot game is over. Further, when "special map F" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special map low probability general figure high probability state after the jackpot game is over. Further, when the "special map G" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special map high probability general figure low probability state after the jackpot game is over.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 0.1 seconds per operation. In the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game balls enter a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If you do, the second and subsequent releases will not be performed. During the small hit game, the special figure low probability general figure low probability state shifts. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game after the small hit game ends. As shown in FIG. 78 (a), “Special drawing H” is a small hit symbol. In this embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing times and opening time) of the variable winning port 234 in the small hitting game and the opening / closing mode (opening of the variable winning port 234 in the big hitting game to which the "special map G" is stopped and displayed. The number of times of opening and the time of opening are substantially the same, but they may be different, for example, at least one of the number of times of opening and the time of opening may be different.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as the lost symbol. "Special drawing I" is a lost design.

  FIG. 78 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. In FIG. 78 (b), six types of special maps of “special map a” to “special map f” are shown, and five types of special maps are jackpot patterns (“special map a” to “special map”). Fig. E "). "Special drawing a" is a 15R big hit design, 15R probability variation big hit design that can be expected to win balls in all rounds of 15 rounds, and "special drawing b" is a 15R big hit design, 15 It is a 15R-RUB design that can be expected to win balls in all of the rounds, and "Special Drawing c" is a 15R jackpot pattern, and is expected to win balls in 8 out of 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that you can not expect to win balls in the remaining rounds, and the "special map d" is a 15R jackpot design, and you can expect to win balls in four of the 15 rounds. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a substantial 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to win a ball, and the "special figure e" is a 2R normal jackpot design.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as the lost symbol. “Special drawing f” is a lost design.

  FIG. 78 (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. The special starting point 230 or the special drawing 2 starting opening 232 has won a ball, that is, the first starting opening sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting opening 230, or the special drawing 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on condition that the second starting hole sensor detects that the ball has entered the starting symbol 232. In the pattern display area, "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... "Variable display of symbols" is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol in a variable manner separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed.

  When notifying substantially 5R probability variation big hit (“special drawing B”), 5R normal big hit (“special drawing F”), 2R normal big hit (“special drawing e”), in the design indicatory area 208a-208c, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3 "and" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 "A combination of ornamental patterns in which three ornamental patterns with the same numbers are arranged (for example," decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1 "or" decoration 1-decoration 1 " Decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 ", etc.) is stopped and displayed. In addition, when notifying the 15R probability variation big hit (“special drawing A” and “special drawing a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Stop display of "decoration 7". Furthermore, when notifying 15R-RUB, substance 8R-RUB, and substance 4R-RUB, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are decorative symbols of the same number, and the middle symbol display area 208b is like a lord. A combination of decorative patterns that are decorative patterns (for example, "decoration 1-lord-decoration 1" or "decoration 4-lord-decoration 4") is stopped and displayed. In addition, when notifying a hidden probability change (“special map G”) that is a big hit of 2R or a small hit (“special map H”), “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of decorative patterns such as "3" is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" may be referred to as a chance opportunity. Further, when notifying a lost symbol such as "special symbol I" or "special symbol f", in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, combinations of decorative symbols other than the combinations of decorative symbols described so far (for example, disperse). Stop the display).

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of the “variable display of the decorative symbol” to the stop display of the stopped symbol aspect of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative pattern is performed under the control of the first sub control unit 400.

  FIG. 78 (d) shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a universal figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the universal figure of the present embodiment: a "general figure A" which is a winning symbol and a "universal figure B" which is a deviating symbol. On the basis of the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the universal figure display device 210 has all seven segments illuminated and one segment in the center. Repeated lighting "Public variable display" (Public variable game) is performed. Then, after the change time elapses, either one of the symbols "Public symbol A" which is a hit symbol and "Public symbol B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 78 (d), the white portions in the figure show the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions show the locations of the segments to be turned on.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the "variable display of the universal figure" to the stop display of the stopped symbol aspect of the universal figure may be referred to as the variable display of the universal figure.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a long-press automatic continuous hitting function of performing a pseudo continuous hitting operation by long-pressing the effect button 136. Here, the long press operation is an operation mode in which the state in which the effect button 136 is pressed is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) or more, and the continuous hit operation is the effect button 136. It is an operation mode in which the pressing operation is performed a plurality of times. In the present embodiment, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled or disabled according to the content of the effect using the effect button 136. In the present embodiment, in the state where the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, while the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the repeated hitting operation is performed at regular intervals (for example, 100 ms intervals) in a pseudo manner. ing. Further, in the present embodiment, in order to appropriately perform the single-shot operation by the effect button 136 in the effect in which the single-press operation (single-shot operation) by the effect button 136 is performed, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is performed by the effect button 136. It is configured such that the pseudo continuous hitting operation is not started until a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms) elapses after the pressing operation is started.

<Main processing of main controller>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 77 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 77 stores a special figure random number value, a special figure round determination random number value, a special figure electric support determination random number value, and a special figure determination random number. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter for generating these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, the random number value for special figure winning, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area in the RAM 308 that stores the number of reserved special figures is sometimes referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a starting information storage unit for special figures which is divided into a maximum number (four in this example) of areas in which the start of the win / fail judgment (lottery) can be suspended. A random number storage area for general drawings is also provided. As will be described later, the start information storage unit for special figures stores a plurality of types of start information as one set, and the start information is stored for each area one by one in the winning order (holding order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 77 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, which has received the activation signal, performs a reset start by a reset interrupt and executes a main control unit main process shown in FIG. 79 according to a control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Allows the operation of and sets the initial value. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

  In step S105, it is determined whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 causes the power supply control unit 660 to supply the power supply voltage value to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500. Is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff), the step is performed. It proceeds to S107. Even when the power does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for determining a period for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, Processing for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether the state before the power is cut off (before the power failure) is restored, and if the state before the power failure is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state) ), The process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a clerk of a game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 75 is ON (indicating that there is an operation). If the RAM clear signal is on (when RAM clear is required), the basic circuit 302 is initialized to the initial state in step S113. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not required), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is determined. A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte configuration register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether the checksum result is normal or not) is determined. Then, when the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to restore the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is the specific value. When the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. When the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was cut off. That is, the processing is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been returned to the state when the power was cut off, and is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, the normal recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting interrupt prohibition, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generating random number counters for respectively generating initial values of the universal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number counter are updated. For example, if the range of possible numbers for the universal figure winning random number is 0 to 20, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, then 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generating random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 77 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment about once every 4 ms), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The partial timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (not to detect an abnormality in processing). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main controller timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port status update processing, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 77 including various sphere detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence / absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 performs various operations. The data is stored in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, the RAM 308 stores information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) of the previous two times in the RAM 308. Is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is stored. ) The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in) is read from the present detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, information about the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previously-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the present detection signal storage area is compared, and It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of No. 1 matches the winning determination pattern information. While one gaming ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly activated at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, each time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, the detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed in step S205 described above. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage region, the previous detection signal storage region, and the current detection signal storage region. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after the detection signal is absent, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 77 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, there is no previous-previous detection signal, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a present detection signal). (The information indicating that), the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special figure starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the universal figure starting opening 228. It is determined that there has been a passage. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 234 and 226 and the starting openings 230, 232 and 228 have been won. For example, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the first starting opening sensor that detects the ball entering the first special drawing starting opening 230 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the first special drawing It is determined that there is a prize in the starting opening 230, that is, a game medium that passes through a predetermined area is detected, and the processing associated with the subsequent winning in the first special figure starting opening 230 is performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the first special figure starting port 230. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a single winning, it is not determined that there is a winning until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination clear pattern information, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and the universal figure winning random number value and The random number counter for generating each special figure random value is updated. For example, if the numeric range that can be taken as the universal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter makes one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is obtained from a random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value that varies in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter that corresponds to the random number counter for general-purpose winning random value generation. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the universal random number I'll do it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the universal figure winning random number value has made one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for

  In step S211, an effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used in the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, a symbol is displayed on the general symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for timing the time for which the symbol is changed / stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 210. Various including a special figure display symbol update timer for timing the time of fluctuating / stopping, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a timer for measuring a predetermined ending effect period, etc. Update the timer.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning a prize counter updating process, when a winning is made in the winning holes 234, 226 and the starting holes 230, 232. It is read and incremented by 1 and set in the original prize ball number storage area.

  In addition, in step S217, prize winning acceptance processing is performed. In the winning acceptance process, a plurality of types of start information are acquired if a predetermined condition is satisfied. The plurality of types of starting information acquired here are stored as a set of starting information in an empty area of the starting information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 according to the winning order (holding order).

  In step S219, which is executed subsequent to step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 77 are made up of 1 byte, and the strobe information (when ON indicates that data is set) and bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when it is on, it indicates the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 indicate the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 indicate encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221, a universal figure state update process is performed. The universal figure state updating process is one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure. For example, in the general figure state update process in the middle of the general figure variation display (the value of the above-mentioned general figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

  Further, in the public figure state update process at the timing when the universal figure change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the universal figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in a mode. The 7-segment LED is controlled to be turned on and off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be a lost symbol display mode. ON / OFF driving control of the 7-segment LED is performed. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the universal figure state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal figure stop display is being performed is set in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 78 (c)) and the lost symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 78 (c)). Display. Further, after that, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbols that are confirmed and displayed are stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the universal figure variation game.

  If the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on as described later. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. While the normal figure operation is set in the setting area, the blade member 2321 is opened in the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And outputs information indicating the opening period to the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In addition, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for driving the opening and closing of 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the general area non-operation is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the universal figure variation game is a loss, the universal figure loss flag is turned on as described later. When the universal figure loss flag is on, even in the universal figure state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure non-operation is set. In the universal figure state updating process when the ordinary figure is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a universal figure related lottery process is performed. In this universal figure-related lottery process, opening / closing control of the universal figure variation game and the second special figure starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the universal figure is not operating), and the pending universal figure variation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is won or unselected by a random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the above random number storage area. The winning judgment is made, and when the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of no win, the hit flag is set to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is acquired as the universal figure timer random number value, and the universal figure display device 210 receives the universal figure display device 210 from the plurality of variable times based on the obtained universal figure timer random number value. One time during which the figure is variably displayed is selected, and this variability display time is stored as a figure variation display time in the figure variation time storage area provided in the RAM 308. It should be noted that the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games is stored in the universal figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this general-use figure hold number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Then, the special figure prefetching process (step S224) is performed. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later. Next, the special figure state update processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure state update processing for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update processing) is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeats lighting and extinguishing drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variation game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the rotation start setting transmission process is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 5R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a general figure probability variation flag. . These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update processing that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R jackpot flag is on, the special figure When the probability variation flag is also on and the universal figure probability variation flag is also on, any one of special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, and special figure d shown in FIG. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured to have the special figure e when the figure probability variation flag is off, the special figure probability variation flag is on, and the special figure f when the loss flag is on. The 7 segment LED is controlled to be turned on and off, and the setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214, the 15R special big hit pattern (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), 2R normal big hit pattern (special figure e), lost symbol ( The fixed display of any one of the special symbols f) is performed.

  After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the special display 2 that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the special figure 2 variable game. Further, if the number of shortening times stored in the shortening number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of shortening times, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time saving flag. Further, even during a big hit game (during a special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the pattern for stopping the variable display is the special figure 2. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that it exists is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described below, and then the process ends.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the area, in order to stand by for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, while displaying an image notifying the player to start the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 First, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period has ended (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or until the winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the variable winning port 234 is detected) The solenoid for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning port 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), the door member Is output in the open state, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning port 234, and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating the closing period in. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which is repeated at a predetermined number of times (15 rounds, 5 rounds or 2 rounds in the present exemplary embodiment) for opening / closing control of the door member, a predetermined end effect period (for example, Storage area of the production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to stand by for 3 seconds), that is, for the period during which the image for notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative pattern display device 208 is to be displayed is displayed. The information indicating the production standby period is set in. Further, if the universal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the time saving frequency (for example, 100 times) is set in the time saving frequency storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and is also provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the time saving flag. If the universal figure probability variation flag is set to OFF, neither the time saving number is set in the time saving number storage unit nor the time saving flag is turned ON.

  The time saving here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit is shortened. When the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the high probability state of universal figure (universal figure probable variation). In the high probability state of the universal figure, compared to the low probability state of the universal figure, there is a higher probability of being hit in the universal variation game. In addition, in the general figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure fluctuation game becomes shorter than in the general figure low probability state (general figure shortness). Further, in the universal figure high probability state, the open time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer than in the universal figure low probability state (power extension). In addition, in the universal figure high probability state, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open than in the universal figure low probability state. The state in which any one of these Phenomenon Probable, Phenomenon Short, and Den Chu is set is called Densapo (Starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, the general probability low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is a high probability probability state during the big hit game, a large number of game balls in the special figure 2 starting port 232 until a predetermined number of variable prize holes 234 and game balls enter during the big hit game. There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be won during a big hit increases and the gambling performance increases, which is to solve this problem.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operation is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is out, the out flag is turned on. When the deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Toku-zu 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state updating process when the special figure 2 is not operating, the process moves to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Then, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) about special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, the description thereof will be omitted. Omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure related lottery processing for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special map-related lottery process (special map 2 related lottery process) for the special map 2 is performed first (step S229), and then the special map-related lottery process for the special map 1 (special map 1-related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Special figure 2 related lottery processing, the variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not done, the state of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is inactive and special figure 2 which is suspended Assuming that the number of variable games is 1 or more, it is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random number storage area. Special figure 1 related lottery processing, the variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not done, the state of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is inactive both, and special figure 1 which is being held Assuming that the number of variable games is 1 or more, it is executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random number storage area.

  Regarding these special figure related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special map 2 variation game start condition and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are met at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. If the number of special game 2 variable games to be held is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game to be held are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the determination whether or not the special figure variation game is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is notified. The priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting opening 230. In the present exemplary embodiment, the special figure variation game with high advantage (special figure 2 variation game in this example) is given priority over the special figure variation game with low advantage (special figure 1 variation game in this example). For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the game state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery processing in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special piece) from the earliest (oldest stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. FIG. 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value) is acquired, and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the special figure 2 starting information and the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, etc., the ROM 306 It is determined whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a non-win by using the hit / miss determination table stored in (a hit / miss judgment). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random number value in the obtained special figure 2 starting information and the determined hit / miss judgment result. After the variable display, the symbols (stop symbols) to be stopped and displayed are determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / miss determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 hold number at the time of the hit determination, the obtained random number for determining the special figure variation time, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) of special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

  After extracting the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 deletes the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and Figure 2 The special figure 2 reservation number in the reservation number storage area is decremented by one. At this time, the special figure 2 starting information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is performed based on the special figure 2 starting information stored in this temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is similarly performed. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variation game with a high advantage is started prior to the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, and the hold of the special figure 2 is digested prior to the hold of the special figure 1. The special figure 2 priority variation is taken as an example, but the special figure 1 variable game with a low advantage is started with priority over the special figure 2 variable game with a high advantage, and the special figure 1 is suspended. It may be the special figure 1 priority variation that is preferentially digested over the hold. Also, without prioritizing either the special figure 2 variation game with a high degree of advantage or the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, the special figure variation game relating to the suspension of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started. It may be a change in the starting mouth winning order that starts in order. In the starting mouth winning order variation, the maximum number of reservations is eight regardless of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. Therefore, compared with the priority fluctuation in which the maximum number of reservations is 4 in Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, respectively. It may be possible to raise the upper limit of the number of reservations.

  Further, in the above description, the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special map are not performed depending on the state of one special map, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above special map state update By performing the processing and the special figure-related lottery processing independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, a plurality of special figures may be simultaneously changed. In addition, when a plurality of special maps are simultaneously changed in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery result of each special map, or the lottery result of each special map is displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to separately display the respective lottery results, or one display may be configured to display the lottery results of a plurality of special symbols. In addition, when fluctuations relating to a plurality of special maps are performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special map whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special map whose fluctuation is stopped later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The scheduled output information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when on, indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (in this example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. The information that can specify the type of command), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flag values, and a timer selected in the special figure related lottery process. In the case of a symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command, including information such as numbers, various jackpot flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flag values, etc. are included, and winning effect start command and end In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designating command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit round number, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, whether or not there is a winning at the special diagram 2 starting port 232, whether or not there is a winning at the variable winning port 234, etc. including. In the case of the prefetch result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of prefetches stored in the prefetch number storage area, which will be described later, and the stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit are included in the command data. Including.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, out-of-match flags, special figure probability variation flags, special figure probability-related lottery processing, and special figure stored in the RAM 308 are included in the command data. 2 Set the information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the values of various types of big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data stored in the RAM 308, such as the effect control information and the special figure probability variation flag output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period. Information indicating the value, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission processing, the command data stores the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability variation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening release transmission processing, the command data, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variation game or special figure 2 variation game Set the information indicating such as. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the command data, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variation games or special figure 2 variation games Set the information indicating such as.

  Further, in this step S233, general command special figure pending increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 for command data, advance notice information (advance notice information, false) (Advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting processing, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower tray full tank error. . When the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning a prize port 234, and the general-purpose display device 210 and the special-figure 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display sections 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or a stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the state becomes HALT.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special map prefetch process (step S224) of the main controller timer interrupt process. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, pre-determines the stop symbol before the winning / disapproval decision processing, and the pre-determination result (special The prefetch result) is stored in the prefetch result storage unit (see FIGS. 82A to 82C) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit that stores the pre-reading result of the special figure 1 and the number of special figure 1 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit are specified. A special figure 1 prefetch number storage area for storing one prefetch number is provided. In this example, the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results. In the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 1 pre-reading result of the highest rank (the first place) is deleted each time the number of special figure 1 pre-reading decreases by one, and the remaining special figure 1 pre-reading result is deleted. Are processed so that the rank of the data of 1 is advanced by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 1 prefetches is increased by one, new data of the special figure 1 prefetch results is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 1 prefetch results having the lowest rank (last).

  Further, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section for storing the special figure 2 pre-reading result and the number of special figure 2 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section are stored. A special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing the number is provided. In this example, the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four pre-reading results. In the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 2 pre-reading result of the highest rank is deleted every time the number of special figure 2 pre-reading is decreased, and the order of the remaining special figure 2 pre-reading result data is deleted. Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Also, each time the number of special figure 2 prefetches increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 2 preread result having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increased (step S301). Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 2 is increasing is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 reserved number stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of prefetches. When the special figure 2 reservation number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, the main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing, and the special figure 2 pending number is the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are the same, it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has not increased. When it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and when it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 start information (a set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value) is specified before the winning / judging process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). Figure 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, by using the pre-reading special figure 2 start information, and the hit determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of hit determination, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is changed to the special figure 2 related lottery. Preliminary determination is made before the success / failure determination processing in the processing (step S229). Note that this pre-determination processing may be performed using a special table for pre-determination, instead of the table used for determining whether it is true or false.

  In step S305 subsequent to step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained by the preliminary determination is stored in the first empty area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Then, it transfers to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of special figure 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, as in the case of the special figure 2, the special figure 1 reserved number stored in the special figure 1 reserved number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage. The comparison is performed by comparing with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is not increased, the special figure prefetching process is ended and the main control unit is executed. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not the non-electricity support is being performed. If it is determined that the non-electric power support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric power support is not being performed (the power support is being performed (universal figure high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not the non-electric power support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice is satisfied. For example, the execution condition of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice is, in addition to the non-electric power support, conditions such as not being in the big hit game.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 starting information (a set of special figure 1 winning random number values and special figure 1 random number values) is specified before the winning / losing determination processing in the special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231). Figure 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, by using the pre-reading special figure 1 start information, and the hit determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of hit determination, for example, the stop symbols of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information are drawn to the special figure 1 related lottery. Preliminary determination is made prior to the hit / miss determination processing in the processing (step S231). Note that this pre-determination processing may be performed using a special table for pre-determination, instead of the table used for determining whether it is true or false.

  In step S313 subsequent to step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetch result obtained by the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest empty area of the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the process returns to the main controller timer interrupt process.

  In step S315, the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 in RAM 308 is replaced with the "undetermined" information indicating that the starting information is not pre-read without pre-reading the increased special figure 1 starting information. Store in the first empty area of the set. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the process returns to the main controller timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) described above, only the pre-reading result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 may be stored. All pre-reading results in the set may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  In addition, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 81, the pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of the special drawing 2, and the pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of the special drawing 1 except during the power support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased start information of the special maps 1 and 2. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400, which has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300, may determine by lottery whether or not to execute the pre-reading notification for each hold, for example. In addition, regardless of the game state (for example, whether or not in non-electric support), when the start information increases, the prefetch is always executed and the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and the prefetch is performed. The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether to execute the lottery and the effect using the pre-reading result.

  FIG. 82 exemplifies a state where the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 82A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 82 (a), the special-reading 1 pre-reading result storage unit has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the holdable number of the special-drawing 1 variable game. . Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 82 (a), the storage area "Hold 1" stores "special drawing I" (disappearance) as stop symbol information, and the storage area "Hold 2" stores "special drawing I" as stop symbol information. "(Delay) is stored," special figure A "(15R probability variation big hit) is stored in the storage area" hold 3 "as stop symbol information, and" special figure I "is stored in the storage area" hold 4 "as stop symbol information. "(Disappearance) is stored.

  FIG. 82B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 preread result information is stored in the special figure 2 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 82 (b), the special-reading 2 pre-reading result storage unit has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in this embodiment) as the holdable number of the special-drawing 2 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 82 (b), the storage area "holding 1" stores "special drawing f" (disappearance) as stop design information, and the storage areas "holding 2" to "holding 4" have a stop design. No information is stored. In FIG. 82 (b), the state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as "none".

  FIG. 82 (c) shows an example of the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit in the electrical support. As shown in FIG. 82 (c), in the storage area "holding 1", "undetermined" information is stored instead of the stopped symbol information. Neither stop symbol information nor “undetermined” information is stored in the storage areas “holding 2” to “holding 4”.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, the judgment result, the fluctuation timer number (fluctuation time), the timer group described later, and the like are pre-determined and the pre-read result is stored in the pre-read result storage unit. It can be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as information.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83, for the win / fail judgment table used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. While explaining. Here, FIG. 83 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a high probability table for win / loss determination, and FIG. 83 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a low probability table for win / loss determination. In the case of the special drawing high probability state in the case of performing the special figure determination, the high probability table for winning / defective determination shown in FIG. 83 (a) is referred to, and in the case of the special figure low probability state. The low probability table for success / failure determination shown in FIG. 83 (b) is referred to. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referred win / loss determination table and the obtained random number value, the win / loss determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variation game, a big hit, a small hit, or an outlier is selected as the hit / miss determination result.

  Similarly, also in the case of performing the hit determination of the special figure 2, when the special figure high probability state, it is in the special figure low probability state by referring to the hit probability high probability table shown in FIG. 83 (a). In this case, the low probability table for win / fail judgment shown in FIG. 83 (b) is referred to. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referred to table for determination of win / loss and the acquired random number value, the result of win / loss determination of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variation game, the big hit or the outlier is selected as the hit / miss determination result.

  FIG. 83C is a diagram showing an example of the small hit determination table. If the result of the jackpot judgment is out of range, the table for small hit determination shown in FIG. 83 (c) is referred to, and based on the numerical range shown by the table for small hit determination referred to and the acquired random number value. , Select the result of the special drawing small hit lottery. In the present embodiment, when the win / no win determination result (lottery result) per special map is the special one, the small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the win / no determination result, and the loss is with a probability of 63536/65536. However, if the winning / nothing determination result (lottery result) of the special figure per lottery is the special figure 2, the small hit is not selected.

  Next, the stop is performed based on the winning / disapproval determination result or the like determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The special figure determination table used for determining symbols will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 84 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 1 symbol determining table, and FIG. 84 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 2 symbol determining table. When determining the stop symbol of the special figure 1, the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 84 (a) is referred to, and the special figure is determined based on the result of the special figure 1 and the numerical range of the random number value. Select the stop pattern of 1. In the present embodiment, when the hit / no hit result of Toku-zu 1 is a big hit, any one is selected from special drawings A to G, and when the hit / no hit judgment result of Toku-zu 1 is a small hit, Toku-zu H is selected, and when the hit / no-go result of Toku-zu 1 is missing, toku-zu I is selected.

  Moreover, when determining the stop symbol of the special figure 2, the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. The special design 2 stop design is selected by lottery. In the present embodiment, when the hit / damage result of Toku-zu 2 is a big hit, any one of the Toku-zu a to Toku-e is selected. f is selected. After the symbols to be stopped and displayed are determined, the symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device is set.

  Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 85A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 of FIG. 85 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of the input / output port, initialization processing of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this processing is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the processing proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step S411 following step S409, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137 according to the detection result. Perform processing to change to. Further, in the chance button control processing in the present embodiment, if there is an instruction to operate the effect button 136 in the effect data read in step S409 or the updated effect data, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 432. To do.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a command to the sound source IC 416, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S415 following step S413, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to various lamps 418, the instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S417 subsequent to step S415, movable body control processing is performed. For example, if the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to the effect movable bodies 224 and 225, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 430.

  In step S419 following step S417, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500, the control command is set to be output. Then, it returns to step S403.

  FIG. 85B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects the strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  FIG. 85C is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. To be executed in the cycle. In step S441 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub-control unit main processing and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S443 following step S441, the control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S419) of the first sub control unit main process, and the other effect random number updating process is performed. And so on.

  Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 86 (a) is a flowchart of a main process executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S501 of FIG. 86 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S501. In this initialization processing, the input / output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM (not shown) is initialized.

  In step S503 following step S501, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this processing is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the processing shifts to step S505. . In step S505, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S507 following step S505, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S509 following step S507, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S507, the effect data (effect data by the decorative pattern display device 208 or effect data by the shielding device 246) corresponding to this command is read from the ROM (not shown). If the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

  In step S511 following step S509, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if the effect data read in step S509 includes a command to the VDP (not shown), this command is output to the VDP (details will be described later).

  In step S513 following step S511, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if the effect data read in step S509 includes a command to the shielding device 246, this command is output to a drive circuit (not shown) that drives the shielding device 246.

  In step S515 following step S513, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when the effect requested by the command of the first sub control unit 400 is started or finished, the control command for notifying the first sub control unit 400 is output. Then, it returns to step S503.

  FIG. 86 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S531 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM.

  FIG. 86 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. To be executed in the cycle. In step S541 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S503 of the second sub-control unit main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S503, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S543 following step S541, the control command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 set in the information transmission process (step S515) of the second sub-control unit main process, and the other effect random number updating process is performed. And so on.

  FIG. 86 (d) is a flowchart of the image control process in step S511 of the second sub-control unit main process. In step S551, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data or texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM (not shown). As a result, the one-frame image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU sets ROM coordinates (ROM transfer source address), VRAM coordinates (VRAM transfer destination address), etc. in the VDP attribute register based on the position information table, etc., and then the image from ROM to VRAM. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP transfers the image data from the ROM to the VRAM based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU.

  In step S553 following step S551, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S553: Yes), the process proceeds to step S555. If not (step S553: NO), it waits until the transfer end interrupt signal is input.

  In step S555, parameter setting is performed based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM based on the image data transferred to the VRAM in step S551, the CPU has information of the image data forming the display image (coordinate axes of VRAM, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP. The VDP performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S557 following step S555, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU instructs the VDP to start drawing an image. The VDP starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU.

  In step S559 following step S557, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP based on the image drawing end is input, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S559: Yes), If not (step S559: No), the process waits until the generation end interrupt signal is input.

  In step S561, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  87 is an example of a table provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400, FIG. 87A is an example of a box data table, and FIG. 87B is an example of a part data table. ..

  The first sub-control unit 400 stores the box data shown in FIG. 9A in the box of the RAM 408 at the timing of each performance execution, such as a fluctuation start, a pending change, a notice effect, a reach effect, and a button effect. Set in the data setting area. The box data is part data including liquid crystal commands and information such as voice, light emission, and accessory (movable body) executed corresponding to the effect based on the liquid crystal commands (here, as an example, parts A to H ...). Composed of etc. The liquid crystal command is a command for causing the decorative symbol display device 208 to display a corresponding effect display at the time of start of fluctuation, during change of holding, during notice effect, during reach effect, when button effect occurs (for example, No. Command of box data such as 101, 102, 201 to 203).

  In addition, the liquid crystal command responds to the operation of the accessory M (effect movable body 246, 224, 225) corresponding to each of the change start, the hold change, the notice effect, the reach effect, the button effect occurrence, and the like. It includes a command (for example, a command for box data such as No. 255) for performing the display.

  Specifically, in this example, No. Box data No. 1 includes a liquid crystal command for starting the special figure variation, a part A (data for storing a bicep accessory) and a part B (data for storing a shutter). In addition, No. The box data of No. 101 includes a liquid crystal command for displaying the background of the hall and part C (effect data corresponding to the display of the background of the hall). The box data of No. 201 includes a liquid crystal command for executing the conversation notice 01 and part E (effect data corresponding to the conversation notice 01 (display of the character (don't) and the character "?"), And No. The box data of 202 includes a liquid crystal command for executing the conversation notice 02, and part E and part F (effect data corresponding to the conversation notice 02 (display of characters (princess) and “genki?”)). , No. The box data 203 is a liquid crystal command for executing the conversation notice 03, and parts E and G (drafting data corresponding to the conversation notice 03 (display of characters (princess) and “Gekiatsu!”)). No. The box data 255 includes a liquid crystal command for vertically moving the bicep character and a part H (data for vertically moving the bicep character).

  As shown in (b) of the same figure, the parts data includes the movable mode of the accessory (effect movable body 246, 224, 225, etc.) to be executed corresponding to each effect, the output sound (sound) from the speaker 120, This is information on the light emission mode of the lamp L (various lamps 418, etc.).

  That is, each part data is composed of a sound layer having sound device data, a lamp layer having lamp device data, and an accessory action layer having shutter device data and accessory (movable body) device data. Here, a plurality of (two) sound layers, lamp layers, and accessory motion layers are provided, and the higher the number of each layer, the higher the priority. The number of layers of each part data may be one, and the number (or type) of device data may be one.

  Specifically, in this example, the part A (data for storing the bicep character accessory) returns the bicep character (effect movable body 224) to the initial position to the character object operation layer 1 (the bicep character object operation layer). Contains device data. Further, the part B (data for storing the shutter) includes device data for returning the shutter accessory (production movable body (shielding means) 246) to the initial position in the accessory operation layer 2 (shutter accessory operation layer). There is.

  Further, the part C (effect data corresponding to the display of the background of the hall) includes sound device data, which is BGM for the background of the hall, in the sound layer 1, and lamp device data of the light emission pattern for the background of the hall, in the lamp layer 1. There is.

  In addition, the part E (effect data corresponding to the conversation notice 01) corresponds to the sound layer 2 and the sound device data of the speech (“n?” Or the like) of the character (Den) corresponding to the notice to the lamp layer 2. It includes the lamp device data of the light emission pattern corresponding to the notice.

  The part F (effect data corresponding to the conversation notice 02) is the sound device data of the dialogue (“Genki?”) Issued by the character (princess) corresponding to the notice in the sound layer 2, and the notice in the lamp layer 2. It includes lamp device data of a light emission pattern corresponding to.

  In addition, the part G (production data corresponding to the conversation notice 03) is stored in the sound layer 2 in the sound layer 2 and the sound device data of the dialogue (“Gekiatsuyo!”) Produced by the character (princess) corresponding to the notice. The lamp device data of the light emission pattern corresponding to the notice is included.

  In addition, parts H (data for vertical movement of the bicep character) include lamp device data of a light emission pattern corresponding to the vertical movement of the bicep character, and role object operation layer 1 (the bicep character operation layer). ) Includes device data for vertically moving a bicep accessory (effect movable body 224).

  Although illustration is omitted here, the storage position (position) of each part data is set in each box data. The position is arranged in a predetermined area of the RAM 408. In the box data 201, the start address of the position 0001 (for example, address 1001) is set as the storage position of the part E. In addition, for example, No. In the box data 203, the start address of the position 0001 (for example, address 1001) is set as the storage position of the part E, and the start address of the position 0002 (for example the address 1002) is set as the storage position of the part G. ing.

  The first sub-control unit 400 sets the above box data (for each effect) at each performance execution timing, and transmits the liquid crystal command to the second sub-control unit 500. Each box data is also set when the first sub control unit 400 sets the liquid crystal command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500. At this time, the part data is stored in the RAM 408 at addresses (setting areas of the part data) corresponding to a plurality of positions. In addition, the part data may not be stored in all of the plurality of positions.

  Further, the second sub-control unit 500 executes control for effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the liquid crystal command, and sends a return command to the first sub-control unit 400. The return command also includes position information, and when the return command is received, the first sub control unit 400 sets the corresponding position in the RAM 408 when the position (parts data) corresponding to the box data is set. If the part data is stored, the control data of the sound of the sound layer of the part data, the light emission mode of the lamp layer, and the movable mode of the accessory motion layer of the part data are stored in each device or as needed. It is transmitted to the sub-control unit 500 and an effect corresponding to the effect display is performed.

  FIG. 88 is a schematic diagram showing an example of command transmission in the effect control of the present embodiment, and is an example of displaying an image on the decorative symbol display device 208 based on a liquid crystal command.

  The first sub-control unit 400 performs the effect lottery process in the effect control process (step S409) of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 85, and the second sub-control unit so as to perform each effect according to the result. A control command is transmitted to 500.

  For example, when performing the effect of the conversation notice 01, the first sub-control unit 400 instructs the second sub-control unit 500 to change the No. 1 shown in FIG. The liquid crystal command of the box data 201 is transmitted (1). In this example, the liquid crystal command includes a command for instructing the decorative pattern display device 208 to display the image of the character (lord) and the characters of the dialogue (“?”).

  In addition, when the first sub control unit 400 sets the liquid crystal command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500, the No. Based on the position set in the box data of 201, the part data is stored in the corresponding address of the RAM 408. That is, in this example, No. Based on the position 0001 set in the box data of 201, the part E is stored in the area of the RAM 408 having, for example, the address 1001 as the start address (1). As a result, sound device data of the dialogue (for example, “n?”) Issued by the character (Den) corresponding to the conversation announcement 01 and the light emission pattern corresponding to the announcement are displayed in the area of the RAM 408 having the start address of 1001. The lamp device data of is stored.

  No. 1 from the first sub-control unit 400. Upon receiving the liquid crystal command 201, the second sub control unit 500 displays the effect of the conversation notice 01 (the image of the character (lord) and the characters of the dialogue (“?”) On the decorative pattern display device 208 (conversation notice 01). Display control) is performed), and the second sub control unit 500 transmits a return command to the first sub control unit 400 (2). The return command also includes position information, and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command corresponds to the part data if the position (part data) corresponding to the box data is set. The control data is set (3). In this example, since the return command includes the information of the position 0001, various device data (sound, lamp, etc.) corresponding to the part E stored in the position 0001 (the area having the address 1001 as the start address) of the RAM 408. (Light emission mode of L) is set and transmitted to the speaker 120 and the lamp L to execute the effect (4). In addition, since the effect by the speaker 120 and the lamp L is actually after receiving the command from the main control unit 300, there is a time lag.

  FIG. 89 shows another example of displaying an image on the decorative symbol display device 208 based on a liquid crystal command.

  For example, in the case where the presentation of the conversation notice 03 is performed, the first sub control unit 400 instructs the second sub control unit 500 to change the No. 1 shown in FIG. A liquid crystal command of box data 203 is transmitted (1). In this example, the liquid crystal command includes, in the decorative pattern display device 208, an image of the character (lord), a command for instructing the display of the characters of the dialogue (“?”), And an image of the character (princess). It includes a command for instructing the display of the characters of that dialogue (“Gekiatsuyo!”).

  In addition, when the first sub control unit 400 sets the liquid crystal command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500, the No. Based on the position set in the box data 203, the part data is stored in the corresponding address in the RAM 408. That is, in this example, No. Based on the position 0001 set in the box data of No. 203, the part E is stored in the area of the RAM 408 having, for example, the address 1001 as the start address, and the No. Based on the position 0002 set in the box data of 203, the part G is stored in the area of the RAM 408 having, for example, the address 1002 as the start address (1). As a result, the sound device data of the dialogue (for example, "n?") Issued by the character (Den) and the lamp device data of the corresponding light emission pattern are stored in the area of the RAM 408 whose address is 1001. In a region of the RAM 408 having a head address of 1002, sound device data of a character (princess) 's dialogue (“Geki Atsuyo!”) And lamp device data of a corresponding light emission pattern are stored.

  No. 1 from the first sub-control unit 400. Upon receiving the liquid crystal command 203, the second sub control unit 500 displays the effect of the conversation notice 03 (the image of the character (lord) and the characters of the dialogue (“?”) On the decorative pattern display device 208 (conversation notice 03a). Is displayed), and then the character (princess) image and the characters of the dialogue ("Gekiatsuyo!") Are displayed (display control of the conversation notice 03b))). After that, the second sub control unit 500 transmits a return command corresponding to the display of the conversation notice 03a to the first sub control unit 400 (2) and a return command corresponding to the display of the conversation notice 03b (3). .. In this example, the first sub-control unit 400, which has received the return command corresponding to the display of the conversation notice 03a, includes the information of the position 0001 in the return command. Data of various device data (sound, light emission mode of the lamp L) corresponding to the part E stored in the area (address) is set and transmitted to the speaker 120 and the lamp L to execute effects (4). .. Further, the first sub-control unit 400, which has received the return command corresponding to the display of the conversation notice 03b, in this example, includes the information of the position 0002 in the return command, and therefore the position 0002 (address 1002 address) of the RAM 408 is included. Data of various device data (sound, light emission mode of the lamp L) corresponding to the part G stored in the area having the head address) is set and transmitted to the speaker 120 and the lamp L to execute the effect ( 5).

  In this way, one liquid crystal command is a command for instructing execution of a plurality of effect displays (display of the conversation notice 03a and conversation notice 03b), and part data (parts E and G) is set for each command, The first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command corresponding to the display control for performing each display from the liquid crystal command, and uses the speaker 120 and the lamp L based on the part data (parts E and G) corresponding to each return command. Perform the performance.

  Next, the production system operation processing will be described. FIG. 90A is a flowchart of the production system operation processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This effect system operation process is a process executed in the chance button control process (step S411) of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 85 (a).

  The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 first initializes the operation state of the operation means (step S601). That is, the process of clearing (port clearing) the signals input from the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is performed. The CPU 404 subsequently clears the initial operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S603).

  After that, the CPU 404 executes a chance button operation state determination process (step S605).

  Here, the chance button operation state determination processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect button 136 as a chance button has been operated (step S701). Specifically, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect button 136 is operated by detecting the input state of the signal of the effect button 136 at the input port.

  When determining that the effect button 136 is operated (step S701: Yes), the CPU 404 updates the operation status of the effect button 136 in the RAM 408 to the input state (step S703).

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the operation of the effect button 136 this time is the first operation (step S705). That is, it is determined whether or not the previous operation state of the effect button 136 is OFF and the current operation state of the effect button 136 is ON.

  When the CPU 404 determines that the operation of the effect button 136 this time is the first operation (step S705: Yes), it turns on the first operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S707) and then ends this processing. On the other hand, when determining that the operation of the effect button 136 this time is not the first operation (step S705: No), the CPU 404 ends the process without executing the process of step S707.

  If the CPU 404 does not determine in step S701 that the effect button 136 is operated (step S701: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the long-press operation has ended (step S709). When the CPU 404 determines that the long press operation has ended (step S709: Yes), the box data table related to the long press release is set (step S711). As a result, the liquid crystal command indicating that the long press is released is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500, and thus, in the decorative pattern display device 208, for example, a chance button indicating the effect button 136. Effects (effects) may be displayed to the effect that the long press has been released for the image. The effect display of releasing the long press in the long press effect may be different from or the same as the effect display of releasing the long press in the long press automatic continuous hit. Further, in response to a return command from the second sub-control unit 500, according to the part data corresponding to the set box data table, the output of the sound effect by the speaker 120 and various lamps 418 are synchronized with the effect display of the long press release. The effect may be enhanced by blinking with.

  When the CPU 404 does not determine in step S709 that the long-press operation has ended (step S709: No), the CPU 404 ends this processing without executing the processing of step S711.

  Returning to FIG. 90A, after executing the chance button operation state determination process, the CPU 404 determines the button operation state determination process (step S607), the left button operation state determination process (step S609), the right button operation state determination. The process (step S611), the up button operation state determination process (step S613), and the down button operation state determination process (step S615) are sequentially executed. The contents of the decision button operation state determination process, the left button operation state determination process, the right button operation state determination process, the up button operation state determination process, and the down button operation state determination process are the same as the chance button operation state determination process described above. Since the processing is the same as the processing, detailed description is omitted.

  After that, the CPU 404 executes various button operation-related processing (step S617), and then ends this processing.

  Next, various button operation-related processing executed in the production system operation processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 92. FIG. 91 is a flowchart of various button operation related processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, and FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the various button operation related processing shown in FIG. 91.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the initial operation flag in the RAM 408 is ON (step S801). If the initial operation flag is not ON (step S801: No), the CPU 404 ends this process, but if the initial operation flag is ON (step S801: Yes), various buttons (effect button 136, operation key). If the unit 137) is pressed, the power saving state during the customer waiting demonstration is canceled (step S803). The power saving state is configured to shift after a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses after the standby state in which the symbol variation display is not performed, and without the symbol variation display or various button pressing operations. Specifically, the power consumption of the pachinko machine 100 is reduced by, for example, turning off the various lamps 418 or reducing the brightness, or reducing the brightness of the backlight of the decorative pattern display device 208. Note that the power saving state may not be entered. The power saving state is released in response to the operation of one of the various buttons, but the power saving state can be released even when two or more buttons are operated at the same time. Alternatively, the power saving state may not be released when two or more buttons are simultaneously operated. Further, the power saving state may be released only when only one button is operated for a certain time (for example, 0.5 seconds).

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect button (chance button) 136 is operated alone (step S805). When the CPU 404 determines that the effect button 136 is operated alone (step S805: Yes), it executes the button pressing process (step S807), and then ends this process. The detailed contents of the button pressing process will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the effect button 136 is operated alone (step S805: No), it determines whether the decision button 137e is operated alone (step S809). When the CPU 404 determines that the decision button 137e is operated alone (step S809: Yes), it executes the button pressing process described later (step S811), and then executes the enter button operating setting display process. (Step S813), this process ends. The detailed contents of the setting display process at the time of operating the enter button will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the decision button 137e is operated alone (step S809: No), it determines whether the right button 137d is operated alone (step S815). When the CPU 404 determines that the right button 137d is operated alone (step S815: Yes), it executes the button pressing process described later (step S817), and then executes the right button operating setting display process. (Step S819), this process ends. The detailed contents of the setting display process when the right button is operated will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the right button 137d is operated alone (step S815: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the left button 137c is operated alone (step S821). When the CPU 404 determines that the left button 137c is operated alone (step S821: Yes), it executes a button pressing process described later (step S823), and then executes a left button operation setting display process. (Step S825), this process ends. The detailed contents of the setting display process when the left button is operated will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the left button 137c is operated alone (step S821: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the upper button 137a is operated alone (step S827). When the CPU 404 determines that the upper button 137a is operated alone (step S827: Yes), it executes the button pressing process described later (step S829), and then executes the upper button operation setting display process. (Step S831), this process ends. The detailed contents of the setting display process at the time of operating the upper button will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the up button 137a is operated alone (step S827: No), it determines whether or not the down button 137b is operated alone as shown in FIG. Step S833). When the CPU 404 determines that the down button 137b is operated alone (step S833: Yes), it executes a button pressing process described later (step S835), and then executes a down button operating setting display process. (Step S837), this process ends. The detailed contents of the setting display process when the down button is operated will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the down button 137b is operated alone (step S833: No), it determines whether or not both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated (step S839). .. When the CPU 404 determines that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated (step S839: Yes), the button pressing process described below is executed (step S841), and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated (step S839: No), it determines whether or not both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated. (Step S843). When the CPU 404 determines that both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are being operated (step S843: Yes), the button pressing process described below is executed (step S845), and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated (step S843: No), whether or not all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are operated. It is determined (step S847). When the CPU 404 determines that all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are operated (step S847: Yes), after executing the button pressing process described later (step S849), this process To finish. On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine that all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are operated (step S847: No), the process is ended without executing the process of step S849. ..

  Next, the button pressing process executed in various button operation-related processes and various button long-press operation-related processes described later will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of a button pressing process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not an effect for which an operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137 is being received is being executed (step S901). If the CPU 404 does not determine that the effect for which the operation is being accepted is being executed (step S901: No), it ends this processing, and if it is determined that the effect for which the operation is being accepted is being executed (step S901: Yes), it is determined whether or not the effect being executed is an effect for one-time operation of the button (step S903). Note that the effect determined here is not limited to the one in which the effect of actually pressing the button is being performed, and for example, the effect of not pressing the button is not performed, but a predetermined button (for example, The effect that is a state in which a predetermined effect (back button effect) is executed when the effect button 136 or the like is operated is also included.

  When the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is the effect for one-time operation of the button (step S903: Yes), the operation is performed once (step S905), and then the process of step S917 is executed. .. Here, the condition for determining that the effect being executed is the effect for one-time operation of the button includes that the pressed button is the button for which the operation is requested in the effect being executed. For example, when an effect that requires a one-time operation of the effect button 136 is being executed, the effect being executed is an effect for one-time operation of the button, provided that the effect button 136 has been operated once. It is configured to determine that The detailed contents of the one-time operation process will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is not the effect for one-time operation of the button (step S903: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the effect being executed is the effect for repeatedly hitting the button. (Step S907). Note that the effect determined here is not limited to the one in which the effect of promptly pressing the button repeatedly is actually performed, and for example, the effect of not prompting the button continuous pressing is not performed, but the predetermined button (for example, An effect that is a state in which a predetermined effect (back button continuous hit effect) is executed when there is a continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 etc. is also included.

  When the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is the effect for continuous hitting of the button (step S907: Yes), after performing the continuous hitting operation process (step S909), the process of step S917 is executed. Here, as the condition for determining that the effect being executed is the effect for repeatedly hitting the button, it is included that the pressed button is a button for which an operation is requested in the effect being executed, and for example, When the effect requiring the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is executed, it is determined that the effect being executed is the effect for continuous hitting of the button on condition that the effect button 136 is operated once. Is configured. The detailed content of the repeated hitting operation processing will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is not the effect for repeatedly hitting the button (step S907: No), it determines whether the effect being executed is an effect for pressing and holding the button (step S907: No). Step S911). The effect determined here is not limited to the one in which the effect of urging the long press of the button is actually performed, and for example, the effect of urging the long press of the button is not performed, but the predetermined button ( For example, an effect that is a state in which a predetermined effect (rear button long-press effect) is executed when a long-press operation of the effect button 136 etc. is performed is included.

  When the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is the effect for long-pressing the button (step S911: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the long-press operation process (step S913) and then executes the process of step S917. Here, the condition that the effect being executed is determined to be the effect for long-pressing the button includes that the pressed button is a button for which an operation is requested in the effect being executed, For example, when an effect that requires a long press operation of the effect button 136 is being executed, the effect being executed is an effect for long pressing the button, provided that the effect button 136 has been operated once. Is determined. The detailed contents of the long press operation processing will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is not the effect for long-pressing the button (step S911: No), the other button operation processing is executed (step S915), and then the processing of step S917 is executed. .. The details of the other button operation processing will be described later.

  In step S917, the CPU 404 transmits a liquid crystal command corresponding to the box set in the one-time operation process, the repeated hit operation process, the long press operation process, or the other button operation process to the second sub control unit 500, as described below. After this (step S917), this process ends.

  Next, the one-time operation process executed in the button pressing process will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 95. FIG. 94 is a flowchart of the one-time operation process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, and FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the one-time operation process.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect being executed is the effect of an independent operation using the effect button 136 (step S1001). When the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is the effect of the single operation by the effect button 136 (step S1001: Yes), the chance button operation box for executing the effect indicating that the chance button has been operated is set. After that (step S1003), the button operation flag in the RAM 408 is turned on (step S1005), and then the process of step S1031 shown in FIG. 95 is executed. In addition, in this process, when other buttons are simultaneously operated in addition to the effect button 136, the operation itself of the effect button 136 is treated as invalid, but it is treated as effective. You can

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is not the effect of the single operation by the effect button 136 (step S1001: No), the effect being executed is the effect of the simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d. It is determined whether or not (step S1007). When the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is the effect of the simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d (step S1007: Yes), the box corresponding to the operated button is set (step S1009). .. For example, when the effect button 136 is operated, a chance button operation box for executing an effect indicating that the chance button is operated is set, and when the right button 137d is operated, the right button 137d is set. When the right button operation box for executing the effect of being operated is set and both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, it is determined that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated. The button operation box for executing the effect is set. In addition, in this process, in addition to the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, when another button (for example, the upper button 137a) is simultaneously operated, the operation itself of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is invalid. However, it may be treated as valid. Further, in this process, the effect may be performed only when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated. In that case, either button of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated. Even if the button operation is performed, the button operation box corresponding to the button operation is not set, and the button operation box is set when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated (step S1011). When the CPU 404 determines that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated (step S1011: Yes), after turning on the button operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S1013), the step shown in FIG. 95. The process of S1031 is executed. On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are not operated (step S1011: No), it executes the process of step S1031 without executing the process of step S1013. A button operation flag is set for each button. For example, when only the effect button 136 is operated, the button operation flag of the effect button 136 is turned on and the button operation flag of the right button 137d is turned off. It may be configured such that the processing of step S1033 described later is executed by leaving the two button operation flags ON.

  When the CPU 404 determines in step S1007 that the effect being executed is not the effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d (step S1007: No), the effect being executed is the effect button 136 and the left button. It is determined whether or not the effect is the simultaneous operation of 137c (step S1015). When the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is the effect of the simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the left button 137c (step S1015: Yes), the box corresponding to the operated button is set (step S1017). .. For example, when the effect button 136 is operated, a chance button operation box for executing an effect indicating that the chance button is operated is set, and when the left button 137c is operated, the left button 137c is activated. When the left button operation box for executing the effect of being operated is set and both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated, it is determined that both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c have been operated. The button operation box for executing the effect is set. In addition, in this process, in addition to the effect button 136 and the left button 137c, when another button (for example, the lower button 137b) is simultaneously operated, the operation itself of the effect button 136 and the left button 137c is invalid. However, it may be treated as valid. Further, in this process, the effect may be performed only when both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated. In that case, one of the effect button 136 and the left button 137c is operated. Even if the button operation is performed, the button operation box corresponding to the button operation is not set, and the button operation box is set when both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated (step S1019). When determining that both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated (step S1019: Yes), the CPU 404 turns on the button operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S1021), and then the step shown in FIG. 95. The process of S1031 is executed. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are not operated (step S1019: No), the process of step S1031 is executed without executing the process of step S1021. A button operation flag is set for each button. For example, when only the effect button 136 is operated, the button operation flag of the effect button 136 is turned on and the button operation flag of the left button 137c is turned off. It may be configured such that the processing of step S1033 described later is executed by leaving the two button operation flags ON.

  When the CPU 404 determines in step S1015 that the effect being executed is not the effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the left button 137c (step S1015: No), as shown in FIG. 95, the effect being executed. It is determined whether or not is an effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d (step S1023). When the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is the effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d (step S1023: Yes), a box corresponding to the operated button is set. (Step S1025). For example, when the effect button 136 is operated, a chance button operation box for executing an effect indicating that the chance button is operated is set, and when the left button 137c is operated, the left button 137c is activated. When the left button operation box for executing the effect of operating is set and the right button 137d is operated, the right button operation box for executing the effect of operating the right button 137d is set. Is set. Furthermore, when both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated, a button operation box for executing an effect indicating that both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated is set, and the effect button 136 is set. When both the right button 137d and the right button 137d are operated, a button operation box for executing an effect indicating that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated is set, and the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and When all the right buttons 137d are operated, a button operation box for executing an effect to the effect that all the effect buttons 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are operated is set. In addition, in this process, in addition to the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d, when other buttons (for example, the enter button button 137e and the like) are simultaneously operated, the effect button 136 and the left button 137c. Although the operation of the right button 137d and the right button 137d are treated as invalid, they may be treated as valid. Further, in this process, the effect may be performed only when all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are operated. In that case, the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d. If any one or two of the buttons are operated, the button operation box corresponding to the button operation is not set, and the button operation box is operated when all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are operated. Are configured to be set.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are operated (step S1027). When the CPU 404 determines that all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are operated (step S1027: Yes), after turning on the button operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S1029), step S1031. The process of is executed. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are not operated (step S1027: No), the process of step S1031 is executed without executing the process of step S1029. Run. A button operation flag is set for each button. For example, when only the effect button 136 is operated, the button operation flag of the effect button 136 is turned on and the button operation of the left button 137c and the right button 137d is performed. The flag may be left OFF, or the three button operation flags may be turned ON so that the process of step S1033 described below is executed.

  The CPU 404 determines whether the button operation flag in the RAM 408 is ON in step S1031 (step S1031). When determining that the button operation flag is ON (step S1031: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the operation valid period ending process (step S1033) and then ends the process. Specifically, the CPU 404 performs a process of ending the operation valid period even before the operation valid period ends, and then sets a box for ending the effect that receives the button operation. Based on the set box, the CPU 404 transmits a liquid crystal command to the second sub control unit 500 to the effect that the acceptance of the button operation is completed. Then, the second sub control unit 500 transmits a return command to the first sub control unit 400 after displaying that the acceptance of the button operation is finished. In addition, when accepting the button operation until the operation valid period ends, the process of ending the operation valid period may not be performed.

  Next, the continuous hitting operation process executed in the button pressing process will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a flowchart of the repeated hitting operation process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect being executed is an effect for continuous hitting with the effect button 136 (step S1101). When the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is not the effect for continuous hitting by the effect button 136 (step S1101: No), the processing is ended. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is the effect for continuous hitting with the effect button 136 (step 1101: Yes), the continuous hit effect lottery is performed and the result is set (step S1103). Specifically, for example, whether or not to increase the continuous stroke meter displayed in the continuous stroke effect that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the effect button 136, and in the case of increasing it, the increase amount is determined by lottery. Set the box according to the result. Then, the liquid crystal command according to the increase amount of the continuous stroke meter is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the increase of the continuous stroke meter in a mode according to the liquid crystal command (the 0th mode). ).

  Here, an example applicable to the continuous hit lottery mode will be described.

(First form)
The valid / invalid of the operation may be determined by comparing the comparison time C set according to the elapsed time T from the start of the operation valid period with the interval at which the player operates the button. For example, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is 12 seconds and the elapsed time T is less than 4 seconds, the comparison time C is set to 0.5 seconds, and finally the effect button 136 is operated. Until 0.5 seconds elapses from then, it is determined to be invalid even if the production button 136 is operated, and it is determined to be valid when the production button 136 is operated after 0.5 seconds has elapsed. In addition, when the elapsed time T is 4 seconds or more and less than 8 seconds, the comparison time C is set to 0.3 seconds, and the effect is displayed until 0.3 seconds has elapsed since the last effect button 136 was operated. Even if the button 136 is operated, it is determined to be invalid, and if the effect button 136 is operated after 0.3 seconds has elapsed, it is determined to be valid. Further, when the elapsed time T is 8 seconds or more, the comparison time C is set to 0.1 seconds, and until the 0.1 seconds have elapsed since the last effect button 136 was operated, the comparison of the effect buttons 136 is continued. Even if an operation is performed, it is determined to be invalid, and it is determined to be valid when the effect button 136 is operated after 0.1 second has elapsed.

(Second form)
Further, the comparison time C set according to the elapsed time T from the start of the operation valid period to the first player operation is compared with the interval at which the player operates the effect button 136 to enable the operation. You may determine invalidity. For example, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is 12 seconds and the elapsed time T is less than 4 seconds, the operation of the effect button 136 is made effective at intervals of 0.5 seconds, and at other timings. The operation is invalid. When the elapsed time T is 4 seconds or more and less than 8 seconds, the operation of the effect button 136 is valid at intervals of 0.3 seconds from the initial operation, and the operation at other timings is invalid. When the elapsed time T is 8 seconds or more, the operation of the effect button 136 is valid at 0.1 second intervals from the initial operation, and the operation at other timings is invalid.

(Third form)
Further, in the production lottery of the operation effect in which the continuous hit operation or the long press automatic continuous hit operation can be performed (the continuous hit effect lottery), the progress pattern of the effect of the continuous hit effect is larger than the progress pattern of the effect of the long press auto continuous hit ( For example, the increase amount of the continuous stroke meter reaches 70% of the entire meter in 5 times of continuous stroke operation, but does not increase to 70% of the entire meter in long press auto continuous stroke unless liquid crystal command is transmitted 7 times. Etc.) and vice versa.

(Fourth form)
Further, the increase amount by the continuous hitting operation and the long-press auto continuous hitting operation changes according to the elapse of the operation valid period (for example, the increase amount becomes larger / smaller as the operation valid period elapses). May be.

(Fifth form)
Further, depending on the number of times the effect button 136 is operated within a predetermined determination period (for example, 2 seconds) from the start of the operation valid period for continuous hit production (for example, 10 seconds), the remaining amount after the determination period ends in the operation effective period. It may be configured to select a lottery table that determines whether or not to execute an effect according to an operation in a period (for example, 8 seconds), and perform an effect execution lottery based on the selected lottery table. When the player wins by lottery, the effect according to the operation is executed, and when the player does not win, the effect according to the operation may not be performed. More specifically, for example, when the number of operations of the effect button 136 in the determination period is 5 or more, a low-probability lottery table with a low probability of winning in the effect execution lottery is set, and the operation of the effect button 136 in the determination period. If the number of times is less than 5, by setting a high-probability lottery table with a high probability of winning in the performance execution lottery, it may be possible to fully enjoy the performance contents even for a player who is not good at continuous hitting operation. .. On the other hand, when the number of operations of the effect button 136 in the determination period is 5 or more, a high-probability lottery table is set, and when the number of operations of the effect button 136 in the determination period is less than 5, a low-probability lottery table is set. In some cases, it may be possible to entertain the player who has actively performed the continuous hitting operation. It should be noted that even during the determination period, it may be determined by lottery whether or not the effect according to the operation is performed. In this case, the lottery table referred to in the predetermined period may be the same as or may be different from any of the lottery tables referred to in the remaining period. Further, the effect may be performed according to all the operations. In this case, in the effect according to the operation performed in the determination period, for example, the effect can be performed until the meter reaches a threshold value (for example, the meter can be increased to a certain value). Good. Here, the lottery table described above is a table for lottery whether or not the production can be executed, but it may have a table configuration for determining the amount of change in the production by lottery.

(Sixth form)
Further, in the effect of operating one or a plurality of buttons with good timing in the operation valid period (may be referred to as “timing operation effect”), the effect period (the operation effective period may be set, for example, 15 seconds). Depending on the number of times the button is operated with good timing during the predetermined determination period (for example, 5 seconds) from the start (the number of times the button is operated during the period when it is determined that the operation timing of the corresponding button is good), the remaining period (for example, It may be configured to determine the operation effective period of the timing operation effect for 10 seconds). For example, when the number of times the button is operated with good timing during the determination period is three or more, the period for determining that the timing of the operation of the corresponding button is good is set as the first determination period, and the timing is determined with good timing during the determination period. If the number of times the button has been operated is less than three times, and if the period for determining that the timing of the operation of the corresponding button is good is the second determination period, the second determination period is the one more than the first determination period. By setting a long time, it may be possible to fully enjoy the effect contents even for a player who is not good at timing operation. On the other hand, by setting the first determination period longer than the second determination period, it may be possible to entertain the player who is good at timing operation. Further, the period in which it is determined that the timing of operating the corresponding button in the determination period is good may be the same as or different from either the first determination period or the second determination period. Here, when the operation timing of the corresponding button in the determination period is set to be longer than the first determination period and the second determination period, the player can practice the timing operation in the determination period. In some cases, it may be possible for the player to easily participate in the operation effect. On the other hand, when the operation timing of the corresponding button in the determination period is set to be shorter than both the first determination period and the second determination period, the operation becomes easier as the timing operation effect proceeds, so the timing operation is gradually performed. You may be able to think that you have improved. Further, when the operation timing of the corresponding button in the determination period is set between the first determination period and the second determination period, the timing operation effect can be determined according to the skill of the player. It may be possible to satisfy both the player who is not good at and the player who is good at timing operation.

  In the present embodiment, it may be applied only to any one of the 0th form to the 6th form, or a plurality of types of continuous hitting effects are prepared, and the embodiment is performed according to the type of continuous hitting effect. May be different.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 sets a chance button operation box for executing an effect indicating that the effect button (chance button) 136 has been operated (step S1105). Then, the CPU 404 determines whether the operation of the effect button 136 is the first operation based on the first operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S1107). That is, it is determined whether it is the start of pressing the effect button 136.

  When the CPU 404 determines that the operation of the effect button 136 is the first operation (step S1107: Yes), after setting the time T1 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is transmitted in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 ( In step S1109), this process ends. The time T1 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is transmitted is, for example, 500 ms in the present embodiment, but can be set to any time. As a result, when the time T1 is pressed for a long time during execution of the effect for repeated hits, the effect can be performed as if the effect button 136 was pressed, without pressing the button again. There is.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the operation of the effect button 136 is not the first operation, that is, if it is determined that the long press automatic continuous stroke is being performed (step S1107: No), then the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous stroke is transmitted. After setting the time T2 until it is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 (step S1111), this processing is ended. The time T2 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is transmitted is 100 ms in the present embodiment, but it can be set to any time. Thereby, when the long press is continuously maintained and the time T2 elapses during execution of the effect for repeated hits, the effect can be performed as if the effect button 136 was pressed, without pressing the button again. It has become.

  The continuous stroke operation process in the present embodiment is executed only for continuous stroke operation effects by the effect buttons 136, but each button of the operation key unit 137 (upper button 137a, lower button 137b, left button 137c, right button 137d, enter). The button 137e) may be repeatedly hit.

  Next, the long press operation process executed in the button press process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a flowchart of a long press operation process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect being executed is an effect for long-pressing with the effect button 136 (step S1201). When the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is not the effect for long-pressing by the effect button 136 (step S1201: No), the process is ended. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is the effect for long-pressing with the effect button 136 (step 1201: Yes), the operation of the effect button 136 is the first operation based on the initial operation flag in the RAM 408. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1203). That is, it is determined whether it is the start of pressing the effect button 136.

  When the CPU 404 determines that the operation of the effect button 136 is the first operation (step S1203: Yes), the time T3 until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 (step S1205). ), And ends this processing. In the present embodiment, the time T3 until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted is set to 100 ms, for example, but can be set to any time. As a result, while the effect for long-pressing is being executed, the effect of assuming that long-pressing of the effect button 136 has been started can be performed by performing long-pressing for the time T3.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the operation of the effect button 136 is not the first operation, that is, if it is determined that the long press is being performed (step S1203: No), the effect button (chance button) 136 has been operated. The chance button operation box for executing the effect is set (step S1207). Then, after the time T4 until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 (step S1209), this processing is ended. The time T4 until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted is 231 ms in the present embodiment, but can be set to any time. As a result, during execution of the effect for long press, when the long press is continuously maintained and the time T4 elapses, it is possible to perform the effect in which the long press of the effect button 136 is maintained. The time T4 set in step S1209 is configured such that the same time (231 ms) is set every time in the present embodiment, but the set time may vary each time it is set.

  The long press operation process in the present embodiment is executed for the long press operation effect by the effect button 136, but each button of the operation key unit 137 (up button 137a, down button 137b, left button 137c, right button 137d, The long-pressing operation process may be executed for the enter button 137e).

  Next, the other button operation process executed in the button pressing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a flowchart of other button operation processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the enter button 137e of the operation key unit 137 has been operated (step S1301). When the CPU 404 determines that the operation is the operation of the determination button 137e (step S1301: Yes), after setting the determination button pressing box for executing the effect that the determination button 137e has been operated (step S1303), This process ends.

  On the other hand, when determining that it is not the operation of the decision button 137e (step S1301: No), the CPU 404 determines whether it is the operation of the right button 137d (step S1305). When the CPU 404 determines that the operation is the operation of the right button 137d (step S1305: Yes), after setting the right button pressing box for executing the effect that the right button 137d is operated (step S1307), This process ends.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the right button 137d is not operated (step S1305: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the left button 137c is operated (step S1309). When the CPU 404 determines that the operation is the operation of the left button 137c (step S1309: Yes), after setting the left button press box for executing the effect to the effect that the left button 137c has been operated (step S1311), This process ends.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the left button 137c is not operated (step S1309: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the upper button 137a is operated (step S1313). When the CPU 404 determines that the operation is the operation of the upper button 137a (step S1313: Yes), after setting the upper button pressing box for executing the effect that the upper button 137a is operated (step S1315), This process ends. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the up button 137a is not operated (step S1313: No), it is determined that the down button 137b is operated, and the down button is pressed to execute an effect to the effect that the down button 137c is operated. After the box is set (step S1317), this process ends.

  Next, the enter button operation setting display processing executed in various button operation related processing will be described with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a flowchart of the enter button operation setting display process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the power-on related process is being executed (step S1401). Specifically, the CPU 404 determines whether or not it is during the period after the power is turned on until the display during recovery is completed. When the CPU 404 determines that the power-on related process is being executed (step S1401: No), the process is ended. In the present embodiment, the volume setting screen and the brightness setting screen, which will be described later, are not displayed from the time the power is turned on until the display during recovery ends. It should be noted that the volume setting screen and the brightness setting screen may be displayed so that the volume setting and the brightness setting can be performed even after the power is turned on until the display during recovery ends.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the power-on-related processing is not being executed (step S1401: Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the setting display is hidden (step S1403). That is, the CPU 404 does not display the volume setting screen and the brightness setting screen as shown in FIG. 115 (e) in the standby state in which the symbol variation display is not performed, the symbol variation display, the big hit game, or the like. It is determined whether or not the state. When the CPU 404 determines that the setting display is non-display (step S1403: Yes), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when determining that the setting display is displayed (step S1403: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the volume / brightness setting mini-icon is displayed (step S1405). Specifically, for example, the CPU 404 explicitly or suggests to the player that the volume and brightness can be set by operating the operation key unit 137 during the customer waiting demo display displayed in the standby state. It is determined whether or not the icon is displayed. Even if such an icon is not displayed, if the volume setting screen or the brightness setting screen is displayed if a predetermined operation is performed, the process of step S1405 is unnecessary. When the CPU 404 determines that the volume / brightness setting mini-icon is displayed (step S1405: Yes), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when determining that the volume / luminance setting mini-icon is not displayed (step S1405: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the luminance setting screen is displayed (step S1407). Specifically, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the current brightness of the backlight of the decorative pattern display device 208 and various lamps 418, and a brightness setting screen for displaying the set brightness are displayed. In the present embodiment, the brightness setting screen is configured to be displayed by operating the up button 137a or the down button 137b. When the volume setting screen and the brightness setting screen, which will be described later, are configured to be displayed at the same time, the type of setting screen to be displayed does not have to be divided depending on the type of button. This brightness setting screen is erased when a predetermined display time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses without operating the effect buttons 136 or the buttons of the operation key unit 137. When the CPU 404 determines that the brightness setting screen is displayed (step S1407: Yes), it sets a liquid crystal command for displaying the brightness setting screen as it is (step S1409), and then ends this processing. That is, the CPU 404 resets the display time for maintaining the display of the brightness setting screen. Here, the liquid crystal command for displaying the brightness setting screen as it is may be a command for resetting the count corresponding to the elapsed time of the predetermined display time and resetting the count of the predetermined display time. However, it may be a command for continuing the count corresponding to the elapsed time of the predetermined display time.

  On the other hand, when determining that the brightness setting screen is not displayed (step S1407: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the volume setting screen is displayed (step S1411). Specifically, the CPU 404 determines whether the current volume of the sound output from the speaker 120 or a volume setting screen for displaying the set volume is displayed. In this embodiment, the volume setting screen is configured to be displayed by operating the left button 137c or the right button 137d. This volume setting screen is erased when a predetermined display time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses without operating the effect buttons 136 or the buttons of the operation key unit 137. When the CPU 404 determines that the volume setting screen is displayed (step S1411: Yes), it sets the liquid crystal command for displaying the volume setting screen as it is (step S1413), and then ends this processing. That is, the CPU 404 resets the display time for maintaining the display of the volume setting screen. Here, the liquid crystal command for displaying the volume setting screen as it is may be a command for resetting the count corresponding to the elapsed time of the predetermined display time and resetting the count of the predetermined display time. However, it may be a command for continuing the count corresponding to the elapsed time of the predetermined display time.

  On the other hand, when determining that the volume setting screen is not displayed (step S1411: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the symbol changing setting screen is displayed (step S1415). Specifically, the CPU 404 determines whether, for example, the volume setting screen or the brightness setting screen displayed during the symbol variable display is displayed. When the CPU 404 determines that the setting screen for changing patterns is displayed (step S1415: Yes), it sets a liquid crystal command for hiding the setting screen displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. After this (step S1417), this process ends. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the symbol changing setting screen is not displayed (step S1415: No), the CPU 404 ends the process without executing the process of step S1417.

  Next, the right button operation time setting display processing executed in various button operation related processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a flowchart of a right button operation setting display process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. Note that the left button operation setting display processing executed in various button operation related processing also performs the same processing as the right button operation setting display processing, so the description of the right button 137d is replaced with the description of the left button 137c. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the power-on related process is being executed (step S1501). When the CPU 404 determines that the power-on related process is being executed (step S1501: No), the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the power-on-related processing is not being executed (step S1501: Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the setting display is hidden (step S1503). When the CPU 404 determines that the setting display is not displayed (step S1503: Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether the setting display is not performed (step S1505). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the customer waiting demo display is being performed in the standby state. When the CPU 404 determines that it is in the non-demo state (step S1505: Yes), it sets the liquid crystal command for displaying the symbol variation setting screen (step S1507), and then ends this processing. That is, the CPU 404 sets a liquid crystal command for displaying the volume setting screen displayed during the symbol variable display. The brightness setting screen may be displayed together with the volume setting screen. Further, only the brightness setting screen may be displayed, or another setting screen other than the volume and the brightness may be displayed.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that it is not in the non-demo state (step S1505: No), it sets the liquid crystal command for displaying the volume setting screen (step S1509), and then ends this processing.

  If the CPU 404 determines in step S1503 that the setting display is not hidden (step S1503: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the volume / luminance setting mini-icon is displayed (step S1511). When the CPU 404 determines that the volume / luminance setting mini-icon is displayed (step S1511: Yes), it sets the liquid crystal command for displaying the volume setting screen (step S1513), and then ends this processing. ..

  On the other hand, when determining that the volume / luminance setting mini-icon is not displayed (step S1511: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the luminance setting screen is displayed (step S1515). When determining that the brightness setting screen is displayed (step S1515: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the brightness setting screen update process (step S1517), and then ends this process. In this embodiment, when the right button 137d (left button 137c) is operated while the brightness setting screen is displayed, the brightness is set. However, the right button 137d (left button 137c) is set. Then, the brightness setting may be disabled. The details of the brightness setting screen update process will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the brightness setting screen is not displayed (step S1515: No), it determines whether the volume setting screen is displayed (step S1519). When determining that the volume setting screen is displayed (step S1519: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the volume setting screen update process (step S1521), and then ends this process. The details of the volume setting screen update process will be described later.

  On the other hand, when determining that the volume setting screen is not displayed (step S1519: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the symbol changing setting screen is displayed (step S1523). When the CPU 404 determines that the symbol changing setting screen is displayed (step S1523: Yes), it executes the volume setting screen update process (step S1525), and then ends this process. On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the symbol changing setting screen is not displayed (step S1523: NO), the CPU 404 ends the process without executing the process of step S1525.

  Next, the brightness setting display update process executed in the right button operation setting display process and the left button operation setting display process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101A is a flowchart of the brightness setting display update process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 executes a user brightness setting operation process (step S1601). Details of the user brightness setting operation process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101B is a flowchart of the user brightness setting operation process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 acquires the value of the brightness volume knob (step S1701). Specifically, for example, the value indicated by the brightness volume knob is acquired based on the signal output from the brightness volume knob (not shown) provided on the first sub-board 160. The brightness volume knob is, for example, a knob for changing the brightness by a game shop clerk. That is, the brightness volume knob can be referred to as a volume knob for performing master setting of brightness. Note that the brightness volume knob may not be provided, and in this case, the process of step S1701 may not be executed. Further, one volume knob may be provided, and the function of the volume volume knob and the function of the brightness volume knob, which will be described later, may be unified by this volume knob.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the value of the brightness volume knob is 0 (step S1703). When determining that the value of the brightness volume knob is 0 (step S1703: YES), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1715. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the brightness volume knob is not 0 (step S1703: NO), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the current operation is an operation to increase the brightness (step S1705). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether the operation is the up button 137a or the right button 137d.

  When the CPU 404 determines that the current operation is an operation to increase the brightness (step S1705: YES), the CPU 404 determines whether the brightness being set is the maximum value (step S1707). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether the brightness being set is 10 when the brightness can be set in 10 steps from 1 to 10. When the CPU 404 determines that the brightness being set is the maximum value (step S1707: YES), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1715. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the brightness being set is not the maximum value (step S1707: NO), the brightness is increased by one level (step S1709), and then the process of step S1715 is executed.

  If the CPU 404 determines in step S1705 that the current operation is not an operation to increase the brightness, that is, it is an operation to decrease the brightness (for example, the operation of the down button 137b or the left button 137c) ( Step S1705: No), and it is determined whether or not the brightness being set is the minimum value (step S1711). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether the brightness being set is 1 when the brightness can be set in 10 steps from 1 to 10. When the CPU 404 determines that the brightness being set is the minimum value (step S1711), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1715. On the other hand, if it is determined that the brightness being set is not the minimum value (step S1711: NO), the brightness is lowered by one level (step S1713), and then the process of step S1715 is executed.

  In step S1715, CPU 404 performs the resetting process for updating the setting display of the brightness changed as described above (step S1715), and then ends this process. Here, when the value of the brightness volume knob is 0, the brightness setting screen is maintained in the non-display state. Even when the value of the brightness volume knob is 0, the brightness setting screen may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, in this way, the setting change of the brightness and the set brightness can be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

  Returning to FIG. 101A, when the CPU 404 executes the user brightness setting operation process as described above, after setting the timer until the brightness setting screen is deleted (step S1603), the brightness setting display update process is executed. finish. Here, the timer setting until the brightness setting screen is erased is performed by resetting the count corresponding to the elapsed time of the predetermined display time and transmitting the liquid crystal command for resetting the count of the predetermined display time. Including.

  Next, the volume setting display update processing executed in the right button operation setting display processing and the left button operation setting display processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102A is a flowchart of the volume setting display update process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 executes a user volume setting operation process (step S1801). Here, the details of the user volume setting operation process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101B is a flowchart of the user volume setting operation process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 acquires the value of the volume control knob (step S1901). Specifically, for example, the value indicated by the volume control knob is acquired based on the signal output from the volume control knob (not shown) provided on the first sub-board 160. The volume volume knob is, for example, a knob for changing the volume by a game shop clerk. That is, the volume control knob can be referred to as a volume control knob for setting the master volume. The volume knob may not be provided, and in this case, the process of step S1901 may not be executed.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the value of the volume control is 0 (step S1903). When the CPU 404 determines that the value of the volume knob is 0 (step S1903: Yes), it executes the process of step S1919. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the value of the volume knob is not 0 (step S1903: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the current operation is an operation to increase the volume (step S1905). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether the operation is the right button 137d or the up button 137a.

  When the CPU 404 determines that the current operation is to increase the volume (step S1905: YES), the CPU 404 determines whether the volume being set is the maximum value (step S1907). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether the volume being set is 10 when the volume can be set to 10 levels from 1 to 10. When the CPU 404 determines that the volume being set is the maximum value (step S1907: YES), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1919. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the volume being set is not the maximum value (step S1907: NO), it raises the volume by one step (step S1909), and outputs data for outputting the sound effect for increasing the volume. After the setting (step S1911), the process of step S1919 is executed. As a result, every time an operation of increasing the volume is performed, the speaker 120 outputs a sound effect indicating that the volume is increased.

  If the CPU 404 determines in step S1905 that the current operation is not the volume increasing operation, that is, it is the volume decreasing operation (for example, the operation of the left button 137c or the down button 137b) ( Step S1905: No), and it is determined whether the volume being set is the minimum value (step S1913). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether the volume being set is 1 when the volume can be set in 10 levels from 1 to 10. When determining that the volume being set is the minimum value (step S1913), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1919. On the other hand, when it is determined that the volume being set is not the minimum value (step S1913: No), the volume is lowered by one step (step S1915), and data for outputting the sound effect for volume reduction is set. (Step S1917), the process of step S1919 is performed.

  In step S1919, CPU 404 performs a resetting process for updating the setting display of the volume changed as described above (step S1919), and then ends this process. Here, when the value of the volume control knob is 0, the volume setting screen is kept in the non-display state. Even if the value of the volume knob is 0, the volume setting screen may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, in this way, the setting change of the volume and the set volume can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Returning to FIG. 102A, when the CPU 404 executes the user volume setting operation process as described above, after setting the timer until the volume setting screen is deleted (step S1603), the CPU 404 executes the volume setting display update process. finish. Here, the timer setting until the volume setting screen is erased is performed by resetting the count corresponding to the elapsed time of the predetermined display time and transmitting the liquid crystal command for resetting the count of the predetermined display time. Including. The time until the volume setting screen is erased (timer) and the time until the brightness setting screen is erased (timer) are the same, but one time is longer than the other. May be.

  Next, the up button operation setting display processing executed in various button operation related processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a flowchart of the up button operation setting display process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. It should be noted that the lower button operation time setting display processing executed in various button operation related processing also performs the same processing as the upper button operation time setting display processing, and therefore the description of the upper button 137a is replaced with the description of the lower button 137b. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the power-on related process is being executed (step S2001). When the CPU 404 determines that the power-on related process is being executed (step S2001: No), the process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the power-on-related processing is not being executed (step S2001: Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the setting display is hidden (step S2003). When the CPU 404 determines that the setting display is not displayed (step S2003: Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether it is in the non-demo state (step S2005). When the CPU 404 determines that it is in the non-demo state (step S2005: Yes), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that it is not in the non-demo state (step S2005: No), it sets the liquid crystal command for displaying the brightness setting screen (step S2007), and then ends this processing.

  When the CPU 404 determines in step S2003 that the setting display is not hidden (step S2003: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the volume / luminance setting mini-icon is displayed (step S2009). When the CPU 404 determines that the volume / brightness setting mini-icon is displayed (step S2009: Yes), it sets a liquid crystal command for displaying the brightness setting screen (step S2011), and then ends this processing. ..

  On the other hand, when determining that the volume / luminance setting mini-icon is not displayed (step S2009: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the luminance setting screen is displayed (step S2013). When the CPU 404 determines that the brightness setting screen is displayed (step S2013: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the brightness setting screen update process shown in FIG. 101A (step S2015), and then ends this process. ..

  On the other hand, when determining that the brightness setting screen is not displayed (step S2013: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the volume setting screen is displayed (step S2017). When the CPU 404 determines that the volume setting screen is displayed (step S2017: Yes), it executes the volume setting screen updating process shown in FIG. 102 (a) (step S2019), and then ends this process. .. In the present embodiment, the volume is set when the up button 137a (down button 137b) is operated while the volume setting screen is displayed, but the up button 137a (down button 137b) is set. Then, the volume may not be set.

  On the other hand, when determining that the volume setting screen is not displayed (step S2017: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the symbol changing setting screen is displayed (step S2021). When the CPU 404 determines that the symbol changing setting screen is displayed (step S2021: Yes), it resets the timer until the symbol changing setting screen is deleted (step S2023), and then this processing To finish. The symbol changing setting screen is erased when a predetermined display time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses without operating each direction button of the operation key unit 137, but by executing the process of step S2023. The display time of the symbol changing setting screen is reset.

  Next, the button long press processing will be described. FIG. 104A is a flowchart of the button long press processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This button long-pressing process is a process executed in the chance button control process (step S411) of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 85 (a).

  The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 first initializes the operation state of the operation means (step S2101). The CPU 404 subsequently clears the initial operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S2103).

  After that, the CPU 404 executes a chance button long press operation state determination process (step S2105).

  Here, the chance button long press operation state determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the production button 136 as the chance button is being pressed for a long time (step S2201). Specifically, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect button 136 has been long-pressed by detecting that the signal input state of the effect button 136 in the input port is continuously ON.

  When determining that the effect button 136 is being pressed for a long time (step S2201: Yes), the CPU 404 updates the operation status of the effect button 136 in the RAM 408 to the long-pressed state (step S2203). On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the long-press operation of the effect button 136 has been performed (step S2201: No), this process ends.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the time until the liquid crystal command is transmitted has elapsed (step S2205). Specifically, the CPU 404 is set in the time T1 and T2 until the liquid crystal command for automatic repeated hits set in the repeated hit operation processing shown in FIG. 96 and in the long press operation processing shown in FIG. 97. It is determined whether or not the times T3 and T4 until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted have elapsed.

  When the CPU 404 determines that the time until the liquid crystal command is transmitted has elapsed (step S2205: Yes), it turns on the command transmission flag in the RAM 408 (step S2207), and then ends this processing. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the time until the liquid crystal command is transmitted has elapsed (step S2205: No), the CPU 404 ends this process without executing the process of step S2207.

  Returning to FIG. 104A, after executing the chance button long press operation state determination process, the CPU 404 performs the decision button long press operation state determination process (step S2107) and the left button long press operation state determination process (step S2109). The right button long press operation state determination process (step S2111), the upper button long press operation state determination process (step S2113), and the lower button long press operation state determination process (step S2115) are sequentially executed. In addition, the determination button long press operation state determination process, the left button long press operation state determination process, the right button long press operation state determination process, the upper button long press operation state determination process, the lower button long press operation state determination process. Since the contents are the same as the chance button long press operation state determination process described above, detailed description will be omitted.

  After that, the CPU 404 executes various button long-press operation related processing (step S2117), and then ends this processing.

  Next, various button long-press operation related processes executed in the button long-press process will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a flowchart of various button long press operation related processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether the command transmission flag in the RAM 408 is ON (step S2301). If the command transmission flag is not ON (step S2301: No), the CPU 404 terminates this processing, but if the command transmission flag is ON (step S2301: Yes), the effect button (chance button) 136 alone is used. It is determined whether or not the operation has been performed (step S2303). When it is determined that the effect button 136 is operated alone (step S2302: YES), the CPU 404 executes the button pressing process shown in FIG. 93 (step S2305), and then ends this process.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the effect button 136 is operated alone (step S2303: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the decision button 137e is operated alone (step S2307). When the CPU 404 determines that the enter button 137e is operated alone (step S2307: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the above-described button pressing process (step S2309) and then ends this process.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the decision button 137e is operated alone (step S2307: No), it determines whether the right button 137d is operated alone (step S2311). When the CPU 404 determines that the right button 137d is operated alone (step S2311: YES), the CPU 404 executes the above-described button pressing process (step S2313), and then ends this process.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the right button 137d is operated alone (step S2311: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the left button 137c is operated alone (step S2315). When the CPU 404 determines that the left button 137c is operated alone (step S2315: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the above-described button pressing process (step S2317) and then ends this process.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the left button 137c is operated alone (step S2315: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the upper button 137a is operated alone (step S2319). When the CPU 404 determines that the upper button 137a is operated alone (step S2319: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the above-mentioned button pressing process (step S2321) and then ends this process.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the upper button 137a is operated alone (step S2319: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the lower button 137b is operated alone (step S2323). When the CPU 404 determines that the down button 137b is operated alone (step S2323: YES), the CPU 404 executes the above-mentioned button pressing process (step S2325), and then ends this process. On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine that the down button 137b is operated alone (step S2323: NO), the CPU 404 ends the process without executing the process of step S2325.

  In the present embodiment, for example, in the case where an operation of the effect button 136 is requested during the effect for one-time operation, the effect for repeated hits and the effect for long-pressing, or during the display of various setting screens, the effect button 136. In addition to the above, the right button 137d is also operated at the same time, and if any button other than the one requested to be operated is further operated, all the operations are invalidated. If the operation of the effect button 136 is requested, for example, when the right button 137d is operated at the same time in addition to the effect button 136, the effect button 136 is operated. May be treated as if it was operated.

  Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 107 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  In FIG. 107, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, an ordinary symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, a special symbol 2 holding lamp 220, and a universal symbol. A hold lamp 216 is shown.

  On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (a), the combination of decorative patterns "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. The background here is not displayed, but a default background image described later is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. It should be noted that various background images different from the default background image (for example, background images according to modes) may be displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol display area 284 is an area for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or the symbol is stopped), and from the top, the symbol changing notification area of the normal figure, the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 1 , Becomes the notification area during symbol change of special figure 2. While the pattern of the universal figure is stopped, the quadrangle figure is lit up and displayed, but during the change of the pattern of the universal figure, the quadrangle figure is blinked or turned off. While the special figure 1 is stopped, the round figure is lit and displayed, but during the change of the figure 1 special figure, the round figure is blinked or turned off. While the symbol of special figure 2 is stopped, the triangular figure is lit and displayed, but during the change of symbol of special figure 2, the triangular figure is blinked or turned off. As described above, the fourth symbol is different not only in the display position but also in the display mode (here, the shape), and the player can discriminate it at a glance. The look-ahead notice may be given by changing the display mode, lighting mode, or blinking mode of the fourth symbol.

  Further, the decorative pattern display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 107 is a non-electric power support state (non-time saving state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. Further, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state.

  The hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 displays a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1, and the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 displays a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2. .. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is represented by the number of holding icons of special figure 1 holding lamp 218 as well as the number of holding icons of special figure 1, and the number of holdings of special figure 2 is the number of lighting of special figure 2 holding lamp 220. In addition, it is also represented by the number of holding icons in special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon, .... In the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icons on the right side become hold icons with older winnings. In the hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2, hold icons are displayed vertically. , The lower the hold icon, the older the winning icon.

  In FIG. 107 (a), two holding icons h11 and h12 of the special drawing 1 are displayed in the holding icon display area 281 of the special drawing 1, and both of the holding icons h11 and h12 of the two special drawing 1 are displayed. , Is displayed in a default display mode (a round, unpatterned, white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is a round hold icon. In addition, in FIG. 107A, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines. ..

  On the other hand, no pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 107 is the non-electric power support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chu and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because. It should be noted that the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, that is, the reserved icon display area provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 does not actually display a line demarcating the area, but in FIG. Is indicated by a dotted line for clarity. A line demarcating the region may be provided, or a line demarcating the region may be displayed when the hold icon is displayed. Further, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the pending icon display area of the special map that is more likely to win in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 ( It is displayed in the effect display area 208d), and the hold icon display area of the other special figure is displayed at the right end. That is, when the control state is the non-electric power support state, the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d and the hold icon display of the special figure 2 is displayed as shown in FIG. The area 282 is displayed at the right end. On the contrary, when the control state is the electric support state, the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed at the right end.

  Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon of special figure 2 is a rectangular unpatterned and white display mode, and not only the display position is different from the hold icon of special figure 1 but also the display mode ( Here, the shapes are also different, and the player can tell the difference by just looking at it. The default display mode of the hold icon of special figure 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon of special figure 2 may be the same.

  In the present embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special symbol is performed in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → starting or extinguishing the fourth symbol blinking → starting or erasing the hold icon moving animation → changing the decorative symbol. However, this order may change.

  In FIG. 107 (b), the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, the symbol variation on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon or decoration The pattern has not changed yet.

  In FIG. 107 (c), the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of Toku-zu 1 has started. The movement animation here is such that the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and the second hold The hold icon located at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. At this stage, the variable display of the decorative pattern is not started.

  In FIG. 107 (d), the moving animation continues, and in FIG. 107 (e), the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 before the start of change reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon, which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of variation, reached the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. The variable display of decorative patterns has not started. In addition, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon which was the first hold icon h11 until then may be viewed as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon until then. The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

  Then, the variable display of the decorative design is started in FIG. 107 (f).

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, as shown in FIG. 107 (g), the effect button 136 is set to the effective period (hereinafter, this effective period is referred to as “second operation effective period”). The operation promotion notification image 136P that prompts the user to press the button is displayed. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the hero. The variable display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol 284 or the like. Note that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative pattern is not hidden. As described above, the operation promotion notification image 136P can be regarded as an example of the operation display regarding the operation means.

  In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 107 (h), the valid period is reduced, and in FIG. 107 (i), the player is pressing the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period, as shown in FIG. 107 (j), the reachable state entry notice image 2071 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the operation promotion notification image 136P. .. In the reach state entry notice image 2071, the character display "Chance" is displayed on the right side of the character image of the hero. Even if the effect button 136 is not pressed within the valid period, the display as shown in FIG. 107 (j) may be displayed or the display as shown in FIG. 107 (j). May be displayed differently, or may not be displayed as shown in FIG. 107 (j). This also applies to the one-time operation effect, the continuous hit effect, and the long-press effect. As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach state entry notice image 2071 functions as the second operation result display. In addition, in this effect example, the effect in which the operation promotion notification image 136P is displayed may be referred to as an example of the second effect. In the following description, the “operation result display” may be referred to as an “operation response display”.

  In FIG. 107 (k), the reach state advance notice image 2071 disappears, and the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes visible, and thereafter, the reach state is entered as shown in FIG. It should be noted that even if the reach state entry notice image 207 is displayed, the reach state may not be entered in some cases, but it is also possible to always enter.

  As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that triggers a notice regarding the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 107 (m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of special figure 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the variable display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner and reduced, and in FIG. 107 (n). , Has developed into super reach (swordsman reach). The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (n) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and in the subsequent decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (o), the main character and the enemy swordsman duel. An animation of the scene is displayed.

  The reach state entry notice image 2071 is not limited to a notice of entering the reach state, and may be a notice of development of super reach.

  FIG. 108 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 107 step by step.

  In FIG. 108 (p) continuing from FIG. 107 (o), the animation of the duel scene continues, and this animation continues to FIG. 108 (s). In FIG. 108 (s), the main character wins over the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 108 (t), all are temporarily hidden except the fourth symbol display area 284. Instead of non-display, a background image different from the conventional one may be displayed. Eventually, as shown in (u) of the figure, the fluctuation fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is displayed. The background here may be a non-displayed background image or a background image different from the previous one. Further, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains off, and only the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (v), the combination of decorative patterns of 15R probability variation big hit confirmation of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, the fourth design (round figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 108 (v) is lit. In FIG. 108 (v), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 108 (w), as a big hit game start effect, a character image of "probable variation big hit" is displayed together with a background image celebrating the big hit (not shown here).

  On the other hand, in the case where the reach state is reached by a different decorative design (substantially 5R probability variation big hit, 5R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit) in FIG. 107 (l), a case of another case continuing from FIG. 108 (t) In 108 (u ′), the fluctuation fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6” is displayed, and in FIG. 108 (v ′) following FIG. 108 (u ′), “decoration 6-decoration” The combination of the jackpot decorative patterns "6-decoration 6" is stopped and displayed. Then, in FIG. 108 (w ′) subsequent to FIG. 108 (v ′), a character image of “big hit” is displayed together with a background image (omitted here) celebrating the big hit as a big hit game start effect.

  FIG. 109 is a diagram sequentially showing an example of the effect in another case following that of FIG. 108 (q).

  In FIG. 109 (a), the animation of the duel scene started in FIG. 107 (o) continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 109 (b). In FIG. 109 (b), the main character is defeated by the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 109 (c), like the FIG. 108 (t), all are temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. Eventually, in FIG. 109 (d), the swing fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is started. Here, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is restored, and the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 109 (e), the fourth symbol (circular figure) of the special diagram 1 is turned on, and the combination of the defective decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is stopped. It is displayed. Next, during the fixed display period of Toku-zu 1, in the variable icon display area 280, the erasing animation of the variable icon h0 is executed. In (f) of the figure, the erasing animation of the variable icon h0 is started, the erasing animation continues in (g) of the figure, and the varying icon h0 completely disappears in the (h) of FIG. It should be noted that the changing icon h0 may be erased before the confirmation display of the special figure 1 is performed.

  Next, an example of the operation result for each game state generated by the operation of each button of the effect button and the operation key unit 137 in the present embodiment will be described. Here, FIG. 110 (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation result of each button in the standby state (customer waiting state) in which the symbol variation display is not performed, and FIG. 110 (b) is the symbol variation display. It is a figure explaining an example of an operation result of each button in, and the figure (c) is a figure explaining an example of an operation result of each button in a big hit game.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (a), when the production button 136 (chance button) is operated during the customer waiting demonstration display (animation demonstration display) by animation in the standby state, the animation demonstration display is stopped and the symbol demo is displayed. Switch to display. The symbol demo display is a display or the like showing the result of variable display of the decorative symbol displayed last. Further, when the demonstration button 136 is operated while the symbol demo is being displayed and the setting screen is not displayed, a demonstration effect corresponding to the operation is displayed. Here, in the demonstration effect, for example, when a plurality of kinds of effect modes can be executed, the effect mode is changed, a character is made to appear, an effect is displayed, and a game method for explaining a game method is described. This is an effect display or the like for starting the explanation. If the effect button 136 is operated during the display of the setting screen while the symbol demo is being displayed, the volume or brightness after the setting is confirmed, and the setting screen is erased.

  Further, when the enter button 137e is operated in the standby state and the setting screen is not displayed, no operation result is obtained. On the other hand, when the enter button 137e is operated in the standby state while the setting screen is displayed, the display time of the displayed setting screen (volume setting screen or brightness setting screen) is reset and the display is extended.

  Further, in the standby state, when the right button 137d is operated while the setting screen is not displayed, the volume setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, in the standby state, when the right button 137d is operated while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume increases. In the standby state, when the right button 137d is operated while the brightness setting screen is displayed, the brightness is changed and the brightness rises and becomes brighter.

  Further, in the standby state, when the left button 137c is operated while the setting screen is not displayed, the volume setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, in the standby state, when the left button 137c is operated while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is lowered. In the standby state, when the left button 137c is operated while the brightness setting screen is displayed, the brightness is changed and the brightness is lowered and the screen becomes dark.

  Further, in the standby state, when the up button 137a is operated while the setting screen is not displayed, the brightness setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, in the standby state, when the upper button 137a is operated while the brightness setting screen is displayed, the brightness is changed and the brightness increases. In the standby state, when the upper button 137a is operated while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is increased.

  Further, in the standby state, when the lower button 137b is operated while the setting screen is not displayed, the brightness setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, in the standby state, when the lower button 137b is operated while the brightness setting screen is displayed, the brightness is changed and the brightness decreases. If the down button 137b is operated in the standby state while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is lowered.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (b), when the design variation display is in progress and the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period in which the operation of the effect button 136 is accepted, the effect corresponding to the operation is performed. Specifically, an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 in the one-time operation effect, an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 in the hitting effect, or an operation of the effect button 136 in the long-press effect. A performance or the like according to is performed. In addition, when the effect button 136 is operated outside the effective operation period of the effect button 136 during the variable display of symbols, no operation result is obtained. In addition, in the present embodiment, when each button of the operation key unit 137 is simultaneously operated in addition to the effect button 136 within the operation valid period, even if the effect button 136 is operated, no operation result is obtained. It is configured not to be done. In addition, even outside the effective operation period, various lamps 418 may be blinked, effect display may be performed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and effect sound may be output, depending on the operation of the effect button 136. .. At this time, the effect may be unrelated to the effect in the symbol variable display.

  Further, when the enter button 137e is operated while the symbol variation display is being performed and the setting screen is not displayed, no operation result is obtained. On the other hand, if the enter button 137e is operated while the pattern variation display is being displayed and the setting screen is being displayed, the volume after setting is fixed and the setting screen being displayed is hidden.

  Further, when the right button 137d is operated while the symbol variation is being displayed and the setting screen is not displayed, the symbol varying setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the right button 137d is operated during the symbol variation display and the symbol variation setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is increased.

  In addition, when the left button 137c is operated while the symbol variation display is in progress and the setting screen is not displayed, the symbol variation setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the left button 137c is operated during the symbol variation display and the symbol variation setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is lowered.

  Further, when the upper button 137a is operated while the pattern variation display is being performed and the setting screen is not displayed, no operation result is obtained. On the other hand, if the upper button 137a is operated while the symbol varying display is being displayed and the symbol varying setting screen is being displayed, the display time of the currently varying symbol varying setting screen is reset and the display is extended.

  Further, when the lower button 137b is operated while the pattern variation display is being performed and the setting screen is not displayed, no operation result is obtained. On the other hand, if the lower button 137b is operated while the symbol changing display is being displayed and the symbol changing setting screen is being displayed, the display time of the currently changing symbol changing setting screen is reset and the display is extended.

  When the effect button 136 and the direction key are operated within the operation valid period during which the operation for accepting the operation is performed during the variable display of the symbols, the effect corresponding to the operation is performed. Specifically, when the effect button 136 and the direction key are both pressed at the same time during execution of the effect for one-time operation that requires the operation of the effect button 136 and the direction key, etc. Is done. In addition, when the symbol variation display is in progress and both the effect button 136 and the direction key are operated outside the operation valid period, no operation result is obtained. In addition, even outside the operation valid period, various lamps 418 are blinked, an effect is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and a sound effect is output according to the operation of both the effect button 136 and the direction key. You may do it. At this time, the effect may be unrelated to the effect in the symbol variable display.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (c), when the big hit game is in progress and the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period in which the operation of the effect button 136 is accepted, an effect corresponding to the operation is performed. Specifically, an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 in the one-time operation effect, an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 in the hitting effect, or an operation of the effect button 136 in the long-press effect. A performance or the like according to is performed. In addition, during the big hit game, if the effect button 136 is operated outside the operation valid period of the effect button 136, no operation result is obtained. In addition, in the present embodiment, when each button of the operation key unit 137 is simultaneously operated in addition to the effect button 136 within the operation valid period, even if the effect button 136 is operated, no operation result is obtained. It is configured not to be done. In addition, even outside the effective operation period, various lamps 418 may be blinked, effect display may be performed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and effect sound may be output, depending on the operation of the effect button 136. .. At this time, the effect may be unrelated to the effect in the symbol variable display.

  Further, when the enter button 137e is operated during the big hit game and the setting screen is not displayed, no operation result is obtained. On the other hand, during the big hit game, if the enter button 137e is operated while the setting screen (volume setting screen or brightness setting screen) is displayed, the volume or brightness after setting is confirmed, and the setting screen currently displayed is displayed. You want to hide.

  If the right button 137d is operated during the big hit game and the setting screen is not displayed, the volume setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, during the big hit game, when the right button 137d is operated while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is increased. In the big hit game, when the right button 137d is operated while the brightness setting screen is displayed, the brightness is changed and the brightness is increased to be brighter.

  If the left button 137c is operated during the big hit game and the setting screen is not displayed, the volume setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, during the big hit game, when the left button 137c is operated while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is lowered. If the left button 137c is operated while the big hit game is being displayed and the brightness setting screen is displayed, the brightness is changed and the brightness is lowered to become dark.

  If the upper button 137a is operated during the big hit game and the setting screen is not displayed, the brightness setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, during the big hit game, when the upper button 137a is operated while the brightness setting screen is displayed, the brightness is changed and the brightness is increased. In addition, during the big hit game, when the upper button 137a is operated while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is increased.

  In addition, during the big hit game, when the lower button 137b is operated while the setting screen is not displayed, the brightness setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, during the big hit game, when the lower button 137b is operated while the brightness setting screen is displayed, the brightness is changed and the brightness is lowered. If the lower button 137b is operated during the big hit game and the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is lowered.

  In addition, if the production button 136 and the left button 137c are operated in a big hit game and other than the big hit round (for example, during the big hit start effect, during the round effect, during the big hit end effect, etc.), no operation result is obtained. Not done. In addition, during the big hit game, when both the production button 136 and the left button 137c are operated during the big hit round, the music of BGM output during the big hit game is changed. In the present embodiment, a plurality of songs are prepared as BGM output during the big hit game, and for example, each time the effect button 136 + the left button 137c is operated, "song 1"-"song 3"-"song" The selected song can be transitioned in the opposite direction, such as "2"-"Song 1" ....

  In addition, during the big hit game, if the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated in other than the big hit round, no operation result is obtained. In addition, during the big hit game, when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated during the big hit round, the music of BGM output during the big hit game is changed. More specifically, every time the production button 136 + the right button 137d is operated, the selection is made in the forward direction such as "Song 1"-"Song 2"-"Song 3"-"Song 1". You can transition songs.

  Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 111 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 111 is an example of an effect that may be executed in a part of the effect performed in FIGS. 107 to 109.

  FIG. 111 (1) corresponds to FIG. 107 (o), and an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist's lord and the enemy swordsman is displayed. As shown in FIG. 111 (1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed, and the setting screen is not displayed. In addition, in the present embodiment, while the reach is being performed in the "decoration 7", the three decorative symbols are variably displayed in the lower left part of the display screen. The three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time, for example, at the timing when the special drawing is stopped and displayed, and three combinations of symbols corresponding to the display results of the special drawing 1 or the special drawing 2 are simultaneously displayed. In the present embodiment, the three decorative symbols displayed in the lower left part of the display screen are stopped and displayed at the same time, but, for example, the left, right, and middle may be sequentially stopped and displayed. ..

  At this time, when the right button 137d is operated as shown in FIG. 111 (2), the symbol changing setting screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 111 (3). At this time, the right button 137d emits light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, red) while being operated. The other buttons may be turned off or may emit light in another light emission mode (for example, blue). In addition, when the left button 137c is operated, similarly, the symbol changing setting screen is displayed. The symbol changing setting screen is a display screen including a volume gauge VG. That is, the symbol changing setting screen functions as an example of the volume setting display. Further, the symbol changing setting screen displayed by operating the right button 137d or the left button 137c may be an example of notification of the result of the setting operation. This symbol changing setting screen is arranged and displayed in a layer on the front side of the layer in which the effect display is being performed. Therefore, while the symbol changing setting screen is displayed, the effect display is difficult to visually recognize. Note that the volume gauge VG indicates that the volume is at the third stage among the five stages.

  When the right button 137d is operated again as shown in FIG. 111 (4) while the symbol changing setting screen is displayed, the volume is increased by one step as shown in FIG. 111 (5). In response to this, the volume gauge VG changes to a display indicating that the volume is at the fourth stage. In this embodiment, the sound volume is increased by one step each time the right button 137d is operated. On the other hand, when the left button 137c is operated in the state where the volume gauge VG indicates the third stage, the volume decreases by one stage, and accordingly, the volume gauge VG indicates the second stage. The display will change to indicate that. As described above, the volume gauge VG that is variably displayed by operating the right button 137d or the left button 137c in the state where the symbol changing setting screen is displayed is an example of notification of the result of the setting operation. Sometimes you can. In this embodiment, only the volume can be set while the design is changing, but the brightness setting, the effect mode, the BGM, etc. may be set. When the right button 137d (the left button 137c) is pressed for a long time, the auto-repeat function operates while the button is pressed for a long time, and the volume is increased by one step every predetermined time (for example, 200 ms). The volume may be configured to (decrease), or the volume may not be increased (do not decrease) unless the auto repeat function is activated and the operation is performed once. Further, for example, when the effect button 136 is operated while the symbol changing setting screen is displayed, the volume is fixed to the set value, and the symbol changing setting screen is erased. You can In addition to this, for example, the entered password may be set by operating the effect button 136 on the password input screen. That is, in this case, the effect button 136 can be said to function as a first operation unit for performing various settings.

  FIG. 111 (6) corresponds to FIG. 108 (p), and the animation of the duel scene continues. In this effect example, thereafter, the effect (first effect) of simultaneous operation of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) is started at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (7). Then, as shown in FIG. 111 (8), on the decorative symbol display device 208, an operation promotion notification image is displayed which urges both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d to be operated simultaneously within the effective period. It This operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 that is an image that imitates the effect button 136, a right button image 137dP1 that is an image that imitates the right button 137d, and a remaining time display bar that indicates the remaining time of the valid period. 136P2 is included. At this time, the operation button animation display is performed on the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1. Here, the operation wait animation is, for example, an animation in which a button is repeatedly retracted or projected. Here, the operation waiting animation may not be displayed, and the still image may be displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (8), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 or the right button 137d is operated, it is treated as invalid. The operation promotion notification image may be configured to be displayed at the same time when the operation valid period starts. Here, the operation valid period is a period in which the period in which the operation of the effect button 136 is valid and the period in which the operation of the right button 137d are valid overlap, and, for example, one of the buttons first The valid period of the operation is started, and thereafter, the period overlapping when the valid period of the operation of the other button is started is also included in the valid period of the operation. In addition, the effect of continuous hitting operation or the effect of long-pressing operation may be performed during the effective period of the operation started earlier, and the effect of performing simultaneous operation of two or more buttons may be performed. On the contrary, the effective period of the operation of one button and the effective period of the other button overlap first, and then the effective period of the operation of one (the other) button ends and the other (the one) of the other ends. The effect may be configured such that the effective period of the button operation continues, for example, after performing the operation of simultaneously operating two or more buttons, the operation effect of one (the other) button is continued. You may perform the structure of performing. As described above, in the present embodiment, the display including the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 may be referred to as an example of the first operation display regarding the operations of both the first operation unit and the second operation unit. ..

  Then, after the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (10), as shown in FIG. 111 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are pressed. When both are operated simultaneously, as shown in FIG. 111 (12), the effect movable body 225 located above the decorative symbol display device 208 moves to the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. , The display screen may be hidden. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display (first operation result display) in which the effect movable body 225 is shining is performed. That is, the operation result presentation is performed. The effect button 136 and the right button 137d emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, red) while being operated. As a result, it is notified in advance that the result of the symbol variation display will be a big hit. It should be noted that it may be performed even when the result of the symbol variation display does not result in a big hit, so that a high expectation for a big hit may be produced. Here, the simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is not limited to the case where the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated at the same timing, and the right button 137d is operated while the effect button 136 is pressed. It goes without saying that this also includes the case where the effect button 136 is operated while the right button 137d is pressed. That is, it suffices that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are pressed. Note that the simultaneous operation effect as shown in FIG. 111 (12) may be started only when the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated at the same timing. Further, when one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is not pressed within a predetermined time (for example, within 1 second) after being pressed, it may not be handled as a simultaneous operation.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect is created by the effect movable body 225 by the simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d. However, even when the simultaneous operation is not performed within the operation valid period, the effect movable body 225 is used. It is configured so that a performance may be performed. In addition, when the simultaneous operation is not performed within the operation valid period, the effect by the effect movable body 225 may not be performed. In addition, the effect contents to be executed may be different when the simultaneous operation is performed within the operation valid period and when the simultaneous operation is not performed within the operation valid period, for example, within the operation valid period. If the simultaneous operation is performed, the effect with high expectation for the big hit is performed, and if the simultaneous operation is not performed within the operation valid period, effect with low expectation for the big hit is performed. This may be done or vice versa.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is suggested that the larger the number of buttons requesting the operation, the higher the degree of expectation for the big hit in the symbol variation display. As a result, as the number of buttons increases, the player may have a higher sense of expectation for a big hit, which may improve the enjoyment of the game. That is, it can be said that the display shown in FIG. 111 (8) or the like functions as a notice of the change. It should be noted that, regardless of the number of buttons requesting the operation, the degree of expectation for the big hit in the symbol variable display may be the same. Further, it may be performed as a pre-reading notice.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (13), the animation of the duel scene is restarted, and in FIG. 111 (14), the protagonist Tono is defeated by the enemy swordsman, and as shown in FIG. 111 (15), In the center of the decorative pattern display device 208, a combination of decorative patterns “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in a swinging fluctuation. Further, in the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208, the three decorative symbols are still variably displayed.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the luminance setting is not possible during the symbol variable display, but the luminance setting may be possible. The setting method in this case can be performed in the same manner as the volume setting, but for example, in the case of the brightness setting, by operating the up button 137a or the down button 137b, the setting during the pattern change for the brightness setting. The screen may be displayed to set the brightness, and the brightness may be changed by operating the up button 137a or the down button 137b. That is, the design variation during setting screen displayed by operating the up button 137a or the down button 137b may be an example of notification of the result of the setting operation, and the design variation during setting screen is The brightness gauge that is variably displayed by operating the up button 137a or the down button 137b in the displayed state may be an example of notification of the result of the setting operation.

  112 is a diagram for explaining another example of the effect in the effect shown in FIG. 111. Here, FIGS. 112 (a1) to 112 (a5) show a case where only one of the buttons is operated while the effect requiring the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is being performed. 112 (b1) to FIG. 112 (b5) show another example of the effects shown in FIG. 112 (a1) to FIG. 112 (a5), and FIG. 112 (c1). )-(C5) in the figure, when an effect requiring the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is being performed, one button is operated first and the other is maintained while maintaining that state. The example of the effect when the button is operated is shown.

  FIG. 112 (a1) corresponds to FIG. 111 (10). At this time, as shown in FIG. 112 (a2), when only the right button 137d is operated without operating the effect button 136, the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 becomes non-display as shown in FIG. 112 (a3). Although the display mode at the time of operation is changed to the display mode at the time of operation, the operation of the effect movable body 225 (operation result effect) is not performed. Here, the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 may not change even if the right button 137d is operated. When the right button 137d is operated while the symbol variation display is being executed, the symbol variation setting screen is displayed and the volume can be set, but the button operation is performed to give an effect such as a notice. From the start of the display (button operation promotion display) to the end of the symbol variation display, the display of the symbol variation setting screen is prohibited so that volume setting is not performed. That is, the volume setting is prohibited from the timing of FIG. 111 (7) to the end of the symbol variation display. Note that the volume setting may be prohibited only while the button operation promotion display is being performed. Further, the volume setting may be prohibited only after the button operation promotion display is started until the operation result effect is finished.

  After that, when the operation of the right button 137d is canceled as shown in FIG. 112 (a4), the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 is changed from the display mode at the time of operation to the display at the time of non-operation as shown in FIG. 112 (a5). However, the operation result rendering is not performed yet.

  112 (b1) is also the display corresponding to FIG. 111 (10), the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b are displayed corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1, respectively. At this time, as shown in FIG. 112 (b2), if only the right button 137d is operated without operating the effect button 136, the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 becomes non-display as shown in FIG. 112 (b3). Although the display mode at the time of operation is changed to the display mode at the time of operation, the operation result effect is not performed. Further, since both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are not operated at the same time, the operation effective period continues, and the remaining time display bar 136P2a corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 as well as the right button image 137dP1 is displayed. The corresponding remaining time display bar 136P2b is also displayed such that the meter continues to decrease despite the operation of the right button 137d.

  After that, when the operation of the right button 137d is canceled as shown in FIG. 112 (b4), the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 changes from the display mode at the time of operation to the display at the time of non-operation as shown in FIG. 112 (b5). However, the operation result rendering is not performed yet.

  FIG. 112 (c1) corresponds to FIG. 111 (10). At this time, as shown in FIG. 112 (c2), if only the right button 137d is operated without operating the effect button 136, the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 becomes non-display as shown in FIG. 112 (c3). Although the display mode at the time of operation is changed to the display mode at the time of operation, the operation of the effect movable body 225 (operation result effect) is not performed.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated while the right button 137d is operated as shown in FIG. 112 (c4), the operation result effect is started as shown in FIG. 112 (c5). This also applies when only the effect button 136 is operated first and the right button 137d is operated in that state. That is, even when one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated or long-pressed and the other button is operated, the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated at the same timing. The same result as the case (execution of the operation result effect) is obtained.

  FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining another example of the effect in the effect shown in FIG. Here, FIG. 113 (a1) to FIG. 113 (a2) show a case where only one of the buttons is operated while the effect requiring the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is being performed. 113 (b1) to FIG. 113 (b2) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 111 (7) to 111 (8), and FIG. 113 (c1). )-(C2) of the same figure has shown the other example of the production | generation shown by (7)-(8) of the same figure.

  FIG. 113 (a1) shows a state where the effect button 136 is not operated and only the right button 137d is pressed and held. Therefore, the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 is changed from the display mode when not operated to the display mode when operated. After that, for example, when the remaining one-third of the effective period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 113 (a2), it is as if the effect button image 136P1 is vibrating with the character display “please press the chance button”. An animation display (vibration animation display) is started, and a display for further instructing the operation of the button not operated is performed. The start timing of the vibration animation display is not limited to that described above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, a predetermined time (for example, a time after the operation of one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d) is performed. The vibration animation display may be started when (3 seconds) has elapsed. The vibration animation display ends when the corresponding button (the effect button 136 in FIG. 113 (a2) is operated. In this way, when only one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated, when a predetermined time has elapsed, a display (vibration animation display) different from the normal display (operation waiting animation display) is displayed. ) May be performed.

  113 (b1) to 113 (b2) correspond to FIGS. 111 (7) to 111 (8), the right button image 137dP1 is not displayed in FIG. 113 (b2), and only the effect button image 136P1 is displayed. Is displayed.

  Also, FIGS. 113 (c1) to 113 (c2) also correspond to FIGS. 111 (7) to 111 (8), but in FIG. 113 (c2), in addition to the right button image 137dP1 and the effect button image 136P1, The left button image 137cP1 is further displayed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the degree of expectation for a big hit is changed by changing the number of displayed button images. For example, the larger the number of button images displayed, the larger the hit. It is structured to have high expectations.

  FIG. 114 is a diagram illustrating another example of the effect shown in FIG. 111.

  114 (a) corresponds to FIG. 111 (7), and the effect of simultaneous operation of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 114 (b), on the decorative symbol display device 208, an operation promotion notification image is displayed which urges both the effect button 136 and the right button 137 d to be operated simultaneously within the effective period. It In FIG. 114 (b), as the operation promotion notification image, the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 are displayed along with remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period in association with the respective button images. Has been done. At the timing shown in FIG. 114 (b), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 or the right button 137d is operated, it is treated as invalid.

  Then, after the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 114 (c), at the timing shown in FIG. 114 (d), as shown in FIG. 114 (e), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are pressed. When only the right button 137d is operated, as shown in FIG. 114 (f), the right button image 137dP1 and the remaining time display bar 136P2b displayed corresponding to the right button image 137dP1 are changed to gray-out display. The meter of the remaining time display bar 136P2b displays that the remaining time is 0. The right button image 137dP1 and the remaining time display bar 136P2b may be deleted.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 114 (g), the effect movable body 225 moves to a position that covers the upper portion of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a shaking operation that vibrates on the spot is performed, and an operation result effect may be performed. It suggests that you may not. It should be noted that the stir operation by the production movable body 225 may not be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 114 (h), when the operation of the right button 137d is canceled and the effect button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 114 (i), the effect movable body 225 is the decorative symbol display device. It may move to a position that covers the entire display screen of 208. At this time, the effect display described above is being performed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In this way, the operation result effect may be performed by performing the button operation once in the order of the right button 137d and the effect button 136 during the operation valid period. In this example of the effect, the operation result effect may be performed by operating the two buttons of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d once, regardless of the order of operation, or the correct order ( For example, the operation result effect may be performed on condition that the button operation is performed with the right button 137d and the effect button 136 in this order. Further, the operation result effect may be performed even when the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are simultaneously operated. In this case, for example, when only the production button 136 is operated or when only the right button 137d is operated, the stir operation by the production movable body 225 is performed in the manner shown in FIG. When both 136 and the right button 137d are operated, the operation result effect shown in FIG. 114 (i) may be performed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 114 (h), when the effect button 136 is operated, but when the operation result effect is not performed, the effect movable body 225 descends as shown in FIG. 114 (i ′). Without raising, the one-button operation effect is failed. At this time, the remaining time display bar 136P2a displayed in correspondence with the effect button image 136P1 and the effect button image 136P1 is changed to a gray-out display, and the meter of the remaining time display bar 136P2a displays that the remaining time is 0. Become. As a result, it is notified that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d have been operated. The effect button image 136P1, the right button image 137dP1, and the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b may be deleted.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 114 (j ′), the animation of the duel scene is restarted, and the appearance that the hero's lord has lost to the enemy swordsman is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is requested, the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 are displayed, and the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are displayed. Although the display for prompting the operation of the button requesting the operation is performed such as prompting the operation, for example, the display for prompting the operation of the button other than the button requesting the operation may be performed. Specifically, for example, when a single operation of the effect button 136 is requested, an effect button image 136P1 and a right button image 137dP1 are displayed, but an operation result effect is produced by operating only the effect button 136. May be performed. Further, a display prompting the user to operate a button different from the button requesting the operation may be displayed. Specifically, for example, when the operation of the right button 137d is requested, only the effect button image 136P1 is displayed, but even if the effect button image 136P1 is operated, the operation result effect is not performed, and the right button 137d is operated. In the case of, the operation result presentation may be performed.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 111 (8), the operation promotion notification image is displayed, but the operation effective notification period is not started, and thereafter, the operation promotion notification image is deleted. You may do it. As the fake effect, for example, in the effect in which the operation promotion notification image is displayed when the two effect button images 136P1 are close to each other and overlap each other, the operation promotion notification image is displayed because the two effect button images 136P1 do not overlap each other. It is not displayed and the effect of the button operation is not started, and the operation promotion notification image is displayed, but it is difficult to mechanically press the target button that prompts the operation, or it is displaced to the inoperable position. It is conceivable that an effect such as being unable to press the button will occur.

  FIG. 115 is a diagram illustrating an example of a setting operation using the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137.

  In FIG. 115, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, a special symbol 2 holding lamp 220, and a universal symbol. A hold lamp 216 is shown. Further, in the present embodiment, a special symbol 1 fourth symbol LED 285a and a special symbol 2 fourth symbol LED 285b are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 200. The special symbol 1 for the fourth symbol LED 285a is for notifying whether or not the special symbol 1 is changing the symbol by its lighting mode, and the fourth symbol LED for the special symbol 2 285b is for the special symbol 2 according to its lighting mode. Informs whether or not the symbol is changing. For example, the fourth design LED 285a for special figure 1 and the fourth design LED 285b for special figure 2 flickers at a predetermined interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) during the variable display of the symbols, and the display result is lost. It is configured to turn off the light and turn it on when the display result is a big hit, but the lighting mode can be set arbitrarily, and the luminescent color can be changed according to the symbol variable display state. You can

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 115 (a), a big hit start effect indicating that the big hit game has started is displayed. In addition, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a striking manner display for prompting right striking is displayed. Further, the special design 1 for the fourth symbol LED285a is turned off, it is shown that the display result is missing, the fourth design for the special diagram 2 LED 285b is lit, indicating that the display result is a big hit. Has been done. That is, the big hit this time is a big hit when the special figure a is displayed on the second special figure display device 214.

  FIG. 115 (b) shows that the first round has started. As shown in FIG. 115 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 is displaying the effect during the big hit round. Then, "1R" indicating that it is the first round is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and below the hitting display, it is the first big hit game. “BONUS × 1” is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, a music title display MT indicating the music title of BGM output from the speaker 120 is displayed in the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 115 (c) shows that the third round is being executed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 115 (d), when the right button 137d (or the left button 137c) is operated once, as shown in FIG. 115 (e), the decorative pattern display device 208 sets the volume. The screen is displayed. It should be noted that the volume gauge VG on the volume setting screen indicates that the volume is at the third stage of the five stages. The volume setting screen may be displayed or erased when the left button 137c and the right button 137d are simultaneously operated. By doing so, the player can operate as intended. By doing so, it may be possible to set the volume, and it may be possible to suppress the annoyance that the volume setting screen is displayed by an unintended operation.

  When the right button 137d is operated again as shown in FIG. 115 (f) while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is increased by one step as shown in FIG. 115 (g). In response to this, the volume gauge VG changes to a display indicating that the volume is at the fourth stage.

  Further, when the right button 137d is operated while operating the effect button 136 as shown in FIG. 115 (h) while the volume setting screen is displayed, as shown in FIG. 115 (i). , The volume is not increased or decreased, the music of BGM is changed, and the changed music title is displayed on the music title display MT. That is, in the present embodiment, the volume cannot be changed while the effect button 136 is being operated. The volume setting screen is erased after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the last operation of any direction button on the operation key unit 137. Here, when the effect button 136 and any direction button of the operation key unit 137 are simultaneously operated, the direction button may not be operated. Further, when the effect button 136 and the direction button are simultaneously operated, the volume setting screen may be erased.

  FIG. 116 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect using the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137.

  As shown in FIG. 116 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 is provided in the lower center of the effect display area 208d, and a hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. ..

  In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is represented by the number of holding icons of special figure 1 as well as the number of lighting of special figure 1 holding lamp 218. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon, .... In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icons on the right side become the hold icons with older prizes.

  In FIG. 116 (a), one hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 has a default display mode (circular shape). No display and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is a round hold icon. In addition to the default display mode, the hold icon can also be displayed in a display mode of a read-ahead notice, and can also function as a read-ahead notice for the pending variable display of symbols.

  In the variable icon display area 280, the variable icon h0 is displayed in the default display mode. In addition to the default display mode, the variable icon h0 can be displayed in a notice display mode, and can also function as a notice display for the symbol change display.

  When the right button 137d is operated once as shown in FIG. 116 (b) during the variable display of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 116 (a), the volume setting screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 116 (c). Is displayed. At this time, according to the volume gauge VG, it is shown that the volume is at the fourth stage among the five stages. In addition, in the present embodiment, even if a button to which an effect or function corresponding to the operation is not assigned is operated, no operation result is obtained, but for example, the button is operated. You may make it the effect production of confirming that. In addition to the display by the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect effect may be an effect output by the voice output from the speaker 120 or the light emission of the lamps by the various lamps 418.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 116 (d), an operation promotion notification image 136P is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 to prompt the user to press the effect button 136 within the operation valid period. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. However, at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (d), since the operation valid period has not started yet, even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid. On the other hand, the volume setting is valid, and the volume can be changed by operating the left button 137c or the right button 137d. Further, since the remaining time display bar 136P2 is arranged and displayed on the layer on the back side of the volume gauge VG, the remaining time display bar 136P2 is displayed so as to overlap the volume gauge VG, which makes it difficult to visually recognize. Also, the variable display of the decorative pattern is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player is a special figure due to the decorative pattern that is variably displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Can be recognized that is changing. Note that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative pattern is not hidden.

  Then, after the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (e), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are simultaneously operated as shown in FIG. 116 (f), As shown at 116 (g), neither the operation result effect that is performed by operating the effect button 136 nor the change of the volume is performed. That is, both operations of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are treated as invalid. The meter of the remaining time display bar 136P2 hidden in the volume gauge VG is reduced and displayed as time passes.

  Thereafter, when a predetermined time has passed since the direction key was last operated, the volume setting screen is erased and the remaining time display bar 136P2 appears, as shown in FIG. 116 (h). Even in this case, unless the operation of the right button 137d is stopped, even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as effective.

  Next, the relationship between the operation of the effect button 136 and the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 118. Here, FIG. 117 (A) is a timing chart illustrating the relationship between the continuous hit operation by the effect button 136 and the effect display during execution of the effect for continuous hits, and FIG. 117 (B) is the effect for continuous hits. Is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the long press operation by the effect button 136 and the effect display during execution of, and FIG. 6C is a long press operation by the effect button 136 during execution of the effect for long press. It is a timing chart explaining the relationship between the effect display. Further, FIG. 118 (A) is a timing chart for explaining the effect display when the long press operation with the effect button 136 is intermittently performed while the effect for continuous hitting is being executed, and FIG. 118 (B) is It is a timing chart explaining the effect display when the long press operation by the effect button 136 is intermittently performed during execution of the effect for long press.

  In the present embodiment, when the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the effect pattern of the decorative symbol variation display according to the received command. To do. Then, in the effect based on the determined effect pattern, effect lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute various effects. All box data of the effect contents decided to be executed by the effect lottery is read, the part data included in the read box data is stored in the RAM 408, and the liquid crystal command included in the box data is stored in the first sub-control unit 400. From the second sub-control unit 500.

  As the liquid crystal command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500 at the start of the symbol variable display, for example, a background command for designating the background, a timer command for designating the variation time, and the number of holdings are designated. Hold number change command, hold display command that specifies the display position and color of the hold icon, notice command that specifies the content of the notice, reach command that specifies the content of the reach to be executed, temporary stop that specifies the decorative pattern to be temporarily stopped There are a design command, a final stop design command, etc. for designating a decorative design to be fixedly displayed when the design is stopped. Here, the timer command includes data capable of specifying the effect time before advance (remind timer) and the effect time before reach (reach timer).

  Then, in the second sub control unit 500, based on the liquid crystal command from the first sub control unit 400, control is performed such that the effect display designated at the designated time is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the second sub-control unit 500 transmits a return command to that effect to the first sub-control unit 400 when a predetermined effect display is performed. Upon receiving the return command, the first sub-control unit 400 executes control corresponding to the received return command.

  When the effect for repeated hits is performed while the symbols are changing, as shown in FIGS. 117 (A) and 117 (B), the liquid crystal is transferred from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500 at the timing a. When the command is transmitted, the second sub control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of b. In the second sub-control unit 500, the decorative symbol is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the content of the received liquid crystal command. After that, when the effect display for continuous hitting is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing of c, the return command to that effect is transmitted from the second sub control unit 500 to the first sub control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, when the return command is received at the timing of d, the part data corresponding to the received return command is read from the RAM 408, and based on the read part data, the sound output, the blinking of the lamp, and the effect movement. It controls the operation of the bodies 224, 225 and the like.

  After that, the second sub-control unit 500 transmits a return command for instructing the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136 to the first sub-control unit 400 at the timing of e, and the second sub-control unit 500 also enables the operation. Set the start period. On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command instructing the start of the operation valid period at the timing of f, the first sub-control unit 400 also sets the operation valid period of the effect button 136 to start.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 117 (A), when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit, the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing of A1 and the liquid crystal command to that effect is given to the first sub-control unit 400. When transmitted from the second sub-control unit 500, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of B1, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated. Done.

  Thereafter, similarly, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing of C1 (E1) and the liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500, the second sub control is performed. In the section 500, the decorative symbol display device 208 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of D1 (F1), and displays the effect that the effect button 136 has been operated on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 117 (B), when the effect button 136 is pressed for a long time and the automatic long-press continuous stroke function, the operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing of A1 and the liquid crystal command to that effect is started. Is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of B1 and displays an effect indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated. Is performed on the decorative pattern display device 208. The operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained.

  After that, when the time T1 (for example, 500 ms) until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, it is assumed that the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing of C2. When the liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500, the second sub control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of D2 and operates the effect button 136. A decorative effect display device 208 displays the effect. That is, when a long press operation is performed, the second sub-control unit 500 cannot recognize that the second operation has been performed by the effect button 136 unless at least the time T1 has elapsed since the operation was started. Therefore, when a continuous hit operation is performed, every time the effect button 136 is operated, the liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. Even before the period of time has elapsed, the second sub-control unit 500 can recognize that the effect button 136 has been operated, and more effect display indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is performed than when a long press operation is performed. It is possible to

  After that, as long as the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, every time T2 (for example, 100 ms) until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is transmitted (E2, G2, I2, ...). (At the timing), the liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated once is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, and the second sub-control unit 500 displays (F2, H2). , J2 ... (at each timing), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated. That is, when a long press operation is performed, the second sub control unit 500 cannot recognize that the effect button 136 has been operated until at least the time T2 has elapsed. Therefore, in the case of continuous hitting operation, every time the effect button 136 is operated, the liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 is operated is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500. Even before the period of time has elapsed, the second sub-control unit 500 can recognize that the effect button 136 has been operated, and more effect display indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is performed than when a long press operation is performed. It is possible to

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 117A and 117B, when the second sub-control unit 500 determines that the operation valid period has ended without executing the operation result effect at the timing of g, A return command to that effect is transmitted from the second sub control unit 500 to the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 also sets the operation valid period to end. On the other hand, when the first sub control unit 400 receives the return command instructing the end of the operation valid period at the timing of h, the first sub control unit 400 also sets the operation valid period of the effect button 136 to end. After the operation valid period is set to end, both the operation and the long press operation of the effect button 136 are treated as invalid even if the operation is performed.

  In addition, when the execution condition of the operation result effect is satisfied by the continuous hit operation or the long-press automatic continuous hit function at the timing before the timing of g, the second sub control unit 500 ends the operation valid period. A return command to start the operation result effect is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the operation valid period is set to end. On the other hand, when the first sub control unit 400 receives the return command from the second sub control unit 500, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is also set to end in the first sub control unit 400 and stored in the RAM 408. The part data corresponding to the received return command is read, and effect control based on the read part data is performed.

  Further, in the first sub-control unit 400, the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, and the liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, but the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command. At times, when the operation valid period has expired, the second sub control unit 500 determines that the operation of the effect button 136 is invalid, and an effect display indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is displayed. I don't know.

  When the effect for long press is performed during the pattern change, as shown in FIG. 117C, when the liquid crystal command is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500 at the timing of a, The second sub-control unit 500 receives this liquid crystal command at the timing of b. In the second sub-control unit 500, the decorative symbol is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the content of the received liquid crystal command. After that, when the effect display for long-pressing is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing of c, the return command to that effect is transmitted from the second sub control unit 500 to the first sub control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, when the return command is received at the timing of d, the part data corresponding to the received return command is read from the RAM 408, and based on the read part data, the sound output, the blinking of the lamp, and the effect movement. It controls the operation of the bodies 224, 225 and the like.

  After that, the second sub-control unit 500 transmits a return command for instructing the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136 to the first sub-control unit 400 at the timing of e, and the second sub-control unit 500 also enables the operation. Set the start period. On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command instructing the start of the operation valid period at the timing of f, the first sub-control unit 400 also sets the operation valid period of the effect button 136 to start.

  After that, the long-pressing operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing of α, but at this time point, the liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 is operated is not transmitted.

  After that, when the time T3 (for example, 100 ms) until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continuing at the timing of A3. If a liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of B3 and presses the effect button 136. The effect display indicating that the long press operation is performed is performed on the decorative pattern display device 208. That is, when the long press operation is performed, the second sub-control unit 500 may recognize that the long press operation using the effect button 136 is performed until at least the time T3 has elapsed since the operation was started. Can not.

  After that, as long as the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, every time T4 (for example, 231 ms) until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted (at each timing of C3, E3 ...). ), The liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 because the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continuing, and the second sub-control unit 500 causes (D3, F3 In response to the reception of the liquid crystal command (at each timing of ...), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect indicating that the long press operation by the effect button 136 is being performed.

  After that, when the second sub control unit 500 determines that the operation valid period has ended without executing the operation result presentation at the timing of g, a return command to that effect is issued from the second sub control unit 500 to the first sub control unit 500. While being transmitted to the control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500 also sets the operation valid period to end. On the other hand, when the first sub control unit 400 receives the return command instructing the end of the operation valid period at the timing of h, the first sub control unit 400 also sets the operation valid period of the effect button 136 to end. After the operation valid period is set to end, even if the long-pressing operation of the effect button 136 is continued, the operation is treated as invalid.

  In addition, when the execution condition of the operation result effect by the long press operation is satisfied at the timing before the timing of g, the second sub control unit 500 ends the operation effective period and starts the operation result effect. A return command to that effect is sent to the first sub-control unit 400, and the operation valid period is set to end. On the other hand, when the first sub control unit 400 receives the return command from the second sub control unit 500, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is also set to end in the first sub control unit 400 and stored in the RAM 408. The part data corresponding to the received return command is read, and effect control based on the read part data is performed.

  Next, an operation in the case where a long press operation by the effect button 136 is intermittently performed during execution of the effect for continuous hitting will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (A). In addition, in FIG. 118 (A), a state in which an effect for continuous hitting is performed while the symbol is changing is shown.

  First, when the liquid crystal command is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit at the timing of a, the second sub control unit 500 receives this liquid crystal command at the timing of b. In the second sub-control unit 500, the decorative symbol is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the content of the received liquid crystal command. After that, when the effect display for continuous hitting is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing of c, the return command to that effect is transmitted from the second sub control unit 500 to the first sub control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, when the return command is received at the timing of d, the part data corresponding to the received return command is read from the RAM 408, and based on the read part data, the sound output, the blinking of the lamp, and the effect movement. It controls the operation of the bodies 224, 225 and the like.

  After that, the second sub-control unit 500 transmits a return command for instructing the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136 to the first sub-control unit 400 at the timing of e, and the second sub-control unit 500 also enables the operation. Set the start period. On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command instructing the start of the operation valid period at the timing of f, the first sub-control unit 400 also sets the operation valid period of the effect button 136 to start.

  After that, when the operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing of A1 and the liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, the second sub-control unit 500 displays the B1 The liquid crystal command is received at the timing, and the effect display that the effect button 136 has been operated is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. The operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained.

  After that, when the time T1 (for example, 500 ms) until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, it is assumed that the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing of C2. When the liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500, the second sub control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of D2 and operates the effect button 136. A decorative effect display device 208 displays the effect.

  On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the operation of the effect button 136 has been canceled at the timing of β1 after transmitting the liquid crystal command at the timing of C2, the liquid crystal command of the button release will be the first sub-control unit. 400 is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500. When the second sub control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command from the first sub control unit 400 at the timing of β2, it recognizes that the long press by the effect button 136 has been released.

  After that, when the operation of the effect button 136 is restarted at the timing of E4, the liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500. In the second sub-control unit 500, when the liquid crystal command is received at the timing of F4, the effect display that the effect button 136 is operated is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained.

  After that, when the time T1 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous striking is transmitted with the operation state of the effect button 136 being maintained, the liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated once at the timing of G4. Is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500. In the second sub control unit 500, when the liquid crystal command is received at the timing of H4, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect that the effect button 136 has been operated. That is, if the long-press operation is temporarily interrupted during the operation valid period and the long-press operation is performed again, the liquid crystal is displayed until the time T1 elapses after the long-press operation is started, as in the case of the first long-press operation. No command is sent. If the long press operation is performed again during the operation valid period, the liquid crystal command may be transmitted when time T2 has elapsed after the long press operation was started. In addition, the liquid crystal command is transmitted when a time different from the time T2 (a time longer than the time T2 or a time shorter than the time T2) has elapsed since the long press operation was restarted. Good.

  After that, as long as the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, the effect button 136 is operated once every time T2 (for example, 100 ms) until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hit is transmitted. As a result, a liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500, and in the second sub control unit 500, the effect button 136 is operated in response to the reception of the liquid crystal command. The effect display is performed by the decorative pattern display device 208.

  After that, when the second sub control unit 500 determines that the operation valid period has ended without executing the operation result presentation at the timing of g, a return command to that effect is issued from the second sub control unit 500 to the first sub control unit 500. While being transmitted to the control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500 also sets the operation valid period to end. On the other hand, when the first sub control unit 400 receives the return command instructing the end of the operation valid period at the timing of h, the first sub control unit 400 also sets the operation valid period of the effect button 136 to end. After the operation valid period is set to end, both the operation and the long press operation of the effect button 136 are treated as invalid even if the operation is performed. Therefore, even if the time T2 elapses at the timing of g and the liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500 as if the effect button 136 was operated once, At the timing of h when the sub-control unit 500 receives the command, the operation valid period has already expired, so the operation is treated as invalid.

  Next, an operation in the case where a long press operation by the effect button 136 is intermittently performed during execution of a long press effect will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (B). In addition, in FIG. 118 (B), a state in which an effect for long-pressing is performed while the symbol is changing is shown.

  First, when the liquid crystal command is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit at the timing of a, the second sub control unit 500 receives this liquid crystal command at the timing of b. In the second sub-control unit 500, the decorative symbol is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the content of the received liquid crystal command. After that, when the effect display for long-pressing is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing of c, the return command to that effect is transmitted from the second sub control unit 500 to the first sub control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, when the return command is received at the timing of d, the part data corresponding to the received return command is read from the RAM 408, and based on the read part data, the sound output, the blinking of the lamp, and the effect movement. It controls the operation of the bodies 224, 225 and the like.

  After that, the second sub-control unit 500 transmits a return command for instructing the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136 to the first sub-control unit 400 at the timing of e, and the second sub-control unit 500 also enables the operation. Set the start period. On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command instructing the start of the operation valid period at the timing of f, the first sub-control unit 400 also sets the operation valid period of the effect button 136 to start.

  After that, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing of α1, but at this time point, the liquid crystal command to the effect that the effect button 136 is operated is not transmitted.

  After that, when the time T3 (for example, 100 ms) until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continuing at the timing of A3. If so, a liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500. In the second sub-control unit 500, the liquid crystal command is received at the timing of B3, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect that the long press operation with the effect button 136 is being performed.

  After that, when the time T4 (for example, 231 ms) until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, the long press operation of the effect button 136 continues at the timing of C3. The liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500 as being in the middle. In the second sub-control unit 500, when the liquid crystal command is received at the timing of D3, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect that the long press operation with the effect button 136 is being performed.

  On the other hand, when the first sub control unit 400 detects that the operation of the effect button 136 has been canceled at the timing of γ1 after transmitting the liquid crystal command at the timing of C3, the liquid crystal command of the button release is the first sub control unit 400. 400 is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500. When the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400 at the timing of γ2, it recognizes that the long press by the effect button 136 has been released.

  After that, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is restarted at the timing of α2, and when the time T3 until the liquid crystal command for the long press is transmitted elapses, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued at the timing of E5. A liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. In the second sub control unit 500, the liquid crystal command is received at the timing of F5, and the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the effect display that the long press operation with the effect button 136 is being performed.

  After that, as long as the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, it is considered that the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continuing every time the time T4 until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted elapses. Is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, and the second sub-control unit 500 performs a long press operation by the effect button 136 in response to the reception of the liquid crystal command. The effect effect display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  When the second sub-control unit 500 determines that the operation valid period has ended without executing the operation result presentation at the timing of g, a return command to that effect is sent from the second sub-control unit 500 to the first sub-control unit 500. While being transmitted to the control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500 also sets the operation valid period to end. On the other hand, when the first sub control unit 400 receives the return command instructing the end of the operation valid period at the timing of h, the first sub control unit 400 also sets the operation valid period of the effect button 136 to end. After the operation valid period is set to end, even if the long-pressing operation of the effect button 136 is continued, the operation is treated as invalid. Therefore, even if the time T4 elapses at the timing of G5 and the liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500 assuming that the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continuing, At the timing when the second sub control unit 500 receives the command, since the operation valid period has already expired, the long press operation is treated as invalid.

  Next, an example of an effect for repeated hits in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120. Here, FIG. 119 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of an effect for continuous hitting centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 120 is a pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. It is the figure which shows one example of the consecutive hit production centering around the decorative design display device 208 of.

  FIG. 119 (a) shows a situation in which the robot has reached the reach state and has evolved into the super reach (panda reach attack). In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 119 (a), it is shown that the reach state has been reached with "decoration 7", and three decorative symbols are variably displayed at the lower left of the display screen.

  Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), after an effect display of innumerable pandas is displayed, an effect button 136 is pressed as shown in FIG. 119 (c). The character display "defeat all pandas with continuous button hits" suggests that the mission may be accomplished and a big hit may be achieved by repeated hits.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 119 (d), on the decorative symbol display device 208, an operation promotion notification image is displayed which prompts the production button 136 to be repeatedly hit to defeat all the pandas within the operation valid period. This operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. At the timing shown in FIG. 119 (d), the operation valid period (first operation valid period) is in a state before the start, and even if the production button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid. The word "preparation" to that effect is displayed, and then the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 119 (e). At this time, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the characters “100 more” indicating that the number of remaining pandas to be defeated is 100.

  Then, for example, when the effect button 136 is operated as shown in FIG. 119 (f) at the timing of A1 in FIG. 117 (A), the effect is produced from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500. A liquid crystal command indicating that the button 136 has been operated is transmitted, and when the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of B1 in FIG. 117 (A), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the liquid crystal command in FIG. 119 (g). As shown, the character display of "98 remaining bodies" indicating that two pandas have been defeated is updated. The remaining time display bar 136P2 is displayed so that the gauge decreases as time passes. In this way, in the continuous striking effect, the effect display in which the number of remaining pandas to be defeated in accordance with the operation of the effect button 136 decreases may be referred to as an example of the first effect display.

  Then, for example, when the effect button 136 is operated as shown in FIG. 119 (h) at the timing of C1 in FIG. 117 (A), the effect is produced from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500. A liquid crystal command indicating that the button 136 has been operated is transmitted, and when the second sub control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing D1 in FIG. 117 (A), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the liquid crystal command in FIG. 119 (i). As shown, the character display of "72 more" indicating that 26 pandas have been defeated is updated.

  Thereafter, for example, when the effect button 136 is operated as shown in FIG. 119 (j) at the timing of E1 in FIG. 117 (A), the effect is produced from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500. When the liquid crystal command indicating that the button 136 has been operated is transmitted and the second sub control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of F1 in FIG. 117 (A), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the liquid crystal command in FIG. 119 (k). As shown, the character display of "50 remaining bodies" indicating that 22 pandas have been defeated is updated.

  Then, in response to the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 being continued, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that the number of remaining pandas to be defeated is decreasing, as shown in FIG. 119 (l). , The production button 136 is operated after the update display is displayed to the character display of “1 more body” indicating that the number of remaining pandas to be defeated is one more body, and before the operation valid period ends. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208, as shown in FIG. 119 (m), the display is updated to the character display of "0 more" indicating that all the pandas have been defeated, and as shown in FIG. 119 (n). In addition to the effect that the bancho character throws away the panda, it is notified that three "decorations 7" will be a big hit. That is, in this effect example, since the execution condition of the operation result effect by the continuous hit operation is satisfied, the effect as shown in FIGS. 119 (m) to 119 (n) as the operation result effect (first result display). Display is performed.

  On the other hand, when the operation valid period ends without satisfying the execution condition of the operation result effect by the repeated hitting operation, as shown in FIG. 119 (m ′), the banquet character is knocked out by the panda and the lost effect is performed. At the same time, "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is displayed to notify that there is a loss. In addition, after the display shown in FIG. 119 (m ′) is performed, a revival effect may be performed and a big hit may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 119 (c) to 119 (m), by repeatedly hitting the effect button 136, it is possible to achieve a mission and hit the jackpot "button hits. There is a case where a series of displays in which a character string "defeat all pandas with" is displayed and an operation promotion notification image is displayed to promptly defeat all the pandas within the operation valid period by repeatedly pressing the production button 136 is there.

  FIG. 120 shows the same effect as that of FIG. 119, but shows a state where a continuous hit operation using the long press automatic continuous hit function by a long press operation of the effect button 136 is being performed.

  120 (a) to 120 (e) are the same as FIGS. 119 (a) to 119 (e), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Thereafter, for example, at the timing A1 (first timing) in FIG. 117 (B), as shown in FIG. 120 (f), when the operation of the effect button 136 is started (that is, the effect button 136 is long. When the push operation is started), a liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, and the second sub-control is performed at the timing B1 in FIG. 117 (B). When the sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command, the decorative pattern display device 208 is updated to display "98 more characters" indicating that the two pandas have been laid down, as shown in FIG. 120 (g). .. The remaining time display bar 136P2 is displayed so that the gauge decreases as time passes.

  After that, at a timing (for example, the timing of D1 in FIG. 117 (A)) before the time T1 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is transmitted with the operation state of the effect button 136 being maintained is reached, Since the liquid crystal command from the 1st sub control unit 400 has not been transmitted yet, the display of the remaining number of pandas to be defeated is not updated as shown in FIG. 120 (h).

  Thereafter, while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, for example, at the timing C2 (second timing) in FIG. 117 (B), the time T1 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is transmitted elapses. Then, the liquid crystal command to the effect that the effect button 136 has been operated once is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500. Then, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of D2 in FIG. 117 (B), and in the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 120 (i), 26 pandas have been tilted. Is updated to the character display of "72 more". As described above, in the present embodiment, the time T1 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is transmitted functions as an example of the first time.

  After that, at a timing (for example, the timing of F1 in FIG. 117A) before the time T2 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hits is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained (for example, the timing of F1 in FIG. 117A), Since the liquid crystal command from the 1st sub-control unit 400 has not been transmitted yet, the display of the remaining number of pandas to be defeated is not updated as shown in FIG. 120 (j).

  After that, while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, for example, at the timing of E2 in FIG. 117 (B), when the time T2 until the liquid crystal command for automatic repeated hits is operated elapses, the effect button 136 is turned on. A liquid crystal command indicating that it has been operated once is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500. Then, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of F2 in FIG. 117 (B), and the decorative pattern display device 208 has tilted 22 pandas as shown in FIG. 120 (j). It is updated to the character display of "50 more". As described above, in the present embodiment, the time T2 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is transmitted functions as an example of the second time.

  Then, in response to the long press operation by the effect button 136 being continuously performed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that the number of remaining pandas to be defeated is reduced every time the time T2 elapses. As shown in 119 (l), when the time T2 elapses after the update display to the character display of "1 more body" indicating that the remaining number of pandas to be defeated is 1 more body, the decoration is displayed. In the symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 120 (m), the display is updated to “0 more characters” indicating that all the pandas have been defeated, and as shown in FIG. While the character is throwing away a panda, it is notified that three "decorations 7" will be a big hit. That is, in this effect example, since the execution condition of the operation result effect by the continuous hit operation is satisfied, the effect as shown in FIGS. 119 (m) to 119 (n) as the operation result effect (first result display). Display is performed.

  On the other hand, when the operation valid period ends without satisfying the execution condition of the operation result effect by the repeated hitting operation, as shown in FIG. 119 (m ′), the banquet character is knocked out by the panda and the lost effect is performed. At the same time, "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is displayed to notify that there is a loss. In addition, after the display shown in FIG. 119 (m ′) is performed, a revival effect may be performed and a big hit may be displayed.

  Next, an example of the effect for long-pressing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 121. Here, FIG. 121 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of an effect for long press centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment.

  FIG. 121 (a) shows a situation in which the player has entered the reach state and developed into the super reach (swordsman reach). In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (a), it is shown that the state has been reached with "decoration 7", and at the lower left of the display screen, three decorative patterns are variably displayed, and An animation of a duel scene between the protagonist Tono and the enemy swordsman is displayed.

  In FIG. 121 (b), the animation of the duel scene continues. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (c), the effect for long-pressing with the effect button 136 is started. At this time, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the operation promotion notification image. This operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 and a remaining time display bar 136P2. At the timing shown in FIG. 121 (c), the operation valid period (second operation valid period) has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid.

  Then, when the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (d), the character display of "long press" for promoting the long press operation of the effect button 136 is displayed. Thereafter, for example, at the timing of α in FIG. 117 (C) (third tie), as shown in FIG. 121 (e), the long-pressing operation of the effect button 136 is started, but at this point, the effect is produced. The liquid crystal command indicating that the button 136 has been operated is not operated, and until the time T3 until the liquid crystal command for long pressing is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, the decorative pattern display device 208 Then, as shown in FIG. 121 (f), the same display mode as in FIG. 121 (d) is maintained.

  Thereafter, when the liquid crystal command is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500 at the timing of A3 in FIG. 117 (C) after the lapse of time T3, it is indicated by B3 in FIG. 117 (C). At the timing, in the decorative pattern display device 208, as shown in FIG. 121 (g), the display image of the lord displayed at the top of the display screen is enlarged, while the display image of the swordsman is reduced, and the lord appears. A display is produced to produce a slight advantage. As described above, in the present embodiment, the display in which the display image of the swordsman is reduced while the display screen of the lord displayed above the display screen is enlarged may be referred to as an example of the second effect display. Further, in the present embodiment, the time T3 until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted functions as an example of the third time.

  After that, the time T4 elapses while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, and, for example, at the timing of C3 in FIG. 117C, the liquid crystal command indicating that the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continuing. Is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, at the timing shown by D3 in FIG. 117 (C), in the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 121 (h). While the display screen of the lord displayed above the display screen is further enlarged, the display image of the swordsman is further reduced, and a display is produced in which the lord is considerably predominant.

  Then, in response to the long press operation by the effect button 136 being continuously performed, the state that the display image of the lord is gradually enlarged is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 every time the time T4 elapses. When the execution condition of the operation result effect (second result display) by the long press operation is satisfied, the effect display as shown in FIGS. 111 (13) to 111 (15) is performed, for example.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 (c) to 121 (h), the display of the operation promotion notification image for promoting the long press operation of the effect button 136 may be referred to as the long press operation display.

  Next, an example of the step-up effect in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 124. Here, FIG. 122 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of a step-up effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 123 is an example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. 124 is a diagram showing the continuation in stages, and FIG. 124 is a diagram showing another example of the effect performed in the effect shown in FIG. 122.

  In FIG. 122, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, an ordinary symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 hold lamp 218, a special symbol 2 hold lamp 220, a general symbol hold. A lamp 216, a fourth design LED 285a for special figure 1 and a fourth design LED 285b for special figure 2 are shown.

  On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 122 (1), a combination of decorative patterns "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. In response to this, the combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is also stopped and displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Further, the decorative pattern display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d. Further, the fourth design LED 285a for special figure 1 and the fourth design LED 285b for special figure 2 are both turned off, which indicates that the display result is missing.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 122 is a non-electric power support state (non-time saving state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280.

  In FIG. 122 (1), three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special map 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special map 1, and these three hold icons h11, h12, of the special map 1 are displayed. All h13 are displayed in a default display mode (a circular unpatterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is a round hold icon.

  In FIG. 122 (2), the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation is started on the first special symbol display device 212, but no change has occurred to the hold icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 122 (3), the hold icon (target hold icon of this time pattern change) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 due to the move animation of the hold icon moved to the change icon display area 280 and the change icon h0. Then, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes special. It moves to the display position of the second hold icon h12 in FIG. 1, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. At this time, the fourth symbol LED 285a for special figure 1 starts blinking. In addition, the start timing of the movement animation of the hold icon may be before the start of the variable display of the decorative design, may be the same as the start of the variable display of the decorative design, or the variation of the decorative design. It may be after the start of display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122 (4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, two "decorations 7" stop and enter the reach state. In the lower left of the display screen, three decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

  FIG. 122 (5) shows a state where the super reach (Echigoya reach) has been developed. In this super reach, the character display "Secure Echigoya" is suggested, which suggests that catching the character of Echigoya during the reach production may lead to more reliable reach production. This Echigoya reach is a reach including a step-up effect in which the effect for one operation is performed up to three times.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 122 (6), when the process moves to Echigoya reach, the effect for the first time operation (the effect of step up 1) is started, and the decorative pattern display device 208 has a thousand boxes. A state in which the character of Echigoya is chased by the character of the main character, Tonosama, is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (7), on the decorative symbol display device 208, an operation promotion notification image is displayed as an operation display for prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 within the effective period. This operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. At this time, in the effect button image 136P1, an operation waiting animation display is performed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (7), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid.

  Then, after the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (8), when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period as shown in FIG. 122 (9), FIG. As shown in, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect of succeeding in the effect for the first time of the first operation and shifting to the effect for the second time of the first operation is performed. The effect shown in FIG. 122 (10) is displayed even when there is no operation of the effect button 136 before the operation valid period ends, but when the operation valid period ends without any operation, A different effect (for example, an effect such that the display shown in FIG. 122 (10) is performed after the display shown in FIG. 124 (a1) described later) may be displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (11), the effect for the second operation (the effect of step-up 2) is started, and in the decorative pattern display device 208, the character of Echigoya holding a thousand boxes is the main character. The character being chased by is displayed again.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (12), on the decorative symbol display device 208, an operation promotion notification image is displayed as an operation display for prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 within the effective period. This operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. At this time, in the effect button image 136P1, an operation waiting animation display is performed. It should be noted that at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (12), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid.

  Then, after the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (13), when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period as shown in FIG. 122 (14), FIG. 122 (15) As shown in, the decorative pattern display device 208 performs the effect of succeeding in the effect for the second one-time operation and shifting to the effect for the third one-time operation. The effect shown in FIG. 122 (15) is displayed even when the effect button 136 is not operated before the operation valid period ends, but when the operation valid period ends without any operation, A different effect (for example, an effect such that the display shown in FIG. 122 (15) is performed after the display shown in FIG. 124 (b1) described later) may be displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 123 (16), the effect for the first operation (the effect of step-up 3) is started for the third time, and in the decorative pattern display device 208, the character of Echigoya holding a thousand boxes is the main character. The character being chased by is displayed again.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 123 (17), on the decorative symbol display device 208, an operation promotion notification image is displayed as an operation display for prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 within the valid period. This operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. At this time, in the effect button image 136P1, an operation waiting animation display is performed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 123 (17), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid.

  Then, after the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 123 (18), when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period as shown in FIG. 123 (19), FIG. 123 (20). As shown in FIG. 7, the decorative pattern display device 208 gives the effect that the character of Tonosama has caught the character of Echigoya, thereby notifying that the effect for the third one-time operation has been successful. The effect shown in FIG. 123 (20) is displayed even when the operation button 136 is not operated before the operation valid period ends, but when the operation valid period ends without any operation, A different effect (for example, an effect such that the display shown in FIG. 123 (20) is performed after the display shown in FIG. 124 (b1) described later) may be displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 123 (21), the decorative pattern display device 208 succeeds in producing one operation for three times, and thus the state of shifting to the special reach which is an advanced reach of super reach is shown. ..

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123 (22), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the display is switched to the dark display, the decorative pattern displayed in the lower left part of the display screen is left, and other displays are difficult to see. As shown at 123 (23), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an effect indicating that swordsman reach, which is an example of special reach, is started.

  In this way, the effect for the first one-time operation can be referred to as an example of the first continuous effect display in relation to the effect for the second-time one-time operation. In addition, in the relation of the effect for the first operation of the first time, the effect for the second operation of the first time can be said to be an example of the second continuous effect display, and the effect for the first operation of the third time. In relation to, it can be said as an example of the first continuous effect display. In addition, in the relation of the effect for the first time operation of the second time, the effect for the first time operation of the third time can be referred to as an example of the second continuous effect display.

  FIG. 124 (a1) to FIG. 124 (a3) are diagrams showing stepwise an example of the effect in another case following FIG. 122 (9). FIG. 124 (a1) to FIG. 124 (a3) show an example of an effect when the first one-time operation effect fails.

  FIG. 124 (a1) shows the effect that the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period in the first one-time operation effect, or that the character of the Echigoya runs away after the operation effective period ends. Is displayed. That is, it is notified that the first one-time operation effect has failed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 124 (a2), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the decorative pattern that has been variably displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen temporarily stops at “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” and shakes. It is displayed that the change is occurring.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 124 (a3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed even in the center of the display screen with the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7", and it may be lost. Be informed.

  FIG. 124 (b1) to FIG. 124 (b2) are diagrams sequentially showing an example of the effect in another case following FIG. 122 (14). FIG. 124 (b1) to FIG. 124 (b2) show examples of effects when the second-time single-use operation effect fails.

  FIG. 124 (b1) shows that the character of Echigoya puts off a thousand boxes and escapes after the effect button 136 is operated during the operation effective period in the second one-time operation effect or after the operation effective period ends. Is displayed. That is, the fact that the second one-time operation effect has failed is notified.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 124 (b2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach state by “decoration 7” is formed again, and for example, normal reach is performed. The reach effect is not limited to the normal reach, and a reach effect other than the normal reach (for example, long reach or super reach) may be performed.

  FIG. 124 (c1) to FIG. 124 (c3) are diagrams showing, in stages, an example of the effect in another case continued from FIG. 123 (19). FIG. 124 (c1) to FIG. 124 (c3) show another example of effects in the case where the third one-time operation effect is successful.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (c1), on the decorative pattern display device 208, a state in which the lord's character wears sunglasses and rides on a motorcycle to chase after the character in Echigoya is displayed. In the effect shown in FIG. 124 (c1), the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period in the third one-time operation effect, or after the operation effective period ends, the effect for the third one-time operation Although the notification that the effect has been successful is made, at this time, instead of the effect that the character of Echigoya is caught as shown in FIG. 123 (20), the character of Tonosama is the character of Echigoya as shown in FIG. 122 (15). It is an effect that shifts after performing an effect indicating that the player will chase after another, and is a premium effect (an effect of step-up 4) that is determined to be a big hit.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 124 (c2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shifts to the full-rotation reach, and displays the same decorative symbols at a low speed while maintaining a state where three identical decorative symbols are lined up.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 124 (c3), the decorative pattern display device 208 stops and displays a combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" to notify that it has been a big hit.

  Next, the relationship between the effect contents and the operation of the effect button 136 will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. Here, FIG. 125 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of the effect button 136, and FIG. 126 is the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect button 136. It is a figure explaining a relation with operation.

  In the present embodiment, the effect button 136 drives the effect button drive motor 434 in order to improve the effect of the effect, and has an operable position (first position) at which the player can press down and a player. It is possible to displace it between the inoperable position (second position) where the pressing operation by is impossible. The operable position is a position where the effect button 136 is most protruded, and the inoperable position is a position where the effect button 136 is most recessed. The inoperable position is, for example, a position where the upper end edge of a flange-shaped collar provided at the upper end of a cylindrical button case surrounding the side wall of the button body of the effect button 136 and the upper surface of the button body are flush with each other. Alternatively, the upper surface of the button body may be recessed from the upper edge of the flange. The condition for displacing the effect button 136 to the inoperable position is, for example, the case where the pressing of the effect button 136 is restricted in order to operate another effect button. After the effect button 136 is displaced to the inoperable position, when the button return condition is satisfied, the effect button drive motor 434 drives and the initial position return control is performed to return the effect button 136 from the inoperable position to the operable position. At this time, for example, the player may have pressed the effect button 136 and cannot return due to the pressing force. As a result, when the drive time of the effect button drive motor 434 elapses, the effect button 136 cannot return to the operable position and remains in the inoperable position. After that, for example, every time a return condition such as the start of the variable display of the symbol is satisfied, the initial position return control is performed, so that it is possible to avoid maintaining such a situation. .. Since the effect button 136 is determined to be in the ON state when the effect button 136 is maintained in the inoperable position, for example, while the effect for long press or the effect for continuous hitting is being performed, long press It is determined that an operation has been performed, and during the execution of the effect for one operation, it is not determined that the effect button 136 has been operated unless there is an operation from OFF to ON, so that it is virtually impossible to operate. Become.

  125 (a1) to 125 (a3) show an example in which the initial position return control is performed at the start of the symbol variation display.

  FIG. 125 (a1) corresponds to FIG. 122 (1). At this time, the effect button 136 is in a state where it has not been restored while being displaced to the inoperable position in the previous symbol variation display.

  FIG. 125 (a2) corresponds to FIG. 122 (2). The effect button 136 is still in the inoperable position. At this time, the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines the detection state of the effect button initial position sensor 427 in response to receiving the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300. At this time, since the effect button 136 is not in the initial position, the effect button initial position sensor 427 detects that the effect button 136 is not in the initial position, and the CPU 404 obtains the detection result, whereby the effect button 136 is initialized. Determine not in position. Here, the initial position of the effect button 136 is the position after the power-on operation (initial operation) performed when the power is turned on.

  After that, the CPU 404 executes the initial position returning process of returning the effect button 136 to the initial position, so that the effect button drive motor 434 is driven and the effect button 136 is moved to the initial position as shown in FIG. 125 (a3). Will be returned. Note that FIG. 125 (a3) corresponds to FIG. 122 (3). The initial position returning process is executed and the initial position returning operation is started at a timing before the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol or at the same time as the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol. It may be after the start of the decorative pattern variable display.

  125 (b1) to 125 (b3) show an example in which the initial position return control is performed when the above-mentioned Echigoya reach is being performed.

  FIG. 125 (b1) corresponds to FIG. 122 (10). That is, it is informed that the production will shift to step-up 2. At this time, the effect button 136 is displaced to the inoperable position and is not returned.

  FIG. 125 (b2) corresponds to FIG. 122 (11). That is, it is shown that the effect of the step-up 2 (second continuous effect display) is started. The effect button 136 is still in the inoperable position. At this time, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 detects the effect button initial position sensor 427 in response to receiving a return command from the second sub-control unit 500 indicating that the effect of step-up 2 has started. Determine the state. At this time, since the effect button 136 is not in the initial position, the effect button initial position sensor 427 detects that the effect button 136 is not in the initial position, and the CPU 404 obtains the detection result, whereby the effect button 136 is initialized. Determine not in position.

  After that, the CPU 404 executes the initial position returning process of returning the effect button 136 to the initial position, so that the effect button drive motor 434 is driven, and as shown in FIG. 125 (b3), for the first operation for the second time. The effect button 136 is returned to the initial position before the operation valid period in the effect of (3) is started. That is, the effect button 136 is controlled to be returned to the initial position before the operation promotion notification image is displayed. Note that FIG. 125 (b3) corresponds to FIG. 122 (12). The timing at which the initial position returning process is executed and the initial position returning operation is started is not limited to the above-described timing. For example, a return command indicating that the operation promotion notification image has been displayed may be a first sub control unit 400. The initial position returning operation may be started on the basis of the reception by. Further, in the present embodiment, the initial position returning process is executed in the step-up 2 effect, but the initial position returning process is executed in the step-up 1 effect, the step-up 3 effect, and the step-up 4 effect. You may do it.

  126 (a1) to (a3) show an example in which the initial position returning operation is not performed even though the step-up effect in the above-mentioned Echigoya reach is performed.

  FIG. 126 (a1) corresponds to FIG. 122 (4). At this time, the effect button 136 is displaced to the inoperable position and is not returned.

  FIG. 126 (a2) corresponds to FIG. 122 (5). The effect button 136 is still in the inoperable position. At this time, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 receives from the second sub-control unit 500 a return command to the effect that the effect of step-up 1 has started, but the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 Since the parts data for performing the initial position returning operation corresponding to the return command is not set, the initial position returning operation is not performed and the effect button 136 remains in the inoperable position.

  FIG. 126 (a3) corresponds to FIG. 122 (8). As described above, since the effect button 136 does not perform the initial position returning operation in step-up 1, as shown in FIG. 126 (a3), the effect button 136 is in effect while the effect of step-up 1 is being performed. 136 remains in the inoperable position. Further, when the operation valid period is started, the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a light emission mode indicating that the chance button lamp 138 is operated, but the operation of the effect button 136 cannot be performed as described above. In this case, the emission mode of the chance button lamp 138 may not be emitted in the emission mode indicating that the chance button lamp 138 is being operated, and for example, the chance button lamp 138 may be turned off.

  FIGS. 126 (b1) to 126 (b4) show the effect button 136 when the character of Echigoya has run away in the step-up 1 effect shown in FIGS. 126 (a1) to 126 (a3). An operation example is shown.

  FIG. 126 (b1) corresponds to FIG. 124 (a1). At this time, the effect button 136 is displaced to the inoperable position and is not returned.

  FIG. 126 (b2) corresponds to FIG. 124 (a2). The effect button 136 is still in the inoperable position.

  FIG. 126 (b3) corresponds to FIG. 124 (a3). The effect button 136 is still in the inoperable position. As described above, in this effect example, when the first one-time operation effect fails, the initial position returning operation is not performed in the symbol variable display. It should be noted that in this example production, the operation in the case where the first one-time operation production fails is described, but also when the second one-time operation production or the third one-time operation production fails. Similarly, the initial position returning operation may not be performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 126 (b4), when the hold is exhausted and the next symbol variation display is started, the initial position returning operation is performed in the manner shown in FIGS. 125 (a2) to (a3). Done.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not the effect button 136 is in the initial position from the detection result of the effect button initial position sensor 427 after performing the initial position returning operation. However, if it is determined that there is not, a predetermined retry control is performed. Specifically, when the CPU 404 determines that the effect button 136 is not at the initial position as a result of the first initial position returning operation, the CPU 404 performs the second initial position returning operation. This is repeated until the effect button 136 is determined to be in the initial position, and the effect button 136 is not in the initial position even though the initial position returning operation is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, the fifth time). If it is determined that there is a problem in the operation of the effect button 136, the effect button drive motor 434 is disabled and the effect button 136 is not driven until the power is cut off.

  In the present embodiment, the effect button 136 is displaced to the first position where the button projects and the second position where the button is recessed. The position can also be referred to as a first state and a second state. For example, the second position (second state) may be a position further protruding than the first position (first state), and it is difficult for the effect button 136 to be hardened and pressed. The effect button 136 may be softened and easier to press, or may be in a vibrating state without being pressed. In the case where the movable body is housed, the state in which the movable body rotates or moves may be the second state.

  Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 143.

  FIG. 127 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. Note that the effect example shown in FIG. 127 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 111, but it requires operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, whereas only the right button 137d is operated. The state of the production performed in each case is shown. Here, since the effects shown in FIGS. 127 (1) to (10) are the same as those in FIGS. 111 (1) to 111 (10), description thereof will be omitted.

  After the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 127 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 127 (10), as shown in FIG. 127 (11), one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is selected. When only the right button 137d is operated, as shown in FIG. 127 (12), the effect movable body 225 located above the decorative symbol display device 208 does not operate, and the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is also performed. The operation promotion notification image is continuously displayed without being performed (that is, the operation result presentation is not performed), and the remaining time display bar 136P2 has a display mode according to the remaining time of the operation valid period. The right button image 137dP1 may be deleted while the right button 137d is being operated. As a result, the remaining time is displayed by the remaining time display bar 136P2 continuously, so that it may be possible to know that an effective operation has not been performed yet. After that, when the operation valid period elapses without the simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, as shown in FIG. 127 (13), the animation of the duel scene is restarted without the operation result effect. After that, the display shown in FIGS. 127 (14) to (15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 127 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 111 (13) to (15). The above-described operation result effect (first operation result effect) may be performed even when the operation effective period has elapsed without simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d. An operation result effect (second operation result effect) different from the operation result effect (first operation result effect) may be performed. This is the same in the above description, and also in the following description.

  FIG. 128 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. Note that the effect example shown in FIG. 128 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 111, but operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is requested, whereas only the effect button 136 is operated. The state of the production performed in each case is shown. Here, since the effects shown in FIGS. 128 (1) to 128 (10) are the same as those in FIGS. 111 (1) to 111 (10), description thereof will be omitted.

  After the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (10), as shown in FIG. 128 (11), one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is selected. When only the production button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 128 (12), the production movable body 225 located above the decorative symbol display device 208 does not operate, and the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is also performed. The operation promotion notification image is continuously displayed without being performed (that is, the operation result presentation is not performed), and the remaining time display bar 136P2 has a display mode according to the remaining time of the operation valid period. Here, the effect button image 136P1 may be erased while the effect button 136 is being operated. As a result, the remaining time is displayed by the remaining time display bar 136P2 continuously, so that it may be possible to know that an effective operation has not been performed yet. After that, when the operation valid period elapses without the simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, as shown in FIG. 128 (13), the animation of the duel scene is restarted without the operation result effect. After that, the display shown in FIGS. 128 (14) to (15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 128 (13) to 128 (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 111 (13) to 111 (15).

  FIG. 129 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 129 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 111, but the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b are displayed corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1, respectively. It is shown. Here, since the effects shown in FIGS. 129 (1) to (7) are the same as those in FIGS. 111 (1) to 111 (7), description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 129 (7), after the production of the simultaneous operation of the chance button (production button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) (first production) is started, as shown in FIG. 129 (8). On the decorative pattern display device 208, the operation promotion notification image is displayed. The operation promotion notification image corresponds to the remaining time display bar 136P2a and the right button image 137dP1 corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 in place of the remaining time display bar 136P2 in addition to the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1. A remaining time display bar 136P2b is included. The remaining time display bar 136P2a corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 and the remaining time display bar 136P2b corresponding to the right button image 137dP1 are also displayed such that the meter decreases as the operation valid period elapses.

  Then, after the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 129 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 129 (10), as shown in FIG. 129 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are pressed. When both are operated at the same time, an operation result effect is produced as shown in FIG. 129 (12). In this example of effect, in the operation result effect, the confirmation sound for notifying the confirmation of the big hit is output from the speaker 120. Here, the confirmation sound may not be output in some cases, or the confirmation sound may be always output. Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (13), after the animation of the duel scene is restarted, the displays shown in FIGS. 129 (14) to (15) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 129 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 111 (13) to (15). As described above, in this effect example, when the final sound is output from the speaker 120, the jackpot pattern is more likely to be finalized and displayed than when the final sound is not output from the speaker 120.

  It should be noted that, in this effect example, the operation result effect is produced when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, but one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d in the operation effective period. The operation result presentation may be performed even when the other button is operated within a predetermined time after the button is operated. Here, it is preferable that the predetermined time is set to an appropriate time as an error (allowable range) of simultaneous pressing, but in the pachinko machine 100, simultaneous operation with one hand is required because the game ball is ejected. There are some cases, and it is suitable to adopt in such a case. Further, in this case, an operation result effect (second operation result effect) different from the operation result effect (first operation result effect) described above may be performed. That is, during the operation valid period, the first operation result effect is performed by the simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, and the first operation result effect is performed by operation of either the effect button 136 or the right button 137d. The second operation result presentation different from the above can be included in the present invention.

  FIG. 130 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. Note that the effect example shown in FIG. 130 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 129, but while the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is requested, only the effect button 136 is operated. The state of the production performed in each case is shown. Here, since the effects shown in FIGS. 130 (1) to 130 (10) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (1) to 129 (10), description thereof will be omitted.

  After the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 130 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 130 (10), as shown in FIG. 130 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are selected. When only the effect button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 130 (12), the operation result notification is not performed, the operation promotion notification image is continuously displayed, and the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b are displayed. In each case, the display mode is according to the remaining time of the operation valid period. Here, the effect button image 136P1 may be erased while the effect button 136 is being operated. In this case, the remaining time bar 136P2a corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 may be continuously displayed. As a result, the remaining time is displayed by the remaining time display bar 136P2a continuously, so that it may be possible to know that an effective operation has not been performed yet. Further, the remaining time display bar 136P2a may be deleted together with the effect button image 136P1. After that, when the operation valid period elapses without the simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, as shown in FIG. 130 (13), the animation of the duel scene is restarted without the operation result effect. After that, the display shown in FIGS. 130 (14) to (15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 130 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (13) to (15).

  131 is a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 130. Specifically, in FIG. 131, after the operation valid period is started, both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are requested to be operated, whereas a button different from the requested button is operated. The situation is shown.

  First, as shown in FIG. 131 (11 ′), when both the effect button 136 and the up button 137a are operated, as shown in FIG. 131 (12 ′), the operation result effect is not performed, and the operation is performed. The promotion notification image may be continuously displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 131 (11 ″), when both the effect button 136 and the upper button 137a are operated, a different type from the above-described operation result effect (for example, the first operation result effect). The operation result effect (for example, the second operation result effect) may be performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 131 (12 ″), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the character display “Gekiatsu” is displayed in the center of the display area, and 10 pandas are displayed around it. The operation result display including the display arranged so as to surround the character display is performed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 131 (11 ″ ″), even when both the effect button 136 and the upper button 137a are operated, the operation result effect described above is displayed as illustrated in FIG. 131 (12 ″ ″). May be performed. That is, in this case, it can be said that the upper button 137a different from the button (right button 137d) for which the operation is instructed corresponds to a so-called hidden command (hidden button).

  In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the example in which the production button 136 and the other direction keys are operated has been described, but it may be the case where buttons other than the direction keys and the production button 136 are operated, for example, It is configured such that at least a part of the front frame door 106 can be pressed, and when the effect button 136 and the pressing operation portion of the front frame door 106 are operated, the above-described first operation result effect is not performed. Alternatively, a second operation result effect different from the first operation result effect may be performed, or the first operation result effect may be performed. Further, a lever may be provided in place of the pressing operation portion of the front frame door 106, and the operation result as described above may be obtained by operating the effect button 136 and the lever. Further, in addition to the lever, the operation means capable of pushing in the structure can also be applied. In each of these cases, it is possible to function as a hidden button.

  FIG. 132 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of an effect for repeated hits centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 132 shows another example of the effect following FIG. 111 (6). Specifically, in FIG. 111, the operation result effect described above is performed by one simultaneous pressing operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, but in the effect example shown in FIG. 132, the effect button 136 and the right button are pressed. The operation result presentation is performed as a result of repeated hits by simultaneous operation of the buttons 137d.

  After the display shown in FIG. 111 (6) has been performed, at the timing shown in FIG. 132 (1), it is indicated that continuous hitting by simultaneous operation of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) is prompted. A continuous stroke effect of simultaneous operation including a display of “slash right key and chance button” is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 132 (2), on the decorative symbol display device 208, an operation promotion notification image that prompts simultaneous continuous operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d within the valid period is displayed. This operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 that is an image that imitates the effect button 136, a right button image 137dP1 that is an image that imitates the right button 137d, and a remaining time display bar that indicates the remaining time of the valid period. 136P2 is included. Although the operation promotion notification image has the same display mode as the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 111 (8), it may have a different display mode, for example, the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 are continuously hit. An animated display may be displayed. Further, the operation valid period in this example of performance may be a period in which the simultaneous pressing of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is required a plurality of times.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 132 (3), when the simultaneous operation is performed once or a plurality of times, as shown in FIG. 132 (4), the effect movable body 225 is moved downward little by little, and the effect movable body is moved. The lower part of 225 overlaps a part of the front surface side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the operation promotion notification image is continuously displayed. It should be noted that, whenever the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are simultaneously operated, an effect in which the effect movable body 225 vibrates is performed, and when the simultaneous operation is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), the effect movable object 225 may be moved downward. That is, the effect in which the effect movable body 225 vibrates each time the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are simultaneously operated can be referred to as an example of the operation result effect, and the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are once or plural times. The effect that the effect movable body 225 moves downward when the simultaneous operations are performed once can also be referred to as an example of the operation result effect. That is, it can be said that the operation result effects are respectively performed for effects in which the effect movable body 225 is moved little by little by simultaneously pressing the effect button 136 and the right button 137d. Note that an effect different from the operation result effect may be performed. Also, each time the production button 136 and the right button 137d are simultaneously operated, the content of the production is, for example, first operation result production> second operation result production> third operation result production ... May be configured to change each time simultaneous operations are performed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 132 (5), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are simultaneously operated once or a plurality of times at the same time, as shown in FIG. The body 225 moves further downward, and about 3/4 below the effect movable body 225 overlaps the front surface side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 132 (7), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are simultaneously operated once or a plurality of times simultaneously, as shown in FIG. 132 (8), the effect movable body 225 is displayed. Moves further downward, and the entire effect movable body 225 overlaps the front side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect display as if the effect movable body 225 is shining is displayed. That is, the same effect as in FIG. 111 (12) is performed.

  In this example of effect, the long press automatic continuous hitting function (described later) may be enabled for the effect button 136, and for example, the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated before the operation effective period is started. When the operation valid period is started after that, the operation result effect such as the effect movable body 225 vibrates is performed only once at the beginning, and thereafter, the long press automatic continuous hit function is provided. As for the right button 137d which is not operated, the operation result effect may not be performed unless the operation state is OFF> ON. In addition, after the operation valid period is started, the operation result presentation may be performed on condition that the buttons requested to be operated are OFF> ON. In such a case, For example, when the operation valid period is started while the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, the operation result effect is not performed unless the operation button 136 and the right button 137d are operated again. May be configured as. Further, when the operation effective period is started in a state where the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, the operation result effect is performed every time a pseudo continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 is performed. Good. Further, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled for the effect button 136, the timing at which the operation result effect is performed may be based on the timing at which the pseudo continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 is performed. The timing at which the player operates the right button 137d for which the long press automatic continuous hitting function is not valid may be used as a reference. Further, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the operation result effect by arbitrarily combining these.

  FIG. 133 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 133 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 129. However, in this effect example, the automatic mode can be set, and when the automatic mode is set, the effect button 136 is pressed. When the button effect for which the operation is requested is performed, even if the effect button 136 is not operated, it is assumed that the operation button 136 is operated and the operation result effect is performed. That is, in this effect example, while the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is requested, only the right button 137d is operated, but both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated. It is shown that the operation result production is being performed. Here, since the effects shown in FIGS. 133 (1) to (10) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (1) to (10), description thereof will be omitted.

  After the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 133 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 133 (10), as shown in FIG. 133 (11), among the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, When only the right button 137d is operated, an operation result effect is produced as shown in FIG. 133 (12). As described above, in this effect example, since the auto mode is set, the effect button 136 is controlled as being operated even if it is not operated. Therefore, the operation button 136 is operated by operating the right button 137d. It is controlled so that the operation result presentation is performed assuming that both 136 and the right button 137d are operated. In addition, in this effect example, the fixed sound is not output, but the fixed sound may be output in some cases. After that, as shown in FIG. 133 (13), after the animation of the duel scene is restarted, the displays shown in FIGS. 133 (14) to (15) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 133 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (13) to (15).

  FIG. 134 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. Note that the effect example shown in FIG. 134 is an effect example corresponding to FIGS. 129 (7) to (15), but in this effect example, a long press operation of the effect button 136 causes a pseudo continuous hit operation. It has a long press auto continuous hitting function. Here, the long press operation is an operation mode in which the state in which the effect button 136 is pressed is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) or more, and the continuous hit operation is the effect button 136. It is an operation mode in which the pressing operation is performed a plurality of times. The long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled or disabled depending on the content of the effect using the effect button 136. In this effect example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, and while the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the continuous hitting operation is performed at regular intervals (for example, 200 ms intervals) in a pseudo manner. Is configured. Further, in this effect example, in order to appropriately perform the single-shot operation by the effect button 136 in the effect in which the single press operation (single-shot operation) by the effect button 136 is performed, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is performed by the effect button 136. The pseudo continuous hitting operation is not started until a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms) has elapsed from the start of the pressing operation of. Here, since the effects shown in FIGS. 134 (1) to (4) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (7) to (10), description thereof will be omitted.

  After the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (3), at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (4), the right button 137d after operating the effect button 136 as shown in FIG. 134 (5). Is operated. However, since the timing when the right button 137d is operated is the timing before the pseudo continuous hitting operation is started, the effect button 136 is in the operation invalid state. Therefore, at this timing, the operation result effect is not started. After that, when the pseudo continuous hitting operation is started at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (6), the operation of the effect button 136 becomes effective, and the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated. Then, as shown in FIG. 134 (7), the operation result effect is performed. As described above, in this example of the effect, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, so when the right button 137d is operated after the effect button 136 is operated, both buttons are enabled. It will be delayed until the timing comes. In this example of the effect, the operation of the effect button 136 may not be valid when the operation of the effect button 136 is started. That is, for example, when the effect button 136 is long-pressed after operating the right button 137d, the simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 136d is not enabled at the timing when the long-press of the effect button 136 is started, and the pseudo button is pressed. The delay may be delayed until the timing at which the continuous hitting operation is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (8), after the animation of the duel scene is restarted, the displays shown in FIGS. 134 (9) to (10) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 134 (8) to (10) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (13) to (15).

  FIG. 135 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. Note that the effect example shown in FIG. 135 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 134, but in this effect example also, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is valid. In this effect example, the right button 137d is operated after the effect button 136 is operated, and both buttons are operated. However, the right button 137d is operated before the timing at which the pseudo continuous hit operation is started. A state in which the operation of the button 137d is released is shown. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 135 (1) to 135 (4) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (7) to 129 (10), so description thereof will be omitted.

  After the operation effective period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (3), at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (4), as shown in FIG. 135 (5), the production button 136 is operated and then the right button 137d. Is operated. However, at the timing when the right button 137d is operated, since the pseudo continuous hit operation is not started, the effect button 136 is disabled. Therefore, at this timing, the operation result effect is not started. After that, as shown in FIG. 135 (6), when the operation of the right button 137d is canceled before the timing of the pseudo continuous tapping operation of the effect button 136 being started, the effect button 136 and the right button are released. Both 137d are not operated, and as shown in FIG. 135 (7), the operation result notification is not performed, the operation promotion notification image is continuously displayed, and the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b are displayed. Shows a display mode according to the remaining time of the operation valid period. After that, when the operation valid period elapses without the simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, as shown in FIG. 135 (8), the animation of the duel scene is restarted without the operation result effect. After that, the display shown in FIGS. 135 (9) to 135 (10) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 135 (8) to 135 (10) are the same as those in FIGS. 130 (13) to 130 (15).

  FIG. 136 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 136 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 133. However, in this effect example, when the auto mode is set, not only the effect button 136 but also the direction keys including the right button 137d. When the button effect that requires the operation of the direction key is performed, even if the direction key is not operated, the operation result effect is performed as if the direction key was operated. That is, in this effect example, both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are requested to be operated, whereas the operation result effect is produced even when neither the effect button 136 nor the right button 137d is operated. It is shown to take place. Here, since the effects shown in FIGS. 136 (1) to (10) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (1) to 129 (10), description thereof will be omitted.

  After the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (9), when the timing shown in FIG. 136 (10) comes, whichever of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is shown in FIG. 136 (11). Even though no operation has been performed, an operation result effect is produced as shown in FIG. 136 (12). As described above, in this effect example, since the auto mode is set, the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are controlled as being operated even if they are not operated. Therefore, the effect button 136 and the right button 137d. Even if neither of the above is operated, the operation result effect is controlled so that the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated at the same time. In addition, in this effect example, the fixed sound is not output, but the fixed sound may be output in some cases. In addition, after the operation valid period is started, the timing at which the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated can be appropriately set. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 136 (13), after the animation of the duel scene is restarted, the displays shown in FIGS. 136 (14) to (15) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 136 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 133 (13) to (15).

  137 to 138 are diagrams showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. Here, FIG. 137 is another example of effect that continues from FIG. 107 (e), and FIG. 138 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the example of effect shown in FIG. 137.

  In FIG. 137 (a) continuing from FIG. 107 (e), it is shown that the variable display of decorative symbols is started.

  As shown in FIG. 137 (b), in the decorative pattern display device 208 in which the variable display of the decorative pattern has started, the effect button 136 is within the effective period (in this effect example, it may be referred to as the second effective period). An operation promotion notification image 136P that prompts the user to press the button is displayed. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the hero. The variable display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol 284 or the like. Note that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative pattern is not hidden. As described above, the operation promotion notification image 136P can be regarded as an example of the operation display regarding the operation means.

  In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 137 (c), the valid period is reduced, and in FIG. 137 (d), the player is pressing the effect button 136. Here, the effect button 136 is in a normal button state, and, for example, the chance button lamp 138 is lit in red and no operation such as vibration is performed (second button state of the effect button 136). When the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period, as shown in FIG. 137 (e), the reachable state entry notice image 2071 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the operation promotion notification image 136P. .. In the reach state entry notice image 2071, the character display "Chance" is displayed on the right side of the character image of the hero. Even if the effect button 136 is not pressed within the valid period, the display as shown in FIG. 137 (e) may be displayed or the display as shown in FIG. 137 (e). May be displayed differently, or may not be displayed as shown in FIG. 137 (e). This also applies to the one-time operation effect, the continuous hit effect, and the long-press effect. As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach state entry notice image 2071 functions as the second operation result display. In addition, in this effect example, the effect in which the operation promotion notification image 136P is displayed may be referred to as an example of the second effect. In the following description, the “operation result display” may be referred to as an “operation response display”.

  In FIG. 137 (f), the reach state entry notice image 2071 disappears, the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes visible, and thereafter, the reach state is entered as shown in FIG. It should be noted that even if the reach state entry notice image 207 is displayed, the reach state may not be entered in some cases, but it is also possible to always enter.

  As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that triggers a notice regarding the currently displayed symbol variation display. As described above, when the operation promotion notification image 136P is displayed, the jackpot pattern is configured to be displayed more easily than when the operation promotion notification image 136P is not displayed, but the jackpot pattern is easily displayed. Does not have to be configured.

  In FIG. 137 (h), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c so far, is moved to the lower right corner and is displayed in a reduced size, and in FIG. 137 (i). , Has developed into super reach (swordsman reach). The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (i) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the subsequent decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (j) shows a duel between the main character and the enemy swordsman. An animation of the scene is displayed.

  The reach state entry notice image 2071 is not limited to a notice of entering the reach state, and may be a notice of development of super reach.

  In FIG. 137 (k), the animation of the duel scene continues. In this effect example, thereafter, the effect (first effect) of simultaneous operation of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) is started at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (l). Then, as shown in FIG. 137 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are simultaneously activated within the effective period (which may be referred to as the first effective period in this effect example). An operation promotion notification image that prompts the user to enter the operated state is displayed. This operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 that is an image that imitates the effect button 136, a right button image 137dP1 that is an image that imitates the right button 137d, and a remaining time display bar that indicates the remaining time of the valid period. 136P2 is included. At this time, an operation-waiting animation display showing that the effect button image 136P1 is vibrating is displayed. At this time, the effect button image 136P1 may not be displayed as vibrating and may be a still image. In the present embodiment, in the case where the display in which the effect button image 136P1 is vibrating is performed, the jackpot pattern is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than in the case where the display in which the effect button image 136P1 is vibrating is not performed. Is becoming Note that the jackpot pattern may not be settled and displayed easily.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 137 (n), an effect button 136 (may be referred to as second operation means in this effect example) and a right button 137d (may be referred to as first operation means in this effect example). 137) is operated, as shown in FIG. 137 (o), the operation result effect shown in FIG. 137 (e) (in this effect example, sometimes referred to as the second operation result effect) Different operation result effects (sometimes referred to as the first operation result effects in this effect example) are performed. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208, an operation including a character display “Gekiatsu” in the center of the display area and a display in which 10 pandas are arranged so as to surround the character display The result is being displayed. Here, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 137 (n), when the operation effective period is started, the effect button 136 lights up in red and vibrates (first button state of the effect button 136). This may increase the player's expectation of a big hit. In the present embodiment, when the effect button 136 vibrates, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the effect button 136 does not vibrate. Note that the jackpot pattern may not be settled and displayed easily. Then, as shown in FIG. 138 (p), after the animation of the duel scene is restarted, the displays shown in FIGS. 138 (q) to 138 (r) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 138 (p) to (r) are the same as those in FIGS. 111 (13) to (15). The second operation means may be the effect button 136, the right button 137d, or another direction key. Further, the first operation means may be the right button 137d, an effect button, or another direction key.

  In this example of effect, the first button state and the second button state of the effect button 136 are different depending on the presence or absence of vibration of the effect button 136, for example, the first button state and the second button state. Then, it may be different depending on the intensity of vibration. For example, the effect button 136 may vibrate with strong vibration in the first button state, and the effect button 136 may vibrate with weak vibration in the second button state. Although the lighting mode of the chance button lamp 138 is the same in the first button state and the second button state of the effect button 136, it may be different, for example, the first button state and the second button state. The emission color may be different from that of the button state (for example, the first button state is a state in which the effect button 136 emits the first emission color, and the second button state is The effect button 136 may be in a state of emitting the second emission color.) The same emission color may be used, but the brightness may be different (for example, the first button state is the effect button 136). Is a state of emitting light at the first luminance, and the second button state may be a state of producing the effect button 136 at a second luminance lower (higher) than the first luminance). So that the number of LEDs (For example, the first button state is a state in which the number of light emission of the LEDs forming the chance button lamp 138 is the first number, and the second button state is the LED forming the chance button lamp 138. The number of emitted light may be a second number that is less (more) than the first number.). Further, although the form of the effect button 136 is the same in the first button state and the second button state of the effect button 136, they may be different, for example, in the second button state, the first button state may be different. The main body of the effect button 136 may be in a projecting position with respect to the button state, or may be in a depressed position. That is, the first button state and the second button state are included in the present invention as long as at least part of the states are different.

  Further, the state of the effect button 136 before the first effective period starts may be all the same state, or the state of the effect button 136 may change during the period other than the first effective period, For example, the state of the effect button 136 may be changed to function as a notice effect or a prefetch notice.

  Further, in this example of effect, the effect button 136 is configured to be vibrable, but for example, at least a part of the effect button 136 may be configured to be rotatable, for example, a portion of the effect button 136 that is directly operated. The button main body may be rotatable, the main body of the effect button 136 is transparent and the inside can be visually recognized, and the decorative member such as a light emitter is rotatably provided inside the main body of the effect button 136. Good. Further, a cylindrical case body that accommodates and supports the button body of the effect button 136 and is attached to the door 108 with a ball storage tray may be configured to be rotatable. In the effect button 136 configured in this manner, the first button state may be set to the rotating state, and the second button state may be set to the non-rotating state. In the first button state, The first rotation speed may be set to the rotation state, and the second button state may be set to the second rotation speed slower (faster) than the first rotation speed.

  As described above, in this effect example, any form can be applied as long as the first button state and the second button state are different.

  FIG. 139 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. Note that the effect example shown in FIG. 139 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 129, but in this effect example, the directional key vibrates when the operation valid period is started. Here, since the effects shown in FIGS. 139 (1) to (10) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (1) to (10), description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 139 (7), after the production of the simultaneous operation of the chance button (production button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) (first production) is started, as shown in FIG. 139 (8). On the decorative pattern display device 208, the operation promotion notification image is displayed. Then, after the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (10), as shown in FIG. 139 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are pressed. When both are operated at the same time, an operation result effect is produced as shown in FIG. 139 (12). In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 139 (11), the direction key vibrates when the operation valid period is started. This may increase the player's expectation of a big hit. The effect button 136 may be vibrated together with the direction key. In the present embodiment, when the direction key (right button 137d) vibrates, the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the direction key (right button 137d) does not vibrate. Note that the jackpot pattern may not be settled and displayed easily. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 139 (13), after the animation of the duel scene is restarted, the displays shown in FIGS. 139 (14) to (15) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 139 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (13) to (15).

  FIG. 140 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 140 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 129, but in this effect example, when the operation valid period is started, the chance button lamp 138 of the effect button 136 blinks in red. It is shown that the light is emitted at.

  FIG. 140 (1) corresponds to FIG. 129 (1), and an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist's lord and the enemy swordsman is displayed. As shown in FIG. 140 (1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed, and the setting screen is not displayed. In addition, in the present embodiment, while the reach is being performed in the "decoration 7", the three decorative symbols are variably displayed in the lower left part of the display screen. The three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time, for example, at the timing when the special drawing is stopped and displayed, and three combinations of symbols corresponding to the display results of the special drawing 1 or the special drawing 2 are simultaneously displayed.

  At this time, when the right button 137d is operated as shown in FIG. 140 (2), the symbol changing setting screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 140 (3). At this time, the right button 137d emits light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, red) while being operated. Moreover, the effect button 136 is lit in blue. The other buttons may be turned off or may emit light in another light emission mode (for example, white). In addition, when the left button 137c is operated, similarly, the symbol changing setting screen is displayed. The symbol changing setting screen is a display screen including a volume gauge VG. That is, the symbol changing setting screen functions as an example of the volume setting display. This symbol changing setting screen is arranged and displayed in a layer on the front side of the layer in which the effect display is being performed. Therefore, while the symbol changing setting screen is displayed, the effect display is difficult to visually recognize. Note that the volume gauge VG indicates that the volume is at the third stage among the five stages.

  When the right button 137d is operated again as shown in FIG. 140 (4) while the symbol changing setting screen is displayed, the volume is increased by one step as shown in FIG. 140 (5). In response to this, the volume gauge VG changes to a display indicating that the volume is at the fourth stage. At this time, the effect button 136 is lit in blue. The effect button 136 may be lit in red, or may be lit in blue without being lit in red. In addition, the light may be emitted in another light emission mode (for example, a mode in which the light is turned on in white). In this embodiment, the sound volume is increased by one step each time the right button 137d is operated. On the other hand, when the left button 137c is operated in the state where the volume gauge VG indicates the third stage, the volume decreases by one stage, and accordingly, the volume gauge VG indicates the second stage. The display will change to indicate that. When the right button 137d (the left button 137c) is pressed for a long time, the auto-repeat function operates while the button is pressed for a long time, and the volume is increased by one step every predetermined time (for example, 200 ms). The volume may be configured to (decrease), or the volume may not be increased (do not decrease) unless the auto repeat function is activated and the operation is performed once.

  Then, the effects shown in FIGS. 140 (6) to 140 (10) are performed. Here, since the effects shown in FIGS. 140 (6) to 140 (10) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (6) to 129 (10), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 140 (7), after the production of the simultaneous operation of the chance button (production button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) (first production) is started, as shown in FIG. 140 (8). On the decorative pattern display device 208, the operation promotion notification image is displayed. Then, after the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 140 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 140 (10), as shown in FIG. 140 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are pressed. When both are operated at the same time, an operation result effect is produced as shown in FIG. 140 (12). In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 140 (11), when the operation valid period is started, the effect button 136 emits light in a mode of blinking in red. This may increase the player's expectation of a big hit. The direction key (right button 137d) together with the effect button may be made to emit light in a state of blinking in red. Further, when the operation valid period is started, the effect button 136 may be made to always emit light in a mode of blinking in red, or may be emitted in another light emitting mode (for example, a mode of lighting in red). It may be. In addition, the effect button 136 may not necessarily emit blue light when the operation valid period is started. In the present embodiment, when the effect button 136 emits light in a red blinking mode, the jackpot pattern is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the effect button 136 does not emit a red blinking mode. .. Note that the jackpot pattern may not be settled and displayed easily. Then, as shown in FIG. 140 (13), after the animation of the duel scene is restarted, the displays shown in FIGS. 140 (14) to (15) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 140 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (13) to (15).

  FIG. 141 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. Note that the effect example shown in FIG. 141 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 129, but while operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is requested, it is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the operation promotion notification image, the operation button 136 is promoted, and the right button 137d is not notified. That is, in this effect example, at least a part of the buttons (effect button 136 and right button 137d) requesting the operation are not informed that the operation is performed, and the operation of the right button 137d functions as a hidden command. It shows that you do. Here, since the effects shown in FIGS. 141 (1) to 141 (5) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (1) to 129 (5), description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 141 (6) shows that the animation of the duel scene continues. In this effect example, thereafter, effects of simultaneous operation of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) are started at the timing shown in FIG. 141 (7). However, as shown in FIG. 141 (7), in the decorative pattern display device 208, while the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is requested, only “press the chance button” and the operation of the effect button 136 are required. Is displayed as if to request. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 141 (8), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the operation promotion notification image. The operation promotion notification image displayed here includes only the effect button image 136P1 and the remaining time display bar 136P2a corresponding to this effect button image 136P1, and the right button image 137dP1 and the remaining time display corresponding to this right button image 136dP1. Bar 136P2b is not included. Therefore, a normal player expects that a predetermined operation result effect will be produced by operating only the effect button 136. However, for example, a player who has obtained information by looking at the Internet or strategy magazines. In that case, it may be possible to expect that a special operation result effect is produced by operating the right button 137d together with the effect button 136.

  Then, after the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 141 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 141 (10), as shown in FIG. 141 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are pressed. When both are operated at the same time, the operation result effect is produced as shown in FIG. 141 (12). In this example of effect, in the operation result effect, the confirmation sound for notifying the confirmation of the big hit is output from the speaker 120. When only the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, an effect different from the effect shown in FIG. 141 (12), for example, only the effect movable body 225 is dropped and the confirmation sound is generated. You may make it produce the effect which is not output. Further, during the operation valid period, the operation result presentation may not be performed and the operation promotion notification image may be continuously displayed until both the production button 136 and the right button 137d are operated at the same time (that is, display). At least one of the effect button image 136P1 and the remaining time display bar 136P2b being displayed may not be erased). After that, as shown in FIG. 141 (13), after the animation of the duel scene is restarted, the displays shown in FIGS. 141 (14) to (15) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 141 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (13) to (15).

  FIG. 142 is a diagram showing another example of the effect shown in FIG. 141.

  FIG. 142 (6) continuing from FIG. 141 (5) shows that the duel scene animation continues. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (7), the effect of simultaneous operation of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) is started. However, as shown in FIG. 142 (7), this effect requires operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, whereas the effect shown in FIG. 141 (7) is different from the effect shown in FIG. In the device 208, no display requesting button operation is displayed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 142 (8), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the operation promotion notification image is displayed. The operation promotion notification image displayed here includes only the remaining time display bar 136P2, and does not include the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1. Therefore, a normal player who sees this may be able to recognize that the period for doing something has begun, and may give an expectation to the subsequent development of the effect. On the other hand, for example, a player who has obtained information by looking at the Internet or strategy magazines can expect that a special operation result effect is performed by operating the right button 137d together with the effect button 136. There are cases. Further, the display position of the remaining time display bar may be displayed, for example, at the same position as the position displayed when the effect button image 136P1 is displayed, to make the player think that there is something. The remaining time display bar may be conspicuous as a position of the button image or the like (for example, the center of the display screen or the like).

  Then, after the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (10), as shown in FIG. 142 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are pressed. When both are operated at the same time, an operation result effect is produced as shown in FIG. 142 (12). In this example of effect, in the operation result effect, the confirmation sound for notifying the confirmation of the big hit is output from the speaker 120. When only the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, an effect different from the effect shown in FIG. 142 (12), for example, only the effect movable body 225 is dropped, and the confirmation sound is generated. You may make it produce the effect which is not output. Then, as shown in FIG. 142 (13), after the animation of the duel scene is restarted, the displays shown in FIGS. 142 (14) to (15) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 142 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 141 (13) to (15).

  FIG. 143 is a diagram showing a modified example of the effect shown in FIG. 142.

  FIGS. 143 (8A) to (10A) correspond to FIGS. 142 (8) to (10). FIG. 143 (8A) to FIG. 143 (10A) show that the operation promotion notification image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. The operation prompting notification image displayed here includes only the remaining time display bars (136P2a, 136P2b) corresponding to the number of buttons requesting an operation, unlike FIGS. 142 (8) to 142 (10). Therefore, the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 are not included. In this way, the buttons requesting the operation (the effect button 136 and the right button 137d) are made to be hidden buttons, respectively, and the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b corresponding to the hidden buttons are displayed, so that it is possible to operate any number of buttons. It may be possible to hint to the player whether it is good or bad.

  FIGS. 143 (8B) to (10B) correspond to FIGS. 142 (8) to (10). 143 (8B) to FIG. 143 (10B) show a state in which the operation promotion notification image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. The operation prompting notification image displayed here does not include any button image or remaining time display bar, unlike FIGS. 142 (8) to 142 (10). That is, it can be said that the operation promotion notification image is not displayed. In this way, by not displaying any of the buttons (the effect button 136 and the right button 137d) requesting the operation and the remaining time display bar, it may be possible to perform an effect that is a completely hidden command. It should be noted that in this production example, the animation display of the duel scene is thinned out, so that it may be possible to indicate to the player that the hidden command is being accepted. Here, the animation display of the duel scene may not be thinned.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, an example of the effect when a plurality of buttons are operated at the same time has been described. However, for example, a touch panel is provided and the button and the touch panel are operated at the same time, or a non-contact sensor such as an infrared sensor. May be provided, and the present invention may be applied to one in which a button and a non-contact sensor are simultaneously operated.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the same button (effect button 136) is used as a button for performing a normal button operation and a button for performing a long-press automatic continuous hit, but a button for performing a normal button operation is used. Alternatively, a mode may be provided in which an effect button corresponding to an operation method is provided, such as a button for performing long-press auto continuous hitting provided separately.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, in the effect for one-time operation, an effect may be performed in which a plurality of buttons are operated at preset timings. Specifically, for example, the effect button image 136P1, the right button image 137dP1, and the remaining time display bar 136P2 are displayed as the operation promotion notification image, and the icon of the effect button 136 is displayed at a predetermined position on the gauge of the remaining time display bar 136P2. An icon of the right button 137d may be displayed to indicate the operation timing of each button, and an effect that the operation result is performed may be performed when each button is operated at an appropriate timing.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, an effect in which a long press operation and a single operation are combined may be performed. For example, the left button 137c may be long-pressed to increase the gauge, and the effect button 136 may be operated in that state to provide an operation result effect. In this case, if the effect contents are changed according to the gauge amount at the time of operating the effect button 136, the effect effect may be further improved. In addition, a combination of continuous hitting operation or long press automatic continuous hitting and one-time operation may be performed, or effect may be performed in which continuous hitting operation or long press auto continuous hitting and long pressing operation are combined. ..

  Moreover, you may make it perform the long-press simultaneous operation effect that the operation result effect is performed by performing the long-press operation with each of two or more buttons. For example, when the long-press simultaneous operation effect is started, After performing a display prompting that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d be pressed and held at the same time, a display prompting that the button that has been pressed and held is released is displayed. As a result, if the long-press simultaneous operation effect is successful, the operation result effect indicating that the operation is successful is performed, and if the simultaneous press operation operation is failed, the operation result effect indicating that the operation is failed is performed. Here, the degree of change in performance (for example, the amount of increase in gauge) is made different between when one of the two buttons that is requested to be operated is pressed and held and when both are pressed and held. May be. Furthermore, the degree of change in the effect may be different when one button is pressed for a long time and when the other button is pressed for a long time. Further, it is possible to prevent the effect from being changed unless both buttons are pressed and held. Also, when releasing the two buttons that are being pressed for a long time, the displayed contents may be different, such as when the one of the two buttons is released and when both are released, the effect in the operation result presentation is different. Alternatively, the operation result presentation may not be performed when only one of the two buttons is released, and the operation result presentation may be performed when both of the two buttons are released.

  Further, a configuration may be provided in which the operation result presentation is performed by performing a continuous hit operation or a long-press automatic continuous hit with each of two or more buttons.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one button is provided for each function of the effect buttons 136 and the operation key unit 137, but two or more buttons having the same function are provided, and as described above. It may be configured to be applicable to the embodiment. For example, a configuration in which two effect buttons are provided and three upper buttons 137a are provided, and an effect is provided by operating two effect buttons and one or a plurality of upper buttons at the same time. You may prepare. In addition to the buttons, a production lever imitating a production lever, an automobile handle, a motorcycle handle, or the like may be provided to be applicable to the above-described embodiment. A configuration may be provided in which an effect is produced by simultaneously operating the button and. Alternatively, a production dial such as a jog dial may be provided to be applicable to the above-described embodiment. For example, production is performed by simultaneously operating the production dial and other buttons. You may provide such a structure. Further, a configuration in which a plurality of effect buttons 136 having the same function but different purposes are provided may be applicable to the above-described embodiment. For example, a first effect button used in a normal effect and a second effect button used when a special effect is performed are provided, and the first effect button is operated while operating the second effect button. A configuration may be provided in which an effect is further enhanced by operating the effect button No. 1.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the eco mode (power saving mode) may be settable. In the eco mode, for example, a predetermined operation in the pachinko machine 100 (for example, operation of the effect button 136 in the customer waiting state) is performed to shift to a setting screen (an example of notification of the result of the setting operation), and this setting is performed. This can be set by appropriately operating the direction key and the enter button 137e on the screen. At this time, each time the direction key or the determination button 137e is operated, a notification to that effect (an example of notification of the result of the setting operation) may be performed. Further, when the eco mode is set, a notification to that effect (an example of the notification of the result of the setting operation) may be performed. Here, the eco mode is a decoration for the purpose of suppressing power consumption, for example, when the symbol variation display is not started by the time a predetermined period (for example, 3 minutes) has elapsed since the customer waiting demonstration display was started. In this mode, the brightness of the backlight of the symbol display device 208 is reduced, the various lamps 418 are turned off, the output from the speaker 120 is turned off, and the driving of one or more driving devices is limited or stopped. In addition, when the eco mode is set, the emission brightness and the volume of the various lamps 418 during the game may be reduced.

  Further, in this embodiment, the original (daitomo) mode may be set. In the original mode, for example, a predetermined operation in the pachinko machine 100 (for example, an operation of the effect button 136 in the customer waiting state) is performed to shift to a setting screen (an example of notification of the result of the setting operation), and this setting is performed. This can be set by appropriately operating the direction key and the enter button 137e on the screen. The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 77 may be provided with an original mode selection switch that switches whether the original mode is valid or invalid. This original mode selection switch is operated by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 100 when the pachinko machine 100 is shipped from the factory, or by a clerk at a pachinko machine installation store. The original mode selection switch may be made inoperable after shipment by caulking the portion of the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 where the original mode selection switch is provided. That is, since the player cannot operate the original mode selection switch, it is preferable that only a limited number of people such as a manufacturer person and a store clerk can operate the original mode selection switch.

  In the original mode, a game table in which the original mode can be set, and history information of the result of playing the game in the original mode is stored in the game table. On the gaming machine, various benefits (for example, effects with a low appearance rate, execution of effects showing information on the profit of the game, etc.) are given according to the history information. When ending the game in which the original mode is set, the individual setting information, which is the individual information of the player, including the history information stored in the game table, is input to the server. Every time the game in which the original mode is set is finished, the gaming machine issues individual setting information including new history information in which the history of the game is reflected. When the player inputs individual setting information including new history information to the server, the individual setting information stored on the server side is updated. By inputting the individual setting information stored in the server to the game table at the time of playing the next game, the privilege corresponding to the history information included in the input individual setting information is given at the time of the next game. This individual setting information is included in the encrypted password having a predetermined number of digits and is exchanged between the gaming table-the player (external device) and the server. The individual setting information also includes a model code that identifies the model of the game table, and the corresponding model code is stored in the game table. In the specification that history information can be used in common between different models, there are multiple corresponding model codes, and in the specification that history information can be used only between the same model, there is only one corresponding model code. ..

  In the original mode, when a password is entered to store the player's history information in the pachinko machine 100, for example, a predetermined direction key (for example, the right button 137d) is pressed on the screen for setting the original mode. By operating, it is possible to transit to the password input screen. On the password input screen, for example, while looking at the display screen of the mobile phone terminal or smartphone to which the password has been transmitted, operate the direction key to move to the position of the desired character, and press the effect button 136 or the decision button 137e. By doing, the input character is determined. When a predetermined operation (for example, an input completion operation using the direction key and the enter button 137e) is performed after the password input of a predetermined number of characters (for example, five characters) is completed, the input password is the password of the pachinko machine 100. 1 is transmitted to the sub control unit 400.

  Further, in the case of initializing the player history information stored in the pachinko machine 100 as described above, for example, a predetermined direction key (for example, the left button 137c) on the screen for setting the original mode. The operation may be performed by operating. In this case, the player's history information may be initialized after displaying a warning message to confirm whether or not the player's history information may be deleted from the pachinko machine 100.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it may be possible to set whether to turn on or turn off the above-described auto mode function. For the setting of the auto mode, for example, a predetermined operation in the pachinko machine 100 (for example, an operation of the effect button 136 in the customer waiting state) is performed to shift to the setting screen (an example of notification of the result of the setting operation), On this setting screen, it can be set by appropriately operating the direction key and the enter button 137e. Further, for example, the setting may be made possible by performing a predetermined operation in the pachinko machine 100 (for example, operation of the determination button 137e in the customer waiting state), or by using a direction key other than the determination button 137e. It may be one that can be set. For example, the auto mode function may be switched between the ON state and the OFF state each time the enter button 137e is operated in the customer waiting state.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the time may be set. For the time setting, for example, a predetermined operation in the pachinko machine 100 (for example, operation of the effect button 136 in the customer waiting state) is performed to shift to a setting screen (an example of notification of the result of the setting operation), and this setting is performed. This can be set by appropriately operating the direction key and the enter button 137e on the screen. When the screen is changed to the time setting screen as described above, the time can be changed by operating the direction keys, for example.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled only for the effect button 136, or each button (upper button 137a, lower button 137b, left button 137c, right button 137d that constitutes a direction key together with the effect button 136. The long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be valid for any one or more of the decision button 137e and the cancel button 317f).

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the setting operation (for example, the first setting operation) is performed by operating one button (for example, the right button 137d) that constitutes the directional key. A setting operation different from the first setting operation (for example, the second setting operation) may be configured by simultaneous operation of two buttons (for example, the left button 137c and the right button 137d). The character of the password can be selected by operating the button 137c, and the entered password can be all cleared by simultaneously operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d. Further, the setting operation may be possible by simultaneously pressing the effect button 136 and the direction key.

  Further, in the present embodiment, for example, the long press continuous hitting function and the automatic mode are disabled only when a special effect such as a button effect requesting simultaneous pressing of two or more buttons is performed. May be done. Further, even when the hidden command can be accepted, the automatic continuous hitting function and the automatic mode may be disabled. According to this, the existence of the hidden command may be kept secret to a normal player. Further, even when the hidden command can be accepted, the long press automatic continuous hitting function or the automatic mode may be enabled. According to this, it may be possible to inform the normal player of the existence of the hidden command.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the operation result effect has been described as being performed while the reach effect is being executed, but it may be during the variable display of symbols before the reach effect is started, or the reach effect is not performed. It may be displayed during symbol fluctuation display, during re-lottery effect that is performed after the temporary stop of decorative symbols, during promotion of lottery symbols for decorative symbols during jackpots, or probability variation lottery. It may be during production, or may be applied to various notifications or presentations such as notification of pre-reading notice.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, for example, BGM may be selected (song selection), and for example, in the setting screen that can be shifted while waiting for a customer, a directional key or the effect button 136 is used to select a song. It may be configured to be able to. The song selection may be changed, for example, during the big hit start production or during the big hit game, and the song may be selected by the direction key or the production button 136. In this case, for example, the display of the song name that is changed by operating the direction key and the notification that the song selection has been finalized by operating the effect button 136 can be an example of the notification of the result of the setting operation. There are cases.

In the above description,
“First operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an enter button 137e, etc.],
A second operation means [for example, a production button 136 or the like] that can be operated by the player;
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
A gaming machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display is a volume setting display [for example, a symbol variation setting screen shown in FIG. 111 (3), a volume setting screen shown in FIG. 115 (e), etc.],
One of the plurality of types of display is a first operation result display [for example, the effect display shown in FIG. 111 (12), FIG. 112 (c5), or FIG. 114 (i)],
The volume setting display is a display that may be displayed in response to the operation of the first operation means [for example, as shown in FIG. 111 (2), the right button is pressed during the symbol variation display. When 137d is operated, a symbol changing setting screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 111 (3)],
The first operation result display is a display that may be displayed in response to both of the first operation means and the second operation means being operated [for example, in FIG. As shown, when the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, as shown in FIG. 111 (12), the effect movable body 225 moves to the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decoration. In the symbol display device 208, an effect display as if the production movable body 225 is shining is performed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table characterized by the display means.

  Further, according to this gaming table, the display contents when the first operating means is operated and when the plurality of operating means are operated can be made different, so that the variation of the display according to the operation can be increased and the player It may be possible to improve the interest of.

  Here, the first operation means may be operable only by the player, or may be operable by other than the player. In addition, the first operation means may be always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player in some cases.

  The second operation means may be operable only by the player, or may be operable by anyone other than the player. The second operation means may be always operated by the player, or may not be operable by the player.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the volume setting display and the first operation result display, or may be capable of displaying other than the volume setting display and the first operation result display. .. Further, the display means may always display the volume setting display and the first operation result display, or may not display the volume setting display and the first operation result display.

  Further, the volume setting display may be displayed only in response to the operation of the first operating means, or in response to the operation other than the operation of the first operating means. It may be displayed as. Further, the volume setting display may be always displayed in response to the operation of the first operating means, or may not be displayed in response to the operation of the first operating means. May be.

  Further, the first operation result display may be displayed only in response to both the first operation means and the second operation means being operated, or the first operation result may be displayed. There may be a case where it is displayed in response to something other than the operation of both the means and the second operation means. Further, the first operation result display may be always displayed in response to the operation of both the first operation means and the second operation means, or the first operation means and the second operation means. There may be a case where the two operation means are not displayed in response to the operation of both.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the volume setting display, the brightness setting display, the display setting display of the display means (decorative pattern display device 208, the liquid crystal display device, etc.), and the character selection for selecting the character to appear in the game Display, music selection display to select BGM, mode selection display to select the production mode during the game, user mode display to enter the password etc. to inherit the game history of the player can be displayed May be configured. That is, it can be said that the volume setting display is an example of a rendering means capable of setting a set value by a setting operation.

  Here, as the type of display setting of the display means, for example, the brightness adjustment of the backlight of the LCD, the color temperature adjustment, the black level adjustment (brightness adjustment of the black portion of the image), and the white level adjustment (image Brightness adjustment of the white part), color density adjustment, hue adjustment, sharpness (image outline) adjustment, resolution adjustment, and the like. Further, when the sound output means is configured to include a high-pitched speaker and a low-pitched speaker, the volume of only the low tone, the volume of only the high tone, and the balance of the high and low tones are included in the settings related to the sound output means. May be.

  Further, the display performed in response to the operation of the first operation means is not limited to the setting display, and may be the effect display. For example, when the right button 137d is operated while two treasure boxes are displayed side by side, the treasure box on the right side is opened to acquire an item, or the left button 137c is pressed to select one of the two left and right routes. When operated, it is also possible to perform an effect display in which the left route is selected.

In addition, during the period in which the “first effect [for example, effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d shown in FIG. 111 (6) to FIG. 111 (12), etc.] is performed, the first operation means is performed. [For example, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an enter button 137e and the like] and the second operation means [for example, the effect button 136 and the like] are operated, The first operation result display is configured to be displayed [for example, in the production of the simultaneous operation of the production button 136 and the right button 137d shown in FIGS. 111 (6) to (12), the production button 136 and When the right button 137d is simultaneously operated, an effect display as shown in FIG. 111 (12) is displayed, etc.],
The volume setting display is not displayed even if the first operation means is operated during the period in which the first effect is performed [for example, effect of simultaneous operation shown in FIG. 111 (6)]. Is started, the volume setting is prohibited, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also described.

  According to this gaming machine, in the period in which the first effect is performed, the volume setting display is not displayed even if the second operating means is operated during the operation of the first operating means. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent the player from unintentionally displaying the volume adjustment display while the player is being watched, and concentrate on the first effect.

  Here, the first operation result display is displayed only when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated in the period in which the first effect is performed. Alternatively, it may be displayed in response to the operation of both the first operation means and the second operation means in a period other than the period in which the first effect is performed. Further, the first operation result display may be always displayed in response to the operation of both the first operation means and the second operation means during the period in which the first effect is performed. Good, it may not be displayed in response to the operation of both the first operation means and the second operation means during the period in which the first effect is performed.

  Further, the volume setting display may not be displayed only when the first operation means is operated in the period in which the first effect is performed, or may be displayed in the period in which the first effect is performed. It may not necessarily be displayed when one operation means is operated.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a second operation result display [for example, reach state entry notice image 2071 shown in FIG. 107 (j)],
The second operation result display is a display that may be displayed in response to the operation of the second operation means [for example, as shown in FIGS. 107 (g) to 107 (j). , The reach state entry notice image 2071 may be displayed when the production button 135 is pressed within the operation valid period],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the second operation result display may be displayed only in response to the operation of the second operation means, or other than the operation of the second operation means. It may be displayed according to the above. Further, the second operation result display may be always displayed in response to the operation of the second operation means, or may not be displayed in response to the operation of the second operation means. There may be cases.

In addition, during the period in which "the second effect [for example, an effect in which the operation promotion notification image 136P shown in FIGS. The second operation result display is configured to be displayed in response to being performed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the second operation result display may be displayed only in response to the operation of the second operation means in the period in which the second effect is performed, or the second effect. There may be a case where the display is made in response to a matter other than the operation of the second operation means during the period in which the operation was performed. Further, the second operation result display may be always displayed in response to the operation of the second operation means during the period in which the second effect is performed, or the second effect is displayed. During the period in which the operation is performed, it may not be displayed in response to the operation of the second operation unit.

  In the period in which the second effect is performed, the second operation result display may be displayed even when the first operation means is operated in addition to the second operation means, and the second operation result may be displayed. A display different from the result display (for example, back button display) may be displayed.

  Further, in a period other than the period in which the second effect is performed, the second operation result display may be displayed in response to the operation of the second operation unit, or the second operation. An operation result display different from the result display may be displayed.

In addition, in the period in which the second effect is performed, the first operation result display is not displayed even if both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 116 (f) to 116 (g), when the effect button 136 is operated, even if the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated at the same time, the operation result No production, no change in volume, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, in the first operation result display, the first operation result display is displayed even if both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated in the period in which the second effect is performed. In some cases, the first operation result display is displayed when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated in a period other than the period in which the second effect is performed. There may be cases where

In addition, "One of the plurality of types of display is a first operation display,
The first operation display is a display relating to operations of both the first operation means and the second operation means [for example, the chance button and the right key shown in FIGS. 111 (7) to 111 (10)). Production that encourages simultaneous operations, etc.]
The first operation result display is a display that is displayed until both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the first operation result display may be displayed only until both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, or the first operation means and the second operation means may be displayed. It may be displayed other than until both of the operation means are operated. Further, the first operation result display may be always displayed until both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, or the first operation means and the second operation means. It may not be displayed until both of the means are operated.

  Note that the first operation display may be displayed during the first effect, but the first operation display may not be displayed during the second effect. In this case, a predetermined operation result effect (for example, back button effect) may be performed when the first operation device and the second operation device are operated.

  In addition to the first effect, the first operation display may be performed. For example, in the tutorial effect that is performed while the symbol variation display is displayed, "When the chance button and the right key are pressed, the hot effect is displayed. The first operation display may be performed at a timing that is completely different from the timing at which the first operation means and the second operation means can be operated, such as a display such as “may be displayed”. Further, in this tutorial effect, a display explaining the period during which the back button effect is executed and the operating method of the operating means at that time may be displayed.

In addition, "the first operation display is a display urging to operate both the first operation means and the second operation means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “a door body [for example, the front frame door 106 or the like] is provided, and the door body is provided with the first operation means and the second operation means,
It is configured so that the player can simultaneously operate the first operation means and the second operation means with one hand [for example, as shown in FIG. 74, a ball provided on the front frame door 106]. The effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 are provided close to each other on the upper surface of the door 108 with the storage dish, and the player can operate the effect button 136 and each button constituting the operation key unit 137 with one hand. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since the two operating means are located at positions that are easy to operate even during the firing operation, it is possible to easily perform simultaneous operation of both operating means with one hand, and get used to operating the operating means. It may be possible to make it easier for even non-players to participate.

  Here, the door body may be provided with only the first operating means and the second operating means, or may be provided with something other than the first operating means and the second operating means. Good. Further, the door may be necessarily provided with the first operating means and the second operating means, or even if the first operating means and the second operating means are not provided in some cases. Good.

  Further, in addition to the first operation means and the second operation means, there may be one that can be simultaneously operated by the player with one hand.

In addition, "the second operating means is an operating means having a larger size than the first operating means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  In other words, it can be said that the second operating means is an operating means having a wider operable surface than the first operating means.

  The first operating means may be smaller than the second operating means, or the first operating means and the second operating means may have the same size.

In addition, “production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500, etc.] is provided,
The effect control means is means capable of executing control relating to the operation of the first operation means when the first operation means is operated [for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control section. As shown in FIG. 90, the control unit 500 performs control according to the operation of each button forming the operation key unit 137, etc.],
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control relating to the operation of the second operation means when the second operation means is operated [for example, the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control section 400]. As shown in FIG. 90, the control unit 500 performs control according to the operation of the effect button 136, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the effect control means may be capable of executing only the control relating to the operation of the first operation means when the operation of the first operation means is performed, or the operation of the first operation means. If there is, it may be possible to execute control other than the control related to the operation of the first operation means. Further, the effect control means may necessarily execute control relating to the operation of the first operation means when the operation of the first operation means is performed, or the operation of the first operation means may be performed. In this case, the control related to the operation of the first operation means may not be executed.

  Further, the effect control means may be capable of executing only control relating to the operation of the second operation means when the second operation means is operated, or the operation of the second operation means is If so, control other than the control related to the operation of the second operation unit may be executable. Further, the effect control means may necessarily execute control relating to the operation of the second operation means when the second operation means is operated, or the operation of the second operation means may be performed. In this case, the control related to the operation of the second operation means may not be executed.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
"Operating means [for example, effect button 136 or the like] operable by a player,
Drive means for driving the operation means [for example, an effect button drive motor 434],
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
A gaming machine equipped with
The drive means controls the operating means to have a first position [for example, an operable position shown in FIG. 125 (a3)] and a second position [for example, an inoperable position shown in FIG. 125 (a1). Etc.] is a means that can be displaced between
One of the plurality of types of display is a display related to the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “operation display [for example, operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 125 (b3)]”),
When the operation means is at a position different from the first position at the timing before the operation display is displayed, the operation means may be displaced to the first position. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 125 (b2) to 125 (b3), when the effect button 136 is at a position different from the operable position (initial position), the initial position returning operation is performed to perform the operation promotion notification image. Return the effect button 136 to the operable position before is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the operating means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the operating means.

  Further, according to this gaming table, the movable means in the second state is transformed into the first state before the operation display is displayed, so that the operation effective period of the operation means is started in advance. In some cases, it can be grasped by the player.

  Here, the operation means may be operable only by the player, or may be operable by other than the player. Further, the operating means may be always operated by the player, or may not be operable by the player.

  Further, the driving means may be capable of driving only the operating means, or may be capable of driving other than the operating means. Further, the driving means may drive the operating means without fail, or may not drive the operating means.

  Further, the display means may display only the operation display, or may display other than the operation display. Further, the display means may always display the operation display, or may not display the operation display.

  Further, the driving means may be capable of displacing the operating means only between the first position and the second position, and the operating means may be moved between the first position and the second position. It is also possible to be able to displace other than the interval. Further, the driving means may be a means that always displaces the operating means between the first position and the second position, or displaces the operating means between the first position and the second position. It may not be allowed.

  Further, the operation means may be configured to be displaced to the first position only when the operation means is different from the first position at the timing before the operation display is displayed. It may be configured such that the operation unit may be displaced to the first position at a timing before the display is displayed, except when the operation unit is different from the first position. Further, the operation means may be configured to be displaced to the first position without fail when the operation means is different from the first position at the timing before the operation display is displayed. At the timing before the operation, the operation unit may not be displaced to the first position when the operation unit is different from the first position.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a first continuous effect display [for example, the effect of step-up 1 shown in FIGS. 126 (a1) to (a3)]
One of the plurality of types of display is a second continuous production display [for example, production of step-up 2 shown in FIGS. 125 (b1) to 125 (b3)],
In one symbol variation display, it is configured such that both the first continuous effect display and the second continuous effect display may be displayed,
The second continuous effect display is a display displayed after the first continuous effect display,
The operation display is a display that is displayed during the period in which the first continuous effect display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 126 (a3), the operation promotion notification image is displayed in the step-up 1 effect]. Etc.],
The operation display is a display that is displayed during the period in which the second continuous effect display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 125 (b3), the operation promotion notification image is displayed in the effect of step up 2). Etc.],
When the operation means is in the second position at a timing from the display of the second continuous effect display to the start of the display of the operation display, the operation means is the first position. It is configured to be displaced to the position [for example, as shown in FIGS. 125 (b1) to 125 (b3), before the operation promotion notification image is displayed after the effect of step up 2 is started. The effect button 136 is returned to the initial position, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the player may be able to know in advance that the second operation display will be displayed in the second continuous effect display.

  Further, according to this gaming table, it is possible to know in advance that the second time of the continuous effect display will be displayed by the displacement state of the operating means, so that it may be possible to give the player an expectation for the change. ..

  Here, the display means may be configured to be capable of displaying only both the first continuous effect display and the second continuous effect display, or other than both the first continuous effect display and the second continuous effect display. May also be configured to be displayable. Further, the display means may be configured to always display both the first continuous effect display and the second continuous effect display, and at least one of the first continuous effect display and the second continuous effect display. There may be a case where either one is not displayed.

  Further, the second continuous effect display may be a display that is displayed only after the first continuous effect display, and may be displayed after a display other than the first continuous effect display. Good. Moreover, the second continuous effect display may be a display that is always displayed after the first continuous effect display, or may not be displayed after the first continuous effect display.

  Further, the operation display may be displayed only during the period in which the first continuous effect display is displayed, or when it is displayed in a period other than the period in which the first continuous effect display is displayed. There may be. Further, the operation display may be always displayed in the period in which the first continuous effect display is displayed, or may not be displayed in the period in which the first continuous effect display is displayed. Good.

  Further, the operation means is displaced to the first position only when the operation means is at the second position at the timing from the time when the second continuous effect display is displayed until the time when the operation display is started. May be configured to, and at the timing between the display of the second continuous effect display and the start of the display of the operation display, the operation means is in the second position except when the operation means is in the second position. It may be configured to be displaced to one position. Further, the operation means is always displaced to the first position when the operation means is at the second position at the timing from the time the second continuous effect display is displayed until the operation display is started. May be configured to, in the timing from the display of the second continuous effect display until the display of the operation display is started, when the operation means is in the second position. The position may not be displaced.

In addition, “production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500, etc.] is provided,
The first position is an initial position [eg, the operable position shown in FIG. 125 (a3)],
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control for displacing the operation means to the first position (hereinafter, referred to as “initial position return control”),
The effect control unit is a unit capable of executing the initial position return control when the operation unit is not in the first position at a timing before the display of the operation display is started [eg, FIG. 125. As shown in (b2) to (b3) of the figure, before the operation promotion notification image is displayed, if the effect button 136 is not in the initial position, the initial position return control is performed, etc.]. Stand. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, by performing the initial position returning operation for the "movable means not in the initial position" before the operation acceptance period starts, it is possible to give a misunderstanding that the movable means is not in the initial position. Sometimes it can be prevented.

  Further, according to this gaming table, the effect control means executes the initial position returning control, so that it may be possible to reduce the control load of the main control portion.

  Here, the effect control means may be capable of executing only the initial position return control, or may be capable of executing controls other than the initial position return control. Further, the effect control means may always execute the initial position return control, or may not execute the initial position return control.

  Further, the effect control means may be capable of executing the initial position return control only when the operation means is not in the first position at the timing before the display of the operation display is started. At a timing before the display of the display is started, the initial position return control may be executed in addition to the case where the operation means is not at the first position.

Further, “provided with a detection unit [for example, the effect button initial position sensor 427 or the like] capable of detecting that the operation unit is in the first position,
The effect control means can execute the initial position return control when the detection means detects that the operation means is not in the first position at a timing before the display of the operation display is started. Is a means
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to accurately grasp that the operating means is not in the first position.

  Here, the detecting means may be capable of detecting only that the operating means is at the first position, or may be capable of detecting the operating means at a position other than the first position. Further, the detection means may be one that always detects that the operation means is at the first position, or may not detect that the operation means is at the first position.

  Further, the effect control means can execute the initial position return control only when the detection means detects that the operation means is not in the first position at the timing before the display of the operation display is started. The initial position return control may be executed except when the detecting means detects that the operating means is not in the first position at the timing before the display of the operation display is started. It may be. In addition, the production control means, when the detection means detects that the operation means is not in the first position at the timing before the display of the operation display is started, always executes the initial position return control. Alternatively, the initial position return control may not be executed when the detection unit detects that the operation unit is not in the first position at the timing before the display of the operation display is started. ..

In addition, "the effect control means is a means capable of executing retry control,
The retry control is control for executing the initial position return control again when it is determined that the operating means is not in the first position even after executing the initial position return control. ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the effect control means may be capable of executing only the retry control, or may be capable of executing other than the retry control. Further, the effect control means may always execute the retry control, or may not execute the retry control.

In addition, “the first position is a position at which the player can operate the operation means [for example, an operable position or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the first position may be a position at which only the player can operate the operation means, or a position at which the operation means can be operated by anyone other than the player. Further, the first position may be a position where the player always operates the operation means, or the player may not operate the operation means.

In addition, “the second position [for example, an inoperable position, etc.] is a position at which the player cannot operate the operating means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  The second position is a position at which the player can operate the operating means, and may be a position different from the first position.

In addition, "when the symbol variation display is started, if the operation means is at a position different from the first position [for example, an inoperable position], the operation means is displaced to the first position. Is configured as
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the operation means is returned to the initial position at the start of the symbol variation display, so that the operation means is brought into the initial position state r when performing the effect of bringing the operation means to the second state. Sometimes it can be easier to get started.

  Further, according to this gaming table, it is possible to prevent the operation means from being in the initial position in a plurality of symbol variable displays, and to make it easier for the game shop staff to determine whether or not a malfunction has occurred. There is.

  Further, according to this gaming table, by performing the initial position returning operation at the time of starting the pattern variation, when operating in the range overlapping with the range in which the other effect movable body rotates, contact with the other effect movable body is made. Sometimes it can be easier to prevent.

In addition, “the operation display is a display that prompts the user to operate the operation means [for example, an operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 125 (b3)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
"Operating means [for example, effect button 136 or the like] operable by a player,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
A gaming machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display is the first effect display [for example, in the effect for continuous hitting shown in FIG. 120 (g), the remaining number of pandas to be defeated according to the operation of the effect button 136. Is displayed, etc.]
The first effect display is a display that may be displayed during the first operation effective period [for example, the operation effective period in the effect for repeated hits],
The first operation valid period is a period during which the operation of the operation means is valid, and the timing at which the long press operation is started in the first operation valid period (hereinafter, “first timing [eg, FIG. 117 (B), etc.] ”))) and a long time-depressing operation by the operating means is continued for a first time [for example, time T1 for transmitting a liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting, etc.]. ] Depending on what is done, the first effect display may be displayed,
Depending on that the long press operation is continued for a second time from the second timing in the first operation effective period, the first effect display may be displayed,
The second timing is a timing that the long press operation is continued after the first timing and the first time is performed,
The first time and the second time are different,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table characterized by the display means.

  Further, according to this gaming table, the time from the timing when the long press operation is started and the time from the timing when the time has elapsed can be different from each other at the timing at which the first effect display is displayed, It may be possible to entertain the player by preventing the timing at which the effect is displayed from becoming monotonous.

  Here, the operation means may be operable only by the player, or may be operable by other than the player. Further, the operating means may be always operated by the player, or may not be operable by the player.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first effect display. Further, the display means may always display the first effect display, or may not display the first effect display.

  Further, the first effect display may be a display that may be displayed only during the first operation valid period, or may be displayed during a period other than the first operation valid period. Further, the first effect display may be always displayed during the first operation effective period, or may not be displayed during the first operation effective period.

Further, the first effect display may be configured to be displayed only in response to the long press operation by the operating means being continued for the first time from the first timing. However, it may be configured to be displayed in response to something other than that the long press operation by the operation means is continuously performed from the first timing for the first time, or The one effect display may be configured to be always displayed in response to the long press operation by the operating means being continued for the first time from the first timing, or Depending on the fact that the long press operation by the operating means is continuously performed from the one timing for the first time, it may be configured not to be displayed,
In addition, the first demonstration display is displayed only when the long press operation is continued from the second timing in the first operation valid period and is performed for the second time. In some cases, the long-press operation is continued from the second timing in the first operation effective period, and the first effect display is performed in response to something other than the second time. May be displayed. In addition, the first effect display is always displayed in response to the long press operation being continued for the second time from the second timing in the first operation effective period. The first effect display may not be displayed in response to the long press operation being continued for the second time from the second timing in the first operation effective period. It may be.

  In addition, the first time and the second time may be the same or different, the first time may be longer, the second time may be longer. Good.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a first result display [eg, operation result effect shown in FIG. 119 (n) or FIG. 120 (n)],
The first result display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the first operation valid period is started [for example, shown in FIG. 119 (n). As described above, by continuously hitting the effect button 136, an operation result effect in which the bancho character throws the panda away is displayed, etc.],
The first result display is a display that may be displayed even when the long press operation is performed after the first operation valid period is started [eg, FIG. 120 (n)]. As shown in, the operation result effect of the bancho character throwing the panda away is also displayed by pressing and holding the effect button 136, etc.],
The first effect display is a display that may be displayed in response to the operation of the operation means during the first operation effective period,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the first result display may be displayed even if a continuous hit operation or a long press operation is performed, so that the player may be able to arbitrarily select an operation method. .. That is, a player who knows that the first result display is displayed regardless of whether the player continuously hits the player or presses the key for a long time. A player who does not know this may be able to enjoy a little because he / she does not perform repeated hits. That is, since there is an element that allows the player to play the game well, it may be possible to promote participation in the game.

  Here, the first result display may be displayed only when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the first operation valid period is started, or the first operation is displayed. It may be displayed in a case other than the case where the operation means is repeatedly hit after the effective period is started. Further, the first result display may be always displayed when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the first operation valid period is started, or the first operation valid period is started. There may be a case where the display is not displayed when the operation means is repeatedly hit after being displayed.

  The first result display may be displayed only when a long press operation is performed after the first operation valid period is started, or the first operation display may be performed. It may be displayed in a case other than the case where the long press operation is performed after the effective period is started. Further, the first result display may be always displayed when a long press operation is performed after the first operation effective period is started, or the first operation effective period is After the start, it may not be displayed when a long press operation is performed.

  Further, the first effect display may be displayed only in response to the operation means being operated during the first operation effective period, or the operation means may be displayed during the first operation effective period. It may be displayed in accordance with something other than the operation. Further, the first effect display may be always displayed in response to the operation means being operated in the first operation effective period, or the operation means may be displayed in the first operation effective period. It may not be displayed depending on the operation.

In addition, “One of the plurality of types of displays is a continuous hitting operation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 119 (c) to (m), by repeatedly hitting the effect button 136, the mission is performed. Is displayed, which indicates that there is a possibility that it will be a big hit, and "let's push down all the pandas with repeated button hits" is displayed, and the production buttons 136 are pushed repeatedly to encourage all the pandas to be pushed within the valid operation period. A series of displays, etc. on which an operation promotion notification image is displayed],
The repeated hit operation display is a display for prompting continuous hits on the operation means,
The first operation effective period is configured to be started after the continuous tapping operation display is started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible for the player to easily recognize that the continuous hit operation display is performed.

In addition, “One of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display [for example, a display in which the display of the swordsman is reduced while the display of the lord is enlarged, as shown in FIG. 121 (g), etc. ],
The second effect display is a display that may be displayed during a second operation effective period [for example, an operation effective period in an effect for long-pressing],
The second operation valid period is a period during which the operation of the operating means is valid,
The second operation valid period is a period different from the first operation valid period,
From the timing (hereinafter, referred to as “third timing”) at which the long press operation is started in the second operation valid period, the long press operation continues for a third time [for example, a liquid crystal for long press. The time until the command is transmitted T3, etc.] In some cases, the second effect display may be displayed,
The second effect display is a display that is displayed only when the long press operation is continued after the third timing comes and is not performed for the third time [for example, shown in FIG. 121 (g). , The display of the lord's display is enlarged while the display image of the swordsman is reduced until the time T3 elapses after the operation of the effect button 136, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even when the same long-press operation is performed, the timing at which the effect display is displayed is different depending on the effect. Therefore, there are cases where it is possible to entertain variations for the effect display by providing variations in the display timing. is there.

  According to this gaming table, a player accustomed to playing the game can display the first effect display or the second effect display depending on the time until the effect display is displayed. It may be possible to grasp and to entertain the operation.

  Here, the second effect display may be a display that may be displayed only during the second operation valid period, or may be displayed during a period other than the second operation valid period. Good. Further, the second effect display may be always displayed during the second operation valid period, or may not be displayed during the second operation valid period.

  Further, the second operation valid period may be a period during which only the operation of the operating means is valid, or a period during which the operation other than the operation of the operating means is valid. Further, it may be a period during which the operation of the operation means is always valid, or the operation of the operation means may not be valid.

  Further, the second effect display may be displayed only when the long press operation is continued for a third time from the third timing, or It may be displayed in response to something other than that the long press operation is continued from the timing of and the third time is performed. In addition, the second effect display may be always displayed in response to the long press operation being continued for a third time from the third timing, or from the third timing. It may not be displayed in response to the long press operation being continuously performed for the third time.

In addition, “One of the plurality of types of displays is a long press operation display [for example, an operation promotion notification for promoting the long press operation of the effect button 136 shown in FIGS. 121 (c) to 121 (h). Image display, etc.]
The long press operation display is a display urging that the operation means is long pressed,
The second operation valid period is configured to be started after the long-press operation display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 121 (c) to 121 (d), operation promotion notification The operation valid period has started after the image is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since the second operation effective period is started after the long press operation display is seen, it may be possible to sufficiently secure the period in which the long press operation can be performed.

  Here, the second operation valid period may be configured to be able to start only after the long-press operation display is started, or may be configured to be able to be started even after the long-press operation display is started. May be. The second operation valid period may be configured to always start after the long press operation display is started, or may not be started after the long press operation display is started.

In addition, "One of the plurality of types of display is a second result display [for example, operation result effect by long-press operation],
The second result display is a display that may be displayed when the long press operation is performed after the second operation valid period is started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the second result display may be displayed only when a long press operation is performed after the second operation effective period is started, or the second result display may be performed. It may be displayed other than when the long press operation is performed after the operation valid period is started. Further, the second result display may be always displayed when a long press operation is performed after the second operation effective period is started, or the second operation effective period is After the start, it may not be displayed when a long press operation is performed.

Also, “the first time [eg, the time T1 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hits is transmitted] after the first timing [eg, the timing of A1 in FIG. 117 (B)] is reached. In response to the operation means being operated again before the elapse, the first effect display [for example, in the effect for continuous hitting shown in FIG. 120 (g), the operation button 136 is pushed down. Display that reduces the number of remaining pandas that should be displayed, etc.] may be displayed.
It is configured such that the first effect display is not displayed until the first time elapses in a state where the long press operation is continuously performed after the first timing. A gaming table characterized by. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, even if the first effect display may be displayed only in response to the operation means being operated again before the first time has elapsed from the first timing, Alternatively, it may be displayed in response to the operation means being operated again before the first time has elapsed after the first timing. Further, the first effect display may be always displayed in response to the operation means being operated again before the first time has elapsed from the first timing, or There may be a case where the display is not displayed in response to the operation means being operated again before the first time elapses after the first timing.

  Here, the first effect display may be configured not to be displayed until only the first time elapses in a state where the long press operation is continuously performed after the first timing. The display may not be displayed even when a time other than the first time elapses in a state where the long press operation is continuously performed after the first timing. Further, the first effect display may be configured to be always displayed when the first time elapses in a state where the long press operation is continuously performed after the first timing. The display may not be displayed even after the first time has elapsed in the state where the long press operation is continuously performed after the first timing.

In addition, “production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500, etc.] is provided,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control relating to the long press operation in response to the long press operation,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to reduce the control load of the main control unit.

  Here, the effect control means may execute only the control related to the long press operation according to the long press operation, or may execute the control other than the control related to the long press operation according to the long press operation. It may be one. Further, the effect control means may always execute the control related to the long press operation according to the long press operation, or may not execute the control related to the long press operation according to the long press operation. Good.

In addition, “a symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variable display [eg, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided,
The first operation valid period is a period started during the display of the symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variable display, or may be capable of displaying other than the symbol variable display. Further, the symbol display means may always display the symbol variable display, or may not display the symbol variable display.

In addition, "the first time is longer than the second time,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to prevent the first effect display from being unintentionally displayed.

  The first time may be shorter than the second time, or the first time and the second time may be the same.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
“First operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an enter button 137e, etc.],
A second operation means [for example, a production button 136 or the like] that can be operated by the player;
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
A gaming machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display is a volume setting display [for example, the volume gauge VG shown in FIG. 111 (3) or FIG. 115 (e)],
One of the plurality of types of display is an operation result display [for example, the effect display shown in FIG. 111 (12), FIG. 112 (c5), or FIG. 114 (i)].
A volume setting operation by the first operating means [for example, a volume setting operation by the left button 137c or the right button 137d shown in FIGS. 111 (4) and 115 (f), etc.] is possible.
The display mode of the volume setting display is changed by performing the volume setting operation while the volume setting display is displayed [for example, FIG. 111 (3) to FIG. 115 (e) to (g), when the right button 137d is operated while the volume gauge VG in the third stage display mode is displayed, the volume gauge VG changes from the third stage display mode. Change to the display mode of the fourth stage, etc.],
In the first valid period, the operation result display is configured to be displayed when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated [eg, When the production button 136 and the right button 137d are both operated as shown in FIG. 111 (11), the production movable body 225 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 as shown in FIG. 111 (12). While moving to the front side of the screen, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an effect such that the effect movable body 225 is shining, etc.],
The first valid period is a period during which both the operation of the first operating unit and the operation of the second operating unit are valid [for example, the right button 137d at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (9). A period in which the operation and the operation of the effect button 136 are respectively valid (operation valid period) is started, or a period in which both the right button 137d and the effect button 136 are operated is effective (operation valid period) Is started, etc.]
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

Further, “One of the plurality of types of displays is a display whose display mode changes according to the passage of the first valid period (hereinafter,“ first valid period display [eg, FIG. 111 (8) To the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 112 (10) and the remaining time display bar 136P2a, 136P2b shown in FIG. 112 (b1).
In the first effective period, even if only the first operation means is operated, the change of the display mode of the first effective period display is configured to continue [for example, FIG. 112 (b1). -As shown in the same figure (b3) and FIG. 113 (a1), even if the production button 136 is not operated and only the right button 137d is operated, the meters of the remaining time display bars 136P2, 136P2a, 136P2b continue to operate. Decreasing, etc.],
Even if only the second operation means is operated during the first effective period, the display mode of the first effective period display continues to change [for example, the right button 137d is operated. Even if only the effect button 136 is operated, the meters of the remaining time display bars 136P2, 136P2a, 136P2b continue to decrease, etc.],
In the first valid period, both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, so that the display of the first valid period display is terminated. [For example, as shown in FIG. 111 (10) to FIG. 112 (12) and FIG. 112 (c3) to FIG. 112 (c5), both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated during the operation effective period. When it is operated, the remaining time display bars 136P2, 136P2a, 136P2b are erased, and effect display as if the effect movable body 225 is shining is performed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "One of the plurality of types of display is an operation prompt display,
The operation prompting display is a display prompting to operate both the first operating means and the second operating means [for example, shown in FIG. 111 (8), FIG. 112 (b1), or FIG. 113 (1). The operation promotion notification image or the like for prompting that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are simultaneously operated within the effective period].
The first effective period is configured to be started after the display of the operation promotion display is started [for example, after the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 111 (8) is displayed, 111 (9), the operation valid period is started at the timing, etc.],
The operation promoting display is an image simulating the first operation means (hereinafter, “first operation image [eg, the right operation image shown in FIG. 111 (8), FIG. 112 (b1), or FIG. 113 (1), Right button image 137dP1 etc. imitating the button 137d] ”).
The operation promotion display is an image simulating the second operation means (hereinafter, “second operation image [for example, the effect shown in FIG. 111 (8), FIG. 112 (b1), or FIG. 113 (1). Display button image 136P1 or the like imitating the button 136] ").
The first effective period display corresponding to the first operation image [for example, the remaining time display bar 136P2b displayed corresponding to the right button image 137dP1 shown in FIG. 112 (b1)], The first effective period display corresponding to the second operation image [for example, the remaining time display bar 136P2a displayed corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 shown in FIG. 112 (b1)] is displayed. Is composed of,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “a configuration is such that the display of the first valid period display is terminated by the operation of the second operating unit during the operation of the first operating unit during the first valid period. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 112 (c1) to (c5), when the effect button 136 is operated while the right button 137d is operated, the remaining time display bar 136P2 is erased and the effect is movable. The effect display is displayed as if the body 225 is shining, etc.],
In the first effective period, the operation of the second operating device is performed during the operation of the second operating device, so that the display of the first effective period display is finished. [For example, when the right button 137d is operated while the effect button 136 is operated, the remaining time display bar 136P2 is erased and the effect display as if the effect movable body 225 is shining is displayed.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "One of the plurality of types of display is an operation prompt display,
The operation prompting display is a display prompting to operate both the first operating means and the second operating means [for example, shown in FIG. 111 (8), FIG. 112 (b1), or FIG. 113 (1). The operation promotion notification image or the like for prompting that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are simultaneously operated within the effective period].
The first effective period is configured to be started after the display of the operation promotion display is started [for example, after the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 111 (8) is displayed, 111 (9), the operation valid period is started at the timing, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variable display [eg, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided,
The first valid period is a period started during execution of the symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 111 (9) to FIG. (12), or FIG. As shown in FIG. 113 (a1) to FIG. 113 (a2), the operation valid period has started during the variable display of special figure 1 or special figure 2, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the volume setting display is configured to start to be displayed in response to the operation of the first operation means during the second effective period [for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. (3), when the right button 137d or the left button 137c is operated during the operation valid period for volume setting, the volume gauge VG is displayed, etc.],
The second valid period is a period during which the volume setting operation is valid.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the first valid period and the second valid period do not overlap [for example, as shown in FIGS. 111 (7) to 111 (15), since the button operation promotion display is started, Until the symbol variation display ends, the display of the symbol variation setting screen including the volume gauge VG is prohibited, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the operation result display is configured to be displayed by the operation of the second operation device during the operation of the first operation device during the first valid period [for example, As shown in FIGS. 112 (c1) to 112 (c5), when the effect button 136 is operated while the right button 137d is operated, an effect display as if the effect movable body 225 is shining is performed, etc. ],
During the first valid period, the operation result display is displayed by operating the first operating means during the operation of the second operating means [for example, a production button When the right button 137d is operated while operating 136, an effect display as if the effect movable body 225 is shining is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, while the volume setting display is being displayed, the display mode of the volume setting display is configured not to change even when the volume setting operation is performed while the second operation unit is being operated. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 116 (f) to 116 (g), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, the volume is not changed, etc.] Characteristic game table. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “a door body [for example, front frame door 106, etc.] is provided,
The door body is provided with the first operating means and the second operating means,
It is configured so that the player can simultaneously operate the first operation means and the second operation means with one hand [for example, as shown in FIG. 74, a ball provided on the front frame door 106]. The effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 are provided close to each other on the upper surface of the door 108 with the storage dish, and the player can operate the effect button 136 and each button constituting the operation key unit 137 with one hand. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500, etc.] is provided,
The effect control means is means capable of executing control relating to the operation of the first operation means when the first operation means is operated [for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control section. As shown in FIG. 90, the control unit 500 performs control according to the operation of each button forming the operation key unit 137, etc.],
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control relating to the operation of the second operation means when the second operation means is operated [for example, the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control section 400]. As shown in FIG. 90, the control unit 500 performs control according to the operation of the effect button 136, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
"A plurality of operating means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, effect button 136, upper button 137a, lower button 137b, left button 137c, right button 137d, enter button 137e, cancel button 137f, and the like],
Production means capable of executing a plurality of types of production [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 120, production movable bodies 224, 225, various lamps 418, etc.],
A gaming machine equipped with
One of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means [for example, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an enter button 137e, a cancel button 137f, etc.].
One of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means [for example, the effect button 136 or the like],
By the operation of the first operation means, the setting relating to the game table is configured [for example, as shown in FIG. 111 (2) to FIG. 111 (3) or FIG. 127 (2) to FIG. When the right button 137d is operated during the symbol variation display, a symbol variation setting screen including the volume gauge VG is displayed, or FIG. 111 (4) to FIG. 111 (5) or FIG. 127 (4) to As shown in FIG. 5 (5), if the right button 137d is operated while the symbol changing setting screen is displayed, the volume is increased by one step, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, the operation result effect shown in FIG. 111 (12)],
The first effect may be executed when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated [for example, FIG. 111. If both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are simultaneously operated as shown in (11), an operation result effect may be performed as shown in FIG. 111 (12), etc.],
It is configured such that the first effect is not executed when only one of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 127 (11 128), when only the right button 137d of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated, the operation result effect is not performed, as shown in FIG. 11), when only the effect button 136 of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated, the operation result effect is not performed as shown in FIG. 128 (12)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the rendering means, but according to this gaming table, it is possible to provide a gaming table having a feature in the rendering means.

  Further, according to this gaming table, the first effect is not performed only by the operation of one of the first operating means and the second operating means, which makes it easy for the player to search for a complicated operation. You may be able to. In addition, this may give the player a sense of achievement.

  Here, each of the plurality of operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate. Good. Further, the plurality of operating means may be provided at positions where the player can always operate, or may be provided at positions where the player may not be able to operate.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effects, or may be capable of executing an effect other than a plurality of types of effects. In addition, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of productions, or may not execute a plurality of types of productions.

  Further, as the production means, a display means, a sound output means, a light emitting means, a movable body, or a means for displaying a design by causing a light guide plate to emit light, and the like can be appropriately used. Further, the production means such as a combination of the display means and the sound output means, a combination of the display means and the light emitting means may be configured by a plurality of means.

  Also, only the settings relating to the gaming table may be configured to be possible by operating the first operating means, or other settings than those relating to the gaming table may be configured to be possible by operating the first operating means. .. Further, it may be configured such that the setting related to the gaming table is always performed by operating the first operating means, or the setting related to the gaming table may not be possible by operating the first operating means. ..

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect. In addition, the production means may always execute the first production, or may not execute the first production.

  Further, the first effect may be executed only when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, and the first effect may be executed. The first effect may be executed in a case other than the case where both the operating means and the second operating means are in the operated state. Further, when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, the first effect may be configured to be executed without fail. The first effect may not be executed when both the first and second operation means are operated.

  Further, when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, it may be configured such that only the first effect may be executed. When both of the operation means and the second operation means are operated, the effect other than the first effect may be executed.

  Further, in a state in which only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, it may be configured such that only the first effect is not executed. When only one of the operation means and the second operation means is operated, the effect other than the first effect may not be executed. Further, in a state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is being operated, the first effect may be configured not to be executed without fail, The first effect may be executed when only one of the operating means and the second operating means is being operated.

In addition, “a display unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like] is provided,
The first effect is configured to be executed when both the first operation means and the second operation means are in an operated state in the first effective period. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 111 (7) to 111 (12), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated within the operation valid period, the effect movable body 225 displays the decorative pattern. While moving to the front side of the display screen of the device 208, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect display as if the effect movable body 225 is shining is performed, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 111 (8)],
The first display is a display urging to operate both the first operation means and the second operation means,
The first display is a display including an image imitating the first operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “first image [eg, right button image 137dP1 etc. shown in FIG. 111 (8)]”). Yes,
The first display is a display including an image imitating the second operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “second image [for example, effect button image 136P1 etc. shown in FIG. 111 (8)]”). Yes,
The first display is a validity period display relating to the first validity period [for example, the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 111 (8) or the remaining time display bars 136P2a, 136P2b shown in FIG. 129 (8). Etc.] is included in the display.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, by providing the first effective period, it is possible to increase the difficulty level of operating the plurality of operating means, and thus it may be possible to increase the sense of achievement.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of display, or may not display a plurality of types of display.

  In addition, the first effect is configured to be executed only when both the first operation means and the second operation means are in the operated state in the first effective period. It may be configured to be executed in a case other than the case where both the first operating means and the second operating means are in the operated state during the first effective period. May be. Further, the first effect may be configured to be executed without fail when both the first operating device and the second operating device are operated during the first effective period. However, it may be configured such that it may not be executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are in the operated state during the first valid period.

  In addition, the first effect is configured to be executed only during the first effective period when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated. It may also be configured to be executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are in an operated state even during an effective period other than the first effective period. May be done.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first display. Further, the display means may always display the first display, or may not display the first display.

  Further, the first display may be a display that prompts only to operate both the first operation means and the second operation means, or both the first operation means and the second operation means. It may be a display prompting other than operation.

  Further, the first display may be a display including only the first image, the second image, and the valid period display, or may include a display other than the first image, the second image, and the valid period display. It may be a display. Further, the first display may be a display that always includes the first image, the second image, and the valid period display, or may not include the first image, the second image, and the valid period display. It may be.

In addition, “the first image is an image that does not disappear when only the first operating unit of the first operating unit and the second operating unit is operated [for example, FIG. 127 ( 11) to (12) in the figure, the right button image 137dP1 is not deleted when only the right button 137d of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated, etc.],
The second image is an image that does not disappear when only the second operating unit of the first operating unit and the second operating unit is operated [for example, FIG. 128 (11)- As shown in (12) of the figure, the effect button image 136P1 is not deleted when only the effect button 136 of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated, etc.],
The first image is an image that may disappear when both the first operating unit and the second operating unit are operated [for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. (12), the right button image 137dP1 is deleted when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, etc.],
The second image is an image that may disappear when both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated [for example, FIG. 111 (11) to As shown in the figure (12), the effect button image 136P1 is deleted when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, neither the first image simulating the first operation means nor the second image simulating the second operation means is erased when only one operation means is operated. As a result, it can be notified that effective operation is not performed. Therefore, it may be possible to effectively prompt the player to operate the plurality of operating means.

  Here, the first image may disappear when an operating means other than the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, or the first operating means and the second operating means may be deleted. It does not have to be erased even when an operation means other than is operated.

  In addition, the second image may disappear when an operating means other than the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, or other than the first operating means and the second operating means. Even if the operating means is operated, it may not disappear.

  In addition, the first image may disappear only when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, and the first image may be It may be erased even when both the operating means and the second operating means are in the operated state. Further, the first image may disappear without fail when both the first operating means and the second operating means are in the operated state, and the first operating means There may be a case where it does not disappear when both of the second operating means are operated.

  Further, the second image may disappear only when both the first operation means and the second operation means are in an operated state, It may be erased even when both the operating means and the second operating means are in the operated state. Further, the second image may disappear without fail when both the first operating means and the second operating means are in an operated state, There may be a case where it does not disappear when both of the second operating means are operated.

In addition, “the first display includes only one valid period display [for example, as shown in FIG. 111 (8), the remaining time display bar 136P2 is 1 in the operation promotion notification image. Etc.]
The effective period display is a display that indicates the remaining period of the first effective period [for example, the remaining time display bar 136P2 is displayed in a display mode according to the remaining time of the operation effective period, etc.],
The valid period display is a display that may disappear when both the first operating device and the second operating device are operated [for example, FIG. 111 (11) to FIG. As shown in (12), the remaining time display bar 136P2 is erased when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since it may disappear when both the first operation means and the second operation means are in an operated state, it is possible to make the user aware that an effective operation has been performed. Sometimes you can.

  Here, the valid period display may indicate only the remaining period of the first valid period, or may indicate something other than the remaining period of the first valid period. Further, the valid period display may necessarily indicate the remaining period of the first valid period, or may not indicate the remaining period of the first valid period.

  Further, the valid period display may notify the remaining period of the first valid period.

  Further, the effective period display may disappear only when both the first operating means and the second operating means are in an operated state, and the first operating means and It may be erased even when both of the second operating means are not being operated. Further, the effective period display may disappear without fail when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, or the first operation means and the second operation means There may be a case where it is not erased when both of the operating means are operated.

In addition, “the valid period display is a display that does not disappear when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated [eg, FIG. 127 (11)- As shown in FIG. 12 (12) and FIGS. 128 (11) to (12), the remaining time display bar 136P2 is displayed when only the right button 137d of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated. It is not erased when only the production button 136 is operated, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the valid period display does not disappear when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, so that the effective operation is not performed. In some cases, it is possible to notify the player, and therefore, it may be possible to prompt the player to appropriately operate the first operation means and the second operation means.

  Here, the valid period display may disappear when an operating means other than the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, or other than the first operating means and the second operating means. Even if the operating means is operated, it may not disappear.

In addition, “the first display includes two of the valid period displays [for example, as shown in FIG. 129 (8), the operation promotion notification image includes remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b. Two included, etc.],
The valid period display is a display indicating the remaining period of the first valid period [for example, the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b are displayed in a display mode according to the remaining time of the operation valid period, etc.]. ,
One of the two valid period displays (hereinafter, referred to as “two valid period displays”) is one of the valid period displays corresponding to the first operation means (hereinafter, “first valid period display [eg, 129 (8) shown in FIG. 129 (8), the remaining time display bar 136P2b, etc. displayed corresponding to the right button image 137dP1] ”.
One of the two effective period displays is an effective period display corresponding to the second operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "second effective period display [for example, the effect button image shown in FIG. 129 (8). The remaining time display bar 136P2a etc. displayed corresponding to 136P1] ").
The first valid period display is a display that may disappear when both the first operating means and the second operating means are in operation [eg, FIG. 129 (11) ~ As shown in (12) of the figure, the remaining time display bar 136P2b is erased when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, etc.],
The second effective period display is a display that may disappear when both the first operation means and the second operation means are in the operated state [for example, FIG. 129 (11)). ~ As shown in (12) of the figure, the remaining time display bar 136P2a is erased when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  If it is configured that only the effective period display corresponding to the operated operation means disappears, it is mistaken that the player performed an appropriate operation when operating each operation method without performing an appropriate operation. According to this gaming machine, the first valid period display and the second valid period are displayed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are in operation. Since the display is configured to disappear, it may be possible to recognize that a valid operation has been performed.

  Here, the first display may include only two valid period displays, or may include three or more valid period displays.

  Further, the valid period display may indicate only the remaining period of the first valid period, or may indicate something other than the remaining period of the first valid period. Further, the valid period display may necessarily indicate the remaining period of the first valid period, or may not indicate the remaining period of the first valid period.

  Further, the valid period display may notify the remaining period of the first valid period.

  Further, the first effective period display may disappear only when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, and It may disappear even when the operating means and the second operating means are both in the operated state. Further, the first effective period display may be always disappeared when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, and the first operating means and There may be a case where it does not disappear when both of the second operating means are operated.

  Further, the second effective period display may disappear only when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, It may disappear even when the operating means and the second operating means are both in the operated state. Further, the second valid period display may disappear without fail when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, and the first operating means and There may be a case where it does not disappear when both of the second operating means are operated.

In addition, “the first valid period display is a display that does not disappear when only the first operating unit of the first operating unit and the second operating unit is operated [for example, The time display bar 136P2b is not erased when only the right button 137d of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated],
The first valid period display is a display that does not disappear when only the second operating unit of the first operating unit and the second operating unit is operated [eg, FIG. )-(12) in the same figure, the remaining time display bar 136P2b is not erased when only the effect button 136 of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated],
The second valid period display is a display that does not disappear when only the first operating means of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated [for example, the remaining time display bar 136P2a is not erased when only the right button 137d of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated, etc.],
The second valid period display is a display that does not disappear when only the second operating unit of the first operating unit and the second operating unit is operated [eg, FIG. )-(12) in the figure, the remaining time display bar 136P2a is not erased when only the effect button 136 of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated, etc.]. Game table. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, neither the first valid period display nor the second valid period display disappears. It may be possible to inform that the effective operation is not performed, and therefore, it may be possible to prompt the player to appropriately perform the operation of the first operation means and the second operation means.

  Here, the first effective period display may disappear when an operating means other than the first operating means and the second operating means may be operated, or the first operating means and the second operating means may be displayed. It does not have to be erased even when an operation means other than the operation means is operated.

  Further, the second effective period display may disappear when the operating means other than the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, and the first operating means and the second operating means may be displayed. It may not disappear even when an operating means other than the means is operated.

In addition, “the first effective period is a period during which both the operation of the first operation unit and the operation of the second operation unit are effective [for example, shown in FIG. 111 (9)]. At a timing, a period (operation valid period) during which the operation of the right button 137d and the operation of the effect button 136 are respectively effective is started, or both the right button 137d and the effect button 136 are operated. Period (operation valid period) starts],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the first valid period may be a period during which only both the operation of the first operating means and the operation of the second operating means are valid, or the operation of the first operating means and the second It may be a period during which the operation of the operation means other than both the operations of the operation means is valid. Further, the first effective period may be a period in which both the operation of the first operation means and the operation of the second operation means are always effective, or the operation of the first operation means and the second operation means. There may be a case where neither of the operations of the operation means is valid.

In addition, “the first effective period is configured to be started after the display of the first display is started [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 127 (8) is displayed. After that, the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 127 (9)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be easier to recognize that the first valid period is started.

  Here, it may be configured such that only the first valid period is started after the display of the first display is started, or after the display of the first display is started, The valid period other than the valid period of may be configured to start. The first valid period may be configured to always start after the display of the first display is started, or the first valid period may be configured to start after the display of the first display is started. It may be configured such that the validity period may not start.

  Further, the first effective period may be configured to be started only after the display of the first display is started, or even after the display of the first display is started. May be configured to start.

In addition, “the setting regarding the gaming table” is “setting for executing the power saving mode [e.g., eco mode]”.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the setting regarding the game table" is "time setting", the game table characterized by the above. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variable display [eg, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided,
The first effect is an effect that may be started during execution of the symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 111 (12), variation display of special figure 1 or special figure 2 Operation result production has started in the middle, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the first effect is performed during the symbol variation display, so that it can be applied to, for example, a notice effect, and the expectation for a big hit may be increased.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the variable display of symbols, or may be capable of executing a display other than the variable display of symbols. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the symbol variable display, or may not execute the symbol variable display.

  Further, the first effect may be that the execution may be started only while the symbol variable display is being executed, or the execution may be started other than during the symbol variable display. May be Further, the first effect may be that the execution is always started during the execution of the symbol variation display, or the execution may not be started during the execution of the symbol variation display.

In addition, "the first operation means is a button,
The second operation means is a button,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the operability of the first operating device and the second operating device may be improved in some cases.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the gaming table is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
“Providing a plurality of operation means provided at a position operable by the player [for example, effect button 136, up button 137a, down button 137b, left button 137c, right button 137d, enter button 137e, cancel button 137f, etc.] It ’s a game console,
One of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means [for example, the effect button 136 or the like],
One of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means [for example, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an enter button 137e, a cancel button 137f, and the like]. Is configured to be executable,
One of the plurality of types of notifications is a first notification [for example, the operation result effect shown in FIG. 111 (12)],
One of the plurality of types of notifications is the second notification [for example, deletion of the symbol changing setting screen shown in FIG. 111 (5), or reach state entry notice image shown in FIG. 107 (i). 2071 etc.],
The first notification may be executed when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated in the first effective period. [For example, as shown in FIG. 111 (11), if both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated at the same time during the operation valid period, the operation result effect shown in FIG. 111 (12) is performed. Etc.],
In the first valid period, in a state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, the first notification is configured not to be executed. [For example, when only the right button 137d of the effect buttons 136 and the right buttons 137d is operated in the operation valid period as shown in FIG. 127 (11), as shown in FIG. 127 (12), No operation result effect is produced, or, as shown in FIG. 128 (11), when only the effect button 136 of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated, as shown in FIG. 128 (12). , No operation result production is performed],
In the second valid period, when the first operation means is operated, the second notification may be executed [for example, the symbol shown in FIG. 111 (5) When the effect button 136 is operated while the changing setting screen is displayed, the volume may be set to the set value and the symbol changing setting screen may be deleted, or as shown in FIG. 107 (i). As described above, when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, the reach state entry notice image 2071 shown in FIG. 107 (j) may be displayed],
The first valid period and the second valid period are different periods [for example, as shown in FIGS. 111 (7) to 111 (15), since the button operation promotion display is started, the symbol concerned) Until the variable display is finished, the display of the symbol changing setting screen including the volume gauge VG is prohibited, or the operation valid period shown in FIGS. 107 (g) to (j) and the figure 111 (7) to (12) in the same figure are different periods, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the operating means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the operating means.

  Further, according to this gaming table, the first notification is not executed only by the operation of one of the first operating means and the second operating means, which makes it easier for the player to search for a complicated operation. You may be able to. In addition, this may give the player a sense of achievement.

  Here, each of the plurality of operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate. Good. Further, the plurality of operating means may be provided at positions where the player can always operate, or may be provided at positions where the player may not be able to operate.

  In addition, only a plurality of types of notifications may be configured to be executable, a plurality of types of notifications may be configured to be executed without fail, or a plurality of types of notifications may not be performed.

  Further, in the first valid period, the first notification may be executed only when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated. Alternatively, the first notification may be executed even in a case other than the case where both the first operation means and the second operation means are in the operated state. Good. Further, the first notification may be executed without fail when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated in the first effective period. However, when both the first operation means and the second operation means are in the operated state, the first notification may not be executed.

  Further, it is configured such that only the first notification may be executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated in the first valid period. Alternatively, when both the first operation means and the second operation means are in the operated state, it may be configured such that notification other than the first notification may be executed. Good.

  Further, in the first effective period, when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, only the first effect is configured not to be executed. Alternatively, in a state in which only one of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated, the effect other than the first effect may not be executed. Further, in a state in which only one of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated, the first effect may be configured not to be executed, The first effect may be executed when only one of the operating means and the second operating means is being operated.

  In the second valid period, the second notification may be executed only when the first operating means is operated, or the first operating means is operated. The second notification may be executed in a case other than the case described above. Further, in the second valid period, the second notification may be configured to be executed without fail when the first operating means is operated, or when the first operating means is operated. The second notification may not be executed in some cases.

In addition, “providing a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of production [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, speaker 120, production movable bodies 224, 225, various lamps 418, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, the operation result effect shown in FIG. 111 (12)],
The first notification is the first effect,
The second notification is a notification of the result of the setting operation [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated while the symbol changing setting screen shown in FIG. 111 (5) is operated, the volume is set to the set value. It is decided, and the design change in-use setting screen is erased, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where the first operating means can be utilized for different purposes.

  Here, the production means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of productions, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of productions. In addition, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of productions, or may not execute a plurality of types of productions.

In addition, “providing a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of production [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, speaker 120, production movable bodies 224, 225, various lamps 418, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, the operation result effect shown in FIG. 111 (12)],
One of the plurality of types of effects is the second effect [for example, the reach state entry notice image 2071 shown in FIG. 107 (i)],
The first effect and the second effect are different effects,
The first notification is the first effect,
The second notification is the second effect,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where the first operating means can be shared by different effects.

  Here, the production means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of productions, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of productions. In addition, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of productions, or may not execute a plurality of types of productions.

In addition, "the first operation means is an operation means capable of changing to a plurality of states,
The state of the first operating means in the first valid period may differ from the state of the first operating means in the second valid period [eg, as shown in FIG. 137 (n), During the first effective period, the effect button 136 lights up in red by the chance button lamp 138 and vibrates, while as shown in FIG. 137 (d), during the second effective period, the effect button 136 changes the chance. The button lamp 138 lights up in red, and no operation such as vibration is performed.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where it is possible to recognize a difference in required operation between the first valid period and the second valid period due to the difference in the state of the first operating means.

  Here, the first operating means may be changeable only to a plurality of states, or may be changeable to a state other than the plurality of states. Further, the first operating means may be one that always changes to a plurality of states, or may not change to a plurality of states.

  Further, there may be a case where only the state of the first operating means in the first effective period and the state of the first operating means in the second effective period are different, or the first operation in the first effective period. The state of the means and the state other than the state of the first operating means in the second effective period may be different. Further, the state of the first operating means in the first effective period may be different from the state of the first operating means in the second effective period without fail, and the state of the first operating means in the first effective period may be different. There may be cases where the states of the first operating means in the second valid period do not differ from those in the second valid period.

In addition, “one of the plurality of states is the first state [eg, as shown in FIG. 137 (n), the effect button 136 is lit in red by the chance button lamp 138 and is vibrating. State etc.]
One of the plurality of states is a second state [for example, as shown in FIG. 137 (d), the production button 136 is illuminated in red by the chance button lamp 138, and an operation such as vibration is performed. It has not been forgotten]
The first state and the second state are different states,
The first operating means is an operating means that is more likely to be in the first state than in the second state during the first valid period [eg, as shown in FIG. 137 (n), In the effective period, the effect button 136 lights up in red and vibrates due to the chance button lamp 138, etc.],
The first operating means is an operating means that is more likely to be in the second state than in the first state during the second effective period [for example, as shown in FIG. In the effective period, the production button 136 is lit in red by the chance button lamp 138, and the operation such as vibration is not performed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to recognize the necessity of operating a plurality of operating means by vibrating the first operating means.

  Here, the first operation means may be in the first state or may be in the second state during the first effective period. Further, the first operation means may be in the first state or may be in the second state during the second effective period. Further, the first operation means may be always in the first state or may not be always in the second state during the first effective period. Further, the first operation means may be always in the second state or may not be always in the first state during the second effective period.

In addition, “a plurality of light emitting means [for example, various lamps 418, etc.] are provided,
One of the plurality of light emitting means is a first light emitting means [for example, a chance button lamp 138 or the like],
The first light emitting means is a light emitting means provided in the first operating means,
The first light emitting means is a light emitting means capable of emitting light in a plurality of types of light emitting patterns,
One of the plurality of types of light emission patterns is a first light emission pattern [eg, a light emission pattern in which a chance button lamp 138 flashes in red as shown in FIG. 140 (11)]. Yes,
One of the plurality of types of light emission patterns is a second light emission pattern [eg, a light emission pattern in which the chance button lamp 138 emits light in blue as shown in FIG. 140 (4)]. Yes,
The first light emission pattern and the second light emission pattern are different light emission patterns,
The first state is a state in which the first light emitting means emits light in the first light emitting pattern,
The second state is a state in which the first light emitting means emits light in the second light emitting pattern,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to recognize the necessity of operating the plurality of operating means by the light emission pattern of the first operating means.

  Here, the first light emitting means may emit light only in a plurality of types of light emitting patterns, or may emit light in a light emitting pattern other than the plurality of types of light emitting patterns. Further, the first light emitting means may always emit light in a plurality of types of light emitting patterns, or may not emit light in a plurality of types of light emitting patterns.

In addition, "the first operation means is an operation means at least a part of which is configured to be vibrable,
The first state is a state in which at least a part of the first operating means is vibrating [for example, a state in which the effect button 136 is vibrating as shown in FIG. 137 (n)]. ,
The second state is a state in which the first operating means does not vibrate [for example, a state in which the effect button 136 does not vibrate as shown in FIG. 137 (d)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to recognize the necessity of operating a plurality of operating means by vibrating the first operating means.

  Here, a part of the first operating means may be configured to be capable of vibrating, or all of the first operating means may be configured to be capable of vibrating. In addition, at least a part of the first operating means may be configured to be vibrable, or at least a part other than the part may be configured to be vibrable. Further, the first operating means may be configured such that at least a part thereof always vibrates, or at least a part thereof may not vibrate.

In addition, "the first operating means is an operating means at least a part of which is configured to be rotatable,
The first state is a state in which at least a part of the first operating means is rotating,
The second state is a state in which the first operating means is not rotating,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to recognize the necessity of operating a plurality of operating means by rotating the first operating means.

  Here, the first operation means may be partially rotatable, or may be entirely rotatable. Further, the first operation means may be configured such that at least a part thereof is rotatable, or at least a part other than a part thereof is also rotatable. Further, the first operating means may be configured such that at least a part thereof is always rotated, or at least a part thereof may not be rotated.

In addition, “a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variable display [eg, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided,
The first valid period is a period that may be started during execution of the symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 137 (m), during variation display of special figure 1 or special figure 2] The first valid period has started, etc.],
In the first valid period, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display when the first operation means is in the first state than when it is not in the first state [for example, , As shown in FIG. 137 (m), when the effect button 136 vibrates in the first effective period, the jackpot pattern is likely to be confirmed and displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, both the first operation means and the second operation means can give a notice by the operation means in addition to the effect by the operation, so that the range of effect of the operation means is widened. There are cases.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the variable display of symbols, or may be capable of executing a display other than the variable display of symbols. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the symbol variable display, or may not execute the symbol variable display.

  Further, the first effective period may be started only during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may be started during the time other than the execution of the symbol variation display. Good. The first valid period may be always started during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may not be started during the execution of the symbol variation display.

  Further, during the first effective period, the jackpot symbol may be easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display only when the first operating means is in the first state, or during the first effective period, Even when the one operation means is not in the first state, the jackpot symbol may be easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display. Further, during the first effective period, when the first operating means is in the first state, the big hit symbol may be definitely displayed in the symbol variable display, or during the first effective period, When one operation means is in the first state, the big hit symbol may not be fixedly displayed in the symbol variable display.

  Further, only during the first valid period, the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display when the first operation means is in the first state than when it is not in the first state. Good, even during the period other than the first effective period, the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display when the first operating means is in the first state than when it is not in the first state. You may do it.

  Further, during the first valid period, the first operating means may be always in the first state, or the first operating means may not be in the first state.

  Further, the first operation means may be in the second state during the first effective period, and the first operation means may be in the second state during the first effective period, as compared to the case where In the case of the state, the big hit symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display.

In addition, “a plurality of operating means provided at a position operable by the player [for example, effect button 136, upper button 137a, lower button 137b, left button 137c, right button 137d, enter button 137e, cancel button 137f, etc.] A gaming machine equipped with
One of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means [for example, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an enter button 137e, a cancel button 137f, etc.].
One of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means [for example, the effect button 136 or the like],
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of notifications,
One of the plurality of types of notifications is a first notification [for example, the operation result effect shown in FIG. 111 (12)],
One of the plurality of types of notifications is the second notification [for example, deletion of the symbol changing setting screen shown in FIG. 111 (5), or reach state entry notice image shown in FIG. 107 (i). 2071 etc.],
The first notification may be executed when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated in the first effective period. [For example, as shown in FIG. 111 (11), if both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated at the same time during the operation valid period, the operation result effect shown in FIG. 111 (12) is performed. Etc.],
In the first valid period, in a state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, the first notification is configured not to be executed. [For example, when only the right button 137d of the effect buttons 136 and the right buttons 137d is operated in the operation valid period as shown in FIG. 127 (11), as shown in FIG. 127 (12), No operation result effect is produced, or, as shown in FIG. 128 (11), when only the effect button 136 of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated, as shown in FIG. 128 (12). , No operation result production is performed],
In the second valid period, when the first operation means is operated, the second notification may be executed [for example, the symbol shown in FIG. 111 (5) When the effect button 136 is operated while the changing setting screen is displayed, the volume may be set to the set value and the symbol changing setting screen may be deleted, or as shown in FIG. 107 (i). As described above, when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, the reach state entry notice image 2071 shown in FIG. 107 (j) may be displayed],
The first valid period and the second valid period are different periods [for example, as shown in FIGS. 111 (7) to (15), after the button operation promotion display is started, the symbol Until the variable display is finished, the display of the symbol changing setting screen including the volume gauge VG is prohibited, or the operation valid period shown in FIGS. 107 (g) to (j) and the figure 111 (7) to (12) in the same figure are different periods, etc.],
The state of the second operating means in the first valid period may differ from the state of the second operating means in the second valid period [eg, as shown in FIG. 137 (n), During the first effective period, the effect button 136 lights up in red by the chance button lamp 138 and vibrates, while as shown in FIG. 137 (d), during the second effective period, the effect button 136 changes the chance. The button lamp 138 lights up in red, and no operation such as vibration is performed.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the operating means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the operating means.

  Further, according to this gaming table, the first notification is not executed only by the operation of one of the first operating means and the second operating means, so that the player can easily find a complicated operation. You may be able to. In addition, this may give the player a sense of achievement.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, there may be a case where the difference in required operation between the first effective period and the second effective period can be recognized due to the difference in the state of the second operating means.

  Here, each of the plurality of operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate. Good. Further, the plurality of operating means may be provided at positions where the player can always operate, or may be provided at positions where the player may not be able to operate.

  In addition, only a plurality of types of notifications may be configured to be executable, a plurality of types of notifications may be configured to be executed without fail, or a plurality of types of notifications may not be performed.

  Further, in the first valid period, the first notification may be executed only when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated. Alternatively, the first notification may be executed even in a case other than the case where both the first operation means and the second operation means are in the operated state. Good. Further, the first notification may be executed without fail when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated in the first effective period. However, when both the first operation means and the second operation means are in the operated state, the first notification may not be executed.

  Further, it is configured such that only the first notification may be executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated in the first valid period. Alternatively, when both the first operation means and the second operation means are in the operated state, it may be configured such that notification other than the first notification may be executed. Good.

  Further, in the first effective period, when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, only the first effect is configured not to be executed. Alternatively, in a state in which only one of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated, the effect other than the first effect may not be executed. Further, in a state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, the first effect may be configured not to be executed without fail, The first effect may be executed when only one of the operating means and the second operating means is being operated.

  In the second valid period, the second notification may be executed only when the first operating means is operated, or the first operating means is operated. The second notification may be executed in a case other than the case described above. Further, in the second valid period, the second notification may be configured to be executed without fail when the first operating means is operated, or when the first operating means is operated. The second notification may not be executed in some cases.

  The second operation means may be changeable only to a plurality of states, or may be changeable to a state other than the plurality of states. Further, the second operation means may be one that always changes to a plurality of states, or may not change to a plurality of states in some cases.

  Further, only the state of the second operating means in the first effective period and the state of the second operating means in the second effective period may be different, or the second operation in the first effective period. The state of the means and the state other than the state of the second operating means in the second effective period may be different. Further, the state of the second operating means in the first effective period may be different from the state of the second operating means in the second effective period without fail, and the state of the second operating means in the first effective period may be different. There may be a case where the states of the second operating means in the second valid period do not differ from those in the second valid period.

In addition, “the first effective period is a period during which both the operation of the first operating device and the operation of the second operating device are effective [for example, the right button at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (9)]. A period (operation valid period) in which the operation of the 137d and the operation of the effect button 136 are respectively effective is started, or a period in which it is effective that both the right button 137d and the effect button 136 are operated (operation effective) Period) is started], etc.,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the first valid period may be a period during which only both the operation of the first operating means and the operation of the second operating means are valid, or the operation of the first operating means and the second It may be a period during which the operation of the operation means other than both the operations of the operation means is valid. Further, the first effective period may be a period in which both the operation of the first operation means and the operation of the second operation means are always effective, or the operation of the first operation means and the second operation means. There may be a case where neither of the operations of the operation means is valid.

In addition, "the first operation means is a button,
The second operation means is a button,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the operability of the first operating device and the second operating device may be improved in some cases.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the gaming table is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
"A plurality of operating means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, effect button 136, upper button 137a, lower button 137b, left button 137c, right button 137d, enter button 137e, cancel button 137f, and the like],
Production means capable of executing a plurality of types of production [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 120, production movable bodies 224, 225, various lamps 418, etc.],
A gaming machine equipped with
One of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means [for example, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an enter button 137e, a cancel button 137f, etc.].
One of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means [for example, the effect button 136 or the like],
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect [for example, the operation result effect shown in FIG. 129 (12)],
The first effect may be executed when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated [eg, FIG. 129]. When both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are simultaneously operated as shown in (11), an operation result effect may be performed as shown in FIG. 129 (12), etc.],
It is configured such that the first effect is not executed when only one of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 127 (11 128), when only the right button 137d of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated, the operation result effect is not performed, as shown in FIG. 11) and FIG. 130 (11), when only the effect button 136 of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated, as shown in FIG. 128 (12) and FIG. 130 (12), No operation result effect is produced, or as shown in FIG. 131 (11 ″) or FIG. 131 (11 ″ ″), both the upper button 137a and the effect button 136 are the same instead of the right button 137d. When operated at times, the effect different from the operation result effect shown in FIG. 130 (12) (the second operation result effect shown in FIG. 131 (12 ″) or the operation result effect shown in FIG. 131 (12 ″ ″)). Operation result presentation) may be performed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the rendering means, but according to this gaming table, it is possible to provide a gaming table having a feature in the rendering means.

  Further, according to this gaming table, the first effect is not performed only by the operation of one of the first operating means and the second operating means, which makes it easy for the player to search for a complicated operation. You may be able to. In addition, this may give the player a sense of achievement.

  Here, each of the plurality of operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate. Good. Further, the plurality of operating means may be provided at positions where the player can always operate, or may be provided at positions where the player may not be able to operate.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effects, or may be capable of executing an effect other than a plurality of types of effects. In addition, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of productions, or may not execute a plurality of types of productions.

  Further, as the production means, a display means, a sound output means, a light emitting means, a movable body, or a means for displaying a design by causing a light guide plate to emit light, and the like can be appropriately used. Further, the production means such as a combination of the display means and the sound output means, a combination of the display means and the light emitting means may be configured by a plurality of means.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect. In addition, the production means may always execute the first production, or may not execute the first production.

  Further, the first effect may be executed only when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, and the first effect may be executed. The first effect may be executed in a case other than the case where both the operating means and the second operating means are in the operated state. Further, when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, the first effect may be configured to be executed without fail. The first effect may not be executed when both the first and second operation means are operated.

  Further, when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, it may be configured such that only the first effect may be executed. When both of the operation means and the second operation means are operated, the effect other than the first effect may be executed.

  Further, in a state in which only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, it may be configured such that only the first effect is not executed. When only one of the operation means and the second operation means is operated, the effect other than the first effect may not be executed. Further, in a state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is being operated, the first effect may be configured not to be executed without fail, The first effect may be executed when only one of the operating means and the second operating means is being operated.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect [for example, a second operation result effect shown in FIG. 131 (12 ″) or shown in FIG. 131 (12 ″”). Operation result presentation, etc.]
The first effect and the third effect are different effects,
The first effect may be executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated in the first effective period. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 129 (7) to 129 (12), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated within the operation valid period, the effect movable body 225 displays the decorative symbol. While moving to the front side of the display screen of the device 208, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect display as if the effect movable body 225 is shining is displayed, and further, the confirmation sound is output from the speaker 120, etc.],
The third effect may be executed when only one of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated in the first effective period. If, for example, as shown in FIG. 131 (11 ″) or FIG. 131 (11 ″ ″), both the up button 137a and the effect button 136 are operated at the same time instead of the right button 137d, FIG. When an effect different from the operation result effect shown in (12) (the second operation result effect shown in FIG. 131 (12 ″) or the operation result effect shown in FIG. 131 (12 ″ ″)) is performed Alternatively, in FIG. 129 (11), a second operation result effect different from the first operation result effect may be performed by the operation of one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d. etc],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, when the simultaneous operation of the first operation means and the second operation means fails (when only one operation means is operated), the third effect different from the first effect Therefore, it may be possible to give the player a sense of achievement when the first effect is performed.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, even if the simultaneous operation of the first operation means and the second operation means fails, another dissatisfaction (third effect) is executed to alleviate the dissatisfaction of the player. Sometimes you can.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the third effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the third effect. In addition, the production means may always execute the third production, or may not execute the third production.

  Further, in the first effective period, the first effect may be executed only when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated. Alternatively, the first effect may be executed in a case other than the case where both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated in the first effective period. May be configured. Further, in the first effective period, the first effect may be executed without fail when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated. However, in the first effective period, when both the first operating means and the second operating means are in the operated state, the first effect may not be executed. Good.

  Further, the first effect may be executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated only during the first effective period. Alternatively, the first effect is executed when both the first operation means and the second operation means are in operation during the period other than the first effective period. May be configured.

  Further, in the first effective period, the third effect may be executed only when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated. Alternatively, the third effect may be executed in the first effective period, except when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated. It may be configured as follows. Further, in the first effective period, the third effect may be configured to be executed when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated. However, the third effect may not be executed when only one of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated in the first effective period. Good.

  Further, the third effect may be executed when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated only during the first effective period. The third effect may be executed when only one of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated during the period other than the first effective period. May be configured.

In addition, "the effect means includes a first effect means [for example, effect movable body 225, decorative pattern display device 208 and the like] and a second effect means [for example, speaker 120, effect movable body 225 and the like]. Is the means
The first rendering means and the second rendering means are different rendering means,
The first effect is an effect executed by using both the first effect means and the second effect means [for example, as shown in FIG. 129 (12), the effect movable body 225 is a decoration. It moves to the front side of the display screen of the symbol display device 208, and a fixed sound is output from the speaker 120, or, as shown in FIG. 129 (12), the effect movable body 225 is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Move to the front side, and the effect display as if the effect movable body 225 is shining is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208],
The third effect is an effect that is executed by using one of the first effect means and the second effect means [for example, in FIG. 131 (12 ″ ″). As shown, the effect movable body 225 moves to the front side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, but no confirmation sound is output from the speaker 120, or as shown in FIG. 131 (12 ″), the decoration is displayed. In the center of the display area of the symbol display device 208, a character display "Gekiatsu" is displayed, and an operation result display including a display in which 10 pandas are arranged so as to surround the character display is displayed.] ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where the first effect can be executed as a more flashy effect than the third effect, and the player simultaneously operates both the first operation means and the second operation means. It may be possible to improve the feeling of achievement.

  Here, the rendering means may be configured to include only the first rendering means and the second rendering means, and may also include rendering means other than the first rendering means and the second rendering means. It may be configured with. Further, the rendering means may be configured to necessarily include the first rendering means and the second rendering means, or may include at least one of the first rendering means and the second rendering means. There may be no cases.

  Further, the first effect may be executed only by using both the first effect means and the second effect means, or effects other than the first effect means and the second effect means. It may also be implemented by means. Further, the first effect may be always executed using both the first effect means and the second effect means, or both the first effect means and the second effect means. It may not be executed by using.

  Further, the third effect may be executed by using only one of the first effect means and the second effect means, or the first effect means and the second effect means. It may be executed by using a rendering means other than either one of the two rendering means. In addition, the third effect may be executed by always using one of the first effect means and the second effect means, or the first effect means and the second effect means. There may be a case where it is executed without using either one of the two effect means.

In addition, “the first rendering means is a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
The second rendering means is a movable means [for example, the rendering movable body 225],
The movable means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of movable effects,
One of the plurality of types of movable effects is the first movable effect,
The first movable effect is a movable effect that moves to a position where at least a part of the movable means overlaps in front of the display area of the display means [for example, the effect movable body 225 is above the decorative symbol display device 208. From the effect to move to the front side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208],
The third effect is an effect executed without using the second effect means [for example, as shown in FIG. 131 (12 ″), the effect movable body 225 does not operate, and the decorative symbol display is performed. In the center of the display area of the device 208, a character display "Gekiatsu" is displayed, and an operation result display including a display in which 10 pandas are arranged so as to surround the character display is displayed.],
The first effect is an effect including the first movable effect [for example, as shown in FIG. 129 (12), the effect movable body 225 moves to the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. , The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect such that the effect movable body 225 is shining, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a display related to the first movable effect [for example, an effect display such as the effect movable body 225 shown in FIG. 129 (12) is shining].
The first effect is an effect including the second display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the first movable effect is performed only when the simultaneous operation of the first operation means and the second operation means is successful, so that it may be possible to give the player a sense of achievement. is there.

  Here, the movable means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of movable effects, or may be capable of performing effects other than the plurality of types of movable effects. In addition, the movable means may be one that always performs a plurality of types of movable effects, or may not execute the movable effects of thin-liquor sake.

  Further, the movable means may be capable of executing only the first movable effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first movable effect. Further, the movable effect may be one that always executes the first movable effect, or may not execute the first movable effect.

  Further, the first movable effect may be such that the movable means moves only in a position where at least a part of the movable means overlaps in front of the display area of the display means, or it moves in front of the display area of the display means. The means may be moved to a position other than the overlapping position of at least a part of the means. Further, the first movable effect may be such that the movable means always moves to a position where at least a part of the movable means overlaps in front of the display area of the display means, or the movable means moves in front of the display area of the display means. May not move to a position where at least a part of the above overlaps.

  Further, the third effect may be executed without using only the second effect means, or may be executed without using any effect means other than the second effect means. Good. Further, the third effect may be executed without necessarily using the second effect means, or may be executed using the second effect means.

  In addition, the first effect may include only the first movable effect, or may include effects other than the first movable effect. In addition, the first effect may necessarily include the first movable effect, or may not include the first movable effect.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of display, or may not display a plurality of types of display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the second display. Further, the display means may always display the second display, or may not display the second display.

  Further, the second display may be a display related to only the first movable effect or may be a display related to other than the first movable effect. In addition, the second display may be a display that is always related to the first movable effect, or may not be related to the first movable effect.

  In addition, the first effect may include only the second display, or may include a display other than the second display. In addition, the first effect may necessarily include the second display, or may not include the second display.

In addition, “a display unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like] is provided,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, an operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 141 (8)],
The third display is a display that does not include an image simulating the first operation means [for example, in the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 141 (8), the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 are displayed. The right button image 137dP1 is not included, etc.],
The third display is a display including an image simulating the second operation means [for example, in the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 141 (8), one of the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 is displayed. Effect button image 136P1 is included, etc.],
The third display is a display that may be displayed during the first valid period [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 141 (8) is displayed during the valid operation period],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, by not displaying an image simulating the first operation means during the first effective period, it is possible to cause the simultaneous operation of the first operation means and the second operation means to function as a hidden command. In some cases, it is possible to give a rare value to the appearance of the first effect.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of display, or may not display a plurality of types of display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the third display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the third display. Further, the display means may necessarily display the third display, or may not display the third display.

  Further, the third display may not include only the image simulating the first operation means, or may not include the image other than the image simulating the first operation means. .. Further, the third display may not necessarily include the image simulating the first operation means, or may include the image simulating the first operation means.

  Further, the third display may include only an image simulating the second operation means, or may include an image other than the image simulating the second operation means. Further, the third display may necessarily include an image simulating the second operation means, or may not include an image simulating the second operation means.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only during the first valid period, or may be displayed during the period other than the first valid period. Good. Further, the third display may be always displayed during the first valid period, or may not be displayed during the first valid period.

  Further, the third display may only be displayed during the first valid period.

In addition, “a display unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like] is provided,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 142 (8)],
The fourth display is a display that does not include an image simulating the first operation means [for example, in the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 142 (8), the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 are displayed. The right button image 137dP1 is not included, etc.],
The fourth display is a display that does not include an image simulating the second operation means [for example, in the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 142 (8), the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 are displayed. Our production button image 136P1 is not included, etc.],
The fourth display is a display including a display relating to the first valid period [for example, in the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 142 (8), the remaining time display bar 136P2 is included],
The fourth display is a display that may be displayed during the first valid period [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 142 (8) is displayed during the valid operation period],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, only the display regarding the first effective period may be displayed, and in the case where the player can perform various operations during the first effective period in order to see the first effect. There is.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to inform that the hidden button effect is provided by the display regarding the first effective period.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of display, or may not display a plurality of types of display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fourth display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the fourth display. Further, the display means may always display the fourth display, or may not display the fourth display.

  Further, the fourth display may not include only an image simulating the first operation means, or may not include an image other than the image simulating the first operation means. .. Further, the fourth display may not necessarily include an image simulating the first operating means, or may include an image simulating the first operating means.

  Further, the fourth display may not include only an image simulating the second operation means, or may not include an image other than the image simulating the second operation means. .. Further, the fourth display may not necessarily include an image simulating the second operation means, or may include an image simulating the second operation means.

  Further, the fourth display may include only a display regarding the first valid period, or may include a display other than the display regarding the first valid period. Further, the fourth display may necessarily include the display regarding the first effective period, or may not include the display regarding the first effective period.

  The fourth display may be displayed only during the first valid period, or may be displayed during a period other than the first valid period. Good. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed during the first valid period, or may not be displayed during the first valid period.

  Further, the fourth display may only be displayed in the first valid period.

In addition, “a display unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like] is provided,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 143 (8B)],
The fifth display is a display that does not include an image simulating the first operation means [for example, in the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 143 (8B), the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 are displayed. The right button image 137dP1 is not included, etc.],
The fifth display is a display that does not include an image simulating the second operation means [for example, in the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 143 (8B), the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 are displayed. Our production button image 136P1 is not included, etc.],
The fifth display is a display that does not include a display relating to the first valid period [for example, in the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 143 (8B), the remaining time display bar is not included, etc.],
The fifth display is a display that may be displayed during the first effective period [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 143 (8B) is displayed during the operation effective period],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible for the player to perform various operations during the first effective period in order to see the first effect.

  In addition, according to this gaming table, it may be possible to notify that it is a hidden button effect.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of display, or may not display a plurality of types of display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fifth display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the fifth display. Further, the display means may always display the fifth display, or may not display the fifth display.

  Further, the fifth display may not include only an image simulating the first operating means, or may not include an image other than the image simulating the first operating means. .. Further, the fifth display may not necessarily include an image simulating the first operation means, or may include an image simulating the first operation means.

  Further, the fifth display may not include only an image simulating the second operating means, or may not include an image other than the image simulating the second operating means. .. Further, the fifth display may not necessarily include the image simulating the second operation means, or may include the image simulating the second operation means.

  Further, the fifth display may not include only the display regarding the first effective period, or may not include the display other than the display regarding the first effective period. In addition, the fifth display may not necessarily include the display regarding the first effective period, or may include the display regarding the first effective period.

  The fifth display may be displayed only during the first valid period, or may be displayed during a period other than the first valid period. Good. Further, the fifth display may be always displayed during the first valid period, or may not be displayed during the first valid period.

  Further, the fifth display may only be displayed in the first valid period.

In addition, "it is configured such that settings related to a game table can be performed by operating the first operation means [for example, FIG. 111 (2) to FIG. 111 (3) or FIG. 127 (2) to FIG. As shown in, when the right button 137d is operated during the symbol variation display, the symbol variation setting screen including the volume gauge VG is displayed, or FIG. 111 (4) to FIG. 4) to (5), when the right button 137d is operated while the symbol changing setting screen is displayed, the volume is increased by one step, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where the first operating means can be utilized for different purposes.

  Here, only the settings related to the gaming table may be configured by operating the first operating means, or the settings other than those related to the gaming table may be configured by operating the first operating means. Good. Further, it may be configured such that the setting related to the gaming table is always performed by operating the first operating means, or the setting related to the gaming table may not be possible by operating the first operating means. ..

In addition, “the setting regarding the gaming table” is “setting for executing the power saving mode [e.g., eco mode]”.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the setting regarding the game table" is the "time setting",
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variable display [eg, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided,
The first effect is an effect that may be started during the execution of the symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 129 (12), variation display of special figure 1 or special figure 2 Operation result production has started in the middle, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the first effect is performed during the symbol variation display, so that it can be applied to, for example, a notice effect, and the expectation for a big hit may be increased.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the variable display of symbols, or may be capable of executing a display other than the variable display of symbols. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the symbol variable display, or may not execute the symbol variable display.

  Further, the first effect may be that the execution may be started only while the symbol variable display is being executed, or the execution may be started other than during the symbol variable display. May be Further, the first effect may be that the execution is always started during the execution of the symbol variation display, or the execution may not be started during the execution of the symbol variation display.

In addition, "the first operation means is a button,
The second operation means is a button,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the operability of the first operating device and the second operating device may be improved in some cases.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the gaming table is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Hereinafter, it will be additionally described including the above description.

(Appendix 1)
Image display means,
A symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display,
An advance notice means that can execute multiple types of advance notice,
A gaming machine equipped with
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a hold display,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons,
The hold display is a display displayed in the hold display area in the image display means,
The hold display is a display corresponding to the number of operations of the symbol variable display (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”),
The symbol variation display is a display that can be started when the hold is exhausted,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area of the image display means,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold display,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying one or more of the notice icons,
The notice means is a means that, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, is a means capable of executing the notice of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed,
In a period in which the symbol variable display is being executed once, a first larger number than the first number of the first number of the plurality of types of the preliminary notice icons, which is larger than the first number, is larger than the first number. It is structured so that it is more likely to be a big hit when the second number is digested,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 2)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 1,
The notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 3)
The gaming table according to appendix 1 or 2,
The notice means is a means capable of executing a false notice in the same manner as the notice.
The notice means is means for executing, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, executing the fake notice of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed. ,
After the false notice is executed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be out of order,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 4)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 3,
In the period in which the one-time symbol variable display is executed, the number of the notice icons started to be displayed in the notice icon display area is larger than the third number, and is larger than the third number by the fourth number. Is configured to be a big hit,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 5)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
A hold display means capable of executing a display according to the number of holds,
The holding display means is a display means different from the image display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 6)
The gaming machine described in Appendix 5,
The pending display means is a display means including a light emitting means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 7)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 6,
Equipped with pre-reading notice means that can execute pre-reading notice
The prefetching notice means is a means capable of executing the prefetching notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 8)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 7,
In the period in which the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, referred to as “second symbol variation display”) is being executed, the notice icon may be exhausted by the fifth number,
In the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “first symbol variation display”) executed before the second symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon is the sixth. May be digested several times,
The sixth number is a number different from the fifth number,
The suspension display is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 9)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 8,
The notice icon may be started to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is consumed (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) is being executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 10)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 9,
In the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “third symbol variation display”) executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed, the fourth symbol variation In some cases, the notice icon that is consumed during the display is started to be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 11)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 10,
The hold display area is an area capable of displaying the hold display up to a seventh number,
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying the notice icon up to an eighth number,
The seventh number is different from the eighth number.

(Appendix 12)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 11,
Equipped with production means that can execute multiple types of production,
One of the plurality of types of notice is the first notice,
One of the plurality of types of notice is the second notice,
The first notice is a notice different from the second notice,
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect,
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice is a notice notifying that the first effect will be executed,
The second notice is a notice notifying that the second effect will be executed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 13)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 12,
The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be always consumed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 14)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 13,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 15)
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
During the display of the first symbol variation display, the display of the first notice icon may be started as the notice icon,
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may not be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display,
In the symbol variation display that is displayed after the first symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "second symbol variation display"), the first that is not consumed during the display of the first symbol variation display. The notice icon of is configured so that it may be digested,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 16)
The gaming table described in Appendix 15,
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may be consumed during the display of the first symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 17)
The gaming table according to appendix 15 or 16,
As a look-ahead notice of the second symbol variation display, the first notice icon may be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 18)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 15 to 17,
During the display of the one-time symbol variable display, a big hit when the second number of the first notice icons is consumed, rather than when the first number of the first notice icons are consumed. Tend to be
The second number is a number greater than the first number,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 19)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 15 to 18,
The second notice icon is configured to be displayable as the notice icon,
The second notice icon is configured to be a big hit in the changed pattern display that has been digested,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 20)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 15 to 19,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display,
When the first notice icon is consumed, a first notice display may be displayed as the notice display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 21)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 20,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fake notice display,
When the first notice icon is consumed, a first false notice display may be displayed as the false notice display,
The display mode of the first false notification display is the same display mode as the display mode of the first notification display,
The first fake advance notice display is configured to be displaced in the symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 22)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 15 to 21,
One of the plurality of types of display is a look-ahead effect display,
The third notice icon is configured to be displayable as the notice icon,
When the third notice icon is consumed, the prefetch effect display may be started,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 23)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 15 to 22,
The display means is a means configured by a plurality of display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 24)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 15 to 23,
One of the plurality of types of display is a decorative pattern variable display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 25)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 15 to 24,
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display is configured to be surely consumed by the end of the display of the second symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 26)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 15 to 25,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area of the display means,
The notice icon display area is an area in which a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 27)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 15 to 26,
Equipped with performance control means,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control of the display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 28)
The gaming table described in Appendix 27,
Main control means,
A symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
Equipped with
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is a means capable of executing control of the symbol display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 29)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 15 to 28,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 30)
A first display means capable of executing symbol variation display,
A second display means,
A gaming machine equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice display,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number (hereinafter, referred to as “held number”) in which the operation of the symbol variable display is suspended in the suspended display area,
The symbol variation display is a display started when the hold is exhausted,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area of the second display means,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the pending number depending on the number displayed,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area, the notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying a plurality of the notice icons,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying the type of the notice display corresponding to the type of the noticed icon when the notice icon in the notice icon display area is consumed,
In the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed once, a big hit when the notice icon is consumed by a second number larger than the first number than when the first number is consumed It is configured to be
The second display means, in the notice icon display area as a look-ahead notice display, before the pattern variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “second symbol variation display”) which is a target of the pre-fetch is started. Display means capable of displaying the notice icon,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 31)
The gaming table described in Appendix 30,
The notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 32)
The gaming table according to appendix 30 or 31,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a false notice display in the same manner as the notice display.
The second display means, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, can display the fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed. Display means,
After the false notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be out of alignment,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 33)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 30 to 32,
The second display means is a display means composed of a plurality of display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 34)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 33,
One display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a hold display means,
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area,
The holding display means is a display means capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holdings in the holding display area,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of decorative symbols,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area,
The holding display means is a display means different from the image display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 35)
The gaming table described in appendix 34,
The game stand, wherein the holding display means is a display means including a light emitting means.

(Appendix 36)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 30 to 32,
The second display means is an image display means,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of decorative symbols,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 37)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 30 to 36,
In the period in which the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be exhausted a fifth number,
In the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “first symbol variation display”) executed before the second symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon is the sixth. May be digested several times,
The sixth number is a number different from the fifth number,
The display according to the number of holding is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 38)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 30 to 36,
The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be surely consumed by the end of the symbol variation display that is the subject of prefetching,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 39)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 30 to 38,
The notice icon may be started to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is consumed (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) is being executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 40)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 39,
In the period in which the symbol variation display is executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is executed May be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 41)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 30 to 40,
The reserved display area is an area capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of reservations up to a seventh number,
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying the notice icon up to an eighth number,
The seventh number is a different number than the eighth number,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 42)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 41, comprising a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of productions,
As the notice icon, it is configured to be able to display the first notice icon,
As the notice icon, a second notice icon can be displayed,
The first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon,
One of the plurality of types of notice display is the first notice display,
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a second notice display,
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
When the first notice icon is consumed, the first notice display is configured to be displayed,
When the second notice icon is consumed, the second notice display is configured to be displayed,
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect,
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice display is a notice display for notifying that the first effect is executed,
The game machine, wherein the second notice display is a notice display for notifying that the second effect is to be executed.

(Appendix 43)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 30 to 42,
Main control means,
Production control means,
Equipped with
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is a means capable of executing control of the first display means,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control of the second display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 44)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 30 to 43,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 45)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
When the big hit symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display") that is the target of prefetching is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the end, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) may be consumed,
In the case where the second symbol variable display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variable display and the end of the second symbol variable display. May be displayed,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a performance display,
When the notice icon is consumed, the effect display corresponding to the digested notice icon may be displayed, and one of the plurality of notice icons is a notice icon. It is the first notice icon,
One of the plurality of notice icons is a second notice icon,
In one symbol variation display, the first number of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “first number of notice icons”) are exhausted to display the first effect display as the effect display. Is configured to
The first number of notice icons is a notice icon including the first notice icon,
The gaming machine, wherein the first number of notice icons are notice icons including the second notice icon.

  According to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a display characteristic.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, there is a possibility that the first effect display is displayed from when one icon of the first number of icons is displayed until the first number of icons are consumed. Sometimes you can continue to have a sense of expectation for something.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation to a big hit by making the number of the notice icons look like a symbol variation before the hold which is the prefetch target.

  Here, the plurality of notice icons may be two notice icons or three or more notice icons.

  In addition, when the first notice icon is consumed, the effect display A corresponding to the first notice icon may be displayed, or when the second notice icon is consumed, the second notice icon is displayed. Corresponding effect display B may be performed, or effect display C corresponding to the first notice icon and the second notice icon when the first notice icon and the second notice icon are consumed. You may go.

  Also, only one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon may be consumed, or only one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon is newly added. May be displayed on the screen.

(Appendix 46)
The gaming machine described in appendix 45,
Even if the second number of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as the "second number of notice icons") are exhausted in one symbol variation display, the first effect display is not displayed. And
The first number and the second number are different numbers,
The second number of notice icons is a notice icon that includes one notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon,
The second number of notice icons is a notice icon that does not include the other notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon,
A game table characterized by that.

  According to this gaming machine, the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, and the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed in one symbol variation display. However, since the first effect display is not displayed, it may be possible to give a feeling of superiority to the player who can see the first effect display.

  Here, the second number may be smaller than the first number, and the second number may be larger than the first number.

  Further, the first number may be one, and in this case, the second number may be two or more. Further, the first number may be two or more, and in this case, the second number may be larger than the first number.

  Further, there may be an effect display that is displayed when the second number of notice icons have been consumed.

  Further, even if the second number of notice icons are exhausted, a part of the first effect display may be displayed, or all of the first effect display may be displayed.

  Further, the reliability of the big hit for the first effect display may be changed according to the number of the notice icons that have been consumed, or the reliability of the big hit for the first effect display may be the same.

  Further, when the notice icons including the first notice icon and the second notice icon are displayed, the first number of notice icons may be surely consumed.

  Further, even if the notice icons including the first notice icon and the second notice icon are displayed, the first number of notice icons are not digested, and the second number of notice icons are digested. Alternatively, both the first notice icon and the second notice icon may not be deleted.

(Appendix 47)
The gaming table according to appendix 45 or 46,
One of the plurality of notice icons is the third notice icon,
When the third notice icon is consumed, a third effect display is displayed as the effect display,
A game table characterized by that.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where it is possible to increase the variation of the effect and enhance the effect of the effect.

  The third notice icon may be one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

  Further, the third notice icon may be a notice icon different from both the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

(Appendix 48)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 45 to 47,
In the case where the lost symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as the "fourth symbol variation display") that is the target of prefetching is suspended, the fourth symbol variation display is started after the third symbol variation display is started. In some cases, the multiple notice icons may be consumed before the end.
A game table characterized by that.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not necessarily a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the change in the hold to be read ahead is over.

  In addition, depending on whether the result of the design variation display of the prefetch is a big hit or a loss, it is digested from the first design variation display or the third design variation display to the design variation display of the prefetch target. The maximum number of notice icons may be the same or different.

  In addition, depending on whether the result of the pattern change display of the prefetch target is a big hit or a loss, it is digested from the first symbol change display or the third symbol change display to the symbol change display of the prefetch target. The minimum number of notice icons may be the same or different.

  Also, in the state where the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended, one symbol that is performed before the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (the second symbol variation display, the fourth symbol variation display) The maximum number of notice icons that can be consumed in the variable display (for example, the first symbol variable display, the third symbol variable display) is when the result of the symbol variable display of the pre-reading is a big hit and when it is lost. It may be the same or different.

  Also, in the state where the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended, one symbol that is performed before the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (the second symbol variation display, the fourth symbol variation display) The minimum number of notice icons that can be consumed in the variable display (eg, the first symbol variable display, the third symbol variable display) is when the result of the symbol variable display of the prefetch is a big hit or a miss. It may be the same or different.

  In addition, the maximum number of notice icons that are consumed in the pattern variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) that is the target of prefetching in the state where the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended The result of the variable display of the pattern to be pre-read may be the same or different between the big hit and the miss.

  In addition, the minimum number of notice icons that are consumed in the pattern variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) that is the target of prefetching is in the state where the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended. The result of the variable display of the pattern to be pre-read may be the same or different between the big hit and the miss.

(Appendix 49)
The gaming table according to appendix 48,
In the case where the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are displayed from the start of the third symbol variation display to the end of the fourth symbol variation display. Sometimes,
A game table characterized by that.

  According to this gaming machine, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big jackpot, so it may be possible to entertain until the change in the hold that is the prefetch target ends.

(Appendix 50)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 45 to 49,
With a hold display means,
The pending display means is a means capable of displaying a number of pending displays corresponding to a number (hereinafter, referred to as a "holding number") in which the start of the symbol variable display is pending,
A game table characterized by that.

  The hold display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, a light emitting means such as an LED, or a movable means.

(Supplementary note 51) The gaming table according to supplementary note 50,
Depending on the number of the notice icon displayed, the hold number is configured not to be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.

(Appendix 52)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 45 to 51,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 53)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 45 to 51,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 54)
A gaming machine having a plurality of display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display of a plurality of types of display that can be displayed on the first display means is a display related to the notice icon,
One type of display of a plurality of types of display that can be displayed on the second display means is a display related to the notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
When the big hit symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display") that is the target of prefetching is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the end, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "a plurality of notice icons") may be consumed,
In the case where the second symbol variable display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variable display and the end of the second symbol variable display. May be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

  The display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, or may be one in which a pattern is formed by cutting the light guide plate with a lens and irradiating it with a light source from the side. , LED or the like, or 7 segments.

  Further, the display related to the notice icon may be a display regarding that the notice icon is stocked, may be a display regarding that the notice icon is consumed, or the notice of stock of the notice icon is announced. It may be a display or an effect display that is executed when the notice icon is exhausted.

  Further, the second display means may be larger than the first display means, and the second display means may be smaller than the first display means. Further, the display area of the second display means may be larger than the display area of the first display means, or the display area of the second display means may be larger than the display area of the first display means. It may be small.

(Appendix 55)
The gaming table according to appendix 54,
In the second display means, the plurality of notice icons may be newly displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

  In addition, one notice icon may be newly displayed.

  Moreover, you may make it perform the effect | action that a notice icon is consumed by a 2nd display means.

(Appendix 56)
The gaming table according to appendix 54 or 55,
In the first display means, there may be a display suggesting that the notice icon may be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

  In addition, the "display indicating that the notice icon may be displayed" may be performed in the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is displayed, or the notice icon is displayed. You may make it perform in the symbol variable display.

(Appendix 57)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 54 to 56,
The first display means is a means provided with a first display area,
The second display means is a means provided with a second display area,
The notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 58)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 54 to 56,
The first display means is a means provided with a first display area,
The second display means is a means provided with a second display area,
Performance display corresponding to the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 59)
Display means,
Movable means,
A gaming machine equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
When the big hit symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display") that is the target of prefetching is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the end, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "a plurality of notice icons") may be consumed,
In the case where the second symbol variable display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variable display and the end of the second symbol variable display. May be displayed,
When the notice icon is consumed, a production corresponding to the digested notice icon (hereinafter, referred to as "prediction icon digest production") is performed.
As the notice icon digestion effect, an effect by the movable means (hereinafter, referred to as “first movable means effect”) may be performed.
A game table characterized by that.

  Note that the effect by the movable means may be performed only by the first movable means effect, but may be performed by another movable means effect different from the first movable means effect. In this case, a notice icon corresponding to each movable means effect may be displayed, or a notice icon corresponding to the movable means for which the effect is performed may be displayed.

(Appendix 60)
The gaming machine described in Appendix 59,
When the 21st notice icon is consumed as the notice icon, the first moving means effect may be performed.
A game table characterized by that.

  In addition, even if the 21st notice icon is exhausted, the first moving means effect may not be performed, and when the 21st notice icon is exhausted, the first movable means must be moved. Means production may be performed.

  Further, when the 21st notice icon is exhausted, there may be a case where an effect (an effect having a different operation) different from the first movable means effect is performed.

  In addition, when the 21st notice icon is consumed, the production may be performed by a movable means different from the first movable means, or the 21st notice icon is consumed. Then, the effect may be always performed by the first movable means.

(Appendix 61)
The gaming table according to Appendix 59 or 60,
When the twenty-second notice icon is consumed as the notice icon, the first moving means effect is not performed.
A game table characterized by that.

  The first moving means effect may be performed even if the 22nd notice icon is consumed, or another effect (or effect display) is displayed when the 22nd notice icon is consumed. May be performed.

(Appendix 62)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 59 to 61,
Equipped with operating means,
The movable means is the operation means,
The first movable means effect is an effect in which the aspect of the operating means changes from the first aspect to the second aspect,
A game table characterized by that.

  Here, “change” means deformation, displacement, movement, and operation.

(Appendix 63)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 59 to 62,
A second movable means,
The movable means is a first movable means,
As the notice icon digesting effect, an effect by the second moving means (hereinafter, referred to as "second moving means effect") may be performed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 64)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
When the big hit symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display") that is the target of prefetching is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the end, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "a plurality of notice icons") may be consumed,
In the case where the second symbol variable display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variable display and the end of the second symbol variable display. May be displayed,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon increase suggestion display,
The notice icon increase suggestion display is a display suggesting that the notice icon may be displayed,
The notice icon increase suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays,
A game table characterized by that.

  Note that the notice icon may not be displayed even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed, or the notice icon may be always displayed when the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed.

  Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed only once in the symbol variation display, or the notice icon increase suggestion display may be always displayed in only one symbol variation display.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is not displayed, or the notice icon may not be displayed unless the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed.

(Appendix 65)
The gaming table described in appendix 64,
In the symbol variation display performed before the second symbol variation display, the advance notice icon increase suggestion display is configured to end,
A game table characterized by that.

  The change in which the display of the advance notice icon increase suggestion display ends may be the second symbol change display. In this case, it may be possible to expect that the notice icon may be displayed until the end.

(Supplementary note 66) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 64 or 65,
One of the eleventh number of the notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed as the notice icon,
A game table characterized by that.

  The advance notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display indicating that the advance notice icon is increased by one.

  Further, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice increase notice display may not be increased.

  Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be a notice of gasse that the notice icon does not increase.

  Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display suggesting that a plurality of notice icons increase. In this case, for example, when the number of the notice icons suggested in the notice icon increase suggestion display is three, only two may be increased.

  Further, notice icons other than the notice icon suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be increased.

(Appendix 67)
The gaming table according to appendix 64 or 65,
A game in which the twelfth number of the notice icons among the eleventh number of the notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed as the notice icon. Stand.

(Appendix 68)
Display means,
Hold display means,
A gaming machine equipped with
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a hold display of a number corresponding to the number of hold,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
When the pending display (hereinafter, referred to as "second pending display") of the big hit symbol variable display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variable display") that is the target of prefetching is displayed, the first From the start of the variable display of symbols to the end of the second variable display of symbols, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) may be consumed,
When the second hold display is displayed, the plurality of notice icons are newly displayed between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display in which the second hold display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 69)
The gaming table according to appendix 68,
The second hold display is a display that may be displayed in a prefetch display mode,
In the symbol variation display in which the second hold display is displayed, the second hold display may be displayed in the prefetch display mode, the gaming table.

(Appendix 70)
The gaming table according to appendix 68 or 69,
In the case where the pending display (hereinafter referred to as the "fourth pending display") of the lost symbol variable display (hereinafter referred to as the "fourth symbol variable display") that is the target of prefetching is displayed, From the start of the symbol variation display to the end of the fourth symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 71)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is an explanation display,
The first display is a display displayed in the first display area when displayed,
The second display is a display displayed in the second display area when displayed,
The notice icon, when displayed, is an icon displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area,
A game table characterized by that.

  The first display may be an explanatory display different from the second display, or may be a non-explanatory display.

  Moreover, the second display may be a display showing the current situation such as a tutorial display or a stage name, or may be a display of the effect mode name of the selectable effect mode. Here, in the effect mode, for example, a mode for changing the frequency of change of the display mode of the hold icon, a mode for changing the operation frequency of the effect movable body, or a frequency of occurrence of one-shot notification effect There is a mode for making it.

  The display position of the notice icon may be closer to the second display area than the start position of the animation that appears when the notice icon is displayed. The display position of the icon may be closer to the second display area.

  Further, here, the “preliminary icon” may be only one preliminary icon, only some of the plural preliminary icons, or all of the plural preliminary icons. It may be a notice icon. In addition, the “trailer icon” may be only the trailer icon displayed first among the plurality of trailer icons, or a part of the trailer icon including the trailer icon displayed first among the plurality of trailer icons. It may be an icon.

  Further, the display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may completely match, or even if a part of the display period of the first display overlaps with the display period of the second display. Alternatively, part of the display period of the second display may overlap with the display period of the first display. Further, the display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may not overlap.

  In addition, the notice icon may or may not be displayed during the display period of the first display. Further, the notice icon may or may not be displayed during the display period of the second display.

  Further, the second display and the notice icon do not necessarily have to be displayed at the same time.

  Further, the display frequency may be different between the first display and the second display. For example, if the display frequency of the second display is higher than that of the first display, the line of sight of the notice icon is guided. May be easy. Further, the first display area and the second display area may have different sizes, or the first display area and the second display area may have different roles. For example, the notice display may not be performed in the first display area, but the notice display may be performed in the second display area.

(Appendix 72)
The gaming table according to appendix 71,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 73)
The gaming table according to appendix 71 or 72,
The first display is a variable icon display,
The explanation display is an explanation display regarding the notice icon,
The notice icon may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the second display (hereinafter, referred to as “first part”),
When the notice icon is consumed, the overlap of the second display with the first portion is eliminated.
A game table characterized by that.

  According to this gaming table, by displaying in the second display area in which the notice icon related to the relevant symbol and the subsequent symbol variation display is explained rather than the change icon, the knowledge about the notice icon is deepened. At the same time, even if the result of the symbol variation display is a loss, it may be possible to newly give expectation to the symbol variation display in which the notice icon displayed as the prefetch notice display is consumed.

  Note that the entire second display may be displayed by eliminating the overlap with the first portion.

  Further, during the period in which the variable icon is displayed, the variable icon may be able to at least suggest an expectation for the big hit in the symbol variable display.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display or may be consumed in the symbol variation display that is the subject of the look-ahead.

  Further, the notice icon may be surely consumed in the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching, or the notice icon may not be consumed in the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching.

  Further, the notice icon may be configured to be able to be displayed only in a single number, or may be configured to be able to be displayed in a plurality. Here, in the case of displaying a plurality of advance notice icons, the advance notice icon may be displayed up to a predetermined upper limit number, or the advance notice icon may be displayed indefinitely without setting the upper limit number. Good.

(Appendix 74)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 71 to 73,
In the state where the notice icon is displayed, the display of the second display may be started,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 75)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 71 to 73,
The gaming table, wherein the second display is not started in a state where the notice icon is displayed.

(Appendix 76)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 71 to 75,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is a notice display,
The gaming table, wherein when the third display is displayed, the third display is displayed in the second display area.

(Appendix 77)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 71 to 76,
The second display area is an area divided by a line,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 78)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 71 to 77,
As described in appendix 71, "the notice icon is an icon displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area when displayed" means "the notice icon. Is displayed in the second display area when displayed ".
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 79)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 71 to 78,
The symbol variation display that is a big hit is more frequently consumed by the notice icon than the symbol variation display that is lost.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 80)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying an explanation display of the notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
One of the plurality of types of explanation display is a first explanation display,
The first explanation display is an explanation display regarding the notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
The big hit variation has a larger number of digesting the notice icon than the loss variation,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 81)
The gaming machine according to appendix 80,
The game table, wherein the notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in a display area (hereinafter, referred to as "first display area") in which the first explanation display is displayed.

(Appendix 82)
The gaming table according to appendix 81,
In a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first explanation display is not displayed in the first explanation display area,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 83)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 80 to 82,
One of the plurality of types of explanation display is a second explanation display,
The second explanation display is a display showing the current performance stage,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in a display area in which the second explanation display is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as “second display area”),
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 84)
The gaming table according to Appendix 83,
Even when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the production stage changes,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 85)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 80 to 84,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons (hereinafter, referred to as “plurality of types of notice icons”) as the notice icon.
One of the plurality of types of notice icons is the first notice icon,
One of the plurality of types of notice icons is a second notice icon,
The first notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the first effect,
The second notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the second effect,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 86)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
The notice icon is a different icon from the hold icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is an explanation display,
The first display is a display displayed in the first display area in the display means,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the first display area when displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 87)
The gaming table according to Appendix 86,
The gaming table, wherein the first display is not displayed when the notice icon is displayed.

(Appendix 88)
The gaming table according to Appendix 87,
When the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may restart.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 89)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 86 to 88,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display displayed in the first display area when displayed,
The explanation display is an explanation display regarding the notice icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 90)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 86 to 89,
The display means is a means configured by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means,
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying a performance display,
The third display means is a means capable of displaying a display matched with the display of the second display means,
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a partial area of the third display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 91)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 86 to 90,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is an explanation display,
The third display is a display displayed in the second display area in the display means,
The game table, wherein the notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the second display area.

(Appendix 92)
The gaming table according to Appendix 91,
In a state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the third display is not displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

  In the above description, the first tutorial display may be a display including a display explaining the character displayed on the second display means.

  Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display related to the effect display being executed.

  Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display indicating the probability of probability change.

  In addition, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display regarding a reach jackpot expectation level.

  Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display relating to the jackpot expectation of the character.

  Further, the first tutorial display may be a display configured not to be displayed at the same time as the first notice display.

  It should be noted that the term of the notice icon explained so far is given for the sake of convenience, and does not narrow the interpretation. For example, the notice icon is named for convenience of display (motif). When the notice icon is a tool, it may be called a notice item, and when the notice icon is a character, it is called a notice character. In some cases, when the notice icon indicates a skill, it may be referred to as a notice skill, and when the notice icon is a box-shaped, it may be referred to as a notice box. , Notice medal). In addition, the term “preliminary notice” in the notice icons is given only for the sake of convenience, and does not narrow the interpretation. For example, it may be referred to as a charge item or a stock item for indicating that it is to be stored.

(Appendix 93)
A plurality of operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
A production means capable of executing the first production,
A gaming machine equipped with
One of the plurality of operating means is a first operating means,
One of the plurality of operating means is a second operating means,
By operating the first operating means, it is possible to make settings relating to the gaming table,
In the first effective period, when both the first operation means and the second operation means are in a state of being operated, the first effect is configured to be performed,
In the first effective period, if only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is being operated, the first effect is not performed. Is composed of,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 94)
The gaming table according to Appendix 93,
A display means capable of displaying the first display is provided,
The first display is a display urging to operate both the first operation means and the second operation means,
The first display is a display including an image imitating the first operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “first image”),
The first display is a display including an image imitating the second operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “second image”),
The first display is a display including a valid period display regarding the first valid period,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 95)
The gaming machine according to appendix 94, wherein the valid period display in the first display is one,
The valid period display is a display indicating the remaining period of the first valid period,
The effective period display is a display that does not disappear when only one operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated,
The valid period display is a display that disappears by operating both the first operating means and the second operating means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 96)
The gaming table according to appendix 94 or 95,
The first image is an image that does not disappear when only the first operating means of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated,
The second image is an image that does not disappear when only the second operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated,
The first image is an image that disappears by operating both the first operating means and the second operating means,
The second image is an image that disappears by operating both the first operating means and the second operating means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 97)
The gaming table described in Appendix 94,
The valid period display in the first display is two,
One of the two valid period displays is a valid period display corresponding to the first operation means (hereinafter referred to as "first valid period display"),
One of the two valid period displays is a valid period display corresponding to the second operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "second valid period display"),
The first valid period display is a display that disappears by operating both the first operating means and the second operating means,
The second effective period display is a display that disappears by operating both the first operating means and the second operating means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 98)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 97,
The first valid period display is a display that does not disappear when only the first operating means of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated,
The first valid period display is a display that does not disappear when only the second operating means of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated,
The first image is a display that does not disappear when only the first operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated,
The second image is a display that does not disappear when only the second operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated,
The first image is a display that disappears by operating both the first operating means and the second operating means,
The second image is a display that disappears by operating both the first operating means and the second operating means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Supplementary note 99) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 93 to 98,
The “setting operation relating to the gaming table” described in appendix 93 is an eco-mode setting operation.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 100)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 93 to 98,
The “setting operation relating to the gaming table” described in appendix 93 is a setting operation of time setting,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 101)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 93 to 100,
The first operation means is a button,
The second operation means is a button,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 102)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 93 to 101,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 103)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 93 to 101,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 104)
A gaming table provided with a plurality of operating means provided at a position operable by a player,
One of the plurality of operating means is a first operating means,
One of the plurality of operating means is a second operating means,
During the first valid period, when both the first operating means and the second operating means are being operated, a notification of the operation result (hereinafter referred to as “first notification”) is performed. Is configured to be
In the first valid period, if only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is being operated, the first notification is not issued. Consists of
In the second effective period, when the first operating means is being operated, notification of the operation result (hereinafter, referred to as "second notification") is configured to be performed,
The first valid period and the second valid period are different periods,
The aspect of the first operating means in the first effective period and the aspect of the first operating means in the second effective period may be different,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 105)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 104,
The first notification is a production,
The second notification is a notification of the result of the setting operation,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 106)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 104,
The first notification is a first effect,
The second notification is a second effect,
The first effect and the second effect are different effects,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 107)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 104 to 106,
The first operation means is a means capable of taking a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
The first operating means is an operating means configured to take the first aspect more easily than the second aspect in the first effective period,
The first operating means is an operating means configured to take the second aspect more easily than the first aspect during the second effective period,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 108)
The gaming table according to Appendix 107,
The first aspect is an aspect in which the first operating means emits light in a first emission pattern,
The second aspect is an aspect in which the first operating means emits light in a second emission pattern,
The first light emitting pattern and the light emitting pattern of the valley are different light emitting patterns,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 109)
The gaming table according to Appendix 107,
The first operation means is a means in which at least a part of the first operation means is configured to be capable of vibrating,
The first aspect is an aspect in which at least a part of the first operating means vibrates,
The second aspect is an aspect in which the first operating means does not vibrate,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 110)
The gaming table according to Appendix 107,
The first operation means is a means in which at least a part of the first operation means is configured to be rotatable,
The first aspect is an aspect in which at least a part of the first operating means rotates,
The second aspect is an aspect in which the first operating means does not rotate,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 111)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 107 to 110,
Equipped with symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display,
The first operation means is a means that may take the first aspect in the first effective period,
When the second operation mode is adopted by the first operation means during the first effective period, the symbols corresponding to the big hits are more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display when the second operation mode is employed. , A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 112)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 104 to 111,
The first operation means is a button,
The second operation means is a button,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 113)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 104 to 112,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 114)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 104 to 112,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 115)
A gaming table provided with a plurality of operating means provided at a position operable by a player,
One of the plurality of operating means is a first operating means,
One of the plurality of operating means is a second operating means,
In the first effective period, when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, it is configured to notify the operation result,
In the first valid period, when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is being operated, the operation result is not notified. Is configured,
In the second effective period, when the first operating means is in a state of being operated, it is configured to notify the operation result,
The first valid period and the second valid period are different periods,
The aspect of the second operating means in the first effective period and the aspect of the second operating means in the second effective period may be different,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 116)
A plurality of operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
A production means capable of executing a plurality of productions,
A gaming machine equipped with
One of the plurality of operating means is a first operating means,
One of the plurality of operating means is a second operating means,
One of the plurality of effects is the first effect,
In the first effective period, when both the first operation means and the second operation means are in a state of being operated, the first effect is configured to be performed,
In the first effective period, if only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is being operated, the first effect is not performed. Is composed of,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 117)
The gaming table described in appendix 116,
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect, the first effect and the second effect are different effects,
In the first effective period, the second effect is configured to be performed when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 118)
The gaming table according to Appendix 117,
The rendering means is a means including a plurality of means,
One of the plurality of means is a first means,
One of the plurality of means is a second means,
The first means and the second means are different means,
The first effect is an effect performed using both the first means and the second means,
The second effect is an effect performed using one of the first means and the second means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 119)
The gaming table according to Appendix 118,
The first means is a display means,
The second means is a movable means,
The second effect is an effect that is performed without using the second means,
The first effect is an effect including at least a part of the movable means that is movable in front of a display area of the display means (hereinafter, referred to as “movable effect”).
The first effect is an effect including a display effect related to the movable effect on the display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 120)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 116 to 119,
A game machine characterized in that setting operation relating to the game machine is possible by operation of the first operation means.

(Appendix 121)
The gaming machine described in Appendix 120,
The “setting operation relating to the gaming table” described in Appendix 120 is an eco mode setting operation.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 122)
The gaming machine described in Appendix 120,
The “setting operation relating to the gaming table” described in Appendix 120 is a setting operation of time setting,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 123)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 116 to 122,
A second display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first display,
One of the plurality of displays is a second display, and the first display includes a display imitating the first operation unit (hereinafter, referred to as “first image”). And
The second display is a display including an image imitating the second operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “second image”),
The second display is a display that does not include the first image,
The first display is a display displayed in relation to the setting operation,
The first display is a display that may not be displayed in the first valid period,
The second display is a display that may be displayed during the first valid period,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 124)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 116 to 122,
A second display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first display,
One of the plurality of displays is a second display,
One of the plurality of displays is a third display,
The first display is a display including an image imitating the first operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “first image”),
The second display is a display including an image imitating the second operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “second image”),
The second display is a display that does not include the first image,
The third display is a valid period display according to the first valid period,
The first display is a display that may not be displayed in the first valid period,
The second display is a display that may not be displayed in the first valid period,
The third display is a display that may be displayed even in a state where the first display and the second display are not displayed in the first valid period,
A game characterized by that.

(Appendix 125)
The gaming table according to Appendix 124,
In the first valid period, both images of the first image and the second image may not be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 126)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 116 to 125,
The first operation means is a button,
The second operation means is a button,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 127)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 116 to 126,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 128)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 116 to 126,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that.

  In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 is described as an example. However, for example, a game ball is enclosed in the body frame of the pachinko machine, and the enclosed ball is circulated in the pachinko machine body for use. The present invention can also be applied to an automatic pachinko machine, and this encapsulated pachinko machine may use an encapsulated ball as a launch ball, and payout of the ball may be performed by credit.

  Further, the game table of the present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to, for example, a spinning machine (slot machine) that uses a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 144, a slot machine (rotating cylinder game machine) as a game table to which the present invention can be applied will be described. First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 1000 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 144. It should be noted that this figure is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 according to the present embodiment as seen from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 144 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of opening and closing with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 144), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011, right reel 1012) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored, and It is configured to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by driving means such as a stepping motor.

  In this embodiment, each pattern is printed on a strip-shaped member at an appropriate number of intervals, and the strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame member to form each reel 1010 to 1012. The symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013 by the player, and a total of 9 symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols seen by the player is changed. That is, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  A reel backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed in the symbol display window 1013 is arranged on the back surface of each reel 1010 to 1012. It is desirable that the reel backlight be shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be uniformly illuminated. An optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1010 to 1012 inside the slot machine 1000. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of the optical sensor are provided. A light-shielding piece of a fixed length provided on the reel passes between the gaps. The position in the rotation direction of the symbol on the reel is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the pay line.

  The pay line display lamp 1020 is a lamp that shows the pay line 1014 that is activated. The winning line to be activated is predetermined according to the number of medals bet as the game medium. There are five pay lines 1014. For example, when one bet on a medal is bet, the horizontal pay line on the middle row is valid, and when two bets are placed on a medal, an upper horizontal pay line and a lower horizontal pay line are added. When 3 coins are valid and 3 medals are bet, 5 lines to which the rightward winning line and the rightward winning line are added are valid as winning lines. The number of pay lines 1014 is not limited to five lines. For example, when one bet is placed on a medal, the horizontal pay line in the middle row, the horizontal pay line in the upper row, the horizontal pay line in the lower row, and the right line Five lines of the downward winning line and the rightward winning line may be valid as the winning line. Hereinafter, the activated winning line may be referred to as an activated line.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertion possible lamp 1024 is a lamp for informing that the game medal can be inserted by the player. The re-play lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game can be re-played (there is no need to insert medals) when the re-play, which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a production lamp.

  The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) that are electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, each time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, one coin is inserted up to a maximum of three coins. When the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, two coins are inserted, and when the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed, three coins are inserted. It is designed to be thrown in. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. It should be noted that the game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a prescribed number of medals are inserted, a game start is notified that the operation for starting the game is possible. The lamp 1021 is turned on.

  The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically by using the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, and an actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1041. Is. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display device 126 is a display device for displaying various kinds of internal information (for example, the number of paid-out medals during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the payout number display 1027 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of operating means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reel targeted for the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop reel, the reel targeted for the second stop operation is referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel targeted for the third stop operation is referred to as a third stop reel. It should be noted that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button that is pressed to remove a medal when the inserted medal is jammed. The settlement button 1034 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and bets that have been bet, and discharging from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

  On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 is provided as an example of an operating means. The chance button 1100 may be operated in relation to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012, or may be operated in relation to the display on the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states as in the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment, and the state may change during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100.

  The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is an operation button for calling a user menu to be described later (for example, a menu for setting the game history information of the individual player), and includes a plurality of buttons. In the present embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to the operating means.

  Below the stop button unit 1036, a title panel 1062 for displaying a model name and affixing various certificates is provided, and a title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. A medal payout port 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided below the title panel 1062.

  The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for encouraging a game. A rendering device 1060 is provided above the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided above the rendering device 1060. The rendering device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 that includes two right shutters 1063a and a left shutter 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown in the drawings) disposed behind the shutter 1063. , A production image display device), and when the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b open outward in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed on the front surface of the slot machine 1000 (game). It is a structure that appears on the person side).

  It should be noted that the liquid crystal display device is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effect images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7 segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display. It may be a reel (drum) or a display device including a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the whole of the display screen is visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. It is also possible to provide a decoration (not shown) on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration so that the display screen looks odd. In this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but it may be a curved surface.

<Information display button>
145 (a) is an external perspective view of the information display button 1046, and FIG. 145 (b) is a top view of the information display button 1046. As shown in FIG. 145, the information display button 1046 includes a plurality of buttons on a substantially rectangular plane of the information display button unit 1050. That is, the information display button 1046 is a general term for a plurality of buttons provided on the information display button unit 1050, and more specifically, a determination (call) button 1046O provided at substantially the center of the information display button unit 1050 and a determination ( An upper selection button 1046U, a lower selection button 1046D, a left selection button 1046L, and a right selection button 1046R, which are provided separately on the left side of the call button 1046O, and a cancel, which is provided separately on the right side of the decision (call) button 1046O. And a button 1046C.

  The slot machine 1000 configured as described above is also configured to be able to perform the above-described eco mode setting, original (daitomo) mode setting, time setting, and the like. For example, when a predetermined operation in the slot machine 1000 (for example, an operation of the chance button 1100 in the standby state) is performed, the setting screen is displayed (an example of notification of the result of the setting operation), and information is displayed on the setting screen. The various settings described above can be made by appropriately operating the buttons constituting the button 1046.

  In addition, for example, in the effect of requesting a button operation, a specific button effect in which both the chance button 1100 and a button (for example, the right selection button 1046R) forming the information display button 1046 are simultaneously operated is performed. It may be configured. Buttons requesting the operation are the buttons forming the chance button 1100, the medal insertion button 1032, the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and the information display button 1046 (for example, the upper selection button 1046U, the lower selection button 1046D, the left selection button 1046L, the right button). A selection button 1046R, a decision (call) button 1046O, a cancel button 1046C) can be appropriately combined. Further, it may be operated in combination with the start lever 1035. Further, the title panel 1062 may be configured to be capable of being pressed, and a specific button presentation may be performed by operating the title panel 1062 in combination with other buttons or the start lever 1035.

  Further, in the above-described specific button effect, after the start lever 1035 is operated to start the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012, the first stop operation is performed and the first stop reel is stopped, and then the second stop operation is performed. It is possible to start at any timing after the third stop operation is performed and the third stop operation is performed after the second stop reel is stopped. Alternatively, the operation may be started during a so-called freeze period in which the operation of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is not accepted for a certain period of time. Further, an RTC (Real Time Clock) may be provided so that it can be started in the simultaneous production executed when a predetermined start time is detected by the RTC.

  Further, the operation valid period in which the button operation can be accepted may be forcibly ended by various operations controlled by the main control circuit side.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of operating means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reel targeted for the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop reel, the reel targeted for the second stop operation is referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel targeted for the third stop operation is referred to as a third stop reel. It should be noted that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

  As above, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. It should be noted that even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, and supplements, the constituent requirements may be applied to other embodiments, modifications, and supplements.

Next, with reference to FIG. 146 to FIG. 245, another game table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning drum game machine such as a slot machine) will be described. 146 to 245 are basically used only in the description using FIGS. 146 to 245, and even when duplicated reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the same reference numerals are used in FIGS. In the description using FIG. 245, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 146 to 245 are given priority.
[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a game table (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning drum game machine such as a slot machine) according to the first embodiment to which the present invention can be applied will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 146. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side). The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store. The main body 104 is called an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and is a vertically-long rectangular gaming machine base shaft body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. Further, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, through a hinge portion 112 so as to have a lock function and to be openable / closable. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) for detecting the opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  In addition, the front frame door 106 is a passage that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) in a portion below the opening 116 and guide the game balls to the launch device 110. Is provided, a lower plate 128 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and a game ball stored in the upper plate 126 is discharged to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation. A ball removal button 130, a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by the player's operation, and to the launcher 110 by the player's operation. A ball firing handle 134 that launches the game ball guided to the game area 124 of the game board 200, and a cha that gives a change to the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (not shown in FIG. 146) by the operation of the player. Button 136, a chance button lamp 138 for causing the chance button 136 to emit light, a setting operation unit 137 capable of various settings by operation of a setter (for example, a player, a game shop clerk), and a card unit (CR unit). Ball lending operation button 140 for issuing a ball lending instruction, a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance, and a ball lending display section for displaying the player's balance and the state of the card unit ( (Not shown). Further, a lower plate full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided.

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push-button switch that can be pressed by a setting person, and includes a confirm (OK) button, an upper button located above the confirm button, a lower button located below the confirm button, and a confirm button. A right button located to the right of the button, a left button located to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button located further to the right of the right button are provided. Further, the setting operation unit 137 includes an operation unit sensor that detects pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which each button and operation unit sensor are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button that changes the effect mode of each effect device 206 (see FIG. 148) by the operation of the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. May be.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 147 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 146 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a ball tank 150 located below the ball tank 150 and formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

  The payout device 152 is made of a tubular member, and has a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside thereof. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have temporarily stayed are delivered one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal, and when the game ball is not passing, The other signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 149). The gaming ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) to reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The balls are paid out to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, a main board case 158 that houses a main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the overall game, and an effect based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300 A first sub that accommodates a first sub-board 160 that constitutes a first sub-control unit 400 that performs a control process and that includes a rotary-type volume adjustment switch 161 that adjusts the volume output from the pachinko machine 100 by the operation of a game shop clerk. A board case 162, a second sub-board case 166 for accommodating a second sub-board 164 that constitutes a second sub-control section 500 that performs a control process relating to an effect based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control section 400, An error release switch that configures a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls, and that cancels an error by the operation of a game shop clerk A payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 including 68, a launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that configures a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of a game ball, and a power supply for various electric gaming devices. And a RWM clear switch 180 for outputting a RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 for housing the power supply board 182, a CR interface section 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section 600 and the card unit, and a main board for outputting information of the pachinko machine 100 to an external hall computer or the like. 156, the first sub-board 160, etc. and the hall computer, etc. It is provided with a relay substrate 188, the to relay.

  The main board 156, the first sub-board 160, the second sub-board 164, etc. are provided on the back surface of the game board 200 because they need to be changed for each model, and the payout board 170, the launch board 174, the power supply board 182, etc. It is provided on the outer frame 102 because it is commonly used by a plurality of models.

  FIG. 148 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to define a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll. A rendering device 206 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative pattern display device 208 at substantially the center. The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, which will be described in detail later.

  The game board 200 of this example is a game board for so-called right-handed machines. In the right-handed machine, by changing the launch strength of the game ball by operating the ball firing handle 134, the falling path of the game ball is divided into a right path on the right side of the effect device 206 and a left path on the left side of the effect device 206. be able to. In this example, to a normal symbol starting port 228, a normal symbol starting port 229, a first special symbol starting port 230, a second special symbol starting port 232 (open state), variable winning a prize ports 234, 235 (open state), etc., which will be described later. The ease of entering the ball is different between the game ball falling on the right path and the game ball falling on the left path.

  For each of the normal symbol starting port 229, the second special symbol starting port 232 and the variable winning port 235, these normal symbol starting port 229, the second special symbol starting port 232 and the variable winning port 235 are arranged on the right path. Therefore, it is relatively easy to enter the game ball that falls on the right path, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter the game ball that drops on the left path. On the other hand, with respect to each of the normal symbol starting port 228, the first special symbol starting port 230 and the variable winning port 234, due to the presence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails 238, the warp device 242, etc., the game is dropped on the left side path. It is relatively easy to enter a ball, and it is relatively difficult to enter a game ball that falls down the right path. In this embodiment, a right-handed machine is used as an example, but a machine other than a right-handed machine may be used.

  The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for displaying various images (moving images or still images) used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b and The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it can be configured to display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  At the bottom of the game area 124, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220 and , A normal symbol holding lamp 216 and a high accuracy middle lamp 222 are provided. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as "general symbol", the special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol", the first special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 1", and the second special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 2".

  The general figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in the present embodiment.

  The public figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of public figure variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold, and in the present embodiment, up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of the general figure variable games. It is possible to hold it. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variation games (details described later) that are on hold, and in this embodiment, the special figure variation games are predetermined. It is possible to hold up to a number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is a high-probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low-probability state in which a big hit is hard to occur to a high probability state. Lights when changing to the probability state, and turns off when changing from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  Further, around the performance device 206, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a universal figure starting port 228, 229, a special figure 1 starting port 230, a special figure 2 starting port 232, and a variable. The winning openings 234 and 235 are arranged.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (in the general winning opening 226). When a prize is won), the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls are balls to be paid out to the player as compensation for winning (hereinafter, may be referred to as “prize balls”) and balls to be lent to the player (hereinafter, referred to as “rental ball”). May be included) and.

  The universal figure starting port 228 and the universal figure starting port 229 are constituted by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not the ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the form, one universal figure starting port 228 is arranged on the left side path of the game board 200, and one universal figure starting port 229 is arranged on the right side path. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the universal figure starting port 228 and the universal figure starting port 229 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the universal figure starting port 228 and the universal figure starting port 229, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special opening 1 starting port 230 is provided in the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. , The special figure variation game by the special figure 1 display device 212 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special figure 1 variation game") is started. Note that the ball that has entered the starting point 230 of Toku-zu 1 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  Toku-zu 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (den Chu), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided on the right path. The special figure 2 starting opening 232 is provided with a pair of blade members 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right, and it is not possible to enter a ball while the blade member 232a is closed. When 210 hits and displays a stop symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The special figure variation game by the special figure 2 display device 214 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special figure 2 variation game") is started. In addition, the ball entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are called big winning openings or attackers, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the center of the game board 200, and the variable winning opening 235 is on the right path. Only one of them is installed. The variable winning a prize ports 234 and 235 are respectively provided with openable and closable door members, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the door members are closed. When the special figure display device stops and displays the big hit symbol in the special figure variation game, for example, one door member of the variable winning a prize ports 234 and 235 has a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing). Open and close a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) for 1.5 seconds. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234, 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The balls that enter the variable winning openings 234 and 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged near these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  In the pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength according to the operation amount of the ball launch handle 134 of the player, and launches the launch rod. The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the 146 and the launching mallet 148 to be launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and wins the winning holes (general winning holes 226, variable winning holes 234, 235) and Out by simply winning at the starting openings (special opening 1 starting opening 230, special opening 2 opening 232), without winning any winning openings or starting openings, or by simply passing through the universal starting openings 228, 229. Reach mouth 240.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the rendering device 206, the warp device 242 (242a, 242b) and the front stage 244 are arranged in the rolling area of the game ball, and the rendering movable body 224 is placed in the rolling area of the gaming ball. It is arranged. Further, a fourth symbol display device 248 for displaying the fourth symbol is arranged above and to the right of the production movable body 224. The fourth symbol display device 248 includes two square lamps. The two lamps are arranged vertically side by side. For example, LEDs are used as the light sources of these two lamps. The upper lamp corresponds to Toku-zu 1, and the lower lamp corresponds to Toku-zu 2. The fourth symbol display device 248 may be provided with only one common lamp corresponding to both Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. Further, the fourth symbol may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, as in the present example, the fourth symbol display device may be provided in the rendering device 206 (center accessory). Further, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter may be referred to as a door or a shutter) are arranged on the back side of the rendering device 206. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative pattern display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the rendering device 206, to the front stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The front stage 244 is capable of rolling a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball ridden by a nail or the like of the game board 200, and the passing ball is located at the center of the front stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to make it easier to enter the ball 230.

  The production movable body 224 of this example includes a horizontally elongated flat panel on which the model name of the pachinko machine 100 and the like are displayed. The production movable body 224 is movable by a stepping motor (not shown) so that it can move in the vertical direction in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b respectively move to the left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The shielding device 246 shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208, when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the respective inner ends overlap. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner ends of the left door 246a and the right door 246b are slightly overlapped with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can see all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can each be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern the displayed decorative pattern is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may make a part of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 visible through the holes of the lattice, or the shoji part of the holes of the lattice is closed with a semitransparent lens body, The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji portions of the holes of the lattice are completely blocked (shielded), and the rear decorative pattern display device 208 is completely invisible. Good. The shielding device 246 of this example is configured to expose the lower end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 even when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 149. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a main sub-control unit that responds to a command transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is configured by a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. .

  First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, the number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  Further, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (counter circuit) used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value within a range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit has two built-in counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball that passes through each of the starting opening, the winning opening, and the variable winning opening, and the front frame door is opened. A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame open sensor, and a lower tray full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to a random value generation circuit 318 and a basic circuit 302. 322, a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214, and a predetermined figure A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a display device, for example, the universal figure display device 210, and various status display portions 328 (for example, the universal figure holding lamp 216, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, a high level). The driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the confirmation lamp 222 and the like, and various kinds of opening and closing drives for a predetermined movable member such as the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the door member of the variable winning port 234, 235. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere has won the special opening 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the counter value stored in the special figure 1 starting port 230. Stored in the register for use. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has been won in the special figure 2 starting port 232, the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 is similarly latched. The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 uses the information output circuit 336 to pachinko the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. Is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started).

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. It is possible to communicate with the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 sends commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although it is configured to be able to transmit a signal, the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured to be incapable of transmitting a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 may be performed by bidirectional communication.

  Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and the number of times. It is equipped with. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in different ROMs.

  Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and an amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, chance button lamp 138). A drive circuit 432 for controlling the drive of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, and an output from the speaker 120. The volume adjustment switch 161 (not shown in FIG. 149) for adjusting the volume to be output, an operation unit sensor (not shown) that detects pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and detection signals from these sensors. The sensor circuit 428 which outputs to the basic circuit 402 and the ROM 406 which is stored based on the signal from the CPU 404 Are connected to the VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display unit 208 generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 reads image data or the like, the.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. is doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like.

  In addition, the basic circuit 502, the drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, the effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, the detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Sensor circuit 518 for outputting to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game underframe lamp drive for controlling the game underframe lamp 542. A circuit 540 and a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 540 are connected.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the firing control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and based on the control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental ball. It is detected whether or not the payout is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The firing control unit 630 is a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 for instructing to permit or stop firing, and a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134 outputs the operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player. Control of a firing motor 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and control of a ball feeding device 634 that supplies a ball from the upper plate 126 to the launching device 110, based on a control signal that indicates a firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Condenser). In the present embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 causes the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the firing control. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to the unit 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

  Next, using FIG. 150 (a) to (d), the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative pattern display device 208, and the general figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are displayed in a stopped state. The types of diagrams and general drawings will be described. FIG. 150 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and FIG. 150 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. The special figure 1 variation game is started on condition that the first starting opening sensor detects that the ball has entered the special opening 1 starting opening 230, and the fact that the ball has entered the special opening 2 starting opening 232. 2 The special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the starting port sensor detects. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs "variable display of special figure 1" in which all the seven segments are turned on and one central segment is turned on. Further, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs "variable display of special figure 2" in which all seven segments are lit up and one central segment is lit up repeatedly. . These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of variable display of symbols in the present embodiment. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 has elapsed, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 After a lapse of time, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of the "variable display of special figure 1" until the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1 is stopped or displayed, or the "variable display of special figure 2" is started and the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 is changed. Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display according to the present embodiment, hereinafter, the stop symbol aspect of the special diagram 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after starting the "variable display of the special diagram 1 or 2". A series of display until the above is called a symbol fluctuation stop display. The symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 150 (a), seven types of special symbols “Special symbol A” to “Special symbol G” are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol fluctuation stop display of special symbol 1. In FIG. 150 (a), the white parts in the figure show the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black parts are the locations of the segments that are turned on. "Special drawing A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot design, "Special drawing B" is a 7R special jackpot design, and "Special drawing C" is a 7R jackpot design. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not to be a big hit in the special figure variation game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not to be a special jackpot and the number of rounds is determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the special figure variation game after the jackpot game is over. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state with a low probability is special This is called a low probability state. Further, after the 15R special jackpot game is over, after the 7R special jackpot game is over, and after the 7R jackpot game is over, both shift to a time saving state (electric support state). Although the time saving will be described later in detail, the time saving state is referred to as a high probability state of universal figure (hereinafter, may be referred to as “probability change of normal figure”), and the state not in the short period of time is referred to as low probability state of universal figure. The 15R special jackpot symbol "special map A" and the 7R special jackpot symbol "special map B" are symbols that become the special symbol high probability general symbol high probability state after the jackpot game, and are the 7R jackpot symbol. "Special map C" is a symbol that becomes a special map low probability general figure high probability state after the jackpot game is over. These "special drawing A", "special drawing B" and "special drawing C" are symbols in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively large.

  "Special drawing D" is a 2R big hit symbol called sudden change, and is a special figure high probability general figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game. That is, “Special drawing D” is 2R, which is different from “Special drawing A” which is 15R and “Special drawing B” which is 7R.

  "Special figure E" is a 2R jackpot pattern called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation. As will be described later, when "Special map E" is stopped and displayed in the special map low probability general figure low probability state, the special map high probability general figure low probability state (so-called after the jackpot game (opening time 100 ms x 2R) ends. If the "special map E" is stopped and displayed in a state other than the special probability low probability state, the special map high probability normal state is reached after the jackpot game (opening time 29000 ms x 2R) ends. The state transitions to the high probability state (see FIGS. 156 (a) and 156 (b)). That is, "special map E" is a game state when the game is stopped and displayed (in this example, whether or not it is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state) It is a different design.

  "Special map F" is a small hit symbol, which is a low probability state of special maps and low probability general figures. In addition, "special figure G" is a deviating symbol, which is a symbol having a relatively small advantage for the player.

  In FIG. 150 (b), four types of special drawings, “special drawing a” to “special drawing d”, are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol fluctuation stop display of special drawing 2. "Special drawing a" is a 15R special jackpot design, "Special drawing b" is a 7R special jackpot design, "Special drawing c" is a 7R jackpot design, and "Special drawing d" is a falling design. In the present embodiment, 7 types of special drawings (5 types of which are big hits) are used as the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 while special figure 2 is used. As for the stop symbol mode, four types of special drawings (special figure a) to “special figure d” (three kinds of which are big hits) are used. With such a configuration, it may be possible to provide a difference in advantage between the special figures 1 and 2 without changing the probability of a big hit and the probability of a probability change of the big hit. In this example, the big hit in Toku-zu 1 includes a sudden probability change and latent probability change in which almost no ball is thrown out, whereas the big hit in Toku-zu 2 does not include a sudden probability change or latent probability change. The advantage of Special Figure 2 is higher than that of Special Figure 1.

  FIG. 150 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. The "decoration 1" to "decoration 9" and "decoration 10" represent the numbers "1" to "9" and "0", respectively. The special starting point 230 or the special drawing 2 starting opening 232 has won a ball, that is, the first starting opening sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting opening 230, or the special drawing 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on condition that the second starting hole sensor detects that the ball has entered the starting symbol 232. In the pattern display area, the display is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... → "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... "Variable display of symbols" is performed.

  And, "Special drawing A" 15R special jackpot, "Special drawing B" 7R special jackpot, "Special drawing C" 7R jackpot, "Special drawing a" 15R special jackpot, "Special drawing b" 7R special jackpot , In the case of notifying the 7R big hit of "special figure c", a symbol combination in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" or "decoration 2-" Decoration 2-decoration 2 ") is stopped and displayed. In order to explicitly notify the 15R special jackpot of "Special drawing A" and the 15R special jackpot of "Special drawing a", a symbol combination in which three identical odd-numbered decorative patterns are lined up (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3- "Decorative 3" and "Decorative 7-Decorative 7-Decorative 7") are stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when notifying a 2R big hit called "special figure E" latent probability change (hidden probability change) or a small hit of "special figure F", "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. To do. When notifying a sudden 2R big hit of "special drawing D", "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying that the "special drawing G" and the "special drawing d" are out, symbol combinations other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 150 (c) are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 150 (d) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a general figure. There are three types of stop display modes of the public figure of the present embodiment, "Public figure A" and "Public figure B" which are winning symbols, and "Public figure C" which is a deviating symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor detects that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228 and the universal figure starting port 229, the universal figure display device 210 has all seven segments turned on and one in the center. Repeatedly illuminate the segment of "Public variable display". Then, when notifying that the universal figure variation game is won, "Public figure A" or "Special figure B" is stopped and displayed, and when notifying that the universal figure variation game is out, "General figure C" is stopped and displayed. To do. Also in FIG. 150 (d), the white portions in the figure show the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions show the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. 151. It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, to which this activation signal is input, performs a reset start by a reset interrupt and executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  First, in step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Allows operations and sets initial values. In the present embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 following step S103, it is determined whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply which the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. When it is less than (9 V in this example), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff), the step is performed. It proceeds to S107. Even when the power does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value that determines a period for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, (1) Outputting a clear signal from the sub-control unit 400), setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S109 following step S107, it is determined whether or not the power is restored to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off). When it is set to the initial state, the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113). Specifically, first, whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the clerk of the game store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 is ON (indicating that the operation has been performed). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary, and when the RAM clear signal is on (when RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not required), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. When the power status information is information indicating suspend, 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is all added to a 1-byte configuration register whose initial value is 0. Thus, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether the calculated checksum result has a specific value (for example, 0) (whether the checksum result is normal). Then, when the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to restore the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is the specific value. When the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the pachinko machine 100.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. When the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was cut off. That is, the processing is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been returned to the state when the power was cut off. Sent to.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, the normal recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, the command setting transmission process in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 ( In step S233), it is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S115, which is subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value updating process, the initial values of the four random number counters for respectively generating the universal figure winning random number value, the universal figure random number value, the special figure 1 random number value, and the special figure 2 random number value are generated. The four initial value generating random number counters, and the two random number counters for generating each of the universal figure variation time determining random number value and the special figure variation time determining random number value are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the random number value for determining the universal figure fluctuation time is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the random number value for determining the universal figure fluctuation time, and is acquired. The value is incremented by 1 and stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generating random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The initial value generating random number counter is also updated in the basic random number initial value updating process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the timer interrupt process that starts at a predetermined cycle.

  Next, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in this example, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt processing is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Is started in a predetermined cycle.

  First, in step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT is periodically scheduled so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this example) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (processing abnormality is not detected). (In this example, once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main controller timer interrupt), the restart is performed.

  In step S205 following step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, lower tray full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The presence / absence of a detection signal is input and monitored, and stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sensor 320. Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, the RAM 308 stores information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) of the previous two times in the RAM 308. Is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is stored. ) The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in) is read from the present detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, information about the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previously-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the present detection signal storage area is compared, and It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of No. 1 matches the winning determination pattern information. While one gaming ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly activated at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main controller timer interrupt process is activated, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed in step S205. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after the detection signal is absent, it is determined that the winning is achieved.

  The ROM 306 of the main controller 300 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In step S205, information regarding the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, there is no previous-previous-time detection signal, there is a previous-time detection signal, and there is a present-time detection signal). If it matches with the information indicating that), the general winning opening 226, the variable winning openings 234, 235, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special drawing 2 starting opening 232, or the universal figure starting opening 228. It is determined that there is a passage at 229. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228, 229 have been won. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor that detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, there is a winning in the general winning opening 226. However, if the information about the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. The process is branched to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with the winning in the mouth 226.

  Further, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before last, no detection signal before, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a single winning, it is not determined that there is a winning until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination clear pattern information, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 following step S205, basic random number initial value updating processing is performed, and in subsequent step S209, basic random number updating processing is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and then the general-purpose winning random number value and the general-purpose random number to be used in the main control unit 300. The four random number counters for generating the random number value, the special figure 1 random number value, and the special figure 2 random number value are updated. For example, if the numeric range that can be taken as the universal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Further, when it is determined that the random number counter makes one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the random number counter storage area is acquired. Set to.

  For example, the result obtained by obtaining a value from a random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value that varies in a numerical range of 0 to 100 and adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter that corresponds to the random number counter for general-purpose winning random value generation. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the universal random number I'll do it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value has made one round, a random number counter for generating a universal figure random number value, a special figure 1 random number value generator The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number and the random number counter for generating the random number for the special figure 2 have each made one round. In the present embodiment, the counter for obtaining the special figure 1 random number value and the counter for obtaining the special figure 2 random number value are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, which is subsequent to step S209, effect random number updating processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used in the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213 subsequent to step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update processing, the universal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for varying / stopping the symbol on the universal symbol display device 210, and the time for varying / stopping the symbol on the special figure 1 display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for timing the time to change / stop display of symbols on the special figure 2 display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time, predetermined Various timers including a closing time, a timer for measuring a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, which is subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this prize hole counter updating process, when there is a prize in the prize holes 226, 234, 235 and the starting holes 230, 232, 228, 229, the prize balls provided in the RAM 308 for each winning hole or each starting hole. The value of the number storage area is read, and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217, which is subsequent to step S215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this prize winning process, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 starting opening 230, the special figure 2 starting opening 232, the universal figure starting openings 228, 229, and the variable winning openings 234, 235 have been won. Here, it is determined using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  If there is a winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the corresponding special figure 1 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 starting port 230 of the random number generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 The special value 1 winning random number value generated by performing a predetermined process on the value stored in the corresponding built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and the special value 1 special value random number counter for random number generation is provided in the RAM 308. One random number value is acquired and stored in the special figure 1 random number value storage area in the order of acquisition. A set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random number storage area is stored by the same number as the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, the data of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value with the highest (first) holding order is erased each time the number of special figure 1 holding decreases by one. At the same time, the processing is performed such that the retention order of the data of the remaining special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value is incremented by one. In addition, each time the number of special maps 1 reserved increases by one, a new special map 1 is added to the next reservation order of the data of the special map 1 winning random number value and the special map 1 random number value with the lowest (last) reservation order. The data of the winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value pair are written.

  If there is a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the corresponding special figure 2 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the built-in counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 of the random value generation circuit 318. The special figure 2 winning random number value generated by subjecting the value stored in the value storage register to predetermined processing is acquired, and the special figure 2 random number value is acquired from the special figure 2 random number value generating random number counter provided in the RAM 308. Then, they are stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. A set of special figure 2 winning random number values and special figure 2 random number values in the special figure 2 random number storage area is stored by the same number as the special figure 2 holding number stored in the special figure 2 holding number storage area. In the special figure 2 random number storage area, each time the number of special figure 2 holding decreases by 1, the data of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value with the highest holding order is deleted and the remaining The special order 2 winning random number value and the special order 2 random number value data are processed so that the pending order of the data is moved up by one. In addition, each time the number of special map 2 held increases by one, a new special map 2 winning random number value is added to the next holding order of the data of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value with the lowest holding order. And the data of the special figure 2 random value set is written.

  Further, special figure 1 starting information (set of special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value) or special figure 2 starting information (set of special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value) is newly acquired. In this case, the special figure prefetching process is executed using the start information. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later.

  If there is a prize in the universal figure starting port 228 or universal figure starting port 229, and if the corresponding universal figure hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value from the universal figure winning random number generation random number counter It is obtained as a winning random number value, and the universal figure random number value is obtained from the universal figure random number generating random number counter provided in the RAM 308 and stored in the universal figure random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The same number of sets of the random numbers as the winning numbers for universal symbols and the random numbers for universal symbols in the universal symbol random number storage area are stored as many as the number of reserved universal symbols stored in the universal symbol reservation number storage area. In the universal figure random number storage area, each time the number of reserved universal figure numbers decreases by one, the data of the universal figure winning random number value and universal figure random number value with the highest (first) holding order is erased and the remaining The universal figure winning random number value and the universal figure random number value data are processed so that the holding order of the data is incremented by one. In addition, each time the number of reserved universal figures increases by one, a new universal figure winning random number value is added to the next pending order of the data of the universal figure winning random number value and the universal figure random number value of the lowest (last) pending order Data of a set of random numbers for general purpose is written. When the variable winning port 234 is won, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning port 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning port 234. When the variable winning port 235 is won, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning port 235 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning port 235.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, and the strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when it is on, it indicates the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 indicate the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 indicate encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221 subsequent to step S219, general-university-state update processing is performed. The universal figure state updating process is one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure. For example, in the universal figure state updating process in the middle of the universal figure variation display (the value of the universal figure display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the universal figure display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the universal figure display device 210 performs variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

  In addition, in the public figure state update process at the timing when the public figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the public figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the public figure hit flag is on, the hit symbol The 7-segment LED composing the universal figure display device 210 is turned on / off to control the display mode, and when the universal pattern hit flag is off, the general pattern display is displayed in the display mode of the off symbol. Lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the device 210 is performed. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the universal figure state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal figure stop display is being performed is set in the setting area. By performing this control, the public figure display device 210 is either a winning symbol (a universal symbol A or a regular symbol B shown in FIG. 150 (d)) or a deviating symbol (a universal symbol C shown in FIG. 150 (d)). The symbol is confirmed and displayed. After that, after a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbols that are confirmed and displayed are stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the universal figure variation game.

  If the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. While the normal operation is set in the setting area, the blade member is set to the solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). A signal for holding the open state 232a is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening / closing, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the general area non-operation is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is out of order, the universal figure per hit flag is turned off. When the universal figure hit flag is off, even in the universal figure state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for managing the universal figure stop time changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure non-operation is set. In the universal figure state updating process when the ordinary figure is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a universal figure related lottery process is performed. In this universal figure related lottery process, the number of the universal figure variation games and the universal figure variation games that are not held are controlled without opening / closing the special figure 2 starting port 232. Is set to 1 or more as a start condition, the first universal figure winning random value and the universal figure random number set in the universal figure random number storage area are used for execution.

  The main control unit 300 obtains the universal figure starting information (a pair of the universal figure winning random number value and the universal figure random number value) from the earliest (previously stored) holding position in the universal figure random number storage area, On the basis of the universal figure winning random number value in the acquired universal figure start information, the value of the universal figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like, a table for determining a win or failure stored in the ROM 306 (FIGS. 154 (a) and (b) described later). Refer to) to determine whether to win or not to win (judgment judgment). Next, the main control unit 300, based on the universal figure random number value in the acquired universal figure start information and the determined hit / miss determination result, etc., the universal figure determination table (shown in FIG. 154 (c)) stored in the ROM 306. (See the time operation table) to determine the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the variable display of the universal figure. Next, the main control unit 300, for example, based on the determined hit / miss determination result, the stop symbol, the obtained random number value for determining the universal figure fluctuation time, and the like stored in the ROM 306 (for example, a timer number selection not shown) The fluctuation display time (timer number) of the general figure is determined using the table), and the fluctuation display time is stored in the general figure fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the general figure fluctuation display time.

  The main control unit 300 retrieves the earliest universal figure starting information from the universal figure random number storage area, deletes the earliest universal figure starting information from the universal figure random number storage area, and stores the number of retained universal figure numbers. Subtract 1 from the number of reserved universal maps in the area. At this time, the universal figure starting information fetched from the universal figure random number storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is made based on the universal figure starting information stored in this temporary area. Good.

  The main control unit 300 turns on the universal figure hit flag provided in the RAM 308 when the win / no determination result is a win (win), and turns off the universal figure hit flag when the win is unsuccessful.

  Next, the special figure state update processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure state update processing for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update processing) is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeats lighting and extinguishing drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variation game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the rotation start setting transmission process is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 7R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a general figure probability variation flag. .. These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update processing that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), for example, when the 15R jackpot flag is on 150B, the special figure a, 7R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure b, 7R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability variation flag is off The special figure c and the special flag d are turned on when the off flag is turned on, the 7 segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is controlled to be turned on and off, and the special area is set in the RAM 308. Fig. 2 Settings are made to indicate that the display is stopped. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the fixed display of any one of the special figures a to d.

  After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the special display 2 that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the special figure 2 variable game. Further, if the number of shortening times stored in the shortening number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of shortening times, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time saving flag. Further, even during a big hit game (during a special game state), the time saving flag is turned off. Further, if the number of probability changes stored in the probability change number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of probability changes, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability variation flag Turn off.

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the pattern for stopping the variable display is the special figure 2. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that it exists is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described below, and then the process ends.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the area, in order to stand by for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, while displaying an image notifying the player to start the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 First, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period has ended (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or until the winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the variable winning ports 234 and 235 is detected) Solenoid for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning ports 234 and 235 (a part of various solenoids 332) And outputs a signal for holding the door member in the open state, and sets information indicating the opening period in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in the closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening / closing the door member of the variable winning openings 234, 235, and a timer for door closing time management provided in the RAM 308. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (in the present embodiment, 15 rounds or 7 rounds in the case of Toku-zu, 15 rounds, 7 rounds or 2 rounds in the case of Toku-zu 1), and ended. In the special figure 2 state update process started at the timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is waited for. In order to set the above, information indicating the production standby period is set in the storage area of the production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, if the universal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the time saving frequency (for example, 100 times) is set in the time saving frequency storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and is also provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the time saving flag. If the universal figure probability variation flag is set to OFF, neither the time saving number is set in the time saving number storage unit nor the time saving flag is turned ON.

  The time saving here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game is shortened. When the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the high probability state of universal figure (universal figure probable variation). In the high probability state of the universal figure, compared to the low probability state of the universal figure, there is a higher probability of being hit in the universal variation game. In addition, in the general figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure fluctuation game becomes shorter than in the general figure low probability state (general figure shortness). Further, in the universal figure high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the universal figure low probability state (power extension). In addition, in the universal figure high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the universal figure low probability state. The state in which any one of these Phenomenon Probable, Phenomenon Short, and Den Chu is set is called Densapo (Starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, the general probability low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is a high probability probability state during the big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234, 235 during the big hit game, a lot of special figure 2 starting hole 232 until the game ball enters This is to solve the problem that the game balls enter and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, which increases gambling.

  If the special figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the probability variation number storage unit (for example, 10,000 times) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of this big hit game.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operation is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is out, the out flag is turned on. When the deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Toku-zu 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state updating process when the special figure 2 is not operating, the process moves to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Then, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) about special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, the description thereof will be omitted. Omit it. However, in this example, the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 is different from the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2, so the timing when the special figure 1 variable display time has elapsed (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer becomes 1 to 0). The special figure 1 state update processing started at different timing is different from the special figure 2 state update processing. In the special figure 1 state update processing started at the above timing, for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure A and 7R big hit flag shown in FIG. When the figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure B, 7R big hit flag is on, when the special figure probability variation flag is off, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is on, When the figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is off, the special figure E, and the small hit flag is on In the special area F, the 7-segment LED forming the special figure 1 display device 212 is controlled to be turned on and off so that the special area G is in the respective modes when the off flag is on, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set. Special map 1 stop To set indicating that it is being displayed. By performing this control in the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs the fixed display of any one of the special figures A to G. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure related lottery processing for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special map-related lottery process (special map 2 related lottery process) for the special map 2 is performed first (step S229), and then the special map-related lottery process for the special map 1 (special map 1-related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Special figure 2 related lottery processing, the variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not done, the state of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is inactive and special figure 2 which is suspended Assuming that the number of variable games is 1 or more, it is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random number storage area. Special figure 1 related lottery processing, the variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not done, the state of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is inactive both, and special figure 1 which is being held Assuming that the number of variable games is 1 or more, it is executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random number storage area.

  Regarding these special figure related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special map 2 variation game start condition and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are met at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. If the number of special game 2 variable games to be held is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game to be held are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the determination whether or not the special figure variation game is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is notified. The priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting opening 230. In the present embodiment, the special figure variation game with high advantage (special figure 2 variation game in this example) is given priority over the special figure variation game with low advantage (special figure 1 variation game in this example). .. For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the game state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special piece) from the earliest (oldest stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. FIG. 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value) is acquired, and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the special figure 2 starting information and the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, etc., the ROM 306 The jackpot determination table (see later-described FIGS. 155 (a) to (d)) stored in the table is used as a big hit or a small hit (in this example, the small hit can be selected only in the special figure 1). Whether or not it is determined (whether it is true or false). Next, the main control unit 300, based on the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined hit / miss judgment result, etc., the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 (FIG. 156 (a), Using the symbol distribution table shown in FIG. 157 (a), the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the variable display of the special figure 2 is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / miss determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 hold number at the time of the hit determination, the obtained random number for determining the special figure variation time, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables (for example, a timer number selection table (not shown)).

  After extracting the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 deletes the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and Figure 2 The special figure 2 reservation number in the reservation number storage area is decremented by one. At this time, the special figure 2 starting information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is performed based on the special figure 2 starting information stored in this temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is similarly performed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variation game with a high advantage is started prior to the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, and the hold of the special figure 2 is digested prior to the hold of the special figure 1. The special figure 2 priority variation is taken as an example, but the special figure 1 variable game with a low advantage is started with priority over the special figure 2 variable game with a high advantage, and the special figure 1 is suspended. It may be the special figure 1 priority variation that is preferentially digested over the hold. Also, without prioritizing either the special figure 2 variation game or the special figure 1 variation game, the special opening variation game relating to the suspension of each of the special illustration 1 and the special illustration 2 is started in the order in which the start opening is won. It may be forward change. In the starting mouth winning order variation, the maximum number of reservations is eight regardless of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. Therefore, compared with the priority fluctuation in which the maximum number of reservations is 4 in Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, respectively. Then, it may be possible to raise the practical upper limit of the number of holdings.

  Further, in the above description, the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special map are not performed depending on the state of one special map, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above special map state update By performing the processing and the special figure-related lottery processing independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, a plurality of special figures may be simultaneously changed. Further, in the case of simultaneously changing a plurality of special maps in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery result of each special map, or the lottery result of each special map is displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to separately display each lottery result, or may be configured to display a plurality of special lottery results in one area. In addition, when fluctuations relating to a plurality of special maps are performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special map whose fluctuation is stopped first may influence the lottery result of the special map whose fluctuation is stopped later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The scheduled output information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when on, indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (in the present embodiment, a basic command, a symbol variation start command, a symbol variation stop command, a prize production start command, an end production start command, a jackpot round number designation command, a power recovery command, a RAM clear command, a prefetch result information command Information for identifying the type of command), and bits 0 to 10 for command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). Further, in the present embodiment, as the command type, a symbol variation start command and a symbol variation stop command relating to a universal figure are also included.

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the command transmission process described above. Also, if the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command of the special figure, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flags, and special figure related lottery processing. In the case of a symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command, including the information indicating the timer number selected in step 1, it includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, etc. In the case of a start command and end production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of a big hit round number designation command, information indicating the value of the special figure probability variation flag, big hit round number, etc. I am trying to include it. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, whether or not there is a winning at the special diagram 2 starting port 232, and winning at the variable winning ports 234 and 235. It includes information indicating presence or absence. In the case of the prefetch result information command, the command data is information indicating the type of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the prefetch number stored in the prefetch number storage area, which will be described later, and the stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit. Included in.

  If the command type is a pattern variation start (rotation start) command of the universal figure, the command data includes values such as a universal figure per flag, a universal figure outlier flag, a universal figure probability variation flag, and a universal figure related lottery process. Including the information about the determined stop symbol and fluctuation time, in the case of the symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command of the universal pattern, the information indicating the value of the universal symbol flag, the universal symbol outlier flag, the universal symbol probability variation flag, etc. Is included.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data stores values of various types of big hit flags, small hit flags, out-of-match flags, special figure probability variation flags, special figure 1 related lottery processing and special figure The information indicating the timer number selected in FIG. 2 related lottery processing, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game that are held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the values of various types of big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data stored in the RAM 308, such as the effect control information and the special figure probability variation flag output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period. Information indicating the value, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission processing, the command data stores the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability variation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening release transmission processing, the command data, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variation game or special figure 2 variation game Set the information indicating such as. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the command data, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variation games or special figure 2 variation games Set the information indicating such as.

  Further, in this step S233, general command special figure pending increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 for command data, advance notice information (advance notice information, false) (Advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting processing, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower tray full tank error. . When the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error. Set. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control opening and closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning a prize ports 234 and 235, and the general figure display device 210 and special figure 1 display via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set to the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 151 is performed. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or a stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main controller shown in FIG. 151.

  FIG. 153 (a) is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetching process executed in the winning acceptance process (step S217). In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information (newly acquired start information) in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and pre-determines the stop symbol before the success / failure determination process. The pre-determination result (special figure pre-reading result) is stored in the pre-reading result storage unit (see FIGS. 153 (b) to 153 (e)) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit that stores the pre-reading result of the special figure 1 and the number of special figure 1 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit are specified. A special figure 1 prefetch number storage area for storing one prefetch number is provided. In this example, the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results. In the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 1 pre-reading result of the highest rank (the first place) is deleted each time the number of special figure 1 pre-reading decreases by one, and the remaining special figure 1 pre-reading result is deleted. Are processed so that the rank of the data of 1 is advanced by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 1 prefetches is increased by one, new data of the special figure 1 prefetch results is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 1 prefetch results having the lowest rank (last).

  Further, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section for storing the special figure 2 pre-reading result and the number of special figure 2 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section are stored. A special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing the number is provided. In this example, the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four pre-reading results. In the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 2 pre-reading result of the highest rank is deleted every time the number of special figure 2 pre-reading is decreased, and the order of the remaining special figure 2 pre-reading result data is deleted. Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Also, each time the number of special figure 2 prefetches increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 2 preread result having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). Whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 2 reserved number stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number stored area. The comparison is performed with the number of prefetches in FIG. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 is increased when the special figure 2 reservation number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and when the special figure 2 reservation number is equal to the special figure 2 prefetch number. It is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 start information (a set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value) is specified before the winning / judging process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). Figure 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, by using the pre-reading special figure 2 start information, and the hit determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of hit determination, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is changed to the special figure 2 related lottery. Preliminary determination is made before the success / failure determination processing in the processing (step S229). Note that this pre-determination processing may be performed using a special table for pre-determination, instead of the table used for determining whether it is true or false.

  In step S305 subsequent to step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained by the preliminary determination is stored in the first empty area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Then, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of special figure 1 has increased. Whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined, for example, as in the case of the special figure 2, the special figure 1 reserved number stored in the special figure 1 reserved number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area. It is performed by comparing with the number of prefetched special figure 1 stored in. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 has not increased, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the main control unit timer allocation is ended. The process returns to the prize receiving process (step S217) of the included process.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not the non-electricity support is being performed. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the power support is being performed), the process proceeds to step S315. Although it is determined in the present example whether or not the non-electric support is being performed, it may be determined in step S309 whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice is satisfied. For example, the execution condition of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice is, in addition to the non-electric power support, conditions such as not being in the big hit game.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 starting information (a set of special figure 1 winning random number values and special figure 1 random number values) is specified before the winning / losing determination processing in the special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231). Figure 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, by using the pre-reading special figure 1 start information, and the hit determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of hit determination, for example, the stop symbols of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information are drawn to the special figure 1 related lottery. Preliminary determination is made prior to the hit / miss determination processing in the processing (step S231). Note that this pre-determination processing may be performed using a special table for pre-determination, instead of the table used for determining whether it is true or false.

  In step S313 subsequent to step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetch result obtained by the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest empty area of the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main controller timer interrupt process.

  In step S315, the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 in RAM 308 is replaced with the "undetermined" information indicating that the starting information is not pre-read without pre-reading the increased special figure 1 starting information. Store in the first empty area of the set. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main controller timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) described above, only the pre-reading result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 may be stored. All pre-reading results in the set may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the read-ahead is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 2, and the read-ahead is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 1 except during the power support. Alternatively, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased start information of the special maps 1 and 2. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400, which has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300, may determine by lottery whether or not to execute the pre-reading notification for each hold, for example. In addition, regardless of the game state (for example, whether or not in non-electric support), when the start information increases, the prefetch is always executed and the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and the prefetch is performed. The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may determine whether to execute the lottery and effect using the pre-reading result.

  153 (b) to 153 (e) exemplify a state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 153 (b) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 preread result information is stored in the special figure 1 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 153 (b), the special-reading 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in this embodiment) as the holdable number of the special-drawing 1 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 153 (b), the storage area "holding 1" stores "special drawing G" (off) as stop symbol information, and the storage area "holding 2" stores stop symbol information "special drawing G". "(Off)" is stored, "special drawing F" (small hit) is stored in the storage area "holding 3" as stop symbol information, and "special drawing A" is stored in the storage area "holding 4" as stop symbol information. (15R special jackpot) is stored.

  FIG. 153 (c) illustrates an example of a state in which the special figure 2 preread result information is stored in the special figure 2 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 153 (c), the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 2 has the same number of storage areas (four in this embodiment) as the holdable number of the special figure 2 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 153 (c), "special drawing d" (off) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and the stop symbols are stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4". No information is stored. Note that in FIG. 153 (c), the state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as "none".

  FIG. 153 (d) shows an example of the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 1 during electronic support. As shown in FIG. 153 (d), in the storage area "holding 1", "undetermined" information is stored instead of the stopped symbol information. Neither stop symbol information nor “undetermined” information is stored in the storage areas “holding 2” to “holding 4”.

  As shown in FIG. 153 (e), in each of the storage areas of the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit, not the stop symbol information, but the "timer number" indicating the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game is the prefetch result. May be stored as In the example shown in FIG. 153 (e), "timer 3" is stored as timer number information in the storage area "holding 1", and "timer 5" is stored as timer number information in the storage area "holding 2". Timer number information is not stored in the storage areas "hold 3" and "hold 4". Note that in FIG. 153 (e), the state in which the timer number information is not stored is described as "none". Further, when the timer number information is stored in each storage area of the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 1, the timer number may be set so as to correspond to the win / fail result.

  In the above description, the stop symbol and the timer number are pre-determined, and the example in which the stop symbol information and the timer number information are stored in the pre-reading result storage unit has been given. It may be stored in the result storage unit and may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as prefetch result information.

  Next, various tables used in the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. The various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 157 are stored in, for example, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  FIGS. 154 (a) and 154 (b) show an example of a win / loss determination table used when making a win / loss determination in the universal figure related lottery process (step S223). The win / loss determination table shown in FIGS. 154 (a) and 154 (b) is composed of items of "universal figure probability", "random number range", and "win / fail result". The item of “universal figure probability” indicates a general figure probability (low probability of general figure or high probability of general figure) at the time of judgment of success or failure. The item of “random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired universal figure winning random number value. Here, the range of the universal figure winning random number value of this example is 0 to 99 (the width of the numerical range is 100).

  The win / loss determination table shown in FIG. 154 (a) is a win / loss determination table for a universal figure used when the universal figure probability at the time of win / loss determination is low. As shown in FIG. 154 (a), when this hit / miss determination table is used, the probability of winning is 1/100 (that is, 1%), and the probability of loss is 99/100.

  The win / loss determination table shown in FIG. 154 (b) is a win / loss determination table for a universal figure used when the universal figure probability at the time of win / loss determination is high. As shown in FIG. 154 (b), when this hit / miss determination table is used, the probability of winning is about 100/100 (that is, 100%), and the probability of loss is 0%. Comparing this win / loss determination table with the win / loss determination table shown in FIG. 154 (a), the probability of winning is 100 times. Thus, in the universal figure high probability state (during time saving operation), only the hit may be designed to be selected. Further, the probability of deviation may be higher than 0% at the time saving operation, but at the time saving operation, the probability that the hit is selected is made higher than at the time saving non-operation (normal probability low state).

  FIG. 154 (c) shows a table of symbol distribution and hitting operation for a general figure. The numerical value in the "Distribution" column in the table is compared with the random number value of the universal figure when determining the stop symbol in the universal figure related lottery process (step S223), and the distribution rate of the random number range for each symbol (that is, for each symbol (Equal to the selection probability). As shown in FIG. 154 (c), the distribution ratio of each winning symbol when the hit / no hit determination result of the universal figure fluctuation game is a win is 50% for the universal figure A and 50% for the universal figure B. Universal drawings A and B are symbols in which the electric Chu opening operation is executed after the universal character variation game. It should be noted that since the hit / miss determination result is only one out-of-drawing pattern selected in the case of out-of-range, in the out-of-order case, out-of-border C is selected with a probability of 100%. When the universal figure C is selected, the electric charge opening operation is not executed after the universal figure variation game.

  As shown in FIG. 154 (c), after the universal figure A is stopped and displayed, the opening operation of the special figure 2 starting port (electric tube) 232 is executed. When the game state at the time of the stop display of the general drawing A is not in the time saving operation, the blade member 232a of the electric chu 232 is first opened for 100 ms, then closed for 5000-10000 ms, and then opened for 5400 ms. To do. When the game state at the time of the stop display of the general drawing A is the time saving operation, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 1800 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, and again opened for 1800 ms, then It is closed only for about 2000 ms and opened again for 1800 ms.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 154 (c), after the universal figure B is stopped and displayed, the opening operation of the special figure 2 starting port (electric tube) 232 is executed. When the game state at the time of the stop display of the general drawing B is not in the time saving operation, the blade member 232a of the power tube 232 is opened only once for 100 ms. When the game state at the time of the stop display of the general drawing B is the time-saving operation, the blade member 232a of the electric tube 232 is first opened for 2400 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, then opened for 1450 ms, and then again. It is closed only for about 2000 ms and opened again for 1450 ms.

  155 (a) to (d) show an example of a win / loss determination table used when the win / loss determination is performed in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) or the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). There is. The win / loss determination table shown in FIGS. 155 (a) to 155 (d) is composed of respective items of "special figure probability", "random number range", and "win / fall determination result". The item “special map probability” indicates a special map probability (low probability of special map or high probability of special map) at the time of judgment of success or failure. The item of “random number range” indicates a numerical value range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 winning random number value or special figure 1 winning random number value. Here, the possible range of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 1 winning random number value of this example are both 0 to 65535 (the width of the numerical range is 65536).

  The win / loss determination table shown in FIG. 155 (a) is a win / loss determination table for special figure 1 used when the special figure probability at the time of win / loss determination is low. As shown in FIG. 155 (a), when this hit / miss determination table is used, the probability of a big hit is about 1/299 (= 219/65536), and the probability of a small hit is about 1/399 (= 165 / 65536).

  The win / loss determination table shown in FIG. 155 (b) is a win / loss determination table for special figure 1 used when the special figure probability at the time of win / loss determination is high. As shown in FIG. 155 (b), when this hit / miss determination table is used, the probability of a big hit is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536), and the probability of a small hit is about 1/399. Comparing this win / loss determination table with the win / loss determination table shown in FIG. 155 (a), the probability of a big hit is about 10 times, and the probability of a small hit is the same.

  The win / loss determination table shown in FIG. 155 (c) is a win / loss determination table for special figure 2 used when the special figure probability at the time of win / loss determination is low. As shown in FIG. 155 (c), when this hit / miss determination table is used, the probability of a big hit is about 1/299, and the probability of a small hit is 0.

  The win / loss determination table shown in FIG. 155 (d) is a win / loss determination table for special figure 2 used when the special figure probability at the time of win / loss determination is high. As shown in FIG. 155 (d), when this hit / miss determination table is used, the probability of a big hit is about 1/30, and the probability of a small hit is 0. Comparing this win / loss determination table with the win / loss determination table shown in FIG. 155 (c), the jackpot probability is about 10 times.

  FIG. 156 (a) shows a symbol distribution table for special figure 1. The numerical value in the "distribution" column in the table is the distribution ratio of the random number range for each symbol that is compared with the random number for special symbol 1 when determining the stopped symbol in the special symbol 1 related lottery process (step S231) (that is, for each It is equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 156 (a), the distribution rate of each jackpot symbol when the hit determination result of the special figure 1 variation game is a big hit, is 30% in the special figure A (15R special big hit), and the special figure B (7R special big hit) is 25%, special figure C (7R big hit) is 25%, special figure D (sudden probability big hit) is 10%, special figure E (latent probability change big hit) is 10% is there. Special drawings A, B, D, and E except for special drawing C are symbols in which the probability change operates after the jackpot game is over. The ratio of the probability variation big hit (special features A, B, D, E) in the big hit of the special game 1 variation game, that is, the probability variation probability is 75%.

  Special figures A, B, D are game states (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, general figure high probability (time saving operation), general figure low probability (time saving non-operation) at the time of judgment of judgment (when the symbol is stopped) Regardless of the time)), it is a design in which time saving (no time saving setting) is activated after the big hit game is over. Special drawing C, regardless of the game state at the time of the hit determination, is a symbol that the time saving (time saving number 100 times) operates after the big hit game ends. The special figure E is a symbol in which the time saving is activated after the jackpot game is over, only when the game state at the time of the hit determination is the special figure high probability state or the general figure high probability state. That is, when the special map E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability general figure low probability state, the time saving does not operate after the big hit game ends. For example, if the special map E is displayed as a big hit symbol from the special figure low probability general figure low probability state in succession multiple times, the time saving does not work after the first stop display (special figure high probability general figure. (It becomes a low probability state), but after the stop display for the second time and thereafter, the time saving works (it becomes a special figure high probability general figure high probability state). Special figure 1 The probability that the time saving is given in the big hit of the variation game is 90% in the special figure low probability general figure low probability state, 100% in the other game states.

  In this example, there are only one type of small hitting symbol and outlier symbol in the special figure 1 variation game. Therefore, if the special game 1 variation game win / loss determination result is a small hit, the special map F is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special diagram 1 random number value, and the special game 1 variation game win / loss determination result is If it is out of alignment, the special figure G is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the random number value of the special figure 1. However, a plurality of types of the small hit symbols and the outlying symbols may be provided in the same manner as the big hit symbols, and may be determined by lottery using the random number value of the special figure 1.

  FIG. 156 (b) shows an example of a big hit operation in each symbol of Toku-zu 1. As shown in FIG. 156 (b), in the big hit game after the special map A is stopped and displayed, the attacker is opened for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R. Similarly, in the big hit game after the special map B or the special map C is stopped and displayed, the attacker is opened for 7R at 29000 ms per 1R, and in the big hit game after the special map D is displayed, the attacker is opened. 2R is performed at 29000 ms per 1R.

  About special figure E, the operation of the big hit game is different depending on the game state when the symbol is stopped and displayed. In the big hit game after the special map E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability general figure low probability state, the attacker is opened for 2R at 100 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is difficult to enter the game ball because the opening time is short. On the other hand, in the jackpot game after the special map E is stopped and displayed in a game state other than the special figure low probability general figure low probability state, 2R is performed at 29000 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is easy to enter a game ball because the opening time is relatively long.

  In the small hit game after the special figure F is stopped and displayed, the attacker is opened twice for 100 ms at one opening opportunity. That is, the attacker operates in the same manner in the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability general figure low probability state and in the small hit game after the special figure F is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 157 (a) shows a symbol distribution table for special figure 2. The numerical value in the "Distribution" column in the table is the distribution rate of the random number range for each symbol that is compared with the random number of the special symbol 2 when determining the stopped symbol in the special symbol 2 related lottery process (step S229) (that is, each It is equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 157 (a), the distribution rate of each jackpot symbol in the case where the hit determination result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the special figure a (15R special big hit) is 70%, and the special figure b (7R special jackpot) is 5%, and special figure c (7R jackpot) is 25%. Special figures a and b are symbols in which the probability change operates after the jackpot game is over. Proportion of probability variation big hit (special figure a, b) in the big hit of special figure 2 fluctuation game, namely, probability variation probability is 75% which is the same as the probability change probability of special figure 1 fluctuation game.

  Special figures a and b are game states (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, general figure high probability (time saving operation), general figure low probability (time saving not operating) at the time of judgment of judgment (when the symbol is stopped) ) Regardless of, it is a design in which time saving (no time saving setting) is activated after the big hit game is over. Special figure c, regardless of the game state at the time of the hit determination, is a symbol that the time saving (time saving number 100 times) operates after the big hit game ends. Special figure 2 The probability that the time saving is given in the big hit of the variation game is 100% regardless of the game state.

  In this example, there is only one type of outlier symbol in the special figure 2 variation game. Therefore, in the case where the winning / deciding result of the special figure 2 variation game is out of order, the special figure d is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the random number value of the special figure 2. However, like the jackpot pattern, a plurality of outlier symbols may be provided and may be determined by lottery using the special figure 2 random number value.

  FIG. 157 (b) shows an example of a big hit operation in each symbol of the special figure 2. As shown in FIG. 157 (b), in the jackpot game after the special figure a is stopped and displayed, the attacker is opened for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R, and after the special figure b or special figure c is stopped and displayed. In the jackpot game, the attacker is released for 7R at 29000ms per 1R.

  As shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, the special figure 2 has a higher probability of being provided with a shorter working time than the special figure 1, and has a long attacker opening time (or a large R number). Therefore, it can be considered that Toku-zu 2 has a higher degree of advantage than Toku-zu 1.

  Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 158 and 159. FIG. 158 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 of FIG. 158 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of the input / output port, initialization processing of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this processing is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the processing proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed. Among various processes executed in the effect control process, the electric tulong opening effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 159.

  In step S411 following step S409, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, when the press of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button 136.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control processing, if the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to VDP434, this instruction is output to VDP434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a command to the sound source IC 416, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, a lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to various lamps 418, the instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a command to the shielding device 246, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500, the control command is set to be output. Then, it returns to step S403.

  FIG. 158 (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects the strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  FIG. 158 (c) is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt process. Execute in a cycle. In step S601 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub-control unit main processing and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 following step S601, the control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub control unit main process, and the other effect random number updating process is performed. And so on.

  FIG. 158 (d) is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process (step S413) of the first sub-control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc., and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705, and if not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for incoming signal.

  In step S705, parameter setting is performed based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 has information of image data forming the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 subsequent to step S705, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S709 subsequent to step S707, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the image drawing end is input. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711, otherwise. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  FIG. 159 (a) shows the flow of the electric tulong opening effect process executed in the effect control process of the main process in the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 159 (b) shows an example of the electric tulong opening effect on the decorative symbol display device 208. The electric chu long opening effect is an effect that can be executed during the universal figure variation game, and the special figure 2 starting port (electricity chew) 232 is opened for a long time and / or a plurality of times after winning the universal figure variation game (hereinafter , Sometimes referred to as a long open) is a production that fuels whether or not to do. In addition, after the universal figure fluctuation stop, the electric chu long opening effect (for example, a notification effect such as "during electric chu open!") May be continued based on the universal figure stop pattern.

  The electric tulong opening effect process shown in FIG. 159 (a) is the command process (step S407) of the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 of FIG. It is executed when the (start rotation) command is received.

  First, the first sub-control unit 400 first determines whether or not the electric tulong opening effect execution restriction flag that restricts the execution of the electric tulong opening effect is off (step S801). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the electric tulong opening effect execution restriction flag stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 408, and determines whether or not the execution of the electric tulong opening effect is restricted. For example, in the display darkness when the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is black, even if the electric chulong opening effect is executed, the player cannot visually recognize the effect and the effect of the electric chulong opening effect cannot be obtained. .. Therefore, in such a case, the electric tulong opening effect execution regulation flag is turned on based on the effect based on the hit / miss determination result of the special figure variation game during display darkness. Moreover, when the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not in the dark display and the variation time of the universal figure variation game is long enough to execute the electric tulong opening effect, the game is played. It is possible to execute an electric chulong opening effect that can entertain people. Therefore, in such a case, the electric turong opening effect execution regulation flag is turned off based on the effect based on the hit / miss determination result of the special figure variation game or the demonstration effect.

  When the electric chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is turned on in step S801, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the execution of the electric chu-long opening effect is restricted, and controls the electric chu-long opening effect. Other control processes are executed, the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the effect control process (step S409) of the main process.

  In step S801, if the electric chu long opening effect execution regulation flag is off, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the electric turong opening effect can be executed, and proceeds to step S803 to start symbol fluctuation (rotation start) of the universal figure. By referring to the information about the universal figure hit flag and the ordinary figure out-of-flag from the command data of the command, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the general figure variation game is a hit.

  When the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the winning / discarding judgment result of the universal figure variation game is a hit, the process proceeds to step S805, and from the command data of the symbol variation start (rotation start) command of the universal figure to the universal figure. By referring to the information on the stop symbol, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the universal figure variation game is the universal symbol A.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the stop symbol of the universal figure variation game is the universal figure A, the process proceeds to step S807, and the production of the production type “success pattern” is selected to open the electric chulong. Set as a performance. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric tulong opening effect based on the “success pattern”, ends this processing, and effects control of the main processing. It returns to a process (step S409).

  When the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the stop pattern of the universal figure fluctuation game is not the universal figure A, the process proceeds to step S811, and the production of the production type "failure pattern A" is selected to open the electric chulong. Set as a performance. Next, the first sub control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric tulong opening effect based on the "failure pattern A", ends this processing, and effects of the main processing. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the result of the general / universal figure variation game is not hit, the process proceeds to step S815 to execute the electric turong open false (gase) effect execution lottery process. In the electric chulong opening false effect execution lottery process, a random number value is fetched from the random counter for the electric chulong opening pseudo effect execution lottery provided in the RAM 408, and stored in the ROM 406. Is used to determine whether or not the random number value is a hit.

  The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not to execute the electric tulong opening fake effect based on the result of the hit / miss determination in step S815 (step S817).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 that the electric Chulong opening fake effect is to be executed, the process proceeds to Step S821, and an effect whose production type is "failure pattern B" is selected and set as the electric Chulong opening effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric tulong opening effect based on "failure pattern B", ends this processing, and effects of the main processing. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 not to execute the electric tulong opening fake effect, it executes other control processing for not executing the electric tulong opening effect, ends this processing, and ends the main processing. The process returns to the effect control process (step S409).

  In the process of the electric chu long opening effect shown in FIG. 159, if the electric chu long opening effect execution restriction flag is off, if the winning is the electric chu long opening effect, the electric chu long opening effect is always performed. It is also possible to perform an execution lottery in the same manner as in the case of failure and execute the effect only when the lottery is won. In addition, in this example, the effect of "Failure pattern A" is set when the electric Chu is opened for a short time (short circuit B), and the failure pattern is set when the electric Chu is not opened (General figure C). Although the effect of "B" is set, the same effect may be performed with a hit (general drawing B) and a hit (general drawing C).

  FIG. 159 (b) shows an example of the electric tulong opening effect. FIG. 159 (b) shows the display effect being executed in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire image display area becomes the effect display area 208d, and a background effect named "Land Stage" is executed. On the front of the background effect, the variable display of the decorative pattern in which "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" sequentially move from top to bottom in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c (indicated by the downward arrow in the figure) Is running. A variation icon display area a is arranged on the lower left side of the effect display area 208d, and a variation icon having a pattern simulating an automobile is displayed. On the right side of the variable icon display area a, a special figure reservation display area c for displaying reservation of a special figure is arranged, and a reservation icon b having a pattern simulating an automobile is displayed. On the lower right side of the effect display area 208d, the electric tulong opening effect area d is arranged. The public figure variation game is started on the public figure display device 210 (not shown), the execution of the electric chu long opening effect is not restricted, and the electric chu long opening effect is executed in the electric chu long opening effect area d. As a Den Churon opening effect, an image of a samurai character operating a lottery machine is displayed along with the display of "help chance lottery", and the special figure 2 starting port 232 is selected to win the universal figure variation game. A stirrup production that makes the player expect to be released long is being executed. As shown in FIG. 159 (b), a part of the right symbol display area 208c is hidden by the electric tulong opening effect. A part of the right side area of the special figure reservation display area c is also hidden. In this way, if the electric chulong opening effect makes it difficult to confirm at least a part of the variable display of the decorative pattern, or if the variable display of the decorative pattern makes it difficult to confirm at least a part of the electric tulong opening effect There may be.

  Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 160. FIG. 160A is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S901 of FIG. 160 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, an initialization process is executed in step S901. In this initialization processing, initialization of the input / output port, initialization processing of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S903 subsequent to step S901, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S905. .. In step S905, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S907 following step S905, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S909 following step S907, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S907, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step S911 following step S909, lamp control processing is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S913 subsequent to step S911, movable body control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Then, it returns to step S903.

  FIG. 160 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S1001 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  FIG. 160C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by a predetermined timer interrupt process. Execute in a cycle. In step S1101 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S903 of the second sub-control unit main processing, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S903, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1103 next to step S1101, update processing of the effect random number value and the like are performed.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 161 (a) shows an example of the pre-reading notice lottery table used when performing the pre-reading notice lottery in the effect control process (step S409) of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 158. The prefetch lottery is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the prefetch result information command including the prefetch result information from the main control unit 300, and the display mode of the hold icon indicating the hold corresponding to the preread result by the preread notice lottery. Is determined. The pre-reading notice lottery table shown in FIG. 161 (a) is composed of items of "pre-reading notice mode", "big hit", and "departure".

  In the left column of the drawing, “prefetching notice mode” indicates the display mode of the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. "White" indicates that the display mode of the hold icon is a white circle, "Black" indicates that the display mode of the hold icon is a black circle, and "Heat" indicates that the display mode of the hold icon is in a circle. It indicates that the character "heat" is drawn, and "white → black" indicates that the change animation (details described later) that changes the display mode of the hold icon from white circle to black circle is executed. , “Black → heat” indicates that a change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changes from a black circle to a mode in which the character “heat” is drawn in a circle is executed. In the present embodiment, the default display mode of the hold icon is a white circle. When the pre-reading result includes undetermined information, the pre-reading notice lottery may not be executed and the hold icon indicating the hold corresponding to the pre-reading result may be displayed in the default display mode.

  The “big hit” in the middle row in the figure is a prefetch lottery random number acquired from the prefetch lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408 when the prefetch advance notice mode is determined in the effect control process (step S409) when the prefetch result is a big hit. The distribution rate of the random number range of the prefetching notice aspect to be compared (that is, equal to the selection probability of each prefetching notice aspect) is shown. As shown in FIG. 161 (a), the distribution rate of each look-ahead notice mode when the look-ahead notice result is a big hit is "white" is 80%, "black" is 2%, and "heat" is 7%, “white → black” is 3%, and “black → heat” is 8%.

  In the right column in the figure, “out” indicates a pre-reading lottery random number acquired from the pre-reading lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408 when determining the pre-reading notice mode in the effect control process (step S409) when the pre-reading result is out of alignment The distribution rate of the random number range of the prefetching notice aspect to be compared (that is, equal to the selection probability of each prefetching notice aspect) is shown. As shown in FIG. 161 (a), when the look-ahead notice result is out of order, the distribution rate of each look-ahead notice mode is 94% for "white", 2% for "black", and "heat" for 1%, “white → black” is 2%, and “black → heat” is 1%.

  FIG. 161 (b) shows an example of the advance notice lottery table at the start of fluctuation (after the big hit determination) used when performing advance notice lottery in the effect control process (step S409) of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 158. Is shown. The notice lottery is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, and the notice lottery determines the mode of notice production for the special figure variation game being executed. The lottery table for advance notice at the time of start of fluctuation shown in FIG. 161 (b) is composed of respective items of “preliminary notice mode”, “big hit”, and “off”. "Announcement mode" in the left column in the figure indicates a mode of an announcement performed using the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effectable movable body 990. “Logo drop” indicates that the notice is executed in a mode in which the effect movable body 990 moves downward, and “rotation” is performed in a mode in which the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 rotates. "Logo drop + rotation" indicates that the movable body 990 for production moves downward, and the notice is executed in a mode in which the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 rotates, and "none" indicates This indicates that the notice production is not executed.

  The “big hit” in the middle row of the figure is a preliminary lottery random number obtained from the preliminary lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408 when the preliminary announcement mode is determined in the effect control process (step S409) when the result of the hit determination is a big hit. The distribution rate of the random number range of the advance notice mode to be compared (that is, equal to the selection probability of each advance notice mode) is shown. As shown in FIG. 161 (b), the distribution rate of each notice mode when the notice result is a big hit is "logo drop" is 4%, "revolution" is 7%, and "logo fall + rotation". Is 14% and “none” is 75%.

  In the right column in the figure, “out” indicates the advance lottery random number acquired from the advance lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408 when the advance notice mode is determined in the effect control process (step S409) when the result of determination is false. The distribution rate of the random number range of the advance notice mode to be compared (that is, equal to the selection probability of each advance notice mode) is shown. As shown in FIG. 161 (b), the distribution ratios of the respective notice modes in the case where the notice result is disappointing are “logo drop” is 3%, “revolution” is 2%, and “logo fall + rotation”. Is 1% and “none” is 94%.

In addition, the notice mode of "logo drop" may be different depending on whether it is a big hit or not. For example, the moving distance of the effect movable body 990 may be different depending on whether the jackpot is a big hit or the moving speed of the effect movable body 990 is different. Further, the notice mode of "rotation" may be different depending on whether it is a big hit or a big hit. For example, in the case of a big hit, the image is rotated once, and in the case of a big hit, the image is not rotated once and the rotation display is ended and the normal display is restored. Note that the image may be rotated once even in the case of the deviation. Further, for example, the rotation angle of the image may be different, the angular velocity of the image rotation may be different, or the rotation direction of the image may be different depending on whether it is a big hit or a big hit. The images to be rotated may be different. Further, the notice mode of "logo drop + rotation" may be different as described above depending on whether it is a big hit or not.
(Example 1)
An example of effects of Example 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 162. In addition, in FIG. 162 and each drawing described later, an example of the special game 1 variation game in each embodiment is shown in time series. In addition, the variation of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is represented by a thick white arrow.

  First, with reference to FIG. 162 (a), common points between FIG. 162 and each of the later-described drawings will be described. As shown in FIG. 162 (a), in the upper left part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative frame f1 having a shape in which the letter “L” is vertically inverted is displayed. A square-shaped special figure 1 reserved number display area 931 is provided in the upper left part of the decorative frame f1, and a square special figure 2 reserved number display area 932 is provided on the right side of the decorative frame f1. A special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 is provided below 931 and a special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 934 is provided below it. In the special figure 1 pending number display area 931, the number of pending figures of the special figure 1 is displayed by numbers, for example, “0” is displayed when there is no pending of the special figure 1. In the special figure 2 pending number display area 932, the number of pending figures of the special figure 2 is displayed by numbers, for example, “0” is displayed when there is no pending of the special figure 2. Further, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, when the special figure 1 variation game is being executed, it is informed that the special figure 1 variation game is being executed as a variation display of the fourth symbol "/" , "\" Images are displayed alternately, and the special figure 1 variation game is not in execution (when special figure 1 is stopped and displayed), "-" or "○" as the fourth symbol display The image is displayed. "-" Is the fourth symbol that is displayed when the result of the special figure 1 variation game is out, and "○" is the fourth symbol that is displayed when the result of the special figure 1 variation game is a big hit. is there. In addition, regardless of the result of the special figure 1 variation game, "-" may be displayed as the fourth symbol during non-execution of the special figure 1 variation game. Further, in the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 934, when the special figure 2 variation game is being executed, it is informed that the special figure 2 variation game is being executed as a variation display of the fourth symbol "/" , "\" Images are displayed alternately, and the special figure 2 variation game is not being executed (when special figure 2 is stopped and displayed), "-" or "○" as the fourth symbol display The image is displayed. "-" Is the fourth symbol that is displayed when the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out, and "○" is the fourth symbol that is displayed when the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. is there. In addition, "-" may be displayed as the fourth symbol during the non-execution of the special figure 2 variation game regardless of the result of the special figure 2 variation game.

  Below the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, a horizontally long rectangular decorative frame f2 is displayed. In the center of the decorative frame f2, a square variable icon display area 940 in which a part of the left and right frames are open is provided. The variable icon may be displayed in a display size different from the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 930 described later (for example, a display size larger than the hold icon). This may facilitate identification of the variable icon and the hold icon.

  A special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 is provided to the left of the variable icon display area 940, and a special figure 2 hold icon display area 960 is provided to the right of the variable icon display area 940. The special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 is roughly divided into four areas from the left to the right, that is, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area. Each of the first to fourth areas corresponds to the first to fourth reservation order in FIG. That is, in the first area, the special figure 1 hold icon corresponding to the hold of the earliest (oldest stored) special figure 1 can be displayed. Similarly, in the second to fourth areas, the special figure 1 hold icon is displayed. ~ The special figure 1 hold icon corresponding to the hold of the fourth special figure 1 can be displayed. Similarly, the special figure 2 hold icon display area 960 is roughly divided into four areas from the left to the right, that is, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area. Each of the first to fourth areas corresponds to the holding order of the first to fourth special maps 2, respectively. That is, the special area 2 hold icon corresponding to the earliest (oldest stored) special area 2 hold icon can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, the special area 2 hold icon is displayed in the second to fourth areas. ~ The special figure 2 reservation icon corresponding to the reservation of the fourth special figure 2 can be displayed. Further, in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 and the special figure 2 hold icon display area 960, various animations representing the movement of the hold icon are executed.

  A square-shaped navigation character display area 970 is provided on the left of the special figure 1 reserved display area 950. In the navigation character display area 970, the character image h1 of the merchant is displayed. The character image h1 of the merchant is used for an explanatory effect such as a tutorial effect, a notice (a notice of the change or a prefetch notice), and the like.

  To the right of the special figure 2 hold display area 960, a square effect custom state display area 980 is provided. In the effect custom state display area 980, "levels 1 to 99" are displayed according to the effect custom state of the pachinko machine 100. The level of the effect custom state is set to increase, for example, when an effect with a low appearance rate is performed. The level of the effect custom state may be set to increase even when a predetermined number of game balls are hit, when a predetermined effect is executed, or when a big hit is won.

  FIG. 162 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" indicating that the winning / decision determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order is stopped and displayed. Has been done. In the special figure 1 4th symbol display area 933, the 4th symbol of the display mode of "-" which notifies the deviation is stopped and displayed. Incidentally, in the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 934, the fourth symbol of the display mode of "-" for notifying that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out is displayed in a stopped state. Further, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display area 931 indicating that the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 1, and the reserved number of special figure 2 is 0 in the special figure 2 reserved number display area 932. “0” indicating that is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950, a default special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in a white circle is displayed.

  FIG. 162 (b) shows that the suspension of special figure 1 has been digested and the special figure 1 variation game has started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, “0” is displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display area 931 to notify that the reserved number of the special figure 1 is decreased by 1 and the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 0.

  In addition, when the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variation game is started, in the variation icon display area 940 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold / variation icon is displayed. The moving animation between is executed. In the moving animation between the hold / variable icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 becomes the change icon 941 and moves to the change icon display area 940. .. The arrow pointing to the upper left of the variation icon 941 in FIG. 162 (b) indicates the moving direction of the variation icon 941.

  162 (c), "decoration 2" is temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation between the hold / variable icons ends, and the variable icon 941 in the variable icon display area 940. Is displayed. In addition, based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230, "1" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 and white is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950. A default special figure 1 hold icon 952 displayed in a circle is shown as a result of an increase animation of the hold icon. The upward arrow shown to the left of the special figure 1 hold icon 952 in FIG. 162 (b) indicates the moving direction of the special figure 1 hold icon 952. Also, in FIG. 162 (c), a balloon image representing the lines of the character image h1 of the merchant displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative pattern display device 208 is started to be displayed in the lower left portion of the effect display area 208d. .. The balloon image is an image used for the advance notice by the merchant character image h1.

  FIG. 162 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting opening 230, "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 and black is displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950. It shows a state in which the special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle appears by the increase animation of the hold icon. The upward arrow shown to the left of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 in FIG. 162 (d) indicates the moving direction of the special figure 1 hold icon 953. In addition, an image of a character string of "Chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant, and an effect that expects to develop into a reach effect is executed. Further, a substantially rectangular shape of the hold change image h2 including the image of the character string of "hold change" is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c. .. The hold change image h2 is an image displayed for notifying that a pre-reading notice that changes the display mode of the displayed hold icon or variable icon or an effect of a notice of the change will be executed. In this example, the hold change image h2 is informed that the change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon being displayed changes. In addition, the hold change image h2 may be a display that is displayed only when the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is changed, or a display that is displayed only when the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 is changed. It may be a display that is displayed only when the variable icon is changed, or a display that is displayed only when the hold icon of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is changed. The display may be displayed only when the hold icon and the variable icon of special figure 2 are changed, or may be displayed only when the hold icon of special figure 1, the hold icon of special figure 2, and the variable icon are changed. It may be a display.

  162 (e), "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. Indicates that the notification has been made. Further, a deletion animation in which the fluctuation icon 941 displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 940 moves downward is displayed, and the fluctuation icon 941 is gradually deleted. Also, FIG. 162 (e) shows a state in which a change animation in which the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon 952 changes from “white to black” is executed. In the change animation, an image of lightning strike is displayed from the pending change image h2 to the special figure 1 hold icon 952, and an effect image is displayed overlapping the special figure 1 hold icon 951. The effect image is displayed in front of the special figure 1 hold icons 952 and 953, and the entire special figure 1 hold icon 952 and a part of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 are hidden by the effect image.

  FIG. 162 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" indicating that the winning / decision determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order is stopped and displayed. Has been done. Also, in FIG. 162 (f), the change animation ends, the pending change image h2 and the effect image shown in FIG. 162 (e) are deleted, and the display mode of the special figure 1 holding icon 952 changes from white circle to black circle. Is changing.

  FIG. 162 (g) shows that the first special figure 1 has been reserved and the special figure 1 variation game has started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. In addition, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 pending number display area 931, the special figure 1 pending icon 952 becomes a variable icon, and a moving animation between the pending / varying icons and a special figure 1 pending icon 953 start. ing. Also, in FIG. 162 (g), a balloon image representing the lines of the character image h1 of the merchant displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative pattern display device 208 is started to be displayed in the lower left portion of the effect display area 208d. ..

  FIG. 162 (h) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 are completed. Also, in FIG. 162 (h), an image of a character string of "donor" is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant, which suggests that a character image h3 of the tongue described later appears. The production is being executed. The character image h3 of the hall is a character image used for the "rotation" advance notice effect shown in FIG. 161 (b) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "rotation display notice effect").

  FIG. 162 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the character image h3 of the lord is displayed in the upper right portion of the effect display area 208d, and the image of the character string "Called?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the line of the character image h3 of the lord. In addition, an image of the character string “Den!” Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant.

  FIG. 162 (j) shows a state where "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is started. In addition, the image of the character string of "Chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant, and thereafter, "Chance!" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the lord. The image of the character string is displayed. By displaying the image of the character string of "chance!" Representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the hall, it is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed.

  In FIG. 162 (k), all the images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “rotation target image” in this embodiment) are the image display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state of being rotated 45 ° counterclockwise when viewed from the player with the center of the center of rotation as the center of rotation. Also, in FIG. 162 (k), the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed and displayed. Here, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image rotated counterclockwise by 45 ° is the horizontal axis in the direction rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal direction, and the vertical axis is the direction orthogonal to the horizontal axis. It is the aspect ratio of the case. Similarly, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image after rotation is the aspect ratio when the horizontal axis is taken in the direction rotated counterclockwise from the horizontal direction and the vertical axis is taken in the direction orthogonal to the horizontal axis. .. For example, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image when the rotation target image is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the player is the rotation target image in a state where the rotation target image is rotated 90 ° clockwise as viewed from the player. It indicates the ratio of the vertical length to the horizontal length. Further, the fourth symbol displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display region 933, and the variable display of the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display region 208b are also executed during the execution of the rotation display notice effect.

  The image to be rotated before the rotation shown in FIG. 162 (j) is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative pattern display device 208), whereas The rotation target image shown in 162 (k) is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches the screen having an aspect ratio of 7: 5. Further, a part of the character image h3 of the hall, a part of "decoration 3" displayed in the right design display region 208c, and a part of the navigation character display region 970 are displayed so that they can be cut off from the decoration design display device 208. It Further, the fourth symbol displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display region 933, and the variable display of the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display region 208b are also executed during the execution of the rotation display notice effect.

  FIG. 162 (l) shows a state in which the image to be rotated has been rotated counterclockwise by 45 ° (rotated by 90 ° in total) about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 162 (k). Shows. Further, the image to be rotated is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches the screen having an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Also, in FIG. 162 (l), the rotation target image is not completely cut off and is displayed in its entirety.

  FIG. 162 (m) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise (a total of 180 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 162 (l) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation. Shows. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before rotation.

  FIG. 162 (n) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise (rotated by 225 ° in total) about the center of the image display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 from the state of FIG. 162 (m). Shows. The image to be rotated is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 7: 5. In addition, in FIG. 162 (n), the pending change image h2 during the execution of the rotation display advance notice effect is the rotation target image, the decorative pattern displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, the right symbol display area 208c, and the lord's character. It is displayed so as to overlap the image h3. The pending-change image h2 displayed in FIG. 162 (n) is an image used for producing a notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon. Further, a part of the character image h3 of the hall, a part of "decoration 3" displayed in the right design display region 208c, and a part of the navigation character display region 970 are displayed so that they can be cut off from the decoration design display device 208. It

  FIG. 162 (o) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (rotated 270 ° in total) about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 162 (n). Shows. The image to be rotated is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches the screen having an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Also, in FIG. 162 (o), the rotation target image is not completely cut off. Also, FIG. 162 (o) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon is executed. In the effect, an animation is performed in which a thunder is generated from the pending change image h2 and a lightning strikes the variable icon displayed in a black circle. The variable icon having a lightning strike overlaps the effect image, so that the entire variable icon is hidden by the effect image. Further, FIG. 162 (o) shows that "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 based on that the game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area The special figure 1 hold icon 954 displayed in a black circle in the second area of 950 appears by the increase animation of the hold icon.

  FIG. 162 (p) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 315 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 162 (o) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation. Shows. The image to be rotated is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 7: 5. In addition, the pending change image h2 shown in FIG. 162 (o) and the effect image displayed so as to overlap the entire variation icon 941 are deleted, and the character "heat" is drawn in the circle. The fluctuation icon is displayed. Next, in FIG. 162 (q), the rotation target image is rotated counterclockwise by 45 ° about the center of the image display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 from the state of FIG. 162 (p) (rotation by 360 ° in total). , Shows a state in which the image to be rotated has rotated once and returned to the original display state. Also, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated has returned to the original aspect ratio before rotation. Next, in FIG. 162 (r), “decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of alignment. It shows a state in which it is notified. Further, the variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 940 moves downward, so that an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon is executed. The downward arrow shown at the upper left of the variation icon in FIG. 162 (r) represents the moving direction of the variation icon.

  As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, when the rotation target image is rotated and displayed, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change. A character image may be used as the rotation target image, and the presence / absence of the character image may be enhanced by changing the aspect ratio of the character image, which may give a strong impression to the player. Further, in the rotation display advance notice effect in the present embodiment, the rotation target image makes one rotation (360 ° rotation), but the rotation target image may make one rotation or more. For example, the greater the number of rotations of the rotation target image, the higher the jackpot reliability may be set.

  The aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change in relation to the rotation angle of the rotation target image. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit determines the aspect ratio of the rotation target image using a predetermined function with the rotation angle of the rotation target image as a variable, and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio. From the VRAM 436 may be used to generate a display image. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change randomly. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit determines the aspect ratio of the rotation target image using a random number, and generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio. It may be done. Further, the display area of the rotation target image may be enlarged or reduced depending on the change of the aspect ratio of the rotation target image, or the rotation target image may be displayed so that the rotation target image has a constant display area. The aspect ratio may change.

In the present embodiment, the rotation target image has the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation, but the rotation target image may have an arbitrary position of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation. Good. Further, the rotation target image may be rotated with a straight line passing through the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as a rotation axis, or a straight line passing through an arbitrary position of the image display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. You may rotate as an axis. Further, in the present embodiment, the angular velocity of rotation of each image in the rotation target image is constant, but the angular velocity of rotation of each image may be changed according to the distance from the rotation center. For example, the angular velocity of rotation of each image may be slowed as the distance from the rotation center increases. In this case, it may be possible to give the player the impression that the image to be rotated is rotating faster than it looks. Further, in the present embodiment, an effect of changing the variable icon is performed during the rotation display notice effect as a notice of the symbol change display being executed. Therefore, there are cases where expectations for the special figure variation game being executed can be synergistically increased by simultaneously performing these effects.
(Example 2)
An example of effects of Example 2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 163. 163 (a) to 163 (r) display the effects of the special figure 1 variation game in time series. FIG. 163 (a) shows the state where the special figure 1 variation game has ended, and shows the same state as the state shown in FIG. 162 (a). Next, FIG. 163 (b) shows the state where the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variation game is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 162 (b). Next, in FIG. 163 (c), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 951 ends, and the variable icon display area 940 is displayed. The change icon 941 is displayed. Also, based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230, "1" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 and black is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950. The special figure 1 hold icon 952 displayed in a circle is shown by the increase animation of the hold icon. In addition, FIG. 163 (c) shows a balloon image immediately after the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative pattern display device 208 is displayed in the lower left part of the effect display area 208d. It shows the state.

  FIG. 163 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting opening 230, "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 and black is displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950. It shows a state in which the special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle appears by the increase animation of the hold icon. In addition, an image of the character string “Chance?” Is displayed in the balloon image that represents the line of the character image h1 of the merchant.

  163 (e), "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. Indicates that the notification has been made. Next, FIG. 163 (f) shows the state in which the special figure 1 variation game has ended, and shows the same state as FIG. 162 (f). Next, FIG. 163 (g) shows the same state as FIG. 162 (g), showing the state in which the first special figure 1 hold is digested and the special figure 1 variation game is started. Next, FIG. 163 (h) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / fluctuating icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 are completed, which is the same state as FIG. 162 (h). Next, FIG. 163 (i) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and the character image h3 of the hall is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the same as FIG. 162 (i). It shows the state.

  FIG. 163 (j) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is started. In addition, the image of the character string of "Chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant, and thereafter, "Chance!" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the lord. The image of the character string is displayed. By displaying the image of the character string of "chance!" Representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the hall, it is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed.

  FIG. 163 (k) is a decorative pattern displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, the pending change image h2, the character image h3 of the hall, the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the hall, the decorative frame f2, and the decorative frame f2. The images (holding icon, variable icon, character image h1 of the merchant, etc.) displayed inside and balloon images representing the lines of the character image h1 of the merchant (hereinafter, referred to as “rotation target image” in the present embodiment. ) Indicates a state in which the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise when viewed from the player with the center of rotation as the center of rotation. Further, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, different from the rotation display advance notice effect shown in the first embodiment of the present embodiment, the decoration frame f1 and the image displayed in the decoration frame f1 (holding number display, Images of four patterns) (hereinafter, in the present embodiment, these images may be referred to as “non-rotation target images”) are not rotated and displayed, and the aspect ratio of the non-rotation target images does not change. Further, the non-rotation target image is displayed with priority over the rotation target image. Note that the rotation target image may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image, or only some of the rotation target images may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image. There may be a case where only a part of the non-rotation target images is displayed with priority over the rotation target image.

  The image to be rotated before the rotation is displayed with an aspect ratio matched with the screen having an aspect ratio of 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative pattern display device 208), whereas the rotation shown in FIG. 163 (k). The target image is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 7: 5. Further, a part of the character image h3 of the hall, a part of "decoration 3" displayed in the right design display region 208c, and a part of the navigation character display region 970 are displayed so that they can be cut off from the decoration design display device 208. It Further, the fourth symbol displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display region 933, and the variable display of the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display region 208b are also executed during the execution of the rotation display notice effect.

  FIG. 163 (l) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 90 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 163 (k) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation. Shows. Further, the image to be rotated is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches the screen having an aspect ratio of 1: 1. In addition, in FIG. 163 (l), the rotation target image is displayed in its entirety without being cut off.

  FIG. 163 (m) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise (a total of 180 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 163 (l) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation. Shows. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before rotation. The decorative frame f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative frame f2. The decorative frame f1 is displayed on the front side of the decorative frame f2, and the decorative frame f1 is displayed with priority over the decorative frame f2.

  FIG. 163 (n) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise (rotated by 225 ° in total) from the state of FIG. 163 (m) around the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation. Shows. The image to be rotated is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 7: 5. Further, in FIG. 163 (n), the pending change image h2 during the execution of the rotation display notice effect is the rotation target image, the decorative pattern displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, the right symbol display area 208c, and the character of the lord. It is displayed so as to overlap the image h3. The pending-change image h2 displayed in FIG. 163 (n) is an image used for producing a notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon. Further, a part of the character image h3 of the hall, a part of "decoration 3" displayed in the right design display region 208c, and a part of the navigation character display region 970 are displayed so that they can be cut off from the decoration design display device 208. It

  FIG. 163 (o) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (rotated 270 ° in total) from the state of FIG. 163 (n) around the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation. Shows. The image to be rotated is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches the screen having an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Also, in FIG. 163 (o), the rotation target image is not completely cut off. Also, FIG. 163 (o) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon is executed. In the effect, an animation is performed in which a thunder is generated from the pending change image h2 and a lightning strikes the variable icon displayed in a black circle. The variable icon having a lightning strike overlaps the effect image, so that the entire variable icon is hidden by the effect image. Further, in FIG. 163 (o), "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 based on that the game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area is displayed. The special figure 1 hold icon 954 displayed in a black circle in the second area of 950 appears by the increase animation of the hold icon.

  FIG. 163 (p) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 315 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 163 (o) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation. Shows. The image to be rotated is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 7: 5. Also, the pending change image h2 shown in FIG. 163 (o) and the effect image displayed by overlapping the entire variation icon are erased, and the variation of the mode in which the character “heat” is drawn in the circle is erased. The icon is displayed. Next, in FIG. 163 (q), the rotation target image rotates counterclockwise by 45 ° about the center of the image display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 from the state of FIG. 163 (p) (360 ° rotation in total). , Shows the state in which the image to be rotated has rotated once and returned to the original display state. Also, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated has returned to the original aspect ratio before rotation. Next, in FIG. 163 (r), "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of alignment. It shows a state in which it is reported that there is. Further, the variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 940 moves downward, so that an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon 941 is executed.

As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, the non-rotation target image is not rotated when the rotation display of the rotation target image is performed. For the non-rotation target image, the fourth symbol displayed in the fourth symbol display area and the number-of-holds display displayed in the number-of-holds display area are used. Therefore, the image notifying the information important to the player is not rotated.
(Example 3)
An effect example of Example 3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 164 (a) to 164 (r) display the effect of the special game 1 variation game in time series. FIGS. 164 (a) to 164 (h) show the same states as FIGS. 163 (a) to 163 (h). Next, in FIG. 164 (i), the character image h3 of the hall is displayed in the lower right part of the effect display area 208d. The lord's character image h3 and the decorative frame f2 are displayed so as to overlap each other, and a part (chin portion) of the lord's character image h3 is hidden by the decorative frame f2. Also, FIG. 164 (i) shows the same state as FIG. 163 (i) except that the display position of the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the hall and the character image h3 of the hall is different. Next, FIG. 164 (j) shows the same state as FIG. 163 (j) except that the display positions of the balloon character image h3 and the balloon image representing the dialogue of the hall character image h3 are different.

  FIG. 164 (k) is a balloon image representing the decorative pattern displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, the lord's character image h3, and the dialogue of the lord's character image h3 (hereinafter, these images will be referred to as " It may be referred to as a "rotation target image".) Indicates a state in which the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise as seen from the player as the center of rotation. Further, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, unlike the rotation display notice effect shown in the first embodiment, the decorative frame f1, the image displayed in the decoration frame f1, the decoration frame f2, and the decoration frame f2 are displayed. The rotated image and the balloon image representing the line of the grandfather character (hereinafter, these images may be referred to as "non-rotation target image" in this example) are not executed and the non-rotation target image is displayed. Aspect ratio does not change. Further, the non-rotation target image is displayed with priority over the rotation target image. Note that the rotation target image may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image, or only some of the rotation target images may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image. There may be a case where only a part of the non-rotation target images is displayed with priority over the rotation target image.

  In FIG. 164 (k), the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed and displayed. The image to be rotated before the rotation is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative pattern display device 208), while the rotation shown in FIG. 164 (k). The aspect ratio of the target image is changed to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 3: 4. Also, in the character image h3 of the hall, the hidden chin portion is displayed. Further, a part of “decoration 3” displayed in the left symbol display area 208a is cut off in the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, FIG. 164 (l) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 164 (k) with the center of the image display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 as the center of rotation. The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Next, FIG. 164 (m) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 164 (l) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before rotation. Next, FIG. 164 (n) shows a state in which the rotation target image has been rotated counterclockwise by 45 ° about the center of the image display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 from the state of FIG. 164 (m). The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed to the aspect ratio according to the screen having the aspect ratio of 3: 4. In addition, FIG. 164 (n) shows that the pending change image h2 during the rotation display notice effect is the rotation target image, the decorative pattern displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, the right symbol display area 208c, and the character of the lord. It is displayed so as to overlap the image h3. The pending change image h2 displayed in FIG. 164 (n) is an image used to produce a notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon.

  FIG. 164 (o) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated counterclockwise by 45 ° about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 164 (n). The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. In addition, FIG. 164 (o) illustrates a state in which an effect (a change icon change animation) that changes the display mode of the change icon is executed. In the effect in this embodiment, the lightning generated from the pending change image h2 is displayed so as to fall at a position different from the change icon to be changed. Further, the fluctuation icon of the non-rotation target image changes from a black circle to a mode in which the character "heat" is drawn in a circle at the timing when the effect image is displayed due to a thunder from the pending change image h2. ing. In the present embodiment, the changing icon that changes is not hidden by the effect image, so that the changing icon after changing can be visually recognized earlier than when the changing icon that changes is hidden by the effect image.

  FIG. 164 (p) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 164 (o) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed to the aspect ratio according to the screen having the aspect ratio of 3: 4. The pending change image h2, the lightning image, and the effect image are deleted. Next, FIG. 164 (q) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated counterclockwise by 45 ° about the center of the image display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 from the state of FIG. 164 (p) and returned to the original state. Shows. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image has returned to the original aspect ratio. Next, in FIG. 164 (r), "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of alignment. It shows a state in which it is reported that there is. Further, the variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 940 moves downward, so that an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon is executed.

As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, the non-rotation target image is not rotated when the rotation display of the rotation target image is performed. As the non-rotation target image, images such as the fourth symbol displayed in the fourth symbol display area, the number of holdings displayed in the number of holdings display area, the holding icon, and the variable icon are used. Therefore, the image notifying the information important to the player is not rotated.
(Example 4)
An example of effects of Example 4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 165. 165 (a) to (r) display the effects of the special figure 1 variation game in time series. 165 (a) to 165 (i) show the same states as in FIGS. 164 (a) to 164 (i).

  FIG. 165 (j) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is started. In addition, the image of the character string of "Chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant, and thereafter, "Chance!" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the lord. The image of the character string is displayed. By displaying the image of the character string of "chance!" Representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the hall, it is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed. Also, FIG. 165 (j) shows a decoration frame f2, an image displayed in the decoration frame f2 (holding icon, change icon, merchant character image h1, etc.), and a balloon image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image h1. It has been erased.

  FIG. 165 (k) is a balloon image (hereinafter, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the pending change image h2, the hall character image h3, and the dialogue of the hall character image h3. "It may be referred to as a" rotation target image ".)" Indicates a state in which the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise when viewed from the player with the center of rotation as the center of rotation. Further, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, unlike the rotation display notice effect shown in the first embodiment of the present embodiment, the decorative frame f1 and the image displayed in the decoration frame f1 (hereinafter, in this example, These images may be referred to as “non-rotation target images”.) The rotation display is not executed, and the aspect ratio of the non-rotation target images does not change. Further, the non-rotation target image is displayed with priority over the rotation target image. Note that the rotation target image may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image, or only some of the rotation target images may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image. There may be a case where only a part of the non-rotation target images is displayed with priority over the rotation target image. Also, in FIG. 165 (k), the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed and displayed. The rotation target image before rotation is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative pattern display device 208), while the rotation shown in FIG. 165 (k). The aspect ratio of the target image changes according to the aspect ratio of the screen having an aspect ratio of 3: 4.

  FIG. 165 (l) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 90 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 165 (k) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation. Showing. The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Next, in FIG. 165 (m), the rotation target image is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise (a total of 180 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 165 (l) with the center of the image display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 as the center of rotation. It shows the state. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before rotation. The decorative frame f1 is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern, and the decorative frame f1 is displayed with priority over the decorative pattern. Next, in FIG. 165 (n), the rotation target image is rotated counterclockwise by 45 ° about the center of the image display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 from the state of FIG. 165 (m) (rotated 225 ° in total). It shows the state. The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed to the aspect ratio according to the screen having the aspect ratio of 3: 4. Further, in FIG. 165 (n), the pending change image h2 is displayed as a rotation target image during execution of the rotation display notice effect, and the pending change image h2g is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c. It is displayed so as to overlap the design and the character image h3 of the hall. The pending change image h2 displayed in FIG. 165 (n) is an image used for producing a notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon.

  FIG. 165 (o) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise (rotated by 270 ° in total) about the center of the image display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 from the state of FIG. 165 (n). Shows. The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Further, FIG. 165 (o) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon is executed. The effect is different from the effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon during the rotation display notice effect in the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the present embodiment, and the lightning generated from the pending change image h2 is changed. It is displayed so as not to drop on the target fluctuation icon. In addition, the variation icon of the non-rotation target image is displayed in a circle at the position of the variation icon display area 940 before the execution of the rotation display notice effect at the timing when the thunder is generated from the pending change image h2 and the effect image is displayed. The variable icon 942 in the form of the character "heat" is temporarily overlapped with the pending change image h2 and "decoration 3", and has a priority on the front side over the pending change image h2 and "decoration 3". It is displayed. Therefore, the player can temporarily confirm that the variable icon has changed.

  FIG. 165 (p) shows a state in which the image to be rotated has been rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 315 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 165 (o) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation. Shows. The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed to the aspect ratio according to the screen having the aspect ratio of 3: 4. Further, the pending change image h2, the lightning image, the effect image, and the change icon 941 are deleted. Next, in FIG. 165 (q), the image to be rotated is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 164 (p) with the center of the image display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 as the center of rotation. It shows the state where it returned to the original state. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image has returned to the original aspect ratio. Further, the decoration frame f2 that has been deleted, the image displayed in the decoration frame f2 (holding icon, change icon, character image h1 of the merchant, etc.), and a balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant are displayed. There is. Next, in FIG. 165 (r), "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of alignment. It shows a state in which it is notified. Further, the variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 940 moves downward, so that an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon is executed.

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, when the rotation display of the rotation target image is performed, it is possible not to display the image such as the hold icon and the variable icon which are important information for the player. In some cases, the player may be allowed to pay attention to the rotation display of the rotation target image. Further, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, the effect of changing the variable icon is performed even though the variable icon is not displayed. Therefore, it may be possible to give an unexpected surprise to the player. In addition, it may be possible to satisfy the player's expectation by displaying only the variable icon that has temporarily changed during the effect of changing the variable icon. Further, the variable icon may be temporarily or may not be displayed until the rotation display of the rotation target image is completed. In this case, since it takes a predetermined time from the end of the change icon change animation until the change icon is displayed, it may be possible to increase the player's expectation. Further, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, there may be a case where an effect of changing the hold icon is performed even though the hold icon is not displayed.
(Example 5)
An effect example of Example 5 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 166. FIGS. 166 (a) to 166 (l) display the effects of the special game 1 variation game in time series. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 used in the present embodiment and the sixth to ninth embodiments to be described later has a sub display device 209 mounted on the production movable body 225. The production movable body 225 can be vertically moved and rotated two-dimensionally in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by a drive system (not shown). .. In addition, the production movable body 225 may be configured to be able to move three-dimensionally. Further, the sub display device 209 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative designs and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the sub display device 209, the liquid crystal display device is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device, Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted. Further, the sub display device 209 is controlled by the first sub control unit 400, similarly to the decorative symbol display device 208. The sub display device 209 may be controlled by the second sub control unit 500.

  FIG. 166 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" indicating that the winning / decision determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order is stopped and displayed. Has been done. In the special figure 1 4th symbol display area 933 and the special figure 2 4th symbol display area 934, the 4th symbol of the display aspect which notifies the deviation is stopped and displayed. Further, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display area 931 indicating that the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 1, and the reserved number of special figure 2 is 0 in the special figure 2 reserved number display area 932. “0” indicating that is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950, a default special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in a white circle is displayed. Further, FIG. 166 (a) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is located at a position in front of and above the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. In the state shown in FIG. 166 (a), the sub display device 209 (effect movable body 225) is located at the initial position.

  FIG. 166 (b) shows that the suspension of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variation game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, “0” is displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display area 931 to notify that the reserved number of the special figure 1 is decreased by 1 and the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 0. In addition, when the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variation game is started, in the variation icon display area 940 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold / variation icon is displayed. The moving animation between is executed. In the moving animation between the hold / variable icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 becomes the change icon 941 and moves to the change icon display area 940. .. As described above, in FIG. 166 (b), the moving animation between the hold and change icons is executed.

  FIG. 166 (c) shows a state in which the moving icon 941 is displayed in the variable icon display area 940 after the movement animation between the hold and variable icons is completed. Further, FIG. 166 (c) shows a state in which the character image h3 of the player is displayed in the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209. In this example, the character image h3 of the hall is a character image used for the "rotation" advance notice effect shown in FIG. 161 (b) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "rotation display notice effect").

  FIG. 166 (d) shows a state in which the rotation display advance notice effect as the reach effect is executed. In the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, the rotation display of the character image h3 of the player is executed on the sub display device 209. FIG. 166 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the character image h3 of the hall displayed on the sub display device 209 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “rotation target image” in this example) has the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center. It shows a state in which it is rotated counterclockwise by 45 °. Further, in FIG. 166 (d), the image to be rotated is displayed with the aspect ratio of the image changed. The image to be rotated before the rotation is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the sub display device 209), whereas the image to be rotated shown in FIG. The aspect ratio of the image is changed to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 7: 5. Next, FIG. 166 (e) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 90 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 166 (d) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation. Is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed to the aspect ratio that matches the screen with the aspect ratio of 1: 1. Next, in FIG. 166 (f), the image to be rotated is in the state of FIG. 166 (e) or is rotated counterclockwise by 45 ° about the center of the image display area of the sub-display device 209 (a total rotation of 135 °). Is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed to the aspect ratio according to the screen having the aspect ratio of 7: 5.

  FIG. 166 (g) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 180 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 166 (f) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation. ing. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before rotation. Next, FIG. 166 (h) shows a state in which the image to be rotated has been rotated counterclockwise by 45 ° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state of FIG. 166 (g) (total 225 ° rotation). Is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed to the aspect ratio according to the screen having the aspect ratio of 7: 5. Next, FIG. 166 (i) shows a state in which the image to be rotated has been rotated counterclockwise by 45 ° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state of FIG. 166 (h) (total 270 ° rotation). Is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed to the aspect ratio that matches the screen with the aspect ratio of 1: 1. Next, FIG. 166 (j) shows a state in which the image to be rotated has been rotated counterclockwise by 45 ° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state of FIG. 166 (e) (total 315 ° rotation). Is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed to the aspect ratio according to the screen having the aspect ratio of 7: 5. Next, in FIG. 166 (k), the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 166 (j) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation. It has returned to the state. Also, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated has returned to the original aspect ratio before rotation. Next, in FIG. 166 (l), "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the sub display device 209, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. This indicates a state in which the fact is notified. Further, by moving the fluctuation icon 941 displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 940 downward, a deletion animation for deleting the fluctuation icon 941 is executed.

  As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, when the rotation target image displayed on the sub display device 209 is rotated and displayed, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change. A character image is used as the rotation target image. By changing the aspect ratio of the character image, the presence of the character image may be enhanced, which may give an impact to the player. Further, in the rotation display advance notice effect in the present embodiment, the rotation target image makes one rotation (360 °), but it may have a configuration of rotating once or more. For example, the larger the number of rotations of the rotation target image, the higher the jackpot reliability may be.

  Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change in relation to the rotation angle of the rotation target image. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines the aspect ratio of the rotation target image using a predetermined function with the rotation angle of the rotation target image as a variable, and the image stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio. A display image may be generated from the data using the work area of the VRAM 436. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change randomly. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines the aspect ratio of the rotation target image using a random number, and the display image is displayed using the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio. It may be generated. Further, the display area of the rotation target image may be enlarged or reduced depending on the change of the aspect ratio of the rotation target image, or the rotation target image may be displayed so that the rotation target image has a constant display area. The aspect ratio may change.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation target image has the center of rotation of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation, but may have the rotation center at any position of the image display area of the sub display device 209. Good. The rotation target image may be rotated about a straight line passing through the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as a rotation axis, or a straight line passing through an arbitrary position of the image display area of the sub display device 209. It may be rotated as a rotation axis.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation angular velocity of the rotation target image is constant, but the rotation angular velocity of the rotation target image may be changed according to the distance from the rotation center. For example, the angular velocity of rotation of the image to be rotated may be slowed as the distance from the rotation center increases. In this case, it may be possible to give the player the illusion that the image to be rotated is rotating faster than it looks.
(Example 6)
An effect example of Example 6 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 167. 167 (a) to (l) display the effects of the special figure 1 variation game in time series.

  FIG. 167 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" indicating that the winning / decision determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order is stopped and displayed. Has been done. In the special figure 1 4th symbol display area 933 and the special figure 2 4th symbol display area 934, the 4th symbol of the display aspect which notifies the deviation is stopped and displayed. Further, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display area 931 indicating that the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 1, and the reserved number of special figure 2 is 0 in the special figure 2 reserved number display area 932. “0” indicating that is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950, a default special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in a white circle is displayed. Further, FIG. 167 (a) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is positioned at the front position in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the sub display device 209 has a holding display area 209b for displaying the holding number display image in the lower left part. In FIG. 167 (a), in the hold display area 209b of the sub display device 209, "1" indicating that the hold number in Toku-zu 1 is 1 is displayed as the hold number display image.

  FIG. 167 (b) shows that the holding of special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variation game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, “0” is displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display area 931 to notify that the reserved number of the special figure 1 is decreased by 1 and the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 0. In addition, when the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variation game is started, in the variation icon display area 940 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold / variation icon is displayed. The moving animation between is executed. In the moving animation between the hold / variable icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 becomes the change icon 941 and moves to the change icon display area 940. .. In this way, the moving animation between the hold and change icons is executed. Further, in the hold display area 209b in the lower left part of the sub display device 209, "0" indicating that the hold number in the special figure 1 is 0 is displayed as the hold number display image.

  FIG. 167 (c) shows a state in which the moving icon between the holding and changing icons is finished and the changing icon 941 is displayed in the changing icon display area 940. Further, FIG. 167 (c) shows a state in which the character image h3 of the hall is displayed in the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209. The character image h3 of the hall is a character image used for the "rotation" advance notice effect shown in FIG. 161 (b) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "rotation display notice effect").

  FIG. 167 (d) shows a state in which the rotation display advance notice effect as the reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 rotates 360 ° counterclockwise as seen from the player in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, the character image h3 of the hall is rotated 360 ° counterclockwise. FIG. 167 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the sub display device 209 moves from the front position to the lower position of the center upper portion of the decorative symbol display device 208, and rotates 45 ° counterclockwise around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center. It shows the state of being done. Further, the hold display area 209b in the lower left part of the sub display device 209 is moved to the upper left part of the sub display device 209. Further, the image of “0” displayed as the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 209b is rotated 45 degrees clockwise around the center of the image of “0” in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. It is rotated and displayed.

  FIG. 167 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 rotates counterclockwise by 45 ° (a total of 90 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 167 (d) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation. Is shown. Further, the image of “0” displayed as the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 209b is rotated 45 degrees clockwise around the center of the image of “0” in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. It is displayed after being rotated by 90 degrees (total of 90 degrees). Next, in FIG. 167 (f), the sub display device 209 rotates counterclockwise by 45 ° from the state of FIG. 167 (e) around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 (a total rotation of 135 °). It shows the state of being done. Further, the hold display area 209b in the upper left portion of the sub display device 209 is moved to the upper right portion of the sub display device 209. Further, the image of “0” displayed in the hold display area 209b as the number-of-holds display image is rotated by 45 ° clockwise around the center of the image of “0” in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. It is displayed after being rotated (a total of 135 ° rotation). Next, in FIG. 167 (g), the sub display device 209 rotates counterclockwise by 45 ° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state of FIG. 167 (f) (total 180 ° rotation). It shows the state of being done. Further, the image of “0” displayed in the hold display area 209b as the number-of-holds display image is rotated by 45 ° clockwise around the center of the image of “0” in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. It is displayed after being rotated (a total of 180 ° rotation).

  FIG. 167 (h) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated counterclockwise by 45 ° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state of FIG. 167 (g) (total 225 ° rotation). Is shown. Further, the hold display area 209b in the upper right part of the sub display device 209 is moved to the lower right part of the sub display device 209. Further, the “0” image of the number of held display images displayed in the hold display area 209b is rotated by 45 ° clockwise around the center of the image of “0” in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. The image is displayed (rotated 225 ° in total). Next, in FIG. 167 (i), the sub display device 209 rotates counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 167 (h) about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 by 45 ° (a total of 270 ° rotation). It shows the state of being done. Further, the “0” image of the number of held display images displayed in the hold display area 209b is rotated by 45 ° clockwise around the center of the image of “0” in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. It is displayed by rotating (total of 270 °).

  FIG. 167 (j) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated counterclockwise by 45 ° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state of FIG. 167 (i) (total 315 ° rotation). Is shown. Further, the hold display area 209b in the lower right part of the sub display device 209 is moved to the original position in the lower left part of the sub display device 209. Further, the image of “0” displayed in the hold display area 209b as the number-of-holds display image is rotated by 45 ° clockwise with the center of the image of “0” as the center of rotation in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. It is displayed after being rotated (total of 315 ° rotation). Next, in FIG. 167 (k), the sub display device 209 rotates counterclockwise by 45 ° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state of FIG. 167 (j) (total 360 ° rotation). It shows the state of being done. Further, the image of “0” displayed in the hold display area 209b as the number-of-holds display image is rotated by 45 ° clockwise with the center of the image of “0” as the center of rotation in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. It is displayed after being rotated (a total of 360 ° rotation). Next, in FIG. 167 (l), "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of alignment. It shows a state in which it is notified. In addition, the sub-display device 209 erases the character image h3 of the hall, and the decorative pattern display device 208 moves the variation icon 941 displayed in the variation icon display area 940 downward to erase the variation icon 941. Animation is running.

As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, the rotation display of the rotation target image is performed by rotating the sub display device 209. Further, when the sub display device 209 is rotated, the number-of-holds display image displayed on the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating mode as seen from the player. Further, the hold display area 209b of the sub display device 209 is moved so as to be displayed in the left corner of the sub display device 209 as seen by the player, in accordance with the rotation of the sub display device 209. Therefore, while the sub display device 209 is rotating, the number-of-holds display image, which is important information for the player, is displayed at a position where the player can easily see it. Further, instead of rotating the sub display device 209, by rotating the decorative symbol display device 208, there may be a case where an effect of rotating the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed, or a decorative symbol. By rotating the display device 208 and the sub display device 209 at the same time or continuously, the effect of rotating the image displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the sub display device 209 may be performed. The decorative symbol display device 208 may be rotatable, and the sub display device 209 may be immovably fixed to the game board 200.
(Example 7)
An effect example of Example 7 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 168. FIGS. 168 (a) to (l) display the effects of the special figure 1 variation game in time series.

  FIG. 168 (a) shows a state where the special figure 1 variation game has ended, and shows the same state as FIG. 166 (a). Next, FIG. 168 (b) shows the state in which the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variation game is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 166 (b). Next, in FIG. 168 (c), the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation between the hold / variable icons ends, and the variable icon display region. The change icon 941 is displayed at 940. Further, FIG. 168 (c) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved downward and the hall character image h3 is displayed in the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209. The character image h3 of the hall is a character image used for the "rotation" advance notice effect shown in FIG. 161 (b) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "rotation display notice effect").

  FIG. 168 (d) shows a state in which the rotation display advance notice effect as the reach effect is executed. FIG. 168 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated counterclockwise by 45 ° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation. Further, the character image h3 of the hall displayed in the center of the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209 is the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 209. It is displayed by rotating 45 degrees clockwise about the rotation center. Therefore, the player's character image h3 is visually recognized as not rotating. Next, FIGS. 168 (e) to (k) show a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated by 45 °. In addition, in FIGS. 168 (e) to (k), the character image h3 of the user is displayed by being rotated clockwise at the same rotation speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 209. Therefore, while the sub display device 209 is rotating, the player's character image h3 is always visually recognized as not rotating. Next, in FIG. 168 (l), "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of alignment. It shows a state in which it is notified. In addition, the sub-display device 209 erases the character image h3 of the hall, and the decorative pattern display device 208 moves the variation icon 941 displayed in the variation icon display area 940 downward to erase the variation icon 941. Animation is running.

As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, the character image displayed on the sub display device 209 is rotated at the same speed in the opposite direction as the sub display device 209 while rotating the sub display device 209. , The character image is displayed in a state where it is not rotated when viewed from the player. Therefore, although the sub display device 209 is rotating, the image displayed on the sub display device does not rotate, which may give the player unexpectedness. Further, in the present embodiment, the character image is rotated in the opposite direction to the rotation direction of the sub display device 209 at the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 209, but in the opposite direction of the rotation direction of the sub display device 209. The character image may be rotated at a speed different from the rotation speed of the sub display device 209, or in the same direction as the rotation direction of the sub display device 209 or at the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 209. The character image may be rotated at different speeds.
(Example 8)
An effect example of Example 8 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 169. FIGS. 169 (a) to 169 (f) display the effect of the special game 1 variation game in time series.

  FIG. 169 (a) shows a state where the special figure 1 variation game is finished, and shows the same state as FIG. 166 (a). Next, FIG. 169 (b) shows a state in which the sub-display device 209 has moved downward and the character image h3 of the player is displayed on the sub-display device 209, which is the same state as FIG. 168 (c). . The character image h3 of the hall is a character image used for the "rotation" advance notice effect shown in FIG. 161 (b) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "rotation display notice effect"). 169 (b-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 169 (b). . The image data shown in FIG. 169 (b-1) has a lord's character image h3 and a princess's character image h4 at the lower left of the lord's character image h3. It is the image data in a non-rotated form. In addition, in this example, the princess character image h4 is an image used for a notice with high jackpot reliability. 169 (b-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 169 (b-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 169 (b). The generated display data is shown. From the image data shown in FIG. 169 (b-1), a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 is cut around the center of the image data to obtain display data. FIG. 169 (b-3) shows a state in which an image is displayed on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 169 (b-2).

  169 (c) to (e) show a state in which the rotation display advance notice effect as the reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 rotates counterclockwise 45 ° in the plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 in front of the decorative pattern display device 208, and then rotates clockwise. It is rotated 45 °. In addition, the rectangle indicated by the two-dot chain line in the diagrams of FIGS. 169 (c) to 169 (e) indicates the position of the sub display device 209 before rotation. The arrows shown in FIGS. 169 (c) to 169 (e) indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 209.

  FIG. 169 (c) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated counterclockwise by 30 ° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. 169 (b). . The character image h3 of the hall displayed in the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating state as seen from the player. Further, in the sub display device 209, a part of the princess character image h4 that has been cut off from the sub display device 209 is displayed in the lower left part in a state where the player does not rotate. 169 (c-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 169 (c). The image data shown in FIG. 169 (c-1) is the image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 169 (b-1) 30 degrees clockwise with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. 169 (c-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 169 (c-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 169 (c). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the image data shown in FIG. 169 (c-1) around the center of the image data. FIG. 169 (c-3) shows an image displayed on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 169 (c-2) to rotate the sub display device 209 counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 169 (b). FIG. 169 (c) shows the state of the sub-display device 209 rotated by 30 °.

  FIG. 169 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated counterclockwise by 15 ° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. 169 (c). .. The character image h3 of the hall displayed in the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating state as seen from the player. Further, on the sub display device 209, the entire princess character image h4 is displayed in the lower left portion in a manner not rotating as seen from the player. Further, FIG. 169 (d-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 169 (d). The image data shown in FIG. 169 (d-1) is the image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 169 (c-1) by 15 ° in the clockwise direction with the center of the image data as the rotation center. 169 (d-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 169 (d-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 169 (d). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area with an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the center of the image data shown in FIG. 169 (d-1) as display data. 169 (d-3) shows an image displayed on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 169 (d-2) so that the sub display device 209 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 169 (e). FIG. 169 (d) shows the state of the sub display device 209 rotated by 15 °.

  FIG. 169 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated by 15 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 169 (d) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation. The character image h3 of the hall displayed in the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating state as seen from the player. Further, in the sub display device 209, a part of the princess character image h4 is displayed in a manner not rotating when viewed from the player, and the other part is cut off from the sub display device 209. Also, FIG. 169 (e) shows a state immediately before the end of the rotation display advance notice effect as the reach effect. FIG. 169 (e-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 169 (e). The image data shown in FIG. 169 (e-1) is the image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 169 (d-1) counterclockwise by 15 ° with the center of the image data as the rotation center. This is the same as the image data shown in (c-1). 169 (e-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 169 (e-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 169 (e). The generated display data is shown. The display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 169 (c-2). 169 (e-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 169 (c-2), and the sub display device 209 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 169 (d). The state rotated by 15 ° is shown, and the state of the sub display device 209 in FIG. 169 (d) is shown. FIG. 169 (e-3) shows the same state as FIG. 169 (c-3).

  169 (f), "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variation game is a big hit Indicates that the notification has been made. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 933 of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of “◯” is displayed to inform that the result of the special symbol 1 variation game is a big hit. Also, FIG. 169 (f) shows that the sub display device 209 rotates clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 169 (e) around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 by 30 ° and returns to the original state. The state is shown. The character image h3 of the hall displayed in the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating state as seen from the player. Further, on the sub display device 209, the princess character image h4 is not displayed. 169 (f-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 169 (f). The image data shown in FIG. 169 (f-1) is the image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 169 (e-1) 30 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the rotation center. This is the same as the image data shown in (b-1). 169 (f-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 169 (f-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 169 (f). The generated display data is shown. The display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 169 (b-2). 169 (f-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 169 (f-2), and the sub display device 209 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 169 (e). FIG. 169 (f) shows a state of the sub display device 209 rotated by 30 °. FIG. 169 (f-3) shows the same state as FIG. 169 (b-3).

As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, while rotating the sub display device 209, the image displayed on the sub display device 209 is rotated in the opposite direction to the sub display device 209 at the same speed, The character image h3 of the lord is displayed in a state where it is not rotated as seen from the player. Further, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, the princess character image h4 which has been completely cut off on the sub display device 209 before the rotation display advance notice effect is executed is displayed in rotation on the image displayed on the sub display device 209. Is displayed on the sub display device 209. The princess character image h4 is displayed on the sub display device 209 when the sub display device 209 rotates by a predetermined angle or more. Therefore, the player pays attention to the rotation angle of the sub display device 209, which may improve the interest of the game. Further, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, the princess character image h4 is displayed by the rotation of the sub display device 209, but a character is displayed in accordance with the jackpot reliability of the symbol variation display being executed. You may do so. For example, when the jackpot reliability is relatively low, the enemy character of the lord may be displayed. Further, while the sub-display device 209 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle to display the princess character image h4, the sub-display device 209 rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle to the enemy of the lord. The character may be displayed in some cases. Further, the aspect ratio of the character image h3 of the hall and the character image h4 of the princess used for the rotation display notice effect in the present embodiment may change during the rotation display notice effect.
(Example 9)
An effect example of Example 9 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 170. FIGS. 170 (a) to 170 (f) display the effect of the special figure 1 variation game in time series.

  FIG. 170 (a) shows a state where the special figure 1 variation game has ended, and shows the same state as FIG. 166 (a). Next, in FIG. 170 (b), the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation between the hold / variable icons ends, and the variable icon display region. The change icon 941 is displayed at 940. Also, in FIG. 170 (b), the sub display device 209 moves downward, and a character image h3 of the lord is displayed in the central part of the sub display device 209 and a character image h1 ′ of the merchant is displayed in the lower left part of the sub display device 209. It shows the state of being performed. The character image h3 of the hall is a character image used for the "rotation" advance notice effect shown in FIG. 161 (b) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "rotation display notice effect"). In addition, the merchant character image h1 ′ is the same character image as the merchant character image h1 displayed in the navigation character display area 970. Further, FIG. 170 (b-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 170 (b). . The image data shown in FIG. 170 (b-1) has a lord's character image h3 and a princess's character image h4 at the lower left of the lord's character image h3. It is the image data in a non-rotated form. In addition, in this example, the princess character image h4 is an image used for a notice with high jackpot reliability. 170 (b-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 170 (b-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 170 (b). The generated display data is shown. From the image data shown in FIG. 170 (b-1), a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 is cut around the center of the image data to obtain display data. Further, the display data shown in FIG. 170 (b-2) is stored in the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. It is the display data in which the merchant character image h1 ′ read from the ROM 406 is superimposed. FIG. 170 (b-3) shows a state in which an image is displayed on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 170 (b-2). Although the merchant character image h1 ′ is displayed with priority over the image data shown in FIG. 170 (b-1), the image data shown in FIG. 170 (b-1) is displayed more than the merchant character image h1 ′. There may be a case where priority is given to the display.

  FIGS. 170 (c) to 170 (e) show a state in which the rotation display advance notice effect as the reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 rotates counterclockwise 45 ° in the plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 in front of the decorative pattern display device 208, and then rotates clockwise. It is rotated 45 °. In addition, a rectangle indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIGS. 170C to 170E indicates the position of the sub display device 209 before rotation. The arrows shown in FIGS. 170C to 170E indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 209.

  FIG. 170 (c) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated counterclockwise by 30 ° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. 170 (b). . The character image h3 of the hall displayed in the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating state as seen from the player. Further, the merchant character image h1 ′ displayed in the lower left part of the sub display device 209 is changed from the state shown in FIG. 170 (b) to the image display area of the sub display device 209 when the sub display device 209 rotates. It is displayed in such a manner that it is rotated counterclockwise by 30 ° about the center of rotation. Further, on the sub display device 209, a part of the princess character image h4 that has been completely cut off from the sub display device 209 is displayed in the lower right part of the character image h1 'in a manner that the player does not rotate. Further, FIG. 170 (c-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 170 (c). The image data shown in FIG. 170 (c-1) is the image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 170 (b-1) 30 degrees clockwise with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. 170 (c-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 170 (c-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 170 (c). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the image data shown in FIG. 170 (c-1) with the center of the image data as the center. In addition, the display data shown in FIG. 170 (c-2) is first displayed at a predetermined position (the position shown in FIG. 170 (b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 170 (c-1). It is the display data in which the merchant character image h1 ′ read from the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 is superimposed. FIG. 170 (c-3) shows an image displayed on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 170 (c-2) so that the sub display device 209 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 170 (b). The state rotated by 30 ° is shown, and the state of the sub display device 209 in FIG. 170 (c) is shown.

  FIG. 170 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated counterclockwise by 15 ° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. 170 (c). . The character image h3 of the hall displayed in the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating state as seen from the player. Further, the character image h1 ′ of the merchant displayed in the lower left part of the sub display device 209 is rotated from the sub display device 209 to change the state of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. It is displayed in such a manner that it is rotated counterclockwise by 15 ° about the center of rotation. Further, on the sub display device 209, to the right of the merchant character image h1 ', the entire princess character image h4 is displayed in a non-rotating state as seen from the player. Also, FIG. 170 (d-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 170 (d). The image data shown in FIG. 170 (d-1) is image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 170 (c-1) clockwise by 15 ° about the center of the image data as the center of rotation. 170 (d-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 170 (d-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 170 (d). The generated display data is shown. The display data is set as display data by cutting a predetermined rectangular area with an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the center of the image data shown in FIG. 170 (d-1). Further, the display data shown in FIG. 170 (d-2) is first displayed at a predetermined position (the position shown in FIG. 170 (b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 170 (d-1). It is the display data in which the merchant character image h1 ′ read from the ROM 406 of the sub control unit 400 is superimposed. 170 (d-3) shows an image displayed on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 170 (d-2) so that the sub display device 209 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 170 (c). The state rotated by 15 ° is shown, and the state of the sub display device 209 in FIG. 170 (d) is shown.

  FIG. 170 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated by 15 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 170 (d) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation. The character image h3 of the hall displayed in the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating state as seen from the player. Further, the merchant character image h1 ′ displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 209 is changed from the state shown in FIG. 170 (d) to the image display area of the sub display device 209 when the sub display device 209 rotates. It is displayed in such a manner that it is rotated by 15 ° clockwise around the center of rotation. Further, on the sub display device 209, a part of the princess character image h4 is displayed in the lower right part of the character image h1 ′ in a manner not rotated by the player, and the other part is displayed from the sub display device 209. I'm out of sight. Further, FIG. 170 (e) shows a state immediately before the end of the rotation display advance notice effect as the reach effect. Also, FIG. 170 (e-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 170 (e). The image data shown in FIG. 170 (e-1) is image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 170 (d-1) counterclockwise by 15 ° with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. 170 (e-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 170 (e-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 170 (e). The generated display data is shown. The display data is display data obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area with an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the center of the image data shown in FIG. 170 (e-1). Further, the display data shown in FIG. 170 (e-2) is first displayed at a predetermined position (the position shown in FIG. 170 (b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 170 (e-1). It is the display data in which the merchant character image h1 ′ read from the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 is superimposed. FIG. 170 (e-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 170 (e-2), and the sub display device 209 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 170 (d). A state rotated by 15 ° is shown, and a state of the sub display device 209 in FIG. 170 (d) is shown.

  170 (f), "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Indicates that the notification has been made. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 933 of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of “◯” is displayed to inform that the result of the special symbol 1 variation game is a big hit. 170 (f), the sub display device 209 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 170 (e) about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 by 30 ° in the clockwise direction to return to the original state. The state is shown. The character image h3 of the hall displayed in the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating state as seen from the player. Further, the character image h1 ′ of the merchant displayed in the lower left part of the sub display device 209 is rotated from the sub display device 209 to change the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. 170 (e). It is displayed in a state where it is rotated clockwise by 30 ° with the center as the center of rotation and returned to the original state. Further, on the sub display device 209, the princess character image h4 is not displayed. 170 (f-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 170 (f). The image data shown in FIG. 170 (f-1) is the image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 170 (e-1) 30 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the rotation center. This is the same as the image data shown in (b-1). 170 (f-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 170 (f-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 170 (f). The generated display data is shown. In addition, the display data shown in FIG. 170 (f-2) is displayed at a predetermined position (lower left of the display data) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 170 (b-1) by the first sub-control unit 400. The display data is the display data obtained by superimposing the character image h1 ′ of the merchant read from the ROM 406, and the display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 170 (b-2). 170 (f-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 170 (f-2), and the sub display device 209 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 170 (e). A state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated by 30 ° is shown, and the state of the sub display device 209 in FIG. 170 (f) is shown. FIG. 170 (f-3) shows the same state as FIG. 170 (b-3).

As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, while the sub display device 209 is rotated, the character image displayed on the sub display device 209 in a manner in which the sub display device 209 does not rotate (the character image h3 of the lord). And a character image h4) of a princess and a character image (character image h1 'of a merchant) displayed in a state of being rotated when viewed from the player. On the rotating sub-display device 209, a character image displayed in a non-rotating state as viewed by the player and a character image displayed in a rotating state as viewed by the player are simultaneously displayed, Sometimes it can give the player an unexpected surprise.
(Example 10)
An effect example of Example 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 171. 171 (a) to 171 (f) display the effects of the special game 1 variation game in time series.

  FIG. 171 (a) shows the state where the special figure 1 variation game has ended, and shows the same state as FIG. 169 (a). Next, FIG. 171 (b) shows the state where the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variation game is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 169 (b). Further, FIG. 171 (b) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved downward and the character image h3 of the player is displayed on the sub display device 209. The character image h3 of the hall is an image used for the lateral movement display effect as the reach effect.

  171 (c) to (e) show a state in which the lateral movement display effect as the reach effect is executed. In the lateral movement display effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 moves in the left-right direction in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a rectangle indicated by a chain double-dashed line in FIGS. 171 (c) to 171 (e) indicates the position of the sub display device 209 before being moved in the left-right direction.

  FIG. 171 (c) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved leftward from the state shown in FIG. 171 (b). Also, the character image h3 of the hall displayed in the central portion of the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a mode in which it moves rightward by the same distance as the leftward movement distance of the sub display device 209. There is. Therefore, the character image h3 of the hall is displayed as if it were not moving when viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 209, a part of the princess character image h4 that has been cut off in the sub display device 209 is displayed in the upper left portion. In addition, in this example, the princess character image h4 is an image used for a notice with high jackpot reliability.

  FIG. 171 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved in the left lateral direction from the state shown in FIG. 171 (c). Further, the character image h3 of the buttocks displayed in the central portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a mode in which it moves rightward by the same distance as the leftward movement distance of the sub display device 209. Therefore, the character image h3 of the hall is displayed so that the player can visually recognize it as if it is not moving. In the sub display device 209, the entire princess character image h4 is displayed in the upper left part.

  FIG. 171 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved rightward from the state shown in FIG. 171 (d). Further, the character image h3 of the buttocks displayed in the central portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a mode in which the sub display device 209 moves leftward by the same distance as the rightward moving distance. Therefore, the character image h3 of the hall is displayed as if it were not moving when viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 209, a part of the princess character image h4 is displayed in the upper left part, and a part of the princess character image h4 is cut off. In addition, FIG. 171 (e) shows a state immediately before the lateral movement display effect as the reach effect ends.

  171 (f), "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Indicates that the notification has been made. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 933 of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of “◯” is displayed to inform that the result of the special symbol 1 variation game is a big hit. Further, FIG. 171 (f) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved rightward from the state shown in FIG. 171 (e) and returned to the original state. Further, the character image h3 of the buttocks displayed in the central portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a mode in which the sub display device 209 moves leftward by the same distance as the rightward moving distance. Therefore, the character image h3 of the hall is displayed in a state of not moving as seen from the player. Further, on the sub display device 209, the princess character image h4 is not displayed.

As described above, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, by moving the sub display device 209 laterally, the image displayed on the sub display device 209 is moved in the opposite direction to the sub display device 209 at the same speed. , The character image h3 of the hall is displayed in a state where it is not moving as seen from the player. Further, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, the princess character image h4 that has been cut off on the sub display device 209 before the lateral movement display notice effect is executed is displayed on the sub display device 209. The lateral movement display is performed so that it is displayed on the sub display device 209. The princess character image h4 is displayed on the sub display device 209 when the sub display device 209 moves a predetermined distance or more. Therefore, the player pays attention to the moving distance of the sub display device 209, which may improve the interest of the game. Further, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, a character may be displayed according to the jackpot reliability of the symbol variation display being executed. For example, when the jackpot reliability is relatively low, the enemy character of the lord may be displayed. Also, while the sub display device 209 moves leftward by a predetermined distance to display the princess character image h4, the sub display device 209 moves rightward by a predetermined distance, so that the enemy character of the lord is shown. May be displayed. The aspect ratio of the hall character image h3 and the princess character image h4 used for the lateral movement display notice effect may change during the lateral movement display notice effect.
(Example 11)
An effect example of Example 11 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 172. 172 (a) to 172 (n) display the effect of the special figure 1 variation game in time series. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 used in the present embodiment and the eleventh embodiment which will be described later has the effecting movable body 990. The effecting movable body 990 can be two-dimensionally moved and rotated in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by a drive system (not shown). . In addition, the effect movable body 990 may be configured to be movable and rotatable in three dimensions. The effecting movable body 990 has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and a character string image of "CR Daito Machine" is displayed on the surface thereof.

  FIG. 172 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" indicating that the winning / decision determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order is stopped and displayed. Has been done. In the special figure 1 4th symbol display area 933 and the special figure 2 4th symbol display area 934, the 4th symbol of the display aspect which notifies the deviation is stopped and displayed. Further, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display area 931 indicating that the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 1, and the reserved number of special figure 2 is 0 in the special figure 2 reserved number display area 932. “0” indicating that is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950, a default special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in a white circle is displayed. Further, FIG. 172 (a) shows a state in which the effectable movable body 990 is located at the central upper position of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state shown in FIG. 172 (a), the effectable movable body 990 is located at the initial position.

  FIG. 172 (b) shows that the suspension of special figure 1 has been digested and the special figure 1 variation game has started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, “0” is displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display area 931 to notify that the reserved number of the special figure 1 is decreased by 1 and the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 0. Further, when the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one, and the special figure 1 variable game is started, a movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 951 is shown. Further, "0" indicating that the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 0 is displayed in the reservation display area 209b in the lower left part of the sub display device 209.

  In FIG. 172 (c), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation between the hold / variable icons ends, and the variation icon 941 is displayed in the variation icon display area 940. Is displayed. In addition, based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230, "1" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 and white is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950. A default special figure 1 hold icon 952 displayed in a circle is shown as a result of an increase animation of the hold icon. Also, FIG. 172 (c) shows a balloon image immediately after the balloon image representing the line of the character image h1 of the merchant displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative pattern display device 208 is displayed in the lower left portion of the effect display area 208d. It shows the state.

  FIG. 172 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting opening 230, "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 and black is displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950. It shows a state in which the special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle appears by the increase animation of the hold icon. In addition, an image of the character string “Chance?” Is displayed in the balloon image that represents the line of the character image h1 of the merchant.

  FIG. 172 (e) shows a state in which an effect in which the effect movable body 990 moves downward (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “logo drop effect”) is executed. The logo drop effect is an effect used to give a notice of "logo drop" shown in FIG. 161 (b). In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image h5 is displayed across the position behind the effect movable body 990 and the peripheral position behind the effect movable body 990. The effect image h5 is an image used for a logo drop effect. Also, in FIG. 172 (e), after the effect image h5 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and Figure 1 shows the state in which it is informed that the result of the variation game is out of sync. Further, by moving the fluctuation icon 941 displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 940 downward, a deletion animation for deleting the fluctuation icon 941 is executed. Also, FIG. 172 (e) shows a state in which a change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon 952 changes from a white circle to a black circle is executed. Note that the logo drop effect shown in FIG. 172 (e) may be used as an effect combined with a change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon 952 changes from a white circle to a black circle, or is displayed in a black circle. The special icon 1 hold icon 953 displayed may be used as an effect in combination with it, or may be used alone as an effect of a prefetching notice. Next, FIG. 172 (f) shows a state in which the production movable body 990 has moved upward from the position shown in FIG. 172 (e) and has returned to the original position shown in FIG. 172 (a). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image h5 is erased as the effecting movable body 990 moves upward.

  FIG. 172 (g) shows that the first special figure 1 hold is digested and the special figure 1 variation game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, "1" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 to show a state immediately after the movement animation between the hold / fluctuation icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 952 are started. Also, FIG. 172 (g) shows a balloon image immediately after the balloon image representing the line of the character image h1 of the merchant displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative pattern display device 208 is displayed in the lower left part of the effect display area 208d. It shows the state.

  FIG. 172 (h) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / fluctuation icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 are completed. Also, in FIG. 172 (h), an image of the character string of "Toh ---" is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant, suggesting that a later-described character image h3 of Tono appears. The production is being executed. The character image h3 of the hall is a character image used for the "rotation" advance notice effect shown in FIG. 161 (b) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "rotation display notice effect").

  FIG. 172 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the hall character image h3 is displayed in the lower right part of the effect display area 208d, and the image of the character string “Called?” Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the hall character image h3. In addition, an image of the character string “Den!” Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant.

  FIG. 172 (j) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is started. In addition, the image of the character string of "Chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant, and thereafter, "Chance!" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the lord. The image of the character string is displayed. By displaying the image of the character string of "chance!" Representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the hall, it is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed.

  FIG. 172 (k) shows a state in which the rotation display advance notice effect as the reach effect is executed. In FIG. 172 (k), all the images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “rotation target image” in this example) are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the center of the area is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise when viewed from the player with the center of rotation as the center of rotation. Also, in FIG. 172 (k), the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed and displayed. The image to be rotated before the rotation is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative pattern display device 208), while the rotation shown in FIG. 172 (k). The aspect ratio of the target image is changed to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 4: 5. Further, a part of “decoration 3” and a part of the navigation character display area 970 displayed in the right symbol display area 208c are cut off from the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, in FIG. 172 (k), in order to make the rotation display notice effect noticeable, the effecting movable body 990 moves to a position above the decorative symbol display device 208 that cannot be visually recognized by the player.

  FIG. 172 (l) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 90 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 172 (k) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation. Shows. Further, the image to be rotated is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches the screen having an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 209, the rotation target image is not cut out. Also, FIG. 172 (l) shows a state in which during the rotation display advance notice effect, a logo drop effect in which the effect movable body 990 moves downward from the position (not shown) in FIG. 172 (k) is executed. .. Further, the effect image h5 is displayed as a rotation target image on the decorative pattern display device 208. Also, in FIG. 172 (l), the effect image h5 is displayed in the left part of the effect display area 208d in a state rotated 90 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the player, unlike the state shown in FIG. 172 (e). ing. The size of the decorative design displayed on the decorative design display device in the state of FIG. 172 (l) is smaller than the size of the decorative design displayed on the decorative design display device of the state of FIG. 172 (e). It's size. The same applies to the hold icon, the variable icon, the merchant character image h1, and the effect image h5.

  In FIG. 172 (m), the image to be rotated is rotated 270 ° counterclockwise (rotated 360 ° in total) counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 172 (j) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation. It shows the returned state. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image returns to the original aspect ratio and the original size. In addition, in FIG. 172 (m), the effecting movable body 990 moves upward from the position of FIG. 172 (l) and is positioned at the original position (the position of the state shown in FIG. 172 (a)). . Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect image h5 is deleted. Then, FIG. 172 (n), "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of alignment. It shows a state in which it is notified. Further, by moving the fluctuation icon 941 displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 940 downward, a deletion animation for deleting the fluctuation icon 941 is executed.

Thus, in the logo drop effect of the present embodiment, when the effect movable body 990 is operated in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image is placed on the position behind the effect movable member 990 in the decorative symbol display device 208. When the effect movable body 990 is operated in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect image is displayed at a position different from the position behind the effect movable member 990 in the decorative symbol display device 208. There is a display that is displayed. The effect image displayed at the position behind the production movable body 2990 may cause the player to emphasize the operation of the production movable body 990, and is displayed at a position different from the position behind the production movable body 990. The effect image displayed is such that the effect image is displayed at an unexpected position, which may give an unexpected surprise to the player. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the size of the effect image, the display color, and the display position.
(Example 12)
An effect example of Example 12 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 173. FIGS. 173 (a) to 173 (f) display the effect of the special figure 1 variation game in time series.

  FIG. 173 (a) shows the state where the special figure 1 variation game has ended, and shows the same state as FIG. 172 (a). Next, FIG. 173 (b) shows the state where the special figure 1 variation game is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 172 (b). Next, in FIG. 173 (c), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and shows the same state as in FIG. 172 (c).

  FIG. 173 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, FIG. 173 (d) shows a state in which an effect (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “logo drop effect”) in which the effect movable body 990 moves downward from the position shown in FIG. 173 (c) is executed. Showing. The logo drop effect is an effect used to give a notice of "logo drop" shown in FIG. 161 (b). In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image h5 is displayed across the position behind the effect movable body 990 and the peripheral position behind the effect movable body 990. The effect image h5 is an image used for a logo drop effect.

  FIG. 173 (e) shows a state in which the island simultaneous production is started during the execution of the logo drop production. The island-simultaneous production is a production in which pachinko machines of the same model installed in the same island facility execute the same production at the same timing. In the island simultaneous production of the present embodiment, a mode in which the princess character image h6 is singing a song is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed. The displayed decorative design is reduced and displayed in the lower right portion of the decorative design display device 208. Further, a character string image of "Island simultaneous production start!" Is displayed on the right side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative pattern display device 208. Also, FIG. 173 (e) shows that the effect image h5 displayed in FIG. 173 (d) is a position different from the position displayed in FIG. 173 (d) in the effect display area 208d of the decorative pattern display device 208. It is shown in a reduced size in the lower right corner. Further, FIG. 173 (e) shows a state in which a change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon 952 changes from a white circle to a black circle is executed. In addition, based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting opening 230, "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 and black is displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950. The special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle is displayed. The logo drop effect of the present embodiment may be used as an effect that suggests that a change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon 952 changes from a white circle to a black circle is performed, and a look-ahead notice is given. It may be used alone as an effect.

  In FIG. 173 (f), during the island simultaneous production, the production movable body 990 moves upward from the position shown in FIG. 173 (d) and returns to the original position (the position shown in FIG. 173 (a)). Is shown. In addition, a character string image of "Island simultaneous performance" is displayed on the right side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that the island simultaneous performance is being performed. Further, the effect image h5 reduced and displayed in the lower right portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 is erased, and the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c reduced in the lower right portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicate "decoration 2". -Decoration 4-decoration 2 "is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the variation game of special figure 1 is out of sync. Further, by moving the fluctuation icon 941 displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 940 downward, a deletion animation for deleting the fluctuation icon 941 is executed.

  As described above, in the logo drop effect of the present embodiment, when the effect movable member 990 is operated in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image is placed at the position behind the effect movable member 990 in the decorative symbol display device 208. In the displayed state and when the effect movable body 990 is operated in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at a position different from the position behind the effect movable member 990. There are states. The state in which the effect image is displayed at a position different from the position behind the effectable movable body 990 on the decorative pattern display device 208 may give the player unexpectedness, and the player may be surprised. It may be possible to provide a topic. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the size of the effect image, the display color, and the display position.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the gaming table according to the first embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 to 173 again.
(A1)
A gaming table provided with image display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or a sub display device 209),
The image display means may rotate and display the first image (for example, the hall character image h3).
When the rotation display is performed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change (see, for example, FIGS. 162 (j) to (q) or FIGS. 166 (c) to 166 (k)),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the configuration, the aspect ratio of the first image may change when the first image is rotated and displayed, so that the presence of the first image is amplified. In some cases, it may be possible to give a strong impression to the player. Further, there may be a case where any one of the images of the character image, the decorative pattern, the hold icon, the variable icon, the background pattern, etc., or all of them may be the first image, or other than these images. The image may be the first image.
(A2)
The gaming machine described in (A1) above,
When the rotation display is performed, the second image (for example, the hold icon or the hold number display) may not be rotated (for example, FIGS. 164 (j) to (q) or 167 (c) to (167). k))),
A game table characterized by that.
(A3)
The gaming machine described in (A2) above,
When the rotation display is performed, the second image (for example, the fourth symbol) does not rotate (for example, see FIGS. 163 (j) to 163 (q)),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the configuration, since the rotation display of the second image may not be performed when the rotation display of the first image is performed, the rotation display of the first image is emphasized. At the same time, it is possible for the player to clearly see the second image. Further, there may be a case where any of the images such as the character image, the decorative pattern, the hold icon, the variable icon, and the background pattern, or all of these images may be used as the second image. May use a different image as the second image.
(A4)
The gaming table according to any one of (A1) to (A3) above,
When the rotation display is performed, an image (for example, a princess character image h4) that has been cut off in the image display unit before the rotation display is displayed on the image display unit by the rotation display. May be performed (for example, see FIGS. 169 (b) to (169)),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the image that has been cut off in the image display means before the rotation display of the first image is performed is displayed on the image display means by performing the first rotation display. In some cases, this may give the player an unexpected surprise.
(A5)
The gaming table according to any one of (A1) to (A4) above,
When the rotation display is performed, an image (for example, a decorative pattern) displayed on the image display unit before the rotation display may be cut off by the rotation display. Yes (for example, see FIGS. 162 (i) to (k)),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the configuration, when the image displayed on the image display means before the rotation display of the first image is cut off on the image display means by the first rotation display. Therefore, it may be possible to give the player an unexpected surprise.
(A6)
The gaming table according to any one of (A1) to (A5) above,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game table characterized by that.
(A7)
The gaming table according to any one of (A1) to (A5) above,
The gaming table is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 2000),
A game table characterized by that.
(B1)
A movable body for performance (for example, a movable body for performance 990),
Image display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208),
A gaming machine equipped with
A first state (for example, FIG. 172 (e)) in which a first image (for example, effect image h5) is displayed at a first position when the effectable movable body is operated in front of the image display unit is displayed. 173 (d) or the display state of the effect image h5 shown in FIG. 173 (d).
The first position is a position behind the effecting movable body in the image display means (see, for example, FIG. 172 (e) or FIG. 173 (d)).
The first image is an effect image,
A second state in which the first image is displayed at the second position when the effectable movable body is operated in front of the image display means (for example, display of the effect image h5 shown in FIG. 172 (l)). State, or the display state of the effect image h5 shown in FIG. 173 (e)),
The second position is a position different from the back of the effecting movable body in the image display means (see, for example, FIG. 172 (l) or 173 (e)),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the configuration, when the effect movable body is operated in front of the image display means, the first image is placed at the second position which is different from the position behind the effect movable body. The effect image of the first image may be displayed at a position that the player does not think because it may be in the second state in which the effect image of is displayed. May be possible.
(B2)
The gaming machine described in (B1) above,
In the first state, the first image may be displayed across the first position and the third position,
The third position is a position different from the back of the effecting movable body in the image display means (see, for example, FIG. 172 (e) or FIG. 173 (d)),
A game table characterized by that.
(B3)
The gaming table according to (B1) or (B2) above,
The size of the first image in the first state is a first size,
The size of the first image in the second state is a third size,
The third size is smaller than the first size (see, for example, FIG. 172 (e), (f), or FIG. 173 (d), (e)),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the size of the first image in the first state and the size of the first image in the second state are different, so the player can enjoy the variation of the first image. Sometimes you can.
(B4)
The gaming table according to any one of (B1) to (B3) above,
In the first state, a second image (for example, a decorative pattern) may be displayed in the first direction (for example, see FIG. 172 (e)),
In the second state, the second image may be displayed in the second orientation (the orientation rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the first orientation) (see, for example, FIG. 172 (l)),
The first image is a different image than the second image,
The second direction is a direction different from the first direction,
A game table characterized by that.
(B5)
The gaming machine described in (B4) above,
The size of the second image in the first state is a second size,
The size of the second image in the second state is a fourth size,
The fourth size is smaller than the second size (see, for example, FIGS. 172 (e) and (l)),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the configuration, since the size of the second image in the first state and the size of the second image in the second state are different, the player can enjoy the variation of the second image. Sometimes you can. Further, there may be a case where any of the images such as the character image, the decorative pattern, the hold icon, the variable icon, and the background pattern, or all of these images may be used as the second image. May use a different image as the second image.
(B6)
The gaming table according to any one of (B1) to (B5) above,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game table characterized by that.
(B7)
The gaming table according to any one of (B1) to (B5) above,
The gaming table is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 2000),
A game table characterized by that.
(C1)
An image display unit (for example, a sub-display device 209) capable of displaying an effect image that effects a game,
Drive means for driving the image display unit (for example, the movable body for rendering 225),
A gaming machine equipped with
The image display unit may move by the drive of the drive means,
In a period (hereinafter, referred to as “first period”) in which the image display unit is moving in a first direction (a rotation direction around a rotation axis of the image display unit, or a linear direction), the image display is performed. A first moving image (for example, a moving image of the character image h3 of the lord or a moving image of the character image h4 of the princess) may be displayed on the unit,
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which the first image (for example, the hall character image h3 or the princess character image h4) moves in the first direction,
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the above structure, the movement of the image display unit gives an impact, and the display angle and the display position of the image displayed on the image display unit are changed during the movement, thereby providing a notification means. May allow the player to perform an unusual motion, which may allow the player to forget his or her daily life and concentrate more on the game. Further, all the periods in which the image display unit is moving in the first direction may be the first period, or a part of the period in which the image display unit is moving in the first direction. May be the first period. Further, with a certain effect as an opportunity, all the periods from the time when the image display unit starts to move in the first direction until it stops may be the first period, or with an effect different from a certain effect as an opportunity. A part of the period from when the image display unit starts moving in the first direction to when it stops may be set as the first period.
(C2)
The gaming machine described in (C1) above,
The game table, wherein the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode based on the first image.

In the example according to the present embodiment, an example in which the facial expression, outer shape, and the like of the first image (the character image h3 of the lord and the character image h4 of the princess) are fixedly displayed is shown. The outer shape and the like may be displayed in a deformed manner. For example, referring to FIG. 169, the face of the hall, which was not displayed in FIG. 169 (a), is displayed as a true face in FIG. 169 (b), and is slightly smiled in FIG. 169 (c). An animation may be performed in which a full smile appears in 169 (d), a little smile returns in FIG. 169 (e), and a true smile returns in FIG. 169 (f). Further, the aspect in which the first image (for example, the character image h3 of the lord) moves in the first direction may indicate that the display position of the animation including the character image h3 of the lord moves. The animation is not limited to the variable display of the character display, and changes in the outer shape of the character and the like, variable display of the serif (change display from a partial character string indicating the serif to the entire character string, etc.), character or icon Color change, moving display of characters or icons, or the like, or a combination of these.
(C3)
The gaming table according to (C1) or (C2) above,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in a first direction,
In the first period, the first image is configured to move in a second orientation,
The first orientation and the second orientation are opposite orientations,
A game table characterized by that.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, the first direction when the image display unit operates is triggered by a certain one effect (for example, the timing of starting the image display unit operation effect during super reach). Direction (for example, facing left), and with other effects as an opportunity (for example, the timing to start effects by the operation of the image display unit to inform the player whether or not the probability change at the end of the big hit begins) The first direction when the display unit operates may be another direction (for example, rightward). Further, the first direction and the second direction may be the same direction, not the opposite direction, and in this case, it is necessary for the player to move or rotate the first image faster than the moving or rotating of the image display unit. Is visible. For this reason, it is possible to give the player an extraordinary sensation that cannot be obtained in a manner in which the image is rotated in the fixed image display unit, and further, the first image in the image display unit is further speeded up. It may be possible to focus on the game by forgetting the more everyday feeling from rotating and moving.
(C4)
The gaming machine described in (C3) above,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move at a first speed in the first direction,
In the first period, the first image is configured to move at a second speed in the second direction,
The first speed and the second speed are the same speed,
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the image display unit seems to be moving to the player, but the display position, the display angle, etc. of the first image do not seem to be moving, so that it is extraordinary as a notification means. When the notification itself by the image display unit can play the same role as when it does not move, and it is possible to make both impactful operation and notification There is. In addition, the first direction and the second direction may be opposite to each other and the first speed and the second speed may be different, and in that case, the first speed and the second speed may be different from the movement and rotation of the image display unit. The player visually recognizes that one image moves or rotates slowly. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an extraordinary sensation that cannot be obtained in a mode in which the image rotates in the fixed image display unit, and the first image in the image display unit is the image display unit. Since the movement and rotation are performed so as to slowly follow the movement and rotation, it may be possible to forget a more everyday feeling and concentrate on the game. Also, when the image display unit moves or rotates quickly with a focus on impact, by slowly moving or rotating the first image, the notification itself by the image display unit display is close to when it is not moving, It may be possible to fulfill the role of notification.
(C5)
The gaming table according to any one of (C1) to (C4) above,
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which a second image (for example, a merchant character image h1 ′) is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.
(C6)
The gaming machine described in (C5) above,
In the first period, the second image is configured not to move in the first direction,
A game table characterized by that.

The gaming machine having the above configuration may be configured such that the second image that does not move in the first direction is not displayed during the first period. That is, in the first period, since all the images displayed on the image display unit are configured to move in the first direction, the movements of the image display unit and the image have a sense of unity and have a greater impact. The staging operation may become executable in some cases.
(C7)
The gaming table according to (C5) or (C6) above,
The game table, wherein the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode by the second image.

In the example according to the present embodiment, an example in which the facial expression, outer shape, and the like of the second image (merchant character image h1 ′) is fixedly displayed has been described, but according to the gaming machine having the configuration, The expression, outline, etc. of the second image may be displayed in a deformed manner. For example, referring to FIG. 170 as an example, the face of the merchant, which was not displayed on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 170 (a), is displayed as a true face in FIG. 170 (b), and a little in FIG. 170 (c). An animation may be performed such that the face becomes a steep face, the face becomes a steep face in FIG. 170 (d), the face returns to a slightly steep face in FIG. 170 (e), and returns to the true face in FIG. 170 (f). Moreover, the aspect that the second image does not move in the first direction may indicate that the display position of the animation does not move. The animation is not limited to the variable display of the character display, and changes in the outer shape of the character and the like, variable display of the serif (change display from a partial character string indicating the serif to the entire character string, etc.), character or icon Color change, moving display of characters or icons, or the like, or a combination of these.
(C8)
The gaming table according to (C3) or (C4) above,
“Move by driving the driving means” described in (C1) above means “rotate by driving the driving means”,
“The first image moves in the first direction” described in (C1) above means “the first image rotates in the first direction”.
The first direction is a rotation direction around the rotation axis of the image display unit (for example, a circumferential direction),
A game table characterized by that.
(C9)
The gaming table described in (C8) above,
The first direction is one of clockwise and counterclockwise,
A game table characterized by that.
(C10)
The gaming table according to any one of (C1) to (C7) above,
“Move by driving the driving means” described in (C1) above means “move linearly by driving the driving means”,
“The first image moves in the first direction” described in (C1) above means “the first image moves linearly in the first direction”.
A game table characterized by that.

  The above "the first image moves linearly in the first direction" may be "the first image moves linearly in the vertical direction". In this case, the above-mentioned first direction is one of upward and downward. Further, the above-mentioned “first image moves linearly in the first direction” may be “first image moves linearly in the left-right direction”. In this case, the first direction is one of leftward and rightward. The above "the first image moves linearly in the first direction" may be "the first image moves linearly in an oblique direction". In this case, the above-mentioned first direction is one of the upper left direction, the lower right direction, the upper right direction, and the lower left direction.

  A modified example of the configuration described in the example according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. For example, in the case where the driving means (moving body 225 for effect) shown in FIGS. 166 to 171 makes a combined movement of rotational movement and linear movement (vertical direction, horizontal direction, diagonal direction, front-back direction when viewed from the player) There may be. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 may be configured to include a plurality of image display units. In addition, a plurality of image display devices may be mounted on one image display unit. The image display unit may be equipped with an LED or a performance movable body. In addition, before the image display unit is rotated or moved, the production movable body is moved from the initial state to the movable state, and after the production movable body is in the movable state, the image display unit is rotated or moved. It may be configured such that the effecting movable body is stopped and then moved to the initial state. Further, during the symbol variation display, the case in which the effect operation shown in FIG. 168 is performed is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display than the case where the effect operation shown in FIG. 167 is performed. The mode may be configured to be a big hit mode easily, and when the effect operation of FIG. 167 is performed, the effect operation of FIG. The symbol mode finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variable display may be configured to be a big hit mode. In addition, when the production operation of FIG. 167 is performed during the symbol variation display, the symbol aspect that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display may be configured to be a big hit aspect, When the effect operation of FIG. 168 is performed during the symbol variation display, the symbol mode finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display may be configured to be a big hit mode. 167 and 168 both show an example in which the same effect display is performed, but when the sub display device shown in FIG. 167 rotates, the image displayed on the sub display device also rotates together. The effect visually recognized by the player is different from the effect visually recognized by the player so that the image displayed on the sub display device shown in FIG. 168 does not rotate together when the sub display device rotates. It may be configured to produce the effect. For example, "one of the other productions" is a production in which the lord fights the musician, and "the other production of the other productions" is a production in which the princess dances. Good. One type of "one of other effects" may be installed, a plurality of types may be installed, and one type of "the other effect of another effects" may be installed. Multiple types may be installed. Further, when the sub display device is rotated as shown in FIG. 167, at least a part (or all of the images) displayed on the sub display device is rotated together with the number of types of effects. As shown in 168, when the sub display device rotates, at least part (or all) of the image displayed on the sub display device is visually recognized by the player so as not to rotate together. The number of types may be increased. On the contrary, when the sub display device rotates as shown in FIG. 168, at least part (or all) of the image displayed on the sub display device is visually recognized by the player not to rotate together. 167 of at least part (or all) of the images displayed on the sub display device when the sub display device rotates as shown in FIG. 167. The number of types may be increased.

Also, the effect example shown in FIG. 167 and the effect example shown in FIG. 168 may be combined. For example, in a period (period A) when the sub display device starts to rotate, the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed A (for example, 20 rpm) and displayed on the sub display device. The image does not rotate the image displayed on the sub-display so that it is visible to the player as it rotates with the sub-display. In the next period (period B), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed B (for example, 40 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than that displayed on the sub display device. At least a part or all of the image is rotated in another direction (eg, clockwise) at a speed B ′ (eg, 20 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize it as rotating slowly. In the next period (period C), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed C (for example, 50 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than that for the sub display device. At least a part or all of the image is rotated in another direction (eg, clockwise) at a speed C ′ (eg, 40 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize it as rotating slowly. In the next period (period D), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at the speed D (for example, 60 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is rotated. Without rotating at least part or all of the image in another direction (eg, clockwise) at a speed D (eg, 60 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize that only the sub-display device is rotating. Let In the next period (period E), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at the speed E (for example, 50 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than that for the sub display device. At least a part or all of the image is rotated in another direction (eg, clockwise) at a speed E ′ (eg, 40 rpm) so that the player can recognize it as rotating slowly. In the next period (period F), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (e.g., counterclockwise) at a speed F (e.g., 40 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than that displayed on the sub display device. At least a part or all of the image is rotated in another direction (eg, clockwise) at a speed F ′ (eg, 20 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize it as rotating slowly. In the next period before the sub display device finishes rotating (period G), the sub display device is rotated at a speed G (for example, 20 rpm) in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) to display on the sub display device. The image to be displayed may not be rotated so that it can be visually recognized by the player so as to rotate together with the sub display device. As described above, as illustrated in the period A to the period D, as the period in which the sub display device rotates increases, the rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device gradually deviates from the rotation of the sub display device. By rotating the sub-display device and shifting to a state where the player can visually recognize that part or all of the display of the sub-display device is stopped, a new sense of unity with the sub-display device and images can be obtained. In some cases, it is possible to perform a certain effect. Further, as in the examples from the period D to the period G, as the period in which the sub display device rotates advances, the rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device gradually rotates together with the sub display device. By allowing the player to visually recognize such changes, it may be possible to perform a new sense of unity with the sub display device and the image. In these examples, in the periods A to D, the difference between the rotation speed of the sub display device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually reduced, and in the periods D to G, the sub display is performed. Although the difference between the rotation speed of the device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually increased, conversely, during the periods A to D, the rotation speed of the sub display device is increased. The difference between the speed and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually increased, and during the periods D to G, the rotation speed of the sub display device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device are increased. The difference in speed may be gradually reduced. Although the rotating sub display device and the image displayed on the rotating sub display device are illustrated here, the present invention is also applicable to the linear display sub display device and the image displayed on the linear moving sub display device. Is also possible.
[Second Embodiment]
Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 202. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the same configuration and control system as the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment. The same components as those of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. In the following description excluding FIG. 184 and FIG. 185, the side closer to the player when the pachinko machine 100 is installed in an island facility or the like of a game store is defined as “front” (front, front side, front side, front end, etc.). , The reverse is "rear" (rear, rear, rear surface, rear end, etc.), "up" (upper, upper, upper end, etc.) vertically upward from the player's perspective, and vice versa is "lower""(Lower, lower, lower end, etc.), the horizontal left as seen from the player is" left "(left, left, left end, etc.), and vice versa is" right "(right, right, right end, etc.) ).

  FIG. 174 is a schematic front view of the game board 1000 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as seen from the front. A main liquid crystal unit 1001 is arranged in a center case in the center of a game area 124 defined by an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204. A decorative pattern display device 208 is arranged in the approximate center of the main liquid crystal unit 1001. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 drives the decorative symbol display device 208 and a lamp to perform an effect, and the details will be described later.

  The game board 1000 of this example is a game board for so-called right-handed machines. As for the universal figure starting port 228 and the special figure 2 starting port 232, since these universal figure starting port 228 and the special figure 2 starting port 232 are arranged on the right path, the entry of the game ball falling on the right path Is relatively easy, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter a game ball that falls down the left path. Regarding the variable winning port 234, due to the arrangement pattern of the game nails, it is relatively easy for a game ball to fall on the right path and relatively difficult for a game ball to fall on the left path. In addition, in FIG. 174, illustration of the game nail is omitted. On the other hand, regarding the special figure 1 starting port 230, due to the presence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails, the presence of the warp device 242, etc., it is relatively easy to enter the game ball that falls on the left side path and the right side path. Entering a falling game ball is relatively difficult. In this embodiment, a right-handed machine is used as an example, but a machine other than a right-handed machine may be used. In addition, a general winning opening (not shown) is provided on the right path and the left path.

  On the front side of the main liquid crystal unit 1001, the warp device 242 (242a, 242b) and the front stage 244 are arranged in a rollable area of the game ball, and a plurality of movable bodies are arranged in a non-rollable area of the game ball. Has been done. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has six movable bodies: a movable body 1002, a movable body 1004, a movable body 1006, a movable body 1008, a movable body 1010, and a movable body 1012. These movable bodies are arranged in order of the movable body 1010, the movable body 1004, the movable body 1002, the movable bodies 1006 and 1008, and the movable body 1012 from the front side. The movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 are arranged so that their positions in the front-rear direction are the same. The movable body 1004 is arranged on the front side of the movable body 1002. The drive control of the movable body 1002, the movable body 1004, the movable body 1006, the movable body 1008, the movable body 1010, and the movable body 1012 is executed by the second sub control unit 500. The drive control may be executed by the first sub control unit 400.

  The movable body 1002 has a laterally elongated rectangular external shape when viewed from the front side. The movable body 1002 can move vertically behind the front stage 244. In the state shown in FIG. 174, the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position. The movable body 1002 also has a sub display device 1030 on the front side.

  A liquid crystal display device is used as the sub display device 1030. The sub display device 1030 includes a horizontally long rectangular display area smaller than the decorative pattern display device 208, and displays one or a plurality of images to produce an effect. In this example, the sub display device 1030 is displaying an image of the scenery of the sea where the yacht floats. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the sub display device 1030, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it is configured to be able to display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted. Further, the display control of the sub display device 1030 is executed by the first sub control unit 400. The display control of the sub display device 1030 may be performed by the second sub control unit 500, or a display control unit that performs the display control may be newly provided. The display control unit may execute display control of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In addition, the movable body 1002 includes an elongated lighting portion 1014a, a lighting portion 1014b, a lighting portion 1014c, and a lighting portion 1014d which are arranged so as to surround the sub display device 1030. The illumination unit 1014a is arranged on the left side of the sub display device 1030 so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1014b is arranged below the sub display device 1030 so that the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1014c is arranged on the right side of the sub display device 1030 so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1014d is arranged above the sub display device 1030 so that the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction. LEDs of a plurality of colors are used as light sources of the illumination units 1014a to 1014d, and the illumination units 1014a to 1014d can emit light of a plurality of colors.

  A movable body 1004 is arranged at the upper left part of the movable body 1002. The movable body 1004 has an external shape that imitates lightning. The movable body 1004 is fixed at one point outside the display area of the sub display device 1030 and at the upper left portion of the movable body 1002. The movable body 1004 is driven by a stepping motor (not shown) so that the movable body 1004 can rotate about the point in front of the sub display device 1030 in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen. In the state shown in FIG. 174, the movable body 1004 is located at the operation completion position. The movable body 1004 overlaps with the display area of the sub display device 1030 in a state where the movable body 1004 is located at the operation completion position. As a result, a part of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is hidden by the movable body 1004. The initial position of the movable body 1004 is the position in which the movable body 1004 is rotated counterclockwise by 60 ° from the state shown in FIG. 174. The movable body 1004 does not overlap the display area of the sub display device 1030 when it is located at the initial position.

  On the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 1006 is arranged. The movable body 1006 is arranged between the movable body 1002 and the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and is movable in the left-right direction. The movable body 1002 has a plate-like shape, and has a transmissive portion 1006a provided at an upper portion and a transmissive portion 1006b provided at a lower portion. The transmissive portions 1006a and 1006b have a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the rear side of the movable body 1006 is visible through the transmissive portions 1006a and 1006b. Note that the transparent portions 1006a and 1006b only need to be visible on the rear side, a transparent plate such as an acrylic plate may be disposed on the transparent portions 1006a and 1006b, and the transparent portions 1006a and 1006b are openings. You may. In addition, an elongated illumination unit 1016 is arranged at the right end on the front surface side of the movable body 1006. The illumination unit 1016 is arranged so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. LEDs of multiple colors are used as the light source of the illumination unit 1016, and the illumination unit 1016 can emit light of multiple colors.

  A belt wound around two pulleys (not shown) is fixed to the upper part of the movable body 1006. The movable body 1006 moves left and right in accordance with the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The moving range of the movable body 1006 is from the position where the right end of the movable body 1006 is located to the left of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the position where it is located in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. .. The movable body 1006 is invisible to the player in the state of being located at the left end of the operating range. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 174, the movable body 1006 is located at the initial position. When the movable body 1006 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1006 overlaps a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006. In addition, a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible through the transparent portions 1006a and 1006b of the movable body 1006.

  On the right side of the decorative pattern display device 208, a movable body 1008 is arranged. The movable body 1008 is arranged between the movable body 1002 and the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and is movable in the left-right direction. The movable body 1008 has a plate-like shape, and a transmissive portion 1008a is provided on the upper portion and a transmissive portion 1008b is provided on the lower portion. The transmissive portions 1008a and 1008b have a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the rear side of the movable body 1008 is visible through the transmissive portions 1008a and 1008b. It should be noted that the transparent portions 1008a, 1008b only need to be visible on the rear side, a transparent plate such as an acrylic plate may be disposed on the transparent portions 1008a, 1008b, and the transparent portions 1008a, 1008b are openings. You may. An elongated illumination unit 1018 is arranged at the left end on the front surface side of the movable body 1008. The illumination unit 1018 is arranged so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. LEDs of multiple colors are used as the light source of the illumination unit 1018, and the illumination unit 1016 can emit light of multiple colors.

  A belt wound around two pulleys (not shown) is fixed to the upper part of the movable body 1008. The movable body 1008 moves left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The operation range of the movable body 1008 is from the position where the left end portion of the movable body 1008 is located to the right of the display area right end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the position located in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. .. The movable body 1008 becomes invisible to the player in the state of being located at the right end of the operating range. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 174, the movable body 1008 is located at the initial position. When the movable body 1008 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1008 overlaps a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, the movable body 1008 hides a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible through the transparent portions 1008a and 1008b of the movable body 1008.

  The movable body 1006 functions as a left shutter, and the movable body 1008 functions as a right shutter. When the movable body 1006 moves to the right end of the moving range and the movable body 1008 moves to the left end of the moving range, the right end of the movable body 1006 and the left end of the movable body 1008 are in contact with each other. An effect of opening and closing the shutter is executed by the movable bodies 1006 and 1008.

  A movable body 1010 is arranged above the decorative pattern display device 208. The movable body 1010 has a horizontally long flat plate shape, and a character string of “chance” is attached to the front surface side. Further, the movable body 1010 can be moved in the vertical direction in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen by being driven by a stepping motor (not shown). Further, when the movable bodies 1006 and 1008 are closed, the movable body 1010 can move in the vertical direction in front of the movable bodies 1006 and 1008. In the state shown in FIG. 174, the movable body 1010 is located at the initial position.

  The movable body 1012 is arranged in the upper left portion of the main liquid crystal unit 1001. The movable body 1012 has an external shape similar to that of the movable body 1004, imitating lightning. The movable body 1012 is fixed outside the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is fixed at one point on the upper left side of the main liquid crystal unit 1001. The movable body 1012 is driven by a stepping motor (not shown), so that the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be rotated in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen with the point as a rotation center. The movable body 1012 can rotate 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. The movable body 1012 may be rotatable by 360 ° or more.

  Further, in the game board 1000, one sensor for detecting whether the movable bodies 1002 to 1012 are located at the initial position is arranged for each movable body. The sensor is included in the production movable body sensor 424 shown in FIG. 149. A photo sensor, for example, is used as the sensor.

  A main liquid crystal unit 1001 is arranged on the rear side of the movable bodies 1006 and 1008. A decorative pattern display device 208 is arranged in the center of the main liquid crystal unit 1001. In the state shown in FIG. 174, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the effect display area 208d below the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a white circle change icon a1, a white circle hold icon b1, a white circle hold icon b2, and a character of "heat" in the white circle. A holding icon b3 in which is drawn and a black circular holding icon b4 are displayed side by side in this order from the left. The hold icon b1 shows the hold of the special figure 1 variable game with the first hold order, the hold icon b2 shows the hold of the second special figure 1 variable game with the hold order, and the hold icon b3 has the third hold order. Special Figure 1 shows the suspension of the variable game, the hold icon b4 indicates the suspension of the special Figure 1 variable game of the fourth holding order. A background image including images of the sun, clouds, and balloons is displayed in the effect display area 208d. A part of the image of the sun is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the sun is visible to the player through the transparent portion 1006a of the movable body 1006. A part of the cloud image is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the cloud image is visible to the player via the transparent portion 1006b of the movable body 1006. A part of the cloud image is hidden by the movable body 1002.

  In addition, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 includes an elongated illumination unit 1020, an illumination unit 1022, an illumination unit 1024, and an illumination unit 1026 that are arranged so as to surround the decorative symbol display device 208. The illumination unit 1020 is arranged on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1022 is arranged on the right side of the decorative pattern display device 208 so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1024 is arranged below the decorative pattern display device 208 such that the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1026 is arranged above the decorative pattern display device 208 such that the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction. LEDs of a plurality of colors are used as light sources of the illumination units 1020 to 1026, and the illumination units 1020 to 1026 can emit light of a plurality of colors. In the state shown in FIG. 174, the illumination units 1024 and 1026 are entirely visible to the player, only a portion of the illumination unit 1020 above is visible to the player via the transmissive unit 1006a, and the illumination unit 1022. Only a part of the upper part is visible to the player through the transparent portion 1008a.

  Next, the movable body 1002 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 175. FIG. 175 (a) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 is viewed from the front. A motor 1040 that is a drive source of the movable body 1002 is arranged below the movable body 1002. The motor 1040 is fixed to the center case of the game board 1000 so that the rotation axis is vertical. One end of the screw shaft 1042 is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 1040 so that the extending direction is the vertical direction.

  A lower base 1044 is arranged between the movable body 1002 and the motor 1040. The lower base 1044 is fixed to the game board 1000. The motor 1040 and the lower base 1044 are arranged on the lower rear side of the front stage 244 and are invisible to the player. Further, the lower base 1044 has a receiving portion 1044a having a flat surface for receiving the movable body 1002 on the right side, and has a shaft fixing portion 1044b to which the guide shaft 1046 is fixed on the left side. The receiving portion 1044a and the shaft fixing portion 1044b are in different steps, and the receiving portion 1044a is located at a position higher than the shaft fixing portion 1044b. Therefore, when the movable body 1002 moves to the lowermost part of the movement range, the movable body 1002 contacts the receiving portion 1044a but does not contact the shaft fixing portion 1044b.

  Further, the receiving portion 1044a is provided with a through hole that vertically penetrates the lower base 1044, and a slide bearing is arranged in the through hole. The screw shaft 1042 passes through the slide bearing and is supported by the slide bearing.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 175 (a), the movable body 1004 is located at the initial position. The movable body 1004 can rotate about 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. The movable body 1004 may be rotatable by 60 ° or more (for example, 360 °).

  175 (b) and 175 (c) show the movable body 1002 viewed from the rear right side. In the state shown in FIG. 175 (b), the movable body 1002 is located at the top of the moving range. In the state shown in FIG. 175 (c), the movable body 1002 is located at the bottom of the moving range. As shown in FIGS. 175 (b) and 175 (c), the movable body 1002 includes a sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and a moving unit 1036. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape, is arranged on the front side of the movable body 1002, and includes a movable body 1004, illumination units 1014a to 1014d, and a sub display device 1030, as shown in FIG. 174.

  The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 includes a driver for the sub display device 1030, LEDs of the illumination units 1014a to 1014d, an LED driver, a motor for driving the movable body 1004, and gears. Further, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 includes a rectangular window portion 1034a, a window portion 1034b, a window portion 1034c, a window portion 1034d (not shown in FIG. 175 (b)), and a window portion 1034e on the rear side. The window portion 1034a is arranged behind the lighting portion 1014a, the window portion 1034b is arranged behind the lighting portion 1014b, the window portion 1034c is arranged behind the lighting portion 1014c, and the window portion 1034d is arranged behind the lighting portion 1014d. Has been done. Transparent plates are arranged in the windows 1034a to 1034e, and the front side of the windows 1034a to 1034e can be visually recognized. LEDs, an LED driver mounting board, a lens for decoration, and the like are arranged on the front side of the windows 1034a to 1034d. The windows 1034a to 1034d are used to inspect the lighting unit. The window portion 1034e is arranged behind the movable body 1004. A motor for driving the movable body 1004 and a gear that is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor and transmits power to the movable body 1004 are arranged on the front side of the window 1034e. The window portion 1034e is used for checking the drive mechanism of the movable body 1004.

  The moving unit 1036 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape smaller than the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, and is arranged on the rear surface side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The moving unit 1036 has therein a motor that drives the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 to rotate, and a gear that is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor and that transmits the power of the motor to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the moving unit 1036 are connected via a harness. Further, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is installed in the moving unit 1036 so as to be rotatable about the display area of the sub display device 1030 in the same plane including the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in the initial posture. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can rotate 180 ° clockwise from the initial posture shown in FIG. 175 (b) and can rotate counterclockwise 180 ° from the initial posture. In this way, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 also functions as a movable body.

  When the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable unit 1036 are connected by using a connection unit (slip ring or the like) shown in FIGS. 184 and 185 described later, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has a clockwise direction and a counterclockwise direction. In this direction, it may be rotatable up to a predetermined angle exceeding 180 degrees, may be rotatable up to a predetermined angle exceeding 360 degrees, and there is no limitation on the rotation angle.

  In addition, the moving unit 1036 is provided with two through holes that vertically penetrate. A nut is fixed to the right through hole, and the screw shaft 1042 is fitted in the nut. The movable body 1002 can be moved up and down by moving the nut up and down by the rotation of the screw shaft 1042. A guide shaft 1046 passes through the left through hole. The movable body 1004 is guided by the guide shaft 1046 and can move stably up and down.

  An upper base 1048 is arranged above the moving unit 1036. The upper base 1048 is fixed to a transparent plate (not shown) arranged at a position in the front-rear direction between the movable body 1002 and the movable bodies 1006, 1008, and is arranged at a position that is difficult for the player to see. The upper base 1048 has a receiving portion 1048a having a flat surface for receiving the moving unit 1036 on the right side, and has a shaft fixing portion 1048b to which the guide shaft 1046 is fixed on the left side. A slide bearing is arranged in the receiving portion 1048b, and the other end of the screw shaft 1042 is supported by the slide bearing. Further, the receiving portion 1048a and the shaft fixing portion 1048b are arranged in different steps, and the receiving portion 1048a is positioned lower than the shaft fixing portion 1048b. Further, the moving unit 1036 has an upper surface portion 1036a having a flat surface that comes into contact with the receiving portion 1048a when moved to the uppermost position. As shown in FIG. 175 (b), when the movable body 1002 is located at the uppermost position, the upper surface portion 1036a of the moving unit 1036 contacts the receiving portion 1048a, but does not contact the shaft fixing portion 1048b.

  Further, the moving unit 1036 has a lower surface portion 1036b having a flat surface that comes into contact with the receiving portion 1044a of the lower base 1044 when the moving unit 1036 moves to the lowermost position. As shown in FIG. 175 (c), when the movable body 1002 is located at the lowermost position, the lower surface portion 1036b of the moving unit 1036 contacts the receiving portion 1048a, but does not contact the shaft fixing portion 1048b.

  Further, the moving unit 1036 includes therein a control means for controlling the moving operation of the movable body 1002 and the rotating operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. Examples of movement control means arranged in the movement unit 1036 include a microprocessor, a programmable IC, an ASIC, a DSP, a ROM, a RAM, an LSI, a communication control circuit, and the like. The moving unit 1036 may be provided with only one of these movement control means, or may be provided with a plurality thereof. A harness (not shown) having one end connected to the sub display device 1030 extends from the rear side of the moving unit 1036, and the other end of the harness is a control board (for example, disposed on the back surface side of the game board 1000). It is connected to the first sub-board 160). The other end of the harness may be connected to the relay board, and the sub display device 1030 and the control board may be connected via the harness and the relay board.

  Next, the operation of the movable body 1002 will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 (b) and 175 (c). FIG. 175 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 is located at the uppermost position in the movement range. The upper surface portion 1036a of the moving unit 1036 is in contact with the receiving portion 1048a of the upper base 1048. The receiving portion 1048a functions as a mechanical end of the movable body 1002.

  From the state shown in FIG. 175 (b), when the motor 1040 is driven to rotate the screw shaft 1042 clockwise as viewed from below, the nut fixed to the moving unit 1036 and fitted into the screw shaft 1042 is screwed. It moves below the shaft 1042. As a result, the movable body 1002 moves downward.

  FIG. 175 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 is located at the lowermost position in the movement range. The lower surface portion 1036b of the moving unit 1036 is in contact with the receiving portion 1044a of the lower base 1044. The receiving portion 1044a functions as a mechanical end of the movable body 1002. From the state shown in FIG. 175 (c), when the motor 1040 rotates the screw shaft 1042 counterclockwise as viewed from below, the nut fixed to the moving unit 1036 and fitted into the screw shaft 1042 is screwed. It moves above the shaft 1042. As a result, the movable body 1002 moves upward.

  Further, when the movable body 1002 is stopped at a position higher than the lowermost position, a load is applied to the screw shaft 1042 due to the weight of the movable body 1002. . Accordingly, the screw shaft 1042 can be prevented from rotating due to the load of the movable body 1002 by its own weight, and the movable body 1002 can be stopped.

Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off for some reason while the movable body 1002 is stationary at a position higher than the lowermost position, electric power for driving the motor 1040 cannot be obtained. Therefore, the load of the movable body 1002 causes the screw shaft 1042 to rotate clockwise when viewed from the lower side to the upper side, and moves until the movable body 1002 comes into contact with the receiving portion 1044b of the lower base 1044. Even when the movable body 1002 moves downward by its own weight, the movable body 1002 can be received by the receiving portion 1044b, so that the movable body 1002 can be prevented from being damaged.
(Example 1)
176 and 177 show examples of effects in Example 1 of the present embodiment. 176 and 177 show the effect state in time series. 176 (a) to (q), (t), (u), (x) to (z), (a) to (d), and FIG. 177 are each a game of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174. 176 (r) and (s) show only the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and FIG. 176 (v) and (w) show only the movable body 1002. In addition, in FIG. 176 and the subsequent figures, the illustration of the universal figure display device 210, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, and the high accuracy middle lamp 222 is omitted. However, the illustration of the game ball is also omitted.

  FIG. 176 (a) shows a state where the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out. ing. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 176 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 176 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012 are located at the initial positions. The initial position of the movable body 1002 is higher than the lowermost position shown in FIG. 175 (c), and is closer to the lowermost position than the uppermost position shown in FIG. 175 (b). When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire body is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative pattern display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the sun can be visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1006a. Is becoming Moreover, a part of the image of the cloud displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the cloud is visible through the transparent portion 1006b.

  FIG. 176 (b) following FIG. 176 (a) shows a state in which the number of holdings of special figure 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular hold icon is displayed, and it is informed that the number of hold of special figure 1 is one. Further, the black circular hold icon is a hold icon in a prefetching notice mode as shown in FIG. 161 (a).

  176 (c) which continues from FIG. 176 (b) has shown the state where the special figure 1 variation game in the special figure 1 display device 212 not shown has started. Special Figure 1 After the start of the floating game, the hold icon becomes a floating icon and a moving animation between the holding and floating icons that moves to the left is displayed.

  FIG. 176 (d) subsequent to FIG. 176 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In and after FIG. 176, the variable display of the decorative design is represented by a downward thick white arrow. In the present embodiment, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started after the start of the hold / change icon movement animation.

  FIG. 176 (e) continuing from FIG. 176 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started from FIG. 176 (e) onward.

  176 (f) subsequent to FIG. 176 (e) shows a state where the movable body 1010 has moved from the initial position to the lowermost part of the operation range. The movable body 1010 is stopped at a position on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208. As a result, the movable body 1010 and a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 overlap, and a part of the image becomes invisible to the player. In the pachinko machine 100, at least a part of the decorative pattern or the notice image (for example, the image of the sun, cloud, balloon, hold icon, change icon, etc.) overlaps the movable body and becomes invisible to the player. In addition, compared to the case where at least a part of the decorative pattern or the notice image does not overlap with the movable body, there is a high possibility that it will be a big hit in the special figure variation game being executed or the special figure variation game being held. It may be configured as follows.

  176 (g) following FIG. 176 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has moved upward and returned to the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 1010 is the uppermost position in the moving range of the movable body 1010. When the movable body 1010 returns to the initial position, the production operation of the movable body 1010 in the reach production is finished.

  176 (h) subsequent to FIG. 176 (g) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has moved from the initial position to the right. A part of the sun image and a part of "decoration 2" are visually recognized through the transmissive part 1006a, and a part of the cloud image is visually recognized through the transmissive part 1006b. When the movable body 1006 is located at the initial position as shown in FIG. 176 (g) and when the movable body 1006 is moved rightward from the initial position as shown in FIG. 176 (h), an image of the sun and The visible part of the cloud image is different. When the image of the sun or the image of the cloud is displayed as the notice image, the visible part of the notice image is different before and after the movement of the movable body. The visual variation part of the notice image that may be different before and after the movement of the movable body may be different from the visual variation part of the notice image. It may be configured.

  FIG. 176 (i) subsequent to FIG. 176 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has moved leftward and returned to the initial position. As a result, the production operation of the movable body 1006 in the reach production is completed.

  FIG. 176 (j) subsequent to FIG. 176 (i) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved leftward from the initial position. A part of the cloud image and a part of “decoration 2” are visually recognized through the transmissive part 1008a, and a part of the cloud image is visually recognized through the transmissive part 1008b. As a result, when the movable body 1008 is located at the initial position as shown in FIG. 176 (i) and when the movable body 1008 is moved leftward from the initial position as shown in FIG. 176 (j), The visible parts of the image and the cloud image are different. The visual variation part of the notice image that may be different before and after the movement of the movable body may be different from the visual variation part of the notice image. It may be configured. When the pre-reading notice may be different before and after moving the movable body, the pre-reading notice may not be different before and after moving the movable body. It may be configured so that the big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the variable display of symbols to be prefetched than in the case of being performed.

  176 (k) following FIG. 176 (j) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right and returned to the initial position. As a result, the production operation of the movable body 1008 in the reach production is completed.

  FIG. 176 (l) subsequent to FIG. 176 (k) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 is located at the uppermost position from the initial position. In this example, the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position to start the effect operation.

  FIG. 176 (m) subsequent to FIG. 176 (l) shows a state where the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has started the rotation operation. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can be rotated clockwise and counterclockwise by 180 ° from an initial posture in which the upper and lower end sides are parallel to the horizontal direction and the left and right end sides are parallel to the vertical direction as shown in FIG. 176 (l). Is. In FIG. 176 (m), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated counterclockwise by 45 °.

  FIG. 176 (n) subsequent to FIG. 176 (m) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated clockwise by 90 ° from the state shown in FIG. 176 (m). As shown in FIGS. 176 (l) to 176 (n), the visible parts of the balloon image and the cloud image are different before and after the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. When a balloon image or a cloud image is displayed as a notice image, the noticeable part of the notice image is different before and after the movement of the movable body. The visual variation part of the notice image that may be different before and after the movement of the movable body may be different from the visual variation part of the notice image. It may be configured. When the pre-reading notice may be different before and after moving the movable body, the pre-reading notice may not be different before and after moving the movable body. It may be configured so that the big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the variable display of symbols to be prefetched than in the case of being performed.

  176 (o) continuing from FIG. 176 (n) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated counterclockwise by 45 ° from the state shown in FIG. 176 (n) and returned to the initial posture.

  176 (p) following FIG. 176 (o) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has moved downward and returned to the initial position. As a result, the production operation of the movable body 1002 in the reach production is completed.

  FIG. 176 (q) subsequent to FIG. 176 (p) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 176 (r) shows only the main liquid crystal unit 1001 extracted at the same timing as in FIG. 176 (q) and shows the movable body 1012 rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. Due to the rotating operation of the movable body 1012, the movable body 1012 and the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 overlap each other. Therefore, the movable body 1012 makes it impossible for the player to visually recognize the image of the sun and part of the "decoration 2". The visual variation part of the notice image that may be different before and after the movement of the movable body may be different from the visual variation part of the notice image. It may be configured. When the pre-reading notice may be different before and after moving the movable body, the pre-reading notice may not be different before and after moving the movable body. It may be configured so that the big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the variable display of symbols to be prefetched than in the case of being performed.

  176 (s) subsequent to FIGS. 176 (q) and 176 (r) shows only the main liquid crystal unit 1001 in an extracted state, and the movable body 1012 moves counterclockwise from the state shown in FIGS. 176 (q) and 176 (r). It shows a state in which it has rotated 90 ° and returned to the initial position. FIG. 176 (t) shows the game board 1000 at the same timing as in FIG. 176 (s). When the movable body 1012 returns to the initial position, the production operation of the movable body 1012 in the reach production is finished.

  FIG. 176 (u) subsequent to FIGS. 176 (s) and 176 (t) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 176 (v) shows only the movable body 1002 extracted at the same timing as in FIG. 176 (u), and shows the movable body 1004 rotated by 60 ° in the clockwise direction from the initial position. Due to the rotating operation of the movable body 1004, the movable body 1004 and the image of the seascape displayed on the sub display device 1030 overlap each other. Therefore, the movable body 1004 makes a part of the image of the seascape invisible to the player. The image of the seascape may be displayed as a notice image. The visual variation part of the notice image that may be different before and after the movement of the movable body may be different from the visual variation part of the notice image. It may be configured. When the pre-reading notice may be different before and after moving the movable body, the pre-reading notice may not be different before and after moving the movable body. It may be configured so that the big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the variable display of symbols to be prefetched than in the case of being performed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 176 (u), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and in the effect display area 208d. A white circular hold icon is displayed.

  In FIG. 176 (w) subsequent to FIGS. 176 (u) and (v), only the movable body 1002 is extracted and shown, and the movable body 1004 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIGS. It shows the state that it has rotated and returned to the initial position. FIG. 176 (x) shows the game board 1000 at the same timing as FIG. 176 (w). When the movable body 1004 returns to the initial position, the production operation of the movable body 1004 in the reach production is finished.

  176 (w), FIG. 176 (y) following from (x) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variation game is out of alignment. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable display is off.

  FIG. 176 (z) subsequent to FIG. 176 (y) shows a state in which the variation icon deletion animation is executed during the non-execution of the special figure variation game. In the effect display area 208d, the black circular variation icon corresponding to the finished special figure 1 variation game is deleted.

  FIG. 176 (a) continuing from FIG. 176 (z) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) is started. Special Figure 1 After the start of the floating game, the hold icon becomes a floating icon and a moving animation between the holding and floating icons that moves to the left is displayed.

  FIG. 176 (b) continued from FIG. 176 (a), based on the first sub-control unit 400 has received the symbol variation start command transmitted from the main control unit 300, the variable display of decorative symbols has been started. It shows the state. The symbol variation start command includes information on the variation time. The variation time of this example is determined to be, for example, 30 seconds in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) of the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  FIG. 176 (c) subsequent to FIG. 176 (b) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 has been turned off due to the power failure occurring 15 seconds after the start of fluctuation. The displays of the decorative pattern display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are erased, and all the lamps are turned off. Further, in this example, all the movable bodies other than the movable body 1002 stand still at the position of the timing at which the power interruption occurred.

  FIG. 176 (d) subsequent to FIG. 176 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has moved from the initial position to the lowermost position. As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off, the movable body 1002 moves to the lowest position in the movement range by its own weight. The movable body 1002 is located at the lowermost position when the pachinko machine 100 is in a power-off non-operating state. The lowermost position of the movable body 1002 is the non-operating position of the movable body 1002. When the movable body 1002 is located in the non-operating position, only the upper end portion of the display area of the sub display device 1030 can be visually recognized by the player.

  177 (a) following FIG. 176 (d) shows a state in which the pachinko machine 100 is powered off.

  177 (b) following FIG. 177 (a) shows a state in which the pachinko machine 100 is powered on. The pachinko machine 100 starts in the order of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 when the power is turned on. In FIG. 177 (b), the startup of the main control unit 300 is completed, the special figure 1 variation game in the special figure 1 display device 212 is restarted, the first sub control unit 400 is being started, and the first sub On the decorative pattern display device 208 controlled by the control unit 400, a character string image of "starting ..." Is displayed.

  177 (c) subsequent to FIG. 177 (b) shows a state in which the second sub control unit 500 is activated. After the activation of the second sub-control unit 500, the initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 is executed. On the decorative pattern display device 208, a character string image of "in initial operation" is displayed to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is executed.

  177 (d) subsequent to FIG. 177 (c) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body is started. In this example, first, the initial operation of the movable body 1002 is executed. As shown in FIG. 177 (d), the movable body 1002 has moved to the uppermost position. Further, the character string image of “in initial operation” is displayed on the sub display device 1030 provided on the movable body 1002, similarly to the decorative symbol display device 208.

  177 (e) following FIG. 177 (d) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated counterclockwise by 45 ° from the initial posture. 177 (f) following FIG. 177 (e) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated counterclockwise by 90 ° from the state shown in FIG. 177 (e). 177 (g) continued from FIG. 177 (f), the movable body 1002 is moved to the initial position after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated counterclockwise by 45 ° from the state shown in FIG. 177 (f) to return to the initial posture. The figure shows the moved state. In the initial operation of the movable body 1002 of this example, first, the movable body 1002 moves from the lowermost position to the uppermost position, and then the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates counterclockwise 45 ° from the initial posture, and then, , The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates clockwise by 90 °, then the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates counterclockwise by 45 ° and returns to the initial posture, and finally, the movable body 1002 moves to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1002 is completed. The initial position of the movable body 1002 is the start position of the effect operation of the movable body 1002.

  177 (h) following FIG. 177 (g) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1010 has moved from the initial position to the lowermost position in the movement range. 177 (i) following FIG. 177 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1010 has moved upward and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1010 of this example, first, the movable body 1010 moves from the initial position (uppermost position) to the lowermost position, and then the movable body 1010 returns from the lowermost position to the initial position. .. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1010 is completed.

  FIG. 177 (j) subsequent to FIG. 177 (i) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1006 has moved from the initial position to the rightmost end of the movement range. FIG. 177 (k) subsequent to FIG. 177 (j) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1006 has moved to the left and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1006 of this example, first, the movable body 1006 moves from the initial position to the rightmost position, and then the movable body 1006 returns from the rightmost position to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1006 is completed.

  177 (l) following FIG. 177 (k) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1008 has moved from the initial position to the leftmost end of the movement range. FIG. 177 (m) subsequent to FIG. 177 (l) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1008 has moved to the right and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1008 of this example, first, the movable body 1008 moves from the initial position to the leftmost position, and then the movable body 1008 returns from the leftmost position to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1008 is completed.

  FIG. 177 (n) subsequent to FIG. 177 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1012 rotates 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. 177 (o) subsequent to FIG. 177 (n) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1012 rotates counterclockwise by 60 ° and returns to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1012 of this example, first, the movable body 1012 rotates 60 ° clockwise from the initial position, and then the movable body 1012 rotates 60 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1012 is completed.

  177 (p) following FIG. 177 (o) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. 177 (q) subsequent to FIG. 177 (p) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1004 is rotated counterclockwise by 60 ° and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1004 of this example, first, the movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° clockwise from the initial position, and then the movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1004 is completed. Further, in this example, when the initial operation of the movable body 1004 is completed, the initial operation of all the movable bodies is completed.

  In this example, the movable body 1002, the movable body 1010, the movable body 1006, the movable body 1008, the movable body 1012, and the movable body 1004 are sequentially subjected to the initial operation of the movable body. The execution order of the initial operation of the movable body can be set arbitrarily.

  177 (r) continuing from FIG. 177 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 is being executed. If the power interruption occurs during execution of the special figure variation game, the first sub-control unit 400, after the completion of the initial operation of the movable body, until the symbol variation stop command is received from the main control unit 300, the decoration The symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are controlled to be the preparation screen. As a result, the character string image of “in preparation” is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 177 (r), one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, but the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a hold icon indicating an increased hold because of the preparing screen. I haven't. The leftmost LED of the Toku-zu 1 holding lamp 218 is turned on, and the Toku-zu 1 holding lamp 218 informs that the number of holdings in the Toku-zu 1 is 1.

  Further, the main control unit 300, by the power interruption process (step S243) executed at the time of power interruption, the determination result of the running special figure 1 variation game stored in the RAM 308, the stop symbol, the variation time, the special figure 1 A display symbol update timer or the like is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data. The main control unit 300 returns to the gaming state before the power interruption based on the return data by the power recovery process after the power is turned on (step S111). As a result, the main control unit 300 executes control to end the special figure 1 variable game when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game that was being executed at the time of power interruption has passed 30 seconds.

  FIG. 177 (s) continuing from FIG. 177 (r) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. The result of the special figure 1 variation game of this example is out of order. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the design variation stop command including the information that the hit determination result is out of order from the main control unit 300, based on the effect display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub-display device 1030. To restart. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3", which is an outlying symbol combination, is stopped and displayed, and in the effect display area 208d, an image of the sun and clouds. The background image including the image of the balloon and the image of the balloon is displayed. In addition, since the hold of the special figure 1 is 1, one white circular hold icon is displayed in the effect display area 208d. Further, the variation icon corresponding to the special figure variation game that was executed before the power interruption is not displayed in the effect display of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the power restoration. Further, an image of the seascape is displayed on the sub display device 1030.

  FIG. 177 (t) continuing from FIG. 177 (s) shows a state in which one special figure 1 hold is digested and the special figure 1 variation game is started. After the start of the special game 1 variation game, the hold icon becomes a change icon and a movement animation between the hold and change icons that moves to the left is displayed, and then the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In addition, the movable body 1002 waits at the initial position until the second sub control unit 500 receives the effect operation start command. Further, the movable body 1008 has moved from the initial position to the rightmost position. When the movable body 1008 moves to the rightmost position, the right end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes visible. Therefore, when the movable body 1008 moves to the rightmost position, the notice image overlapping the movable body 1008 may be visible when the movable body 1008 is located at the initial position. The symbol variation display in which the notice image may be visible may be configured such that the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the notice image remains invisible.

  177 (u) following FIG. 177 (t) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has started the effect operation. The second sub-control unit 500 starts drive control of the movable body 1002 based on receiving a command including a command to start the rendering operation of the movable body 1002 from the first sub-control unit 400. The movable body 1002 has moved from the initial position to the uppermost position.

  177 (v) following FIG. 177 (u) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has returned to the initial position. The movable body 1002 waits at the initial position until the second sub control unit 500 receives the effect operation start command. In addition, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, and a black circular hold icon is displayed in the effect display area 208d. ..

  FIG. 177 (w) continuing from FIG. 177 (v) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variation game is out of alignment. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable display is out of alignment. In addition, the movable body 1008 has returned to the initial position. Further, the variation icon erasing animation is executed while the decorative design is stopped and displayed, and the white circle variation icon is erased.

  FIG. 177 (x) continuing from FIG. 177 (w) shows a state in which one special figure 1 hold is digested and the special figure 1 variation game is started. After the start of the special game 1 variation game, the hold icon becomes a change icon and a movement animation between the hold and change icons that moves to the left is displayed, and then the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In addition, the movable body 1002 waits for receiving a production operation start command at the initial position.

  177 (y) continuing from FIG. 177 (x) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has started the effect operation. The second sub-control unit 500 starts drive control of the movable body 1002 based on receiving a command including a command to start the rendering operation of the movable body 1002 from the first sub-control unit 400. In this example, after the movable body 1002 is moved from the initial position to the uppermost position, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated counterclockwise by 60 °.

  177 (z) following FIG. 177 (y) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has returned to the initial position. After the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial position, the movable body 1002 moves downward and returns to the initial position. It should be noted that the movable body 1002 may move downward during execution of the rotation operation in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture.

  FIG. 177 (a) continuing from FIG. 177 (z) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variation game is out of alignment. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable display is out of alignment.

  FIG. 177 (b) continuing from FIG. 177 (a) shows a state in which the changing icon deletion animation is executed during the stop display of the decorative pattern. As a result, the black circular variation icon is erased.

In this embodiment, the movable body 1002 starts the effect operation from the initial position and ends the effect operation at the initial position. The movable body 1002 may start the effect operation from a position other than the initial position and the lowermost position. The movable body 1002 may start the effect operation from the lowermost position. The movable body 1002 may end the effect operation at the lowermost position. The movable body 1002 may end the effect operation at a position other than the initial position and the lowermost position. The movable body 1002 may start the effect operation at a position other than the initial position and the lowermost position, and may end the effect operation at a position other than the initial position and the lowermost position. The start position of the effect operation of the movable body 1002 and the end position of the effect operation may be the same or different.
A game table characterized by that.

  Also, when the power is turned off in a state where the movable body 1002 is at a position other than the initial position and the lowermost position (for example, the fourth position), the movable body 1002 is at the lowermost position from the fourth position. May be configured to move to.

  Further, when the power source is turned off in a state where the movable body 1002 is in the third position which is a position other than the fourth position, the initial position, and the lowermost position, the movable body 1002 also moves from the third position. It is configured to move to the lowest position.

  In addition, a fourth control unit (for example, the second sub control unit 500) that controls the movable body 1002 and a drive unit that drives the movable body 1002 are provided.

In addition, a sensor that detects whether or not the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position is provided, and when the sensor detects that the movable body 1002 is not located at the initial position when the power is turned off, The movable body 1002 is configured to move to the lowermost position. It should be noted that the sensor is provided with a sensor for detecting whether or not the movable body is in the initial posture. May be configured to return to the. The drive control of the movable body 1002 in this embodiment may be applied to another movable body.
(Example 2)
FIG. 178 shows an example of effects in Example 2 of the present embodiment. FIG. 178 shows the effect state in time series. Each drawing of FIG. 178 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174.

  FIG. 178 (a) shows a state where the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 178 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 178 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012 are located at the initial positions.

  178 (b) following from FIG. 178 (a), based on the fact that one game ball has entered the Toku-zu 1 starting port 230, the number of holdings of Toku-zu 1 has increased from 0 to 1 and increased. It shows the state where the suspension of special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variation game is started. The variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the black circular variation icon is displayed in the effect display area 208d.

  178 (c) following FIG. 178 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 and the movable body 1010 have started performing the effect operation. The movable body 1002 has moved from the initial position to the uppermost position, and the movable body 1010 has moved from the initial position to the lowermost position. The movable body 1002 and the movable body 1010 may start moving at the same time or one of them may come first. The symbol variation display in which the number of movable bodies moving forward of the decorative symbol display device 208 is large at almost the same timing is more than the symbol variation display in which the number of movable bodies moving forward of the decorative symbol display device 208 is small at the same timing. Also, the jackpot pattern mode may be configured to be easily displayed in a confirmed manner.

  178 (d) subsequent to FIG. 178 (c) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable body 1010 of the movable body 1002 execute the rotation operation, and the movable body 1006 executes the effect operation. In this embodiment, the movable body 1010 can rotate 180 ° clockwise from the initial posture shown in FIG. 178 (c), and can rotate counterclockwise 180 ° from the initial posture. The initial posture of the movable body 1010 is a posture in which the upper and lower ends of the movable body 1010 are parallel to the horizontal direction. Further, as the drive mechanism for rotating the movable body 1010, the same drive mechanism for rotating the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can be adopted. In the state shown in FIG. 178 (d), the movable body 1010 rotates clockwise by 30 °, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates clockwise by 30 °, and the movable body 1006 moves to the right from the initial position. The operation start timings of the movable body 1010, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, and the movable body 1006 may be the same, the operation start timings of the two movable bodies may be the same, or the operation start of the three movable bodies may be started. The timing may be different. Symbol variation display with a large number of movable bodies rotating in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 at almost the same timing is a symbol variation display with a small number of movable bodies rotating in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 at a similar timing. It may be configured so that the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than the display.

  FIG. 178 (e) continuing from FIG. 178 (d) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off due to an electric power interruption during the execution of the special figure 1 variation game. The displays of the decorative pattern display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are erased, and all the lamps are turned off.

  178 (f) following FIG. 178 (e) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has returned to the initial posture while the pachinko machine 100 is in the power-off state. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a power supply control unit 660 includes a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power for returning the movable body to the initial position and the initial posture even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. Be prepared for. When the power is cut off, the second sub control unit 500 drives the movable body by the power source supplied from the power storage circuit to return the movable body to the initial position and the initial posture. In this embodiment, when the power is cut off, the control for returning the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable body 1010 to the initial posture is executed, but the control for returning the movable body 1006 to the initial position is not executed. The movable body 1006 remains stationary at the position when the power interruption occurred. Note that the movable body 1006 is capable of rotating, and if the movable body 1006 is cut off after the rotating operation is performed, the movable body 1006 stands still in a rotated state from the initial posture.

  178 (g) subsequent to FIG. 178 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has moved to the lowermost position. The second sub control unit 500 ends the drive control of the movable body 1002 after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 100 is powered off, the movable body 1002 moves by its own weight to the lowest position below the initial position. The second sub-control unit 500 continues the drive control of the movable body 1002 even after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture, and executes the drive control of moving the movable body 1002 to the lowest position. Good.

  178 (h) subsequent to FIG. 178 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has returned to the initial posture. 178 (i) subsequent to FIG. 178 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has returned to the initial position.

  178 (j) subsequent to FIG. 178 (i) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 remains off. The pachinko machine 100 is in a state of waiting for power-on.

  178 (k) subsequent to FIG. 178 (j) shows a state in which the pachinko machine 100 is powered on. In FIG. 178 (k), the startup of the main control unit 300 is completed, the special figure 1 variation game in the special figure 1 display device 212 is restarted, the first sub control unit 400 is being started, and the first sub control On the decorative pattern display device 208 controlled by the control unit 400, a character string image of "starting ..." Is displayed. In addition, the character image of “start” in the character string image is hidden by the movable body 1006.

  178 (l) subsequent to FIG. 178 (k) shows a state in which the second sub control unit 500 is activated. After the activation of the second sub-control unit 500, the initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 is executed. On the decorative pattern display device 208, a character string image of "in initial operation" is displayed to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is executed.

  178 (m) subsequent to FIG. 178 (l) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body is started. In this example, first, the initial operation of the movable body 1002 is executed. As shown in FIG. 178 (m), the movable body 1002 has moved from the lowermost position to the uppermost position. Further, the character string image of “in initial operation” is displayed on the sub display device 1030 provided on the movable body 1002, similarly to the decorative symbol display device 208.

  178 (n) subsequent to FIG. 178 (m) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated counterclockwise by 45 ° from the initial posture. 178 (o) subsequent to FIG. 178 (n) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated counterclockwise by 90 ° from the state shown in FIG. 178 (n). 178 (p) continued from FIG. 178 (o), the movable body 1002 is moved to the initial position after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated counterclockwise by 45 ° from the state shown in FIG. 178 (o) to return to the initial posture. The figure shows the moved state. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1002 is completed.

  178 (q) following FIG. 178 (p) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has started the initial operation. In the initial operation of the movable body 1010 of this example, first, the movable body 1010 moves from the initial position to the lowermost position. 178 (r) subsequent to FIG. 178 (q) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 is rotated 45 ° clockwise from the initial posture. 178 (s) continuing from FIG. 178 (r) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has rotated counterclockwise 45 ° from the state shown in FIG. 178 (r) and has returned to the initial position. 178 (t) subsequent to FIG. 178 (s) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has moved upward and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1010 of the present example, first, the movable body 1010 moves from the initial position to the lowest position, then the movable body 1010 rotates 45 ° clockwise from the initial posture, and then the movable body 1010. Rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise to return to the initial posture, and finally, the movable body 1010 moves to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1010 is completed.

  178 (u) following FIG. 178 (t) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has started the initial operation. If the movable body 1006 is stopped at a position other than the initial position when the initial operation starts, the movable body 1006 first returns to the initial position. 178 (v) following FIG. 178 (u) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has moved from the initial position to the rightmost end of the movement range. 178 (w) subsequent to FIG. 178 (v) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1006 has moved to the left and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1006 in this example, first, the movable body 1006 returns to the initial position, then the movable body 1006 moves from the initial position to the rightmost position, and then the movable body 1006 moves to the rightmost position. To return to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1006 is completed.

  178 (x) subsequent to FIG. 178 (w) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1008 has moved from the initial position to the leftmost end of the movement range. 178 (y) subsequent to FIG. 178 (x) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1008 has moved to the right and returned to the initial position.

  178 (z) subsequent to FIG. 178 (y) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1012 rotates 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. 178 (a) subsequent to FIG. 178 (z) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1012 rotates counterclockwise by 60 ° and returns to the initial position.

In addition, in FIG. 178 (a), the movable body 1004 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. 178 (B) following FIG. 178 (A) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 is rotated counterclockwise by 60 ° and returned to the initial position. FIG. 178 (C) that continues from FIG. 178 (B) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 is rotated by 60 ° in the clockwise direction. FIG. 178 (II) continuing from FIG. 178 (C) shows a state where the movable body 1004 has rotated 60 ° clockwise and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1004 of this example, first, the movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° clockwise from the initial position, then the movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial position, and then the movable body 1004 returns to the initial position. The movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° clockwise from the initial position, and then the movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1004 is completed. In this way, the same operation may be executed multiple times in the initial operation of the movable body. Further, in this example, when the initial operation of the movable body 1004 is completed, the initial operation of all the movable bodies is completed.
(Example 3)
FIG. 179 shows an example of effects in Example 3 of the present embodiment. FIG. 178 shows the effect state in time series. Each drawing of FIG. 179 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174.

  FIG. 179 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out. ing. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 179 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 179 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012 are located at the initial positions.

  179 (a) following from FIG. 179 (a), based on the fact that one game ball has entered the Toku-zu 1 starting port 230, the number of holdings of Toku-zu 1 has increased from 0 to 1 and increased. It shows the state where the suspension of special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variation game is started. The variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the black circular variation icon is displayed in the effect display area 208d.

  179 (c) following FIG. 179 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 and the movable body 1010 have started performing the effect operation. The movable body 1002 has moved from the initial position to the uppermost position, and the movable body 1010 has moved from the initial position to the lowermost position.

  179 (c) following FIG. 179 (c) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, the movable body 1004, and the movable body 1010 of the movable body 1002 execute the rotation operation, and the movable body 1006 executes the effect operation. There is. In this embodiment, the movable body 1010 can rotate 180 ° clockwise from the initial posture shown in FIG. 179 (c), and can rotate 180 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. In the state shown in FIG. 179 (d), the movable body 1010 rotates clockwise 30 °, the movable body 1004 rotates clockwise 60 °, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates clockwise 30 °, and the movable body 1006 rotates. Has moved to the right from its initial position. The operation start timings of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable body 1004 may be the same or different.

  179 (e) which continues from FIG. 179 (d) has shown the state where the power supply of the pachinko machine 100 was turned off because the power failure occurred during execution of the special figure 1 variation game. The displays of the decorative pattern display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are erased, and all the lamps are turned off.

  179 (f) following FIG. 179 (e) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has returned to the initial posture while the pachinko machine 100 is powered off. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a power supply control unit 660 includes a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power for returning the movable body to the initial position and the initial posture even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. Be prepared for. When the power is cut off, the second sub control unit 500 drives the movable body by the power source supplied from the power storage circuit to return the movable body to the initial position and the initial posture. In the present embodiment, when the power is cut off, the control for returning the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable body 1010 to the initial position is executed, but the control for returning the movable bodies 1004 and 1006 to the initial position is not executed. The movable bodies 1004 and 1006 remain stationary at the position when the power interruption occurred. Note that the movable body 1006 is capable of rotating, and if the movable body 1006 is cut off after the rotating operation is performed, the movable body 1006 stands still in a rotated state from the initial posture. Further, control for returning the movable bodies 1004 and 1006 to the initial position may be executed.

  179 (g) following FIG. 179 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has moved to the lowermost position. The second sub control unit 500 ends the drive control of the movable body 1002 after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 100 is powered off, the movable body 1002 moves by its own weight to the lowest position below the initial position. The second sub-control unit 500 continues the drive control of the movable body 1002 even after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture, and executes the drive control of moving the movable body 1002 to the lowest position. Good.

  179 (h) subsequent to FIG. 179 (g) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has returned to the initial posture. 179 (i) following FIG. 179 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has returned to the initial position.

  179 (j) following FIG. 179 (i) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 remains off. The pachinko machine 100 is in a state of waiting for power-on.

  179 (k) subsequent to FIG. 179 (j) shows a state in which the pachinko machine 100 is powered on. In FIG. 179 (k), the activation of the main control unit 300 is completed, the special figure 1 variation game in the special figure 1 display device 212 is restarted, the first sub control unit 400 is being activated, and the first sub control is started. On the decorative pattern display device 208 controlled by the control unit 400, a character string image of "starting ..." Is displayed. In addition, the character image of “start” in the character string image is hidden by the movable body 1006.

  179 (l) subsequent to FIG. 179 (k) shows a state in which the second sub control unit 500 is activated. After the activation of the second sub-control unit 500, the initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 is executed. On the decorative pattern display device 208, a character string image of "in initial operation" is displayed to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is executed.

  179 (m) subsequent to FIG. 179 (l) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body is started. In this example, when there is a movable body that is stopped at a position different from the initial position when the initial operation of the movable body is started, control for returning the movable body to the initial position is executed. In FIG. 179 (m), first, the movable body 1006 has returned to the initial position.

  179 (n) subsequent to FIG. 179 (m) shows a state where the movable body 1004 has returned to the initial position. The movable body 1004 is rotated counterclockwise by 60 ° and returned to the initial position.

179 (o) subsequent to FIG. 179 (n) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has returned to the initial value from the lowermost position. 179 (p) subsequent to FIG. 179 (o) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has started the initial operation and moved to the uppermost position. The movable body 1002 starts the initial operation after returning to the initial position.
(Example 4)
180 shows an example of effects in Example 4 of the present embodiment. FIG. 180 shows the effect state in time series. Each of FIGS. 180 (a) to 180 (n) shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174.

  180 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out. ing. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 180 (a), the number of holdings in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 180 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012 are located at the initial positions.

  FIG. 180 (b) continuing from FIG. 180 (a) is based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the number of holdings of special figure 1 has increased from 0 to 1 and increased. It shows the state where the suspension of special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variation game is started. The variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the black circular variation icon is displayed in the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 180 (c) subsequent to FIG. 180 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has started execution of the effect operation. The movable body 1002 has moved from the initial position to the uppermost position.

  FIG. 180D continuing from FIG. 180C shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has executed the rotation operation. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated counterclockwise by 180 °.

  FIG. 180 (e) continuing from FIG. 180 (d) shows a state in which the pachinko machine 100 is powered off due to an electric power interruption during the execution of the special figure 1 variation game. The displays of the decorative pattern display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are erased, and all the lamps are turned off.

  FIG. 180F continuing from FIG. 180E shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has moved to the lowermost position by its own weight without the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returning to the initial posture. In this example, the control for returning the movable body to the initial posture or the initial position when the power is cut off is not executed.

  FIG. 180 (g) subsequent to FIG. 180 (g) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 remains off. The pachinko machine 100 is in a state of waiting for power-on.

  FIG. 180 (h) subsequent to FIG. 180 (g) shows a state in which the pachinko machine 100 is powered on. In FIG. 180 (h), the startup of the main control unit 300 is completed, the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 is restarted, the first sub control unit 400 is being started, and the first sub The character string image of "starting ..." Is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 controlled by the control unit 400, and the character string image of "starting" is displayed on the sub display device 1030.

  FIG. 180 (i) subsequent to FIG. 180 (h) shows a state in which the second sub control unit 500 is activated. After the activation of the second sub-control unit 500, the initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 is executed. On the decorative pattern display device 208, a character string image of "in initial operation" is displayed to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is executed.

  FIG. 180 (j) subsequent to FIG. 180 (i) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body 1002 has started. After the movable body 1002 is moved to the uppermost position, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotating clockwise. In the initial operation, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 performs an operation of rotating 180 degrees clockwise from the initial posture. In this example, since the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 was stationary while rotating counterclockwise 180 ° from the initial posture at the start of the initial operation, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 360 ° clockwise after the start of the initial operation.

  FIG. 180 (k) subsequent to FIG. 180 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 180 ° clockwise from the initial posture and is still. FIG. 180 (l) subsequent to FIG. 180 (k) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotating counterclockwise. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 360 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 180 (k) and then rotates 180 ° clockwise to return to the initial posture. FIG. 180 (m) subsequent to FIG. 180 (l) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has returned to the initial posture. FIG. 180 (n) subsequent to FIG. 180 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has moved to the initial position. The movable body 1002 ends the initial operation when it moves to the initial position.

  FIG. 180 (o) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 in the states shown in FIGS. 180 (f) to (i) is viewed from the rear right side. In this example, the movable body 1002 moves to the lowermost position while the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated counterclockwise by 180 ° from the initial posture. As shown in FIG. 180 (o), a lower escape portion 1050 having a space for allowing the movable body 1002 to escape is provided below the front side of the lower base 1044. The lower side escape part 1050 is provided on the lower rear side of the front stage 244 of the game board 1000 and in the center case of the game board 1000. At the lowermost end of the lower side escape portion 1050, a receiving portion 1052 having a flat surface for receiving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is arranged. A buffer portion 1054 is provided on the upper surface of the receiving portion 1052. A sheet-shaped cushioning member is used for the cushioning section 1054.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off while the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated by, for example, 45 ° or more from the initial posture, the moving unit 1036 of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 cannot be received by the lower base 1044, but the lower escape portion 1050 It can be received by the receiving portion 1052. This can prevent the movable body 1002 from colliding with peripheral devices and peripheral members even if the movable body 1002 having a posture different from the initial posture moves to the lower limit position.

Although illustration is omitted, when the movable body 1002 can move above the initial position of the movable body 1010, an upper side relief portion may be provided. Similar to the lower relief portion 1050, the upper relief portion is provided to prevent the movable body 1002 from colliding with peripheral devices and peripheral members. It suffices that the upper side escape portion is provided with a receiving portion having a flat surface for receiving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and a buffer portion on the lower surface of the receiving portion.
(Example 5)
FIG. 181 shows an example of effects in Example 5 of the present embodiment. FIG. 181 shows the effect state in time series. Each drawing of FIG. 181 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174.

  FIG. 181 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 181 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 181 (a), the movable bodies 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012 are located at the initial position.

  FIG. 181 (b) continuing from FIG. 181 (a) shows a state in which the number of holdings of special figure 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball enters the special figure 1 starting opening 230. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular hold icon is displayed, and it is informed that the number of hold of special figure 1 is one.

  FIG. 181 (c) continuing from FIG. 181 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) is started. Special Figure 1 After the start of the floating game, the hold icon becomes a floating icon and a moving animation between the holding and floating icons that moves to the left is displayed.

  FIG. 181 (d) subsequent to FIG. 181 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  FIG. 181 (e) subsequent to FIG. 181 (d) shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 181 (e).

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotatable. As the drive mechanism for executing the rotation operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001, the same mechanism as the drive mechanism for executing the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in the above embodiment is used. Thus, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 also functions as a movable body. Further, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 45 degrees clockwise and counterclockwise about the center of the display area from the initial posture in which the upper and lower edges of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 are parallel to the horizontal direction. It is possible. Further, when the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotatable, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may not be rotatable, or both units may be rotatable. In this embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is fixed to the game board 1000 and cannot rotate. When the main liquid crystal unit 1001 cannot rotate, as in the above-described embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may rotate or may not rotate.

  FIG. 181 (f) subsequent to FIG. 181 (e) shows a state in which the effect of the previous stage of the rotation operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has been started. In this example, before the main liquid crystal unit 1001 starts the rotation operation, after the variable icon, the hold icon, and the decorative design are displayed on the sub display device 1030, these displays are erased from the decorative design display device 208. .. In this example, first, after the black circular variable icon is displayed on the sub display device 1030, the variable icon is deleted from the decorative pattern display device 208. In addition, when the hold icon is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, after the hold icon is displayed on the sub display device 1030, the hold icon is deleted from the decorative symbol display device 208. The display modes of the variable icon and the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 are the same as the display modes of the variable icon and the hold icon displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

  FIG. 181 (g) subsequent to FIG. 181 (f) shows a state in which the decorative pattern is displayed on the sub display device 1030. The sub display device 1030 temporarily displays “decoration 2” as the left and right symbols, and after the middle symbols are variably displayed, the display of the decorative symbols is deleted from the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208, when the display of the variable icon, the hold icon, the decorative pattern, etc. is erased, another display overlapping these displays may be visible to the player. The other display may be displayed as a notice image. The symbol variation display in which the other display may be visible to the player is such that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the other display remains invisible to the player. It may be configured.

  FIG. 181 (h) subsequent to FIG. 181 (g) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has started the rendering operation. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated counterclockwise by 45 ° from the initial posture.

  FIG. 181 (i) subsequent to FIG. 181 (h) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated clockwise by 90 ° from the state shown in FIG. 181 (h). Further, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, and a white circular hold icon is displayed on the sub display device 1030. ..

  FIG. 181 (j) subsequent to FIG. 181 (i) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated counterclockwise by 45 ° from the state shown in FIG. 181 (i) and returned to the initial posture. Further, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed as a medium symbol on the sub display device 1030, and the sub display is performed based on that the first sub control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command transmitted from the main control unit 300. On the device 1030, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed as a confirmed symbol.

  FIG. 181 (k) subsequent to FIG. 181 (j) shows a state in which the changing icon deletion animation is executed. On the sub display device 1030, the variation icon erasing animation is executed, and the variation icon in a black circle is erased.

  FIG. 181 (l) continuing from FIG. 181 (k) shows a non-execution state of the special figure variation game. The special map 1 display device 212 (not shown) is stopped and displayed, and the sub-display device 1030 is stopped and displayed as "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2."

  FIG. 181 (m) continuing from FIG. 181 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) is started. Special Figure 1 After the start of the variation game, the hold icon becomes a variation icon and a movement animation between the hold and variation icons that moves to the left is displayed on the sub display device 1030. Moreover, the movable body 1006 has moved to the leftmost end after the start of the special figure 1 variation game. Therefore, the movable body 1006 becomes invisible to the player.

  FIG. 181 (n) subsequent to FIG. 181 (m) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the sub display device 1030.

  FIG. 181 (o) subsequent to FIG. 181 (n) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is resumed in the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 is restarted during the execution of the special symbol variation game subsequent to the special symbol variation game in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has executed the rotation effect operation. After the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is erased on the sub display device 1030.

  FIG. 181 (n) subsequent to FIG. 181 (o) shows a state in which the display of the variable icon is resumed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the display of the variable icon and the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is restarted during the execution of the special figure variation game that is the next to the special figure variation game in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has performed the rotation effect operation. After the display of the variable icon on the decorative pattern display device 208 is started, the variable icon is deleted on the sub display device 1030. When the hold icon is displayed on the sub display device 1030, the hold icon is deleted on the sub display device 1030 after the display of the hold icon on the decorative pattern display device 208 is started.

  FIG. 181 (q) continuing from FIG. 181 (p) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variation game is out of alignment. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the special display 1 variable display result is out of alignment. The movable body 1006 may be returned to the initial position after the end of the special figure 1 variation game.

FIG. 181 (r) subsequent to FIG. 181 (q) shows a state in which the variation icon deletion animation is executed during the non-execution of the special figure variation game. In the effect display area 208d, the white circular variation icon corresponding to the finished special figure 1 variation game is deleted.
(Example 6)
FIG. 182 shows an example of effects in Example 6 of the present embodiment. FIG. 182 shows the effect state in time series. Each drawing in FIG. 182 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174.

  FIG. 182 (a) shows a state where the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out. ing. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 182 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0. Further, in this embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is fixed to the game board 1000 and cannot move or rotate, and the main liquid crystal unit 1001 moves up and down by the same drive mechanism as the movable body 1002 shown in FIG. 175. It is possible. Further, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 can rotate as in the fifth embodiment. In the state shown in FIG. 182 (a), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is located at the initial position in the initial posture. Both the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may be vertically movable.

  FIG. 182 (b) continuing from FIG. 182 (a) shows a state in which the pachinko machine 100 is powered off due to power failure during non-execution of the special figure variation game. The displays of the decorative pattern display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are erased, and all the lamps are turned off.

  FIG. 182 (c) subsequent to FIG. 182 (b) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has moved from the initial position to the lowermost position. Similar to the movable body 1002, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 moves to the lowest position in the movement range by its own weight. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 is located at the lowermost position when the pachinko machine 100 is in a power-off non-operating state. Further, the second sub control unit 500 may execute drive control for moving the main liquid crystal unit 1001 to the lowest position by the power supplied from the power storage circuit included in the power control unit 660.

  FIG. 182 (d) subsequent to FIG. 182 (c) shows a state in which the pachinko machine 100 is powered off.

  182 (e) subsequent to FIG. 182 (d) shows a state in which the pachinko machine 100 is powered on. In FIG. 182 (e), the first sub-control unit 400 is being activated, and the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub-display device 1030 controlled by the first sub-control unit 400 display the character string image of “being activated”. Has been done.

  FIG. 182 (f) subsequent to FIG. 182 (e) shows a state in which the second sub control unit 500 is activated. After the activation of the second sub-control unit 500, the initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 is executed. On the decorative pattern display device 208, a character string image of "in initial operation" is displayed to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is executed. The sub-display device 1030 continues to display the character string image “starting”.

  FIG. 182 (g) subsequent to FIG. 182 (f) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body is started. In this example, only the initial operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is executed. As shown in FIG. 182 (g), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has moved upward and is located at the initial position.

  FIG. 182 (h) subsequent to FIG. 182 (g) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated counterclockwise by 45 ° from the initial posture. FIG. 182 (i) subsequent to FIG. 182 (h) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated counterclockwise by 90 ° from the state shown in FIG. 182 (h). 182 (j) subsequent to FIG. 182 (i) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated counterclockwise by 45 ° from the state shown in FIG. 182 (i) and returned to the initial posture. In the initial operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 of this example, first, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 moves from the lowermost position (non-operating operation position) to the initial position, and then the main liquid crystal unit 1001 moves counterclockwise from the initial position. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 rotates 45 °, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 rotates 90 ° clockwise, and the main liquid crystal unit 1001 rotates counterclockwise 45 ° to return to the initial posture. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is completed.

  FIG. 182 (k) continuing from FIG. 182 (j) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body is completed and the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is resumed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. The stop pattern "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is the default stop pattern. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 182 (k), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0.

176 (c) and (d), the movable body 1002 is moved from the initial position to the lowermost position, and the main liquid crystal unit 1001 in FIGS. 182 (b) and (c) is moved from the initial position to the lowermost position. The operation of moving the first movable body to the first position when the power source is turned off, such as moving, may be performed not only when the power source is turned off, but also as a big hit warning. The symbol variation display for which the jackpot announcement was given may be configured so that the jackpot symbol aspect is more likely to be stopped and displayed finally, than the symbol variation display for which the jackpot announcement was not given, or the jackpot announcement In the symbol variation display performed, the final jackpot pattern mode may always be stopped and displayed. On the contrary, even in the case of the variable display in which the big hit announcement is given, the symbol mode may be finally stopped and displayed. Of course, there may be a case where the big hit symbol mode is finally stopped and displayed even in the symbol variable display in which the big hit announcement is not given.
(Example 7)
FIG. 183 shows an example of effects in Example 7 of the present embodiment. FIG. 183 shows the effect state in time series. Each drawing of FIG. 183 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174.

  FIG. 183 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 183 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0. Further, in the present embodiment, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 can perform vertical movement and rotation operations, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can perform vertical movement and rotation operations. In the state shown in FIG. 183 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012 are located in the initial position, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is located in the initial position in the initial position, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is in the initial position. It is stationary in a posture.

  FIG. 183 (b) continuing from FIG. 183 (a) shows a state in which the number of holdings of special figure 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball enters the special figure 1 starting opening 230. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular hold icon is displayed, and it is informed that the number of hold of special figure 1 is one.

  FIG. 183 (c) continuing from FIG. 183 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) is started. Special Figure 1 After the start of the floating game, the hold icon becomes a floating icon and a moving animation between the holding and floating icons that moves to the left is displayed.

  FIG. 183 (d) subsequent to FIG. 183 (c) shows a state where the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  FIG. 183 (e) subsequent to FIG. 183 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 183 (e).

  FIG. 183 (f) subsequent to FIG. 183 (e) shows a state where the effect operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is started. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated counterclockwise by 30 ° from the initial posture.

  FIG. 183 (g) subsequent to FIG. 183 (f) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated clockwise by 60 ° from the state shown in FIG. 183 (g).

  FIG. 183 (h) subsequent to FIG. 183 (g) shows a state in which the effect operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has started. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated clockwise by 30 ° from the initial posture.

  FIG. 183 (i) subsequent to FIG. 183 (h) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 are rotated counterclockwise by 60 ° from the state shown in FIG. 183 (h). The rotation start timings of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may be the same, or either one may be earlier. In the rotation operation, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 have the same rotation speed.

  FIG. 183 (j) subsequent to FIG. 183 (i) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 are rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 183 (h). In the rotation operation, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has a higher rotation speed than the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, and at the time point shown in FIG. 183 (j), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 rotates clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 183 (i). The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated by 60 °, and is rotated clockwise by 30 ° from the state shown in FIG. 183 (i).

  FIG. 183 (k) continued from FIG. 183 (j), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated counterclockwise by 60 ° from the state shown in FIG. 183 (j), and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is shown in FIG. 183 (j). It shows a state of being rotated clockwise from 30 °. In the rotation operation, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has a higher rotation speed than the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

  In FIG. 183 (l) continued from FIG. 183 (k), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 rotates clockwise 30 ° from the state shown in FIG. 183 (k), and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 changes from the state shown in FIG. 183 (k). It shows a state in which it is rotated counterclockwise by 30 °. As a result, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 return to the initial posture.

  FIG. 183 (m) subsequent to FIG. 183 (l) shows a state in which the effect operation of vertically moving the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the movable body 1002 including the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has been executed. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 moves downward, and the movable body 1002 including the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves upward. Thus, in the effect operation of this example, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 move in opposite directions.

  FIG. 183 (n) continuing from FIG. 183 (m) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. Further, prior to the end of the special figure 1 variation game, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the movable body 1002 are returned to the initial position. In addition, the result of the special figure 1 variation game is out. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the special display 1 variable display result is out of alignment.

FIG. 183 (o) continuing from FIG. 183 (n) shows a state in which the variation icon deletion animation is executed during non-execution of the special figure variation game. In the effect display area 208d, the white circular variation icon corresponding to the finished special figure 1 variation game is deleted.
(Example 8)
Next, the connection unit 1060 of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the moving unit 1036 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 184. A slip ring is used for the connection unit 1060 of this embodiment.

  184 (a) to 184 (d) are external perspective views of the connection unit 1060 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as seen from the front. First, the external configuration of the connection unit 1060 will be described with reference to FIG. The connection unit 1060 includes an upper case 1062 and a lower case 1064. The upper case 1062 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper and lower surfaces are square when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the front. The upper case 1062 has a shape that is longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the front. Note that in FIGS. 184 (a) to 184 (d) and (f), the upper case 1062 is cross-hatched in order to easily distinguish the configurations.

  A lower case 1064 is arranged below the upper case 1062. The lower case 1064 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper and lower surfaces are square when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the front. The entire upper surface of the lower case 1064 is open. Further, the entire lower surface of the upper case 1062 is opened. The upper and lower surfaces of the lower case 1064 and the upper and lower surfaces of the upper case 1062 have the same size, and the lower case 1064 is arranged such that the upper surface thereof matches the lower surface of the upper case 1062. The lower case 1064 has a shorter vertical length than the upper case 1062 when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the front. Note that in FIGS. 184 (a) to 184 (e), the lower case 1064 is hatched so as to rise to the right in order to make it easy to distinguish the configurations. The upper case 1062 and the lower case 1064 are arranged on the moving unit 1036 side.

  A fixed-side connector 1066 is provided at the lower center of the side surface on the front side of the upper case 1062. In this embodiment, the other end of the harness, one end of which is connected to the fixed connector 1066, is connected to the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400. The harness and the first sub-board 160 may be connected via a relay board.

  A circular opening 1068 is provided in the center of the upper surface of the upper case 1062. A circular rotation side case 1070 is arranged in the opening 1068. The rotation side case 1070 is arranged on the side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. A rotation shaft fixing hole 1072 is provided in the center of the rotation side case 1070. In the rotation shaft fixing hole 1072, a shaft having one end fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor arranged in the moving unit 1036 and the other end fixed to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is orthogonal to the upper surface of the rotation side case 1070. To be stretched. A rotating side connector 1074 is provided on the rotating side case 1070. In this embodiment, the other end of the harness, one end of which is connected to the rotation side connector 1074, is connected to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

  The rotation side case 1070 is adapted to rotate together with the shaft. FIGS. 184 (b) to 184 (d) show a state in which the rotating case 1070 is rotated. FIG. 184 (b) shows a state in which the rotating case 1070 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 184 (a) when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from above. FIG. 184 (c) shows a state in which the rotation side case 1070 is rotated 180 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 184 (a) when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from above. FIG. 184 (d) shows a state in which the rotating case 1070 is rotated 270 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 184 (a) when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from above.

  FIG. 184 (e) shows a state in which the inside of the lower case 1064 of the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the upper case 1062 side. A circular rotation shaft hole 1076 is provided in the center of the lower case 1064. A shaft for rotationally driving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 passes through the rotation shaft hole 1076.

  Further, the fixed connector 1066 is provided with 6 pins, and the lower case 1064 is provided with conductive parts 1078, 1080, 1082, 1084, 1086, 1088 connected to the pins of the fixed connector 1066, respectively. There is. Taking the conductive portion 1078 as an example, the conductive portion 1078 has an elongated conductive plate 1078a and a fixture 1078b for fixing one end of the conductive plate 1078a to the lower case 1064. The fixture 1078b fixes the conductive plate 1078a to the lower case 1064 so that the conductive plate 1078b does not rotate. An insulator is used for the fixing portion 1078b. The conductive parts 1080 to 1088 have the same configuration as the conductive part 1078.

  FIG. 184 (f) shows a state in which the lower surface side of the rotation side case 1070 of the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the lower case 1064 side. A rotation side substrate 1090 is arranged on the lower surface side of the rotation side case 1070. The rotation side substrate 1090 is a slip ring. The rotation-side substrate 1090 has a circular shape and has a circular insulating portion 1092. Circular wirings 1094, 1096, 1098, 1100, 1102, and 1104 are provided on the inner peripheral side of the insulating portion 1092 of the rotation-side substrate 1090. The wirings 1094, 1096, 1098, 1100, 1102, and 1104 are arranged concentrically from the outer peripheral side in this order. The insulating portion 1092 and the wirings 1094 to 1104 are arranged concentrically, and a rotary shaft fixing hole 1072 is provided at the center of the concentric circle. Note that in FIG. 184 (f), the insulating portion 1092 and the wiring portions 1094 to 1104 are hatched in a rightward upward direction so that the configurations can be easily distinguished.

  The rotation side connector 1074 of the rotation side case 1070 is provided with 6 pins, and each pin and the wirings 1094 to 1104 are connected to each other. The wiring 1094 is connected to the conductive portion 1078 shown in FIG. 184 (e), the wiring 1096 is connected to the conductive portion 1080 shown in FIG. 184 (e), and the wiring 1098 is connected to the conductive portion 1082 shown in FIG. 184 (e). The wiring 1100 is connected to the conductive portion 1084 shown in FIG. 184 (e), the wiring 1102 is connected to the conductive portion 1086 shown in FIG. 184 (e), and the wiring 1104 is connected to the conductive portion 1088 shown in FIG. 184 (e). Connected with.

  Next, the connection state between each conductive portion and each wiring will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 (g) and 184 (h), taking the connection state between the conductive portion 1078 and the wiring 1094 as an example. 184 (g) and 184 (h) show the conductive portion 1078 taken along the line AA of FIG. 184 (e). The conductive plate 1078a has a shape that extends obliquely upward from the lower case 1064. When the lower case 1064 is placed on the upper case 1062 by aligning the upper surface of the lower case 1064 and the lower surface of the upper case 1062, the wiring 1094 causes the other end of the conductive plate 1078a to move downward as shown in FIG. 184 (h). It contacts the conductive plate 1078a so as to be pushed in. In this manner, the conductive portion 1078 and the wiring 1094 are connected. The same applies to the connection state between the conductive portions 1080 to 1088 and the wirings 1096 to 1104.

  The conductive portion 1078 and the wiring 1094 are used to supply power to the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1080 and the wiring 1096 are used to supply power to a circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1082 and the wiring 1098 are used to connect the GND of the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the GND of the first sub-board 160. The conductive portion 1084 and the wiring 1100 are used to connect the GND of the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the GND of the first sub-board 160. The conductive portion 1086 and the wiring 1102 are used for transmitting various signals from the first sub-board 160 to the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1088 and the wiring 1104 are used for transmitting various signals from the first sub-board 160 to the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

  As an example of various signals, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is equipped with a microcomputer that controls an image control unit (for example, VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.), the first sub control unit 400 sends a signal to the microcomputer. A production command (command for designating production, production progress, still image, moving image, progress of image display scenario, etc.) can be given.

  Further, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may be equipped with image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.) in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. In this case, the image control provided from the microcomputer to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is possible. Image commands for the means (commands for designating the progress of a still image, a moving image, an image display scenario, etc.) can be given.

Further, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is not equipped with a microcomputer or an image control means for controlling the image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.), but these are mounted on the first sub board 160 or the moving unit 1036. 1032 may be equipped with an image drive control unit (a liquid crystal drive unit or the like). In this case, the image drive control unit (image drive control unit) provided from the image control unit provided in the first sub-control unit 400 or the moving unit 1036 ( Image data (for example, image data transmitted a predetermined number of times such as 30 times or 60 times per second, RGB information of each dot, etc.) for liquid crystal driving means).
(Example 9)
Next, the connection unit of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the moving unit 1036 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 185. In this embodiment, the connection unit 1110 is used as the connection unit.

  FIG. 185 (a) is an external perspective view of the connection unit 1110 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as seen from the front. The connection unit 1110 is arranged in the moving unit 1036 shown in FIG. 175 and is electrically connected to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

  First, the external configuration of the connection unit 1110 will be described with reference to FIG. The connection unit 1110 includes an upper case 1112 and a lower case 1114. The upper case 1112 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper and lower surfaces are square when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the front. The upper case 1112 has a shape that is longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the front. Note that in FIGS. 185 (a) and 185 (c), the upper case 1062 is cross-hatched in order to make it easy to distinguish the configurations.

  A lower case 1114 is arranged below the upper case 1112. The lower case 1114 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper and lower surfaces are square when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the front. The entire upper surface of the lower case 1114 is open. Further, the entire lower surface of the upper case 1112 is opened. The upper and lower surfaces of the lower case 1114 and the upper and lower surfaces of the upper case 1112 have the same size, and the lower case 1114 is arranged such that the upper surface thereof matches the lower surface of the upper case 1112. The lower case 1114 has a shorter vertical length than the upper case 1112 when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the front. Note that in FIGS. 185 (a) and 185 (b), the lower case 1114 is hatched so as to rise to the right in order to make it easy to distinguish the configurations. The upper case 1112 and the lower case 1114 are arranged on the moving unit 1036 side.

  A fixed-side connector 1116 is provided in the lower center of the side surface on the front side of the upper case 1112. In this embodiment, the other end of the harness, one end of which is connected to the fixed-side connector 1116, is connected to the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400. The harness and the first sub-board 160 may be connected via a relay board.

  A circular opening 1118 is provided in the center of the upper bottom surface of the upper case 1112. A circular rotation side case 1120 is arranged in the opening 1118. The rotation side case 1120 is arranged on the side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The rotating case 1120 is provided with a rotating connector 1022. In this embodiment, the other end of the harness, one end of which is connected to the rotation side connector 1122, is connected to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

  On the upper surface of the rotation side case 1112, cylindrical rotating body connecting shafts 1124, 1126, 1128 that are orthogonal to the upper surface and extend upward are fixed. The rotating body connecting shafts 1124, 1126, 1128 have the same length. The rotating body connecting shafts 1124 to 1128 are arranged at equal intervals in the rotating side case 1112. Bearings are attached to the tips of the rotating body connecting shafts 1124-1128, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is attached to the bearings. Further, connecting the tips of the rotating body connecting shafts 1124 to 1128 forms an equilateral triangle, and data transmitting / receiving units 1138 and 1144, which will be described later, are arranged at the center of gravity of the equilateral triangle.

  FIG. 185 (b) shows a state in which the inside of the lower case 1114 of the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the upper case 1112 side. The fixed connector 1116 is provided with 6 pins, and the lower case 1164 is provided with conductive parts 1130, 1132, 1134 and 1136 which are connected to 4 pins out of 6 pins of the fixed connector 1164, respectively. . Taking the conductive portion 1130 as an example, the conductive portion 1130 has an elongated conductive plate 1130a and a fixture 1130b for fixing one end of the conductive plate 1130a to the lower case 1114. The fixture 1130b fixes the conductive plate 1130a to the lower case 1114 so that the conductive plate 1130b does not rotate. An insulator is used for the fixed portion 1130b. The conductive parts 1132 to 1136 have the same configuration as the conductive part 1130.

  Further, in this embodiment, the conductive parts 1130 to 1136 are used for power supply and GND connection, and signal communication is performed by optical communication (wireless communication). A data transmission / reception unit 1138 for optical communication is arranged in the center of the lower case 1114. The data transmission / reception unit 1138 is connected to two of the six pins of the fixed connector 1114. In this embodiment, the data transmission / reception unit 1138 is used for signal transmission, but it can also receive signals.

  FIG. 185 (c) shows a state in which the lower surface side of the rotation side case 1120 of the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the lower case 1114 side. A rotation side substrate 1140 is arranged on the lower surface side of the rotation side case 1120. The rotation side substrate 1140 is a slip ring. The rotation side substrate 1140 has a circular shape and has a circular insulating portion 1142. A data transmitting / receiving unit 1144 is arranged at the center of the rotation side substrate 1140. The data transmission / reception unit 1144 is arranged to face the data transmission / reception unit 1138 so as to overlap the data transmission / reception unit 1138 when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from above. Signal transmission / reception is performed between the data transmission / reception unit 1138 and the data transmission / reception unit 1144 by optical communication. The data transmitting / receiving unit 1144 is connected to two of the six pins of the rotation side connector 1122. In addition, in the present embodiment, the data transmission / reception unit 1144 is used for signal reception, but signal transmission is also possible.

  Circular wirings 1146, 1148, 1150, 1152 are provided on the inner peripheral side of the insulating portion 1142 of the rotation-side substrate 1140. The wirings 1146, 1148, 1150, 1152 are arranged concentrically from the outer peripheral side in this order. Further, the insulating section 1142 and the wirings 1148 to 1152 are arranged concentrically, and the data transmitting / receiving section 1144 is provided at the center of the concentric circle. Note that in FIG. 185 (c), the insulating portion 1142 and the wiring portions 1146 to 1152 are hatched in a rightward upward direction so that the configurations can be easily distinguished.

  To the rotation side connector 1122 of the rotation side case 1120, 4 pins out of 6 pins and the wirings 1146 to 1152 are respectively connected. The wiring 1146 is connected to the conductive portion 1130 shown in FIG. 185 (b), the wiring 1148 is connected to the conductive portion 1132 shown in FIG. 185 (b), and the wiring 1150 is connected to the conductive portion 1134 shown in FIG. 185 (b). Then, the wiring 1152 is connected to the conductive portion 1136 shown in FIG. 185 (b).

  185 (d) and (e) show a connection state between the conductive portion 1130 and the wiring 1146. 185 (d) and (e) show the conductive portion 1130 taken along the line AA of FIG. 185 (b) in an extracted manner. The connection state between the conductive portion 1130 and the wiring 1146 is similar to the connection state between the conductive portion 1078 and the wiring 1094 shown in FIGS. 184 (e) and (f). The same applies to the connection state between the conductive portions 1132 to 1136 and the wirings 1148 to 1152.

  The conductive portion 1130 and the wiring 1146 are used to supply power to the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1132 and the wiring 1148 are used to supply power to the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1134 and the wiring 1150 are used to connect the GND of the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the GND of the first sub-board 160. The conductive portion 1136 and the wiring 1152 are used to connect the GND of the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the GND of the first sub-board 160.

  Further, as an example of various signals transmitted and received between the data transmission / reception units 1138 and 1144, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is equipped with a microcomputer for controlling image control means (for example, VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.) Is a production command (command for designating production, production progress, still image, moving image, progress of image display scenario, etc.) from the first sub-control unit 400 to the microcomputer.

  Further, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may be equipped with image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.) in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. In this case, the image control provided from the microcomputer to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is possible. Image commands for the means (commands for designating the progress of a still image, a moving image, an image display scenario, etc.) can be given.

  Further, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is not equipped with a microcomputer or an image control means for controlling the image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.), but these are mounted on the first sub board 160 or the moving unit 1036. 1032 may be equipped with an image drive control unit (a liquid crystal drive unit or the like). In this case, the image drive control unit (image drive control unit) provided from the image control unit provided in the first sub-control unit 400 or the moving unit 1036 ( Image data (for example, image data transmitted a predetermined number of times such as 30 times and 60 times per second, RGB information of each dot, etc.) for liquid crystal driving means).

  In this embodiment, the data communication between the data transmitting / receiving units 1138 and 1144 is optical wireless communication. Laser light is used for optical wireless communication. Data communication between the data transmitting / receiving units 1138 and 1144 may be radio wave communication instead of optical wireless communication. Further, LED light may be used instead of laser light for optical wireless communication.

  When both the data transmitting / receiving unit 1138 and the data transmitting / receiving unit 1144 are used for signal transmission / reception, the data transmitted from the data transmitting / receiving unit 1138 to the data transmitting / receiving unit 1144 is as described above, but the data transmitting / receiving unit 1144 transmits / receives data. For the unit 138, an ACK signal and a status signal from a control unit or the like provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 (for example, an image control unit, a microcomputer that controls the image control unit, an image driving unit (liquid crystal driving unit), or the like). , Information indicating the rotation angle of the rotating body (for example, a detection signal output when a sensor provided on the rotation side detects a detection piece provided on the fixed side, an output signal of an encoder provided on the rotation side, etc. ) May be transmitted.

  FIG. 185 (f) is an external perspective view of the connection unit 1110 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the first modification of the present embodiment, as viewed from the front. The connection unit 1110 of this modification has only the rotating body connecting shaft 1124 as the rotating body connecting shaft. The rotating body connecting shaft 1124 is arranged at the center (rotation center) of the rotating side case 1120.

FIG. 185 (g) is an external perspective view of the connection unit 1110 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the second modification of the present embodiment, as viewed from the front. The connection unit 1110 of this modified example has rotating body connecting shafts 1124 and 1126 as rotating body connecting shafts. A straight line connecting the tips of the rotating body connecting shaft 1124 and the rotating body connecting shaft 1126 passes through the center (rotation center) of the rotating side case 1120. Further, the rotating body connecting shaft 1124 and the rotating body connecting shaft 1126 are arranged at the same distance from the center.
(Example 10)
FIG. 186 shows Production Example 1 in Example 10 of the present embodiment. FIG. 186 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 186 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174 or the movable body 1002. Further, the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 of the pachinko machine 100 of Example 10 of the present embodiment and Examples 11 to 16 to be described later are different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174 in front of the movable body 1002. And is movable in the left-right direction on the front side of the movable body 1002.

  FIG. 186 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out. ing. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 186 (a), the number of holdings in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 186 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire body is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative pattern display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the sun can be visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1006a. Is becoming Moreover, a part of the image of the cloud displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the cloud is visible through the transparent portion 1006b.

  FIG. 186 (b) continuing from FIG. 186 (a) shows a state in which the number of holdings of special figure 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular hold icon is displayed, and it is informed that the number of hold of special figure 1 is one. Further, the black circular hold icon is a hold icon in a prefetching notice mode as shown in FIG. 161 (a).

  FIG. 186 (c) continuing from FIG. 186 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) is started. Special Figure 1 After the start of the floating game, the hold icon becomes a floating icon and a moving animation between the holding and floating icons that moves to the left is displayed.

  FIG. 186 (d) continuing from FIG. 186 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In and after FIG. 186, the variable display of the decorative design is represented by a downward thick white arrow. In the present embodiment, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started after the start of the hold / change icon movement animation.

  FIG. 186 (e) subsequent to FIG. 186 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach production is started from FIG. 186 (d).

  In FIG. 186 (f) continuing from FIG. 186 (e), the movable body 1008 starts the production operation from the initial position, and the left end of the movable body 1008 moves to the position located in the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. It shows the state. FIG. 186 (f) shows a state where the movable body 1008 shields the right half region of the screens of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 so that the player cannot easily see them. A part of the cloud image and the decorative pattern 208c displayed on the screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 is visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008a. Further, a part of the area on the right side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008b. Note that the yacht image and the cloud image displayed in the left half area of the screen of the sub display device 1030 may be shielded by the movable body 1008. The symbol variation display in which the image of the yacht or the image of the cloud may be shielded by the movable body 1008 is larger than the symbol variation display in which these images are not shielded by the movable body 1008. It may be configured to be easily displayed.

  FIG. 186 (g) shows the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmissive portion 1008b at the same timing as in FIG. 186 (f) in an extracted manner, so that the movable body 1008 can be easily distinguished from other configurations. For this reason, hatching is added. In addition, in FIGS. 186 (h) to (k) subsequent to FIG. 186 (g), the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transparent portion 1008b are extracted and shown, and the movable body 1008, the movable body 1008, and others The hatching is added to make it easier to distinguish from the configuration of. In FIG. 186 (g), the image of the seascape displayed on the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmissive unit 1008b. Although a cloud image is displayed below the transparent body 1008b behind the movable body 1008, the cloud image is not visually recognized because it overlaps with the movable body 1008. Further, in this embodiment, the image of the cloud is an image displayed as a notice image.

  FIG. 186 (h) subsequent to FIGS. 186 (f) and 186 (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has started the rotation operation. In FIG. 186 (h), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated counterclockwise by about 10 °.

  FIG. 186 (i) subsequent to FIG. 186 (h) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated counterclockwise by about 20 ° from the state shown in FIG. 186 (h). In addition, in FIG. 186 (i), in the state of FIGS. 186 (g) and 186 (h), an image of a cloud that was invisible due to overlapping with the movable body 1008 is changed by the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. It shows a state in which it is visible through 1008b. When the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates, the cloud image may be visually recognized through 1008b. In the variable pattern display, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 does not rotate, the cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b. It may be configured so that the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed, as compared with the non-variable symbol display. Further, in the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates counterclockwise by about 20 ° from the state shown in FIG. 186 (h), so that the entire cloud image can be visually confirmed through 1008b. In some cases, only part of the cloud image may be visible through 1008b.

  FIG. 186 (j) following FIG. 186 (i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by about 20 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 186 (i). In FIG. 186 (j), a part of the cloud image is visually recognized via 1008b. The rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in FIG. 186 (j) and the rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in FIG. 186 (h) are the same, but they are visually recognized through 1008b in the state shown in FIG. 186 (h). Since the display of moving the cloud image which has not been present upward with the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is performed, a part of the cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b in FIG. 186 (j). Further, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 186 (j), a part of the cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b, but the entire cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b. There may be a case where a moving display of the image is performed.

  FIG. 186 (k) subsequent to FIG. 186 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 10 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 186 (j) and returned to the initial posture. There is. In FIG. 186 (k), an image of a cloud which is not visually recognized through 1008b in the state shown in FIG. 186 (g) is visually recognized through 1008b. The rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in FIG. 186 (k) and the rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in FIG. 186 (g) are the same, but after the state shown in FIG. 186 is displayed by moving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 upward as the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated. Therefore, in FIG. 186 (k), it is visually recognized through 1008b. In addition, since the display for moving the cloud image upward is performed, the region of the cloud image visible through 1008b in FIG. 186 (k) is visible through 1008b in FIG. 186 (j). The area of the cloud image is larger than possible. Further, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 186 (k), a part of the cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b, but the entire cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b. The moving image of the cloud may be displayed.

  In FIG. 186 (l) continuing from FIG. 186 (k), after the movable body 1008 moves to the initial position, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c. , Fig. 1 shows a state in which it is informed that the result of the variable display is a big hit.

  FIG. 187 shows Example 2 of effect in Example 10 of the present embodiment. FIG. 187 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 187 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174 or the movable body 1002.

  187 (a) to (f) show the same states as FIGS. 186 (a) to (f). FIG. 187 (g) shows the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmissive portion 1008b at the same timing as in FIG. 187 (f) in an extracted manner, so that the movable body 1008 can be easily distinguished from other configurations. For this reason, hatching is added. In addition, in FIGS. 187 (h) to (k) subsequent to FIG. 187 (g), the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transparent portion 1008b are extracted and shown, and the movable body 1008, the movable body 1008, and others The hatching is added to make it easier to distinguish from the configuration. Further, FIG. 187 (g) shows the same state as FIG. 186 (g). 187 (h) subsequent to FIGS. 187 (f) and 187 (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has started the rotation operation, and shows the same state as FIG. 186 (h).

  187 (i) subsequent to FIG. 187 (h) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by about 20 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 187 (i). In FIG. 187 (i), unlike the state shown in FIG. 186 (i), the cloud image displayed behind the movable body 1008 is moved and displayed to the left as the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates. 1008b is not visible. Further, the cloud image may be erased as the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated, or may not be displayed from the beginning.

  FIG. 187 (j) subsequent to FIG. 187 (i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 20 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 187 (i). In FIG. 187 (j), unlike the state shown in FIG. 186 (j), a cloud image is not visually recognized.

  FIG. 187 (k) subsequent to FIG. 187 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has rotated clockwise about 10 ° from the state shown in FIG. 187 (j) and returned to the initial posture. There is. In FIG. 187 (k), unlike the state shown in FIG. 186 (k), the cloud image is not visually recognized.

  187 (l) following FIG. 187 (k), after the movable body 1008 is moved to the initial position, "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. ,,,,,,,,,,,.

  As described above, in the effect of the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 may perform a rotating operation behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008. Further, the player may be able to visually recognize the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 through the transparent portion of the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008. is there. Further, in the present embodiment, the image of the cloud displayed on the sub display device 1030, which is invisible by the movable body 1008 when the movable body 1008 moves to the left, is displayed as a notice image. In the present embodiment, the effect of allowing the player to visually recognize at least a part of the notice image through the transparent portion 1008b by the moving operation of the movable body 1008, and at least the notice image through the transparent portion 1008b. There is an effect when some images are not made visible to the player. In addition, when a part of the notice image is visually recognized by the player through the transparent portion 1008b of the movable body 1008 by the moving operation of the movable body 1008, the notice image of the notice image is displayed through the transparent portion 1008b of the movable body 1008. Compared to the case where at least a part of the images are not visually recognized by the player, the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed as the final result of the variable display of the symbols.

The images of clouds, balloons, and sun displayed on the screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 may be movable and displayed in some cases as the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008 moves. For example, the image of the cloud displayed in the upper center of the screen of the decorative pattern display device 206 moves so as to be invisible through the transparent portion 1008a when the movable body 1008 moves leftward from the initial position. The display may be performed, and the images of the balloon and the sun are moved so that they can be visually confirmed through the transparent portion 1008a and the transparent portion 1008b when the movable body 1008 moves leftward from the initial position. It may be displayed. When the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position, the image of clouds, balloons, or the sun can be visually recognized through the transmissive part 1008a or the transmissive part 1008b. It may be configured so that the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed, as compared with the symbol variation display in which the image of the cloud, balloon, or sun is invisible. When the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position, moving and displaying the image of the cloud, balloon, or sun makes the image of the cloud, balloon, or sun invisible through the transparent portion 1008a or the transparent portion 1008b. When the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position, the moving image of the cloud, the balloon, or the sun is not displayed, so that the variable display may not be displayed through the transparent portion 1008a or the transparent portion 1008b. It may be configured so that the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed, as compared with the symbol variable display in which the image of the balloon or the sun is still visible. Further, when the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position, an image of a cloud, a balloon, or the sun, which is visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008a or the transmissive portion 1008b, is displayed in a color different from that in normal time. There may be cases. For example, when the cloud image is normally displayed in white and is visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008a or the transmissive portion 1008b when the movable body 1008 moves leftward from the initial position, blue, green, or It may be displayed in red. The pattern variation display in which the image of the cloud may be displayed in a different color from the normal time is easier to be confirmed and displayed as the jackpot pattern mode, compared to the pattern variation display in which the cloud image is displayed in the color of the normal time. May be configured. Further, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may perform a rotating operation behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008. In this case, the effect shown in FIGS. 186 (g) to (k) or 187 (g) to (k) of this embodiment may be executed by the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the sub display device 1030. It may be.
(Example 11)
188 shows Example 1 of effect in Example 11 of the present embodiment. FIG. 188 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 188 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174 or the movable body 1002.

  FIG. 188 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out. ing. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 188 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 188 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire body is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative pattern display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the sun can be visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1006a. Is becoming Moreover, a part of the image of the cloud displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the cloud is visible through the transparent portion 1006b.

  FIG. 188 (b) following FIG. 188 (a) shows a state in which the number of holdings of special figure 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball enters the special figure 1 starting opening 230. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular hold icon is displayed, and it is informed that the number of hold of special figure 1 is one. Further, the black circular hold icon is a hold icon in a prefetching notice mode as shown in FIG. 161 (a).

  FIG. 188 (c) continuing from FIG. 188 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) is started. Special Figure 1 After the start of the floating game, the hold icon becomes a floating icon and a moving animation between the holding and floating icons that moves to the left is displayed.

  FIG. 188 (d) continuing from FIG. 188 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In and after FIG. 186, the variable display of the decorative design is represented by a downward thick white arrow. In the present embodiment, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started after the start of the hold / change icon movement animation.

  FIG. 188 (e) continuing from FIG. 188 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started from FIG. 188 (d).

  In FIG. 188 (f) continuing from FIG. 188 (e), the movable body 1008 starts the production operation from the initial position, and the left end of the movable body 1008 moves to the position located in the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. It shows the state. FIG. 188 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 shields the right half region of the screens of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it. A part of the cloud image and the decorative pattern 208c displayed on the screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 is visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008a. Further, a part of the area on the right side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008b. Note that the yacht image and the cloud image displayed in the left half area of the screen of the sub display device 1030 may be shielded by the movable body 1008. The symbol variation display in which the image of the yacht or the image of the cloud may be shielded by the movable body 1008 is compared with the symbol variation display in which these images are not shielded by the movable body 1008, and the big hit symbol mode is determined. It may be configured to be easily displayed.

  FIG. 188 (g) shows the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmissive portion 1008b at the same timing as in FIG. 188 (f) in an extracted manner, so that the movable body 1008 can be easily distinguished from other configurations. For this reason, hatching is added. In addition, in FIGS. 188 (h) to (k) subsequent to FIG. 188 (g), the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmissive portion 1008b are extracted and shown, and the movable body 1008, the movable body 1008, and others. The hatching is added to make it easier to distinguish from the configuration of. In FIG. 188 (g), the movable body 1008 shields the right part of the illumination unit 1014b, the lower end of the illumination unit 1014c, and a part of the illumination unit 1014d except for the right end thereof, and the illumination is performed via the transmission unit 1008b. The portion of the portion 1014c excluding the shielded portion and the right end portion of the illumination portion 1014d are visually recognized. Further, FIG. 188 (g) shows a state in which the illumination portions 1014a to 1014d visible to the player emit blue light. Further, in FIG. 188 (g), the image of the seascape displayed on the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmissive unit 1008b.

  FIG. 188 (h) subsequent to FIGS. 188 (f) and 188 (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has started the rotation operation. In FIG. 188 (h), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated counterclockwise by about 10 °. Further, in FIG. 188 (h), the area of the visible portion of the illumination unit 1014d is smaller than that in the state shown in FIG. 188 (g) via the transmissive portion 1008b. Further, in the unshielded region of the movable body 1008, the area of the visible portion of the illumination unit 1014d is increased.

  FIG. 188 (i) subsequent to FIG. 188 (h) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 35 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 188 (h). In FIG. 188 (i), the black portion of the illumination unit 1014d indicates the portion emitting blue light, and the white portion indicates the portion emitting red light. In FIG. 188 (i), in the area not shielded by the movable body 1008, a portion of the illumination unit 1014d that was not visually recognized by the player by overlapping with the movable body 1008 and emitted red light can be visually recognized by the player. Shows the state of becoming. When the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated, the portion that emits red light may be visible. In the variable display, the portion that emits red light may not be visible because the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 does not rotate. It may be configured such that the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed, as compared with.

  FIG. 188 (j) subsequent to FIG. 188 (i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 35 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 188 (i). Further, FIG. 188 (j) shows a state in which the area of the light emitting portion 1014d that emits red light is larger and the area of the portion that emits blue light is smaller. In FIG. 188 (j), a part of the cloud image serving as the advance notice image is visually recognized via 1008b. Further, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 186 (j), a part of the cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b, but the entire cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b. The image may be displayed in some cases. Due to the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, at least a part of the image of the cloud as the notice image may be visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008b. It may be configured such that the big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed, as compared with the symbol variable display in which at least a part of is not visually recognized.

  FIG. 188 (k) following FIG. 188 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has rotated clockwise about 10 ° from the state shown in FIG. 188 (j) and has returned to the initial posture. There is. Further, FIG. 188 (k) shows a state in which the area of the light emitting portion 1014d that emits red light is further increased, and the illumination portion 1014d emits all red light. In FIG. 188 (k), a part of the cloud image serving as the advance notice image is visually recognized via 1008b. In addition, since the display for moving the cloud image upward is performed, the region of the cloud image visible through 1008b in FIG. 188 (k) is visually recognized through 1008b in FIG. 188 (j). The area of the cloud image is larger than possible. Further, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 188 (k), a part of the cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b, but the entire cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b. The moving image of the cloud may be displayed.

  In FIG. 188 (l) continuing from FIG. 188 (k), after the movable body 1008 moves to the initial position, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. , Fig. 1 shows a state in which it is informed that the result of the variable display is a big hit.

  189 shows Example 2 of production in Example 11 of the present embodiment. FIG. 189 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 189 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174 or the movable body 1002.

  189 (a)-(f) show the same states as in FIGS. 188 (a)-(f). FIG. 189 (g) shows the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmissive portion 1008b extracted at the same timing as in FIG. 189 (f), and the movable body 1008 is easily distinguishable from other configurations. For this reason, hatching is added. In addition, in FIGS. 189 (h) to (k) subsequent to FIG. 189 (g), the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transparent portion 1008b are extracted and shown, and the movable body 1008, the movable body 1008, and others The hatching is added to make it easier to distinguish from the configuration of. 189 (g) shows the same state as FIG. 188 (g). 189 (h) following FIG. 189 (f) and (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has started the rotation operation, and shows the same state as FIG. 188 (h).

  189 (i) subsequent to FIG. 189 (h) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by about 20 ° in the clockwise direction from the state shown in FIG. 189 (i). Also, in FIG. 189 (i), unlike the state shown in FIG. 188 (i), since the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is small, it overlaps with the movable body 1008, so that the illuminating portion 1014d which is not visible to the player is red. It shows a state where the light emitting portion is not visually recognized.

  FIG. 189 (j) subsequent to FIG. 189 (i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 20 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 189 (i). In FIG. 189 (j), unlike the state shown in FIG. 188 (j), since the area of the portion of the illumination unit 1014d that emits red light is not large, the portion of the illumination unit 1014d that emits red light is visible. Not showing the state. Also, in FIG. 189 (j), unlike the state shown in FIG. 188 (j), a state in which the cloud image as the advance notice image is not visually recognized via 1008b is shown.

  FIG. 189 (k) subsequent to FIG. 189 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 10 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 189 (j) and returned to the initial posture. There is. In FIG. 189 (k), unlike the state shown in FIG. 188 (j), since the area of the portion of the illumination unit 1014d that emits red light is not large, the portion of the illumination unit 1014d that emits red light is not visible. It shows the state. Also, in FIG. 189 (k), unlike the state shown in FIG. 188 (j), a state in which the cloud image as the advance notice image is not visually recognized via 1008b is shown.

  189 (l) following FIG. 189 (k), after the movable body 1008 returns to the initial position, "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c. ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,;

As described above, in the effect of this embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 may perform a rotating operation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008, and the rotating operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 causes the illumination unit to rotate. The light emission mode of 1014d may change. In the present embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated clockwise by up to 45 ° behind the movable body 1008, an effect of changing the light emission mode of the illumination unit 1014d is performed, and the sub liquid crystal is behind the movable body 1008. When the unit 1032 is rotated clockwise by a maximum of 30 °, an effect is produced in which the lighting mode of the illumination unit 1014d does not change. By the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 behind the movable body 1008, the symbol variable display in which the light emission mode of the illumination unit 1014d may change is compared with the symbol variable display in which the light emission mode of the illumination unit 1014d does not change. Thus, the jackpot pattern mode may be configured to be easily confirmed and displayed.
(Example 12)
FIG. 190 shows an example of effects in Example 12 of the present embodiment. FIG. 190 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 190 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174.

  FIG. 190 (a) shows a state where the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out. ing. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 190 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 190 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1010, 1012 are located at the initial position. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire body is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative pattern display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the sun can be visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1006a. Is becoming Moreover, a part of the image of the cloud displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the cloud is visible through the transparent portion 1006b.

  FIG. 190 (b) continuing from FIG. 190 (a) shows a state in which the number of holdings of special figure 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular hold icon is displayed, and it is informed that the number of hold of special figure 1 is one. Further, the black circular hold icon is a hold icon in a prefetching notice mode as shown in FIG. 161 (a).

  FIG. 190 (c) continuing from FIG. 190 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) is started. Special Figure 1 After the start of the floating game, the hold icon becomes a floating icon and a moving animation between the holding and floating icons that moves to the left is displayed.

  FIG. 190 (d) subsequent to FIG. 190 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  FIG. 190 (e) continuing from FIG. 190 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach production is started from FIG. 190 (d).

  In FIG. 190 (f) continuing from FIG. 190 (e), the movable body 1008 starts the effect operation from the state shown in FIG. It shows a state in which it has been moved to a position located at the left end. FIG. 190 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 shields the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to see it. Further, the cloud image displayed on the screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 and a part of the decorative pattern 208b are visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008a. In addition, the display area of the sub display device 1030 and the illumination unit 1014d are visually recognized through the transmissive unit 1008b. Further, the image of the yacht and the image of the cloud displayed in the left half area of the screen of the sub display device 1030 are visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008b.

  FIG. 190 (g) continuing from FIG. 190 (f) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is moved upward from the initial position behind the movable body 1008 and hidden by the movable body 1008. There is. Further, in FIG. 190 (g), a sub-liquid crystal unit 1032 behind the movable body 1008 displays a cloud image as a notice image. Part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is a variable display in which the effect of hiding behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008 has been performed, and a variable display in which the effect of hiding behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008 is not performed. In comparison, the jackpot pattern mode may be configured to be easily displayed in a confirmed manner.

  FIG. 190 (h) continued from FIG. 190 (g), behind the movable body 1008, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves downward from the state of FIG. , Shows a state in which the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized. FIG. 190 (h) shows a state in which the cloud image as the notice image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmissive unit 1008b.

  FIG. 190 (i) subsequent to FIG. 190 (h) shows a state where the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state of FIG. 190 (h). FIG. 190 (i) shows a state in which a cloud image as a notice image displayed on the right side of the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmissive unit 1008b.

  FIG. 190 (j) following FIG. 190 (i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has moved upward from the state of FIG. 190 (i) behind the movable body 1008. FIG. 190 (j) shows a state in which the cloud image as the advance notice image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 which has been visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008b cannot be visually recognized.

  FIG. 190 (k) continuing from FIG. 190 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 45 ° clockwise from the initial posture behind the movable body 1008. FIG. 190 (k) shows a state in which a cloud image as a notice image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmissive unit 1008b. Further, in FIG. 190 (k), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated in a state where the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is hidden behind the movable body 1008, so that the light is transmitted through the transmissive portion 1008b. The amount of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 that is visually recognized as a change is changing. Further, the image of the cloud is moved and displayed upward from the state shown in FIG. 190 (i).

  In FIG. 190 (l) continued from FIG. 190 (k), behind the movable body 1008, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 rotates 45 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 190 (k) (total 90 °). It has been rotated). FIG. 190 (l) shows a state in which the cloud image as the notice image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmissive unit 1008b. In addition, in FIG. 190 (l), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated while the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is hidden behind the movable body 1008, so that the light is transmitted through the transmissive portion 1008b. The amount of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 that is visually recognized as a change is changing.

  In FIG. 190 (m) continued from FIG. 190 (l), the sub-liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 110 ° clockwise (200 ° in total) from the state shown in FIG. 190 (l) behind the movable body 1008. It has been rotated). FIG. 190 (m) shows a state in which the cloud image as the notice image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 cannot be visually recognized through the transmissive unit 1008b.

  In FIG. 190 (n) continuing from FIG. 190 (m), behind the movable body 1008, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 rotates 160 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 190 (l) (total 360 °). It has rotated and has returned to the initial posture. FIG. 190 (m) shows a state in which the cloud image as the notice image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 cannot be visually recognized through the transmissive unit 1008b.

  In FIG. 190 (o) continued from FIG. 190 (n), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is moved downward from the state shown in FIG. 190 (o) behind the movable body 1008 and returned to the initial position. It shows the state of being done. FIG. 190 (o) shows a state in which the cloud image as the notice image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmissive unit 1008 b.

  FIG. 190 (p) subsequent to FIG. 190 (o) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 190 (o) and returned to the initial position. FIG. 190 (p) shows a state in which the effect operation of each movable body (movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012) is completed.

  FIG. 190 (q) continuing from FIG. 190 (p) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variation game is a big hit. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c to notify that the result of the special figure 1 variable display is a big hit.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates behind the movable body 1008, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 visually recognized by the player via the transmissive portion 1008b of the movable body 1008. In some cases, the area of the image (for example, the image of the cloud as the notice image) is changed. The symbol variation display in which the area may change may be configured such that the big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the area may not change. Further, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may perform the moving and rotating operations behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the effect on the sub display device 1030 of this embodiment may be executed on the decorative symbol display device 208.
(Example 13)
FIG. 191 shows an example of effects in Example 13 of the present embodiment. FIG. 191 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 191 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174.

  FIG. 191 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 191 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 191 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire body is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative pattern display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the sun can be visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1006a. Is becoming Moreover, a part of the image of the cloud displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the cloud is visible through the transparent portion 1006b. Moreover, a part of the image of the balloon displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1002, and the other part of the image of the balloon is visible. Further, the sub display device 1030 displays an image of the yacht, an image of the cloud, and an image of the seascape.

  FIG. 191 (b) continuing from FIG. 191 (a) shows a state in which the number of holdings of special figure 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball enters the special figure 1 starting opening 230. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular hold icon is displayed, and it is informed that the number of hold of special figure 1 is one. Further, the black circular hold icon is a hold icon in a prefetching notice mode as shown in FIG. 161 (a). Further, the same image as the balloon image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed on the sub display device 1030. The design variable display in which the same character image may be displayed at the same time on the decorative design display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is a design in which the same character image is not displayed on the decoration design display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 at the same time. It may be configured such that the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than the variable display.

  FIG. 191 (c) continuing from FIG. 191 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) is started. Special Figure 1 After the start of the floating game, the hold icon becomes a floating icon and a moving animation between the holding and floating icons that moves to the left is displayed.

  FIG. 191 (d) subsequent to FIG. 191 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  FIG. 191 (e) continuing from FIG. 191 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a, 208c. The reach effect is started from FIG. 191 (d).

  FIG. 191 (f) following FIG. 191 (e) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 starts the production operation from the initial position and the left part of the movable body 1008 moves to a position where the left part of the screen of the sub display device 1030 is hidden. Is shown. FIG. 191 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 shields the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player cannot easily see it. Further, the cloud image displayed on the screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 and a part of the decorative pattern 208b are visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008a. Further, the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008b. FIG. 191 (f) shows a state where the image of the balloon displayed on the left part of the screen of the sub display device 1030 is hidden by the movable body 1008 and cannot be visually recognized. Further, the image of the yacht displayed on the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via 1008b.

  In FIG. 191 (g) continuing from FIG. 191 (f), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position behind the movable body 1008 and is hidden by the movable body 1008. The image of the balloon displayed in and the image of the yacht are not visible. Part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is a variable display in which the effect of hiding behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008 has been performed, and a variable display in which the effect of hiding behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008 is not performed. In comparison, the jackpot pattern mode may be configured to be easily displayed in a confirmed manner.

  191 (h) subsequent to FIG. 191 (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 191 (g) behind the movable body 1008. There is. In FIG. 191 (h), the image of the balloon displayed on the sub display device 1030 is visible through the transmissive portion 1008b, and the image of the yacht is invisible because it overlaps with the movable body 1008.

  FIG. 191 (i) subsequent to FIG. 191 (h) shows a state where the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state of FIG. 191 (h). Further, FIG. 191 (i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 240 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 191 (h) behind the movable body 1008 (300 ° in total). ing. Further, in FIG. 191 (i), an image of a part of the balloon displayed on the sub display device 1030 can be visually recognized in a region not shielded by the movable body 1008, and an image of the yacht displayed on the sub display device 1030. Indicates a state in which the movable body 1008 cannot be visually recognized because it overlaps with the movable body 1008.

  FIG. 191 (j) subsequent to FIG. 191 (i) shows a state where the movable body 1008 has moved leftward from the state of FIG. 191 (i). 191 (j) shows an operation in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise (a total of 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 191 (g) behind the movable body 1008. Both of the operations of moving to the lower initial position are performed in parallel, and the state in which the initial posture and the initial position are restored is shown. Further, FIG. 191 (j) shows a state in which both the balloon image and the yacht image displayed on the sub display device 1030 are deleted.

  FIG. 191 (k) subsequent to FIG. 191 (j) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 191 (j) and returned to the initial position.

  FIG. 191 (l) continuing from FIG. 191 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variation game is out of alignment. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable display is off.

As described above, in the effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a plurality of character images may be displayed on the sub display device 1030. The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is configured such that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can move and rotate in the vertical direction at a position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves to a certain position behind the movable body 1008, so that all the characters of the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 are displayed. Of the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 when the image is configured to be invisible to the player and when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves to a position behind the movable body 1008. In some cases, only one character image is configured to be visible to the player. In addition, the symbol variable display when the one character image that can be visually recognized at that time is a specific character image (for example, a notice image) is that the one character image that can be visually recognized at that time is specified. It may be configured such that the big hit symbol pattern is more likely to be confirmed and displayed, as compared with the variable pattern display when the character image is not. In addition, one of the character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 indicates that both movable bodies 1006 and 1008 perform a moving operation. Therefore, it may be visible. One of the character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 can be visually recognized by performing a moving operation of both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. The symbol variation display in this case is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed, as compared with the symbol variation display in the case where both the movable bodies 1006 and 1008 cannot be visually recognized even if the movable bodies perform a moving operation. It may have been done. In addition, one of the character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is moved by the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. The symbol variation display when visually recognizable is easier to confirm the big hit symbol mode than the symbol variation display when both movable bodies 1006 and 1008 cannot be visually recognized because the movable bodies do not perform the moving operation. May be configured. Further, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may perform vertical movement and rotation operations behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the effect on the sub display device 1030 of this embodiment may be executed on the decorative symbol display device 208.
(Example 14)
FIG. 192 shows an example of effects in Example 14 of the present embodiment. FIG. 192 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 192 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174. Unlike the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174, the pachinko machine 100 of Example 14 of the present embodiment and Examples 15 and 16 which will be described later have a change icon and a hold icon displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 1030. .

  FIG. 192 (a) shows a state where the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 192 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 192 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire body is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative pattern display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the sun can be visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1006a. Is becoming Moreover, a part of the image of the cloud displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the cloud is visible through the transparent portion 1006b. Moreover, a part of the image of the balloon displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1002, and the other part of the image of the balloon is visible. Further, the sub display device 1030 displays an image of the yacht, an image of the cloud, and an image of the seascape.

  FIG. 192 (b) continuing from FIG. 192 (a) shows a state in which the number of holdings of special figure 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230. ing. On the sub display device 1030, a white circular normal hold icon is displayed, and it is informed that the number of holds in special figure 1 is one. Further, the same image as the balloon image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed on the sub display device 1030. The design variable display in which the same character image may be displayed at the same time on the decorative design display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is a design in which the same character image is not displayed on the decoration design display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 at the same time. It may be configured such that the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than the variable display.

  FIG. 192 (c) continuing from FIG. 192 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) is started. Further, in the sub-display device 1030, after the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the hold icon becomes a variation icon, and a movement animation between the hold / variation icons that moves to the left is started. Further, the sub-display device 1030 shows a state in which the image of the balloon is erased.

  FIG. 192 (d) subsequent to FIG. 192 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of decorative symbols is started. In addition, FIG. 192 (d) shows a state in which, on the sub-display device 1030, the hold icon becomes the change icon after the special game 1 change game is started and moves to the left. ing.

  FIG. 192 (e) subsequent to FIG. 192 (d) shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started from FIG. 192 (d).

  In FIG. 192 (f) which continues from FIG. 192 (e), the movable body 1008 starts the effect operation from the initial position, and the left part of the movable body 1008 is in a position where the fluctuation icon on the left part of the screen of the sub display device 1030 is hidden. The figure shows the moved state. FIG. 192 (f) shows a state in which the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shielded by the movable body 1008 so that it is difficult for the player to see it. Further, the cloud image displayed on the screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 and a part of the decorative pattern 208b are visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008a. Further, the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008b. FIG. 192 (f) shows a state in which the variation icon displayed on the left side of the screen of the sub display device 1030 and the movable body 1008 overlap each other, and thus the variation icon cannot be visually recognized. Further, the image of the yacht displayed on the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via 1008b.

  192 (g) following FIG. 192 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved leftward from the state of FIG. 192 (f). Further, in FIG. 192 (g), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is moved upward from the initial position behind the movable body 1008, hidden by the movable body 1008, and displayed on the sub display device 1030. The change icon and the image of the yacht are invisible. Part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is a variable display in which the effect of hiding behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008 has been performed, and a variable display in which the effect of hiding behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008 is not performed. In comparison, the jackpot pattern mode may be configured to be easily displayed in a confirmed manner.

  192 (h) subsequent to FIG. 192 (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 192 (g) behind the movable body 1008. There is. Further, in FIG. 192 (h), an image of the balloon is displayed on the sub display device 1030, and the image of the balloon is visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008b. Further, the image of the yacht displayed on the sub display device 1030 cannot be visually recognized because it overlaps with the movable body 1008. Further, in FIG. 192 (h), the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 causes the change icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 to change from the normal mode (white circle) to the advance mode (white diamond). , Shows a state in which the change icon of the advance notice mode is visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008b. In the effect of this embodiment, the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may cause the player to visually recognize, through the transmissive portion 1008b, that the variable icon in the normal mode changes to the notification mode. In some cases, the player may visually recognize the change icon in the normal mode after the change icon is changed to the notice mode.

  FIG. 192 (i) subsequent to FIG. 192 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has rotated counterclockwise by 200 ° (a total of 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 192 (h) and has returned to the initial posture. There is. Further, FIG. 192 (i) shows a state where the image of the balloon, the image of the yacht, and the change icon of the advance notice displayed on the sub display device 1030 overlap with the movable body 1008 and cannot be visually recognized.

  FIG. 192 (j) subsequent to FIG. 192 (i) shows a state where the movable body 1008 has moved downward from the state of FIG. 192 (i) and has returned to the initial position. In addition, in FIG. 192 (j), the change icon in the notice mode displayed on the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008b. In addition, in FIG. 192 (j), the image of the yacht and the image of the balloon are invisible on the sub display device 1030.

  192 (k) following FIG. 192 (j) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 192 (j) and returned to the initial position.

  FIG. 192 (l) continuing from FIG. 192 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variation game is a big hit. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c to notify that the result of the special figure 1 variable display is a big hit.

  As described above, in the effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 may display a plurality of character images, a variation icon, and a hold icon. The pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment is configured such that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can move and rotate in the vertical direction at a position behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves to a certain position behind the movable body 1008, so that all the characters of the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 are displayed. The image, the variable icon, and the hold icon are displayed on the sub display device 1030 when the player cannot see them, and when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is located at a position behind the movable body 1008. In some cases, only one of the plurality of character images and the variable icon are configured to be visible to the player. In addition, there is a case where one of the character images that can be visually recognized at that time is a specific character image (for example, a notice image), or the change icon is a notice mode. , It is configured such that the big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed, as compared with the symbol variable display in the case where the one character image that has become visible at that time is not a specific character image and the variable icon is not the notice mode. May be. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves to a position behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008, so that all the character images among the plurality of character images, the variation icon, And the hold icon may be configured to be visible to the player, or the change icon and the hold icon may be configured to be visible to the player. Only the player may be able to see only the hold icon, or only the hold icon may be seen by the player.

Further, one of the character images and the variation icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 at the position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 indicates that the movable body of both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 moves. It may be possible to be visually recognized by performing. One of the character images and the variation icon displayed on the sub-display device 1030 at the position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is such that both movable bodies 1006 and 1008 perform a moving operation. The symbol variation display when visible is easy to confirm the big hit symbol mode as compared with the symbol variation display when the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 cannot be visually recognized even if the movable body performs a moving operation. It may be configured as follows. Further, one of the character images and the variation icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 indicates that the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 both move. The symbol variation display that may be visually recognized by performing is compared with the symbol variation display when the movable body of both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 cannot be visually recognized because the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 do not move. It may be configured to be easily displayed. Further, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may perform vertical movement and rotation operations behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the effect on the sub display device 1030 of this embodiment may be executed on the decorative symbol display device 208.
(Example 15)
FIG. 193 shows an example of effects in Example 15 of the present embodiment. FIG. 193 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 193 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174.

  FIG. 193 (a) shows a state where the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 193 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 193 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire body is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative pattern display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the sun can be visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1006a. Is becoming Moreover, a part of the image of the cloud displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the cloud is visible through the transparent portion 1006b. Moreover, a part of the image of the balloon displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1002, and the other part of the image of the balloon is visible. Further, the sub display device 1030 displays an image of the yacht, an image of the cloud, and an image of the seascape.

  FIG. 193 (b) continuing from FIG. 193 (a) shows a state in which the number of holdings of special figure 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball enters the special figure 1 starting opening 230. ing. On the sub display device 1030, a white circular normal hold icon is displayed, and it is informed that the number of holds in special figure 1 is one. Further, the same image as the balloon image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed on the sub display device 1030. The design variable display in which the same character image may be displayed at the same time on the decorative design display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is a design in which the same character image is not displayed on the decoration design display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 at the same time. It may be configured such that the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than the variable display.

  FIG. 193 (c) continuing from FIG. 193 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) is started. Further, in the sub-display device 1030, after the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the hold icon becomes a variation icon, and a movement animation between the hold / variation icons that moves to the left is started. Further, the sub-display device 1030 shows a state in which the image of the balloon is erased.

  FIG. 193 (d) subsequent to FIG. 193 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In addition, FIG. 193 (d) shows a state in which, on the sub-display device 1030, the hold icon becomes the change icon after the special game 1 change game is started, and the move animation between the hold / change icons is moved to the left end. ing. In addition, FIG. 193 (d) shows a state in which the number of holdings in special figure 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. On the sub display device 1030, a white circular normal hold icon is displayed, and it is informed that the number of holds in special figure 1 is one.

  FIG. 193 (e) subsequent to FIG. 193 (d) shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 193 (d).

  In FIG. 193 (f) that continues from FIG. 193 (e), the movable body 1008 starts the effect operation from the initial position, and the left part of the movable body 1008 moves to the position where the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 is hidden. It shows the state of being done. FIG. 193 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 shields the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to see it. In addition, the cloud image displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a part of the decorative symbols 208b and 208c are visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008a. Further, the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008b. FIG. 193 (f) shows a state in which the hold icon cannot be visually recognized because the hold icon displayed on the left part of the screen of the sub display device 1030 and the movable body 1008 overlap each other. Further, the variable icon displayed on the sub display device is visually recognized in the area that is not shielded by the movable body 1008.

  FIG. 193 (g) subsequent to FIG. 193 (f) shows a state where the movable body 1008 has moved leftward from the state of FIG. 193 (f). Further, in FIG. 193 (g), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is moved upward from the initial position behind the movable body 1008, hidden by the movable body 1008, and displayed on the sub display device 1030. The change icon, the hold icon, and the yacht image are invisible. The variable pattern display in which a part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is hidden behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008 is compared with the variable pattern display in which no effect is hidden behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008. Then, the jackpot pattern mode may be configured to be easily confirmed and displayed.

  FIG. 193 (h) following FIG. 193 (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 192 (g) behind the movable body 1008. There is. Further, in FIG. 193 (h), the holding operation displayed on the sub display device 1030 is changed from the normal mode (white circle) to the pre-reading notice mode (white diamond) by rotating the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. However, the change icon in the normal mode and the hold icon in the pre-reading notice mode are visually recognized through the transmissive unit 1008b. In the effect of this embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may be rotated to cause the player to visually recognize, through the transmissive portion 1008b, that the hold icon in the normal mode changes to the prefetching notice mode. However, the player may visually recognize the hold icon in the normal mode after the change to the pre-reading notice mode.

  193 (i) subsequent to FIG. 193 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 rotates counterclockwise by 300 ° (a total of 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 193 (h) and returns to the initial posture. There is. Further, in FIG. 193 (i), the image of the balloon displayed on the sub display device 1030, the image of the yacht, the variation icon in the normal mode, and the hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode are overlapped with the movable body 1008 and are visually recognized. It shows that it cannot be done.

  FIG. 193 (j) subsequent to FIG. 193 (i) shows a state where the movable body 1008 has moved downward from the state of FIG. 193 (i) and returned to the initial position. In addition, FIG. 193 (j) shows a state in which the normal mode change icon and the notice mode change icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 are visually recognized through the transmissive unit 1008b. Also, in FIG. 193 (j), the image of the yacht is invisible on the sub display device 1030.

  FIG. 193 (k) subsequent to FIG. 193 (j) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 193 (j) and returned to the initial position.

  FIG. 193 (l) subsequent to FIG. 193 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variation game is out of alignment. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable display is off.

  FIG. 193 (m) continuing from FIG. 193 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) is started. Further, in the sub-display device 1030, after the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the hold icon becomes a variation icon, and a movement animation between the hold / variation icons that moves to the left is started.

  FIG. 193 (n) continuing from FIG. 193 (m) shows a moving animation between the holding / changing icons in which the holding icon becomes a changing icon and moves to the left after the start of the special figure 1 changing game on the sub display device 1030. It shows the finished state. Further, FIG. 193 (n) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. A predetermined reach effect is started after FIG. 193 (n).

  193 (o) continuing from FIG. 193 (n) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished after the predetermined reach effect is finished. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variation game is a big hit. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c to notify that the result of the special figure 1 variable display is a big hit. In this way, the symbol variation started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon having the look-ahead notice mode is finally more than the symbol variation started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon having the normal mode. It may be configured such that the jackpot pattern mode is easily confirmed and displayed.

  As described above, in the effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 may display a plurality of character images, a variation icon, and a hold icon. The pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment is configured such that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can move and rotate in the vertical direction at a position behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves to a certain position behind the movable body 1008, so that all the characters among the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 are displayed. The image, the variable icon, and the hold icon are displayed on the sub display device 1030 when the player cannot see them, and when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is located at a position behind the movable body 1008. In some cases, both the floating icon and the hold icon may be visible to the player. In addition, when the hold icon visually recognizable at that time is in the pre-reading notice mode, the hold corresponding to the hold icon is compared with the case where the hold icon visually recognizable at that time is not the pre-reading notice mode. There may be a case where the jackpot pattern mode is likely to be confirmed and displayed in the special figure variation game which is started by being digested. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves to a position behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008, so that all the character images among the plurality of character images, the variation icon, And the hold icon may be configured to be visible to the player, or the change icon and the hold icon may be configured to be visible to the player. Only the player may be able to see only the hold icon, or only the hold icon may be seen by the player.

In addition, the change icon and the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 at the position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 perform the moving operation of both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. Therefore, it may be visible. The change icon and the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 at the position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 are visually recognized by the moving operation of both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. The symbol variation display that may be possible is easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol mode, compared with the symbol variation display that is not visible even when both the movable bodies 1006 and 1008 perform a moving operation. It may be configured as follows. When the pre-reading notice is executed, the visible part of the variable icon or the hold icon may differ before and after the moveable object moves. It may be configured such that the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching, as compared with the case where the prefetching notice without is executed. In addition, the change icon and the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 at the position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 perform the moving operation of both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. As a result, the symbol variation display that can be visually recognized is determined to be a big hit symbol mode, compared with the symbol variation display when the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 cannot be visually recognized because they do not perform the moving operation. It may be configured to be easily displayed. Further, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may perform vertical movement and rotation operations behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the effect on the sub display device 1030 of this embodiment may be executed on the decorative symbol display device 208.
(Example 16)
FIG. 194 shows an example of effects in Example 16 of the present embodiment. FIG. 194 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 194 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174.

  FIG. 194 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 194 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 194 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire body is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative pattern display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the sun can be visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1006a. Is becoming Moreover, a part of the image of the cloud displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the cloud is visible through the transparent portion 1006b. Moreover, a part of the image of the balloon displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1002, and the other part of the image of the balloon is visible. Further, the sub display device 1030 displays an image of the yacht, an image of the cloud, and an image of the seascape.

  FIG. 194 (b) continuing from FIG. 194 (a) shows a state in which the number of holdings of special figure 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230. ing. On the sub display device 1030, a white circular normal hold icon is displayed, and it is informed that the number of holds in special figure 1 is one. Further, the same image as the balloon image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed on the sub display device 1030. The symbol variable display in which the same character image may be displayed simultaneously on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is a symbol variable display when the same character image is not simultaneously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. It may be configured such that the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed as compared with.

  FIG. 194 (c) continuing from FIG. 194 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) is started. Further, in the sub-display device 1030, after the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the hold icon becomes a variation icon, and a movement animation between the hold / variation icons that moves to the left is started. Further, the sub-display device 1030 shows a state in which the image of the balloon is erased.

  FIG. 194 (d) continuing from FIG. 194 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In addition, FIG. 194 (d) shows a state in which, on the sub-display device 1030, the hold icon becomes a change icon and moves to the left after the start of the special figure 1 change game, and the movement animation between the hold and change icons ends. ing.

  194 (e) continuing from FIG. 194 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a, 208c. The reach effect is started from FIG. 194 (d).

  FIG. 194 (f) continuing from FIG. 194 (e) shows a state in which the number of holdings of special figure 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230. ing. On the sub display device 1030, a white circular normal hold icon is displayed, and it is informed that the number of holds in special figure 1 is one. In addition, in FIG. 194 (f), the movable body 1008 starts the effect operation from the initial position, and the change icon and the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008b of the movable body 1008. The state has been moved to the position. Further, FIG. 194 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 shields the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to see it. In addition, the cloud image displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a part of the decorative symbols 208b and 208c are visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008a. Further, the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008b.

  194 (g) continuing from FIG. 194 (f), behind the movable body 1008, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position and is hidden by the movable body 1008, and the sub display device 1030. The variable icon, the hold icon, and the yacht image displayed in are not visible. Part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is a variable display in which the effect of hiding behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008 has been performed, and a variable display in which the effect of hiding behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008 is not performed. In comparison, the jackpot pattern mode may be configured to be easily displayed in a confirmed manner.

  FIG. 194 (h) following FIG. 194 (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 192 (g) behind the movable body 1008. There is. Further, in FIG. 193 (h), the holding operation displayed on the sub display device 1030 is changed from the normal mode (white circle) to the pre-reading notice mode (white diamond) by rotating the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. However, the change icon in the normal mode and the hold icon in the pre-reading notice mode are visually recognized through the transmissive unit 1008b. In the effect of this embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may be rotated to cause the player to visually recognize, through the transmissive portion 1008b, that the hold icon in the normal mode changes to the prefetching notice mode. However, the player may visually recognize the hold icon in the normal mode after the change to the pre-reading notice mode.

  FIG. 194 (i) subsequent to FIG. 194 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has rotated counterclockwise by 300 ° (a total of 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 194 (h) and has returned to the initial posture. There is. Further, FIG. 194 (i) shows a state in which the image of the yacht displayed on the sub display device 1030, the change icon in the normal mode, and the hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode overlap with the movable body 1008 and cannot be visually recognized. ing.

  FIG. 194 (j) subsequent to FIG. 194 (i) shows a state where the movable body 1008 has moved downward from the state of FIG. 194 (i) and has returned to the initial position. Also, on the sub display device 1030, an image simulating a button, a character string image of “push” above it, and a meter image that displays the effective period of pressing the button are displayed overlapping the hold icon. There is. In addition, the pre-reading advance notice mode may change to a button-like image or the like. Further, FIG. 194 (j) shows a state in which a variable icon, an image simulating a button, and a character string image of “push” above the variable icon are visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008b, and the meter image is the movable body 1008. It is hidden and hidden from view. In addition, in FIG. 194 (j), the image of the yacht is invisible on the sub display device 1030.

  In FIG. 194 (k) continuing from FIG. 194 (j), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the state of FIG. 194 (j), and the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008a. This shows a possible state. Further, FIG. 194 (k) shows a state in which the character string image of “push” displayed on the sub display device 1030 can be visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008a. Further, the variable icon, the button-like image, and the meter image displayed on the sub display device 1030 are hidden by the movable body 1008 and thus are invisible. The symbol variation display in which the screen of the sub display device 1030 may be visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008a is larger than the symbol variation display in which the screen of the sub display device 1030 is not visually recognized. It may be configured so as to be easily confirmed and displayed.

  FIG. 194 (l) subsequent to FIG. 194 (k) shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Further, on the sub display device 1030, the character string image of “push” is erased based on the player's pressing of the chance button 136, and the image imitating the button and the effect image are displayed in the periphery thereof. Further, FIG. 194 (l) shows a state in which the effect image is visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008b.

  FIG. 194 (m) subsequent to FIG. 194 (l) shows that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is shown in FIG. The state of moving from the state of to the uppermost position is shown. Further, in FIG. 194 (m), a part of the button image and the effect image displayed on the sub display device 1030 are visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008a.

  FIG. 194 (n) subsequent to FIG. 194 (m) shows a state where the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state of FIG. 194 (m) and returned to the initial position. Further, on the sub display device 1030, a variable icon, a button image, and an effect image are displayed.

  In FIG. 194 (o) continuing from FIG. 194 (n), the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is executed in response to the player pressing the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The state is shown. FIG. 194 (o) shows the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotated counterclockwise by 60 ° from the state of FIG. 194 (n).

  194 (p) following FIG. 194 (o), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 194 (o) by 300 ° (a total of 360 ° rotation) to return to the initial posture. After that, the state is shown in which it is returned to the lower initial position. Further, the operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 which is executed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136 includes both the operation of rotating counterclockwise and the operation of moving to the lower initial position in parallel. It may be possible to return to the initial posture and the initial position.

  FIG. 194 (q) subsequent to FIG. 194 (p) shows a state in which the button image and the effect image have been erased on the sub display device 1030, and the fluctuating icon like the normal state has changed to the fluctuating icon in the notice mode. In addition, FIG. 194 (q) shows the state where the special figure 1 variation game has ended. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variation game is a big hit. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c to notify that the result of the special figure 1 variable display is a big hit. The symbol variation display in which the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is performed based on the pressing of the chance button 136 is larger than the symbol variation display in which the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is not performed based on the pressing of the chance button 136, is a big hit symbol mode. May be configured to be easily confirmed and displayed.

  As described above, in the effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 may display a plurality of character images, a variation icon, a hold icon, and an image prompting the user to press the chance button 136. The pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment is configured such that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can move and rotate in the vertical direction at a position behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves to a certain position behind the movable body 1008, so that all the character images of the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 are displayed. , The change icon, the hold icon, and the image prompting the player to press the chance button 136 are invisible to the player, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is located at a position behind the movable body 1008, In some cases, only the variable icon displayed on the display device 1030 and the image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 are configured to be visible to the player. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves to a position behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008, so that all the character images among the plurality of character images, the variation icon, There may be a case where the player can visually recognize the hold icon and the image that prompts the player to press the chance button 136, or only the hold icon and the image that prompts the player to press the chance button 136 can be visually recognized by the player. May be configured so that it may be configured such that only the variable icon is visible to the player, or only the hold icon is visible to the player. There may be a case in which the player may be able to view only the image prompting the user to press the chance button 136. .

Further, an image prompting the user to press the change icon, the hold icon, or the chance button 136, which is displayed on the sub display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008, is displayed on the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. There may be a case where the movable body becomes visible by performing a moving operation. An image prompting the change icon, the hold icon, or the chance button 136, which is displayed on the sub display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008, to be displayed on both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. The variable display in which the movable body may be visually recognized by performing the moving operation is compared with the variable display in which the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 cannot be visually recognized even when the moving operation is performed. Thus, the jackpot pattern mode may be configured to be easily confirmed and displayed. The change icon or the hold icon before or after the movement of the movable body or the visible portion of the image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 may be different. It is configured such that the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the pattern variation display as the prefetch target than when the prefetch notice is executed in which the visible part of the image prompting the icon or the chance button 136 to be pressed is not different. May be. An image prompting the change icon, the hold icon, or the chance button 136, which is displayed on the sub display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008, to be displayed on both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. When the movable body can be visually recognized by performing the moving operation, in comparison with the case in which both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 cannot be visually recognized because the movable body does not perform the moving operation, the variable display of the pre-reading target is performed. It may be configured such that the jackpot pattern mode is easily confirmed and displayed. Further, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may perform vertical movement and rotation operations behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the effect on the sub display device 1030 of this embodiment may be executed on the decorative symbol display device 208.
(Example 17)
An example of effects in sub-display device 1030 of Example 17 of the present exemplary embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 195. In addition, in FIG. 195 and each drawing described later, an example of the effect of the special figure 1 variation game in each embodiment is shown in time series. In addition, the variation of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030 is represented by a thick white arrow. In the period in which the effect of the sub display device 1030 shown in FIG. 195 and FIG. 196 to be described later is displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect different from the effect of the sub display device 1030. The other effect may be, for example, an effect of displaying a predetermined background or character without displaying a decorative pattern, or an effect of displaying a decorative pattern and displaying a predetermined background or character. Good. 195 and 196, while the effect of the sub display device 1030 is being executed, the decorative symbol display device 208 may perform the same effect as the effect of the sub display device 1030.

  First, common points between FIG. 195 and FIG. 196 described later will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 195 (a), a decoration frame F1 having a shape in which the letter "L" is vertically inverted is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area of the sub display device 1030. A square-shaped special figure 1 reserved number display area 1931 is provided in the upper left portion of the decorative frame F1, and a square special figure 2 reserved number display area 1932 is provided on the right side thereof, which is a special figure 1 reserved number display area. A special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933 is provided below 1931, and a special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 1934 is provided below it. In the special figure 1 pending number display area 1931, the number of pending figures of the special figure 1 is displayed by numbers, and for example, “0” is displayed when there is no pending figure of the special figure 1. In the special figure 2 pending number display area 1932, the number of pending figures of the special figure 2 is displayed by numbers, and, for example, “0” is displayed when there is no pending figure of the special figure 2. Further, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933, when the special figure 1 variation game is being executed, it is informed that the special figure 1 variation game is being executed as a variation display of the fourth symbol "/" , "\" Images are displayed alternately, and the special figure 1 variation game is not being executed (when special figure 1 is stopped and displayed), "-" or "○" as the fourth symbol display The image is displayed. "-" Is the fourth symbol that is displayed when the result of the special figure 1 variation game is out, and "○" is the fourth symbol that is displayed when the result of the special figure 1 variation game is a big hit. is there. In addition, regardless of the result of the special figure 1 variation game, "-" may be displayed as the fourth symbol during non-execution of the special figure 1 variation game. In addition, in the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 1934, when the special figure 2 variation game is being executed, it notifies that the special figure 2 variation game is being executed as a variation display of the fourth symbol "/" , "\" Images are displayed alternately, and the special figure 2 variation game is not being executed (when special figure 2 is stopped and displayed), "-" or "○" as the fourth symbol display The image is displayed. "-" Is the fourth symbol that is displayed when the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out, and "○" is the fourth symbol that is displayed when the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. is there. In addition, "-" may be displayed as the fourth symbol during the non-execution of the special figure 2 variation game regardless of the result of the special figure 2 variation game.

  A horizontally long rectangular decorative frame F2 is displayed below the display area of the sub display device 1030. In the center of the decorative frame F2, a square-shaped variable icon display area 1940 in which a part of the left and right frames are open is provided. The variable icon may be displayed in a display size (for example, a display size larger than the hold icon) different from the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 1930 described later. This may facilitate identification of the variable icon and the hold icon.

  A special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area 1940, and a special figure 2 hold icon display area 1960 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 1940. The special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 is roughly divided from the left to the right into four areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area. Each of the first to fourth areas corresponds to the first to fourth reservation order in FIG. That is, in the first area, the special figure 1 hold icon corresponding to the hold of the earliest (oldest stored) special figure 1 can be displayed. Similarly, in the second to fourth areas, the special figure 1 hold icon is displayed. ~ The special figure 1 hold icon corresponding to the hold of the fourth special figure 1 can be displayed. Similarly, the special figure 2 hold icon display area 1960 is roughly divided from the left to the right into four areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area. Each of the first to fourth areas corresponds to the holding order of the first to fourth special maps 2, respectively. That is, the special area 2 hold icon corresponding to the earliest (oldest stored) special area 2 hold icon can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, the special area 2 hold icon is displayed in the second to fourth areas. ~ The special figure 2 reservation icon corresponding to the reservation of the fourth special figure 2 can be displayed. Further, in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 and the special figure 2 hold icon display area 1960, various animations representing the movement of the hold icon are executed.

  A square-shaped navigation character display area 1970 is provided on the left of the special figure 1 reserved display area 1950. A character image H1 of a merchant is displayed in the navigation character display area 1970. The character image H1 of the merchant is used for an explanation effect such as a tutorial effect, a notice (a notice of the change or a look-ahead notice), and the like.

  To the right of the special figure 2 hold display area 1960, a square effect custom state display area 1980 is provided. In the effect custom state display area 1980, “levels 1 to 99” are displayed according to the effect custom state of the pachinko machine 1000. The level of the effect custom state is set to increase, for example, when an effect with a low appearance rate is performed. The level of the effect custom state may be set to increase even when a predetermined number of game balls are hit, when a predetermined effect is executed, or when a big hit is won.

  FIG. 195 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. In the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" indicating that the winning / decision result of the special game 1 variable game is out of order is stopped and displayed. ing. In the special figure 1 4th symbol display area 1933, the 4th symbol of the display mode of "-" which notifies the deviation is stopped and displayed. In the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 1934, the fourth symbol in the display mode of "-" for notifying that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out is displayed in a stopped state. Further, “1” indicating that the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is 1 is displayed in the special figure 1 number of reserved display area 1931, and the number of reservations of special figure 2 is 0 in the special figure 2 number of reserved display area 1932. “0” indicating that is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950, a default special figure 1 hold icon 1951 displayed in a white circle is displayed.

  FIG. 195 (b) shows that the suspension of special figure 1 has been digested and the special figure 1 variation game has started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, variable display of decorative symbols is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, “0” is displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display area 1931, and it is informed that the reserved number of the special figure 1 is decreased by 1 and the reserved number of the special figure 1 becomes 0.

  In addition, when the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one, and the special figure 1 variation game is started, in the variation icon display area 1940 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 of the sub-display device 1030, between the hold and variation icons. The moving animation of is executed. In the moving animation between the hold / variable icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 1951 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 becomes the change icon 1941 and moves to the change icon display area 1940. .. An arrow pointing to the upper left of the variation icon 1941 in FIG. 195 (b) indicates the moving direction of the variation icon 1941.

  In FIG. 195 (c), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030, the moving animation between the hold / variable icons ends, and the variation icon 1941 is displayed in the variation icon display area 1940. It shows the displayed state. Also, based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230, "1" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931, and white is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950. A default special figure 1 hold icon 1952 displayed in a circle is shown as a result of an increase animation of the hold icon. The upward arrow shown to the left of the special figure 1 hold icon 1952 in FIG. 195 (b) represents the moving direction of the special figure 1 hold icon 1952. Further, in FIG. 195 (c), a balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image H1 of the merchant displayed in the navigation character display area 1970 of the sub display device 1030 is started to be displayed in the lower left part of the effect display area 1030d. The balloon image is an image used for advance notice by the character image H1 of the merchant.

  FIG. 195 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a and the right symbol display area 1030c of the sub display device 1030. In addition, based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting opening 230, "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931, and the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 is black. The special figure 1 hold icon 1953 displayed in a circle is shown by the increase animation of the hold icon. The upward arrow shown to the left of the special figure 1 hold icon 1953 in FIG. 195 (d) indicates the moving direction of the special figure 1 hold icon 1953. In addition, an image of the character string “Chance?” Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image H1 of the merchant, and an effect is expected to be developed to reach effect. Further, a substantially rectangular shape of the hold change image H2 including the image of the character string of "hold change" is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 1030b and the right symbol display area 1030c. . The hold change image H2 is an image displayed to notify that a pre-reading notice that changes the display mode of the displayed hold icon or variable icon or a notice effect of the change is executed. In this example, the hold change image H2 notifies that the change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon being displayed changes is executed. Note that the hold change image H2 may be a display that is displayed only when the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is changed, or a display that is displayed only when the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 is changed. It may be a display that is displayed only when the variable icon is changed, or a display that is displayed only when the hold icon of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is changed. The display may be displayed only when the hold icon and the variable icon of special figure 2 are changed, or may be displayed only when the hold icon of special figure 1, the hold icon of special figure 2, and the variable icon are changed. It may be a display.

  195 (e), "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game may be out of order. This shows the informed state. Further, a deletion animation in which the fluctuation icon 1941 displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 1940 moves downward is displayed, and the fluctuation icon 1941 is gradually deleted. Further, FIG. 195 (e) shows a state in which a change animation in which the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon 1952 changes from “white to black” is executed. In the change animation, an image of lightning strike is displayed from the pending change image H2 to the special figure 1 hold icon 1952, and an effect image is displayed overlapping the special figure 1 hold icon 1951. The effect image is displayed in front of the special figure 1 hold icons 1952 and 1953, and the entire special figure 1 hold icon 1952 and part of the special figure 1 hold icon 1953 are hidden by the effect image.

  FIG. 195 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game has ended. In the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" indicating that the winning / decision result of the special game 1 variation game is out of order is stopped and displayed. ing. In FIG. 195 (f), the change animation ends, the pending change image H2 and the effect image shown in FIG. 195 (e) are deleted, and the display mode of the special figure 1 pending icon 1952 changes from white circle to black circle. Is changing.

  FIG. 195 (g) shows that the first special figure 1 has been reserved and the special figure 1 variation game has started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, variable display of decorative symbols is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931, the special figure 1 hold icon 1952 becomes a variable icon, and the moving animation between the hold / change icons and the special figure 1 hold icon 1953 are started. ing. Also, in FIG. 195 (g), a balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image H1 of the merchant displayed in the navigation character display area 1970 of the sub display device 1030 is started to be displayed in the lower left portion of the effect display area 1030d.

  FIG. 195 (h) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 1953 are completed. Further, in FIG. 195 (h), an image of the character string "Den ~" is displayed in the balloon image representing the lines of the character image H1 of the merchant, which suggests that a character image H3 of the company, which will be described later, appears. The production is being executed. The character image H3 of the hall is a character image used for the "rotation" advance notice effect shown in FIG. 161 (b) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "rotation display notice effect").

  FIG. 195 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030. Also, the character image H3 of the lord is displayed in the upper right part of the effect display area 1030d, and the image of the character string "Called?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image H3 of the lord. In addition, an image of the character string "Den!" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image H1 of the merchant.

  FIG. 195 (j) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a and the right symbol display area 1030c of the sub display device 1030, and the reach effect is started. In addition, an image of the character string "Chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image H1 of the merchant, and thereafter, "Chance!" The image of the character string is displayed. By displaying the image of the character string of "chance!" Representing the dialogue of the character image H3 of the hall, it is suggested that the rotation display advance notice effect is executed.

  FIG. 195 (k) shows the screen of the sub display device 1030 rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise when viewed from the player with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation. Further, the fourth symbol displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 1933, and the variable display of the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 1030b are also executed during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. Further, the fourth symbol displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 1933, and the variable display of the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 1030b are also executed during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. Note that FIG. 195 (k) illustrates the screen of the sub display device 1030 by compressing it in the longitudinal direction due to a problem of space on the paper surface.

  FIG. 195 (l) shows that the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise (90 ° in total) when viewed from the player with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center from the state of FIG. 195 (k). The screen of the display device 1030 is shown. 195 (j), and (k), the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 before rotation of the sub display device 1030 has an aspect ratio of 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative pattern display device 208). ), While the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 shown in FIG. 195 (l) has an aspect ratio of 1: 1. It is displayed. Here, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 rotated counterclockwise by 90 ° takes the horizontal axis in the direction rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal direction, and is orthogonal to the horizontal axis. It is the aspect ratio when the vertical axis is taken as the direction. Similarly, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 after rotation is the horizontal axis in the direction rotated counterclockwise from the horizontal direction and the vertical axis in the direction orthogonal to the horizontal axis. Is the aspect ratio of the case.

  FIG. 195 (m) shows that the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 90 ° counterclockwise (a total of 180 ° rotation) when viewed from the player with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 195 (k). The screen of the display device 1030 is shown. Moreover, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is changed to the aspect ratio before rotation.

  FIG. 195 (n) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise by 45 ° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 195 (m) (total 225 ° rotation). Shows. Further, in FIG. 195 (n), the pending change image H2 during the execution of the rotation display notice effect overlaps the decoration symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 1030b, the right symbol display area 1030c, and the character image H3 of the hall. Will be displayed. The hold change image H2 displayed in FIG. 195 (n) is an image used for producing a notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon. Note that FIG. 195 (n) illustrates the screen of the sub display device 1030 in a compressed manner due to a problem of space on the paper surface, but the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 does not change.

  FIG. 195 (o) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise by 45 ° about the center of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 195 (n) (rotation by 270 ° in total). Also, FIG. 195 (o) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon is executed. In the effect, a display that a thunder is generated is displayed from the pending change image H2, and an animation of a lightning strike on the variable icon displayed in a black circle is executed. The variable icon having a lightning strike overlaps the effect image, so that the entire variable icon is hidden by the effect image. In addition, in FIG. 195 (o), "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931 based on that the game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area is displayed. It shows a state in which the special figure 1 hold icon 954 displayed in a black circle in the second area of 1950 appears by the increase animation of the hold icon. Further, the special figure 1 hold icon 954 is enlarged and displayed as compared with the other hold icons. Therefore, it may be possible to make the player pay attention to the enlarged and displayed hold icon during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. Note that FIG. 195 (n) illustrates the screen of the sub display device 1030 in a compressed manner due to a problem of space on the paper surface, but the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 does not change.

  FIG. 195 (p) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise by 45 ° about the center of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 195 (o) (total 315 ° rotation). In addition, the pending change image H2 shown in FIG. 195 (o) and the effect image displayed overlapping the entire variation icon 1941 are erased, and the character "heat" is drawn in a circle. The variable icon is enlarged and displayed. For this reason, it may be possible for the player to pay attention to the enlarged and displayed variable icon during execution of the rotation display notice effect. Note that FIG. 195 (n) illustrates the screen of the sub display device 1030 in a compressed manner due to a problem of space on the paper surface, but the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 does not change. Next, in FIG. 195 (q), the sub display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise by 45 ° about the center of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. It shows a state in which 1030 has rotated once and returned to the original state. In addition, the hold icon and the variable icon that have been enlarged and displayed have returned to the normal size. Next, in FIG. 195 (r), "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. This indicates a state in which the fact is notified. Further, the moving icon displayed in the moving icon display area 1940 is moved downward, so that a deleting animation for deleting the moving icon is executed. The downward arrow shown at the upper left of the variable icon in FIG. 195 (r) indicates the moving direction of the variable icon.

  As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, when the sub display device 1030 is rotated, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 may change. A character image or a decorative pattern may be used for the image displayed on the sub display device 1030, and the presence of the character image or the decorative pattern is enhanced by changing the aspect ratio of the character image or the decorative pattern. It may be possible to give a strong impression to the player. Further, in the rotation display advance notice effect in the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 makes one rotation (360 ° rotation), but by using the slip ring described above for the sub display device 1030, the sub display device 1030 is made to rotate one or more rotations. It may have been done. For example, the greater the number of rotations of the sub display device 1030, the higher the jackpot reliability may be set.

  The aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 may change in relation to the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit determines the aspect ratio of the image using a predetermined function in which the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030 is a variable, and based on the aspect ratio, the image data stored in the ROM 406 is determined. The display area may be generated using the work area of the VRAM 436. Further, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 may change randomly. For example, when the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit determines the aspect ratio of an image using a random number and generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio. There may be. Further, the display area of the image may be enlarged or reduced depending on the change of the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030. The aspect ratio of the image may change so as to keep the display area constant.

  Further, the symbol variation display in which the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment is performed may be configured such that the big hit symbol mode is more likely to be fixedly displayed than the symbol variation display in which the rotation display notice effect is not performed. . In addition, the symbol variation display in which the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 may change is compared to the symbol variation display in which the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 does not change. Thus, the jackpot pattern mode may be configured to be easily confirmed and displayed. In addition, the reliability of the big hit may be different depending on the frequency and degree of change in the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030. For example, the larger the frequency of changing the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030, the higher the reliability of the big hit may be, or the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 may be increased. The greater the degree of change in the aspect ratio of, the higher the reliability of the big hit may be.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect of enlarging and displaying the hold icon and the variable icon is performed during the rotation display notice effect. When the effect of enlarging and displaying the hold icon or the variable icon is performed, the jackpot symbol aspect is finally settled and displayed, as compared with the case where the effect of enlarging and displaying the hold icon or the variable icon is not performed. It may be configured to be easy. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the effect of rotating the sub display device 1030 is performed, but instead of rotating the sub display device 1030, by rotating the decorative pattern display device 208, the decorative symbol display device There may be a case where the effect of rotating the image displayed on 208 is performed, and by rotating the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 simultaneously or separately, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display The effect of rotating the image displayed on the device 1030 may be performed in some cases. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is rotatable, and the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated and moved.
(Example 18)
An example of the sub display device 1030 effect of Example 18 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 196. 196 (a) to (r) display the effects of the special figure 1 variation game in time series. FIG. 196 (a) shows the state where the special figure 1 variation game has ended, and shows the same state as the state shown in FIG. 195 (a). Next, FIG. 196 (b) shows the state where the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variation game is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 195 (b). Next, in FIG. 196 (c), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 1951 ends, and the variable icon display area 1940 is displayed. The change icon 1941 is displayed. In addition, based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting opening 230, "1" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931, and the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 is black. The special figure 1 hold icon 952 displayed in a circle is shown as a result of the increase animation of the hold icon. Further, FIG. 196 (c) shows a balloon image immediately after the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image H1 of the merchant displayed in the navigation character display area 1970 of the decorative pattern display device 208 is displayed in the lower left portion of the effect display area 1030d. It shows the state.

  FIG. 196 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a and the right symbol display area 1030c of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting opening 230, "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931, and the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 is black. The special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle is shown by the increase animation of the hold icon. In addition, an image of the character string "Chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image H1 of the merchant.

  196 (e), "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. Indicates that the notification has been made. Next, FIG. 196 (f) shows the state where the special figure 1 variation game is finished, and shows the same state as FIG. 195 (f). Next, FIG. 196 (g) shows the same state as FIG. 195 (g) showing the state in which the first special figure 1 hold is digested and the special figure 1 variation game is started. Next, FIG. 196 (h) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / fluctuating icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 have ended, and is the same state as FIG. 195 (h). Next, FIG. 196 (i) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and the character image h3 of the hall is displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the same as FIG. 195 (i). It shows the state.

  FIG. 196 (j) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a and the right symbol display area 1030c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is started. In addition, an image of the character string "Chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image H1 of the merchant, and thereafter, "Chance!" The image of the character string is displayed. By displaying the image of the character string of "chance!" Representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the hall, it is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed.

  FIG. 196 (k) shows the screen of the sub display device 1030 rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise when viewed from the player with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation. The decorative frame F1 displayed on the sub display device 1030, and the image displayed in the decorative frame F1 (the number of held displays, the image of the fourth design) (hereinafter, when these images are referred to as “non-rotation target images”) Of the sub-display device 1030 is prioritized over images other than the non-rotation target image (hereinafter, may be referred to as “rotation target image”) in a mode in which the player does not rotate. It is displayed in the upper left. Further, the fourth symbol displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 1933, and the variable display of the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 1030b are also executed during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. Further, the rotation target image may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image, or only a part of the rotation target images may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image. There may be a case where only a part of the non-rotation target images is displayed with priority over the rotation target image. Note that FIG. 196 (k) illustrates a screen of the sub display device 1030 in a compressed state due to a problem of space on a paper surface.

  FIG. 196 (l) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise by 45 ° (a total of 90 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 196 (k) about the center of the sub display device 1030. In addition, the non-rotation target image has priority over a part of the character image H3 of Yoshimune and a part of "decoration 3" displayed in the right symbol display area, and is displayed on the upper right portion of the sub display device 1030 by the player. It is moved and displayed in such a manner that it does not rotate when viewed from above. Note that FIG. 196 (l) illustrates the screen of the sub display device 1030 in a compressed state due to a problem of space on the paper surface.

  FIG. 196 (m) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has rotated 90 ° counterclockwise (a total of 180 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 196 (l) with the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation. . Further, the non-rotation target image is moved and displayed in the lower right portion of the sub display device 1030 in a manner that the image is not rotated when viewed from the player, prior to the decoration frame F2.

  FIG. 196 (n) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise by 45 ° about the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 196 (m) (rotated 225 ° in total). .. Further, in FIG. 196 (n), the pending change image H2 during the execution of the rotation display notice effect overlaps the decoration symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 1030b, the right symbol display area 1030c, and the character image H3 of the hall. Is displayed. The hold change image H2 displayed in FIG. 196 (n) is an image used to produce a notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon. In addition, the non-rotation target image is rotated in the lower left part of the sub display device 1030 when viewed from the player, in preference to a part of the decoration frame F2 and a part of the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image H1 of the merchant. It is moved and displayed in a non-present manner. Note that FIG. 196 (n) illustrates the screen of the sub display device 1030 in a compressed manner due to a problem of space on the paper surface.

  FIG. 196 (o) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise by 45 ° about the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 196 (n) (rotated by 270 ° in total). . In addition, FIG. 196 (o) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon is executed. In the effect, an animation is performed in which lightning is generated from the pending change image H2, and a lightning strikes the variable icon displayed in a black circle. The variable icon having a lightning strike overlaps the effect image, so that the entire variable icon is hidden by the effect image. Further, in FIG. 196 (o), "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931 based on that the game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area is displayed. The special figure 1 hold icon 1954 displayed in a black circle in the second area of 1950 appears by the increase animation of the hold icon. In addition, the non-rotation target image has priority over a part of the "decoration 3" displayed in the left symbol display area and a part of the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image H1 of the merchant, and the left middle part of the sub display device 1030. Is displayed in a manner not rotated by the player. Note that FIG. 196 (o) illustrates a screen of the sub display device 1030 in a compressed state due to a problem of space on a paper surface.

  FIG. 196 (p) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise by 45 ° about the center of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 196 (o) (total 315 ° rotation). Also, the pending change image H2 shown in FIG. 196 (o) and the effect image displayed by overlapping the entire variation icon are erased, and the variation of the mode in which the character of "heat" is drawn in the circle The icon is displayed. Further, the special figure 1 hold icon 1954 is displayed smaller than other hold icons. In addition, the non-rotation target image is moved and displayed in the upper left portion of the sub display device 1030 in a mode that is not rotated when viewed from the player, in preference to a part of the "decoration 3" displayed in the left symbol display area. Has been done. Note that FIG. 196 (p) illustrates the screen of the sub display device 1030 in a compressed manner due to the problem of space on the paper surface. Next, FIG. 196 (q) shows that the sub display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise by 45 ° about the center of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 196 (p) (a total rotation of 360 °). It shows a state in which 1030 has rotated once and returned to the original state. Further, the non-rotation target image is displayed on the upper left portion of the sub display device 1030 in a state in which it is not rotated as seen from the player, and is returned to the state before the rotation display notice effect is executed. Further, the special figure 1 hold icon 1954 is displayed in the same size as the other hold icons. Next, in FIG. 196 (r), "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. This indicates a state in which the fact is notified. Further, the variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 1940 is moved downward, so that an elimination animation for erasing the variation icon 1941 is executed.

As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, the rotation display of the rotation target image is performed by rotating the sub display device 1030. Further, when the sub display device 1030 is rotated, the non-rotation target of the decoration frame F1 displayed on the sub display device 1030 and the image displayed in the decoration frame F1 (holding number display, image of the fourth symbol) The image is displayed so as not to rotate when viewed from the player. The symbol variation display in which the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment is performed may be configured such that the big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the rotation display notice effect is not performed. In addition, the non-rotation target image of the sub display device 1030 is moved and displayed so as to be displayed at a conspicuous position of the sub display device 1030 as seen by the player in accordance with the rotation of the sub display device 1030. Further, any of the decorative pattern, the Yoshimune character image H3, the grandfather character image H1, the holding icon, the variable icon, the decorative frame F2, or the like, or all the images displayed on the sub display device 1030 are non-rotating targets. The image may be displayed in a state where it is not rotated as seen from the player. Further, in this case, the larger the number of non-rotation target images, the higher the jackpot reliability may be. Further, instead of rotating the sub display device 1030, by rotating the decorative symbol display device 208, there may be a case where an effect of rotating the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed, or a decorative symbol. By rotating the display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 at the same time or separately, the effect of rotating the images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 may be performed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is rotatable, and the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated and moved.
(Example 19)
An effect example of the sub display device 1030 of Example 19 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 197. 197 (a) to (l) show the special figure 1 variation game in time series. In the period in which the effect of the sub display device 1030 shown in FIG. 197 and FIGS. 198 to 202 described later is displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect different from the effect of the sub display device 1030. ing. As the other effect, for example, an effect of displaying a decorative pattern and displaying a predetermined background or character may be used.

  FIG. 197 (a) shows a state in which "1" indicating that the number of holdings in Toku-zu 1 is 1 is displayed as a holding number display image in the holding display area 1030e in the lower left part of the sub display device 1030. There is. Next, in FIG. 197 (b), the reservation of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and the reservation number of the special figure 1 is 0 as the reservation number display image in the reservation display area 1030e in the lower left part of the sub display device 1030. The state where "0" is displayed is shown.

  FIG. 197 (c) shows a state in which the character image H3 of the hall is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of the hall is a character image used for the "rotation" advance notice effect shown in FIG. 161 (b) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "rotation display notice effect").

  FIG. 197 (d) shows a state in which the rotation display advance notice effect as the reach effect is executed. The sub display device 1030 is in a state of being rotated counterclockwise by 45 ° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030. Further, the hold display area 1030e in the lower left part of the sub display device 1030 is moved to the upper left part of the sub display device 1030. Also, the image of “0” displayed as the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is rotated 45 degrees clockwise around the center of the image of “0” in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is rotated and displayed.

  FIG. 197 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has been rotated counterclockwise by 45 ° (a total of 90 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 197 (d) about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030. Is shown. Further, the image of “0” displayed as the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is rotated 45 degrees clockwise around the center of the image of “0” in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed after being rotated by 90 degrees (total 90 degrees). Next, in FIG. 197 (f), the sub display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise by 45 ° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 197 (e) (a total rotation of 135 °). It shows the state of being done. Further, the hold display area 1030e in the upper left portion of the sub display device 1030 has moved to the upper right portion of the sub display device 1030. In addition, the image of "0" displayed as the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is rotated by 45 ° clockwise around the center of the image of "0" in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed after being rotated (a total of 135 ° rotation). Next, in FIG. 197 (g), the sub display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise by 45 ° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 197 (f) (a total rotation of 180 °). It shows the state of being done. In addition, the image of "0" displayed as the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is rotated by 45 ° clockwise around the center of the image of "0" in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed after being rotated (a total of 180 ° rotation).

  197 (H) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has been rotated counterclockwise by 45 ° (rotation of 225 ° in total) from the state of FIG. 197 (g) about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030. Is shown. Further, the hold display area 1030e in the upper right part of the sub display device 1030 is moved to the lower right part of the sub display device 1030. Further, the image of “0” of the number of held display images displayed in the hold display area 1030e is rotated by 45 ° clockwise around the center of the image of “0” in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed after being rotated (225 ° in total). Then, in FIG. 197 (i), the sub display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise by 45 ° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 197 (H) (total 270 ° rotation). It shows the state of being done. Further, the image of “0” of the number of held display images displayed in the hold display area 1030e is rotated by 45 ° clockwise around the center of the image of “0” in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed (rotated 270 ° in total). Next, in FIG. 197 (j), the sub display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise by 45 ° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 197 (i) (total 315 ° rotation). It shows the state of being done. Further, the hold display area 1030e in the lower right part of the sub display device 1030 is moved to the original position in the lower left part of the sub display device 1030. In addition, the image of "0" displayed as the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is rotated by 45 ° clockwise around the center of the image of "0" in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed after being rotated (total of 315 ° rotation). Then, in FIG. 197 (k), the sub display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise by 45 ° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 197 (j) (a total rotation of 360 °). It shows the state of being done. In addition, the image of "0" displayed as the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is rotated by 45 ° clockwise around the center of the image of "0" in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed after being rotated (a total of 360 ° rotation). Next, FIG. 197 (l) shows a state in which the rotation display advance notice effect is completed, and the character image H3 of the player is deleted on the sub display device 1030.

As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub-display device 1030 is rotated to rotate and display the character image of the hall. When the sub display device 1030 is rotated, the number-of-holds display image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as seen from the player. Further, the hold display area 1030e of the sub display device 1030 is moved so as to be displayed in the left corner of the sub display device 1030 as seen by the player, in accordance with the rotation of the sub display device 1030. Therefore, while the sub display device 1030 is rotating, the number-of-holds display image, which is important information for the player, is displayed at a position where the player can easily see it. The symbol variation display in which the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment is performed may be configured such that the big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the rotation display notice effect is not performed. Further, in the rotation display notice effect according to the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 is configured to rotate once (360 ° rotation). May be configured to do so. For example, the greater the number of rotations of the sub display device 1030, the higher the jackpot reliability may be set. Further, instead of the sub display device 1030, the effect of the present embodiment may be performed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are rotated simultaneously or separately. Therefore, the effect of this embodiment may be performed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. In the case of performing the effect of this embodiment on the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated and moved.
(Example 20)
An effect example of Example 20 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 198. FIGS. 198 (a) to 198 (k) show the effects of the special figure 1 variation game in time series.

  FIG. 198 (a) shows the state of the sub liquid crystal display device in which the special figure 1 variation game has started. The sub display device 1030 shows a state in which nothing is displayed. Next, FIG. 198 (b) shows a state in which the character image H3 of the hall is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of the hall is a character image used for the "rotation" advance notice effect shown in FIG. 161 (b) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "rotation display notice effect").

  FIG. 198 (c) shows a state in which the rotation display advance notice effect as the reach effect is executed. FIG. 198 (c) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise by 45 ° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. Further, the character image H3 of the hall displayed in the center of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 1030. Is displayed by rotating 45 degrees clockwise about the center of rotation. Therefore, the player's character image H3 is visually recognized as not rotating. Next, FIGS. 198 (d) to 198 (j) show a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 45 °. Further, in FIGS. 198 (d) to (j), the character image H3 of the player is displayed by being rotated clockwise at the same rotation speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030. Therefore, while the sub display device 1030 is rotating, the player's character image H3 is always visually recognized as not rotating. Next, FIG. 198 (k) shows a state in which the rotation display advance notice effect is finished, and the character image H3 of the player is deleted from the sub display device 1030.

As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, the character image H3 of the hall displayed on the sub display device 1030 is rotated at the same speed in the opposite direction as the sub display device 1030 while rotating the sub display device 1030. By displaying the character image, the character image is displayed in a state where it is not rotated when viewed from the player. Therefore, although the sub display device 1030 is rotating, the character image displayed on the sub display device 1030 does not rotate, which may give a surprise to the player. The symbol variation display in which the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment is performed may be configured such that the big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the rotation display notice effect is not performed. Further, in the present embodiment, the character image is rotated and displayed at the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030, but the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030 is opposite. There may be a case where the character image is rotated and displayed in a direction different from the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030, or in the same direction as the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030, the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030. Alternatively, the character image may be rotated and displayed at different speeds. Further, instead of rotating the sub display device 1030, there may be a case where an effect of rotating the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are rotated simultaneously or separately. There may be a case where a performance is performed.
(Example 21)
An effect example of Example 21 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 199. 199 (a) to (l) show the effects of the special figure 1 variation game in time series.

  FIG. 199 (a) shows the state of the sub liquid crystal display device in which the special figure 1 variation game has started. The sub display device 1030 shows a state in which nothing is displayed. Next, FIG. 199 (b) shows a state in which the character image H3 of the hall is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of the hall is a character image used for the "rotation" advance notice effect shown in FIG. 161 (b) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "rotation display notice effect").

  FIG. 199 (c) shows a state in which the rotation display advance notice effect as the reach effect is executed. FIG. 199 (c) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise by 45 ° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. Further, the character image H3 of the hall displayed in the center of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 1030. Is displayed by rotating 45 degrees clockwise about the center of rotation. Therefore, the player's character image H3 is visually recognized as not rotating. The character image H3 of the hall is slightly compressed in the horizontal direction and enlarged in the vertical direction from the state shown in FIG. 199 (b). Then, in FIG. 199 (d), the sub display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise by 45 ° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 199 (c) (rotation by 90 ° in total). It shows the state of being done. Further, the character image H3 of the hall displayed in the center of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 1030. Is displayed by rotating 45 degrees clockwise about the center of rotation. Therefore, the player's character image H3 is visually recognized as not rotating. Further, the character image H3 of the hall is slightly compressed in the horizontal direction from the state displayed in FIG. 199 (c) and is enlarged in the vertical direction to be displayed. Then, in FIG. 199 (e), the sub display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise by 45 ° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 199 (d) (a total rotation of 135 °). It shows the state of being done. Further, the character image H3 of the hall displayed in the center of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 1030. Is displayed by rotating 45 degrees clockwise about the center of rotation. Therefore, the player's character image H3 is visually recognized as not rotating. Further, the character image H3 of the hall is slightly enlarged in the horizontal direction and compressed in the vertical direction from the state shown in FIG. 199 (d). Next, in FIG. 199 (f), the sub display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise by 45 ° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 199 (e) (a total rotation of 180 °). It shows the state of being done. Further, the character image H3 of the hall displayed in the center of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 1030. Is displayed by rotating 45 degrees clockwise about the center of rotation. Therefore, the player's character image H3 is visually recognized as not rotating. Further, the character image H3 of the lord is slightly compressed in the horizontal direction from the state displayed in FIG. 199 (e) and is enlarged in the vertical direction to be displayed. It has returned to the state of (b). Next, FIGS. 199 (g) to 199 (j) show a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 45 °. Further, in FIGS. 199 (g) to 199 (j), the character image H3 of the user is displayed by being rotated clockwise at the same rotation speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030. Therefore, while the sub display device 1030 is rotating, the player's character image H3 is always visually recognized as not rotating. In addition, in FIGS. 199 (g) to 199 (j), the aspect ratio of the character image H3 of the hall has not changed. Next, FIG. 198 (l) shows a state in which the rotation display notice effect is finished, and the character image H3 of the player is deleted on the sub display device 1030.

As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, the character image H3 of the hall displayed on the sub display device 1030 is rotated at the same speed in the opposite direction as the sub display device 1030 while rotating the sub display device 1030. By displaying the character image, the character image is displayed in a state where it is not rotated when viewed from the player. Further, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, the aspect ratio of the character image H3 of the hall displayed on the sub display device 1030 changes. For this reason, the character image displayed on the sub display device 1030 does not rotate even though the sub display device 1030 is rotating, so that it may be possible to give the player unexpectedness and the character image By changing the aspect ratio, the presence of the character image may be enhanced and a strong impression may be given to the player. The symbol variation display in which the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment is performed may be configured such that the big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the rotation display notice effect is not performed. Further, in the present embodiment, the character image is rotated and displayed at the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030, but the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030 is opposite. There may be a case where the character image is rotated and displayed in a direction different from the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030, or in the same direction as the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030, the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030. Alternatively, the character image may be rotated and displayed at different speeds. The reliability of the big hit may be different depending on the frequency and the degree of change in the aspect ratio of the character image displayed on the sub display device 1030. For example, the greater the frequency of changing the aspect ratio of the character image displayed on the sub display device 1030, the higher the reliability of the big hit may be, or the sub display device 1030 is displayed. The larger the degree to which the aspect ratio of the character image changes, the higher the reliability of the big hit may be. Further, instead of the sub display device 1030, the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. May be performed. In the case of performing the effect of this embodiment on the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated and moved.
(Example 22)
An effect example of Example 22 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 200 (a) to (f) show the effects of the special figure 1 variation game in time series.

  FIG. 200 (a) shows the state of the sub liquid crystal display device in which the special figure 1 variation game has started. The sub display device 1030 shows a state in which nothing is displayed. Next, FIG. 200B shows a state in which the character image H3 of the hall is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of the hall is an image used for the lateral movement display effect as the reach effect.

  200 (c) to (e) show a state in which the lateral movement display effect as the reach effect is executed. In the lateral movement display effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 moves in the horizontal direction in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a rectangle indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIGS. 200C to 200E indicates the position of the sub display device 1030 before being moved in the left-right direction.

  FIG. 200 (c) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has moved leftward from the state shown in FIG. 200 (b). Also, the character image H3 of the hall displayed in the center of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a mode in which it moves rightward by the same distance as the leftward movement distance of the sub display device 1030. There is. Therefore, the character image H3 of the hall is displayed so as not to move from the viewpoint of the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a part of the character image H4 of the princess that has been cut off in the sub display device 1030 is displayed in the upper left portion. In addition, in this example, the princess character image H4 is an image used for a notice with high jackpot reliability.

  FIG. 200 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has moved leftward from the state shown in FIG. 200 (c). Also, the character image H3 of the hall displayed in the central portion of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a mode in which it moves rightward by the same distance as the left display moving distance of the sub display device 1030. Therefore, the character image H3 of the hall is displayed so that the player can visually recognize it as if it is not moving. Further, on the sub display device 1030, the entire princess character image H4 is displayed in the upper left portion.

  FIG. 200 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 200 (d). Also, the character image H3 of the buttocks displayed in the central portion of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a mode in which the sub display device 1030 moves leftward by the same distance as the rightward moving distance. Therefore, the character image H3 of the hall is displayed so as not to move from the viewpoint of the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 is displayed in the upper left part, and a part of the princess character image H4 is cut off.

  FIG. 200 (f) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 200 (e), and the lateral movement display effect as the reach effect has ended. The character image H3 of the hall displayed in the central portion of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a mode in which it moves leftward by the same distance as the rightward movement distance of the sub display device 1030. Therefore, the character image H3 of the hall is displayed in a state of not moving as seen from the player. Further, on the sub display device 1030, the princess character image H4 is not displayed.

As described above, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is moved and displayed at the same speed in the opposite direction to the sub display device 1030 while horizontally moving the sub display device 1030. Thus, the character image H3 of the hall is displayed in a state where it is not moving as seen from the player. Further, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, the princess character image H4 that has been cut off on the sub display device 1030 before the lateral movement display notice effect is executed is displayed next to the image displayed on the sub display device 1030. The moving display is displayed on the sub display device 1030. The princess character image H4 is displayed on the sub display device 1030 when the sub display device 1030 moves a predetermined distance. Therefore, the player pays attention to the moving distance of the sub display device 1030, which may improve the interest of the game. Further, in the effect during the symbol change, when the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment is performed, the symbol variation display is finally a big hit symbol mode, as compared with the case where the lateral movement display notice effect is not performed. May be configured to be easily displayed as a fixed stop. Further, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, a character may be displayed according to the jackpot reliability of the symbol variation display being executed. For example, when the jackpot reliability is relatively low, the enemy character of the lord may be displayed. Further, while the sub display device 1030 moves leftward by a predetermined distance to display the princess character image H4, the sub display device 1030 moves rightward by a predetermined distance, so that the enemy character of the lord is shown. May be displayed. Moreover, the aspect ratio of the character image H3 of the hall and the character image H4 of the princess used for the lateral movement display notice effect may change during the lateral movement display notice effect. Further, instead of the sub display device 1030, the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. May be performed. In the case of performing the effect of this embodiment on the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated and moved.
(Example 23)
An effect example of Example 23 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 201. 201 (a) to (f) show the effect of the special figure 1 variation game in time series.

  FIG. 201 (a) shows the state of the sub liquid crystal display device in which the special figure 1 variation game has started. The sub display device 1030 shows a state in which nothing is displayed. Next, FIG. 201 (b) shows a state in which the character image H3 of the hall is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of the hall is a character image used for the "rotation" advance notice effect shown in FIG. 161 (b) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "rotation display notice effect"). Further, FIG. 201 (b-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 201 (b). . The image data shown in FIG. 201 (b-1) has a lord's character image H3 and a princess's character image H4 at the lower left of the lord's character image H3. It is the image data in a non-rotated form. In addition, in this example, the princess character image H4 is an image used for a notice with high jackpot reliability. 201 (b-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 201 (b-1) to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 201 (b). The generated display data is shown. From the image data shown in FIG. 201 (b-1), a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 is cut around the center of the image data to obtain display data. FIG. 201 (b-3) shows a state in which an image is displayed on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 201 (b-2).

  201 (c) to (e) show a state in which the rotation display advance notice effect as the reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice production of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise in the plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and then rotates clockwise. It is rotated 45 °. In addition, a rectangle indicated by a two-dot chain line in each of FIGS. 201C to 201E indicates a position of the sub display device 1030 before rotation. The arrows shown in FIGS. 201C to 201E indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030.

  FIG. 201 (c) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise by 30 ° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state shown in FIG. 201 (b). . The character image H3 of the hall displayed in the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating state as seen from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 that has been completely cut off from the sub display device 1030 is displayed in the lower left portion in a manner that the player does not rotate. Also, FIG. 201 (c-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 201 (c). The image data shown in FIG. 201 (c-1) is image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 201 (b-1) by 30 ° in the clockwise direction with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. 201 (c-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 201 (c-1) to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 201 (c). The generated display data is shown. The display data is display data obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the center of the image data shown in FIG. 201 (c-1). 201 (c-3) shows an image displayed on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 201 (c-2) so that the sub display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 201 (b). The state rotated by 30 ° is shown, and the state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG. 201 (c) is shown.

  FIG. 201 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise by 15 ° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state shown in FIG. 201 (c). . The character image H3 of the hall displayed in the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating state as seen from the player. Further, on the sub display device 1030, the entire princess character image H4 is displayed in the lower left portion in a mode that is not rotating when viewed from the player. Further, FIG. 201 (d-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 201 (d). The image data shown in FIG. 201 (d-1) is the image data in a mode in which the image data shown in FIG. 201 (c-1) is rotated clockwise by 15 ° with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. 201 (d-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 201 (d-1) to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 201 (d). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the image data shown in FIG. 201 (d-1) with the center of the image data as the center. FIG. 201 (d-3) shows an image displayed on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 201 (d-2) so that the sub display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 201 (e). The state rotated by 15 ° is shown, and the state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG. 201 (d) is shown.

  FIG. 201 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 15 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 201 (d) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation. The character image H3 of the hall displayed in the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating state as seen from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 is displayed in a manner not rotating as seen from the player, and the other part is cut off from the sub display device 1030. Further, FIG. 201 (e) shows a state immediately before the end of the rotation display advance notice effect as the reach effect. FIG. 201 (e-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 201 (e). The image data shown in FIG. 201 (e-1) is image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 201 (d-1) by 15 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the rotation center. This is the same as the image data shown in (c-1). 201 (e-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 201 (e-1) to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 201 (e). The generated display data is shown. The display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 201 (c-2). 201 (e-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 201 (c-2), and the sub display device 1030 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 201 (d). A state of being rotated by 15 ° is shown, and a state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG. FIG. 201 (e-3) shows the same state as FIG. 201 (c-3).

  201 (f) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has rotated from the state shown in FIG. 201 (e) by 30 ° in a clockwise direction with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation. Is shown. The character image H3 of the hall displayed in the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating state as seen from the player. Further, on the sub display device 1030, the princess character image H4 is not displayed. 201 (f-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 201 (f). The image data shown in FIG. 201 (f-1) is image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 201 (e-1) around the center of the image data by 30 ° counterclockwise. This is the same as the image data shown in (b-1). 201 (f-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 201 (f-1) to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 201 (f). The generated display data is shown. The display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 201 (b-2). 201 (f-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 201 (f-2), and the sub display device 1030 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 201 (e). A state of being rotated by 30 ° is shown, and a state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG. 201 (f) is shown. FIG. 201 (f-3) shows the same state as FIG. 201 (b-3).

  As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect according to the present embodiment, the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is rotated and displayed at the same speed in the opposite direction to the sub display device 1030 while rotating the sub display device 1030. , The character image H3 of the hall is displayed in a state where it is not rotated as seen from the player. Further, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, the princess character image H4 that has been completely cut off on the sub display device 1030 before the rotation display advance notice effect is executed is displayed in rotation on the image displayed on the sub display device 1030. Is displayed on the sub display device 1030. The princess character image H4 is displayed on the sub display device 1030 when the sub display device 1030 rotates by a predetermined angle or more. Therefore, the player pays attention to the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030, which may improve the interest of the game.

  Further, the princess character image H4 may be displayed in the upper left part of the hall character image. In this case, the princess character image H4 displayed before rotation is cut off on the sub display device 1030 when the sub display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise. Also, by adjusting the display position of the princess character image H4, the sub display device 1030 can be cut off from the sub display device 1030 by rotating the sub display device 1030 by a predetermined angle or more. Therefore, the player pays attention to the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030, which may improve the interest of the game.

In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 rotates to display the princess character image H4. You can For example, when the jackpot reliability is relatively low, the enemy character of the lord may be displayed. Further, while the sub-display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle to display the princess character image H4, the sub-display device 1030 rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle to cause the enemy of the lord. The character may be displayed in some cases. Moreover, the aspect ratio of the character image H3 of the hall and the character image H4 of the princess used for the rotation display notice effect in this embodiment may change during the rotation display notice effect. Further, in the effect during the symbol change, when the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment is performed, the symbol variation display is finally a big hit symbol mode, as compared with the case where the lateral movement display notice effect is not performed. May be configured to be easily displayed as a fixed stop. Further, instead of the sub display device 1030, the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. May be performed. In the case of performing the effect of this embodiment on the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated and moved.
(Example 24)
An effect example of Example 24 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 202. 202 (a) to 202 (f) show the effects of the special figure 1 variation game in time series.

  FIG. 202 (a) shows the state of the sub liquid crystal display device in which the special figure 1 variation game has started. The sub display device 1030 shows a state in which nothing is displayed. Next, in FIG. 202 (b), the sub display device 1030 moves downward, and the character image H3 of the hall is displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 and the character image H1 of the merchant is displayed at the lower left of the sub display device 1030. The state is shown. The character image H3 of the hall is a character image used for the "rotation" advance notice effect shown in FIG. 161 (b) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "rotation display notice effect"). 202 (b-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 202 (b). The image data shown in FIG. 202 (b-1) has a lord's character image H3 and a princess's character image H4 at the lower left of the lord's character image H3. What is the lord's character image H3 and princess's character image H4? It is the image data in a non-rotated form. In addition, in this example, the princess character image H4 is an image used for a notice with high jackpot reliability. 202 (b-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (b-1) to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 202 (b). The generated display data is shown. From the image data shown in FIG. 202 (b-1), a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 is cut around the center of the image data to obtain display data. Further, the display data shown in FIG. 202 (b-2) is stored in the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. It is display data in which the merchant character image H1 read from the ROM 406 is superimposed. FIG. 202 (b-3) shows a state in which an image is displayed on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 202 (b-2). Although the merchant character image H1 is displayed with priority over the image data shown in FIG. 202 (b-1), the image data shown in FIG. 202 (b-1) is given priority over the merchant character image H1. It may be displayed as

  202 (c) to 202 (e) show a state in which the rotation display advance notice effect as the reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice production of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise in the plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and then rotates clockwise. It is rotated 45 °. In addition, a rectangle indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIGS. 202C to 202E indicates the position of the sub display device 1030 before rotation. The arrows shown in FIGS. 202C to 202E indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030.

  FIG. 202 (c) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise by 30 ° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state shown in FIG. 202 (b). .. The character image H3 of the hall displayed in the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating state as seen from the player. The character image H1 of the merchant displayed in the lower left part of the sub display device 1030 is rotated from the state of the sub display device 1030 to the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state shown in FIG. Is displayed in a state of being rotated counterclockwise by 30 ° about the rotation center. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 that has been cut off from the sub display device 1030 is displayed in the lower right part of the character image H1 in a manner not rotating as seen by the player. Also, FIG. 202 (c-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 202 (c). The image data shown in FIG. 202 (c-1) is image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 202 (b-1) clockwise by 30 ° about the center of the image data. 202 (c-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (c-1) to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 202 (c). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (c-1) around the center of the image data. In addition, the display data shown in FIG. 202 (c-2) is first displayed at a predetermined position (the position shown in FIG. 202 (b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (c-1). This is display data in which the character image H1 of the merchant read from the ROM 406 of the sub control unit 400 is superimposed. 202 (c-3) shows an image displayed on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 202 (c-2) so that the sub display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 202 (b). The state rotated by 30 ° is shown, and the state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG. 202 (c) is shown.

  FIG. 202 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise by 15 ° about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state shown in FIG. 202 (c). . The character image H3 of the hall displayed in the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating state as seen from the player. The character image H1 of the merchant displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 1030 is rotated from the state of the sub display device 1030 to the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state shown in FIG. Is displayed in a state of being rotated counterclockwise by 15 ° about the center of rotation. Further, on the sub display device 1030, all of the princess character image H4 is displayed to the right of the merchant character image H1 in a manner not rotating as seen from the player. Also, FIG. 202 (d-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 202 (d). The image data shown in FIG. 202 (d-1) is the image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 202 (c-1) clockwise by 15 ° with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. 202 (d-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (d-1) to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 202 (d). The generated display data is shown. The display data is display data obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the center of the image data shown in FIG. 202 (d-1). Further, the display data shown in FIG. 202 (d-2) is first displayed at a predetermined position (the position shown in FIG. 202 (b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (d-1). It is display data in which the character image H1 of the merchant read from the ROM 406 of the sub control unit 400 is superimposed. 202 (d-3) shows an image displayed on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 202 (d-2) so that the sub display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 202 (c). The state after being rotated by 15 ° is shown, and the state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG. 202 (d) is shown.

  FIG. 202 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 15 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 202 (d) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. The character image H3 of the hall displayed in the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating state as seen from the player. Further, the character image H1 of the merchant displayed in the lower left part of the sub display device 1030 is rotated from the sub display device 1030, so that the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state shown in FIG. Is displayed in a mode in which it is rotated by 15 ° clockwise about the rotation center. Further, on the sub display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 is displayed in the lower right part of the character image H1 in a manner not rotated by the player, and the other part is cut off from the sub display device 1030. ing. In addition, FIG. 202 (e) shows a state immediately before the end of the rotation display advance notice effect as the reach effect. Also, FIG. 202 (e-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 202 (e). The image data shown in FIG. 202 (e-1) is the image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 202 (d-1) by 15 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. 202E-2 uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 202E-1 to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 202E. The generated display data is shown. The display data is display data obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 around the center of the image data from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (e-1). In addition, the display data shown in FIG. 202 (e-2) is first displayed at a predetermined position (the position shown in FIG. 202 (b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (e-1). It is display data in which the character image H1 of the merchant read from the ROM 406 of the sub control unit 400 is superimposed. FIG. 202 (e-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 202 (e-2) and rotates the sub display device 1030 clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 202 (d). The state of being rotated by 15 ° is shown, and the state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG. 202D is shown.

  FIG. 202 (f) shows a state where the sub display device 1030 has rotated from the state shown in FIG. 202 (e) by 30 ° in the clockwise direction with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation. Is shown. The character image H3 of the hall displayed in the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating state as seen from the player. The character image H1 of the merchant displayed in the lower left part of the sub display device 1030 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 202 (e) so that the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 is displayed. The image is displayed in a state where it is rotated clockwise by 30 ° about the center of rotation and returned to the original position. Further, on the sub display device 1030, the princess character image H4 is not displayed. 202 (f-1) shows the image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display the image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 202 (f). The image data shown in FIG. 202 (f-1) is image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 202 (e-1) 30 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the rotation center. This is the same as the image data shown in (b-1). 202 (f-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (f-1) to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 202 (f). The generated display data is shown. Also, the display data shown in FIG. 202 (f-2) is stored in the first sub-control unit 400 at a predetermined position (lower left of the display data) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (b-1). The display data is the display data obtained by superimposing the character image H1 of the merchant read from the ROM 406, and the display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 202 (b-2). 202 (f-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 202 (f-2), and the sub display device 1030 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 202 (e). The state of being rotated by 30 ° is shown, and the state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG. FIG. 202 (f-3) shows the same state as FIG. 202 (b-3).

  As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, while the sub display device 1030 is rotated, the character image displayed on the sub display device 1030 in a non-rotating manner as seen from the player (the character image H3 of the lord). And a character image H4) of a princess and a character image (character image H1 of a merchant) displayed in a manner of being rotated when viewed from the player. On the rotating sub display device 1030, a character image displayed in a non-rotating state as viewed by the player and a character image displayed in a rotating state as viewed by the player are simultaneously displayed, Sometimes it can give the player an unexpected surprise. Further, in the production during the symbol change, when the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment is performed, the symbol variation display is finally a big hit symbol mode, as compared with the case where the lateral movement display notice effect is not performed. May be configured to be easily displayed as a fixed stop. Further, instead of the sub display device 1030, the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. May be performed. In the case of performing the effect of this embodiment on the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated and moved.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the gaming table according to the first embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 to 202 again.
(D1)
A gaming table provided with a first movable body (for example, a movable body 1002) capable of executing a production operation for producing a game,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100) or a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 2000),
When the power is turned off, the first movable body is configured to move from a second position (for example, an initial position) to a first position (for example, a lowermost position),
The first movable body is configured to move from the first position (for example, the lowermost position) to the second position (for example, the initial position) when the power is turned on. ,
The second position and the first position are different positions,
The effect operation is configured to start from the second position (for example, an initial position) and end at the second position,
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming table having the above configuration, the durability of the driving unit that drives the first movable body may be improved in some cases.
(D2)
The gaming machine described in (D1) above,
Even when the power is turned off in a state where the first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) is located at a position different from the second position (for example, the initial position), the first movable body is Configured to move to the first position,
A game table characterized by that.
(D3)
The gaming table according to (D1) or (D2) above,
The effect operation includes an operation of moving to a third position (for example, an uppermost position),
The third position and the first position are different positions,
The third position and the second position are different positions,
A game table characterized by that.
(D4)
The gaming machine described in (D3) above,
An image display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) is provided,
The first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) is a movable body provided on the front side of the image display unit,
The third position is a position on the front side of the image display means,
A game table characterized by that.
(D5)
The gaming machine described in (D4) above,
It is possible to execute a big hit operation (for example, a big hit game effect),
The first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) is a movable body provided on the front side of the image display unit (for example, the decorative pattern display device 208),
At least the notice image (for example, a cloud image or a balloon image) displayed on the image display means when the first movable body is located at the third position (for example, the uppermost position). In some cases, the first movable body may overlap,
The notice image is the notice image of the jackpot.
A game table characterized by that.
(D6)
The gaming table according to any one of (D1) to (D5) above,
The first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) can execute an initial operation on condition that the power supply is turned on,
In the above (D1), "the first movable body moves from the first position to the second position" means "the first movable body moves from the first position to the initial operation". And move to the second position at the end of the initial operation ”(see, for example, FIGS. 177 (c) to (g)),
A game table characterized by that.
(D7)
The gaming table according to any one of (D1) to (D5) above,
The first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) can execute an initial operation on condition that the power supply is turned on,
In the above (D1), "the first movable body moves from the first position to the second position" means "the first movable body moves from the first position to the second position". After moving to the position No., the initial operation is started, and at the end of the initial operation, the operation is again moved to the second position ”(see, for example, FIGS. 179 (n) to (p)).
A game table characterized by that.
(D8)
The gaming table according to any one of (D1) to (D7) above,
"When the power is turned off" described in (D1) above is "when the main power of the gaming table is turned off".
The "when the power is turned on" described in (D1) above is "when the main power of the gaming table is turned on".
A game table characterized by that.
(D9)
The gaming table according to any one of (D1) to (D8) above,
The first movable body (for example, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002) is a movable body whose posture can be changed.
A game table characterized by that.
(D10)
The gaming table according to any one of (D1) to (D9) above,
A second movable body (for example, a movable body 1006) capable of executing a production operation for producing a game,
The second movable body is a movable body that starts operation from a position when the power is turned off when the power is turned on.
A game table characterized by that.
(D11)
The gaming table according to any one of (D1) to (D10) above,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game table characterized by that.
(D12)
The gaming table according to any one of (D1) to (D10) above,
The gaming table is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 2000),
A game table characterized by that.

All the production operations of the first production movable body are configured to start from the second position and end at the second position.
(D13)
The gaming table according to any one of (D1) to (12) above,
The staging operation may start from the second position and end at the fourth position,
The production operation may start from the fourth position and end at the second position,
The fourth position is a position different from the first position,
The fourth position is a position different from the second position,
The fourth position is a position different from the third position,
A game table characterized by that.
(D14)
The gaming machine described in (D13) above,
The production operation may be started from the fourth position and ended at the fourth position,
A game table characterized by that.
(D15)
The game table according to (D13) or (14) above,
The first movable body is configured to move from the fourth position to the first position even when the power is turned off while the first movable body is in the fourth position. ing,
A game table characterized by that.
(D16)
The gaming table according to any one of (D1) to (D15) above,
The first movable body is configured to move from the third position to the first position even when the power is turned off while the first movable body is in the third position. ing,
A game table characterized by that.
(D17)
The gaming table according to any one of (D1) to (D16) above,
Fourth control means for controlling the movable body,
A game machine comprising: a drive unit that drives the movable body.

  The first control means is the main control unit 300 that performs a lottery (for example, a big hit lottery) advantageous to the player. The first control means may be composed of one or a plurality of control circuits or one or a plurality of control boards.

  The second control means, in accordance with the command signal from the first control means, produces means for producing a game (for example, an illumination unit (LED or the like), sound output means (speaker or the like), image display means (liquid crystal display). It is a sub-control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that performs effect control of the device, the dot matrix, etc. The second control unit may be configured by one or a plurality of control circuits, or 1 Alternatively, the second control means may, for example, randomly select an effect to be performed by the effecting means in accordance with drive control of the effecting means or a command signal from the first controlling means. Select, etc.

  The third control unit is a production control unit that communicates with the second control unit and performs production control (for example, drive control) of the production unit. The effect control means may be composed of one or a plurality of control circuits, or may be composed of one or a plurality of control boards. The third control means may control the effect means according to the effect command from the second control means, or may determine the effect to be executed according to the effect command from the second control means, Information based on the determined result may be returned to the second control unit or the rendering unit may be driven.

The fourth control unit is a production control unit that communicates with the third control unit and performs production control of one or more or all of the production units (the sub liquid crystal unit 1030 and the movable bodies 1002 to 1012). The fourth control means may be composed of one or a plurality of control circuits, or may be composed of one or a plurality of control boards. The effect means may be controlled according to the effect command, or the effect to be executed is determined according to the effect command from the third control means, and the information based on the determined result is returned to the third control means. Alternatively, the rendering unit may be driven, and the fourth control unit may be mounted on the moving unit 1036.
(D18)
The gaming machine described in (D17) above,
The fourth control means is mounted on a drive unit (for example, moving unit 1036),
When at least one operation (for example, vertical movement) of a plurality of operations by the movable body, the drive unit also performs the same operation,
A game table characterized by that.

  In the above embodiment, since the moving unit 1036 is provided on the movable body 1002, when the movable body 1002 moves up and down, the moving unit 1036 also operates together with the movable body 1002, but the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. In this case, the moving unit 1036 is configured not to rotate. The moving unit 1036 may be arranged separately from the moving body 1002 so that the moving unit 1036 does not move together when the moving body 1002 moves up and down, and also when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates. The mobile unit 1036 may be configured to operate together, or the mobile unit 1036 may be configured to operate together during all operations of the movable body 1002.

Although the movable body 1002 has shown the example in which the vertical movement (position change, movement) and the rotational movement (posture change) can be performed, the movement other than the vertical movement (for example, horizontal position change / movement) may be performed. However, a tilting operation (for example, an operation in which the left or right side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 tilts forward or backward around the vertical rotation axis or an upper side or lower side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 around the horizontal rotation axis moves forward or backward). The operation of tilting backward) may be performed.
(D19)
The gaming table according to any one of (D1) to (D18) above,
Fourth control means for controlling the movable body,
Drive means for driving the movable body,
A detection means for detecting the position of the first movable body,
When the confirmation condition is satisfied, the position of the first movable body is confirmed.
When the position of the first movable body is not the first position, the first movable body is configured to move to the first position,
The confirmation condition is a condition that is satisfied when the power is turned off,
Game table (E1) characterized by
An image display unit (for example, a main liquid crystal unit 1001 or a sub liquid crystal unit 1032) capable of displaying a performance image that directs a game,
Drive means (for example, a motor) for driving the image display unit,
A gaming machine equipped with
The image display unit may move by the drive of the drive means,
In a period (hereinafter, referred to as “first period”) in which the image display unit is moving in a first direction (a rotation direction around a rotation axis of the image display unit, or a linear direction), the image display is performed. The unit may display a first moving image (for example, a moving image of the character image H3 of the hall or a moving image of the character image H4 of the princess),
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which the first image moves in the first direction (see, for example, FIGS. 202 (b) to (d)),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the above structure, the movement of the image display unit gives an impact, and the display angle and the display position of the image displayed on the image display unit are changed during the movement of the image display unit. It becomes possible to perform actions that are not seen in daily life, which may allow the player to forget his or her daily life and concentrate more on the game. Further, all the periods in which the image display unit is moving in the first direction may be the first period, or a part of the period in which the image display unit is moving in the first direction. May be the first period. Further, with a certain effect as an opportunity, all the periods from the time when the image display unit starts to move in the first direction until it stops may be the first period, or with an effect different from a certain effect as an opportunity. A part of the period from when the image display unit starts moving in the first direction to when it stops may be set as the first period.
(E2)
The gaming machine described in (E1) above,
The first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode based on the first image (see, for example, FIGS. 202 (b) to (d)),
A game table characterized by that.

In the example according to the present embodiment, the example in which the facial expression, the outer shape, and the like of the first image (the character image H3 of the lord and the character image H4 of the princess) are fixedly displayed is shown. The outer shape and the like may be displayed in a deformed manner. For example, in the case of FIG. 202, the face of the lord, which was not displayed in FIG. 202 (a), is displayed as a true face in FIG. 202 (b), and is slightly smiled in FIG. 202 (c). An animation may be performed in which a full smile is shown in 202 (d), a little smile is returned in FIG. 202 (e), and a true face is returned in FIG. 202 (f). Further, the aspect in which the first image (for example, the character image H3 of the lord) moves in the first direction may indicate that the display position of the animation including the character image H3 of the lord moves. The animation is not limited to the variable display of the character display, and changes in the outer shape of the character and the like, variable display of the serif (change display from a partial character string indicating the serif to the entire character string, etc.), character or icon Color change, moving display of characters or icons, or the like, or a combination of these.
(E3)
The gaming machine according to (E1) or (E2) above,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in a first direction (for example, a counterclockwise direction) (see, for example, FIGS. 202 (b) to (d)),
During the first period, the first image is configured to move in a second orientation (eg, clockwise orientation) (eg, FIGS. 202 (b-1), (c-1), (See (d-1)),
The first orientation and the second orientation are opposite orientations,
A game table characterized by that.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, the first direction when the image display unit operates is triggered by a certain one effect (for example, the timing of starting the image display unit operation effect during super reach). Direction (for example, facing left), and with other effects as an opportunity (for example, the timing to start effects by the operation of the image display unit to inform the player whether or not the probability change at the end of the big hit begins) The first direction when the display unit operates may be another direction (for example, rightward). Further, the first direction and the second direction may be the same direction, not the opposite direction, and in this case, it is necessary for the player to move or rotate the first image faster than the moving or rotating of the image display unit. Is visible. For this reason, it is possible to give the player an extraordinary sensation that cannot be obtained in a manner in which the image is rotated in the fixed image display unit, and further, the first image in the image display unit is further speeded up. It may be possible to focus on the game by forgetting the more everyday feeling from rotating and moving.
(E4)
The gaming machine described in (E3) above,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move at a first speed in the first direction,
In the first period, the first image is configured to move at a second speed in the second direction,
The first speed and the second speed are the same speed (for example, FIGS. 202 (b) to (d) and FIGS. 202 (b-1), (c-1), (d-1). )reference),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the image display unit seems to be moving to the player, but the display position, the display angle, etc. of the first image do not seem to be moving, so that it is extraordinary as a notification means. When the notification itself by the image display unit can play the same role as when it does not move, and it is possible to make both impactful operation and notification There is. In addition, the first direction and the second direction may be opposite to each other and the first speed and the second speed may be different, and in that case, the first speed and the second speed may be different from the movement and rotation of the image display unit. The player visually recognizes that one image moves or rotates slowly. For this reason, a mode in which an image rotates in a fixed image display unit is routinely found on TVs, nets, etc., but because the image display unit rotates, it is not possible to obtain it in a fixed image display unit. It is possible to give the player a realistic sensation, and since the first image in the image display unit moves and rotates so as to slowly follow the movement and rotation of the image display unit, a more everyday feeling is obtained. It may be possible to forget about and concentrate on the game. Also, when the image display unit moves or rotates quickly with a focus on impact, by slowly moving or rotating the first image, the notification itself by the image display unit display is close to when it is not moving, It may be possible to fulfill the role of notification.
(E5)
The gaming table according to any one of (E1) to (E4) above,
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which a second image (for example, a character image H1 of a merchant) is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 202),
A game table characterized by that.
(E6)
The gaming machine described in (E5) above,
During the first period, the second image is configured not to move in the first direction (see, for example, FIGS. 202 (b-2), (c-2), and (d-2). ),
A game table characterized by that.

The gaming machine having the above configuration may be configured such that the second image that does not move in the first direction is not displayed during the first period. That is, in the first period, since all the images displayed on the image display unit are configured to move in the first direction, the movements of the image display unit and the image have a sense of unity and have a greater impact. The staging operation may become executable in some cases.
(E7)
The gaming machine according to (E5) or (E6) above,
The game table, wherein the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode by the second image.

In the example according to the present embodiment, an example in which the facial expression, outer shape, and the like of the second image (merchant character image h1 ′) is fixedly displayed has been described, but according to the gaming machine having the configuration, The expression, outline, etc. of the second image may be displayed in a deformed manner. For example, referring to FIG. 170 as an example, the face of the merchant, which was not displayed on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 170 (a), is displayed as a true face in FIG. 170 (b), and a little in FIG. 170 (c). An animation may be performed such that the face becomes a steep face, the face becomes a steep face in FIG. 170 (d), the face returns to a slightly steep face in FIG. 170 (e), and returns to the true face in FIG. 170 (f). Moreover, the aspect that the second image does not move in the first direction may indicate that the display position of the animation does not move. The animation is not limited to the variable display of the character display, and changes in the outer shape of the character and the like, variable display of the serif (change display from a partial character string indicating the serif to the entire character string, etc.), character or icon Color change, moving display of characters or icons, or the like, or a combination of these.
(E8)
The gaming table according to any one of (E1) to (E7) above,
“Move by driving the driving means” described in (E1) means “rotate by driving the driving means”,
"The first image moves in the first direction" described in (E1) above means "the first image rotates in the first direction".
The first direction is a rotation direction around the rotation axis of the image display unit (see, for example, FIG. 202),
A game table characterized by that.
(E9)
The gaming machine according to (E3) or (E4) above,
The first direction is one of clockwise and counterclockwise (see, for example, FIG. 202),
A game table characterized by that.
(E10)
The gaming table according to any one of (E1) to (E7) above,
“Move by driving the driving means” described in (E1) means “move linearly by driving the driving means”,
The "first image moves in the first direction" described in (E1) above means "the first image moves linearly in the first direction" (see, for example, FIG. 200). ),
A game table characterized by that.

  The above "the first image moves linearly in the first direction" may be "the first image moves linearly in the vertical direction". In this case, the above-mentioned first direction is one of upward and downward. Further, the above-mentioned “first image moves linearly in the first direction” may be “first image moves linearly in the left-right direction”. In this case, the first direction is one of leftward and rightward. The above "the first image moves linearly in the first direction" may be "the first image moves linearly in an oblique direction". In this case, the above-mentioned first direction is one of the upper left direction, the lower right direction, the upper right direction, and the lower left direction.

  A modified example of the configuration described in the example according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. For example, the movement by the driving of the driving means may be a combined movement of rotational movement and linear movement (vertical direction, horizontal direction, diagonal direction, front-back direction when viewed from the player). In addition, the pachinko machine 100 may be configured to include a plurality of image display units. In addition, a plurality of image display devices may be mounted on one image display unit. The image display unit may be equipped with an LED or a performance movable body. In addition, before the image display unit is rotated or moved, the production movable body is moved from the initial state to the movable state, and after the production movable body is in the movable state, the image display unit is rotated or moved. It may be configured such that the effecting movable body is stopped and then moved to the initial state. Further, during the symbol variation display, the case in which the effect operation shown in FIG. 198 is performed is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display, as compared with the case where the effect operation shown in FIG. 197 is performed. The mode may be configured to be a big hit mode more easily, and when the effect operation of FIG. 197 is performed than when the effect operation of FIG. 198 is performed during the symbol variable display, The symbol mode finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variable display may be configured to be a big hit mode. Further, when the effect operation of FIG. 197 is performed during the symbol variation display, the symbol aspect finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display may be configured to be a big hit aspect, When the effect operation of FIG. 198 is performed during the symbol variable display, the symbol mode finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variable display may be configured to be a big hit mode. 197 and 198 show an example in which the same effect display is performed, but when the sub display device shown in FIG. 197 rotates, the image displayed on the sub display device also rotates. The effect visually recognized by the player is different from the effect visually recognized by the player so that the image displayed on the sub display device shown in FIG. 198 does not rotate together when the sub display device rotates. It may be configured to produce the effect. For example, "one of the other productions" is a production in which the lord fights the musician, and "the other production of the other productions" is a production in which the princess dances. Good. One type of "one of other effects" may be installed, a plurality of types may be installed, and one type of "the other effect of another effects" may be installed. Multiple types may be installed. Further, when the sub display device is rotated as shown in FIG. 167, at least a part (or all of the images) displayed on the sub display device is rotated together with the number of types of effects. As shown in 198, when the sub display device rotates, at least part (or all) of the image displayed on the sub display device is visually recognized by the player so as not to rotate together. The number of types may be increased. Conversely, when the sub display device rotates as shown in FIG. 198, at least part (or all) of the image displayed on the sub display device is visually recognized by the player so as not to rotate together. 197 of at least some (or all) images displayed on the sub display device rotate together when the sub display device rotates as shown in FIG. 197. The number of types may be increased.

Also, the effect example shown in FIG. 197 and the effect example shown in FIG. 198 may be combined. For example, in a period (period A) when the sub display device starts to rotate, the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed A (for example, 20 rpm) and displayed on the sub display device. The image does not rotate the image displayed on the sub-display so that it is visible to the player as it rotates with the sub-display. In the next period (period B), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed B (for example, 40 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than that displayed on the sub display device. At least a part or all of the image is rotated in another direction (eg, clockwise) at a speed B ′ (eg, 20 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize it as rotating slowly. In the next period (period C), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed C (for example, 50 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than that for the sub display device. At least a part or all of the image is rotated in another direction (eg, clockwise) at a speed C ′ (eg, 40 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize it as rotating slowly. In the next period (period D), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at the speed D (for example, 60 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is rotated. Without rotating at least part or all of the image in another direction (eg, clockwise) at a speed D (eg, 60 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize that only the sub-display device is rotating. Let In the next period (period E), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at the speed E (for example, 50 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than that for the sub display device. At least a part or all of the image is rotated in another direction (eg, clockwise) at a speed E ′ (eg, 40 rpm) so that the player can recognize it as rotating slowly. In the next period (period F), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (e.g., counterclockwise) at a speed F (e.g., 40 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than that displayed on the sub display device. At least a part or all of the image is rotated in another direction (eg, clockwise) at a speed F ′ (eg, 20 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize it as rotating slowly. In the next period before the sub display device finishes rotating (period G), the sub display device is rotated at a speed G (for example, 20 rpm) in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) to display on the sub display device. The image to be displayed may not be rotated so that it can be visually recognized by the player so as to rotate together with the sub display device. As described above, as illustrated in the period A to the period D, as the period in which the sub display device rotates increases, the rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device gradually deviates from the rotation of the sub display device. By rotating the sub-display device and shifting to a state where the player can visually recognize that part or all of the display of the sub-display device is stopped, a new sense of unity with the sub-display device and images can be obtained. In some cases, it is possible to perform a certain effect. Further, as in the examples from the period D to the period G, as the period in which the sub display device rotates advances, the rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device gradually rotates together with the sub display device. By allowing the player to visually recognize such changes, it may be possible to perform a new sense of unity with the sub display device and the image. In these examples, in the periods A to D, the difference between the rotation speed of the sub display device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually reduced, and in the periods D to G, the sub display is performed. Although the difference between the rotation speed of the device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually increased, conversely, during the periods A to D, the rotation speed of the sub display device is increased. The difference between the speed and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually increased, and during the periods D to G, the rotation speed of the sub display device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device are increased. The difference in speed may be gradually reduced. Although the rotating sub display device and the image displayed on the rotating sub display device are illustrated here, the present invention is also applicable to the linear display sub display device and the image displayed on the linear moving sub display device. Is also possible.
(F1)
A production movable body (for example, the movable body 1001 or the movable body 1002) capable of executing a movable operation for producing a game,
A decorative body (movable body 1008) provided with a window portion (for example, transparent portions 1008a, 1008b);
A gaming machine equipped with
The effect movable body may perform an operation behind the decorative body (see, for example, FIGS. 186 (f) to (k)),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming table having the above configuration, the effect movable body hidden by the ornamental body allows the player to visually recognize the operation of the effectable movable body through the window of the ornamental body. In some cases, it is possible to perform a motion that is not seen in daily life, which allows the player to forget his or her daily life and concentrate more on the game.
(F2)
The gaming machine described in (F1) above,
The effect movable body is a movable body capable of displaying an image,
It is configured so that the player can visually recognize the image of the effect movable body through the window (see, for example, FIGS. 186 (f) to (k)).
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, since the effect movable body hidden by the decorative body is configured to be able to display an image, the action and image of the effect movable body can be displayed to the player through the window of the decorative body. Can be visually recognized, and as an informing means, it is possible to perform an operation that cannot be seen on a daily basis, and it may be possible for the player to forget his or her daily life and concentrate more on the game. In addition, a plurality of effect movable bodies capable of displaying images may be provided, or only one effect movable body may be provided. Further, the effect movable body capable of displaying an image operable behind the decorative body may have a main liquid crystal unit or may have a sub liquid crystal unit. In addition, the effect movable body capable of displaying an image that can be operated behind the ornament may have both the main liquid crystal unit and the sub liquid crystal unit, or may have two or more sub liquid crystal units. There may be.
(F3)
The gaming machine described in (F2) above,
The image of the effect movable body visually recognized by the player through the window may change due to the operation of the effect movable body (see, for example, FIGS. 186 (f) to (k)).
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming table having the above configuration, by performing the operation behind the ornament, the image displayed on the effect movable body visually recognized through the window of the ornament changes. In some cases, it can give a surprising surprise. In addition, the above-mentioned "the image of the effect movable body changes" means that the image displayed on the effect movable body is changed (for example, the shape or display color of the image of the cloud is changed). It also includes the case where the appearance of the image displayed on the effect movable body changes.
(F4)
The gaming table according to any one of (F1) to (F3) above,
The ornamental body is operable (see, for example, FIGS. 186 (e) and (f)),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming table having the above configuration, since the decorative body can be operated, it may be possible to perform an effect in which the operation of the decorative object and the operation of the effect movable body are linked.
(F5)
The gaming table according to any one of (F1) to (F4) above,
It is provided with a symbol display means capable of executing variable display of symbols (for example, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214),
A game table characterized by that.
(F6)
The gaming machine described in (F5) above,
In the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means, the player visually recognizes a part of an image (for example, a cloud image) on the effect movable body through the window portion of the ornament by the operation of the ornament. When it becomes possible, a big hit as the final result of the variable display of the symbol, as compared with the case where the player cannot visually recognize a part of the image on the effect movable body through the window of the decorative body. It is configured such that the symbol aspect is easily confirmed and displayed (for example, see FIGS. 186 and 187),
A part of the image on the effect movable body is an image of at least a part of the notice image,
A game table characterized by that.
(F7)
The gaming table according to (F5) or (F6) above,
By the operation of the decoration, a part of the image of the hold icon in the look-ahead mode (for example, a white rhombus mode) of the effect movable body is played through the window (for example, the transparent part 1008b) of the decoration. When the player becomes visible, compared to the case where the player does not become able to see a part of the image of the hold icon in the effect movable body in the look-ahead mode through the window of the decorative body, As a final result of the variable display of the symbols started after the suspension corresponding to the suspension icon has been exhausted, the jackpot pattern mode is easily confirmed and displayed (for example, see FIG. 193),
A game table characterized by that.
(F8)
The gaming table according to any one of F1 to F7,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game table characterized by that.
(G1)
A gaming table equipped with image display means,
The image display means (for example, the decorative pattern display device 208 or the sub display device 1030) can execute a rotation operation (for example, see FIG. 195),
The image display means in which the rotation operation is being performed may display a first image (for example, a character image H1 of the hall, a decorative pattern, a hold icon, a variable icon, etc.),
When the rotation operation is performed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change (for example, see FIG. 195 (l)),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the image display means is rotated, the aspect ratio of the first image may change, so that the presence of the first image is amplified. There is a case where the player can have a strong impression. Further, any one of the images of the character image, the decorative pattern, the hold icon, the variable icon, and the background pattern, or all of them may be the first image, and these images may be used. May use a different image as the first image. Further, the image display means capable of executing the rotation operation may be the main liquid crystal unit or the sub liquid crystal unit. In both cases, the first image may be displayed so that the aspect ratio changes. For example, when the first image is displayed on the main liquid crystal unit and the sub liquid crystal unit, and the main liquid crystal unit and the sub liquid crystal unit are rotated simultaneously or separately, and the aspect ratio of the first image is changed simultaneously or separately. There may be. In addition, by arranging two sub liquid crystal units, the two sub liquid crystal units may display the first image. In this case, the two sub liquid crystal units may be rotated in a state where they are aligned to change the aspect ratio of the first image.
(G2)
The gaming machine described in (G1) above,
The image display means in which the rotating operation is being performed may display a second image (for example, a decorative frame F1, a hold number display, an image of a fourth design),
The second image may not be rotated when the rotation operation is performed (see, for example, FIGS. 196 (k) to (p)),
A game table characterized by that.
(G3)
The gaming machine described in (G2) above,
When the rotating operation is performed, the second image does not rotate (see, for example, FIGS. 196 (k) to (p)),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the first image rotates, the second image may not rotate. Therefore, the rotation of the first image is emphasized and the second image is firmly fixed. It can be visually recognized by the player. Further, there may be a case where any of the images such as the character image, the decorative pattern, the hold icon, the variable icon, and the background pattern, or all of these images may be used as the second image. May use a different image as the second image.
(G4)
The gaming table according to any one of (G1) to (G3) above,
When the rotation operation is performed, an image (for example, a princess character image H4) that has been cut off in the image display means before the rotation operation is performed is displayed on the image display means by the rotation operation. In some cases (see, for example, FIGS. 201 (b) and 201 (c)),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the configuration, the image that has been cut off on the image display means before the rotation operation of the image display means is performed is displayed on the image display means by the rotation operation of the image display means. In some cases, this may give the player an unexpected surprise.
(G5)
The gaming table according to any one of (G1) to (G4) above,
When the rotation operation is performed, the image displayed on the image display means before the rotation operation is performed (for example, the princess character image H4) is performed in the image display means by the rotation operation. Sometimes you can get out of sight,
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the configuration, when the image displayed on the image display means before the rotation operation of the image display means is cut off by the rotation operation of the image display means. Therefore, it may be possible to give the player an unexpected surprise.
(G6)
The gaming table according to any one of (G1) to (G5) above,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game table characterized by that.
(G7)
The gaming table according to any one of (G1) to (G5) above,
The gaming table is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 2000),
A game table characterized by that.
(H1)
A production movable body (for example, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002) capable of executing a production operation for producing a game,
A base body (for example, a moving unit 1036) capable of supporting the effect movable body,
A gaming machine equipped with
The effect movable body (for example, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002) is capable of performing a rotation operation,
A slip ring (for example, rotation side substrates 1090 and 1140) is provided on one of the effect movable body and the base body,
A conductive portion (for example, conductive portions 1078 to 1088, 1130 to 1136) is provided on the other of the effect movable body and the base body,
By contacting the slip ring and the conductive portion, power is supplied from the side of the base body to the side of the effect movable body,
A game table characterized by that.
(H2)
The gaming machine described in (H1) above,
The base body is provided with a first communication means (for example, a data transmission / reception unit 1138),
The effect movable body is provided with a second communication unit (for example, a data transmission / reception unit 1144),
The second communication means is a means capable of receiving a signal transmitted from the first communication means,
A game table characterized by that.
(H3)
The gaming table according to (H1) or (H2) above,
Both the first communication means and the second communication means are means capable of optical wireless communication,
A game table characterized by that.
(H4)
The gaming table according to any one of (H1) to (H3) above,
Both the first communication means and the second communication means are means capable of laser communication,
A game table characterized by that.
(H5)
The gaming table according to any one of (H1) to (H4) above,
The slip ring (for example, rotation side substrates 1090, 1140) is provided on the effect movable body,
The conductive parts (for example, the conductive parts 1078 to 1088, 1130 to 1136) are provided on the base body.
A game table characterized by that.
(H6)
The gaming table according to any one of (H1) to (H5) above,
The effect movable body is provided with image display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208),
The second communication unit is a unit capable of receiving the image information signal transmitted from the first communication unit.
A game table characterized by that.
[Third Embodiment]
Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to a third embodiment to which the present invention is applicable will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 to 231. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the same configuration and control system as the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment. The same components as those of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, an opportunity button 139 is arranged side by side with the chance button 136 in addition to the chance button 136. The opportunity button 139 has the same function as the chance button 136.

FIG. 203 is a diagram showing an outline of the effect pattern shown in each example of the present embodiment. FIG. 203 shows an effect pattern in which effects relating to the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are executed in each example of the present embodiment. The effects related to these buttons can be roughly classified into five effect patterns (effect patterns 1 to 5). The effect regarding the button is an effect regarding the operation of the chance button 136 and / or the opportunity button 139. In FIGS. 203A to 203D, time elapses from left to right.
<Direction pattern 1>
The effect pattern 1 will be described with reference to FIG. The effect pattern 1 is an effect related to the chance button 136, and is an effect without using the opportunity button 139. The effect pattern 1 is an effect pattern that starts from the button operation wait display 1 of the display that is performed when waiting for the chance button 136 to be pressed, and the chance in the middle of displaying the button operation wait display 1 on the decorative pattern display device 208. When the player operates the chance button 136 during the valid operation period of the button 136, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the button response display 1 that is displayed according to the operation of the chance button 136. The button response display 1 is a display that does not include the display performed when waiting for the depression of the opportunity button 139. In this way, the button response display that is displayed when the player is prompted by the button operation waiting display 1 to operate the button does not include the opportunity button pressing waiting display.
<Direction pattern 2>
The effect pattern 2 will be described with reference to the upper part of FIG. The effect pattern 2 is an effect related to the chance button 136. The production pattern 2 starts from the button operation waiting display 3 that is displayed when waiting for the chance button 136 to be pressed, and the operation of the chance button 136 in the middle of displaying the button operation waiting display 3 on the decorative pattern display device 208. When the player operates the chance button 136 during the valid period, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the button response display 3 that is displayed according to the operation of the chance button 136. The button response display 3 is a display that does not include a part of the display performed when waiting for the depression of the opportunity button 139.
<Direction pattern 3>
The effect pattern 3 will be described with reference to the lower part of FIG. The effect pattern 3 is an effect regarding the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139. The effect pattern 3 is an effect pattern that starts from the button operation wait display 3 that is displayed when waiting for the chance button 136 to be pressed, and the chance in the middle of displaying the button operation wait display 3 on the decorative pattern display device 208. When the player operates the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the button 136, the decoration symbol display device 208 is a display that is performed according to the operation of the chance button 136, and is performed when the opportunity button 139 is pressed. The button response display 4 including the display is displayed, and then, when the player operates the opportunity button 139 during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 displayed in the button response display 4, the decoration pattern display device 208 displays the opportunity button 139. A button response display 5 that is performed in response to the pressing is displayed.

When the button operation wait display 3 is displayed and the player operates the chance button 136 by being prompted by the button operation wait display 3, the effect pattern 2 (effect regarding opportunity button) or effect pattern 3 (opportunity button and opportunity). One of the effect patterns (effects related to the button) is determined. The effect pattern may be determined in advance before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, or the effect pattern is determined by the timing at which the player presses the chance button 136, the number of times the button is pressed, or the like. There may be cases. In this way, the button response display that is displayed when the player is prompted by the button operation waiting display 3 to operate the button includes the opportunity button pressing wait display (or a part of the opportunity button pressing wait display). It may or may not be included.
<Production pattern 4>
The effect pattern 4 will be described with reference to FIG. The effect pattern 4 is an effect regarding the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139. The production pattern 4 starts from the button operation waiting display 4 that is displayed when waiting for the chance button 136 to be pressed, and the operation of the chance button 136 in the middle of displaying the button operation waiting display 4 on the decorative pattern display device 208. When the player operates the chance button 136 during the valid period, the decorative pattern display device 208 is a display that is performed according to the operation of the chance button 136, and includes a display that is performed when the opportunity button 139 is pressed down. When the player operates the opportunity button 139 while the response display 4 is displayed and then the operation button 4 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139, the decoration pattern display device is displayed. A button response display 5 is displayed in 208 in response to the depression of the opportunity button 139. In this way, the button response display that is displayed when the player is prompted by the button operation waiting display 4 to operate the button includes the opportunity button pressing waiting display.
<Direction pattern 5>
The effect pattern 5 will be described with reference to FIG. The effect pattern 5 is an effect regarding the opportunity button 139. The production pattern 5 starts from the button operation waiting display 5 that is displayed when waiting for the depression of the opportunity button 139, and the operation of the opportunity button 139 in the middle of displaying the button operation waiting display 5 on the decorative pattern display device 208. When the player operates the opportunity button 139 during the valid period, the button response display 2 of the display performed according to the operation of the opportunity button 139 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Thus, in the effect pattern 5, the button operation waiting display 5 that prompts the operator to operate the opportunity button 139 when the effect related to the button is started is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, in the effect patterns 1 to 5 that are performed during the variable display of symbols, the ease with which the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed is varied depending on the effect pattern. In the present embodiment, of the effect patterns 1 to 5, the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 4 is performed is configured such that the jackpot pattern mode is most likely to be confirmed and displayed, whereas only the effect pattern 2 is displayed. The removed symbol variation display is configured such that the largest jackpot symbol mode is hard to be confirmed and displayed. The symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 3 is performed is configured such that the big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 3 is not performed and the effect pattern 3 is performed. The symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 3 is performed is configured such that the big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 3 is not performed and the effect pattern 3 is performed. In the case where the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 5 is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 5 is not performed and the effect pattern 5 is performed, the effect pattern 5 is In the case where the symbol variation display in which the production pattern 1 is performed without being performed and the symbol variation display in which the production pattern 5 is performed without performing the production pattern 1 are configured such that the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed with the same probability. There is also. In the production pattern 4 in which it is easy to stop and display the big hit mode, the opportunity button 136 must be pressed in order to press the opportunity button 139, so that the player's motivation to operate the opportunity button 139 is increased, and at the same time, the chance is given. In some cases, the motivation for operating the button 136 can be increased and the interest of the player can be improved. It should be noted that the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may employ a device other than the above examples. In the present embodiment, in the effect patterns 1 to 5 that are performed during the variable display of symbols, the effect patterns may be configured so that the ease of confirming and displaying the big hit symbol mode is the same.

  As shown in FIG. 203, in the effect patterns 1 to 5, when the chance button 136 is pressed, it is determined that the chance button 136 has been operated. However, in the effect patterns 1 to 5, operation is performed by an operation method other than pressing There may be a case where it is determined that it has been done. For example, when the chance button 136 is configured to be rotatable, when the player rotates the chance button 136 from the normal state by a predetermined angle or more, it is determined that the chance button 136 has been operated. It may be configured.

  As shown in FIG. 203, in the effect patterns 1 to 5, when the opportunity button 139 is pressed, it is determined that the opportunity button 139 has been operated. There may be a case where it is determined that it has been done. For example, when the opportunity button 139 is configured to be rotatable, when the player rotates the opportunity button 139 from the normal state by a predetermined angle or more, it is determined that the opportunity button 139 has been operated. It may be configured. The predetermined angle of the chance button 136 and the predetermined angle of the opportunity button 139 may be the same or different.

As shown in FIG. 203, in the effect patterns 1 to 5, the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are used, but an operation means other than these may be used. For example, instead of the chance button 136 or the opportunity button 139, an operation means using the setting operation unit 137 or the transparent member 118 as a button may be used, or a handle operation means may be used. The start timing and the end timing of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the effect patterns 1 to 5 are determined before the button operation waiting display 1 or the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, and the operation of the opportunity button 139 is enabled. The start time and the end time of the period are determined before the button operation waiting display 2 or the button response display 4 is displayed. Note that the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 203 may be executed by the sub display device 1030 instead of the decorative symbol display device 208, or by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. It may be executed by both.
(Example 1-1)
An effect example of Example 1-1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 204. FIG. 204 shows an example of effects in the effect pattern 1 shown in FIG. 203 (a), and shows the effect states in time series. FIG. 204 (a) shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174, and FIGS. 204 (b) to (f) show the main liquid crystal unit from the game board 1000. 1001 and the movable body 1002 are extracted and shown. 204 to 231, the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are schematically shown. A character string of “push” is written on the pressing surface of the chance button 136, and a character string of “press” is written on the pressing surface of the opportunity button 139. Note that the movable bodies 1006, 1008, and 1012 are not shown in FIG. 204 and subsequent figures.

  FIG. 204 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 204 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0.

  FIG. 204 (b) continuing from FIG. 204 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In and after FIG. 204, the variable display of the decorative design is represented by a downward thick white arrow. FIG. 204 (b) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state. The chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 uses an LED as a light source. The opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 uses an LED as a light source. When the chance button 136 is in the normal state, the chance button lamp 138 may not be emitting light, or the chance button lamp 138 may be emitting light in a predetermined manner. When the opportunity button 139 is in the normal state, the opportunity button lamp 141 may not be emitting light, or the opportunity button lamp 141 may be emitting light in a predetermined manner. The light source of the chance button lamp 138 and the opportunity button lamp 141 may be a light emitting means other than the LED.

  FIG. 204 (c) subsequent to FIG. 204 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 204 (b) onward, the effect (reach effect) by the advance notice animation is started.

  FIG. 204 (d) subsequent to FIG. 204 (c) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 1 of this example, an image showing the chance button 136 displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “chance button image”). ) Corresponds to an image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped (hereinafter, may be referred to as “button pressing instruction image”). When the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be. In FIG. 204 (d), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. It represents the state. The plurality of lines shown above the chance button 136 indicates a state in which the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). Is represented. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by causing the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). There are cases. It should be noted that the chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a manner that moves during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 (for example, movement that repeats vertical and horizontal movement display), and the chance button 136 is displayed. The display may be stopped outside the operation valid period.

  In FIG. 204 (e), which continues from FIG. 204 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, so that the button response display 1 (performed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136). As a display), a state in which a character string image of “chance” is displayed in a substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. It should be noted that if the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button response display 1 of this example may not be displayed, or the chance button 136 is operated. The button response display 1 of this example may be configured to be displayed even when the chance button 136 is not operated during the valid period.

FIG. 204 (f) subsequent to FIG. 204 (e) shows a state in which the off symbol design mode is confirmed and displayed with the end of the effect by the notice animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out. In addition, in the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed.
(Example 1-2)
An example of effects of Example 1-2 of the present exemplary embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 205. FIG. 205 shows an example of the effect in the effect pattern 1 shown in FIG. 203, and shows the effect state in time series.

  FIG. 205 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In FIG. 205A, the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are shown to be in the normal state.

  FIG. 205 (b) following FIG. 205 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The production (reach production) by the advance animation is started from FIG. 205 (b).

  FIG. 205 (c) subsequent to FIG. 205 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button operation waiting display 1 of this example corresponds to the button pressing instruction image in the same manner as the button operation waiting display 1 shown in the embodiment 1-1, in which the chance button image and three inverted triangles overlap each other. In FIG. 205C, a state in which the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits in a manner different from the normal state) during the valid operation period of the chance button 136. Is represented. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by causing the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). There are cases. The color of the chance button image displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the emission color of the chance button 136 may be the same or different. You may. It should be noted that the chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a manner that moves during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 (for example, movement that repeats vertical and horizontal movement display), and the chance button 136 is displayed. The display may be stopped outside the operation valid period.

  In FIG. 205 (d), which continues from FIG. 205 (c), when the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 205 (c) is displayed, the button response display 1 ( The display performed according to the pressing of the chance button 136) is displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The button response display 1 of this example corresponds to the character string image of “chance !!” different from the button response display 1 shown in the embodiment 1-1. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button response display 1 of this example may not be displayed, and the operation of the chance button 136 is effective. The button response display 1 of this example may be displayed even if the chance button 136 is not operated during the period.

  FIG. 205 (e) subsequent to FIG. 205 (d) shows a state in which the off symbol design mode is confirmed and displayed with the end of the effect by the notice animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out.

  An effect example of Example 1-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 206. FIG. 206 shows an example in which the special figure variation game executing the effect example shown in FIG. 205 is a big hit, and shows the effect state in time series. FIGS. 206 (a) to (d) show the same effect state as FIGS. 205 (a) to (d).

  FIG. 206 (e) subsequent to FIG. 206 (d) shows a state in which the jackpot pattern mode is confirmed and displayed with the end of the effect by the notice animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

Thus, FIGS. 204 to 206 show an example of the effect pattern 1 shown in FIG. 203 (a). In the effect shown in Example 1-1, the character string image of "chance" is displayed as the button response display 1, and in the effect shown in Example 1-2, the character string image of "chance!" Is displayed as the button response display 1. Is displayed. In the pattern variation display in which the effect pattern 1 is performed, the button response display is more than the pattern variation display in which the character image of “chance” is not displayed as the button response display 1 but the character image of “chance” is displayed. The variable symbol display in which the character string image of “chance !!” is displayed as 1 may be configured such that the jackpot pattern mode is more easily confirmed and displayed. Even in the case of the same type of effect pattern 1, it may be possible to improve the player's interest by changing the easiness of the confirmation display of the big hit symbol mode depending on the display of the button response display 1. .. In the variation display of symbols in which the effect pattern 1 is performed, the button response display 1 does not display the character string image of “chance” but the character string image of “chance! The symbol variable display in which the character string image of “chance” is displayed as the response display 1 may be configured so that the confirmation display of the big hit symbol mode is more likely to be performed, or the button response display 1 may be the “chance” With the variable pattern display in which the character string image is displayed without displaying the character string image and the variable pattern display in which the character string image with “Chance !!” is displayed as the button response display 1, it is a big hit. You may comprise so that the easiness of the fixed display of a symbol aspect may become the same.
(Example 1-3)
An example of effects of Example 1-3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 207. FIG. 207 shows a modification of the effect pattern 1 shown in FIG. 203 (a), and shows the effect state in time series.

  FIG. 207 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 207A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  207 (b) following FIG. 207 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a, 208c. After FIG. 207 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the advance notice animation is started.

  207 (c) subsequent to FIG. 207 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed. The button operation waiting display 1 of the present example corresponds to the chance button image which is the same display as the button operation waiting display 1 shown in the embodiment 1-1 and the button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped. In FIG. 207 (c), in connection with the display of the button operation waiting display 1, the chance button 136 is in a state different from the normal state, and the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined manner (or different from the normal state). The state of emitting light is shown. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by causing the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). There are cases. It should be noted that the chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a manner that moves during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 (for example, movement that repeats vertical and horizontal movement display), and the chance button 136 is displayed. The display may be stopped outside the operation valid period.

207 (d) following FIG. 207 (c) shows that the player does not need to press the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 207 (c) is displayed, and the operation of the chance button 136 is valid. The period is over, and thereafter, the button response display is not displayed and the effect by the notice animation is finished, and the state in which the off symbol design is confirmed is displayed. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out. In addition, the symbol variable display in which the effect of this example is performed may be a confirmed display of the jackpot pattern mode.
(Example 1-4)
An example of effects of Example 1-4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 208. FIG. 208 shows an example of the effect in the effect pattern 1 described above, and shows the effect state in time series.

  FIG. 208 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 208 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 208 (b) subsequent to FIG. 208 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 208 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the advance notice animation is started.

  FIG. 208 (c) continuing from FIG. 208 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. The button operation waiting display 1 of the present example is a button pressing instruction image and “press!” Displayed in a substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, in which the chance button image and three inverted triangles overlap each other. Corresponds to the character string image. When the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be. FIG. 208C shows a state in which the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by causing the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). There are cases. It should be noted that the chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a manner that moves during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 (for example, movement that repeats vertical and horizontal movement display), and the chance button 136 is displayed. The display may be stopped outside the operation valid period.

  In FIG. 208 (d) continuing from FIG. 208 (c), when the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 208 (c) is displayed, the button response display 1 ( As a display performed according to the pressing of the chance button 136), a state in which a character string image of “large chance” is displayed in a substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. It should be noted that if the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button response display 1 of this example may not be displayed, or the chance button 136 is operated. The button response display 1 of this example may be configured to be displayed even when the chance button 136 is not operated during the valid period. Characters of "Large chance" are displayed as the button response display 1 rather than the variable pattern display in which the character string image of "Large chance" is not displayed as the button response display 1 and the character string image of "Chance" or "Chance !!" is displayed. There may be a case where the symbol variable display for displaying the column images is configured so that the big hit symbol aspect is more likely to be confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 208 (e) continuing from FIG. 208 (d) shows a state in which the off symbol design mode is confirmed and displayed with the end of the effect by the notice animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out.
(Example 1-5)
An effect example of Example 1-5 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 209. FIG. 209 shows an example of the effect in the effect pattern 1 described above, and shows the effect state in time series.

  FIG. 209 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 209A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  209 (b) following FIG. 209 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a, 208c. From FIG. 209 (b) onward, the effect (reach effect) by the advance animation is started.

  209 (c) subsequent to FIG. 209 (b) shows a state in which the button operation wait display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed. The button operation waiting display 1 of the present example is the same as the button operation waiting display 1 shown in the embodiment 1-4, and the button pressing instruction image and the “press!” The character string image corresponds. When the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be. FIG. 209 (c) shows a state in which the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the valid operation period of the chance button 136. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by causing the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). There are cases. It should be noted that the chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a manner that moves during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 (for example, movement that repeats vertical and horizontal movement display), and the chance button 136 is displayed. The display may be stopped outside the operation valid period.

  FIG. 209 (d) continuing from FIG. 209 (c) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 209 (c) is displayed, and the button response display 1 ( As a display performed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136), a character string image of “large chance!” Different from the button response display 1 shown in the embodiment 1-4 is a substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. Shows the state displayed in. It should be noted that if the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button response display 1 of this example may not be displayed, or the chance button 136 is operated. The button response display 1 of this example may be configured to be displayed even when the chance button 136 is not operated during the valid period. The character string image of "Large chance!" Is displayed as the button response display 1 rather than the variable display in which the character string image of "Large chance" is displayed without displaying the character string image of "Large chance!" As the button response display 1. There may be a case where the symbol variation display to be displayed is configured so that the big hit symbol aspect is more likely to be confirmed and displayed, and vice versa.

FIG. 209 (e) subsequent to FIG. 209 (d) shows a state in which the off symbol design mode is confirmed and displayed with the end of the effect by the advance notice animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out. In addition, in the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed.
(Example 1-6)
An example of effects of Example 1-6 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 210. FIG. 210 shows a modified example of the effect pattern 1 shown in FIG. 203 (a), and shows the effect state in time series.

  FIG. 210 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 210A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 210 (b) continuing from FIG. 210 (a) shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 210 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the advance notice animation is started.

  FIG. 210 (c) subsequent to FIG. 210 (b) shows a state in which the button display waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. The button operation waiting display 1 of this example has the same button display image as the button operation waiting display 1 shown in the embodiment 1-3, and the button pressing instruction image and the “press!” Corresponds to the character string image. FIG. 210C shows a state in which the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by causing the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). There are cases. It should be noted that the chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a manner that moves during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 (for example, movement that repeats vertical and horizontal movement display), and the chance button 136 is displayed. The display may be stopped outside the operation valid period.

  FIG. 210 (d) continuing from FIG. 210 (c) shows that the player can operate the chance button 136 without pressing the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 210 (c) is displayed. The state immediately before the end of the period is shown.

  FIG. 210 (e) continuing from FIG. 210 (d) shows that the player can operate the chance button 136 without pressing the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 210 (c) is displayed. Even when the period ends, as the button response display 1 (display performed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136), the same character string image of “large chance” as the button response display 1 shown in Example 1-3 is decorated. The state displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the symbol display device 208 is shown. Even in the effect of displaying the character string image of “large chance” as in the button response display 1, pressing the chance button 136 causes the character string image of “large chance” to be displayed. The symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is executed may be configured such that the big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the effect shown is executed. The reverse case is also possible. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. On the other hand, in the case where the symbol variation display in which the effect shown in Example 1-3 is executed and the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is executed are configured to be the same in the confirmation display of the big hit symbol mode. There may be. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

FIG. 210 (f) continuing from FIG. 210 (e) shows a state in which the off symbol design mode is confirmed and displayed with the end of the effect by the notice animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out. In addition, in the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed.
(Example 1-7)
An example of effects of Example 1-7 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 211 shows a modified example of the effect pattern 1 shown in FIG. 203 (a), and shows the effect state in time series.

  FIG. 211 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 211 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button are in the normal state.

  FIG. 211 (b) following FIG. 211 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a, 208c. After FIG. 210 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the advance notice animation is started.

  FIG. 211 (c) subsequent to FIG. 211 (b) shows a state in which a button operation wait display 1 (display performed when waiting for an operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button operation waiting display 1 of this example has the same button display image as the button operation waiting display 1 shown in the embodiment 1-3, and the button pressing instruction image and the “press!” Corresponds to the character string image. FIG. 211C shows a state where the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by causing the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). There are cases. It should be noted that the chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a manner that moves during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 (for example, movement that repeats vertical and horizontal movement display), and the chance button 136 is displayed. The display may be stopped outside the operation valid period.

  FIG. 211 (d) continuing from FIG. 211 (c) shows that the player can operate the chance button 136 without pressing the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 211 (c) is displayed. The state immediately before the end of the period is shown.

  211 (e) subsequent to FIG. 211 (d), the operation of the chance button 136 is enabled without the player pressing the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 211 (c) is displayed. Even when the period ends, as the button response display 1 (display performed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136), the character string image of “large chance?” Is displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. It shows the state of being performed. The button response display 1 of the character string image of “great chance?” Shown in this example is a button response display that is not displayed when the player operates the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed. In addition, when the player does not operate the chance button 136 at the time of displaying the button operation waiting display 1, the character string image of “large chance” is displayed, and the variation display in which the effect shown in the embodiment 1-6 is executed Rather, the symbol variable display in which the effect of this example has been executed may be configured such that the big hit symbol aspect is more likely to be confirmed and displayed, and vice versa. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. On the other hand, in the case where the symbol variation display in which the effect shown in Example 1-6 is executed and the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is executed are configured so that the jackpot symbol aspect is easily set to be confirmed and displayed. There may be. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

  FIG. 211 (f) subsequent to FIG. 211 (e) shows a state in which the off symbol design mode is confirmed and displayed together with the end of the effect by the notice animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out. In addition, in the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed.

  As described above, in the effect examples shown in Examples 1-1 to 1-7, when the chance button 136 is operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the middle of displaying the button operation waiting display 1. There is a button response display 1 displayed on the screen and a button response display 1 displayed even when the chance button 136 is not operated. The button response display 1 displayed when the chance button 136 is operated and the button response display 1 displayed even when the chance button 136 is not operated may be the same display or different display. When the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 which is displaying the button operation waiting display 1, the button response display 1 may not be displayed.

In the effect examples shown in Examples 1-1 to 1-7, the button response display 1 depends on the timing at which the player's chance button 136 is pressed when the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed and whether or not the opportunity button 136 is pressed. , May be configured differently. Even with the same effect pattern 1, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the display of the button response display 1. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. On the other hand, no matter what button response display 1 is displayed, as long as the effect of the same effect pattern 1 is achieved, the jackpot reliability may be the same. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.
(Example 2-1)
An example of effects of Example 2-1 of the present exemplary embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 212. FIG. 212 shows an example of effects in the effect pattern 2 shown in FIG. 203 (b), and shows the effect states in time series.

  FIG. 212 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. 212 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 212 (b) continuing from FIG. 212 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a, 208c. From FIG. 212 (b) onward, the production (reach production) by the notice animation is started.

  FIG. 212 (c) continuing from FIG. 212 (b) shows a state in which a button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for an operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, an image showing the mode in which the chance button 136 is displayed, which is displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 (hereinafter, referred to as “chance button emission image”). May be referred to as "). The chance button emission image is an image that is not displayed in the effect pattern 1. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be. In FIG. 212C, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. It represents the state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by causing the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). There are cases. It should be noted that the chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a manner that moves during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 (for example, movement that repeats vertical and horizontal movement display), and the chance button 136 is displayed. The display may be stopped outside the operation valid period.

  The display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the emission color of the chance button 136 may be the same color, or may be different colors. You may. The display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation standby display 3 and the chance button 136 as compared to the pattern variation display in which the emission color of the chance button emission image as the button operation standby display 3 and the emission color of the chance button 136 are the same. The variable display of symbols with different emission colors may be configured so that the big hit symbol can be confirmed and displayed more easily, and vice versa. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. On the other hand, the display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation standby display 3 and the emission color of the chance button 136 are the same, and the display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation standby display 3 and the chance button 136. There may be a case where the easiness of finalized display of the big hit symbol mode is the same as that of the symbol variable display with different emission colors. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

  In FIG. 212 (d) continuing from FIG. 212 (c), the player presses the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 during which the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 212 (c) is displayed. When the button is pressed, the beginning of the button response display 3 (display performed according to the pressing of the chance button 136) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The display of the button response display 3 in this example corresponds to the image of the character string image of “more chance” and the image of the opportunity button 139 that is moved and displayed (hereinafter, also referred to as “opportunity button image”). At the time of starting the display of the button response display 3, the opportunity button image is displayed so as to be framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 212 (e) subsequent to FIG. 212 (d) shows a state in which the middle part of the button response display 3 is displayed. In FIG. 212 (e), the opportunity button image displayed to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 passes through the center of the display area, moves to the left end, and is displayed so as to be framed out. It is erased by displaying in. The arrow shown in FIG. 212 (e) represents the direction in which the opportunity button image has moved and its locus, but it may be actually displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button response display 3. .

  FIG. 212 (f) subsequent to FIG. 212 (e) shows a state in which the final stage of the button response display 3 is displayed. As the button response display 3, a state in which a character string image of "sorry" is displayed in a substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 is shown.

  FIG. 212 (g) subsequent to FIG. 212 (f) shows a state where the display of the button response display 3 is finished and the deviated symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out.

  As described above, the button response display 3 of the present example is configured not to be displayed when waiting for the operation of the opportunity button 139.

  An example of effects of Example 2-1 of the present exemplary embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 213. FIG. 213 shows an example in which the special figure variation game executing the effect example shown in FIG. 212 is a big hit, and shows the effect state in time series. 213 (a)-(f) has shown the same production state as FIG. 212 (a)-(f).

  In FIG. 213 (g) continued from FIG. 213 (f), the display of the button response display 3 is finished, and the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c are shifted to the "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" of the pattern mode. The state where the temporary stop is displayed is shown.

FIG. 213 (h) continuing from FIG. 213 (g) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed again and the confirmation display of the big hit symbol mode is performed. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In addition, after the revival effect is performed after FIG. 213 (g), it may be configured such that the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed.
(Example 2-2)
An effect example of Example 2-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 214 shows a modified example of the effect pattern 2 shown in FIG. 203 (a), and shows the effect state in time series. The effect of this example is a modification of the effect shown in Example 2-1.

  FIG. 214 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In FIG. 214 (a), the chance button 136 and the opportunity button are shown in the normal state.

  FIG. 214 (b) continuing from FIG. 214 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a, 208c. From FIG. 214 (b) onward, the effect (reach effect) by the advance notice animation is started.

  FIG. 214 (c) subsequent to FIG. 214 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button operation waiting display 3 of the present example corresponds to a chance button emission image displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles overlap each other. The image showing the mode in which the chance button 136 emits light is an image that is not displayed in the effect pattern 1. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be. In FIG. 214C, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits in a manner different from the normal state) during the valid operation period of the chance button 136. It represents the state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by causing the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). There are cases. It should be noted that the chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a manner that moves during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 (for example, movement that repeats vertical and horizontal movement display), and the chance button 136 is displayed. The display may be stopped outside the operation valid period.

  The display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the emission color of the chance button 136 may be the same color, or may be different colors. You may. The display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation standby display 3 and the chance button 136 as compared to the pattern variation display in which the emission color of the chance button emission image as the button operation standby display 3 and the emission color of the chance button 136 are the same. The variable display of symbols with different emission colors may be configured so that the big hit symbol can be confirmed and displayed more easily, and vice versa. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. On the other hand, the display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation standby display 3 and the emission color of the chance button 136 are the same, and the display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation standby display 3 and the chance button 136. There may be a case where the easiness of finalized display of the big hit symbol mode is the same as that of the symbol variable display with different emission colors. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

  FIG. 214 (d) subsequent to FIG. 214 (c) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 214 (e) continued from FIG. 214 (d) shows that the player does not press the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, and immediately before the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends. Shows the state of.

  In FIG. 214 (f) subsequent to FIG. 214 (e), when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends, the button operation waiting display 3 is erased and a character string image of “sorry” is displayed as the button response display 3. It shows the state of being done. In this example, as compared with Example 2-1, it took time from the start of the variable display of symbols to the display of the button response display 3, so that the beginning of the button response display 3 shown in Example 2-2 It is configured not to display the character string image of “more chance” displayed in the middle stage and the opportunity button image. In addition, when the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button response display 3 of the character string image of "sorry" may not be displayed.

  FIG. 214 (g) subsequent to FIG. 214 (f) shows a state in which the display of the button response display 3 is finished and the deviating symbol form is confirmed and displayed. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out.

  An effect example of Example 2-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 215. FIG. 215 shows an example in which the special figure variation game executing the effect example shown in FIG. 214 is a big hit, and shows the effect state in time series. FIGS. 215 (a) to 215 (f) show the same effect states as FIGS. 214 (a) to 214 (f).

  215 (g) continued from FIG. 215 (f), the display of the button response display 3 is ended, and the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c are deviated and the "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" of the pattern mode is displayed. The state where the temporary stop is displayed is shown.

  FIG. 215 (h) following FIG. 215 (g) shows a state in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed again and the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In addition, after the revival effect is performed in FIG. 215 (g) and thereafter, the variable display of the decorative pattern may be performed.

In the effects shown in Examples 2-1 and 2-2, the button response display 3 depends on the timing at which the player's chance button 136 is pressed when the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed and whether or not the chance button 136 is pressed. It may be configured differently. Even if the effects are the same as the effect pattern 2, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the display of the button response display 3. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. On the other hand, no matter what button response display 3 is displayed, as long as the effect is the same effect pattern 2, the jackpot reliability may be the same. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.
(Example 3-1)
An example of effects in Example 3-1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 216. FIG. 216 shows an example of effects in the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 203 (b), and shows the effect state in time series.

  FIG. 216 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 216 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 216 (b) following FIG. 216 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a, 208c. After FIG. 216 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the advance notice animation is started.

  FIG. 216 (c) subsequent to FIG. 216 (b) shows a state in which a button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for an operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles are overlapped with the chance button emission image displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, which shows the emission mode of the chance button 136. The button depression instruction image of the above aspect corresponds. The chance button emission image is an image that is not displayed in the effect pattern 1. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be. In FIG. 216 (c), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. It represents the state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by causing the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). There are cases. It should be noted that the chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a manner that moves during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 (for example, movement that repeats vertical and horizontal movement display), and the chance button 136 is displayed. The display may be stopped outside the operation valid period.

  The display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the emission color of the chance button 136 may be the same color, or may be different colors. You may. The display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation standby display 3 and the chance button 136 as compared to the pattern variation display in which the emission color of the chance button emission image as the button operation standby display 3 and the emission color of the chance button 136 are the same. The variable display of symbols with different emission colors may be configured so that the big hit symbol can be confirmed and displayed more easily, and vice versa. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. On the other hand, the display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation standby display 3 and the emission color of the chance button 136 are the same, and the display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation standby display 3 and the chance button 136. There may be a case where the easiness of finalized display of the big hit symbol mode is the same as that of the symbol variable display with different emission colors. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

  216 (d) following FIG. 216 (c) shows a button response display 4 (chance button 136) when the player presses the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 216 (c). The display of the display performed in response to the pressing of the) shows the state displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The button response display 4 of this example corresponds to the character string image of “more chances !!”. The character string image of “more chance !!” is an image that is not displayed in the button response display 3 displayed in the effect pattern 2. In this example, the player presses the chance button 136 immediately after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started.

  FIG. 216 (e) subsequent to FIG. 216 (d) shows a state in which the middle part of the button response display 4 is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button response display 4 of the present example, after displaying the character string image of “more chances !!”, the opportunity button image which is the opportunity button 139 is framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. Is displayed.

  216 (f) following FIG. 216 (e) shows a state in which the final stage of the button response display 4 is displayed. In FIG. 216 (f), the opportunity button image displayed so as to be framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 is stopped at the center of the display area, and the image of “more chance !!” is erased. Then, a state is shown in which a button pressing instruction image in a form in which three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed. The button pressing instruction image is an image that is not displayed in the button response display 3 that is displayed in the effect pattern 2. The opportunity button image is stopped and displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button pressing instruction image is displayed, thereby informing that the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 is started. The stop display of the opportunity button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed while waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed. In FIG. 216 (f), a state in which the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Is represented. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by causing the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). There are cases. Note that the opportunity button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed while moving (for example, a movement that repeats vertical and horizontal movement display) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139, and the opportunity button 139 operation valid period is displayed. There may be a case where the display is stopped outside.

  The display color of the opportunity button image as the button response display 4 and the emission color of the opportunity button 139 may be the same color, or may be different colors. Good. The display color of the opportunity button image and the emission color of the opportunity button 139 as the button and the response display 4 are different from the pattern variation display in which the display color of the opportunity button image as the button response display 4 and the emission color of the opportunity button 139 are the same. The different symbol variation display may be configured so that the big hit symbol can be confirmed and displayed more easily, and the opposite case may be possible.

  FIG. 216 (g) continued from FIG. 216 (f) shows that the player presses the opportunity button 139 while the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 216 (f) is being displayed. As a display performed according to the pressing of the button 139), a state in which the character string image of “sorry” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown.

FIG. 216 (h) subsequent to FIG. 216 (g) shows a state in which the off symbol design mode is confirmed and displayed with the end of the effect by the advance notice animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out. As the button response display 5, even when the character string image of "sorry" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the jackpot pattern mode may be confirmed and displayed.
(Example 3-2)
An effect example of Example 3-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 217. FIG. 217 shows an example in which the special figure variation game executing the effect example shown in FIG. 216 is a big hit, and shows the effect state in time series. 217 (a) to 217 (f) show the same effect state as in FIGS. 216 (a) to 216 (f).

  217 (f) following FIG. 217 (f) shows that the player presses the opportunity button 139 while the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 217 (f) is being displayed. As a display performed according to the pressing of the button 139), a state in which a character string image of “big hit !?” is displayed in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 is shown.

  FIG. 217 (h) subsequent to FIG. 217 (g) shows a state in which the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed with the end of the effect by the notice animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. As the button response display 5, even when the character string image of "big hit !?" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the off symbol pattern may be confirmed and displayed.

In the pattern variation display in which the effect of the present embodiment is performed, the button response display 5 does not display the character string image of “big hit !?” but the character string image of “sorry” is displayed, rather than the pattern variation display. The design variable display in which the character string image of “big hit !?” is displayed as the response display 5 is configured so that the big hit design mode can be more easily confirmed and displayed. As the button response display 5, the ease of finalizing the jackpot pattern mode is the same when the character string image of "sorry" is displayed and when the character string image of "big hit !?" is displayed. There may be a case where it is configured to.
(Example 3-3)
An effect example of Example 3-3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 218. FIG. 218 shows an example of the effect in the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 203 (b), and shows the effect state in time series. The effect of this example is a modification of the effect shown in Example 3-1.

  FIG. 218 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 218 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  218 (b) following FIG. 218 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a, 208c. After FIG. 218 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the advance notice animation is started.

  FIG. 218 (c) subsequent to FIG. 218 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles are overlapped with the chance button emission image displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, which shows the emission mode of the chance button 136. The button depression instruction image of the above aspect corresponds. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be. In FIG. 218 (c), the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits in a manner different from the normal state) in association with the display of the button operation waiting display 3. It shows the state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by causing the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). There are cases.

  218 (d) subsequent to FIG. 218 (c) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 218 (c) is continuously displayed.

  218 (e) continuing from FIG. 218 (d) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIGS. 218 (c) and 218 (d) is displayed. 216 (e) shows the state in which the button response display 4 is displayed. In this example, as compared with the case shown in Example 3-1, it takes more time from the start of the button operation waiting display 3 until the player presses the chance button 136, so that FIG. The initial stage of the button response display 4 shown is not displayed, but the middle stage of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 216 (e) is displayed. In addition, according to the time required from the start of displaying the button operation waiting display 3 to the display of the button response display 4, all of the button response display 4 shown in Example 3-1 from the beginning to the end. The display may be displayed so as to be played at double speed.

  218 (f) following FIG. 218 (e) shows a state in which the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 216 (f) is displayed. In FIG. 218 (f), the opportunity button image displayed so as to be framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 is stopped at the center of the display area, and the image of “more chances !!” is erased. Then, a state is shown in which a button press instruction image in a form in which three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed. The opportunity button image is stopped and displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button pressing instruction image is displayed, thereby informing that the operation opportunity of the opportunity button 139 is in effect. The stop display of the opportunity button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed while waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed. In FIG. 218 (f), a state in which the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Is represented. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by causing the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). There are cases.

  218 (g) subsequent to FIG. 218 (f) shows that the player presses the opportunity button 139 while the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 218 (f) is being displayed. As a display performed according to the pressing of the button 139), a state in which the character string image of “sorry” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown.

FIG. 218 (h) subsequent to FIG. 218 (g) shows a state where the off symbol design mode is confirmed and displayed with the end of the effect by the notice animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out. As the button response display 5, even when the character string image of "sorry" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the jackpot pattern mode may be confirmed and displayed.
(Example 3-4)
An example of effects of Example 3-4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 219. FIG. 219 shows an example of the effect in the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 203 (b) and shows the effect state in time series. The effect of this example is a modification of the effect shown in Example 3-1.

  FIG. 219 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 219 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  219 (b) following FIG. 219 (a) shows a state where "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a, 208c. 219 (b) and thereafter, the effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started.

  FIG. 219 (c) subsequent to FIG. 219 (b) shows a state in which a button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for an operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles are overlapped with the chance button emission image displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, which shows the emission mode of the chance button 136. The button depression instruction image of the above aspect corresponds. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be. In FIG. 219 (c), the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits in a manner different from the normal state) in association with the display of the button operation waiting display 3. It shows the state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by causing the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). There are cases.

  219 (d) following FIG. 219 (c) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 219 (c) is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 219 (e) following FIG. 219 (d) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIGS. 219 (c) and (d) is displayed. 216 (d) shows the state in which the beginning of the button response display 4 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the player presses the chance button 136 immediately before the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends.

  219 (f) following FIG. 219 (e) shows a state in which the end of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 216 (f) is displayed and the opportunity button 139 is informing that it is in the operation valid period. There is. In this example, as compared with the case shown in Example 3-1, it takes more time from the start of displaying the button operation waiting display 3 until the player presses the chance button 136, so that FIG. The middle part of the button response display 4 shown is not displayed, but the last part of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 216 (f) is displayed. In addition, according to the time required from the start of displaying the button operation waiting display 3 to the display of the button response display 4, all of the button response display 4 shown in Example 3-1 from the beginning to the end. The display may be displayed so as to be played at double speed. In FIG. 219 (f), a state in which the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Is represented. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by causing the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). There are cases.

  FIG. 219 (g) continued from FIG. 219 (f) shows that the player presses the opportunity button 139 while the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 219 (f) is being displayed. As a display performed according to the pressing of the button 139), a state in which a character string image of “big hit !?” is displayed in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 is shown.

FIG. 219 (h) following FIG. 219 (g) shows a state in which the jackpot pattern mode is confirmed and displayed with the end of the effect by the notice animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. As the button response display 5, even when the character string image of “big hit !?” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the off symbol pattern may be confirmed and displayed.
(Example 3-5)
An example of effects of Example 3-5 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 220. FIG. 220 shows a modified example of the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 203 (b), and shows the effect state in time series. The effect of this example is a modification of the effect shown in Example 3-1.

  FIG. 220 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 220A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 220 (b) continuing from FIG. 220 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 216 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the advance notice animation is started.

  FIG. 220 (c) continuing from FIG. 220 (b) shows a state in which the button display waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles are overlapped with the chance button emission image displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, which shows the emission mode of the chance button 136. The button depression instruction image of the above aspect corresponds. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be. In FIG. 220 (c), the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits in a manner different from the normal state) in association with the display of the button operation waiting display 3. It shows the state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by causing the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). There are cases.

  FIG. 220 (d) subsequent to FIG. 220 (c) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 220 (c) is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 220 (e) continued from FIG. 220 (d), the player operates the chance button 136 without pressing the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 220 (f) is displayed. The state immediately before the expiration of the valid period is shown.

  220 (f) continuing from FIG. 220 (e), the button operation waiting display 3 is deleted when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends, and the final stage of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 216 (f). Is displayed. In this example, since the chance button 136 was not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 216 (d) shown in the embodiment 3-1 and the beginning of FIG. 216 (e) are shown. The middle part of the button response display 4 shown is not displayed, but the final part of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 216 (f) is displayed. By displaying the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 216 (f), it is notified that the opportunity button 139 is in the operation valid period. In FIG. 220 (f), a state in which the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Is represented. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by causing the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). There are cases. In addition, when the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, all button response displays 5 shown in FIGS. 216 (d) to (f) may not be displayed.

  220 (g) continued from FIG. 220 (f), the player presses the opportunity button 139 while the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 220 (f) is being displayed. As a display performed according to the pressing of the button 139), a state in which a character string image of “big hit !?” is displayed in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 is shown.

FIG. 220 (h) subsequent to FIG. 220 (g) shows a state in which the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed with the end of the effect by the notice animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. As the button response display 5, even when the character string image of “big hit !?” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the off symbol pattern may be confirmed and displayed.
(Example 3-6)
An example of effects of Example 3-6 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 221 shows an example of the effect of the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 203 (b), and shows the effect state in time series.

  FIG. 221 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 221 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  221 (b) following FIG. 221 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a, 208c. After FIG. 216 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the advance notice animation is started.

  221 (c) continuing from FIG. 221 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles are overlapped with the chance button emission image displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, which shows the emission mode of the chance button 136. The button depression instruction image of the above aspect corresponds. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be. In FIG. 221 (c), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits in a manner different from the normal state) in association with the display of the button operation waiting display 3. It shows the state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by causing the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). There are cases.

  221 (d) continuing from FIG. 221 (c) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 221 (c) is displayed, and the button response display 4 ( As a beginning of the display performed according to the pressing of the chance button 136), a character string image of “more chances!” Is displayed in the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  221 (e) subsequent to FIG. 221 (d) shows a state in which the final stage of the button response display 4 is displayed, and shows a state in which it is informed that the operation period of the opportunity button 139 is in effect. In FIG. 221 (e), the image of “more chances!” Displayed in the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is deleted, and a button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed. An image displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 and showing a state in which the opportunity button 139 is projected (hereinafter, may be referred to as “opportunity button projected image”) is displayed on both the decorative pattern display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. it's shown. The decorative pattern display device 208 displays an image above the middle part of the opportunity button projection image, and the sub display device 1030 displays an image below the middle part of the opportunity button projection image, thereby displaying the entire opportunity button projection image. it's shown. In FIG. 221 (e), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139, and the normal state is displayed. It is in a more protruding state. The player operates the opportunity button 139 by causing the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or to emit light in a mode different from the normal state) and project from the normal state. Sometimes you can know that. It should be noted that the symbol variation display in which the opportunity button 139 protrudes during the display of the button response display 4 is easier to stop and display the big hit symbol aspect than the variation display in which the opportunity button 139 does not protrude during the display of the button response display 4. May be configured, and vice versa. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. On the other hand, the symbol variation display in which the opportunity button 139 does not project during the display of the button response display 4 and the symbol variation display in which the opportunity button 139 projects during the display of the button response display 4 are easy to be stopped in the jackpot pattern mode. May be configured to be the same. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

  221 (f) continuing from FIG. 221 (e) shows a button response display 5 (opportunity display) when the player presses the opportunity button 139 while the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 221 (f) is displayed. As a display performed according to the pressing of the button 139), a state in which a character string image of “super-hot ats !!!” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. It should be noted that, as the button response display 5, the "super" or "big hit !!?" Character string image is displayed instead of the "super-super hot !! The variable pattern display in which the character string image "Gekiatsu !!!!" is displayed is configured so that the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be stopped and displayed. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

221 (g) subsequent to FIG. 221 (f) shows a state in which the stop display in the jackpot pattern mode is displayed together with the end of the effect by the notice animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. As the button response display 5, even when the character string image of “super-hot Atsu !!!!!” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, even when a stop display in the out-of-symbol pattern mode is displayed. Good.
(Example 3-7)
An example of effects of Example 3-7 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 222. FIG. 222 shows a modification of the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 203 (b) and shows the effect state in time series.

  FIG. 222 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 222A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 222 (b) continuing from FIG. 222 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a, 208c. After FIG. 216 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the advance notice animation is started.

  222 (c) subsequent to FIG. 222 (b) shows a state in which the button display waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles are overlapped with the chance button emission image displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, which shows the emission mode of the chance button 136. The button depression instruction image of the above aspect corresponds. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be. In FIG. 222 (c), the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits in a manner different from the normal state) in association with the display of the button operation waiting display 3. It shows the state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by causing the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). There are cases.

  222 (d) continuing from FIG. 222 (c), the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 222 (c) is displayed, and the button response display 4 ( As a beginning of the display performed according to the pressing of the chance button 136), a character string image of “more chances!” Is displayed in the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 222 (e) subsequent to FIG. 222 (d) shows a state in which the middle part of the button response display 4 is displayed. In FIG. 222 (e), the image of “more chance!” Displayed in the central portion of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 is deleted, and a button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed. It is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and an opportunity button projection image showing the state in which the opportunity button 139 is projected is displayed on both the decorative pattern display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. The decorative pattern display device 208 displays an image above the middle part of the opportunity button projection image, and the sub display device 1030 displays an image below the middle part of the opportunity button projection image, thereby displaying the entire opportunity button projection image. it's shown. In FIG. 222 (e), the opportunity button 139 is in a state in which it protrudes beyond the normal state, but the opportunity button lamp 141 is in the normal state, so it is not the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139.

  FIG. 222 (f) subsequent to FIG. 222 (e) shows a state in which the final stage of the button response display 4 is displayed. 222 (f), an opportunity button image showing the opportunity button 139 returned to the normal state is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the opportunity button 139 is returned from the protruding state to the normal state. ..

  In FIG. 222 (g) subsequent to FIG. 222 (f), the button response display 4 is deleted and the character string image of “sorry” is displayed as the button response display 5 without the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 being started. It shows the state of being done.

  FIG. 222 (h) continuing from FIG. 222 (g) shows a state in which the stop display in the out-of-symbol pattern mode is displayed with the end of the effect by the advance notice animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out. As the button response display 5, even when the character string image of "sorry" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the stop display in the jackpot pattern mode may be displayed.

In the effect examples shown in Examples 3-1 to 3-7, the button response display 4 depends on the timing at which the player's chance button 136 is pressed when the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed and whether or not the button is pressed. The button response display 5 may be configured differently depending on the timing of pressing the opportunity button 139 by the player when the button response display 4 is displayed and the presence / absence of the pressing. There is a case. Even if the same effect pattern 3 is used, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the display of the button response display 4 and the button response display 5. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. On the other hand, no matter what button response display 4 or button response display 5 is displayed, as long as the production of the same production pattern 3 is achieved, the jackpot reliability may be the same. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.
(Example 4-1)
An example of effects of Example 4-1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 223. FIG. 223 shows an example of the effect of the effect pattern 4 shown in FIG. 203 (c), and shows the effect state in time series.

  FIG. 223 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 223 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  223 (b) following FIG. 223 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a, 208c. After FIG. 223 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started.

  FIG. 223 (c) subsequent to FIG. 223 (b) shows a state in which the button display waiting display 4 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. By displaying the button operation waiting display 4, it is notified that the operation period of the chance button 136 is valid. In the button operation waiting display 4 of the present example, an image showing the chance button 136 that is emitting light in a special mode displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 (hereinafter, “chance button special It may be referred to as a “light emitting image”) and an image in which three inverted triangles displayed in a special color are overlapped (hereinafter, may be referred to as “button pressing special instruction image”). .. The chance button special light emission image and the button press special instruction image are images that are not displayed in the button operation wait displays 1 to 3, and by displaying these images, the button response display is always displayed after the button operation wait display 4. 4 will be displayed. When the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation wait display 4 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be. In FIG. 223 (c), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits in a manner different from the normal state) in association with the display of the button operation waiting display 4. It shows the state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by causing the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). There are cases. The emission color of the chance button 136 may be the same as or different from the chance button special emission image displayed in the button operation waiting display 4.

  223 (d) subsequent to FIG. 223 (c) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 4 shown in FIG. 223 (c) is being displayed. As the opening stage (display performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136), a character string image of “more chances!” Is displayed in the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  223 (e) continuing from FIG. 223 (d) is displayed as the middle panel of the button response display 4 such that the opportunity button image evoking the opportunity button 139 is framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. It shows the state of being performed.

  223 (f) subsequent to FIG. 223 (e) shows a state in which the final stage of the button response display 4 is displayed. In FIG. 223 (f), the opportunity button image displayed so as to be framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 is stopped at the central portion of the display area, and the image of “more chance !!” is erased. Then, a state is shown in which a button press instruction image in a form in which three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed. The opportunity button image is stopped and displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and by displaying the button pressing instruction image, it is notified that the operation opportunity of the opportunity button 139 is valid. In FIG. 223 (f), a state in which the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Is represented. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by causing the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). There are cases. As the button response display 4, an image of the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a special mode (hereinafter, may be referred to as “opportunity button special emission image”) and button press shown in FIG. 223 (c). The special instruction image may be displayed in some cases.

  FIG. 223 (g) continued from FIG. 223 (f) shows that the player presses the opportunity button 139 while the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 223 (f) is being displayed. As a display performed according to the pressing of the button 139), a state in which the character string image of “sorry” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown.

  In FIG. 223 (h) continuing from FIG. 223 (g), the display of the button response display 4 is terminated, and the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c are shifted to the "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" of the pattern mode. The state where the temporary stop is displayed is shown.

FIG. 223 (u) subsequent to FIG. 223 (h) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed again and the stop display of the big hit symbol mode is performed. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In addition, after the revival effect is performed in FIG. 223 (h) and thereafter, the variable display of the decorative symbol may be performed.
(Example 4-2)
An example of effects of Example 4-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 224. FIG. 224 shows an example of the effect of the effect pattern 4 shown in FIG. 203 (c), and shows the effect state in time series. The effect of this example is a modification of the effect shown in Example 4-1.

  FIG. 224 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 224 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  224 (b) following FIG. 224 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a, 208c. From FIG. 224 (b) onward, the effect (reach effect) by the advance notice animation is started.

  FIG. 224 (c) following FIG. 224 (b) shows a state in which the button display waiting display 4 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. By displaying the button operation waiting display 4, it is notified that the operation period of the chance button 136 is valid. In the button operation waiting display 4 of the present example, a chance button special light emission image and a special chance button special light emission image showing the chance button 136 that is emitting light in a special mode displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. The button pressing special instruction image in a form in which three inverted triangles displayed in color are overlapped corresponds. When the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation wait display 4 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be. In FIG. 223 (c), the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits in a manner different from the normal state) in association with the display of the button operation waiting display 3. It shows the state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by causing the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). There are cases. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 may be the same as or different from that of the chance button special light emission image displayed in the button operation waiting display 4.

  224 (d) subsequent to FIG. 224 (c) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 4 shown in FIG. 224 (c) is being displayed, so that the button response display 4 ( As a display performed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136), a character string image of “more chances !!” is displayed in the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, as compared with Example 4-1, the time from when the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed until the player presses the chance button 136 is longer.

  224 (e) subsequent to FIG. 224 (d) displays a character string image of "more chance !!" of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 224 (d), and then, as a new button response display 4, The opportunity button image simulating the opportunity button 139 to be moved and displayed is shown in a state of being displayed so as to be framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  224 (f) subsequent to FIG. 224 (e) shows a state in which the button response display 4 is continuously displayed. In FIG. 224 (f), the opportunity button image displayed so as to be framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped at the center of the display area, and the image of “more chance !!” is erased. Then, a state is shown in which a button press instruction image in a form in which three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed. The button pressing instruction image is an image that is not displayed in the button response display 3 that is displayed in the effect pattern 2. The opportunity button image is stopped and displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button depression instruction image is displayed to notify that the operation opportunity of the opportunity button 139 is valid. The stop display of the opportunity button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed while waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed. In FIG. 224 (f), a state in which the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Is represented. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by causing the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). There are cases. As the button response display 4, an image of the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a special mode (hereinafter, may be referred to as “opportunity button special emission image”) and button press shown in FIG. 223 (c). The special instruction image may be displayed in some cases.

  FIG. 224 (g) continued from FIG. 224 (f) shows that the player presses the opportunity button 139 while the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 224 (f) is being displayed. As a display performed according to the pressing of the button 139), a state in which a character string image of “big hit !?” is displayed in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 is shown. In this example, as compared with the example 4-1, since it takes a long time from when the button response display 4 is displayed until the player presses the opportunity button 139, the button response is started after the symbol variable display is started. It takes a long time to display the display 5.

  FIG. 224 (h) continuing from FIG. 224 (g) shows the state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed again and the stop display of the big hit symbol mode is performed. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

  In this example, since the time from displaying the button response display 5 to ending the symbol variation display is shorter than that in the example 4-1, the effect of temporarily stopping the outlier symbol shown in FIG. 223 (h) is performed. Configured to not. When the player presses the chance button 136 immediately after the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed and immediately before the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends, the display of the early or middle stage of the display of the button response display 4 is performed. May be thinned out, and an effect of temporarily stopping the outlier symbol shown in FIG. 223 (h) may be performed.

In the effect examples shown in Examples 4-1 and 4-2, the button response display 4 depends on the timing at which the player's chance button 136 is pressed when the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed or whether or not the button is pressed. , The button response display 5 is configured differently depending on the timing of pressing the opportunity button 139 of the player when the button response display 4 is displayed and the presence / absence of the pressing. There are cases. Even with the same effect pattern 4, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the display of the button response display 4 and the button response display 5. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. On the other hand, when the button response display 4 and the button response display 5 are displayed in the same effect pattern 4, the jackpot reliability may be the same. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.
(Example 5-1)
An example of effects of Example 5-1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 225. FIG. 225 shows an example of the effect of the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG. 203 (d), and shows the effect state in time series.

  FIG. 225 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 225 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  225 (b) following FIG. 225 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a, 208c. After FIG. 225 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the advance notice animation is started.

  FIG. 225 (c) continuing from FIG. 225 (b) shows the opportunity button light emission displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the button operation wait display 3 shown in the embodiment 3-1 or the like as the beginning of the button operation wait display 2. A state is shown in which a button pressing instruction image in a form in which an image and three inverted triangles overlap each other is displayed. In this example, since the chance button 136 is not in the operation effective period, the button press instruction image in the form in which the chance button emission image and the three inverted triangles overlap each other is a false display that does not indicate that the chance button 136 is in the operation effective period. Yes, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

  225 (d) continuing from FIG. 225 (c), as the middle part of the button operation waiting display 2, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button pressing instruction image is erased, and the chance button emission image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which the opportunity button image is displayed so as to be framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 is shown in parallel with the display being moved to the left end of the area and being erased so as to be framed out. The arrow on the left side in the figure represents the direction in which the chance button emission image is moved and displayed and its trajectory, and the arrow in the right side in the figure indicates the direction in which the opportunity button emission image is displayed and moved and its trajectory. However, the button waiting display 2 may be actually displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  225 (e) continued from FIG. 225 (d), as the final stage of the button operation waiting display 2, a button press of a mode in which the opportunity button image and three inverted triangles overlap in the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The state where the instruction image is displayed is shown. The opportunity button image is displayed at a position where a part of the opportunity button image and the movable body 1002 overlap. In FIG. 225 (e), a state in which the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Is represented. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by causing the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). There are cases. Note that, as the button operation waiting display 2, an image of the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a special mode (hereinafter, may be referred to as “opportunity button special emission image”) and a button shown in FIG. 223 (c). The pressing special instruction image may be displayed in some cases.

  In FIG. 225 (f) continued from FIG. 225 (e), the button pressing instruction image in the form in which the opportunity button image and the three inverted triangles overlap each other is moved upward from the position displayed in FIG. 225 (e). It shows the state of being done. The opportunity button image is moved and displayed in a more conspicuous position to further encourage the operation of the opportunity button.

  225 (g) subsequent to FIG. 225 (f) shows a button response display 2 (by pressing the opportunity button 139 by the player when the button operation waiting display 2 shown in FIG. 225 (f) is displayed. As a display performed in response to pressing of the opportunity button 139), a character string image of "sorry" is displayed in the central portion of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 225 (g) subsequent to FIG. 225 (f) shows a state in which the stop display in the out-of-symbol pattern mode is displayed with the end of the effect by the notice animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out. As the button response display 2, even when the character string image of "sorry" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the stop display in the jackpot pattern mode may be displayed.
(Example 5-2)
An example of effects of Example 5-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 226. FIG. 226 shows an example of the effect of the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG. 203 (d), and shows the effect state in time series.

  FIG. 226 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 226 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  226 (b) following FIG. 226 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a, 208c. After FIG. 225 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the advance notice animation is started.

  FIG. 226 (c) following FIG. 226 (b) shows the opportunity button light emission displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the button operation wait display 3 shown in Example 3-1 as the beginning of the button operation wait display 2. A state is shown in which a button pressing instruction image in a form in which an image and three inverted triangles overlap each other is displayed. In this example, since the chance button 136 is not in the operation effective period, the button press instruction image in the form in which the chance button emission image and the three inverted triangles overlap each other is a false display that does not indicate that the chance button 136 is in the operation effective period. Yes, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

  226 (d) continuing from FIG. 226 (c), as the middle part of the button operation waiting display 2, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button pressing instruction image is erased, and the chance button emission image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which the opportunity button image is displayed so as to be framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 is shown in parallel with the display being moved to the left end of the area and being erased so as to be framed out. The arrow on the left side in the figure represents the direction in which the chance button emission image is moved and displayed and its trajectory, and the arrow in the right side in the figure indicates the direction in which the opportunity button emission image is displayed and moved and its trajectory. However, it may be actually displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 as the button operation waiting display 2.

  226 (e) continuing from FIG. 226 (d), as the final stage of the button operation waiting display 2, a button press of a mode in which the opportunity button image and three inverted triangles overlap in the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The state where the instruction image is displayed is shown. The opportunity button image is displayed at a position where a part of the opportunity button image and the movable body 1002 overlap. In FIG. 226 (e), a state in which the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Is represented. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by causing the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). There are cases. Note that, as the button operation waiting display 2, there is a case where an opportunity button special light emission image simulating the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a special mode and a button pressing special instruction image shown in FIG. 223 (c) are displayed. Good.

  226 (f) subsequent to FIG. 226 (e) shows that the button press instruction image in the form in which the opportunity button image and the inverted triangle are overlapped by three is moved upward from the position displayed in FIG. 226 (e). It shows the state of being done. The opportunity button image is moved and displayed in a more conspicuous position to further encourage the operation of the opportunity button.

  FIG. 226 (g) continued from FIG. 226 (f) shows that the player presses the opportunity button 139 while the button operation waiting display 2 shown in FIG. 226 (f) is being displayed. As a beginning of the display performed according to the depression of the opportunity button 139), the character string image of “big hit?” Is displayed in the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  226 (h) subsequent to FIG. 226 (g) is the middle part of the button response display 2 (display performed in response to the depression of the opportunity button 139), and the "big hit ?! The character string image of “” is displayed.

  226 (i) continuing from FIG. 226 (h) is a final stage of the button response display 2 (display performed in response to the depression of the opportunity button 139), and "big hit ?!" is displayed in the central portion of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. The character string image of "!" Is displayed. The character string images of “big hit?” And “big hit? !!” displayed in the middle and end of the button response display 2 are displayed when the opportunity button 139 is held down for a predetermined time or longer. It may be configured to be displayed when the button is pressed a predetermined number of times or more.

  FIG. 226 (j) subsequent to FIG. 226 (i) shows a state in which the stop display in the jackpot pattern mode is displayed together with the end of the effect by the notice animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. As the button response display 2, even when a character string image of “big hit?”, “Big hit ?!”, or “big hit ?!” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the off-symbol pattern mode is stopped. It may be displayed.

In the button response display 2 of this example, "big hit?", "Big hit ?!", and "big hit ?!" are displayed in this order, so that the player's expectation of a big hit can be gradually increased. Sometimes you can. The jackpot reliability may be displayed as the number of “!”. For example, as the button response display 2, when “big hit?” And “big hit ?!” are displayed in this order (“big hit? !!” is not displayed), “big hit?”, “Big hit ?!”, "Big hit ?!" and "Big hit? !!!!" may be displayed in this order.
(Example 5-3)
An effect example of Example 5-3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 227. 227 shows a modified example of the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG. 203 (d), and shows the effect state in time series. The effect of this example is a modification of the effect shown in Example 5-2.

  FIG. 227 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 227 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  227 (b) continuing from FIG. 227 (a) shows a state where "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a, 208c. After FIG. 225 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the advance notice animation is started.

  FIG. 227 (c) continuing from FIG. 227 (b) shows a chance button light emission displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the button operation waiting display 3 shown in Example 3-1 as the beginning of the button operation waiting display 2. A state is shown in which a button pressing instruction image in a form in which an image and three inverted triangles overlap each other is displayed. In this example, since the chance button 136 is not in the operation effective period, the button press instruction image in the form in which the chance button emission image and the three inverted triangles overlap each other is a false display that does not indicate that the chance button 136 is in the operation effective period. Yes, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

  227 (d) continuing from FIG. 227 (c), as the middle part of the button operation waiting display 2, the button pressing instruction image is erased in the decorative pattern display device 208, and the chance button emission image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. A state in which the opportunity button image is displayed so as to be framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 is shown in parallel with the display being moved to the left end of the area and being erased so as to be framed out. The arrow on the left side in the figure represents the direction in which the chance button emission image is moved and displayed and its trajectory, and the arrow in the right side in the figure indicates the direction in which the opportunity button emission image is displayed and moved and its trajectory. However, it may be actually displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 as the button operation waiting display 2.

  227 (e) continuing from FIG. 227 (d), as the final stage of the button operation waiting display 2, the button press of the mode in which the opportunity button image and the three inverted triangles overlap in the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 The state where the instruction image is displayed is shown. The opportunity button image is displayed at a position where a part of the opportunity button image and the movable body 1002 overlap. In FIG. 227 (e), a state in which the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Is represented. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by causing the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). There are cases. Note that, as the button operation waiting display 2, there is a case where an opportunity button special light emission image simulating the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a special mode and a button pressing special instruction image shown in FIG. 223 (c) are displayed. Good.

  In FIG. 227 (f) continuing from FIG. 227 (e), the button pressing instruction image in the mode in which the opportunity button image and the three inverted triangles overlap each other is moved upward from the position displayed in FIG. 227 (e). It shows the state of being done. The opportunity button image is moved and displayed in a more conspicuous position to further encourage the operation of the opportunity button.

  227 (g) following FIG. 227 (f) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 2 shown in FIG. 227 (f) is continuously displayed.

  227 (h) following FIG. 227 (g) shows a state immediately before the expiration of the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139, in which the button operation waiting display 2 shown in FIG. 227 (f) is continuously displayed. There is.

  227 (i) subsequent to FIG. 227 (h) shows the button response display 2 (display performed according to the depression of the opportunity button 139) at the end of the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 in Example 5-1. It shows a state in which the character string image of “big hit ?!” in the final stage of the button response display 2 is displayed in the central portion of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. In this example, since it took a longer time than the example 5-1 until the button response display 2 was displayed after the symbol variable display was started, the beginning of the button response display 2 shown in the example 5-2. It is configured not to display the middle stage.

FIG. 226 (j) continuing from FIG. 227 (i) shows a state in which the stop display in the jackpot pattern mode is displayed together with the end of the effect by the notice animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. As the button response display 2, even if a character string image of “big hit?”, “Big hit ?!”, or “big hit ?! The stop display may be displayed.
(Example 5-4)
An effect example of Example 5-4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 228. FIG. 228 shows a modification of the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG. 203 (d), and shows the effect state in time series. The effect of this example is a modification of the effect shown in Example 5-2.

  FIG. 228 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 228 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  228 (b) following FIG. 228 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a, 208c. After FIG. 225 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the advance notice animation is started.

  FIG. 228 (c) continuing from FIG. 228 (b) is a chance button light emission displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the button operation wait display 3 shown in the embodiment 3-1 as the beginning of the button operation wait display 2. A state is shown in which a button pressing instruction image in a form in which an image and three inverted triangles overlap each other is displayed. In this example, since the chance button 136 is not in the operation effective period, the button press instruction image in the form in which the chance button emission image and the three inverted triangles overlap each other is a false display that does not indicate that the chance button 136 is in the operation effective period. Yes, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

  FIG. 228 (d) subsequent to FIG. 228 (c) shows the decorative pattern display device 208 as the middle part of the button operation waiting display 2 in which the button pressing instruction image is erased and the chance button light emission image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. A state in which the opportunity button image is displayed so as to be framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 is shown in parallel with the display being moved to the left end of the area and being erased so as to be framed out. The arrow on the left side in the figure represents the direction in which the chance button emission image is moved and displayed and its trajectory, and the arrow in the right side in the figure indicates the direction in which the opportunity button emission image is displayed and moved and its trajectory. However, it may be actually displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 as the button operation waiting display 2.

  228 (e) continuing from FIG. 228 (d), as the final stage of the button operation waiting display 2, the button press of the mode in which the opportunity button image and three inverted triangles overlap in the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 The state where the instruction image is displayed is shown. The opportunity button image is displayed at a position where a part of the opportunity button image and the movable body 1002 overlap. In FIG. 228 (e), a state in which the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Is represented. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by causing the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). There are cases. Note that, as the button operation waiting display 2, there is a case where an opportunity button special light emission image simulating the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a special mode and a button pressing special instruction image shown in FIG. 223 (c) are displayed. Good.

  In FIG. 228 (f) continuing from FIG. 228 (e), the button pressing instruction image in the form in which the opportunity button image and the three inverted triangles overlap each other is moved upward from the position displayed in FIG. 228 (e). It shows the state of being done. The opportunity button image is moved and displayed in a more conspicuous position to further encourage the operation of the opportunity button.

  228 (g) following FIG. 228 (f) shows a state immediately before the expiration of the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139, in which the button operation waiting display 2 shown in FIG. 228 (f) is continuously displayed. There is.

  FIG. 228 (h) following FIG. 228 (g) shows Example 5-1 as button response display 2 (display performed in response to depression of the opportunity button 139) when the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 ends. It shows a state in which the character string image of "big hit ?!" at the beginning of the button response display 2 is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208.

  228 (i) subsequent to FIG. 228 (h) shows the button response display 2 (display performed according to the depression of the opportunity button 139) at the end of the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 in Example 5-1. It shows a state in which the character string image of “big hit ?!” in the final stage of the button response display 2 is displayed in the central portion of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. In this example, since it took a longer time from the start of the pattern variation display to the button response display 2 than in Example 5-1, the middle part of the button response display 2 shown in Example 5-2 is displayed. Thinning out not to display. In addition, according to the time required from the start of the symbol variable display until the button response display 2 is displayed, all the displays from the beginning to the end of the button response display 2 shown in Example 5-1 are double speeded. It may be displayed so as to be reproduced.

  228 (j) subsequent to FIG. 228 (i) shows a state in which the stop display in the jackpot pattern mode is displayed with the end of the effect by the notice animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. As the button response display 2, even when a character string image of “big hit?”, “Big hit ?!”, or “big hit ?!” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the off-symbol pattern mode is stopped. It may be displayed.

In the effect examples shown in Examples 5-1 to 5-4, the button response display 2 depends on the timing when the player's opportunity button 139 is pressed when the button operation waiting display 2 is displayed and whether or not the button is pressed. , May be configured differently. Even if the effects are the same effect pattern 2, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the display of the button response display 2. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. On the other hand, no matter what button response display 2 is displayed, as long as the effect is the same effect pattern 2, the jackpot reliability may be the same. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.
(Example 6-1)
An example of effects of Example 6-1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 229. FIG. 229 shows a modification of the effect pattern 2 shown in FIG. 203 (b) and shows the effect state in time series. This example is an effect example in which the button operation waiting display 3 and the button response display 3 shown in FIG. Note that in FIG. 229 and thereafter, the movable body 1002 is located at a position where it does not overlap the main liquid crystal unit 1001 when viewed from the player.

  FIG. 229 (a) shows a state where the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out. ing. The white circular hold icon b1 and the white circular hold icon b2 are displayed in the effect display area 208d below the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. FIG. 229 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 229 (b) continuing from FIG. 229 (a) shows a state in which one hold of Toku-zu 1 has been exhausted and the variable display of symbols has been started. When the hold icon b1 becomes the variable icon a1 and moves to the left, the moving animation between the hold and variable icons and the hold icon b2 moves to the left and moves the hold icon. Be started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  FIG. 229 (c) continuing from FIG. 229 (b) shows a default white circular hold icon b3 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230 during the execution of the variable display of symbols. It shows the state of increased display. The "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

  229 (d) following FIG. 229 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 229 (c) is being executed.

  FIG. 229 (e) continuing from FIG. 229 (d) shows that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230 while executing the variable display of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 229 (d). Based on this, the hold icon b4 is displayed in an increased manner. In this example, the button operation waiting display 3 corresponds to the hold icon of an image of the chance button 136 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “chance button hold icon”). In FIG. 229 (e), since the operation period of the chance button 136 is not valid, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

  FIG. 229 (f) subsequent to FIG. 229 (e) shows a state in which the symbol display is stopped and the variable icon a1 is erased. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out. In FIG. 229 (f), the chance button holding icon is continuously displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but the chance button 136 remains in the normal state because it is not within the operation valid period of the chance button 136.

  In FIG. 229 (g) continuing from FIG. 229 (f), one hold of Toku-zu 1 is consumed and the next symbol variation display is started, and subsequently, the chance button hold icon is displayed as the button operation waiting display 3. It shows the state. The hold icon b2 becomes the variable icon a2 and moves to the left. A moving animation between the hold and variable icons and the hold icons b3 and b4 move to the left. Then, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. FIG. 229 (g) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is in a state different from the normal state, and the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits in a mode different from the normal state). .. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by causing the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). There are cases.

  FIG. 229 (h) following FIG. 229 (g) shows that while the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 229 (g) is being displayed continuously, the player is in the operation valid period of the chance button 136. This shows a state in which the hold icon b4 displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the button response display 3 by pressing the chance button 136. The button response display 3 of this example corresponds to a hold icon (hereinafter, may be referred to as “chance button light emission hold icon”) of an image of the chance button 136 that is emitting light in a mode different from the normal state. ing.

  FIG. 229 (i) continuing from FIG. 229 (h) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Is shown. FIG. 229 (i) continues to show a state in which the opportunity button light emission hold icon b4 is displayed as the button response display 3 shown in FIG. 229 (h).

  229 (j) continuing from FIG. 229 (i) shows a state in which the out-of-symbol pattern mode is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation icon a1 is erased. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out. In FIG. 229 (j), the chance button light emission hold icon b4 is continuously displayed as the button response display 3.

  In FIG. 229 (k) continuing from FIG. 229 (j), one hold of Toku-zu 1 is exhausted and the next symbol variable display is started, and subsequently, the chance button light emission hold icon b4 is displayed as the button response display 3. It shows the state of doing. The hold icon b3 becomes the variable icon a3 and moves leftward between the hold and variable icons, and the hold icon b4 moves leftward to display the hold icon moving animation. The operation valid period of 136 is started. FIG. 229 (k) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is in a state different from the normal state, and the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits in a manner different from the normal state). .. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by causing the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). There are cases. As described above, in this example, the button response display 3 is a display including a display that is performed while waiting for the chance button 136 to be pressed.

  In FIG. 229 (l) subsequent to FIG. 229 (k), while the button response display 3 shown in FIG. 229 (k) is being displayed continuously, the player is in the valid operation period of the chance button 136. By pressing the chance button 136, the chance button light emission hold icon b4 displayed as the button response display 3 is changed to the black circular hold icon b4 in the prefetching advance notice mode. In this example, the symbol variation display that is started when the hold corresponding to the black circular hold icon is exhausted is larger than the symbol variation display when the hold corresponding to the white circle hold icon is exhausted and started. The pattern mode is configured to be easily displayed in a stopped state. The chance button light emission hold icon b4 displayed as the button response display 3 may be changed to a white circular hold icon, a white rhombus hold icon, or another hold icon.

  FIG. 229 (m) continued from FIG. 229 (l) shows a state where “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Is shown.

  FIG. 229 (n) subsequent to FIG. 229 (m) shows a state in which the symbol display is stopped and the variable icon a1 is erased. "Decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of alignment.

  In FIG. 229 (o) continued from FIG. 229 (n), one hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the next symbol variable display is started, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the black circle hold icon b4 is displayed. The figure shows a state in which the movement animation between the holding and changing icons that move to the left as the black circular changing icon a4 has ended.

  FIG. 229 (p) following FIG. 229 (o) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 229 (p), the effect (reach effect) by a predetermined notice animation is started.

  FIG. 229 (q) subsequent to FIG. 229 (p) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of the disengagement pattern mode is performed. In the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 229 (r) subsequent to FIG. 229 (q) shows a state in which the stop display in the out-of-symbol pattern mode is displayed. "Decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out.

  In this example, the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the hold icon displayed as the button response display 3 by the player operating the chance button 136, and then the player clicks the Chan button. By operating 136, it is changed to the black circle holding icon which is the prefetching notice mode. In this way, the button operation wait display 3 and the button response display 3 in this example are configured to include the display that is performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136 because the hold icons correspond to each other.

  In the present example, when the hold icon is increased and displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, after the hold icon moving animation is displayed in which the hold icon moves to the left, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. Although configured, there may be cases other than this. For example, from the hold order when the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is increased and the time required to start the variable display of the start of the hold icon being consumed, the chance button 136 is displayed. The start timing of the operation valid period and the operation valid period of the chance button 136 may be determined.

  In this example, when the hold icon is increased and displayed, the hold icon is displayed as the button operation wait display 3. However, when the hold icon is decreased, a specific hold icon is waited for the button operation. The hold icon may be configured to be changed to the hold icon as the display 3, and a specific hold icon may be changed to the hold icon as the button operation standby display 3 at a timing other than the hold increase display and the hold decrease display. May be configured to change to.

  In this example, one hold icon of the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but one or more hold icons of the plurality of hold icons are simultaneously displayed as the button operation waiting display 3. There may be cases.

  In this example, one hold icon of the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation response display 3, but one or more hold icons of the plurality of hold icons are simultaneously displayed as the button response display 3. There may be.

In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the button operation wait display 3 and the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 3 are configured by the same hold icon, but the hold icon corresponding to the button operation wait display 3 and the button response The hold icon corresponding to the display 3 may be composed of different hold icons. In this case, when the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the white circle hold icon in the default mode at the timing when the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 3 is displayed, or a pre-reading notice other than the white circle is displayed. It may be changed to a hold icon having a mode.
(Example 6-2)
An example of effects of Example 6-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 230. FIG. 230 shows a modification of the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 203 (b), and shows the effect state in time series. This example is an effect example in which the button operation waiting display 3, the button response display 4, and the button response display 5 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 230 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out. ing. The white circular hold icon b1 and the white circular hold icon b2 are displayed in the effect display area 208d below the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In FIG. 230A, the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 230 (b) subsequent to FIG. 230 (a) shows a state in which one hold of Toku-zu 1 has been exhausted and the symbol variation display has been started. When the hold icon b1 becomes the variable icon a1 and moves to the left, the moving animation between the hold and variable icons and the hold icon b2 moves to the left and moves the hold icon. Be started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  FIG. 230 (c) continued from FIG. 230 (b), based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the execution of the variable display of symbols, the default white circular hold icon b3 is displayed. It shows the state of increased display. The "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 230 (d) continuing from FIG. 230 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbols shown in FIG. 230 (c) is being executed.

  FIG. 230 (e) continuing from FIG. 230 (d) shows that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230 while executing the variable display of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 230 (d). Based on this, the hold icon b4 is displayed in an increased manner. In this example, the chance button holding icon of the image of the chance button 136 corresponds to the button operation waiting display 3. In FIG. 230 (e), the chance button 136 remains in the normal state because the operation period of the chance button 136 is not valid.

  FIG. 230 (f) continuing from FIG. 230 (e) shows a state in which the outlier symbol form is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation icon a1 is erased. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out. In FIG. 230 (f), the chance button holding icon is continuously displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but the chance button 136 remains in the normal state because it is not within the operation valid period of the chance button 136.

  In FIG. 230 (g) continuing from FIG. 230 (f), one hold of Toku-zu 1 is consumed and the next symbol variation display is started, and subsequently, the chance button hold icon is displayed as the button operation waiting display 3. It shows the state. The hold icon b2 becomes the variable icon a2 and moves to the left. A moving animation between the hold and variable icons and the hold icons b3 and b4 move to the left. Then, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. In FIG. 230 (g), the chance button 136 is in a state different from the normal state, and the chance button lamp 138 is emitting light in a predetermined mode (or is emitting light in a mode different from the normal state). .. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by causing the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). There are cases. In the present example, the hold icon is moved to the left, and after the move animation of the hold icon is displayed, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started.

  In FIG. 230 (h) continuing from FIG. 230 (g), while the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 230 (g) is being continuously displayed, the player is in the operation valid period of the chance button 136. This shows a state in which the hold icon b4 displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the button response display 4 by pressing the chance button 136. The button response display 4 of this example corresponds to a hold icon of an image of the opportunity button 139 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “opportunity button hold icon”).

  FIG. 230 (i) continuing from FIG. 230 (h) shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Is shown. FIG. 230 (i) continues to show a state in which the opportunity button holding icon b4 is displayed as the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 230 (h).

  FIG. 230 (j) subsequent to FIG. 230 (i) shows a state in which the outlier symbol form is stopped and displayed, and the variation icon a1 is erased. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out. In FIG. 230 (j), the opportunity button holding icon b4 is continuously displayed as the button response display 4.

  In FIG. 230 (k) continued from FIG. 230 (j), one hold of Toku-zu 1 is consumed and the next symbol variation display is started, and subsequently, the opportunity button hold icon b4 is displayed as the button response display 4. It shows the state. The hold icon b3 becomes the variable icon a3 and moves leftward between the hold and variable icons and the hold icon b4 moves leftward to display the hold icon moving animation. The variable display of decorative patterns and the opportunity button are displayed. The operation valid period of 139 is started. In FIG. 230 (k), the opportunity button 139 is in a state different from the normal state, and the opportunity button lamp 141 is emitting light in a predetermined mode (or is emitting light in a mode different from the normal state). .. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by causing the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). There are cases. As described above, in this example, the button response display 4 is a display including a display performed when waiting for the depression of the opportunity button 139.

  In FIG. 230 (l) continuing from FIG. 230 (k), while the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 230 (k) is being continuously displayed, the player is in the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. By pressing the opportunity button 139, the opportunity button holding icon b4 displayed as the button response display 4 is changed to the white diamond-shaped holding icon b4 as the button response display 5. In this example, the symbol variation display that is started when the hold corresponding to the white diamond-shaped hold icon is consumed is larger than the symbol variation display that is started when the hold corresponding to the white circular hold icon is consumed. The pattern mode is configured to be easily displayed in a stopped state. The design variation display, which is started when the hold corresponding to the white diamond-shaped hold icon is consumed, is larger than the design variation display, where the hold corresponding to the black circular hold icon is consumed, is started. It is configured to be easily displayed. As the button response display 5, a white circular hold icon, a black circle hold icon, or a hold icon other than these may be displayed.

  In FIG. 230 (m) continuing from FIG. 230 (l), “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Is shown.

  FIG. 230 (n) continuing from FIG. 230 (m) shows a state in which the out-of-drawing symbol mode is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation icon a1 is erased. "Decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of alignment.

  In FIG. 230 (o) continuing from FIG. 230 (n), one hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the next symbol variable display is started, the decorative symbol variable display is started, and the black circular hold icon b4 is displayed. The figure shows a state in which the movement animation between the holding and changing icons that move to the left as the black circular changing icon a4 has ended.

  FIG. 230 (p) continuing from FIG. 230 (o) shows a state where “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 230 (p), the effect (reach effect) by a predetermined notice animation is started.

  FIG. 230 (q) subsequent to FIG. 230 (p) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of the disengagement pattern mode is performed. In the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 230 (r) continuing from FIG. 230 (q) shows a state in which the stop display in the out-of-symbol pattern mode is performed. "Decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out.

  In this example, the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the hold icon displayed as the button response display 4 by the player operating the chance button 136, and then the player has an opportunity button. By operating 139, the button is changed to the black circular hold icon which is displayed as the button response display 5 and serves as the look-ahead notice mode. As described above, in this example, the hold icon corresponds to the button operation waiting display 3, the button response display 4, and the button response display 5. The button operation waiting display 3 includes a display performed when waiting for an operation of the chance button 136, and the button response display 4 includes a display performed when waiting for an operation of the opportunity button 139.

  In the present example, when the hold icon is increased and displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, after the hold icon moving animation is displayed in which the hold icon moves to the left, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. Although configured, there may be cases other than this. For example, from the hold order when the hold icon corresponding to the button operation wait display 3 is increased and the time required to start the variable pattern display that is started after the hold icon is held, the chance button 136 is operated. The start timing of the effective period and the operation effective period of the chance button 136 may be determined in some cases.

  In this example, the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is configured to start the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 after displaying the movement animation of the hold icon that moves to the left. There may be cases other than. For example, the holding order when the holding icons displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 are increased and the time required to start the variable display of the symbols, which is started after the holding of the holding icons is exhausted, and the chance button by the player. The start timing of the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 and the operation validity period of the opportunity button 139 may be determined from the timing of operating the 136.

  In this example, when the hold icon is increased and displayed, the hold icon is displayed as the button operation wait display 3. However, when the hold icon is decreased, a specific hold icon is waited for the button operation. The hold icon may be configured to be changed to the hold icon as the display 3, and a specific hold icon may be changed to the hold icon as the button operation standby display 3 at a timing other than the hold increase display and the hold decrease display. May be configured to change to.

  In this example, one hold icon among the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation wait display 3, but two or more hold icons among the plurality of hold icons are displayed simultaneously as the button operation wait display 3. There may be cases.

  In this example, one hold icon among the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation response display 4, but two or more hold icons among the plurality of hold icons are displayed simultaneously as the button response display 4. There may be.

  In this example, one hold icon among the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation response display 5, but two or more hold icons among the plurality of hold icons are displayed simultaneously as the button response display 5. There may be.

  In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the button operation wait display 3 and the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 are configured by the same hold icon, but the hold icon corresponding to the button operation wait display 3 and the button response The hold icon corresponding to the display 4 may be composed of different hold icons. In this case, when the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the white circle hold icon in the default mode at the timing when the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 is displayed, or a look-ahead notice other than the white circle is displayed. It may be changed to a hold icon having a mode.

In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 and the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 5 are configured by the same hold icon, but the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 and the button response display 5 are formed. The hold icon corresponding to may be configured with a different hold icon.
(Example 6-3)
An effect example of Example 6-3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 231 shows a modification of the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 203 (b) and shows the effect state in time series. This example is an effect example in which the button operation waiting display 3, the button response display 4, and the button response display 5 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 231 (a) shows a state where the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out. ing. The white circular hold icon b1 and the white circular hold icon b2 are displayed in the effect display area 208d below the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. FIG. 231 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 231 (b) continuing from FIG. 231 (a) shows a state in which one hold of Toku-zu 1 has been exhausted and symbol variation display has started. When the hold icon b1 becomes the variable icon a1 and moves to the left, the moving animation between the hold and variable icons and the hold icon b2 moves to the left and moves the hold icon. Be started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  231 (c) continuing from FIG. 231 (b), based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the execution of the symbol variation display, the default white circular hold icon b3 is displayed. It shows the state of increased display. The "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 231 (d) subsequent to FIG. 231 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 231 (c) is being executed.

  231 (e) continuing from FIG. 231 (d), one game ball enters the special figure 1 starting opening 230 while executing the variable display of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 231 (d). Based on this, the hold icon b4 is displayed in an increased manner. In this example, the chance button holding icon of the image of the chance button 136 corresponds to the button operation waiting display 3. In FIG. 231 (e), the chance button 136 remains in the normal state because the operation period of the chance button 136 is not valid.

  FIG. 231 (f) following FIG. 231 (e) shows a state in which the discontinued symbol mode is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation icon a1 is erased. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out. In FIG. 231 (f), the chance button holding icon is continuously displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but the chance button 136 remains in the normal state because it is not within the operation valid period of the chance button 136.

  In FIG. 231 (g) continuing from FIG. 231 (f), one hold of Toku-zu 1 is consumed and the next symbol variation display is started, and subsequently, the chance button hold icon is displayed as the button operation waiting display 3. It shows the state. The hold icon b2 becomes the variable icon a2 and moves to the left. A moving animation between the hold and variable icons and the hold icons b3 and b4 move to the left. Then, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. FIG. 231 (g) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is in a state different from the normal state, and the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits in a manner different from the normal state). .. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by causing the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). There are cases. In the present example, the hold icon is moved to the left, and after the move animation of the hold icon is displayed, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started.

  FIG. 231 (h) following FIG. 231 (g) shows that the player is in the operation valid period of the chance button 136 while the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 231 (g) is being displayed continuously. This shows a state in which the hold icon b4 displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the button response display 4 by pressing the chance button 136. The button response display 4 of this example corresponds to the opportunity button holding icon of the image showing the opportunity button 139.

  FIG. 231 (i) continuing from FIG. 231 (h) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Is shown. FIG. 231 (i) continues to show a state in which the opportunity button holding icon b4 is displayed as the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 231 (h).

  FIG. 231 (j) continuing from FIG. 231 (i) shows a state in which the discontinued symbol mode is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation icon a1 is erased. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out. In FIG. 231 (j), the opportunity button holding icon b4 is continuously displayed as the button response display 4.

  In FIG. 231 (k) continuing from FIG. 231 (j), one hold of Toku-zu 1 is consumed and the next symbol variable display is started, and subsequently, the opportunity button hold icon b4 is displayed as the button response display 4. It shows the state. The hold icon b3 becomes the variable icon a3 and moves leftward between the hold and variable icons and the hold icon b4 moves leftward to display the hold icon moving animation. The variable display of decorative patterns and the opportunity button are displayed. The operation valid period of 139 is started. In FIG. 231 (k), the opportunity button 139 is in a state different from the normal state, and the opportunity button lamp 141 is emitting light in a predetermined mode (or is emitting light in a mode different from the normal state). .. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by causing the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). There are cases. As described above, in this example, the button response display 4 is a display including a display performed when waiting for the depression of the opportunity button 139.

  FIG. 231 (l) continuing from FIG. 231 (k) shows that the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 231 (k) is being continuously displayed, and the player is in the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. By depressing the opportunity button 139, an animation showing a state in which the opportunity button holding icon b4 is changing in the area where the opportunity button holding icon b4 is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as “holding icon changing animation”). It may be called.) Is displayed.

  231 (l) subsequent to FIG. 231 (l), "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. At the end of the display of the hold icon changing animation, the hold icon of the image of the opportunity button 139 in a state in which the opportunity button hold icon b4 displayed as the button response display 4 is projected (hereinafter, “opportunity button protrusion hold”). It may be referred to as "icon".) The state changed to b5 is shown. In FIG. 231 (m), the opportunity button 139 is projected in association with displaying the button response display 5, but since the opportunity button 139 is not in the operation valid period, the opportunity button 139 is in a state of not emitting light, Alternatively, it remains in a normal light emitting state. In this example, the symbol variation display that is started when the hold corresponding to the opportunity button protruding hold icon is started is larger than the symbol variation display that is started after the hold corresponding to the white circle hold icon is consumed. The pattern mode is configured to be easily stopped and displayed, and the hold corresponding to the opportunity button protruding hold icon is started to be started after the hold corresponding to the black circular hold icon is consumed and started. The symbol variation display is configured so that the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be stopped and displayed, and the hold corresponding to the opportunity button projecting hold icon is more than the symbol variation display that is started after the hold corresponding to the white diamond-shaped hold icon is exhausted. The symbol variation display which is started by digesting is designed so that the big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed.

  FIG. 231 (n) subsequent to FIG. 231 (m) shows a state in which the out-of-symbol pattern mode is confirmed and the variable icon a1 is erased. "Decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of alignment.

  In FIG. 231 (o) continuing from FIG. 231 (n), one hold of Toku-zu 1 is exhausted and the next symbol variable display is started, and then the opportunity button protrusion hold icon b4 is an opportunity button in a protruded state. A variation icon of the image 139 (hereinafter, may be referred to as an “opportunity button protrusion variation icon”) a4 is displayed, and a movement animation between the holding and variation icons that moves to the left is displayed, and the variation of the decorative pattern is displayed. The display and the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 are started. FIG. 231 (o) shows a state in which the protruding opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state).

  FIG. 231 (p) continuing from FIG. 231 (o) shows that the player is displaying the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 231 (o) continuously while the operation of the opportunity button 139 is valid. By pressing the opportunity button 139 in the protruding state, a state in which "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" in the jackpot pattern mode is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is shown. When the player does not press the opportunity button 139 in the protruding state during the operation validity period of the opportunity button 139, when the operation validity period of the opportunity button 139 ends, a big hit to the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c The "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" in the pattern mode is stopped and displayed.

  231 (r) subsequent to FIG. 231 (q) shows a state in which the stop display of the big hit symbol mode is displayed. "Decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

  In this example, the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the hold icon displayed as the button response display 4 by the player operating the chance button 136, and then the player has an opportunity button. By operating 139, it is changed to the opportunity button protrusion hold icon which is the look-ahead notice mode displayed as the button response display 5, and then the player operates the opportunity button 139 in a state protruding from the normal state, The temporary stop display of the decorative pattern is performed. As described above, in this example, the hold icon corresponds to the button operation waiting display 3, the button response display 4, and the button response display 5. The button operation wait display 3 includes a display that is performed when the chance button 136 is operated, and the button response display 4 and the button response display 5 include displays that are performed when the opportunity button 139 is operated. It

  In the present example, when the hold icon is increased and displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, after the hold icon moving animation is displayed in which the hold icon moves to the left, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. Although configured, there may be cases other than this. For example, from the hold order when the hold icon corresponding to the button operation wait display 3 is increased and the time required to start the variable pattern display that is started after the hold icon is held, the chance button 136 is operated. The start timing of the effective period and the operation effective period of the chance button 136 may be determined in some cases.

  In this example, the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is configured to start the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 after displaying the movement animation of the hold icon that moves to the left. There may be cases other than. For example, the holding order when the holding icons displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 are increased and the time required to start the variable display of the symbols, which is started after the holding of the holding icons is exhausted, and the chance button by the player. The start timing of the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 and the operation validity period of the opportunity button 139 may be determined from the timing of operating the 136.

  In this example, when the hold icon is increased and displayed, the hold icon is displayed as the button operation wait display 3. However, when the hold icon is decreased, a specific hold icon is waited for the button operation. The hold icon may be configured to be changed to the hold icon as the display 3, and a specific hold icon may be changed to the hold icon as the button operation standby display 3 at a timing other than the hold increase display and the hold decrease display. May be configured to change to.

  In this example, one hold icon among the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation wait display 3, but two or more hold icons among the plurality of hold icons are displayed simultaneously as the button operation wait display 3. There may be cases.

  In this example, one hold icon among the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation response display 4, but two or more hold icons among the plurality of hold icons are displayed simultaneously as the button response display 4. There may be.

  In this example, one hold icon among the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation response display 5, but two or more hold icons among the plurality of hold icons are displayed simultaneously as the button response display 5. There may be.

  In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the button operation wait display 3 and the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 are configured by the same hold icon, but the hold icon corresponding to the button operation wait display 3 and the button response The hold icon corresponding to the display 4 may be composed of different hold icons.

  In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 and the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 5 are configured by the same hold icon, but the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 and the button response display 5 The hold icon corresponding to may be configured with a different hold icon.

  As described above, in Examples 6-1 to 6-3, an example of effect in which the hold icon is associated with the operation wait display and the operation response display displayed in the effect pattern 2 or effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 203 is shown. However, the hold icon may be associated with the operation wait display and the operation response display displayed in the effect pattern 1, the effect pattern 4, and the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG. 203.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the game table according to the third embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 to 231 again.
(I1)
Symbol display means capable of executing symbol variable display (for example, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214),
Image display means capable of displaying an image (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a sub display device 209),
A first operation means (for example, a chance button 136) provided at a position operable by the player,
Second operation means (for example, an opportunity button 139) provided at a position where the player can operate,
A gaming machine equipped with
The gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a third type of operation waiting display (for example, button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 203B),
The third type of operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for the operation of the first operating means (for example, FIGS. 212 (c) to (d) and 216 (c) to (d)). Etc.),
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a third type of operation response display (for example, button response display 3 shown in FIG. 203B),
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a fourth type of operation response display (for example, button response display 4 shown in FIG. 203B).
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a fifth type of operation response display (for example, button response display 5 shown in FIG. 203 (c)),
The operation response display of the third type is a display performed in response to the operation of the first operation means (see, for example, FIG. 203 (b) and FIGS. 212 (c) to (f)). ),
The operation response display of the third type does not include a part of the display (for example, a button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped) displayed while waiting for the operation of the second operation unit. A configured display (see, for example, FIG. 203 (b), FIG. 212 (c)-(f)),
The fourth type of operation response display is a display performed in response to the operation of the first operation means (see, for example, FIG. 203 (c) and FIGS. 216 (c) to (f)). ),
The operation response display of the fourth type is a display configured to include the part of the display performed while waiting for the operation of the second operation unit (for example, FIG. 203 (c), FIG. 216). (See (f)),
The fifth type operation response display is a display performed in response to the operation of the second operation means (see, for example, FIG. 203 (d) and FIG. 216 (g)),
The pattern variation display in which the fifth type operation response display is performed is more than the symbol variation display in which the fifth type operation response display is performed and the third type operation response display is performed. However, it is easy to confirm and display the jackpot pattern,
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the fifth type of operation response display that is displayed by causing the player to gradually operate the first operating means and the second operating means is performed. The display is more than the symbol variation display in which the operation response display of the third type is displayed by allowing the player to operate only the first operating means without the operation response display of the fifth type being displayed, Since the jackpot pattern is likely to be confirmed and displayed, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be gradually increased, and the interest of the game can be improved in some cases.
(I2)
The gaming machine described in (I1) above,
The operation response display of the third type and the operation of the fourth type in response to the operation of the first operation unit during the display of the third operation waiting display (for example, the chance button emission image). Which type of display is displayed among the response displays is determined before the third operation waiting display is displayed on the image display means,
The third operation waiting display is one of the third types of operation waiting displays (see, for example, FIGS. 212 (c) and 216 (c)),
A game table characterized by that.
(I3)
The gaming table according to (I1) or (I2) above,
The image display means can display a fourth type of operation waiting display (for example, button operation waiting display 4 shown in FIG. 203C),
The fourth type of operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for an operation of the first operating means (see, for example, FIG. 203 (c) and FIGS. 223 (c) to (d)),
The operation response display of the fourth type is configured to be displayed on the image display unit when the first operation unit is operated during the display of the operation standby display of the fourth type. (See, for example, FIG. 203 (c), FIG. 223 (d)-(f)),
The symbol variation display in which the operation waiting display of the fourth type is performed, rather than the symbol variation display in which the operation waiting display of the third type is performed without performing the operation waiting display of the fourth type However, it is easy to confirm the jackpot pattern,
A game table characterized by that.
(I4)
The gaming machine described in (I3) above,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a first type of operation waiting display (for example, operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 203 (a)),
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a first type of operation response display (for example, the operation response display 1 shown in FIG. 203A).
The first type of operation waiting display is a display that is performed when an operation of the first operating means is awaited (see, for example, FIGS. 203 (a) and 204 (d)),
The first type of operation response display is a display configured without including the display that is performed when the operation of the second operation unit is awaited (for example, FIG. 203 (a), FIG. 204 (e)). reference),
The operation response display of the first type is configured to be displayed on the image display unit when the first operation unit is operated during the display of the operation standby display of the first type. (See, for example, FIGS. 203 (a) and 204 (d) to (e)),
The first operation response display (for example, a character string image of "chance !!") is configured to be displayed only when the first operation means is operated during the display of the first operation waiting display. (See, for example, FIGS. 205 (c) to (d)),
The fourth operation response display (for example, the opportunity button image and the button pressing instruction image) is configured to be displayed when the first operation means is operated while the fourth operation waiting display is being displayed. Cage (see, for example, FIGS. 216 (c) to (f)),
The fourth operation response display is configured to be displayed even when the first operation unit is not operated during the display of the fourth operation waiting display (for example, FIG. 219 (c)- (See (f)),
The first operation waiting display is one operation waiting display of the first type of operation waiting display,
The first operation response display is one operation response display of the first type of operation response display,
The fourth operation waiting display is one operation waiting display of the fourth type of operation waiting display,
The fourth operation response display is one operation response display of the fourth type of operation response display,
A game table characterized by that.
(I5)
The gaming machine described in (I4) above,
The pattern variation display in which the fifth type of operation response display is performed is more than the symbol variation display in which the fifth type of operation response display is performed without performing the fifth type operation response display. However, it is easy to confirm the jackpot pattern,
A game table characterized by that.
(I6)
The gaming table according to (I4) or (I5) above,
The symbol variation display in which the first type of operation response display is performed is more than the symbol variation display in which the third type of operation response display is performed without performing the first type operation response display. However, it is easy to confirm the jackpot pattern,
A game table characterized by that.
(I7)
The gaming table according to any one of (I1) to (I6) above,
The operation response display of the fourth type when the time from the display of the operation waiting display of the third type to the operation of the first operation means is the first time is the first A display (for example, the button response display 4 shown in FIGS. 216 (d) to (f)) (see, for example, FIGS. 216 (c) to (f)),
The operation response display of the fourth type is the second when the time from the display of the operation waiting display of the third type until the operation of the first operating means is the second time. A display (for example, button response display 4 shown in FIGS. 219 (e) to (f)) (see, for example, FIGS. 219 (c) to (f)),
The second time is a time longer than the first time,
The display of the opening of the first display and the display of the opening of the second display are the same (see, for example, FIG. 216 (d) and FIG. 219 (e)),
The display at the end of the first display and the display at the end of the second display are the same (see, for example, FIGS. 216 (f) and 219 (f)),
At least a part of the middle display of the first display (for example, the middle display of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 216 (e)) is not displayed in the second display (for example, FIG. 219 (e)- (See (f)),
A game table characterized by that.
(I8)
The gaming machine described in (I7) above,
When the first operation means is operated after the operation waiting display of the third type is displayed and before the operation effective period defined before the start of the operation waiting display of the third type ends The display is configured to be displayed according to the operation of the first operation means (see, for example, FIGS. 216 (d) to 216 (f)),
The first time is the time from the start of the third type of operation waiting display to the operation of the first operation means at the shortest timing (for example, FIG. 216 (c )-(D)),
The second time is a time when the first operation means is operated at a timing immediately before the end of the operation valid period after the third type of operation waiting display is started ( For example, see FIGS. 219 (c) to (d)),
A game table characterized by that.
(I9)
The gaming table according to any one of (I1) to (I8) above,
The image display means can display a second type of operation waiting display (for example, button operation waiting display 2),
The second type of operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for an operation of the second operating means (for example, see FIG. 203 (d)),
The operation response display of the second type is configured to be displayed on the image display unit when the second operation unit is operated during the display of the operation standby display of the second type. (For example, see FIG. 203 (d)),
The pattern variation display in which the fifth type of operation response display is performed is more than the symbol variation display in which the fifth type of operation response display is performed without performing the fifth type operation response display. However, it is easy to confirm the jackpot pattern,
A game table characterized by that.
(I10)
The gaming table according to any one of (I1) to (I9) above,
The display of the character displayed in the operation response display of the fourth type (for example, the button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped as shown in FIG. 223 (f)) is the operation waiting for the fourth type. The display is also configured to be displayed (for example, see FIG. 223 (c)),
A game table characterized by that.
(I11)
The gaming table according to any one of (I1) to (I10) above,
The display of the character displayed in the operation response display of the fourth type (for example, the button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped as shown in FIG. 216 (f)) is awaiting the operation of the third type. The display is also configured to be displayed (for example, see FIG. 216 (c)),
A game table characterized by that.
(I12)
The gaming table according to any one of (I1) to (I11) above,
The second operation means is configured to be determined to have been operated when pressed by the player,
A game table characterized by that.
(I13)
The gaming table according to any one of (I1) to (I12) above,
The first operation means is configured to be operated when it is rotated by a player,
A game table characterized by that.
[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to a fourth embodiment to which the present invention can be applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 239. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the same configuration and control system as the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment. The same components as those of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.
(Example 1)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 232. FIG. 232 shows an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 232 (a) shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174, and from FIG. 1002 is extracted and shown.

  FIG. 232 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 232 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 2, for example, and the number of reservations in special figure 2 is 0. In FIG. 232, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

  FIG. 232 (b) continuing from FIG. 232 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is started based on the fact that the holding of the earliest special figure 1 is exhausted. In the decorative pattern display device 208, variable display of decorative patterns is executed.

  232 (c) continuing from FIG. 232 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 232 (d) subsequent to FIG. 232 (c) shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. The normal reach effect is started after FIG. 232 (d).

  FIG. 232 (e) subsequent to FIG. 232 (d) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has moved from the initial position to the lowermost part of the operation range. The movable body 1010 is stopped at a position on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208. As a result, the movable body 1010 and a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 overlap, and a part of the image becomes invisible to the player. At least a part of the decorative pattern or notice image (for example, the image of the sun, cloud, balloon, hold icon, change icon, etc.) overlaps with the movable body and may be invisible to the player. Is a look-ahead notice that the visible part of the notice image may be different before and after the movement of the movable body as compared to the variable display in which at least part of the decorative pattern or the notice image does not overlap the movable body. When the execution is executed, the visible part of the notice image before and after the movement of the movable body may not be different than when the advance notice is executed. It may be configured to be easily operated.

  FIG. 232 (f) subsequent to FIG. 232 (e) shows a state where the movable body 1010 has moved upward and returned to the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 1010 is the uppermost position in the moving range of the movable body 1010.

  FIG. 232 (g) subsequent to FIG. 232 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is provisionally stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b during the normal reach effect. In the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the swing variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is the outlying pattern mode, shakes left and right. In the present embodiment, the wipe effect display described later is not executed during the normal reach effect.

  FIG. 232 (h) continuing from FIG. 232 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variation game is out of alignment. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable display is off.

  FIG. 232 (i) continuing from FIG. 232 (h) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is started based on the fact that the earliest hold of special figure 1 has been exhausted. In the decorative pattern display device 208, variable display of decorative patterns is executed.

  FIG. 232 (j) subsequent to FIG. 232 (i) shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 232 (k) subsequent to FIG. 232 (j) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Super reach reach production is started from FIG. 232 (k). In the present example, the jackpot symbol aspect is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display in which the super reach effect is performed than in the symbol variable display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  FIG. 232 (l) subsequent to FIG. 232 (k) shows a state in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 has changed with the start of the super reach effect. The background image is changing from the background image of the sky including the image of the sun, the image of the cloud, the image of the balloon to the background image of the mountain road. In the present embodiment, the sky background image is displayed during normal performance execution or normal reach performance execution, and the mountain road background image is displayed during super reach performance execution.

  FIG. 232 (m) subsequent to FIG. 232 (l) shows a state in which the background image displayed on the sub display device 1030 has changed with the start of the super reach effect. The background image is changed from the background image of the sea including the image of the yacht and the image of the cloud to a part of the image of the background of the mountain road displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. On the sub display device 1030, an image of a portion which the sub display device 1030 is hidden by overlapping the decorative pattern display device 208 is displayed.

  FIG. 232 (n) subsequent to FIG. 232 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 including the sub display device 1030 has moved to the upper right from the initial position shown in FIG. 232 (m). On the sub display device 1030, an image of a portion which the sub display device 1030 is hidden by overlapping the decorative pattern display device 208 is displayed. In this embodiment, the movable body 1002 is a plane in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and substantially parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a display screen front plane) by a drive system (not shown). It is possible to move in two dimensions. The drive system of the movable body 1002 can have various configurations. For example, one end of two rotatably connected connecting rods is rotatably fixed to a predetermined position of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 outside the decorative pattern display device 208, and two-dimensionally in the front plane of the display screen. Configure a movable link mechanism. The movable body 1002 is fixed to the other ends of the two connecting rods connected to each other so as to be rotatable in the plane. Motors for driving the connecting rods are respectively arranged at one end and the connecting node of the two connecting rods connected to each other. As a result, the movable body 1002 can be two-dimensionally moved within the front plane of the display screen. It should be noted that a motor for rotating the effect movable body may be arranged at the other ends of the two connecting rods so that the effect movable body 1002 can be rotated in the front plane of the display screen.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During some period during execution of the super reach effect, the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced display mode.

  FIG. 232 (o) subsequent to FIG. 232 (n) shows a state in which the character string image of “sorry” is displayed as a display indicating a deviation in the center of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 (center of the effect display area 208d). Is shown. The sub display device 1030 is located at a position overlapping a part of the character image of “nen” displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the lower half portion of the character of “nen” is displayed on the sub display device 1030. It is displayed.

  FIG. 232 (p) subsequent to FIG. 232 (o) shows a state where “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the swing variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is the outlying pattern mode, shakes up and down.

  FIG. 232 (q) subsequent to FIG. 232 (p) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started after “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” indicating a deviation is displayed during super reach production. .. The wipe effect display is an effect in which the image is erased from the edge of the display screen of the display device so as to be wiped out. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes two display devices, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a sub display device 1030. In this embodiment, the wipe effect display is first started on the decorative pattern display device 208, and then the sub display device. The display device 1030 starts. Hereinafter, the wipe effect display executed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is referred to as a first wipe effect display, the wipe display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is referred to as a first wipe display, and the sub display device 1030 is used. The executed wipe effect display is referred to as a second wipe effect display, and the wipe display displayed on the sub display device 208 is referred to as a second wipe display.

  As shown in FIG. 232 (q), the wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. To do. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to make the appearance display of the first wipe display start, and the appearance of the first wipe display makes the start of the first wipe effect display. The wipe displays w1a and w1b are displayed on the foreground in the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like that have been displayed before the start of the first wipe effect display. The wipe displays w1a and w1b have the same picture pattern, and in FIG. 232, the picture patterns are indicated by hatching that rises to the right.

  The production movable body 1002 is moving toward the initial position, and the sub display device 1030 is located at a position overlapping a part of the character string image of “sorry” displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. The display device 1030 displays the lower half part of the character “Nen”.

  FIG. 232 (r) subsequent to FIG. 232 (q) shows a state in which the wipe displays w1a and w1b are spread so as to gradually cover the display screen. The wipe display w1a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to gradually spread from the lower right corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen. ..

  232 (s) subsequent to FIG. 232 (r) shows a state in which the second wipe effect display is started on the sub display device 1030 while the sub display device 1030 (effect movable body 1002) is moving. The wipe display w2a starts to appear from the upper right corner of the display screen of the sub display 1030, and the wipe display w2b starts to appear from the lower left corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030. The appearance of the wipe display w2a and the appearance of the wipe display w2b are combined to make the appearance display of the second wipe display start, and the appearance of the second wipe display makes the start of the second wipe effect display. The wipe displays w2a and w2b are displayed on the foreground on the sub display device 1030, and are displayed so as to wipe out the display of the background image and the like that has been displayed before the start of the second wipe effect display. The wipe displays w2a and w2b have the same design, and in FIG. 232, the design is shown by white dots on a black background.

  The first wipe display pattern and the second wipe display pattern are different. The first wipe display appears from the upper left and lower right corners of the screen, and the second wipe display appears from the upper right and lower left corners of the screen.

  In the present embodiment, the second wipe effect display is started during execution of the effect operation in which the sub display device 1030 moves to the initial position, but the second wipe effect is displayed after the sub display device 1030 stops at the initial position. The display may be started, the sub display device 1030 may start moving to the initial position after the second wipe effect display ends, or the timing when the sub display device 1030 starts moving to the initial position and the first position. The start timing of the second wipe effect display may be the same.

  FIG. 232 (t) subsequent to FIG. 232 (s) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is stopped at the initial position. The first wipe display and the second wipe display are emerging. The wipe display w1a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to gradually spread from the lower right corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen. .. The wipe display w2a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper right corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w2b is displayed so as to gradually spread from the lower left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen. ..

  FIG. 232 (u) subsequent to FIG. 232 (t) shows a state in which the appearance display of the second wipe display is completed. The ends of the wipe display w2a and the ends of the wipe display w2b are in contact with each other, and the entire display screen of the sub display device 1030 is covered with the wipe displays w2a and w2b. When the entire display screen of the sub display device 1030 is covered with the wipe displays w2a and w2b, the wipe displays w2a and w2b are in a standby display state in which they are not moved and displayed. When the appearance display of the second wipe display is completed, the standby display of the second wipe display is started. The first wipe display is appearing, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed from the lower right corner of the display screen. It is displayed so that it gradually spreads to the center.

  FIG. 232 (v) subsequent to FIG. 232 (u) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. The end of the wipe display w1a and the end of the wipe display w1b are in contact with each other, and the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w1a and w1b. When the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w1a and w1b, the wipe displays w1a and w1b are in a standby display state in which they are not moved and displayed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  FIG. 232 (w) subsequent to FIG. 232 (v) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. The wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The second wipe display is in standby display.

  FIG. 232 (x) subsequent to FIG. 232 (w) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the second wipe display is started. The wipe display w2a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper right corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w2b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower left corner of the display screen.

  FIG. 232 (y) subsequent to FIG. 232 (x) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the first wipe display and the second wipe display is being performed. Between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b, a part of the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped is displayed.

  FIG. 232 (z) subsequent to FIG. 232 (y) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the second wipe display has been completed. The wipe display w2a shrinks toward the upper right corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030, the wipe display w2a is deleted from the display screen, and the wipe display w2b shrinks toward the lower left corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030. When the wipe display w2b is deleted from the screen, the withdrawal of the second wipe display is completed. When the withdrawal of the second wipe display is completed, the second wipe effect display is ended. The first wipe effect display is being withdrawn.

  As shown in FIG. 232 (r), the background image of the mountain road is displayed on the sub display device 1030 before the second wipe effect display is started, but as shown in FIG. 232 (z), the second wipe effect display is performed. After the end, the background image of the sea is displayed on the sub display device 1030. In this way, the background image displayed on the sub display device 1030 changes before and after the second wipe effect display.

  In this embodiment, the appearance start position and the withdrawal completion position of the second wipe display are the same. That is, the wipe display w2a starts to appear from the upper right corner of the display screen, and the withdrawal is completed at the upper right corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w2b starts to appear from the lower left corner of the display screen to the lower left corner of the display screen. Complete withdrawal. The appearance start position and the withdrawal completion position of the second wipe display may be different. For example, the wipe display w2a starts to appear from the upper right corner of the display screen and completes the withdrawal to the lower right corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w2b starts to appear from the lower left corner of the display screen to the upper left corner of the display screen. You may complete the withdrawal.

  FIG. 232 (a) subsequent to FIG. 232 (z) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. The wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the wipe display w1a is deleted from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. When the wipe display w1b is deleted from the display screen, withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed. The completion of the withdrawal of the first wipe display is the end of the first wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a deviating symbol aspect, sways in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The variable display is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 232 (p), the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced display mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 before the start of the first wipe effect display, but as shown in FIG. After the end of the wipe effect display, the decorative pattern is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 in a display mode of a normal size. In this way, the display mode of the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes before and after the first wipe effect display. In the present embodiment, the size of the decorative design displayed on the decorative design display device 208 changes before and after the first wipe effect display.

  As shown in FIG. 232 (p), the background image of the mountain road is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 before the first wipe effect display is started, but as shown in FIG. 232 (a), the first wipe effect is displayed. After the display is finished, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. In this way, the background image displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 changes before and after the first wipe effect display.

  In this embodiment, the appearance start position and the withdrawal completion position of the first wipe display are the same. That is, the wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen and completes withdrawal to the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen to the lower right corner of the display screen. Complete withdrawal. The appearance start position and the withdrawal completion position of the first wipe display may be different. For example, the wipe display w1a starts to appear in the upper left corner of the display screen and completes withdrawal in the lower left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear in the lower right corner of the display screen and appears in the upper right corner of the display screen. You may complete the withdrawal.

  FIG. 232 (b) subsequent to FIG. 232 (a) shows a fluctuation display in a display mode in which “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” sways left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed.

  FIG. 232 (c) which continues from FIG. 232 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game has ended. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the fact that the judgment result of the special game 1 variable game is wrong is notified. ing.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes effect display means capable of executing effect display. The effect display means is a display means composed of a plurality of image display means, and one image display means of the plurality of image display means is a decorative symbol display device 208, among the plurality of image display means. One image display unit is the sub display device 1030. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can perform the first wipe effect display on the decorative pattern display device 208 after the display indicating the deviation is performed in the super reach effect, and the deviation is caused in the super reach effect. It is possible to perform the second wipe effect display on the sub-display device 208 after the display suggesting "." A scene change of a background image and the like is performed by the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to renew the player's mood by making the scene change of the production gorgeous.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 232 (s) to (t), a part of the second wipe effect display is performed on the sub display device 1030 that is performing the moving operation. The entire second wipe effect display may be performed while the sub display device 1030 is moving. Note that the decorative symbol display device 208 can execute the moving operation, and at least part of the first wipe effect display may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 performing the moving operation.
(Example 2)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 233. FIG. 233 shows an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 233, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

  FIG. 233 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 233 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is, for example, 3 and the number of reservations in special figure 2 is 0. On the decorative symbol display device 208, three holding icons indicating the number of holdings of the special drawing 1 are displayed. The display modes of the three hold icons are all black circles.

  FIG. 233 (b) continuing from FIG. 233 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is started based on the fact that the reservation of the first special figure 1 is exhausted. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed, the leftmost hold icon corresponding to the consumed hold is erased, and the two hold icons move to the left to execute the hold icon movement animation. To be done.

  FIG. 233 (c) continuing from FIG. 233 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Super reach reach production is started after FIG. 233 (c). In this embodiment, the jackpot pattern mode is configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display in which the super reach effect is performed than in the symbol variable display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  FIG. 233 (d) subsequent to FIG. 233 (c) shows a state in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 has changed with the start of the super reach effect. The background image is changing from the background image of the sky including the image of the sun, the image of the cloud, the image of the balloon to the background image of the mountain road. In the present embodiment, the sky background image is displayed during normal performance execution or normal reach performance execution, and the mountain road background image is displayed during super reach performance execution. The hold icons are all erased as the background image changes. The timing at which the hold icon is deleted may be the same as the change of the background image, may be before the change, or may be after the change.

  FIG. 233 (e) continuing from FIG. 233 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During some period during execution of the super reach effect, the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced display mode.

  In this example, it is assumed that one game ball has been won in the special figure 1 starting opening 230 after the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed on the upper right side of the display screen. Thereby, the special figure 1 starting information is acquired, the newly acquired starting information is prefetched, and the special figure prefetching process for preliminarily determining the stop symbol is executed by the main control unit 300 before the winning / decision process. After executing the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 transmits the prefetching result information command including the preliminary determination result to the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the prefetching notice based on the result of the preliminary determination. In this example, it is determined that the prefetch notice is not executed.

  FIG. 233 (f) subsequent to FIG. 233 (e) shows a state in which a display indicating a departure is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the center of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a character string image of "sorry" is displayed as a display indicating a deviation, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display region 208b, and the left middle right symbol display region 208a is displayed. Up to 208c, the fluctuation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is the outlying pattern mode, shakes up and down.

  FIG. 233 (g) subsequent to FIG. 233 (f) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started after the display indicating the deviation is displayed during the super reach effect. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to make the appearance display of the first wipe display start, and the appearance of the first wipe display makes the start of the first wipe effect display. The wipe displays w1a and w1b are displayed on the foreground in the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like that have been displayed before the start of the first wipe effect display. The patterns of the wipe displays w1a and w1b are the same, and in FIG. 233, the patterns are indicated by upward-sloping hatching.

  FIG. 233 (h) subsequent to FIG. 233 (g) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. The end of the wipe display w1a and the end of the wipe display w1b are in contact with each other, and the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w1a and w1b. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  FIG. 233 (i) subsequent to FIG. 233 (h) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. The wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. Between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b, the decorative pattern and the hold icon are gradually redisplayed.

  The withdrawal view of the first wipe display now displays a hold icon that corresponds to a later hold with the last increased hold order after displaying at least some of the hold icons that correspond to a hold with a lower hold order. Therefore, the player completes the withdrawal display of the wipe display while expecting whether the display mode of the newly displayed hold icon corresponding to the increased hold during the reach production is the prefetch notice mode. Sometimes you can wait.

  FIG. 233 (j) subsequent to FIG. 233 (i) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is being performed. Between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b, the decorative pattern and the hold icon are gradually redisplayed. At the time shown in FIG. 233 (j), a part of the left symbol, the middle symbol, the right symbol, and the entire hold icons are displayed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 233 (c), the number of holding icons before deletion is two, but the number of holdings in Toku-zu 1 increases by one during deletion of the holding icon. As shown in 233 (j), the number of hold icons after redisplay is three. The display modes of the three hold icons are all black circles.

  FIG. 233 (k) subsequent to FIG. 233 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. The wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the wipe display w1a is deleted from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. When the wipe display w1b is deleted from the display screen, withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed. The completion of the withdrawal of the first wipe display is the end of the first wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a deviating symbol aspect, sways in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The variable display is displayed.

  FIG. 233 (l) continuing from FIG. 233 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the fact that the judgment result of the special game 1 variable game is wrong is notified. ing.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can perform a lottery as to whether or not to execute a pre-reading notice using the wipe effect display when the suspension of the special figure increases before the wipe effect display is executed. In this example, since it is determined that the prefetching notice using the wipe effect display is not executed, the prefetching notice is not executed.
(Example 3)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 234. FIG. 234 shows time-series examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In each drawing of FIG. 234, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

  FIG. 234 (a) shows a state where the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 234 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is, for example, 3 and the number of reservations in special figure 2 is 0. On the decorative symbol display device 208, three holding icons indicating the number of holdings of the special drawing 1 are displayed. The display modes of the three hold icons are all black circles.

  FIG. 234 (b) continuing from FIG. 234 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is started based on the fact that the reservation of the first special figure 1 has been exhausted. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed, the leftmost hold icon corresponding to the consumed hold is erased, and the two hold icons move to the left to execute the hold icon movement animation. To be done.

  FIG. 234 (c) continuing from FIG. 234 (b) shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Super reach production is started after FIG. 234 (c). In this embodiment, the jackpot pattern mode is configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display in which the super reach effect is performed than in the symbol variable display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  FIG. 234 (d) continuing from FIG. 234 (c) shows a state in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 has changed with the start of the super reach effect. The background image is changing from the background image of the sky including the image of the sun, the image of the cloud, the image of the balloon to the background image of the mountain road. In the present embodiment, the sky background image is displayed during normal performance execution or normal reach performance execution, and the mountain road background image is displayed during super reach performance execution. The hold icons are all erased as the background image changes.

  FIG. 234 (e) continuing from FIG. 234 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During some period during execution of the super reach effect, the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced display mode.

  In this example, it is assumed that one game ball has been won in the special figure 1 starting opening 230 after the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed on the upper right side of the display screen. Thereby, the special figure 1 starting information is acquired, the newly acquired starting information is prefetched, and the special figure prefetching process for preliminarily determining the stop symbol is executed by the main control unit 300 before the winning / decision process. After executing the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 transmits the prefetching result information command including the preliminary determination result to the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the prefetching notice based on the result of the preliminary determination. In this example, it is determined that the pre-reading notice is executed, and the pre-reading notice is executed by the first wipe effect display and the display of the hold icon.

  FIG. 234 (f) subsequent to FIG. 234 (e) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started after the display indicating the disconnection is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to make the appearance display of the first wipe display start, and the appearance of the first wipe display makes the start of the first wipe effect display. The wipe displays w1a and w1b are displayed on the foreground in the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like that have been displayed before the start of the first wipe effect display. The wipe displays w1a and w1b have the same design, and in FIG. 234, the design is black and plain.

  In the present embodiment, the black solid color wipe displays w1a and w1b are displayed in the first wipe effect display as a prefetching notice. When the first wipe effect display is displayed as the look-ahead notice, the start timing of the first wipe effect display is the first wipe effect display when the first wipe effect display that is not the look-ahead notice is displayed. Is earlier than the start timing of. When the pre-reading notice is executed, the first wipe effect display is started immediately after the display indicating the deviation is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 as shown in FIG. 234 (f), and the pre-reading notice is given. If it is not executed, a display indicating a deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 233 (f), and after the elapse of a predetermined period, the first wipe effect display is displayed as shown in FIG. 233 (g). Has been started.

  The appearance positions of the wipe displays w1a and w1b in the case where the first wipe effect display that is the prefetch notice is displayed are the same as those of the wipe displays w1a and w1b when the first wipe effect display that is not the prefetch notice is displayed. It differs from the appearance position. In the case of the first wipe effect display that is the prefetch notice, as shown in FIG. 234 (f), the appearance position of the wipe display w1a is the upper right corner of the display screen, and the appearance position of the wipe display w1b is the lower left corner of the display screen. is there. On the other hand, in the case of the first wipe effect display which is not the prefetch notice, the appearance position of the wipe display w1a is the upper left corner of the display screen and the appearance position of the wipe display w1b is the right side of the display screen as shown in FIG. 233 (g). In the lower corner.

  The speed of the appearance display of the wipe displays w1a and w1b in the case where the first wipe effect display that is the readahead notice is displayed is the wipe display w1a when the first wipe effect display that is not the readahead notice is displayed. It is faster than the display speed of w1b.

  In this way, when the first wipe effect display is executed as the look-ahead notice, the first wipe effect display in which the first wipe display pattern, the appearance position, and the appearance display speed are not the look-ahead notice is executed. It is different from when it is done. When the first wipe effect display is executed as the look-ahead notice, the first wipe effect display in which at least one of the first wipe display pattern, the appearance position, and the appearance display speed is not the look-ahead notice is executed. It should be different from the case.

  In this example, the prefetching process is executed during the reach effect execution, and the prefetching advance notice based on the result of the prefetch process is executed during the execution of the reach effect. In this case, the mode of the wipe effect display as the prefetch notice is different from the mode of the normal wipe effect display that is not the prefetch notice. In addition, when a pre-reading notice based on the result of the pre-reading process before the start of the reach effect or the special figure variation game in which the reach effect is executed is executed, or the hold icon of the look-ahead notice mode is displayed. In this case, the mode of the wipe effect display may be different from the mode of the normal wipe effect display.

  FIG. 234 (g) subsequent to FIG. 234 (f) shows a state in which the wipe displays w1a and w1b are spread so as to gradually cover the display screen. The wipe display w1a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper right corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to gradually spread from the lower left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen. ..

  FIG. 234 (h) subsequent to FIG. 234 (g) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. The end of the wipe display w1a and the end of the wipe display w1b are in contact with each other, and the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w1a and w1b. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  FIG. 234 (i) subsequent to FIG. 234 (h) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. The wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper right corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower left corner of the display screen. Between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b, the decorative pattern and the hold icon are gradually redisplayed. The speed of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w1a and w1b when the first wipe effect display that is the prefetch notice is displayed is the wipe display w1a when the first wipe effect display that is not the prefetch notice is displayed. It may be faster, the same, or slower than the withdrawal display speed of w1b.

  The withdrawal view of the first wipe display now displays a hold icon that corresponds to a later hold with the last increased hold order after displaying at least some of the hold icons that correspond to a hold with a lower hold order. Therefore, the player completes the withdrawal display of the wipe display while expecting whether the display mode of the newly displayed hold icon corresponding to the increased hold during the reach production is the prefetch notice mode. Sometimes you can wait.

  FIG. 234 (j) subsequent to FIG. 234 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. The wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is deleted from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the wipe display w1b is deleted from the display screen, withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed. The completion of the withdrawal of the first wipe display is the end of the first wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a deviating symbol aspect, sways in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The variable display is displayed. The hold icon is also displayed again, and the third hold icon from the left is displayed in a white square display mode. The hold icon is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice.

  FIG. 234 (k) continuing from FIG. 234 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the fact that the judgment result of the special game 1 variable game is wrong is notified. ing.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the prefetching notice by the first wipe effect display. When the first wipe effect display is executed as a pre-reading notice, the jackpot may be won without fail until all the pending special figure variation games are exhausted.

Note that the pachinko machine 100 may be capable of executing the prefetching notice by the second wipe effect display. Similar to the first wipe effect display, the second wipe effect display as a look-ahead notice is a second wipe effect in which at least one of the pattern of the second wipe display, the appearance position, or the speed of the appearance display is not a look-ahead notice. It may be different from the case where the effect display is executed.
(Example 4)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 235. FIG. 235 shows a time series example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In each drawing of FIG. 235, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the movable body 1002 are extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174.

  FIG. 235 (a) shows a state where the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 235 (a), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 2, for example, and the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is 4, for example. In each drawing of FIG. 235, the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

  In this embodiment, the game state is an electric power support state. At the time point shown in FIG. 235 (a), the number of remaining special figure variation games in the electric support state is nine. The sub display device 1030 displays a character string image of “9 times” indicating the number of remaining special figure variation games in the electric power support state.

  FIG. 235 (b) continuing from FIG. 235 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variation game is started based on the fact that the reservation of the first special figure 2 has been exhausted. The sub display device 1030 displays a character string image of “8 times” indicating the number of remaining special figure variation games in the electric power support state.

  FIG. 235 (c) subsequent to FIG. 235 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Super reach production is started after FIG. 235 (c). In this embodiment, the jackpot pattern mode is configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display in which the super reach effect is performed than in the symbol variable display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  In FIG. 235 (d) continuing from FIG. 235 (c), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and the main character and the enemy character are separated from each other. It shows a state in which the effect of displaying a moving image of a scene to be confronted has been started. When the hit / no decision result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. An image of the hero character (hereinafter referred to as "hero") is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and an image of an enemy character (hereinafter referred to as "enemy") is displayed on the right side of the display screen. ) Is displayed, and the character string image of “duel” is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. On the front side of the character string image, "decoration 2" as the left design is displayed, and a part of the character string image is invisible.

  FIG. 235 (e) continuing from FIG. 235 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During some period during execution of the super reach effect, the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced display mode.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 235 (e), the lower plate 128 becomes full with prize balls, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. In the upper left part of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a lower plate full tank error notification image in which a white character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in a black horizontally long rectangular image is displayed. There is. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed so as to overlap the effect display. In FIG. 235 (d), the lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed so as to overlap the character string image of “duel”. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed under the control of the first sub control unit 400 based on the reception of the command including the information of the lower plate full tank error from the main control unit 300.

  FIG. 235 (f) continuing from FIG. 235 (e) shows a state in which a display indicating a deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the hero loses to the enemy is displayed as a display indicating the departure. The lower plate full tank error notification image is continuously displayed.

  235 (g) subsequent to FIG. 235 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the swing variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is the outlying pattern mode, shakes up and down. The character color of the lower plate full tank error notification image is changed to a black display mode.

  FIG. 235 (h) subsequent to FIG. 235 (g) shows a state where the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display are started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen, and the wipe display from the upper right corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030. The w2a starts to appear, and the wipe display w2b starts to appear from the lower left corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to be the start of the appearance display of the first wipe display, the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display, and the appearance of the wipe display w2a is displayed. The appearance and the appearance of the wipe display w2b are combined to be the start of the appearance display of the second wipe display, and the appearance of the second wipe display is the start of the second wipe effect display.

  The first wipe display appears so as to wipe out the display other than the error notification image. In this embodiment, the lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed as the error notification image, and the lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping the wipe display w1a. In the lower plate full tank error notification image, as shown in FIG. 235 (f), a display mode in which a character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in white in the image of the black oblong rectangle before the start of the wipe effect 235. As shown in FIG. 235 (h), a black character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed after the wipe effect is started. In the present embodiment, the display mode of the error notification image is changed between the execution of the wipe effect display and the non-execution of the wipe effect display. In the present embodiment, the change timing of the display mode of the error notification image is immediately before the start of the wipe effect display as shown in FIG. 235 (g), but the change timing of the display mode of the error notification image is the start of the wipe effect display. It may be simultaneously with or after the start of the wipe effect display.

  The first wipe display also overlaps the tutorial display. In this embodiment, the tutorial display, which is one of the message displays, is erased by the first wipe display, and the error display, which is one of the message displays, is displayed so as to overlap the first wipe display. In this embodiment, the lower plate full tank error notification image is taken as an example of the error display, but the same applies to other error displays, for example, a door release error notification image for notifying a door release error, or an abnormal prize. Also, an error notification image for notifying a false prize, an error notification image for notifying magnetic detection, etc. are displayed overlapping the first wipe display.

  FIG. 235 (i) subsequent to FIG. 235 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display and the appearance display of the second wipe display are completed. The completion of the appearance display of the first wipe display may be simultaneous with the completion of the appearance display of the second wipe display, or the completion of one of the appearance displays may be first. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started, and when the appearance display of the second wipe display is completed, the standby display of the second wipe display is started. The pattern of the second wipe display is black and plain. By the first wipe display, the display other than the error notification image displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 during the super reach production is erased, and all the displays displayed on the sub display device 1030 during the super reach production are displayed. Erased.

  The first wipe display pattern displayed in the special figure variation game in which the confrontation effect between the hero and the enemy is executed is a pattern including the image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 235 (i), the pattern of the wipe display w1a is a pattern including two images of the hero's face, and the pattern of the wipe display w1b is a pattern including four images of the hero's face. The display mode of the main character's face included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the main character's face lost in the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 235 (g). As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to the player forgetting the effect of losing the duel.

  FIG. 235 (j) subsequent to FIG. 235 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display and the second wipe display is started. On the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. Between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b, the decorative pattern and the like are gradually displayed again. On the sub display device 1030, the wipe display w2a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper right corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w2b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower left corner of the display screen. The withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be started at the same time as the withdrawal display of the second wipe display is started, or the withdrawal display of any one may be started first.

  FIG. 235 (k) subsequent to FIG. 235 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display and the second wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is shrunk toward the upper left corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is shrunk toward the lower right corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal of the first wipe display is the end of the first wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a deviating symbol aspect, sways in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The variable display is displayed. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed in a display mode in which a white character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in the horizontally long rectangular image. In the sub-display device 1030, the wipe display w2a shrinks toward the upper right corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen, and the wipe display w2b shrinks toward the lower left corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen.

  FIG. 235 (l) continuing from FIG. 235 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variation game is finished. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the winning / deciding result of the special figure 2 variable game is wrong. ing.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes the wipe effect when the hit / no hit determination result of the special figure variation game is out. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to the player forgetting the effect that suggests a loss.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a plurality of characters on the decorative pattern display device 208 in the super reach effect. One of the plurality of characters displayed is the main character display, and one of the plurality of characters displayed is the enemy character display. The display of the main character and the enemy character is erased by the display of the first wipe effect display. In the super reach effect, the display of the main character and the enemy character may be displayed on the sub display device 1030, and the display of the main character and the enemy character is erased due to the second wipe effect display being displayed. May be.
(Example 5)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 5 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 236. FIG. 236 shows an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 236, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the movable body 1002 are extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174.

  FIG. 236 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In this embodiment, the game state is an electric power support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 236 (a), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is, for example, 2 and the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is, for example, 4. In each drawing of FIG. 236, the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. The remaining number of special figure fluctuation games executed in the electric power support state may not be displayed on either the decorative symbol display device 208 or the sub display device 1030, or may be displayed.

  FIG. 236 (b) continuing from FIG. 236 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variation game is started based on the fact that the hold of the earliest special figure 2 is exhausted.

  FIG. 236 (c) continuing from FIG. 236 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Super reach production is started after FIG. 236 (c). In this embodiment, the jackpot pattern mode is configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display in which the super reach effect is performed than in the symbol variable display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  In FIG. 236 (d) continuing from FIG. 236 (c), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and the main character and the enemy character are separated. It shows a state in which the effect of displaying a moving image of a scene to be confronted has been started. When the hit / no decision result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character string image of “duel” is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. There is. On the front side of the character string image, "decoration 2" as the left design is displayed, and a part of the character string image is invisible.

  FIG. 236 (e) continuing from FIG. 236 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire “duel” character string image displayed on the upper left side of the display screen can be visually recognized. During some period during execution of the super reach effect, the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced display mode.

  FIG. 236 (f) subsequent to FIG. 236 (e) shows a state in which a display indicating a big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the hero wins over the enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a big hit.

  236 (g) following FIG. 236 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the swing variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" which is a jackpot pattern mode swings up and down.

  FIG. 236 (h) subsequent to FIG. 236 (g) shows a state in which the super reach effect is finished. With the end of the super reach effect, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208d become the normal size in the center of the display screen, and the display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" that is a jackpot pattern sways to the left and right The shake fluctuation display is displayed with.

  FIG. 236 (i) continuing from FIG. 236 (h) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variation game is finished. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the winning / deciding result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. ing.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment does not display the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display when the result of the special figure variation game is a big hit. Even when the special figure variation game result is a big hit, the first wipe effect display may not be displayed and the first wipe effect display may not be displayed, and the first wipe effect display may not be displayed. The second wipe effect display may be displayed, or the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display may be displayed.
(Example 6)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 6 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 237. FIG. 237 shows an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 237, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

  FIG. 237 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In this embodiment, the game state is an electric power support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 237 (a), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is, for example, 2 and the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is, for example, 4.

  FIG. 237 (b) continuing from FIG. 237 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variation game is started based on the fact that the hold of the earliest special figure 2 is exhausted.

  FIG. 237 (c) continuing from FIG. 237 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Super reach production is started from FIG. 237 (c). In this embodiment, the jackpot pattern mode is configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display in which the super reach effect is performed than in the symbol variable display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  FIG. 237 (d) following FIG. 237 (c) is a moving image of a scene in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 20 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and the main character and the enemy character confront each other. It shows a state in which the effect of displaying an image has been started. When the hit / no decision result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character string image of "duel" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. A character string image "Begin Confrontation!" Is displayed below the display screen. On the front side of the character string image of "duel", "decoration 2" as the left pattern is displayed, and a part of the character string image is invisible. The character string image “Begin Confrontation!” Is one of the message displays, and is a tutorial display for explaining effects and the like. In the present embodiment, during the execution of the super reach effect, a tutorial display explaining the effect contents of the super reach effect is displayed.

  FIG. 237 (e) continuing from FIG. 237 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During some period during execution of the super reach effect, the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced display mode. At the bottom of the display screen, a tutorial display of a character string image "If the tongue wins is a big hit" is displayed, and it is explained that in the case of a big hit, an effect in which the main character who is the tongue wins is executed.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 237 (e), the lower plate 128 becomes full of prize balls, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. In the upper left part of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a lower plate full tank error notification image in which a white character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in a black horizontally long rectangular image is displayed. There is. The lower plate full tank error notification image is one of the message displays and is displayed so as to overlap the effect display. In FIG. 237 (d), the lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed so as to overlap the character string image of “duel”. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed under the control of the first sub control unit 400 based on the reception of the command including the information of the lower plate full tank error from the main control unit 300.

  237 (f) subsequent to FIG. 237 (e) shows a state in which a display indicating a deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the hero loses to the enemy is displayed as a display indicating the departure. At the bottom of the display screen, a tutorial display of a character string image "Sorry! Swordsman's victory!" Is displayed, which explains that the enemy character who is a swordsman has won. The tutorial display is also a display that suggests a departure. The lower plate full tank error notification image is continuously displayed.

  237 (g) following FIG. 237 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the swing variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is the outlying pattern mode, shakes up and down. At the bottom of the display screen, a tutorial display of a character string image "If the lord rises ..." is displayed, and it is explained that the revival effect is executed when the main character who is the lord rises. The character color of the lower plate full tank error notification image is changed to a black display mode.

  237 (h) subsequent to FIG. 237 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to make the appearance display of the first wipe display start, and the appearance of the first wipe display makes the start of the first wipe effect display.

  The first wipe display appears so as to wipe out the display other than the error notification image. In this embodiment, the lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed as the error notification image, and the lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping the wipe display w1a. In the lower plate full tank error notification image, as shown in FIG. 237 (f), a display mode in which a character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in white in the image of the black oblong rectangle before the wipe effect is started 237, and the character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in black after the wipe effect is started, as shown in FIG. 237 (h). In the present embodiment, the display mode of the error notification image is changed between the execution of the wipe effect display and the non-execution of the wipe effect display. In this embodiment, the change timing of the display mode of the error notification image is immediately before the start of the wipe effect display as shown in FIG. 237 (g), but the change timing of the display mode of the error notification image is the start of the wipe effect display. It may be simultaneously with or after the start of the wipe effect display.

  The first wipe display also overlaps the tutorial display. In this embodiment, the tutorial display, which is one of the message displays, is erased by the first wipe display, and the error display, which is one of the message displays, is displayed so as to overlap the first wipe display. In this embodiment, the lower plate full tank error notification image is taken as an example of the error display, but the same applies to other error displays, for example, a door release error notification image for notifying a door release error, or an abnormal prize. Also, an error notification image for notifying a false prize, an error notification image for notifying magnetic detection, etc. are displayed overlapping the first wipe display.

  FIG. 237 (i) subsequent to FIG. 237 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started. By the first wipe display, the display other than the error notification image displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 during the super reach effect is erased.

  The first wipe display pattern displayed in the special figure variation game in which the confrontation effect between the hero and the enemy is executed is a pattern including the image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 237 (i), the pattern of the wipe display w1a is a pattern including two images of the hero's face, and the pattern of the wipe display w1b is a pattern including four images of the hero's face. The display mode of the main character included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the main character lost in the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 237 (g). As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to the player forgetting the effect of losing the duel.

  FIG. 237 (j) subsequent to FIG. 237 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. On the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. Between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b, the decorative pattern and the tutorial display are gradually redisplayed. In FIG. 237 (j), a character string image of "empty station", which is a part of the tutorial display, is displayed.

  FIG. 237 (k) subsequent to FIG. 237 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is shrunk toward the upper left corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is shrunk toward the lower right corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal of the first wipe display is the end of the first wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a deviating symbol aspect in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner in which it swings left and right. Is displayed. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed in a display mode in which a white character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in the horizontally long rectangular image. At the bottom of the display screen, a tutorial display of a character string image of "the empty stage is potentially hidden" is displayed. The super reach effect has ended at the time shown in FIG. 237 (i), and after the end of the super reach effect, for example, a tutorial display explaining the stage effect is displayed. The tutorial display is displayed in a scrolling display mode in which the character image moves to the left.

  FIG. 237 (l) continuing from FIG. 237 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variation game is finished. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the winning / deciding result of the special figure 2 variable game is wrong. ing. A lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and a tutorial display of a character string image of "possibility. Sea stage ..." is displayed below the display screen. Is displayed. The tutorial display is displayed in a scrolling display mode in which the character image moves to the left.

In this embodiment, the tutorial display, which is one of the message displays, is erased by the wipe effect display, and the error display, which is one of the message displays, is not erased by the wipe effect display and continues even while the wipe effect display is being displayed. Is displayed. The tutorial display of the super reach effect that was displayed before the start of the wipe effect display is not displayed after the end of the wipe effect display, and the tutorial display that was not displayed before the start of the wipe effect display (for example, explaining the stage (Tutorial display) is displayed in a scrolling display mode after the end of the wipe effect display. The tutorial display of the super reach effect, which was displayed before the start of the wipe effect display, may also be displayed in the scroll display mode. The tutorial display that was displayed before the start of the wipe effect display may be displayed after the end of the wipe effect display. At least one of the error display and the tutorial display may be displayed on the sub display device 1030.
(Example 7)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 7 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 238. FIG. 238 shows an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 238, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

  FIG. 238 (a) shows a state where the special figure variation game is not being executed. In this embodiment, the game state is an electric power support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 238 (a), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 2, for example, and the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is 4, for example. In each drawing of FIG. 238, the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is not shown.

  FIG. 238 (b) continuing from FIG. 238 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variation game is started based on the fact that the hold of the earliest special figure 2 is exhausted.

  FIG. 238 (c) subsequent to FIG. 238 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Super reach production is started after FIG. 238 (c). In this embodiment, the jackpot pattern mode is configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display in which the super reach effect is performed than in the symbol variable display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  FIG. 238 (d) continuing from FIG. 238 (c) is a moving image of a scene in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and the main character and the enemy character confront each other. It shows a state in which the effect of displaying an image has been started. When the hit / no decision result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character string image of “duel” is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. There is. On the front side of the character string image, "decoration 2" as the left design is displayed, and a part of the character string image is invisible.

  FIG. 238 (e) continuing from FIG. 238 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire “duel” character string image displayed on the upper left side of the display screen can be visually recognized. During some period during execution of the super reach effect, the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced display mode.

  238 (f) following FIG. 238 (e) shows a state in which a display indicating a deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the hero loses to the enemy is displayed as a display indicating the departure. At the bottom of the display screen, a tutorial display of a character string image "Sorry! Swordsman's victory!" Is displayed, which explains that the enemy character who is a swordsman has won. The tutorial display is also a display that suggests a departure.

  238 (g) following FIG. 238 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the swing variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is the outlying pattern mode, shakes up and down.

  238 (h) subsequent to FIG. 238 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to make the appearance display of the first wipe display start, and the appearance of the first wipe display makes the start of the first wipe effect display.

  FIG. 238 (i) subsequent to FIG. 238 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 238 (i), the lower plate 128 becomes full with prize balls, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. On the upper left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a lower plate full tank error notification image in which a character string image of "please remove the ball" is displayed in black character color is displayed. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed so as to overlap the wipe image w1a.

  The first wipe display pattern displayed in the special figure variation game in which the confrontation effect between the hero and the enemy is executed is a pattern including the image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 238 (i), the pattern of the wipe display w1a is a pattern including two images of the hero's face, and the pattern of the wipe display w1b is a pattern including four images of the hero's face. The display mode of the main character included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the main character lost in the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 238 (g). As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to the player forgetting the effect of losing the duel.

  FIG. 238 (j) subsequent to FIG. 238 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. On the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative design is gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. The lower plate full tank error notification image is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 238 (k) subsequent to FIG. 238 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is shrunk toward the upper left corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is shrunk toward the lower right corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal of the first wipe display is the end of the first wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen, and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a symbol aspect of a big hit, is displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in a swinging manner in a swinging manner. Is displayed. At this time, the player operates the ball discharge lever 132 to discharge the game balls stored in the lower plate 128, so that the lower plate full tank error is eliminated and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

  FIG. 238 (l) continuing from FIG. 238 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variation game is finished. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the winning / deciding result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. ing.

In this embodiment, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a pattern mode that suggests a deviation, is displayed before the start of the wipe effect display, and is a pattern mode that suggests a big hit after the completion of the wipe effect display. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed. Even if you have won the big hit, the wipe effect display is executed after the symbol mode that suggests a deviation is displayed, and by providing the effect pattern in which the pattern mode that suggests the big hit is displayed after the wipe effect display, the wipe effect In some cases, it may be possible to contribute to the player's assistance in forgetting the effect that suggests the deviation before the display is executed.
(Example 8)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 8 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 239. FIG. 239 shows an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 239, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

  FIG. 239 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In this embodiment, the game state is an electric power support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 239 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is, for example, 2 and the number of reservations in special figure 2 is, for example, 4. In each drawing of FIG. 239, the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

  239 (b) which continues from FIG. 239 (a) has shown the state where the special figure 2 variation game was started based on the hold of the earliest special figure 2 was digested.

  FIG. 239 (c) continuing from FIG. 239 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Super reach production is started after FIG. 239 (c). In this embodiment, the jackpot pattern mode is configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display in which the super reach effect is performed than in the symbol variable display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  In FIG. 239 (d) that continues from FIG. 239 (c), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and a movie of a scene where the main character and the enemy character confront each other. It shows a state in which the effect of displaying an image has been started. When the hit / no decision result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character string image of “duel” is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. There is. On the front side of the character string image, "decoration 2" as the left design is displayed, and a part of the character string image is invisible.

  FIG. 239 (e) continuing from FIG. 239 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire “duel” character string image displayed on the upper left side of the display screen can be visually recognized. During some period during execution of the super reach effect, the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced display mode.

  239 (f) subsequent to FIG. 239 (e) shows a state in which a display indicating a deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the hero loses to the enemy is displayed as a display indicating the departure. At the bottom of the display screen, a tutorial display of a character string image "Sorry! Swordsman's victory!" Is displayed, which explains that the enemy character who is a swordsman has won. The tutorial display is also a display that suggests a departure.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 239 (f), the lower plate 128 becomes full of prize balls, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. In the upper left part of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a lower plate full tank error notification image in which a white character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in a black horizontally long rectangular image is displayed. There is. The lower plate full tank error notification image is one of the message displays and is displayed so as to overlap the effect display. In FIG. 239 (f), the lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed so as to overlap the character string image of “duel”. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed under the control of the first sub control unit 400 based on the reception of the command including the information of the lower plate full tank error from the main control unit 300.

  239 (g) following FIG. 239 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the swing variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is the outlying pattern mode, shakes up and down. At this time, the player operates the ball discharge lever 132 to discharge the game balls stored in the lower plate 128, so that the lower plate full tank error is eliminated and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

  FIG. 239 (h) subsequent to FIG. 239 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to make the appearance display of the first wipe display start, and the appearance of the first wipe display makes the start of the first wipe effect display.

  FIG. 239 (i) subsequent to FIG. 239 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 239 (i), the lower plate 128 becomes full of prize balls, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. On the upper left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a lower plate full tank error notification image in which a character string image of "please remove the ball" is displayed in black character color is displayed. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed so as to overlap the wipe image w1a.

  The first wipe display pattern displayed in the special figure variation game in which the confrontation effect between the hero and the enemy is executed is a pattern including the image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 239 (i), the pattern of the wipe display w1a is a pattern including two images of the hero's face, and the pattern of the wipe display w1b is a pattern including four images of the hero's face. The display mode of the main character included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the main character lost in the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 239 (g). As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to help the player to forget the effect of losing the duel.

  FIG. 239 (j) subsequent to FIG. 239 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. On the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative design is gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. At this time, the player operates the ball discharge lever 132 to discharge the game balls stored in the lower plate 128, so that the lower plate full tank error is eliminated and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

  FIG. 239 (k) subsequent to FIG. 239 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is shrunk toward the upper left corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is shrunk toward the lower right corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal of the first wipe display is the end of the first wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a deviating symbol aspect in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner in which it swings left and right. Is displayed.

  FIG. 239 (l) subsequent to FIG. 239 (k) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started again. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to make the appearance display of the first wipe display start, and the appearance of the first wipe display makes the start of the first wipe effect display.

  FIG. 239 (m) subsequent to FIG. 239 (l) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 239 (m), the lower plate 128 becomes full of prize balls, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. On the upper left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a lower plate full tank error notification image in which a character string image of "please remove the ball" is displayed in black character color is displayed. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed so as to overlap the wipe image w1a.

  FIG. 239 (n) subsequent to FIG. 239 (m) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. On the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative design is gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. In the middle symbol display area 208d, the variable display in which the decorative symbols are switched is resumed. At this time, the player operates the ball discharge lever 132 to discharge the game balls stored in the lower plate 128, so that the lower plate full tank error is eliminated and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

  FIG. 239 (o) subsequent to FIG. 239 (n) shows a state in which the display of the moving image of the confrontation scene between the hero and the enemy has started. A character string image of “duel” is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208.

  FIG. 239 (p) subsequent to FIG. 239 (o) shows a state in which a display indicating a big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the hero wins over the enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a big hit. In the middle symbol display area 208b, "decoration 2" is temporarily displayed, and in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a jackpot pattern, is displayed in a swinging manner. The shaking fluctuation display is displayed.

  FIG. 239 (q) subsequent to FIG. 239 (p) shows a state in which the super reach effect is completed. With the end of the super reach effect, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208d become the normal size in the center of the display screen, and the display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" that is a jackpot pattern sways to the left and right The shake fluctuation display is displayed with.

  FIG. 239 (r) continuing from FIG. 239 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variation game is finished. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the winning / deciding result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. ing.

  In this embodiment, the first wipe effect display is executed twice during the execution of one special figure variation game. In the present embodiment, the patterns of the wipe displays w1a and w2a in the second first wipe effect display are the same as the patterns of the wipe displays w1a and w2a in the first first wipe effect display, but different from each other. Good. The second wipe effect display may be executed twice during the execution of one special figure variation game.

The first wipe effect display may be displayed before and after the background image changes as shown in FIGS. 239 (c) to (d). At this time, a wipe display for scene change may be displayed. The wipe display for scene change may cover the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, or may cover only a part of the display screen. In FIGS. 239 (l) to 239 (n), a wipe display for scene change may be displayed. The same applies to the second wipe effect display.
(Example 9)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 9 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 240. FIG. 240 shows an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 240, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

  FIG. 240 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In this embodiment, the game state is an electric power support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 240 (a), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is, for example, 2 and the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is, for example, 4. In each drawing of FIG. 240, the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is not shown.

  FIG. 240 (b) continuing from FIG. 240 (a) shows a state where the special figure 2 variation game is started based on the fact that the hold of the earliest special figure 2 is exhausted.

  FIG. 240 (c) continuing from FIG. 240 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 240 (c), the super reach effect is started. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  FIG. 240 (d) continuing from FIG. 240 (c) is a moving image of a scene in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and the main character and the enemy character confront each other. It shows a state in which the effect of displaying an image has been started. When the hit / no decision result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character string image of “duel” is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. There is. On the front side of the character string image, "decoration 2" as the left design is displayed, and a part of the character string image is invisible.

  FIG. 240 (e) continuing from FIG. 240 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire “duel” character string image displayed on the upper left side of the display screen can be visually recognized. During some period during execution of the super reach effect, the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced display mode.

  FIG. 240 (f) subsequent to FIG. 240 (e) shows a state in which a display indicating a deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the hero loses to the enemy is displayed as a display indicating the departure. At the bottom of the display screen, a tutorial display of a character string image "Sorry! Swordsman's victory!" Is displayed, which explains that the enemy character who is a swordsman has won. The tutorial display is also a display that suggests a departure.

  FIG. 240 (g) subsequent to FIG. 240 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the swing variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is the outlying pattern mode, shakes up and down.

  FIG. 240 (h) subsequent to FIG. 240 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to make the appearance display of the first wipe display start, and the appearance of the first wipe display makes the start of the first wipe effect display.

  FIG. 240 (i) subsequent to FIG. 240 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 240 (i), the lower plate 128 becomes full of prize balls, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. On the upper left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a lower plate full tank error notification image in which a character string image of "please remove the ball" is displayed in black character color is displayed. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed so as to overlap the wipe image w1a.

  The first wipe display pattern is a pattern including an image of the main character's face. As shown in FIG. 240 (i), the pattern of the wipe display w1a is a pattern including two images of the hero's face, and the pattern of the wipe display w1b is a pattern including four images of the hero's face. The display mode of the main character included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the main character lost in the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 240 (g). As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to the player forgetting the effect of losing the duel.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is provided with an opportunity button 139 and can execute the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 203. For example, the pachinko machine 100 can execute the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 using the decorative pattern display device 208 during the first wipe effect display. Note that the pachinko machine 100 may be capable of executing the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 using the sub display device 1030 during the second wipe effect display.

  FIG. 240 (i ′) subsequent to FIG. 240 (i) shows a state in which the button operation standby display 1 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the standby display of the first wipe display. A chance button 136 and an opportunity button 139 are schematically shown below the decorative pattern display device 208 in FIG. 240 (i ′). At the time shown in FIG. 240 (i ′), the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. The start timing of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 and the display start timing of the button operation waiting display 1 may be the same or one of them may be first.

  In FIG. 240 (i '), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. There is. The plurality of lines shown above the chance button 136 indicates a state in which the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). Is represented. The chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner or in a manner different from the normal state, so that the player knows that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. May be possible. Note that the chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a manner of moving (for example, movement that repeats vertical and horizontal movement display) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is operated. It may be stopped and displayed outside the valid period.

  FIG. 240 (j) subsequent to FIG. 240 (i ′) shows that the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started in response to the player pressing the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The state is shown. A chance button 136 and an opportunity button 139 are schematically shown below the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 240 (j). The button operation waiting display 1 is erased based on the chance button 136 being pressed. On the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative design is gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. The lower plate full tank error notification image is continuously displayed.

  In this example, when the player presses the chance button 136 during the valid operation period of the chance button 136, the first wipe display is displayed as the button response display 1 (display performed according to the pressing of the chance button 136). The withdrawal display is displayed. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may not be displayed, and the chance button 136 may be displayed. The withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be displayed even when the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of. For example, when the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be displayed after the end of the operation valid period.

  FIG. 240 (k) subsequent to FIG. 240 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is shrunk toward the upper left corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is shrunk toward the lower right corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal of the first wipe display is the end of the first wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen, and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a symbol aspect of a big hit, is displayed in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in a swinging manner in a swinging manner. Has been done. At this time, the player operates the ball discharge lever 132 to discharge the game balls stored in the lower plate 128, so that the lower plate full tank error is eliminated and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

  As shown in FIGS. 240 (h) and 240 (i), when the effect image is wiped out by the wipe effect display, the button operation waiting display is given priority over the wipe effect display, and the chance button 136 is operated. In response to this, the wipe effect display is ended, and a display that makes the player expect a big hit is displayed. In this example, the swing fluctuation display of the jackpot pattern mode ("decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2") is a display that makes the player expect a jackpot. The display expected by the player may be a big hit announcement display or the like. As in this example, the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is prioritized over the wipe effect display is the final one than the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is not prioritized over the wipe effect display. It may be configured so that the jackpot pattern is easily confirmed and displayed, and the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is prioritized over the wipe effect display may be confirmed as the jackpot, or the wipe effect display. Also, it may be configured such that the symbol variable display, in which the button operation waiting display is performed, may be disengaged preferentially. The symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is not prioritized over the wipe effect display may be determined to be the loss. The wipe effect display that is performed together with the button operation waiting display may be the first wipe effect display or the second wipe effect display.

  FIG. 240 (l) continuing from FIG. 240 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variation game is finished. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the winning / deciding result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. ing.

In this embodiment, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a pattern mode that suggests a deviation, is displayed before the start of the wipe effect display, the button operation waiting display is displayed during the wipe effect display, and the chance button 136 is displayed. The wipe effect display is ended according to the operation of. After the end of the wipe effect display, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" which is a pattern mode suggesting a big hit is displayed. Even if you have won the big jackpot, the wipe effect display and the button operation waiting display are executed after the symbol aspect that suggests a deviation is displayed, and the effect pattern that the symbol aspect that suggests the jackpot is displayed after the wipe effect display is provided. By doing so, it may be possible to contribute to helping the player to forget the effect that suggests the deviation before the wipe effect display is executed.
(Example 10)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 241 shows an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 241, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

  FIG. 241 (a) shows a state where the special figure variation game is not being executed. In this embodiment, the game state is an electric power support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 241 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 2, for example, and the number of reservations in special figure 2 is 4, for example. In each drawing of FIG. 241, the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is not shown.

  FIG. 241 (b) continuing from FIG. 241 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variation game is started based on the fact that the reservation of the first special figure 2 is exhausted.

  FIG. 241 (c) continuing from FIG. 241 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Super reach production is started after FIG. 241 (c). The pachinko machine 100 is configured such that the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  241 (d) continuing from FIG. 241 (c), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and the moving image of the scene where the main character and the enemy character confront each other. It shows a state in which the effect of displaying an image has been started. When the hit / no decision result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character string image of “duel” is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. There is. On the front side of the character string image, "decoration 2" as the left design is displayed, and a part of the character string image is invisible.

  241 (e) continuing from FIG. 241 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire “duel” character string image displayed on the upper left side of the display screen can be visually recognized. During some period during execution of the super reach effect, the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced display mode.

  241 (f) following FIG. 241 (e) shows a state in which a display indicating a deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the hero loses to the enemy is displayed as a display indicating the departure. At the bottom of the display screen, a tutorial display of a character string image "Sorry! Swordsman's victory!" Is displayed, which explains that the enemy character who is a swordsman has won. The tutorial display is also a display that suggests a departure.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 241 (f), the lower plate 128 becomes full with prize balls, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. In the upper left part of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a lower plate full tank error notification image in which a white character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in a black horizontally long rectangular image is displayed. There is. The lower plate full tank error notification image is one of the message displays and is displayed so as to overlap the effect display. In FIG. 241 (f), the lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed so as to overlap the character string image of “duel”. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed under the control of the first sub control unit 400 based on the reception of the command including the information of the lower plate full tank error from the main control unit 300.

  241 (g) subsequent to FIG. 241 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the swing variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is the outlying pattern mode, shakes up and down. At this time, the player operates the ball discharge lever 132 to discharge the game balls stored in the lower plate 128, so that the lower plate full tank error is eliminated and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

  FIG. 241 (h) subsequent to FIG. 241 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to make the appearance display of the first wipe display start, and the appearance of the first wipe display makes the start of the first wipe effect display.

  FIG. 241 (i) subsequent to FIG. 241 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  At the time shown in FIG. 241 (i), the lower plate 128 becomes full with prize balls, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. On the upper left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a lower plate full tank error notification image in which a character string image of "please remove the ball" is displayed in black character color is displayed. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed so as to overlap the wipe image w1a.

  The first wipe display pattern displayed in the special figure variation game in which the confrontation effect between the hero and the enemy is executed is a pattern including the image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 241 (i), the pattern of the wipe display w1a is a pattern including two images of the hero's face, and the pattern of the wipe display w1b is a pattern including four images of the hero's face. The display mode of the main character included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the main character lost in the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 241 (g). As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to help the player to forget the effect of losing the duel.

  FIG. 241 (j) subsequent to FIG. 241 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. On the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative design is gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. At this time, the player operates the ball discharge lever 132 to discharge the game balls stored in the lower plate 128, so that the lower plate full tank error is eliminated and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

  FIG. 241 (k) subsequent to FIG. 241 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is shrunk toward the upper left corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is shrunk toward the lower right corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal of the first wipe display is the end of the first wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a deviating symbol aspect in the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner in which it swings left and right. Is displayed.

  FIG. 241 (l) subsequent to FIG. 241 (k) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is restarted. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to make the appearance display of the first wipe display start, and the appearance of the first wipe display makes the start of the first wipe effect display.

  FIG. 241 (m) subsequent to FIG. 241 (l) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 241 (m), the lower plate 128 becomes full with prize balls, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. On the upper left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a lower plate full tank error notification image in which a character string image of "please remove the ball" is displayed in black character color is displayed. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed so as to overlap the wipe image w1a.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is provided with an opportunity button 139 and can execute the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 203. For example, the pachinko machine 100 can execute the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 using the decorative pattern display device 208 during the first wipe effect display. Note that the pachinko machine 100 may be capable of executing the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 using the sub display device 1030 during the second wipe effect display.

  241 (m ') following FIG. 241 (m) shows a state in which the button operation standby display 1 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the standby display of the first wipe display. A chance button 136 and an opportunity button 139 are schematically shown below the decorative pattern display device 208 in FIG. 241 (m ′). At the time point shown in FIG. 241 (m '), the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. The start timing of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 and the display start timing of the button operation waiting display 1 may be the same or one of them may be first.

  In FIG. 241 (m ′), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. There is. A chance button 136 and an opportunity button 139 are schematically shown below the decorative pattern display device 208 in FIG. 241 (m ′). The plurality of lines shown above the chance button 136 indicates a state in which the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). Is represented. The chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner or in a manner different from the normal state, so that the player knows that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. May be possible. Note that the chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a manner of moving (for example, movement that repeats vertical and horizontal movement display) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is operated. It may be stopped and displayed outside the valid period.

  FIG. 241 (n) subsequent to FIG. 241 (m ′) shows that the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started in response to the player pressing the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The state is shown. Below the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 241 (n), a chance button 136 and an opportunity button 139 are schematically shown. It should be noted that the button operation waiting display 1 is erased when the chance button 136 is pressed. On the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative design is gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. In the middle symbol display area 208d, the variable display in which the decorative symbols are switched is resumed. At this time, the player operates the ball discharge lever 132 to discharge the game balls stored in the lower plate 128, so that the lower plate full tank error is eliminated and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

  In this example, when the player presses the chance button 136 during the valid operation period of the chance button 136, the first wipe display is displayed as the button response display 1 (display performed according to the pressing of the chance button 136). The withdrawal display is displayed. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may not be displayed, and the chance button 136 may be displayed. The withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be displayed even when the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of. For example, when the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be displayed after the end of the operation valid period.

  As shown in FIGS. 241 (l) to 241 (m '), when the effect image is wiped out by the wipe effect display, the button operation waiting display is given priority over the wipe effect display, and the chance button 136 is operated. In response to the fact, the display of the wipe effect display is terminated, and a display that makes the player expect a big hit is displayed. In this example, the reach effect display, which is a big hit announcement display, is a display that makes the player expect a big hit. As in this example, the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is prioritized over the wipe effect display is the final one than the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is not prioritized over the wipe effect display. It may be configured so that the jackpot pattern is easily confirmed and displayed, and the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is prioritized over the wipe effect display may be confirmed as the jackpot, or the wipe effect display. Also, it may be configured such that the symbol variable display, in which the button operation waiting display is performed, may be disengaged preferentially. The symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is not prioritized over the wipe effect display may be determined to be the loss. The wipe effect display that is performed together with the button operation waiting display may be the first wipe effect display or the second wipe effect display.

  241 (o) subsequent to FIG. 241 (n) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is shrunk toward the upper left corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is shrunk toward the lower right corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal of the first wipe display is the end of the first wipe effect display.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 241 (o), after the end of the first wipe effect display, the display of the moving image of the confrontation scene between the hero and the enemy is started. A character string image of “duel” is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208.

  FIG. 241 (p) subsequent to FIG. 241 (o) shows a state in which a display indicating a big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the hero wins over the enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a big hit. In the middle symbol display area 208b, "decoration 2" is temporarily displayed, and in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a jackpot pattern, is displayed in a swinging manner. The shaking fluctuation display is displayed.

  FIG. 241 (q) subsequent to FIG. 241 (p) shows a state in which the super reach effect is completed. With the end of the super reach effect, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208d become the normal size in the center of the display screen, and the display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" that is a jackpot pattern sways to the left and right The shake fluctuation display is displayed with.

  FIG. 241 (r) continued from FIG. 241 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variation game is finished. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the winning / deciding result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. ing.

In the present embodiment, the first wipe effect display is executed twice during the execution of one special figure variation game, and the button operation waiting display is displayed in the second wipe effect display. The button operation wait display may be displayed in the first wipe effect display, or the button operation wait display may be displayed in the first and second wipe effect displays. The effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 203 may be executed during the execution of the wipe effect display.
(Example 11)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 11 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 242. FIG. 242 shows an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each figure of FIG. 242, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

  FIG. 242 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In this embodiment, the game state is an electric power support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 242 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 2, for example, and the number of reservations in special figure 2 is 4, for example. In each drawing of FIG. 242, the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is not shown.

  FIG. 242 (b) continuing from FIG. 242 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variation game is started based on the fact that the hold of the earliest special figure 2 is exhausted.

  FIG. 242 (c) continuing from FIG. 242 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Super reach production is started after FIG. 242 (c). In this embodiment, the jackpot pattern mode is configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display in which the super reach effect is performed than in the symbol variable display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  242 (d) continuing from FIG. 242 (c), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and the moving image of the scene where the main character and the enemy character confront each other. It shows a state in which the effect of displaying an image has been started. When the hit / no decision result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character string image of “duel” is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. There is. On the front side of the character string image, "decoration 2" as the left design is displayed, and a part of the character string image is invisible.

  FIG. 242 (e) continuing from FIG. 242 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire “duel” character string image displayed on the upper left side of the display screen can be visually recognized. During some period during execution of the super reach effect, the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced display mode.

  FIG. 242 (f) subsequent to FIG. 242 (e) shows a state in which a display indicating a deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the hero loses to the enemy is displayed as a display indicating the departure. At the bottom of the display screen, a tutorial display of a character string image "Sorry! Swordsman's victory!" Is displayed, which explains that the enemy character who is a swordsman has won. The tutorial display is also a display that suggests a departure.

  242 (g) subsequent to FIG. 242 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the swing variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is the outlying pattern mode, shakes up and down.

  242 (h) subsequent to FIG. 242 (g) shows a state where the first wipe effect display is started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to make the appearance display of the first wipe display start, and the appearance of the first wipe display makes the start of the first wipe effect display.

  FIG. 242 (i) subsequent to FIG. 242 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  The first wipe display pattern displayed in the special figure variation game in which the confrontation effect between the hero and the enemy is executed is a pattern including the image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 242 (i), the pattern of the wipe display w1a is a pattern including two images of the hero's face, and the pattern of the wipe display w1b is a pattern including four images of the hero's face. The display mode of the main character included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the main character lost in the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 242 (g). As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to the player forgetting the effect of losing the duel.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 242 (i), the lower plate 128 becomes full of prize balls, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. On the upper left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a lower plate full tank error notification image in which a character string image of "please remove the ball" is displayed in black character color is displayed. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed so as to overlap the wipe image w1a.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is provided with an opportunity button 139 and can execute the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 203. For example, the pachinko machine 100 can execute the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 using the decorative pattern display device 208 during the first wipe effect display. Note that the pachinko machine 100 may be capable of executing the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 using the sub display device 1030 during the second wipe effect display.

  FIG. 242 (i ′) subsequent to FIG. 242 (i) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136). Below the decorative symbol display device 208 of FIGS. 242 (i ') to (j), a chance button 136 and an opportunity button 139 are schematically shown. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles are overlapped with the chance button emission image displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, which shows the emission mode of the chance button 136. The button depression instruction image of the above aspect corresponds. The button operation waiting display 3 is displayed overlapping the wipe displays w1a and w1b. In FIG. 242 (i ′), in association with the display of the button operation waiting display 3, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits in a manner different from the normal state). It shows the state of doing. The chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state), whereby the player is notified that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. You may be able to know.

  FIG. 242 (i ″) following FIG. 242 (i ′) shows a button response in response to the player pressing the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 242 (i ′) is displayed. The beginning of the display 4 (display performed according to the pressing of the chance button 136) is shown in a state where it is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The button response display 4 of this example is “more chance! The character string image of "" corresponds. The button response display 4 is displayed overlapping the wipe displays w1a and w1b. In this example, the player presses the chance button 136 immediately after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started.

  FIG. 242 (i ′ ″) subsequent to FIG. 242 (i ″) shows a state in which the middle part of the button response display 4 is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button response display 4 of the present example, after displaying the character string image of “more chances !!”, the opportunity button image that is the effect of the opportunity button 139 is framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. Shows the state displayed in.

  242 (i "") continuing from FIG. 242 (i '") shows a state in which the final stage of the button response display 4 is displayed. In FIG. 242 (i" "), the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. The opportunity button image displayed to frame in from the right edge of the area is stopped at the center of the display area, the "More Chance !!" image is erased, and a button press instruction with three inverted triangles overlapping The state where the image is displayed is shown. The opportunity button image is stopped and displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button pressing instruction image is displayed, thereby informing that the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 is started. The opportunity button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays w1a and w1b. The stop display of the opportunity button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed while waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed. In FIG. 242 (i ""), the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation-effective period of the opportunity button 139. It shows the state of being. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by causing the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). There are cases. Note that the opportunity button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed while moving (for example, a movement that repeats vertical and horizontal movement display) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139, and the opportunity button 139 operation valid period is displayed. There may be a case where the display is stopped outside.

  242 (j) subsequent to FIG. 242 (i "") shows that the withdrawal display of the first wipe display starts in response to the opportunity button 139 being pressed by the player during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. It shows the state of being performed. The opportunity button image and the button depression instruction image are deleted based on the depression of the opportunity button 139. On the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative design is gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. In the middle symbol display area 208d, the variable display in which the decorative symbols are switched is resumed. At this time, the player operates the ball discharge lever 132 to discharge the game balls stored in the lower plate 128, so that the lower plate full tank error is eliminated and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

  In this example, when the player presses the opportunity button 139 during the operation-effective period of the opportunity button 139, the first wipe display is displayed as the button response display 5 (display performed according to the depression of the opportunity button 139). The withdrawal display is displayed. In addition, when the opportunity button 139 is not operated during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139, the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may not be displayed, and the opportunity button 139 may be displayed. The withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be displayed even when the opportunity button 139 is not operated during the operation valid period of. For example, when the opportunity button 139 is not operated during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139, the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be displayed after the end of the operation valid period.

  As shown in FIGS. 242 (h) to (i ""), when the effect image is wiped out by the wipe effect display, the button operation waiting display and the button response display are given priority over the wipe effect display, and the chance is displayed. The wipe effect display is ended in response to the operation of the button 136, and a display that makes the player expect a big hit is displayed. In this example, the reach effect display, which is a big hit announcement display, is a display that makes the player expect a big hit. As in this example, the pattern variation display in which the button operation wait display and the button response display are preferentially performed over the wipe effect display is the symbol variation display in which the button operation wait display is not preferentially performed over the wipe effect display. Instead, it may be configured so that the final big hit symbol can be confirmed and displayed more easily, and the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display and the button response display are prioritized over the wipe effect display is determined as the big hit confirmation. Alternatively, it may be configured so that the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display or the button response display is performed may be disengaged prior to the wipe effect display. The symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display and the button response display are not prioritized over the wipe effect display may be determined as the loss. The wipe effect display that is performed together with the button operation waiting display and the button response display may be the first wipe effect display or the second wipe effect display.

  FIG. 242 (k) subsequent to FIG. 242 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is shrunk toward the upper left corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is shrunk toward the lower right corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal of the first wipe display is the end of the first wipe effect display.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 242 (k), after the completion of the first wipe effect display, the display of the moving image of the confrontation scene between the main character and the enemy is started. A character string image of “duel” is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208.

  FIG. 242 (l) subsequent to FIG. 242 (k) shows a state in which a display suggesting a big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the hero wins over the enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a big hit. In the middle symbol display area 208b, "decoration 2" is temporarily displayed, and in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a jackpot pattern, is displayed in a swinging manner. The shaking fluctuation display is displayed.

  FIG. 242 (m) subsequent to FIG. 242 (l) shows a state in which the super reach effect is finished. With the end of the super reach effect, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208d become the normal size in the center of the display screen, and the display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" that is a jackpot pattern sways to the left and right The shake fluctuation display is displayed with.

  FIG. 242 (n) continuing from FIG. 242 (m) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variation game is finished. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the winning / deciding result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. ing.

In this embodiment, in this way, the effect of the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 216 may be executed during the execution of the wipe effect display. Of course, the effects of effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 203 may be executed during the execution of the wipe effect display. The effects related to the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 shown in FIGS. 203 to 231 may be executed during the execution of the wipe effect display. At this time, the button operation waiting display and the button response display are displayed overlapping with the first wipe display and the second wipe display. 1st wipe display and 2nd wipe display are overlapped and button operation wait display and button response display are displayed The effect display is executed, and the pattern variation display overlaps with button operation wait display and button response display. It may be configured such that the big hit event is finally confirmed and displayed more easily than the design variable display in which the effect display in which the first wipe display or the second wipe display is executed is performed. The symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display and the button response display are overlapped with the wipe display and the second wipe display may be determined as the big hit. In addition, even if it is configured so that the variable display may be removed, the effect display may be overlapped with the button operation waiting display or the button response display and the first wipe display or the second wipe display may be displayed. Alternatively, it may be determined to be out of alignment. It should be noted that the wipe effect display and the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 203 can be executed even in the electric support state and the non-electric support state.
(Example 12)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 12 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 243. FIG. 243 shows an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 243, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

  FIG. 243 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In this embodiment, the game state is an electric power support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 243 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 2, for example, and the number of reservations in special figure 2 is 4, for example. In each drawing of FIG. 243, illustration of the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

  FIG. 243 (b) continuing from FIG. 243 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variation game is started based on the fact that the hold of the earliest special figure 2 is exhausted.

  FIG. 243 (c) continuing from FIG. 243 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Super reach production is started after FIG. 243 (c). It is configured such that the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display in which the super reach effect is performed than in the symbol variable display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  FIG. 243 (d) continuing from FIG. 243 (c) is a moving image of a scene in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and the main character and the enemy character confront each other. It shows a state in which the effect of displaying an image has been started. When the hit / no decision result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character string image of “duel” is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. There is. On the front side of the character string image, "decoration 2" as the left design is displayed, and a part of the character string image is invisible.

  FIG. 243 (e) continuing from FIG. 243 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire “duel” character string image displayed on the upper left side of the display screen can be visually recognized. During some period during execution of the super reach effect, the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced display mode.

  FIG. 243 (f) subsequent to FIG. 243 (e) shows a state in which a display indicating a deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the hero loses to the enemy is displayed as a display indicating the departure. At the bottom of the display screen, a tutorial display of a character string image "Sorry! Swordsman's victory!" Is displayed, which explains that the enemy character who is a swordsman has won. The tutorial display is also a display that suggests a departure.

  243 (g) following FIG. 243 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the swing variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is the outlying pattern mode, shakes up and down.

  FIG. 243 (h) subsequent to FIG. 243 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to make the appearance display of the first wipe display start, and the appearance of the first wipe display makes the start of the first wipe effect display.

  FIG. 243 (i) subsequent to FIG. 243 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 243 (i), the lower plate 128 becomes full of prize balls, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. On the upper left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a lower plate full tank error notification image in which a character string image of "please remove the ball" is displayed in black character color is displayed. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed so as to overlap the wipe image w1a.

  The first wipe display pattern displayed in the special figure variation game in which the confrontation effect between the hero and the enemy is executed is a pattern including the image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 243 (i), the pattern of the wipe display w1a is a pattern including two images of the hero's face, and the pattern of the wipe display w1b is a pattern including four images of the hero's face. The display mode of the main character included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the main character lost in the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 243 (g). As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to the player forgetting the effect of losing the duel.

  FIG. 243 (j) subsequent to FIG. 243 (i) shows a state where the island simultaneous production has started. In the island-simultaneous production, the pachinko machines 100 of the same model perform the same production at the same timing. At the start of the island simultaneous production, a character string image of “island simultaneous production starts!” Is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. In the island simultaneous production of this example, the production in which the princess character image is displayed is executed. When the island simultaneous production is started, the wipe displays w1a and w1b are reduced and displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative pattern display device 208. The error display such as the lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed so as to overlap with the character image of the princess displayed in the island simultaneous production, and is displayed with priority over the image displayed in the island simultaneous production. ..

  FIG. 243 (k) subsequent to FIG. 243 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started during execution of the island simultaneous production. On the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right. The decorative design is gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. During execution of the island simultaneous production, the character string image of "island simultaneous production" is displayed. The lower plate full tank error notification image is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 243 (l) continuing from FIG. 243 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is finished after the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the winning / deciding result of the special figure 2 variable game is wrong. ing.

  In this embodiment, the island simultaneous production is started during the execution of the wipe production display. While the island simultaneous production is being executed, the production display that was displayed before the island simultaneous production such as the wipe production display, the reach production display, and the decorative pattern display is reduced to the lower right corner of the decorative pattern display device 208. Is displayed. The error display such as the lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed while maintaining the display position, display size, and display mode before the island simultaneous production is started even while the island simultaneous production is being executed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the island simultaneous production. The pachinko machine 100 includes a light emitting means (for example, various lamps 418 shown in FIG. 149, a game board lamp 532, a game underframe lamp 542), a transparent area (for example, a transparent plate member 118), and a display means (for example, The decorative pattern display device 208) is provided, and is configured to be capable of accepting a brightness setting operation by the player (hereinafter, referred to as “first brightness setting operation”), and when the first effect is being performed. The brightness according to the first brightness setting operation (for example, "medium (duty ratio 70%) brightness set by the brightness setting operation by the player. The brightness is set by the brightness setting operation by the player." If not, the light emitting means can emit light with the brightness of "bright (duty ratio 100%)" initially set in the gaming table, and the second effect is performed when the second effect is performed. One The light emitting means emits light with a brightness that does not correspond to the degree setting operation (for example, the brightness of "brightness (duty ratio 100%)" that is initially set in the gaming machine), and the first effect is the island simultaneous effect Not the thing, it is a reach effect, the second effect is the island simultaneous effect, the light emitting means is a means provided above the transparent region, the gaming table Is capable of independently executing the island simultaneous production, and even if the second production is performed, a display regarding the brightness of the light emitting means on the display means (hereinafter, referred to as "brightness setting display"). It is possible to display, the brightness setting display is a display showing the brightness according to the first brightness setting operation, even if the second effect is performed, depending on the first brightness setting operation. The brightness setting display is displayed. When the second effect is not performed, the light emitting unit can emit light with the brightness according to the first brightness setting operation. The "brightness that does not correspond to the first brightness setting operation" described above is the maximum value of the brightness that can be set by the first brightness setting operation, and the "brightness that corresponds to the first brightness" described above. The "luminance that does not correspond to the setting operation" is the luminance that is initially set. When the second effect is finished, the light emitting means may be capable of emitting light at a brightness according to the first brightness setting operation. The reach effect is an effect that may be executed when the island simultaneous effect is not being executed. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to sharpen the effect during execution of the island simultaneous production and during non-execution of the island simultaneous production.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the gaming table according to the fourth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 243 again.
(I1)
Effect display means capable of executing effect display (for example, decorative pattern display device 208, sub display device 1030)
A gaming machine equipped with
The effect display means is a display means capable of executing a variable display of symbols (for example, a variable display of decorative symbols),
The effect display means is a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of reach effects (for example, normal reach effect and super reach effect),
The effect display means is a display means composed of a plurality of image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a first image display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208),
One image display unit of the plurality of image display units is a second image display unit (for example, the sub display device 1030),
One of the plurality of types of reach effects is a first reach effect (for example, normal reach effect),
One of the plurality of types of reach effects is a second reach effect (for example, super reach effect),
It is configured such that the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display in which the second reach effect is performed, than in the symbol variation display in which the first reach effect is performed,
It is possible to perform the first wipe effect display (for example, the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b) on the first image display means after the display indicating the deviation is performed in the second reach effect. Yes,
It is possible to perform the second wipe effect display (for example, the wipe display w2a and the wipe display w2b) on the second image display means after the display indicating the deviation is performed in the second reach effect. is there,
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it may be possible to renew the player's mood which has been deviated from the symbol variable display by the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display.
(I2)
The gaming machine described in (I1) above,
By the first wipe effect display, the image in the first image display means is configured to be wiped off,
The second wipe effect display is configured to wipe the image on the second image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(I3)
The gaming table according to (I1) or (I2) above,
A pre-reading notice is provided by at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display (for example, see FIG. 234),
A game table characterized by that.
(I4)
The gaming table according to any one of (I1) to (I3) above,
The image display means (for example, the decorative pattern display device 208) configuring the first image display means and the image display means (for example, the sub display device 1030) configuring the second image display means are different.
A game table characterized by that.
(I5)
The gaming table according to any one of (I1) to (I4) above,
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of symbols in the second reach effect,
At least one of the plurality of types of symbols is erased by displaying at least one wipe effect display of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display, and the wipe effect is displayed. It is configured to be displayed again when the display ends,
The one design is configured to change from a first display mode (for example, a reduced display mode) to a second display mode (for example, a normal display mode),
The first display mode is a display mode of the one symbol before the one wipe effect display is performed,
The second display mode is a display mode of the one symbol after the one wipe effect display is performed,
A game table characterized by that.
(I6)
The gaming table according to any one of (I1) to (I5) above,
It is configured to be able to display a plurality of characters in the second reach effect,
One of the plurality of character displays is the first character display (for example, the display of Yoshimune's character),
The display of the first character is erased by displaying at least one wipe effect display of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display is displayed. ..
(I7)
The gaming table according to any one of (I1) to (I6) above,
A background display (for example, refer to FIG. 232) changes before and after at least one wipe effect display of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display is performed.
A game table characterized by that.
(I8)
The gaming table according to any one of (I1) to (I7) above,
A ball storage means (for example, lower plate 128) capable of storing game balls is provided,
The first image display means can display a display (for example, a lower plate full tank error notification image) (hereinafter, referred to as “ball removal display”) for notifying that the game ball is removed from the ball storage means,
The ball-out display is a display overlapping the first wipe effect display,
The ball-out display is configured to be visible to the player during the display of the first wipe effect display,
The ball-out display is configured to be visible to the player even during the display of the second wipe effect display,
A game table characterized by that.
(I9)
The gaming table according to any one of (I1) to (I8) above,
The first wipe effect display is configured to include an appearance display of the first wipe display (for example, see FIGS. 232 (q) to (v)),
The first wipe effect display is configured to include a withdrawal display of the first wipe display (for example, see FIG. 232 (w) to (a)),
The second wipe effect display is configured to include an appearance display of the second wipe display (for example, see FIGS. 232 (s) to (u)),
The second wipe effect display is configured to include a withdrawal display of the second wipe display (see, for example, FIGS. 232 (x) to (z)).
A game table characterized by that.
(I10)
The gaming machine described in (I9) above,
The first wipe display pattern (eg, the wipe display w1a, w1b pattern shown in FIG. 235) and the second wipe display pattern (eg, the wipe display w2a, w2b pattern shown in FIG. 235) are different.
A game table characterized by that.
(I11)
The gaming table according to (I9) or (I10) above,
The start timing of the appearance display of the first wipe display and the start timing of the appearance display of the second wipe display are different (see, for example, FIGS. 232 (q) and (s)),
A game table characterized by that.
(I12)
The gaming table according to any one of (I1) to (I11) above,
The second image display means is a means capable of executing a moving operation,
At least a part of the second wipe effect display is performed on the second image display unit performing the moving operation (see, for example, FIGS. 232 (s) and (t)),
A game table characterized by that.
(I13)
The gaming table according to any one of (I1) to (I12) above,
The first image display means is a means capable of executing a moving operation,
In the first image display means performing the moving operation, at least a part of the first wipe effect display is performed.
A game table characterized by that.
(I14)
The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 13,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game table characterized by that.

  It should be noted that what has been called a lamp or an illumination so far is an example of a light emitting means, and the lamp can be replaced as long as it emits light such as an LED or a cold cathode tube.

  For example, the above embodiment can be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the game machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a ball and circulates the enclosed ball in the pachinko machine for use.This enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed ball as a launch ball, The payout of the balls may be performed by an electronic display.

  Note that the matters described in the above detailed description, particularly the matters described in the examples and the modified examples shown in the first to fourth embodiments, can be combined.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine was used as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention can be applied to the slot machine 2000 as shown in FIG.

  The gaming table according to the present invention corresponds to a plurality of reels 2002 that are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven, a start lever 2004 for instructing the rotation of the reels, and each reel, as shown in FIG. A stop button 2006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, a lottery means (internal winning lottery lottery) for judging whether or not the internal winnings of a plurality of types of winning combinations are won by lottery, and a lottery result of the lottery means The reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) for performing stop control relating to the stop of the rotation of the reel, and the symbol combination displayed by the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means correspond to the winning combination internally. And a determination means (prize determination process) for determining whether or not the symbol combination is a predetermined symbol combination, and when the stop mode of the symbol is a predetermined prize mode, a predetermined prize mode is selected. In addition to a payout control means (medal payout processing 2008) for performing a game medium payout process for paying out a game medium, a production means 2010 for executing a production based on a lottery result of the lottery means is provided, and the production means is a predetermined one. A launching device 2014 that launches a ball into the game area 2012, a winning opening 2016 configured to be able to enter the ball launched from the launching device, and a detection unit 2018 that detects the ball entering the winning opening 2016, When the detection unit 2018 detects a sphere, a payout unit 2020 that pays out the sphere, a variable display device 2022 that variably displays a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 2024 that is movable to a position that shields the variable display device 2022. And a movable body 2026 that operates in a predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 2022 is a symbol when the game ball enters the winning opening and wins the prize. And in is stopped and displayed after the change, it is also suitable to the slot machine 2000 ", which is the effect device 2010, such as to produce a game.

  The gaming table according to the present invention, as shown in FIG. 241 (a), "inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 3002, executes a lottery based on the bet 3004 and start 3006 operations, and displays the lottery result on the lottery result display device 3008." However, at the time of winning, the bonus coin number is added to the remaining credit number, and when the cashout 3009 is selected, the receipt issuing machine 3010 issues a receipt in which a code corresponding to the remaining credit number is issued. May be

  Further, as shown in FIG. 2B, a mobile phone 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and electronic data that realizes the present invention as shown in FIG. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing the above, and a home video game machine 6000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for implementing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 4000 in the same figure (b) has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring game-related data through a mobile phone line, and acquired game-related data (book). A storage unit that stores electronic data that realizes the invention), and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 5000 shown in FIG. 7C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring game-related data from a predetermined storage medium (DVD, etc.), and acquired game-related data (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The household video game machine 6000 in FIG. 6D has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires game-related data from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired game-related data ( A storage unit that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 7E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 7000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. In some cases, electronic data for implementing the present invention may be downloaded from the data server 7000 to the home video game console 6000 shown in FIG.

  The present invention can also be applied to execute a game in a game program that simulates the operation of an actual machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine. In that case, as a recording medium for recording the game program, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used.

  Furthermore, although the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as an example of a game table, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball game machine, a smart ball, or the like.

The above embodiment is summarized as follows.
(Appendix 1)
At least one of the plurality of displays is a gaming table having a display means capable of displaying at least,
At least one of the plurality of displays is a first display,
At least one of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the first display in a first display mode,
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the first display in a third display mode,
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the second display in a second display mode,
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the second display in a fourth display mode,
The first display mode is a display mode different from the third display mode,
The second display mode is a display mode different from the fourth display mode,
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the second display in the second display mode when displaying the first display in the first display mode,
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the second display in the fourth display mode when displaying the first display in the third display mode,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 2)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 1,
At least one of the plurality of displays is a third display,
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the third display in a fifth display mode,
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the third display in the fifth display mode when the first display is displayed in the first display mode,
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the third display in the fifth display mode when the first display is displayed in the third display mode,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 3)
The gaming machine according to appendix 1 or 2,
The amount of change from the first display mode to the third display mode is the first amount of change,
The amount of change from the second display mode to the fourth display mode is a second amount of change,
The first variation is the same variation as the second variation,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 4)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 3,
At least a part of the first display displayed in the first display mode, when the display means is in the first state, visibility is at least low,
The first state is a state in which at least the second display is displayed on the display means in the second display mode,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 5)
In the gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
The first display is a display including at least a first animation display,
The second display is a display including at least a second animation display,
The first animation display is at least a different animation display from the second animation display,
The display means is a display means capable of continuously displaying at least the first animation display even when the display mode of the first display is switched from the first display mode to the third display mode. Yes,
The display means is a display means capable of continuously displaying at least the second animation display even when the display mode of the second display is switched from the second display mode to the fourth display mode. is there,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 6)
In the gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 5,
The display means is a display means that does not display the second display in the fourth display mode when displaying the first display in the first display mode,
The display means is a display means that does not display the second display in the second display mode when displaying the first display in the third display mode,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix a1)
A gaming table equipped with image display means,
The image display means may perform a rotation display of the first image,
When the rotation display is performed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix a2)
The gaming table described in Appendix a1,
When the rotation display is performed, the second image may not rotate,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix a3)
The gaming table described in Appendix a2,
When the rotation display is performed, the second image does not rotate,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix a4)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices a1 to a3,
When the rotation display is performed, an image that has been cut off in the image display means before the rotation display may be displayed on the image display means by the rotation display.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix a5)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices a1 to a4,
When the rotation display is performed, the image displayed on the image display unit before the rotation display may be cut off in the image display unit by the rotation display.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix a6)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices a1 to a5,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix a7)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices a1 to a5,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix b1)
A movable body for performance,
Image display means,
A gaming machine equipped with
When operating the effectable movable body in front of the image display means, there may be a first state in which a first image is displayed at a first position,
The first position is a position behind the effecting movable body in the image display means,
The first image is an effect image,
When operating the effectable movable body in front of the image display means, there may be a second state in which the first image is displayed at a second position,
The second position is a position different from the back of the effecting movable body in the image display means,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix b2)
The gaming table described in Appendix b1,
In the first state, the first image may be displayed across the first position and the third position,
The third position is a position different from the back of the effecting movable body in the image display means,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix b3)
The gaming table according to appendix b1 or b2,
The size of the first image in the first state is a first size,
The size of the first image in the second state is a third size,
The third size is smaller than the first size,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix b4)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices b1 to b3,
In the first state, the second image may be displayed in the first orientation,
In the second state, the second image may be displayed in a second orientation,
The first image is a different image than the second image,
The second direction is a direction different from the first direction,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix b5)
The gaming table described in appendix b4,
The size of the second image in the first state is a second size,
The size of the second image in the second state is a fourth size,
The fourth size is smaller than the second size,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix b6)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices b1 to b5,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix b7)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices b1 to b5,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix c1)
An image display unit capable of displaying a performance image that directs a game,
Drive means for driving the image display unit,
A gaming machine equipped with
The image display unit may move by the drive of the drive means,
A first moving image may be displayed on the image display unit during the period in which the image display unit is moving in the first direction (hereinafter, referred to as “first period”),
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which a first image moves in the first direction,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix c2)
The gaming table described in appendix c1,
The game table, wherein the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode based on the first image.
(Appendix c3)
The gaming table described in Appendix c1 or c2,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in a first direction,
In the first period, the first image is configured to move in a second orientation,
The first orientation and the second orientation are opposite orientations,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix c4)
The gaming table described in appendix c3,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move at a first speed in the first direction,
In the first period, the first image is configured to move at a second speed in the second direction,
The first speed and the second speed are the same speed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix c5)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices c1 to c4,
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which the second image is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix c6)
The gaming table described in appendix c5,
In the first period, the second image is configured not to move in the first direction,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix c7)
The gaming table according to appendix c5 or c6,
The game table, wherein the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode by the second image.
(Appendix c8)
The gaming table described in appendix c3 or c4,
“Move by driving the driving means” described in appendix c1 means “rotate by driving the driving means”,
“The first image moves in the first direction” described in appendix c1 means “the first image rotates in the first direction”,
The first direction is a rotation direction around the rotation axis of the image display unit,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix c9)
The gaming table described in appendix c8,
The first direction is one of clockwise and counterclockwise,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix c10)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices c1 to c7,
“Move by driving the driving means” described in appendix c1 means “move linearly by driving the driving means”.
“The first image moves in the first direction” described in appendix c1 means “the first image moves linearly in the first direction”.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d1)
A game table having a first movable body capable of executing a production operation for producing a game,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine or slot machine,
When the power is turned off, the first movable body is configured to move from the second position to the first position,
When the power is turned on, the first movable body is configured to move from the first position to the second position,
The second position and the first position are different positions,
The effect operation is configured to start from the second position and end at the second position,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d2)
The gaming table described in appendix d1,
The first movable body is configured to move to the first position even when the power is turned off in a state where the first movable body is located at a position different from the second position. Is
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d3)
The gaming table according to supplementary note d1 or d2,
The effect operation includes an operation of moving to a third position,
The third position and the first position are different positions,
The third position and the second position are different positions,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d4)
The gaming table described in appendix d3,
Equipped with image display means,
The first movable body is a movable body provided on the front side of the image display means,
The third position is a position on the front side of the image display means,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d5)
The gaming table described in appendix d4,
It is possible to perform jackpot operations,
The first movable body is a movable body provided on the front side of the image display means,
When the first movable body is located at the third position, the first movable body may overlap at least a part of the notice image displayed on the image display means,
The notice image is the notice image of the jackpot.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d6)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d1 to d5,
The first movable body is capable of performing an initial operation on condition that the power supply is turned on,
“The first movable body moves from the first position to the second position” described in appendix d1 means “the first movable body starts the initial operation from the first position”. And at the end of the initial operation, move to the second position ".
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d7)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d1 to d5,
The first movable body is capable of performing an initial operation on condition that the power supply is turned on,
The statement “the first movable body moves from the first position to the second position” described in appendix d1 means “the first movable body moves from the first position to the second position”. And then move to the second position again at the end of the initial operation ".
(Appendix d8)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d1 to d7,
“When the power is turned off” described in Appendix d1 means “when the main power of the gaming table is turned off”.
“When the power is turned on” described in appendix d1 is “when the main power of the gaming table is turned on”.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d9)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d1 to d8,
The first movable body is a movable body whose posture can be changed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d10)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d1 to d9,
It is equipped with a second movable body that is capable of performing staging operations that direct games.
The second movable body is a movable body that starts operation from a position when the power is turned off when the power is turned on.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d11)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d1 to d10,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d12)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d1 to d10,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix e1)
An image display unit capable of displaying a performance image that directs a game,
Drive means for driving the image display unit,
A gaming machine equipped with
The image display unit may move by the drive of the drive means,
A first moving image may be displayed on the image display unit during the period in which the image display unit is moving in the first direction (hereinafter, referred to as “first period”),
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which a first image moves in the first direction,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix e2)
The gaming table described in appendix e1,
The game table, wherein the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode based on the first image.
(Appendix e3)
The gaming table according to appendix e1 or e2,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in a first direction,
In the first period, the first image is configured to move in a second orientation,
The first orientation and the second orientation are opposite orientations,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix e4)
The gaming machine described in Appendix e3,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move at a first speed in the first direction,
In the first period, the first image is configured to move at a second speed in the second direction,
The first speed and the second speed are the same speed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix e5)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices e1 to e4,
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which the second image is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix e6)
The gaming table described in appendix e5,
In the first period, the second image is configured not to move in the first direction,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix e7)
The gaming table described in appendix e5 or e6,
The game table, wherein the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode by the second image.
(Appendix e8)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices e1 to e7,
“Move by driving the driving means” described in appendix e1 means “rotate by driving the driving means”,
“The first image moves in the first direction” described in appendix e1 means “the first image rotates in the first direction”,
The first direction is a rotation direction around the rotation axis of the image display unit,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix e9)
The gaming table according to supplementary note e3 or e4,
The first direction is one of clockwise and counterclockwise,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix e10)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices e1 to e7,
“Move by driving the driving means” described in appendix e1 means “move linearly by driving the driving means”,
“The first image moves in the first direction” described in appendix e1 means “the first image moves linearly in the first direction”.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f1)
A production movable body that can execute a movable operation to produce a game,
A decorative body with a window,
A gaming machine equipped with
Behind the decorative body, the effect movable body may perform an operation,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f2)
The gaming table described in Appendix f1,
The effect movable body is a movable body capable of displaying an image,
It is configured to allow the player to visually recognize the image of the effect movable body through the window.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f3)
The gaming table described in Appendix f2,
An image of the production movable body visually recognized by the player through the window may change due to the operation of the production movable body.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f4)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices f1 to f3,
The ornament is operable.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f5)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices f1 to f4,
Equipped with a symbol display means capable of executing variable display of symbols,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f6)
The gaming table described in Appendix f5,
In the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means, when the player can visually recognize a part of the image on the effect movable body through the window portion of the ornament by the operation of the ornament, The jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed as the final result of the variable display of the symbols than when the player cannot visually recognize a part of the image on the effectable movable body through the window of the decorative body. Is configured to
A part of the image on the effect movable body is an image of at least a part of the notice image,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f7)
The gaming table described in Appendix f5 or f6,
When the player can visually recognize a part of the image of the pre-reading hold icon on the effect movable body through the window portion of the decoration body by the operation of the decoration body, The hold corresponding to the hold icon is digested and started, as compared with the case where the player does not see a part of the image of the hold icon in the look-ahead mode in the effect movable body through the window. As the final result of the variable display of the symbols, the jackpot pattern mode is configured to be easily displayed in a confirmed manner,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f8)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices f1 to f7,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix g1)
A gaming table equipped with image display means,
The image display means is capable of performing a rotation operation,
The image display means in which the rotating operation is performed may display a first image,
When the rotation operation is performed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix g2)
The gaming table described in Appendix g1,
The image display means in which the rotation operation is performed may display a second image,
When the rotation operation is performed, the second image may not rotate,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix g3)
The gaming table described in Appendix g2,
The second image does not rotate when the rotation operation is performed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix g4)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices g1 to g3,
When the rotation operation is performed, an image that has been cut off in the image display means before the rotation operation is performed may be displayed on the image display means by the rotation operation.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix g5)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices g1 to g4,
When the rotation operation is performed, the image displayed on the image display unit before the rotation operation may be cut off in the image display unit by the rotation operation.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix g6)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices g1 to g5,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix g7)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices g1 to g5,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix h1)
A symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display,
An image display means capable of displaying an image,
First operation means provided at a position where the player can operate,
Second operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
A gaming machine equipped with
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a third type of operation waiting display,
The third type of operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for an operation of the first operating means,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a third type of operation response display,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a fourth type of operation response display,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a fifth type of operation response display,
The third type of operation response display is a display performed in response to the operation of the first operation means,
The operation response display of the third type is a display configured without including a part of the display performed while waiting for the operation of the second operation means,
The fourth type operation response display is a display performed in response to the operation of the first operation means,
The fourth type of operation response display is a display configured to include the part of the display performed when waiting for the operation of the second operation means,
The fifth type operation response display is a display performed in response to the operation of the second operation means,
The pattern variation display in which the fifth type operation response display is performed is more than the symbol variation display in which the fifth type operation response display is performed and the third type operation response display is performed. However, it is easy to confirm and display the jackpot pattern,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix h2)
The gaming table described in Appendix h1,
Any one of the third type of operation response display and the fourth type of operation response display in response to the operation of the first operation means during the display of the third operation waiting display Is displayed before the third operation waiting display is displayed on the image display means,
The third operation wait display is one operation wait display of the third type of operation wait display,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix h3)
The gaming table according to supplementary note h1 or h2,
The image display means can display a fourth type of operation waiting display,
The fourth type of operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for an operation of the first operating means,
The operation response display of the fourth type is configured to be displayed on the image display unit when the first operation unit is operated during the display of the operation standby display of the fourth type. ,
The symbol variation display in which the operation waiting display of the fourth type is performed, rather than the symbol variation display in which the operation waiting display of the third type is performed without performing the operation waiting display of the fourth type However, it is easy to confirm the jackpot pattern,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix h4)
The gaming machine described in Appendix h3,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a first type of operation waiting display,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a first type of operation response display,
The first type of operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for an operation of the first operating means,
The first type of operation response display is a display configured without including a display performed when waiting for an operation of the second operation means,
The operation response display of the first type is configured to be displayed on the image display unit when the first operation unit is operated during the display of the operation standby display of the first type. ,
The first operation response display is configured to be displayed only when the first operation means is operated during the display of the first operation waiting display,
The fourth operation response display is configured to be displayed when the first operation means is operated during the display of the fourth operation waiting display,
The fourth operation response display is configured to be displayed even if the first operation means is not operated during the display of the fourth operation waiting display,
The first operation waiting display is one operation waiting display of the first type of operation waiting display,
The first operation response display is one operation response display of the first type of operation response display,
The fourth operation waiting display is one operation waiting display of the fourth type of operation waiting display,
The fourth operation response display is one operation response display of the fourth type of operation response display,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix h5)
The gaming table described in Appendix h4,
The pattern variation display in which the fifth type of operation response display is performed is more than the symbol variation display in which the fifth type of operation response display is performed without performing the fifth type operation response display. However, it is easy to confirm the jackpot pattern,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix h6)
The gaming table according to supplementary note h4 or h5,
The symbol variation display in which the first type of operation response display is performed is more than the symbol variation display in which the third type of operation response display is performed without performing the first type operation response display. However, it is easy to confirm the jackpot pattern,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix h7)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices h1 to h6,
The operation response display of the fourth type when the time from the display of the operation waiting display of the third type to the operation of the first operation means is the first time is the first Is a display,
The operation response display of the fourth type is the second when the time from the display of the operation waiting display of the third type until the operation of the first operating means is the second time. Is a display,
The second time is a time longer than the first time,
The display of the opening of the first display and the display of the opening of the second display are the same,
The display at the end of the first display and the display at the end of the second display are the same,
At least a part of the display in the middle of the first display is not displayed in the second display,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix h8)
The gaming table described in Appendix h7,
When the first operation means is operated after the third type of operation waiting display is displayed and before the operation valid period defined before the start of the third type of operation waiting display is ended. It is configured to display according to the operation of the first operation means,
The first time is the time from the start of the operation waiting display of the third type until the first operation means is operated at the shortest timing,
The second time is the time when the first operation means is operated at a timing immediately before the end of the operation valid period from the start of the operation waiting display of the third type, A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix h9)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices h1 to h8,
The image display means can display a second type of operation waiting display,
The second type of operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for an operation of the second operation means,
The operation response display of the second type is configured to be displayed on the image display unit when the second operation unit is operated during the display of the operation standby display of the second type. ,
The pattern variation display in which the fifth type of operation response display is performed is more than the symbol variation display in which the fifth type of operation response display is performed without performing the fifth type operation response display. However, it is easy to confirm the jackpot pattern,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix h10)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices h1 to h9,
The display of the character displayed on the operation response display of the fourth type is configured to be displayed on the operation standby display of the fourth type,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix h11)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices h1 to h10,
The display of the character displayed on the operation response display of the fourth type is configured to be displayed on the operation waiting display of the third type,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix h12)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices h1 to h11,
The second operation means is configured to be determined to have been operated when pressed by the player,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix h13)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices h1 to h12,
The first operation means is configured to be operated when it is rotated by a player,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i1)
Performance display means that can execute performance display
A gaming machine equipped with
The effect display means is a display means capable of executing a symbol variation display,
The effect display means is a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of reach effects,
The effect display means is a display means composed of a plurality of image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a first image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means,
One of the plurality of types of reach production is the first reach production,
One of the plurality of types of reach production is a second reach production,
It is configured such that the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display in which the second reach effect is performed, than in the symbol variation display in which the first reach effect is performed,
In the second reach effect, after the display indicating the deviation is performed, it is possible to perform the first wipe effect display in the first image display means,
It is possible to perform a second wipe effect display in the second image display means after a display indicating a deviation is performed in the second reach effect.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i2)
The gaming machine described in appendix i1,
By the first wipe effect display, the image in the first image display means is configured to be wiped off,
The second wipe effect display is configured to wipe the image on the second image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i3)
The gaming table according to supplementary note i1 or i2,
At least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display is configured to give advance notice.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i4)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices i1 to i3,
The image display means forming the first image display means and the image display means forming the second image display means are different,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i5)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices i1 to i4,
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of symbols in the second reach effect,
At least one of the plurality of types of symbols is erased by displaying at least one wipe effect display of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display, and the wipe effect is displayed. It is configured to be displayed again when the display ends,
The one design is configured to change from the first display mode to the second display mode,
The first display mode is a display mode of the one symbol before the one wipe effect display is performed,
The second display mode is a display mode of the one symbol after the one wipe effect display is performed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i6)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices i1 to i5,
It is configured to be able to display a plurality of characters in the second reach effect,
One of the multiple character displays is the first character display,
The display of the first character is erased by displaying at least one wipe effect display of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display is displayed. ..
(Appendix i7)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices i1 to i6,
The background display changes before and after at least one wipe effect display of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display is performed.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i8)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices i1 to i7,
Equipped with ball storage means that can store game balls,
The first image display means can display a notification (hereinafter, referred to as “ball removal display”) for notifying that the game ball is removed from the ball storage means,
The ball-out display is a display overlapping the first wipe effect display,
The ball-out display is configured to be visible to the player during the display of the first wipe effect display,
The ball-out display is configured to be visible to the player even during the display of the second wipe effect display,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i9)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices i1 to i8,
The first wipe effect display is configured to include an appearance display of the first wipe display,
The first wipe effect display is configured to include a withdrawal display of the first wipe display,
The second wipe effect display is configured to include an appearance display of the second wipe display,
The second wipe effect display is configured to include a withdrawal display of the second wipe display,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i10)
The gaming machine according to appendix i9,
The design of the first wipe display and the design of the second wipe display are different,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i11)
The gaming table according to supplementary note i9 or i10,
The start timing of the appearance display of the first wipe display and the start timing of the appearance display of the second wipe display are different,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i12)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices i1 to i11,
The second image display means is a means capable of executing a moving operation,
In the second image display means performing the moving operation, at least a part of the second wipe effect display is performed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i13)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices i1 to i12,
The first image display means is a means capable of executing a moving operation,
In the first image display means performing the moving operation, at least a part of the first wipe effect display is performed.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i14)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices i1 to i13,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

  Next, a ball game machine (including an enclosed type) such as another pachinko machine 100 to which the present invention can be applied will be described in detail. The term "enclosed type" as used herein refers to an enclosed game machine or the like that circulates and uses the game balls enclosed in the game machine. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 246 to 279 will be used only for the description using FIGS. 246 to 279 in principle, and even if duplicate reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. In the description using FIG. 279, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 246 to 279 are given priority.

<Overall structure>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 246. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage plate-equipped door 108, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and is a vertically rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge 112. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk of a store (gaming store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor 1041 that detects that the main body 104 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and to be opened / closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. A clerk of the game shop can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 that detects that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which the game area 124 is provided. In addition, in this specification, an LED as a light source is also called a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage dish is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage dish is opened by pressing an opening lever 1081 which can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. Further, a door sensor with a ball storage tray 1082 for detecting that the door with a ball storage tray 108 is opened is also provided. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a top plate 126 capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “ball”) and provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launch device 110. , A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation, and a player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by an operation, and a game ball that guides the game balls to the launcher 110 by a player's operation. Built into the chance button 136, a ball firing handle 134 to be launched into the game area 124, a chance button 136 for changing the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 247) by the operation of the player, and a chance button 136. A chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 for issuing a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store, and a player to the card unit. A return operation button 142 for instructing the return of the balance, and a ball lending display section 144 for displaying the player's balance and the state of the card unit are provided. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 246 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 has been filled with a game ball.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided. This launching device 110 sends a game ball to the game area 124 of the game board at every elapse of a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) while the ball firing handle 134 is continuously operated to be fired by the player. Fire towards.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the game area 124 is omitted in FIG. 246, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG. 248.

  FIG. 247 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 246 as seen from the back side.

  At the upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls and an opening that opens upward, and a ball tank 150 positioned below the ball tank 150 are provided at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

  The payout device 152 is made of a tubular member, and has a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside thereof. The dispensing device 152 is detachable, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have temporarily stayed are delivered one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that gives a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either one of a high signal and a low signal, when the game ball is not passing, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) to reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined amount. Based on the satisfaction of the condition, a game value (gaming ball) of an amount according to the grant condition is granted (paid out) to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for accommodating a main board 156 constituting the main control section 300 (see FIG. 249) for performing control processing of the whole game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-board 400 (see FIG. 249) that performs control processing related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control section 500 (see FIG. 249) that performs the control processing related to the effect, and the payout control section 600 that performs the control processing related to the payout of the game balls ( (See FIG. 249) and a payout board case 172 for housing a payout board 170 having an error canceling switch 168 for canceling an error by an operation of a game shop staff, A launch board case 176 accommodating a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control section 630 (see FIG. 249) that performs control processing relating to the launch of a ball, and a power management section 660 (see FIG. 249) that supplies power to various electric amusement machines. And a power supply that houses a power supply board 182 that includes a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game shop staff and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. A board case 184 and a CR interface 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided.

  FIG. 248 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to define a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll.

  A rendering device 206 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged in the approximate center, and around it, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary The symbol reserve lamp 216, the first special symbol reserve lamp 218, the second special symbol reserve lamp 220, and the high-precision middle lamp 222 are arranged. In addition, hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "general symbol" and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol". The rendering device 206 will be described later.

  The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) here. This decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a and a middle symbol display region 208b. And the right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it can be configured to display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general-purpose drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general-purpose image, and is configured by a 7-segment LED here. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs here.

  The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of the universal figure variation games (details will be described later) that are on hold, and here, the universal figure variation games are retained up to a predetermined number (for example, two). Is possible. The first special figure reservation lamp 218 and the second special figure reservation lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variation games (details described later) that are on hold, and here, a predetermined number of special figure variation games. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is a high-probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low-probability state in which a big hit is hard to occur to a high probability state. Lights when changing to the probability state, and turns off when changing from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, around the performance device 206, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a universal figure starting port 228, a first special figure starting port 230, a second special figure starting port 232, A variable winning port 234 is provided.

  A plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (when winning in the general winning opening 226). Then, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. Hereinafter, a ball paid out to a player as a consideration for a prize may be referred to as a "prize ball", and a ball to be lent to the player may be referred to as a "loan ball". Sometimes called "ball (gaming ball)".

  The universal figure starting port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or a through-chucker for determining whether or not the ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. Here, 1 is provided on the left side of the game board 200. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

  In this example, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided in the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 247 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are used as prize balls and the upper plate is used. Along with discharging to 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of itself does not change.

  Only one second special figure starting port 232 is provided directly below the first special figure starting port 230. A pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided in the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232. It corresponds to a variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (den Chu). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning the prize in the second special figure starting port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232 with the pair of blade members 2321 closed, and the state where the pair of blade members 2321 is closed (first state) is a difficult winning state. .. On the other hand, when the universal figure variation game is won and the universal figure display device 210 hits and displays the symbol as a stop, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times to the second special figure starting port 232. It is possible to enter the balls (the easy winning state), and the state where the pair of blade members 2321 is open (the second state) is the easy winning state. That is, the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball) of the second special figure starting port 232 is either small (corresponding to the first size) or large (corresponding to the second size). It is a variable starting region in which the easiness of entering the game ball is variable, which changes from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of the second starting region. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. With the pair of blade members 2321 open, of the game balls that have entered the game region 124, the second special region that is the variable starting region is more than the game ball that enters the first special diagram starting port 230 that is the fixed starting region. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or less than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  The variable winning port 234 is called a special winning port or an attacker, and only one variable winning port 234 is provided below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning port 234 is provided with a door member 234a that can be opened and closed, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the door member 234a is closed. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball that has entered the variable winning port 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged near these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the operation handle of the player, and launches the rod 146. The launch mallet 148 allows the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to pass through and launches the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the ball striking direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and wins the prize (general winning prize 226, variable winning prize 234) or starting mouth. Outgoing outlet 240 by winning in (first special figure starting port 230, second special figure starting port 232), without winning any winning port or starting port, or simply passing through universal figure starting port 228. To reach.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, the warp device 242 and the stage 244 are arranged in the area where the game ball can roll, and the effect movable body 224 is arranged in the area where the game ball cannot roll. .. Further, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are arranged on the back side of the rendering device 206. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the effect device 206, from the warp exit 242b to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206.

  On the stage 244, a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball ridden by a nail of the game board 200 or the like can be rolled, and the passed ball is located at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to make it easier to enter.

  The production movable body 224 shown in FIG. 248 is composed of an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b that imitate the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor (not shown) for rotating the upper arm 224a to a shoulder position and an elbow. An unillustrated forearm motor for rotating the forearm 224b is provided at the position. The production movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b respectively move to the left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means overlaps the inner ends of the left and right doors 246a and 246b, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it.

  In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner ends of the left door 246a and the right door 246b are slightly overlapped with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can see all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can each be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern the displayed decorative pattern is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may make a part of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 visible through the holes of the lattice, or the shoji part of the holes of the lattice is closed with a semitransparent lens body, The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji portions of the holes of the lattice are completely blocked (shielded), and the rear decorative pattern display device 208 is completely invisible. Good.

<Control part>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 249. It should be noted that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control part of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control part 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control part 300. According to a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 and a second sub control unit 500 controlling various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400. A payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of the game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

  Here, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 are formed of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are common. The circuit board may be composed of one circuit board, or the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 may be composed of one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. It may be. Therefore, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 is controlled by a predetermined control unit (for example, the main control unit (300), the first sub control unit (400), and the second sub control unit). (500)), or one of these three control units (300, 400, 500) together can be regarded as a predetermined control means, and the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit One combined with the sub-control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control unit (for example, sub-control unit).

<Main control unit>
First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, and temporary data. A RAM 308 for storing the data, an I / O 310 for controlling the input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring the time, the number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number generation circuit 318 that derives a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (two random number generation circuits are built in this circuit. And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball that passes through each starting opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, and door opening such as front frame door opening sensor and inner frame opening sensor A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output by various sensors 320 including a sensor and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random number value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined circuit. A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the symbol display device, for example, the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the general symbol display device 21. Of the drive circuit 326 for performing the display control of various types and various status display sections 328 (for example, the universal figure holding lamp 216, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.). A drive circuit 330 for performing display control, and various solenoids 332 for controlling opening and closing of a predetermined movable member such as a blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 and a door member 234a of the variable winning port 234. The drive circuit 334 is connected.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random number value generation circuit 318 can be roughly divided into two types: a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that counts up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two additional methods for the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode uses a seed of a random number to perform an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) and derives the operation result as a random number. The second method reads a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derives the read numerical value as a random number.

  The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value by using white noise superimposed on the signals input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random number generation circuit 318 uses the value thus obtained as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, as a seed of a random number, or when determining a read start position of a random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value of the random number generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and the latched value is built in the random number value generation circuit 318. It is stored in the random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random value generating circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is also the same. Value is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random value storage register incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318 and corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 uses the information output circuit 336 to pachinko the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. Is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started).

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. It is possible to communicate with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 transmit and receive a communication confirmation command when the power is turned on, the main control unit 300 always sends the number of payouts, and the payout control unit 600 sends error information. Both can communicate in both directions. On the other hand, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. A signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and a CPU 404. A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and the number of times are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various performance data, etc. Is connected to the ROM 406 in which is stored.

  Further, in the basic circuit 402, a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, a chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, an operation lever sensor 425 that detects an operation of the operation lever 190, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, and a detection that the chance button 136 has been pressed down. Detection unit 710 for operating, a sensor circuit 428 that outputs detection signals from the operation lever sensor 425, the shielding device sensor 430, and the detection unit 710 to the basic circuit 402, and an image stored in the ROM 406 based on a signal from the CPU 404. Read the data etc. and use the work area of VRAM436 to display the image. And VDP434 for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display apparatus 208 forms (Video Display Processor), is connected to.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and the number of times. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, and image display. A ROM 506 that stores data and the like is provided.

  Further, in the basic circuit 502, a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the production movable body 224, a production movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the production movable body 224, and a production movable body sensor 424. The sensor circuit 518 that outputs the detection signal to the basic circuit 502 is connected to the sensor circuit 518. Further, in the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game underframe lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game underframe lamp 542, A serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication is connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 540.

<Payout controller, launch controller, power controller>
Next, the payout controller 600, the launch controller 630, and the power controller 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  Further, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 is input to the payout control unit 600, and the payout control unit 600 transmits a door opening command to the main control unit 300. Also, when there is a payout error, the payout control unit 600 sends an error command to the main control unit 300.

  Regarding the door opening command, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 may be directly input to the main control unit 300 without passing through the payout control unit 600, or the payout control unit 600 may be used as a relay board. Then, the door opening sensor 609 may transmit a door opening command to the main control unit 300.

  The firing control unit 630 is a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 for instructing to permit or stop firing, and a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134 outputs the operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player. Control of a firing motor 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and control of a ball feeding device 634 that supplies a ball from the upper plate 126 to the launching device 110, based on a control signal that indicates a firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Condenser). Here, here, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 sends the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the firing control unit 630. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path. For example, the main controller 300 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power controller 660. The second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a voltage after the predetermined voltage is supplied to the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the first sub control unit 400. The firing control unit 630 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, etc.) and devices. The first sub control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (main control unit 300, payout control unit 600, etc.) and devices. The payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost at the same time. The payout control unit 600 may be configured such that the predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both or at least one of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400. The main control unit 300 may be configured such that the predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both or at least one of the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400. The first sub control unit 400 may be configured such that the predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both or at least one of the payout control unit 600 and the main control unit 300.

  Further, the second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost at the same time as the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 is configured to supply the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than all of the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400, or one or more control units. You may. The second sub control unit 500 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660.

  In the island facility provided in the gaming machine installation branch, the 100V AC power supply is stepped down to a voltage of 24V, and the pachinko machine 100 is supplied with a 24V AC current. The 24V AC current is converted into a 12V DC voltage by the power supply controller 660 of the main controller 300. Although not shown in FIG. 249, the main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage conversion circuit, and the DC current of 12V is further stepped down to a predetermined voltage (here, 5V) by the voltage conversion circuit to obtain a predetermined voltage (5V). The DC current of () is supplied to the CPU 304 provided in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300. Further, the DC current converted to a voltage of 12V by the power supply control unit 660 is also supplied to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the activation signal output circuit 340 of the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the I / O port 310 of the basic circuit 302 when the voltage value of the 12V supply current falls below a predetermined value (9V in this example). Therefore, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power supply line that connects the power supply control unit 660 and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the DC current of 12V flows, and this power supply line is an example of a predetermined power supply line. Equivalent to. The low voltage signal may be directly input to the CPU 304. Further, the power management unit 660 may output the input 24V AC current as it is, or may convert it into a 36V DC current and output it. Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 may be supplied with a current of an operating voltage (here, 5 V) via a circuit different from the voltage conversion circuit.

  In addition, the activation signal output circuit 340 outputs an activation signal when the voltage value of the DC current supplied from the power supply control unit 660 upon power-on reaches a voltage value at which the CPU 304 can operate. Furthermore, when the WDT 314 times out, a reset signal is output from the WDT 314 to the CPU 304. When the WDT 3141 times out, there are cases where the CPU 304 cannot perform the originally designed operation due to a runaway state due to a program mistake, or a voltage drop due to a lightning strike, an illegal act, or the like. In this example, the WDT 3141 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value. The activation signal from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal from the WDT 3141 are input to the CPU 304 via a common signal line, but may be input via dedicated lines. The start signal output from the start signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal output from the WDT 314 described above correspond to an example of a predetermined start signal.

  In the case of a momentary power failure in which the power is cut off and immediately restored, that is, in the case of automatic recovery without turning on the power switch 178, a power failure voltage signal is output and the WDT 3141 times out, and the main control unit 300 performs reset processing. Is executed. In this reset process, first, it is determined whether or not the reset operation to be executed is a system reset operation. There are two reset operations executed by the basic circuit 302: a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when the system reset operation is executed, the values of the core and the internal register of the CPU 304 are initialized. Then, the security check process is executed. In the security check processing, whether or not the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct is recalculated. If the authentication code is correct, the extension process is executed. The extension time in the extension process may be a fixed time or a time obtained by adding a random time randomly selected to the fixed time. When the extension process is completed, the main process of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and the game control is started. On the other hand, also when executing the user reset operation, the values of the core and the internal register of the CPU 304 are initialized. However, the value of the register controlling the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained in the state before the reset. After that, main processing of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 250 (a) to (c), the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the ordinary symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be performed will be described. FIG. 250 (a) shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a special figure.

  The special figure 1 variation game is started on condition that the first start opening sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special drawing starting opening 230, and the ball has entered the second special drawing starting opening 232. The special figure 2 variation game is started on the condition that the second starting opening sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs "variation display of special figure 1" in which all the seven segments are lit up and one central segment is lit up repeatedly. Further, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats "lighting up of 7 segments" and "lighting up of 1 segment in the center" to display "variation display of special figure 2". To do. These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of symbol variable display. Then, when the variation time determined before the start of variation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the variation time determined before the start of variation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of special figure 2. After that, a fixed display for maintaining the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec) is performed.

  Therefore, from the start of the "variable display of special figure 1" until the stop display of the stopped symbol aspect of special figure 1 and the confirmation display is completed, or after the "variable display of special figure 2" is started The stop display of the stop symbol mode of 2 and the end of the confirmation display correspond to an example of the symbol variation display. As will be described later, the variable display of symbols may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In FIG. 250 (a), 10 types of special drawings from “Special drawing 246” to “Special drawing J” are shown as stop symbol modes in the variable display of symbols. In FIG. 250 (a), the white parts in the figure show the positions of the segments that are turned off, and the black parts are the positions of the segments that are turned on.

  "Special drawing 246" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot design, and "special drawing 247" is a 15R jackpot design. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 246, as will be described later, determination of whether or not to be a jackpot in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not to be a special jackpot is performed by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit is the difference in whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, a state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is called a special figure high probability state, and a state in which the probability is low is called a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game and the 15R jackpot game, both shift to the time saving state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the state of transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a universal figure high probability state, and the state of not transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a universal figure low probability state. The 15R special jackpot symbol “Tokuzu 246” is a special symbol high probability general figure high probability state, and the 15R jackpot symbol “Tokuzu 247” is a special symbol low probability general symbol high probability state. These "special figure 246" and "special figure 247" are symbols in which the amount of profit given to the player is a relatively large amount of profit.

  "Special map 248" is a 2R jackpot pattern called sudden change, which is a special map high probability general figure high probability state. That is, the “special drawing 248” is 2R, as compared with the “special drawing 246” which is 15R. "Special drawing 249" is a 2R jackpot design called suddenly shortened working hours, which is a special drawing low probability general figure high probability state. That is, the “special drawing 249” is 2R, as compared with the “special drawing 247” which is 15R.

  "Special map 250" is a 2R jackpot pattern called hidden probability change, and is a special map high probability general figure low probability state. "Special drawing 251" is a 2R jackpot design that is suddenly called normal, and is in a special drawing low probability general figure low probability state. These “special figure 250” and “special figure 251” are both 2R and are in a state where they do not shift to the time saving state.

  "Special figure 252" is the first small hit symbol, "Special figure 253" is the second small hit symbol, and both are in the special figure low probability general figure low probability state. The small hit mentioned here corresponds to the same as the 2R timeless big hit. That is, the "special drawing 252" and the "special drawing 253" are in the same state as the "special drawing 251", but the effects displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 are different between the two, and even in the same state, "special drawing" By providing "252", "special map 253" and "special map 251", the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, "special figure 254" is the first off symbol, "special figure J" is the second off symbol, and the profit amount to be given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 246, symbols other than the "special figure 246" are also prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 250 (b) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decorative patterns, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The first start opening sensor detects that a ball has won the first special drawing starting opening 230 or the second special drawing starting opening 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special drawing starting opening 230, or On the condition that the second starting port sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special figure starting port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” → ... “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” → ... in each symbol display region of the region 208c "Variable display of decorative pattern" is switched. Then, when notifying the 15R jackpot of "special figure 247", a symbol combination in which three identical decorative symbols corresponding to the 15R jackpot are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration" 1 "and" decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2 ") are stopped and displayed. When notifying the 15R special jackpot of "special drawing 246", a pattern combination in which three same odd decorative patterns are arranged (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") , Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, a 2R jackpot called "Hidden probability variation" of "Tokuzu 250", a sudden 2R jackpot called "Tokuzu 251", or a first small hit of "Tokuzu 252", a "Tokuzu 253" When notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when notifying the 2R jackpot which is called a sudden change of "Tokuzu 248", or the 2R jackpot which is called a sudden shortening of "Tokuzu 249", "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" is displayed. Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “special drawing 254” and the second deviation of “special drawing J”, stop symbol combinations other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 248 (b) in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  FIG. 250 (c) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a general figure. There are two kinds of stop display modes of the public figure, "Public figure 246" which is a winning symbol and "Public figure 247" which is a deviating symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. Performs "variable display of general maps". Then, "Public figure 246" is stopped and displayed when the winning of the universal figure fluctuation game is notified, and "Public figure 247" is stopped and displayed when the deviation of the universal figure fluctuation game is notified. Also in FIG. 250 (c), the white parts in the figure show the positions of the segments to be turned off, and the black parts are the positions of the segments to be turned on.

<Main processing of main controller>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, which has received the activation signal, performs a reset start by a reset interrupt and executes a main control unit main process shown in FIG. 251 according to a control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Allows the operation of and sets the initial value. Note that here, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 to a predetermined value (for example, 9v). When it is less than, it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff), the step is performed. It proceeds to S107. Even when the power does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing the main control unit timer interrupt process described later at regular intervals in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, Processing for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether the state before the power is cut off (before the power failure) is restored, and if the state before the power failure is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state) ), The process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is first operated by a clerk of the game store or the like is ON (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary, and when the RAM clear signal is on (when RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not required), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is determined. A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte configuration register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether the checksum result is normal or not) is determined. Then, when the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to restore the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is the specific value. When the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. When the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was cut off. That is, the processing is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 249 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been returned to the state when the power was cut off, and is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, the normal recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting interrupt prohibition, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two general-purpose winning random number counters and two random numbers for initial value generation for generating the initial values of the special-chart random number counter, the general-purpose timer random number value, and the special-chart timer Update two random number counters to generate each random number value. For example, assuming that the numeric value range that can be taken as the universal figure timer random number value is 0 to 100, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure timer random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generating random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The initial value generating random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the timer interrupt process that starts at a predetermined cycle.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 252. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (for example, once in about 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt processing is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Start at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically (for example, the main timer) so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (for example, 32.8 ms) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (not to detect abnormal processing). Restart once every 2 ms, which is the control unit timer interrupt period.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, lower tray full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The presence / absence of a detection signal is input and monitored, and stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sensor 320. Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, the RAM 308 stores information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) of the previous two times in the RAM 308. Is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is stored. ) The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in) is read from the present detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, information about the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previously-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the present detection signal storage area is compared, and It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of No. 1 matches the winning determination pattern information. While one gaming ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly activated at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, each time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, the detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed in step S205 described above. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. Here, in consideration of the erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after the detection signal is absent, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 249 stores winning determination pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a present detection signal). In this step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (for example, there is no previous detection signal, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a present detection signal). Information) indicating that the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special figure starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232 are thrown in, or the general figure starting opening 228 is passed. Judge that there was. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 have been won. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor that detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, there is a winning in the general winning opening 226. However, if the information about the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. The process is branched to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with the winning in the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before last, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single winning, it is not determined that there is a winning until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination clear pattern information, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and then the universal figure winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, The two random number counters for respectively generating the special figure 1 random number value and the special figure 2 random number value are updated. For example, if the numeric range that can be taken as the universal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter makes one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is obtained from a random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value that varies in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter that corresponds to the random number counter for general-purpose winning random value generation. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the universal random number I'll do it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the universal figure winning random number value has made one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for Although the counter for obtaining the random number value of Toku-zu 1 and the counter for obtaining the random number value of Toku-Tetsu 2 are separately provided here, the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, an effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used in the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time to change / stop display the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time to change / stop the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for, the special symbol 2 display symbol update timer, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time for measuring the time to change / stop display the symbol on the second special symbol display device 214 , Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. are updated.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this prize hole counter updating process, when there is a prize in the prize holes 226, 234 or the starting holes 230, 232, 228, the RAM 308 stores a prize ball number storage area for each prize hole or for each starting hole. The value is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In addition, in step S217, prize winning acceptance processing is performed. In this prize receiving process, it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the universal figure starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, it is determined using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. When there is a winning in the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random number value storage circuit 318 stores the random number value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Value is obtained from the special register and the processed value (for example, the obtained value + the value of the R register + 1) is obtained as the special figure 1 winning random number value, and the value is obtained from the random number counter for special figure 1 random value generation, The processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as the special figure 1 random value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area. Only the special figure 1 winning random number value, or both the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value correspond to the starting information of the special figure 1. If there is a winning in the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random number counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 of the random number generation circuit 318. The value is acquired from the value storage register, and the processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as the special figure 2 winning random number value and the value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random number value. Then, the processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as the special figure 2 random value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area. Only the special figure 2 winning random number value, or both the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value correspond to the starting information of the special figure 2.

  Further, when the winning determination process (step S217) is completed, the prefetch process is called. In this prefetching process, first, it is determined whether the number of holdings has increased from the prefetching process executed last time. That is, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 also stores the number of reservations up to now (the number of reservations at the end of the previous timer interrupt process, which will be referred to as the old number of reservations), and the CPU 304 The number of reservations at the time of executing the prefetch processing of this time that has passed the winning determination processing (step S217) is compared with the number of old reservations to determine whether the number of reservations is increasing. If the number of reservations has not increased, this prefetching process ends without prefetching the start information. On the other hand, if the number of reservations has increased, the increase in the random number value random number value of the special figure 1 in the random number storage area of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or the special value of the random number storage area of the special figure 2 is specified. Figure 2 Pre-read the increase in the winning random value. In the prefetching here, only the increment is prefetched, but all may be prefetched. It should be noted that the prefetch here means that the start information is read before the success / failure determination (main lottery), but in the prefetching process thereafter, the word “prefetching” is used as the result of the result of the success / failure determination (main lottery). ) May be used in the sense of reading.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 246 is in one of the control states of the special figure low probability state in which the probability of winning the big hit is relatively low and the relatively high special figure high probability state. It is called that the special map is in high probability state. A probability variation flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. When the probability variation graph is set to ON, the special figure high probability state (during probability variation) is set, and when the probability variation graph is set to OFF, the special figure low probability state is set.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a win / fail pre-determination table used in the prefetching process. In this win / fail pre-determination table, random number ranges are defined separately for the special figure high probability state and the special figure low probability state. When the pre-reading of the special figure 1 winning random number value or the special figure 2 winning random number value is finished, this time, the pre-read special figure 1 winning random number value or special figure 2 winning random number value is in any random number range in the win / fail pre-determination table. Is determined to belong to. That is, referring to the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308, in the case of the special figure low probability state, when the prefetched special figure 1 winning random number value or the special figure winning random number value is within a predetermined numerical value range, it is pre-judged whether or not the winning or failing. The result is pre-determined as "big hit", and if not, the hit / non-judgment result is pre-determined as "miss". In the special figure-related processing (step S229, step S231), which will be described later, the special figure variation game win / loss determination is again performed using the win / loss determination table having the same content as the win / loss advance determination table, and the determination here The result is just the result of the preliminary determination.

  Next, the special figure 1 random number value of the random number value storage area of special figure 1 or the special figure 2 random number value of the random number storage area of special figure 2 which is provided in RAM308 is pre-read. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, a special figure preliminary determination table used in the prefetch process is also stored. In the special figure pre-determination table, the random number range corresponding to each of the 10 types of stop symbol modes (“special figure 246” to “special figure J”) shown in FIG. Depending on which random number range the figure random value belongs to, a special figure prior determination result (which stop symbol aspect shown in FIG. 250 (a) is stopped and displayed) is obtained. In addition, the determination result of the special figure here is also the result of the preliminary determination to the last, and the determination of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure is performed again in the special figure-related processing (step S229, step S231) described later. In addition, you may obtain a special figure prior determination result only when the result of prior determination is a "big hit".

  The pre-reading of the start-up information described above and the pre-judgment using the pre-read start-up information are executed before the success / failure judgment (main lottery) of the special figure-related processing (step S229, step S231) described later. Is.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a pre-reading information temporary storage unit for special figure 1 which is divided into areas for each holding, and a pre-reading information temporary storage section for special figure 2 which is also divided into areas for each holding. Has been. The information indicating the special figure preliminary determination result (which is also the information indicating the special figure and is hereinafter referred to as prefetch information) is stored in the corresponding pending area of the prefetch information temporary storage unit.

  If the number of reservations has not increased, the prefetch information "no reservation" is stored in the corresponding reservation area of the prefetch information temporary storage unit. Further, in the prefetching process here, when the big hit game is in progress, and when the current control state is the electric power support state (the time saving flag is in the on state), the prefetching of the starting information of the special map 1 or the advance reading is performed. No determination is made, and in these cases, "undetermined" information indicating that the pre-determination of the stop symbol based on the start information of the prefetched special figure 1 is not performed corresponds to the prefetch information temporary storage unit. Store in reserved area. That is, based on the fact that the pair of blade members 2321 are not provided in the starting port (the first special figure starting port 230 where the state is a fixed starting region), it is acquired during the big hit game and during the electric support. The preliminary determination based on the started information is not performed, and the result of the preliminary determination is not notified. By doing so, the fairness of the player is ensured. Note that the pre-reading of the starting information itself is not performed, but the pre-reading may be performed and the preliminary determination and the result thereof may not be performed. Further, the pre-reading and the preliminary determination are performed, but the preliminary determination result is notified. There may be no aspect.

  Further, here, the pre-determination is performed by the main control unit 300, but it may be performed by the first sub-control unit 400. For example, the main control unit 300 may perform the advance / non-execution determination, and the first sub-control unit 400 may perform the special figure preliminary determination result, or the first sub-control unit 400 may also perform the advance / non-execution determination. Good.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, and the strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when it is on, it indicates the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 indicate the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 indicate encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221, a universal figure state update process is performed. The universal figure state updating process is one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure. For example, in the general figure state update process in the middle of the general figure variation display (the value of the above-mentioned general figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

  Further, in the public figure state update processing at the timing when the public figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the public figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so as to be in the mode. When the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the display mode of the off symbol. Turn on / off the 7-segment LED. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the universal figure state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal figure stop display is being performed is set in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 confirms either the winning symbol (universal diagram 246 shown in FIG. 250 (c)) or the deviating symbol (universal diagram 247 shown in FIG. 250 (c)). Make a display. Further, after that, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbols that are confirmed and displayed are stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the universal figure variation game.

  If the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on as described later. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). In addition to outputting the signal held in, the information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In addition, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing driving solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the general area non-operation is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is out, the universal figure out flag is turned on as described later. When the normal figure disengagement flag is turned on, even in the normal figure state updating process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period has ended (the timing when the value of the general figure stop time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure inactive is set. In the universal figure state updating process when the ordinary figure is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a universal figure related lottery process is performed. In this universal figure-related lottery process, opening / closing control of the universal figure variation game and the second special figure starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the universal figure is not operating), and the pending universal figure variation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is won or unselected by a random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the above random number storage area. The winning judgment is made, and when the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of no win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit judgment, the value of the random number counter for generating the universal figure timer random number value described above is acquired as the universal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired universal figure timer random number value. One of the times is selected to change the display of the public figure on the public figure display device 210, and the variable display time is stored in the general figure change time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the general figure change display time. It should be noted that the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games is stored in the universal figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this general-use figure hold number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, the special figure state update processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure state update processing for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update processing) is performed (step S225). This special figure 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the state of special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), lighting of the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 The lighting / light-off drive control is performed by repeatedly turning the light off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variation game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the rotation start setting transmission process is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

  Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the first small hit flag, the second small hit flag, the first off flag, the second off flag, the special figure probability variation flag, and the universal figure. Probability fluctuation flags are provided for each. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is on and the universal figure probability variation flag is also on, the special figure 246 and 15R jackpot flags shown in FIG. 250 (a) are on, the special figure probability variation flag is off, and the universal figure probability variation flag is on. Is a special figure 247, 2R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, special figure 248, 2R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, common figure When the probability variation flag is on, the special figure 249, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is also on, and when the universal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure 250, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure Sure When the variation flag is off, the universal figure probability variation flag is also off, the special figure 251, the special small figure 252 when the first small hit flag is on, and the special figure 253 when the second small hit flag is on, The special segment 254 when the first off flag is on, and the special segment 254 when the second off flag is on, so that the 7-segment LED of the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. -Extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214, 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure 246), 15R jackpot symbol (special figure 247), sudden probability variation symbol (special figure 248), sudden shortening symbol (special symbol) 249), hidden probability variation pattern (special figure 250), suddenly normal pattern (special figure 251), first small hitting pattern (special figure 252), second small hitting pattern (special figure 253), first off pattern (special figure) 254), and the fixed display of any one of the first deviating symbols (special figure J). After that, the information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the timer for managing the special figure 2 stop time provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). By this setting, the special display 2 that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the special figure 2 variable game. Further, if the number of shortening times stored in the saving time storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of shortening times, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time saving flag is turned off. Further, even during the big hit game (during the special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the pattern for stopping the variable display is the special figure 2. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that it exists is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described below, and then the process ends.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as described later. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is updated in the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, it waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. For this purpose, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period has ended (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, the door member 234a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234 until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning port 234. In addition to outputting the signal held in, the information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Is set. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state updating process which is started at the timing when the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, decoration The production standby period is shown in the storage area of the production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to stand by while displaying the image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the symbol display device 208 is finished. Set the information. Further, if the universal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the time saving number 100 times is set in the time saving frequency storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the universal figure probability variation flag is set to OFF, neither the time saving number is set in the time saving number storage unit nor the time saving flag is turned ON. The time saving here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit is shortened. If the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the high probability state of universal figure. In the high probability state of the universal figure, compared to the low probability state of the universal figure, there is a high possibility of hitting the variation game of the universal figure. Further, in the general figure high probability state, the variation time of the general figure variation game and the variation time of the special figure variation game are shorter than in the general figure low probability state. Furthermore, in the universal figure high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the universal figure low probability state. In addition, in the universal figure high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the universal figure low probability state. Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the general figure low probability state is maintained. This is a high probability probability state during the big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game, many games in the second special figure starting opening 232 until the game ball enters This is to solve the problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during a jackpot increases and the gambling property increases.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operation is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is out, as will be described later, the off flag is turned on. When the deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Toku-zu 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state updating process when the special figure 2 is not operating, the process moves to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Then, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) about special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, the description thereof will be omitted. Omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure related lottery processing for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special figure-related lottery process corresponds to an example of the winning / disapproving means. Here, too, the special map-related lottery process (special map 2 related lottery process) for the special map 2 is performed first (step S229), and then the special map-related lottery process for the special map 1 (special map 1-related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Special figure 2 related lottery processing, the variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not done, the state of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is inactive and special figure 2 which is suspended Assuming that the number of variable games is 1 or more, it is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random number storage area. Special figure 1 related lottery processing, the variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not done, the state of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is inactive both, and special figure 1 which is being held Assuming that the number of variable games is 1 or more, it is executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random number storage area.

  Regarding these special figure related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special map 2 variation game start condition and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are met at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. If the number of special game 2 variable games to be held is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game to be held are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the determination whether or not the special figure variation game is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is notified. The priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting opening 230. In this example, the special figure variation game with a high advantage (for example, the special figure 2 variation game) is prioritized over the special figure variation game with a low advantage (for example, the special figure 1 variation game). For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the game state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery processing in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (from the earliest (oldest stored) holding position in the random number storage area of special figure 2). A special figure 2 winning random number value and a special figure 2 random number value) are obtained, and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 starting information and the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308. Using the win / loss determination table stored in the ROM 306, it is determined whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a big hit (a win / no decision). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random number value in the obtained special figure 2 starting information and the determined hit / miss judgment result. After the variable display, the symbols (stop symbols) to be stopped and displayed are determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / miss determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 hold number at the time of the hit determination, the obtained random number for determining the special figure variation time, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) of special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

  The main control unit 300 retrieves the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random number storage area, and then erases the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the random number storage area of special figure 2. , 1 is subtracted from the special figure 2 reserved number in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 starting information extracted from the random value storage area of the special figure 2 is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is made based on the special figure 2 starting information stored in this temporary area. You may do it. After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is similarly performed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variation game with a high advantage is started prior to the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, and the hold of the special figure 2 is digested prior to the hold of the special figure 1. The special figure 2 priority variation is taken as an example, but the special figure 1 variable game with a low advantage is started with priority over the special figure 2 variable game with a high advantage, and the special figure 1 is suspended. It may be the special figure 1 priority variation that is preferentially digested over the hold. Also, without prioritizing either the special figure 2 variation game with a high degree of advantage or the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, the special figure variation game relating to the suspension of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started. It may be a change in the starting mouth winning order that starts in order. In the starting mouth winning order variation, the maximum number of reservations is eight regardless of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. Therefore, compared with the priority fluctuation in which the maximum number of reservations is 4 in Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, respectively. It may be possible to raise the upper limit of the number of reservations.

  Further, in the above description, the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special map are not performed depending on the state of one special map, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above special map state update By performing the processing and the special figure-related lottery processing independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, a plurality of special figures may be simultaneously changed. In addition, when a plurality of special maps are simultaneously changed in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery result of each special map, or the lottery result of each special map is displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to individually display the lottery results, or one display may be configured to display the lottery results of a plurality of special symbols. In addition, when fluctuations relating to a plurality of special maps are performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special map whose fluctuation is stopped first may influence the lottery result of the special map whose fluctuation is stopped later.

  In step S233 subsequent to step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The scheduled output information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when on, indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (for example, basic command, symbol fluctuation start command, symbol fluctuation stop command, winning effect start command, finish effect start command, big hit round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, error command such as door opening command, etc. Information that can specify the type of command), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. Further, if the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag or the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. In the case of a symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. are included, and in the case of a winning effect command and an end effect start command, a special character In the case of a big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability change flag, the number of big hit rounds, and the like are included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, whether or not there is a winning at the second special figure starting port 232, and whether or not there is a winning at the variable winning port 234. Including presence or absence.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the values of the 15R jackpot flag and the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery processing, and the special figure 2 related stored in the RAM 308 in the command data are related. The information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure variation games or the second special figure variation games that are held, and the like is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the values of the 15R jackpot flag and the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data stored in the RAM 308, such as the effect control information and the special figure probability variation flag output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period. The value, the information indicating the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game which is withheld, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission processing, the command data stores the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability variation flag. The value, the information indicating the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game which is withheld, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening opening setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game Set the information indicating the number. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game Set the information indicating the number. Further, in this step S233, general command special figure pending increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 for command data, advance notice information (advance notice information, false) (Advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

  Further, when the payout control unit 600 sends a door opening command to the main control unit 300, the door opening command is sent to the first sub control unit 400. The same applies when the door opening command is directly transmitted from the door opening sensor 609 without going through the payout controller 600. Further, when the main control unit 300 directly receives the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609, when the detection signal is transmitted, the door opening command is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting processing, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower plate full tank error. When the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error. Set. Also, by driving various solenoids 332, the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable winning port 234, or the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display via the display circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, various status display units 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 251. Return to.

  On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or a stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as restore data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

<Process of the first sub control unit 400>
Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 253. Note that FIG. 9A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 of FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of the input / output port, initialization processing of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step S311, the detection signal output from the detection unit 710 is detected via the sensor circuit 428 to determine whether or not the chance button 136 has been pressed. As a result of the determination here, when the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is detected, the process of changing the effect data updated in step S309 into the effect data corresponding to the pressing operation of the chance button 136, or the pressing of the chance button 136. When the operation is valid, a process of preparing effect data corresponding to the operation acceptance effect described later is performed.

  In step S313, if the effect data read in step S309 includes an instruction to VDP434, this instruction is output to VDP434 (details will be described later). In step S315, if the effect data read in step S309 contains a command to the sound source IC 416, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if the effect data read in step S309 includes an instruction to various lamps 418, the instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a command to the shielding device 246, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S321, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 (for example, a control command related to effect movable body 224), the setting for outputting this control command is made. After that, the process returns to step S303. If the door opening command is transmitted from the main control unit 300, the door opening command is set to be output to the second sub control unit in step S321.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the first sub control unit 400 when the strobe signal output from the main control unit 300 is detected. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt process. Execute in a cycle.

  In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Stored in the timer variable storage area of. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S503 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, the control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S319, and the effect random number updating process is performed.

  Next, the image control process of step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control processing.

  In step S601, a transfer instruction of image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc., and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605, and if not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for you. In step S605, parameter setting is performed based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, the CPU 404 forms the display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601. , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S609, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the image drawing end is input, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611, and if not, the generation end interrupt signal. Wait for is input. In step S611, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Processing of second sub-control unit 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 254. Note that FIG. 9A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S701 of FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in S701. In this initialization processing, initialization of the input / output port, initialization processing of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether or not a command is received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S707, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed. In step S711, if there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S713, the movable body control process is performed, and then the process returns to step S703. In this movable body control process, when a control command regarding the effect movable body 224 is received from the first sub-control unit 400, various processes corresponding to the control command are performed to control the operation of the effect movable body 224.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the second sub control unit 500 when the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400 is detected. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by the timer interrupt process at a predetermined cycle. Run with.

  In step S901 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 of the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process and the like are performed.

  Subsequently, a game board that can be mounted on the main body 104 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 246 instead of the game board 200 shown in FIG. 248 will be described. In the following description, components having the same names as those of the components described above are designated by the same reference numerals as those used so far.

  FIG. 255 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 to be described from the front. Hereinafter, the difference from the game board 200 shown in FIG. 248 will be mainly described, and description of common items will be omitted.

  The game board 200 shown in FIG. 255 is a so-called right-handed game board. In a game board of a generally known right-handed machine, it can be divided into right-handed and left-handed by changing the strength with which a game ball is launched by the operation of the player. In the game board 200 shown in FIG. 255, the universal figure starting port 228 (gate) and the variable winning port 234 (attacker) are arranged in the right side region, and the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 232 are central regions. It is located in. The second special figure starting port 232 shown in FIG. 255 is of an attacker type, and the door member 2325 in the closed state (difficult to enter the ball) shown in FIG. The ball is in an easy state (open state). By arranging a game nail or the like with respect to the game area 124, it rolls in the first area (left side area in the game area) which is a route to enter the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 232. The game ball to be played is configured such that it is difficult or impossible to enter the universal figure starting port 228 (gate) and the variable winning port 234 (attacker), and conversely, the universal figure starting port 228 (gate) and the variable winning port are configured. A game ball rolling in a second area (right side area in the game area) provided with 234 (attacker) is difficult or not easy to enter the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 232. It is configured to be possible. The present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine 100 equipped with a right-handed gaming board, but can be widely applied to pachinko machines equipped with general gaming boards.

  Further, a special figure display device 213 that serves as both the first special figure display device and the second special figure display device is provided in the lower right portion of the game board 200 shown in FIG. 255. The special figure display device 213 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and when a set of a predetermined LED among the plurality of LEDs is flashing, the special figure 1 is changing and another special LED is changing. When the set is blinking, the special figure 2 is changing, and the result of the judgment of the special figure is displayed by various lighting patterns.

  Also, in the game board 200 shown in FIG. 255, a decorative pattern display device 208 which is a liquid crystal display device, a first movable body 260 which is also a liquid crystal display device, and a chance display are provided in a center case 250 shown by a thick line in the drawing. The second movable body 270 and the POV display 280 which is POV (Persistence Of Vision) means are directly or indirectly attached.

  The decorative pattern display device 208 has a panel 208p which is a display screen and a bezel 208q which is a frame member which supports the panel 208p. The bezel 208q is required to have a certain width along the edge of the panel 208p for the reason of supporting the panel 208p. The decorative pattern display device 208 corresponds to an example of an image display panel. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255, four hold icons h1 to h4 are displayed. The hold icon is an icon indicating that the start of the symbol variation display of the special map or the start of the judgment of success or failure of the special figure is suspended, and the number of the hold icons displayed is basically the number of the special figure variation game. It is the same as the number of reservations. However, there may be a timing at which the number of displayed hold icons does not represent the number of hold before and after the hold is exhausted. The hold icons include the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 and the hold icon of Toku-zu 2, which are displayed separately. The area in which the hold icon is displayed is predetermined and becomes the hold icon display area 208f. However, the location of the hold icon display area 208f may change depending on the effect mode and the game state (probably changed state, etc.). Further, in the example shown in FIG. 255, the hold icons shown on the left side have a hold icon with an older winning timing. Hereinafter, the oldest hold icon is the first hold icon h1, and the second oldest hold icon is the second hold icon. h2, the third oldest hold icon is called the third hold icon h3, and the newest hold icon is called the fourth hold icon h4. Furthermore, the hold icon can give a pre-reading notice about whether the hold is successful or not depending on the display mode. In FIG. 255, the first hold icon h1 and the fourth hold icon h4 are white circle display forms that are the default display forms, and the second hold icon h2 and the third hold icon h3 are prefetch advance notice display forms. . That is, the display mode of the second hold icon h2 is a display mode in which the reliability or expectation of the big hit is marked as "heat", and the display mode of the third hold icon h3 is the reliability of the big hit. The degree or expectation is a display mode of a black circle having a relatively low degree. The reliability or expectation of the big hit here is the reliability or expectation of whether or not the big hit is made in the symbol variation display started when the hold represented by the hold icon is exhausted. In addition, animations associated with the hold icon may occur. For example, an increase animation that is executed when a new hold icon is displayed due to an increase in hold, the order of the hold changes due to the previous hold being exhausted, and the hold icon changes to another display position (for example, left Move animation that is executed when moving to the (adjacent position), change animation that is executed when the display mode of the hold icon changes based on the prefetch result, and when the hold is exhausted and the hold icon is erased. A deletion animation to be executed, a saving animation to be executed when the hold icon of the special figure on the non-priority side is saved when the special figure on the priority side increases in the priority variation machine, and the like may be performed. In addition to the above animation, a standby animation that can be executed independently during a period other than the execution of the above animation (for example, a period during which there is no increase / decrease of the hold or the change of the hold icon) and that can be executed overlapping with the above animation There is. An example of this standby animation is an animation that is performed on the spot without changing the display position (for example, a repeated animation of a constant length animation). Note that each animation of increase, move, change, erase, save, and standby of the hold icon may be executed in duplicate.

  In addition, in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255, the changing icon h0 is displayed on the left side of the first hold icon h1. The area in which the changing icon h0 is displayed is also predetermined and becomes the changing icon display area 208e. However, the location of the changing icon display area 208e may change depending on the effect mode and the game state (probably changed state, etc.). The changing icon h0 is an icon corresponding to the special figure changing game, which is displayed after the hold is exhausted and the special figure changing game is started. That is, the hold icon becomes a changing icon at the same time as the start of the special figure variation game corresponding to the hold icon. More strictly, when the first hold icon h1 with the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area 208f to the moving icon display area 208e, the moving icon is referred to as a moving icon or the moving icon moves. Then it may be expressed. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the changing icon display area 208e is completed may be referred to as a changing icon. The changing icon h0 is displayed in a display size different from the hold icons h1 to h4 (a display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). This may facilitate the identification of the changing icon h0 and the holding icons h1 to h4, but they may have the same size. The changing icon h0 may have a display mode related to the display modes of the hold icons h1 to h4, or may have a completely unrelated display mode. The changing icon h0 can give a notice about whether or not the change is appropriate (a notice of the change) depending on its display mode, and is basically erased at the timing at which the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the changing icon h0 can be regarded as an icon related to holding, and can be considered as a kind of holding icon in the sense that the notification of the winning / failing result of the special figure changing game is held. The erasing timing may be before, at the same timing, or after the timing at which the result of the variation is notified.

  The first movable body 260 also has a panel 260p which is a display screen and a bezel 260b having a certain width. The panel 260p of the first movable body 260 is smaller than the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208. From this size relationship, the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes the main liquid crystal unit, and the first movable body 260 is the sub liquid crystal. Each unit is controlled by the sub control unit side (for example, the first sub control unit 400). This first movable body 260 is provided on the front side (on the player side) of the decorative symbol display device 208 and on the back side of the forefront surface 251 of the center case 250, and is shown in FIG. One movable body 260 overlaps the lower left portion of the decorative pattern display device 208 toward the panel 208p. The position of the first movable body 260 shown in FIG. 255 is the initial position. The first movable body 260 is a position below the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208, and can be lowered to a retracted position (corresponding to an example of a moving position) that does not overlap the panel 208p. The first movable body 260 is visible to the player even in this retracted position. The first movable body 260 can move up and down between an initial position and a retracted position. The mechanism for raising and lowering the first movable body 260 will be described later. The first movable body 260 in the retracted position may be hidden by the forefront surface 251 of the center case 250 to be invisible in a front view.

  A large window portion 252 is provided in the center case 250, and the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208 is located in the window portion 252. However, the lower right portion of the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208 and the like are hidden by the frontmost surface 251 of the center case 250. Further, the left corner portion of the bezel 260b of the first movable body 260 shown in FIG. 255 is also hidden by the forefront surface 251 of the center case 250. The space 253 between the forefront 251 of the center case 250 and the edge of the window 252 is transparent.

  The second movable body 270 is also provided on the front side (on the player side) of the decorative symbol display device 208 and on the back side of the frontmost surface 251 of the center case 250. The second movable body 270 shown in FIG. 255 is partially hidden by the forefront surface 251 of the center case 250, and the position of the second movable body 270 shown in FIG. 255 is the initial position. In the second movable body 270 in the initial position, the lower edge 271 matches the upper edge of the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208. The second movable body 270 can descend to a maximum descending position (corresponding to an example of a moving position) that overlaps a part of the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, the second movable body 270 moves up and down between the initial position and the maximum lowered position by a known mechanism such as a rack and pinion. LEDs are embedded in the second movable body 270, and these LEDs emit light or blink during operation. When the second movable body 270 stops at the maximum lowered position, for example, the LED flashes rapidly. The initial position of the second movable body 270 may be higher than the initial position of the second movable body 270 shown in FIG. 255, and in such a case, the second movable body 270 shown in FIG. 255. Will be located between its initial position and its maximum lowered position.

  The first movable body 260 does not have to be the liquid crystal display device, and may have the same structure as the second movable body 270. On the contrary, the second movable body 270 may be a liquid crystal display device, and both the first movable body 260 and the second movable body 270 may be liquid crystal display devices.

  The POV display 280 is also called a versatile lighter, and the POV display 280 is also provided on the front side (player side) of the decorative pattern display device 208 and on the back side of the front face 251 of the center case 250. Has been. Further, the POV display 280 is provided on the back side of the second movable body 270, and the POV display 280 shown in FIG. 255 is completely hidden by the second movable body 270 in the initial position. The position of the POV display 280 shown in FIG. 255 becomes the initial position of the POV display 280 (a position corresponding to an example of the first position). It should be noted that a position where the whole is hidden by the forefront surface 251 of the center case 250 may be the initial position. The POV display 280 moves from this initial position to a position on the front side of the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208. That is, the POV display 280 can be moved to a position overlapping a part of the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the display on the panel 208p becomes difficult to visually recognize.

  FIG. 256 is a diagram showing the POV display 280 shown in FIG. 255. The figure (a) is an external perspective view of the POV display 280 as seen from the front side (player side), and the figure (b) is a side view of the POV display 280.

  The POV display 280 has an elevating arm 281 and an LED array 282 rotatably attached to the tip of the elevating arm 281. The elevating arm 281 moves up and down by a known mechanism such as a rack and pinion. In the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 256 (a), the LEDs 2821 are arranged in a horizontal row, and the attitude of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 256 (a) is the initial attitude. A motor is built in the tip portion 2811 of the elevating arm 281. The LED array 282 shown in FIG. 256 (a) is connected to the rotation shaft of the motor at the center portion in the left-right direction. The LED array 282 rotates around the central portion as the motor rotates. On the side of the sub-control unit (the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500), one lighting control is performed for each of the plurality of LEDs 2821 arranged in the rotating LED array 282, which is one type of performance data. Based on the data. By doing so, the light emission mode of the plurality of LEDs 2821 changes while the LED array 282 is rotating, and the afterimage is visually recognized by the player. That is, an afterimage of light is generated on the rotation trajectory of each LED 2821, and a pattern is displayed.

  FIG. 257 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism for moving the first movable body 260 shown in FIG. 255, including the first movable body 260 in the initial position described with reference to FIG. 255. (A) is a view seen from the front side (player side), and (b) is a perspective view seen from the back side. Further, FIG. 7C is a perspective view including the first movable body 260 in the retracted position as viewed from the back side.

  FIG. 257 shows a screw shaft driving motor 2671, a screw shaft 2672, a guide shaft 2673, an upper base 2674, a lower base 2675, and a drive unit 268.

  The screw shaft driving motor 2671 is fixed to the center case 250 shown in FIG. 255, and the screw shaft driving motor 2671 is a motor for rotating the screw shaft 2672 extending in the vertical direction.

  The drive unit 268 is provided with a screw shaft nut (not shown) in the vertical direction, and the screw shaft 2672 is screwed into the screw shaft nut and penetrates the drive unit 268 in the vertical direction. The guide shaft 2673 also penetrates the drive unit 268 in the vertical direction.

  The upper base 2674 is fixed to a transparent plate provided in front of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the upper base 2674 itself is arranged in a position that is difficult for the player to see. The upper base 2674 is provided with a sliding bearing for the screw shaft 2672, and the screw shaft 2672 is rotatably passed through the sliding bearing. Further, an upper end of a guide shaft 2673 extending in the vertical direction along with the screw shaft 2672 is fixed to the upper base 2674. Further, the upper base 2674 is provided with a drive unit upper receiving portion 2674a. The drive unit upper receiving portion 2674a projects downward, and the upper surface 268a of the drive unit 268 shown in FIG. 257 (c) abuts on the drive unit upper receiving portion 2674a (see FIG. 257 (b)), so that the first movable portion is moved. The body 260 stops at the initial position.

  The lower base 2675 is fixed to the game board 200. The lower base 2675 is also provided with a sliding bearing for a screw shaft, and the screw shaft 2672 is rotatably passed through the sliding bearing. The lower end of the guide shaft 2673 is fixed to the lower base 2675. Further, the lower base 2675 is provided with a drive unit lower receiving portion 2675a. This drive unit lower receiving portion 2675a projects upward, and the lower surface 268b of the drive unit 268 shown in FIG. 257 (b) abuts the drive unit lower receiving portion 2675a (see FIG. 257 (c)), and the first movable The body 260 stops in the retracted position. The upper limit of the movement range of the first movable body 260 is the position where the upper surface 268a of the drive unit 268 abuts on the drive unit upper receiving portion 2674a (initial position), and the lower limit is the lower surface 268b of the drive unit 268. The position (a retracted position) is in contact with the lower receiving portion 2675a.

  Further, the first movable body 260 can also rotate.

  FIG. 257 (d) is a perspective view showing a state in which the first movable body 260 is rotated 90 degrees in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front side (player side), from the back side.

  Although not shown, the drive unit 268 includes a rotation drive motor, a driven gear, a slip ring, a movement control means, and the like. The movement control means is composed of, for example, one or more of a microprocessor, a programmable IC, an ASIC, a DSP, a ROM, a RAM, an LSI, a communication control circuit, and the like.

  The rotation drive motor allows the first movable body 260 to rotate up to 180 degrees in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front side (player side). It should be noted that rotation is impossible beyond 180 degrees, and rotation in the counterclockwise direction is also impossible.

  When the first movable body 260 has the horizontally long posture shown in FIG. 257 (c) as the initial posture and returns to the initial position, the first movable body 260 returns to this initial posture and then returns to the initial position.

  FIG. 258 is a diagram showing a modification of the drive unit shown in FIG. 257, and is a diagram for explaining the structure of a so-called slip ring.

  258 (a) to 258 (d) are perspective views of the drive unit in the case where the front side (player side) is upward. In the example shown in FIG. 257, the rotation drive motor is incorporated in the drive unit 268, but in this modification, it is incorporated on the back side of the panel 260p of the first movable body 260. The drive unit 268 shown in FIG. 258 has a fixed-side case body 261 that is non-rotatably arranged, and a rotatable-side case body 262 that is rotatably arranged in the fixed-side case body 261. The fixed side case body 261 includes a front side case body 261f and a rear side case body 261r. The fixed case body 261 is provided with a fixed connector 261c. In addition, a rotation shaft fixing hole 262h is provided at the center of the surface of the rotation-side case body 262 that is the front side (player side), that is, the surface that is the first movable body 260 side, and outside thereof. The rotation side connector 262c is arranged. The rotary shaft rotated by the rotation driving motor built in the first movable body 260 is fixed in the rotary shaft fixing hole 262h, and the rotation side case body 262 rotates together with the first movable body 260. .

  In this modification, the first movable body 260 can rotate in a clockwise direction and a counterclockwise direction by a predetermined angle exceeding 180 degrees, for example, can rotate by a predetermined angle exceeding 360 degrees. Or there is no restriction on the rotation angle.

  The state shown in FIG. 258 (a) is a diagram showing the state of the drive unit 26 when the first movable body 260 is in the initial posture in which the first movable body 260 is horizontally long, and FIG. 258 (b) shows the state of the first movable body 260. Is a diagram showing a state of the drive unit 26 when is rotated 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the initial posture, and FIG. 7C is a diagram showing that the first movable body 260 is further rotated 90 degrees in the clockwise direction ( It is a figure which shows the state of the drive unit 26 at the time of 180 degree rotation from an initial attitude | position, and the figure (d) shows that the 1st movable body 260 further rotates 90 degrees clockwise (270 degree | times from an initial attitude). It is a figure which shows the state of the drive unit 26 when it rotated. From these figures, it can be seen that the rotating case body 262 is rotating.

  FIG. 258 (e) is a diagram showing the internal structure of the rear case body 261r that constitutes the fixed case body 261, and FIG. 258 (f) shows the rotation with the front case body 261f that constitutes the fixed case body 261. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the side case body 262. That is, the edge R of the rear case body 261r shown in FIG. 258 (e) and the inner side surface F of the front case body 261f shown in FIG. The drive unit 26 shown in a) is obtained. Note that the fixed-side connector 261c is placed on the edge R of the rear-side case body 261r shown in FIG. 258 (e), and when the rear-side case body 261r and the front-side case body 261f are combined, the fixed-side connector 261c. Is sandwiched by the notch groove 261g provided in the front case body 261f.

  In the rear case body 261r shown in FIG. 258 (e), a rotary shaft insertion hole 261h is provided at the center. A fixed-side board 261b connected to the fixed-side connector 261c is arranged outside the rotary shaft insertion hole 261h, and six J-shaped conductive plates 2611 to 2616 are provided on the fixed-side board 261b. It is arranged. That is, on the right side, three relatively short conductive plates 2611 to 2613 are arranged side by side in the same direction (the direction in which the letter J is rotated 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction). In the following, among these three short conductive plates 2611 to 2613, the conductive plate shown at the bottom in FIG. 258 (e) is referred to as a first conductive plate 2611, and the conductive plate thereon is the second conductive plate 2612. The uppermost conductive plate may be referred to as a third conductive plate 2613. Further, on the left side, three relatively long conductive plates 2614 to 2616 are arranged side by side in the same direction (the direction in which the letter J is rotated 90 degrees in the clockwise direction). Hereinafter, among these three long conductive plates 2614 to 2616, the conductive plate shown at the top in FIG. And the bottom conductive plate may be referred to as a sixth conductive plate 2616. The middle portion of the R portion of each conductive plate 2611 to 2616 is provided with a fastener 261m which is a protrusion of the detachment prevention insulator, and the end portion of the R portion mainly includes the protrusion of the rotation prevention insulator. A fastener 261e is provided.

  The rotating side case body 262 shown in FIG. 258 (f) is seen from the opposite side (back side) to the rotating side case body 262 shown in FIG. 258 (a), etc., and is a circular rotating side case body 262. A rotation shaft fixing hole 262h is shown at the center of the circle, and an edge 262e of the rotation side case body 262 is shown at the outermost circumference. As is clear from FIG. 258 (f), a gap is provided between the outer circumference of the rotation-side case body 262 and the inner peripheral surface of the front-side case body 261f. Further, a rotation-side board 262b is arranged inside the edge 262e of the rotation-side case body 262, and the rotation-side board 262b has six concentric wirings centering on the rotation shaft fixing hole 262h. Patterns 2621 to 2626 are formed. Hereinafter, the outermost wiring pattern is referred to as a first wiring pattern 2621, the inner wiring pattern is referred to as a second wiring pattern 2622, and the number increases toward the inner side, and the innermost wiring pattern is the sixth wiring. It may be referred to as a pattern 2626. Note that the dotted line shown in FIG. 258 (f) represents the rotation-side connector 262c (see FIG. (A), etc.) provided on the surface that becomes the front side (player side), and is the rotation-side board. 262b is connected to the rotation side connector 262c.

  FIG. 258 (g) is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 258 (e). As shown in FIG. 258 (g), before the rear case body 261r and the front case body 261f are combined, the first conductive plate 2611 and the first wiring pattern 2621 are separated from each other, and no electrical contact is established. ..

  FIG. 258 (g) is a cross-sectional view showing a state after the rear case body 261r and the front case body 261f are combined, and the first conductive plate 2611 is elastically deformed and is always in contact with the first wiring pattern 2621. Therefore, the two 2611 and 2621 can always be kept in electrical contact with each other regardless of whether they are rotating or stopped.

  Here, the combination of the first conductive plate 2611 and the first wiring pattern 2621 has been described as an example, but the same applies to other combinations of the second conductive plate 2612 and the second wiring pattern 2621.

  The first conductive plate 2611 and the first wiring pattern 2621 are used for power supply used in a circuit (for example, a circuit of the first movable body 260) provided on the rotation side, and the second conductive plate 2612 and the second conductive plate 2612 are used. The wiring pattern 2622 is also the same. The third conductive plate 2613 and the third wiring pattern 2623 are used to connect the GND of the rotation side circuit and the GND of the fixed side circuit (for example, the circuit on the game board 200 side), and the fourth conductive plate 2614 and The same applies to the fourth wiring pattern 2624. The fifth conductive plate 2615 and the fifth wiring pattern 2625 are used for transmitting various signals transmitted from the fixed side circuit to the rotation side circuit, and the sixth conductive plate 2616 and the sixth wiring pattern 2626 are also the same. is there.

  The fixed side that is the game board 200 side and the rotation side that is the first movable body 260 side are the fixed side connector 261c-the fixed side substrate 261b-the conductive plates 2611 to 2616-the wiring patterns 2621 to 2626-the rotation side substrate 262b-. It is electrically connected through the path of the rotation side connector 262c, and power supply and signal transmission / reception are possible even during rotation or stop.

  Next, a further modified example of the drive unit will be described.

  FIG. 259 is a diagram showing a modification of the drive unit shown in FIG. 258. In this modification, the power supply is exchanged by a so-called slip ring structure, and signals are transmitted by optical communication. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals as those used so far will be used for the components having the same names as the components of the drive unit described with reference to FIG. 258, and the differences will be mainly described.

  FIG. 259 (a) shows a perspective view of the drive unit with the front side (player side) facing upward. As is clear from FIG. 259 (a), in this modified example, the rotary shaft fixing hole 262h provided at the center of the rotary case body 262 is eliminated, and the three rotary body connecting shafts 263 are replaced by the rotary case. It is fixed to the body 262. These three rotating body connecting shafts 263 are arranged at the vertices of an equilateral triangle having the center of the rotating side case body 262 as the center of gravity, and the three rotating body connecting shafts 263 are all or part of the first rotating body connecting shaft 263. The rotational force generated on the movable body 260 side is transmitted to the rotating-side case body 262.

  FIG. 259 (b) is a diagram showing the internal structure of the rear case body 261r in this modification, and FIG. 259 (f) is the internal structure of the front case body 261f and the rotating case body 262 in this modification. FIG. In this modification, instead of the rotary shaft insertion hole 261h provided at the center of the rear case body 261r, a fixed-side data transmitting / receiving unit 261t by optical communication is provided. Further, of the three relatively long conductive plates 2614 to 2616, the fourth conductive plate 2614, which is the uppermost conductive plate, is left and the remaining two conductive plates (fifth conductive plate 2615, sixth conductive plate 2616). ) Is lost. Further, in this modified example, instead of the rotation shaft fixing hole 262h, a rotation data transmission / reception unit 262t by optical communication is provided in the center of the back surface of the rotation case body 262. Further, the sixth wiring pattern 2626, which is the innermost wiring pattern, and the fifth wiring pattern 2625, which is the outermost wiring pattern, are also removed in accordance with the conductive plate.

  FIG. 259 (d) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 259 (b), and in this modified example as well, before the rear case body 261r and the front case body 261f are combined, the first conductive plate 2611 and the first wiring are connected. It is separated from the pattern 2621 and no electrical contact is established.

  FIG. 259 (e) is a cross-sectional view showing a state after the rear case body 261r and the front case body 261f are combined, and in this modification also, the first conductive plate 2611 is elastically deformed and the first wiring pattern 2621 is formed. 2611 and 2621 are always in contact with each other, and both of them 2611 and 2621 can be kept in contact with each other electrically even during rotation or stop.

  The first conductive plate 2611 and the first wiring pattern 2621 are used for power supply used in a circuit (for example, a circuit of the first movable body 260) provided on the rotation side, and the second conductive plate 2612 and the second conductive plate 2612 are used. The wiring pattern 2622 is also the same. The third conductive plate 2613 and the third wiring pattern 2623 are used to connect the GND of the rotation side circuit and the GND of the fixed side circuit (for example, the circuit on the game board 200 side), and the fourth conductive plate 2614 and The same applies to the fourth wiring pattern 2624.

  The data communication transmitted from the fixed-side data transmitting / receiving unit 261t shown in FIG. 259 (b) and received by the rotating-side data transmitting / receiving unit 262t shown in FIG. 259 (b) is optical communication (optical wireless communication). The optical communication (optical wireless communication) here is communication using laser light, but may be communication using LED light. The data communication here is communication of various signals (for example, image data or RGB information of each dot). When the rotation side (the first movable body 260 side) is equipped with the image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.) and the microcomputer for controlling the image control means, the fixed side sub-control means ( For example, from the first sub-control unit 400 and the production control means), various production signals (commands for designating production, production progress, still image, moving image, progress of image display scenario, etc.) for the microcomputer are sent to the various signals described above. May be sent as. If the microcomputer for controlling the image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.) is not mounted on the rotation side, but the image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.) is mounted, the fixed side Image commands (commands for designating the progress of a still image, a moving image, an image display scenario, etc.) from the microcomputer for controlling the image control means provided in It may be transmitted as a signal. Furthermore, the image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.) and the microcomputer are not mounted on the rotation side, but they are mounted on the fixed side, and the image drive control means (liquid crystal drive means, etc.) on the rotation side. May be mounted, in which case, from the image control means provided on the fixed side to the image drive control means on the rotation side (such as liquid crystal drive means), image data, as the various signals, For example, the transmission may be performed a predetermined number of times such as 30 times or 60 times per second.

  The fixed-side data transmitting / receiving unit 261t and the rotating-side data transmitting / receiving unit 262t may be capable of transmitting / receiving data. Also, radio communication may be used instead of optical communication.

  When both the fixed-side data transmission / reception unit 261t and the rotation-side data transmission / reception unit 262t are used for signal transmission / reception, the data transmitted from the fixed-side data transmission / reception unit 261t to the rotation-side data transmission / reception unit 262t is as described above. However, from the rotation side data transmitting / receiving unit 262t to the fixed side data transmitting / receiving unit 261t, control means and the like (the image control means, the microcomputer, the image driving means (liquid crystal driving means), etc. provided in the rotation side circuit. ACK signal, status signal, and information indicating the rotation angle of the rotating body (here, the first movable body 260) (for example, when the sensor provided on the rotating side detects the detection piece provided on the fixed side). The output detection signal or the output signal of the encoder provided on the rotation side) may be transmitted.

  FIG. 259 (f) is a diagram showing an example in which the number of rotating body connecting shafts 263 shown in FIG. 259 (a) is one. In FIG. 259 (f), one rotating body connecting shaft 263 is fixed to the center of the rotating case body 262, and the rotating side data transmitting / receiving unit 262t shown in FIG. 259 (c) is provided on the back side thereof. Has been.

  FIG. 259 (g) is a diagram showing an example in which the number of rotary body connecting shafts 263 shown in FIG. 259 (a) is two. In this FIG. 259 (g), each of the two rotary body connecting shafts 263 is fixed at a position facing the center of the rotary side case body 262 and equidistant from each other by 180 degrees.

  Subsequently, one of the features of the present invention will be described.

  FIG. 260 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of effects in a pachinko machine provided with the game board 200 shown in FIG. 255. In this figure, the sequence proceeds from (a) to (z), and from (z) to (a) to (g). In FIG. 260, a decorative pattern display device 208 which becomes a main liquid crystal unit, a first movable body 260 which becomes a sub liquid crystal unit, a second movable body 270 indicated as a chance, and a POV display 280 are shown. . In the outline of the effect shown in FIG. 260, an image is displayed by the POV display 280 as a prefetching notice, a confrontation animation is performed on the POV display 280 in the design change subject to the prefetching notice, and the character of the hero (lord) finally Win and hit big. And so on. The details will be described below.

  In FIG. 260 (a), the first movable body 260 is in the initial position and hides a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The second movable body 270 is also in the initial position. The POV display 280 is also in the initial position behind the second movable body 270, and the POV display 280 is invisible to the player. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (a), the combination of the decorative pattern loss ("decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2") is stopped and displayed on the sky background image. Further, four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and this state is a state where four hold of special figure 2 are accumulated. Note that this state may be a state in which four reservations of Toku-zu 1 are accumulated. Of the four hold icons, only the second hold icon h2 is not the default display mode, but the black rhombus prefetch notice display mode. In this black rhombus look-ahead notice display mode, the jackpot reliability is higher than the black circle look-ahead notice display mode in the third hold icon h3 shown in FIG. 255, and the “heat” in the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. The display mode is lower than the display mode of the pre-reading notice described as ". Only the background image of the sea is displayed on the first movable body 260 shown in FIG. 260 (a).

  In FIG. 260 (b), one hold is exhausted, and the special symbol display device 213 shown in FIG. 255 starts the variable display of the special symbol. In response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (b), the first holding icon h1 moved to the changing icon display area is displayed as a changing icon h0, and the remaining holding icons are moved one by one to the left. . As a result, the first hold icon h1 is in the display form of the black diamond-shaped prefetching notice.

  In FIG. 260 (c), the first movable body 260 has moved to the retracted position, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has developed into the reach state. Also, the POV display 280 begins preparation for operation. The preparation for the operation here means a mechanism in which the lifting arm 281 shown in FIG. 256 is engaged with a pinion gear of a rack-and-pinion mechanism for lifting and lowering the lifting arm 281. Preparation, or the sub-control unit (the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500) performs a lottery as to whether or not to operate the POV display 280, or creates effect data for controlling the POV display 280. This may be a program preparation for performing a selection lottery or reading the effect data. The preparation for the operation may be started in response to the start of the operation of moving the first movable body 260 to the retracted position, or in response to the arrival of the first movable body 260 in the retracted position. It may be started or may be started in response to the fact that the decorative pattern display device 208 has reached the reach state.

  In FIG. 260 (d), the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 disappears, and the combination of decorative symbols in the reach state also disappears. Therefore, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (d), the changing icon h0 and the three hold icons are displayed on the unpatterned background. Further, the background image disappears even on the first movable body 260 that has moved to the retracted position, and on this first movable body 260, a combination of decorative symbols in the reach state is displayed. The combination of the decorative patterns in the reach state can be seen as if the decorative pattern display device 208, which is the main liquid crystal unit, is retracted to the first movable body 260, which is the sub liquid crystal unit. The POV display 280 is preparing for operation even at the timing of FIG. 260 (d).

  In FIG. 260 (e), the POV display 280 appears from the back side of the second movable body 270. That is, the LED array 282, which maintains the horizontal posture, which is the initial posture, descends to the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208 together with the elevating arm 281. At this time, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a row in the LED array 282 are on, but they may be blinking or may be off. When the LEDs are lit or blinking, the appearance of the LED array 282 is appealing. On the other hand, when the LEDs are off, the appearance of the LED array 282 is still hidden.

  In FIG. 260 (f), the POV display 280 continues to descend, and in FIG. 260 (g), the LED array 282 reaches the operation start position (corresponding to the third position, and the same hereafter). The operation start position here is just the center position of the panel 208p in the decorative pattern display device 208. The plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array 282 may start lighting or blinking when the LED array 282 reaches the operation start position, or may continue lighting or blinking from the time when the LED array 282 appears. However, it may remain off even when the operation start position is reached.

  In FIG. 260 (h), the LED array 282 starts rotating in the counterclockwise direction at the operation start position, and in FIG. 260 (i), the LED array 282 is in the process of accelerating rotation. The plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array 282 may start lighting or blinking when the LED array 282 starts rotating, or may start lighting or blinking after reaching a certain rotation speed. Good. Further, the rotation area s of the LED array 282 overlaps all or part of the changing icon h0 and the hold icon. That is, as shown in FIG. 260 (i), the changing icon h0 entirely overlaps the rotation area s of the LED array 282, and part of the first hold icon h1 also overlaps the rotation area s of the LED array 282. There is. Note that the second hold icon h2 and the subsequent hold icons do not overlap.

  In FIG. 260 (j), the LED array 282 has finished the accelerated rotation and has shifted to the constant speed rotation. When the LED array 282 shifts to a constant speed rotation, it is possible to display a pattern due to the afterimage effect, but at the timing of FIG. 260 (j), the pattern is not yet displayed. The image due to the afterimage effect may be displayed at the same time when the constant speed rotation is reached, or the pattern due to the afterimage effect can be displayed before the constant speed rotation is reached and the pattern is displayed before the constant speed rotation is reached. You may.

  On the POV display 280 shown in FIG. 260 (k), the display of the design k of the character of the samurai who is the enemy is started. Note that the first movable body 260 may operate and the second movable body 270 may operate at this timing.

  In FIG. 260 (l), the special symbol display device 213 shown in FIG. 255 displays a stopped stop pattern (lighting pattern), and the panel 260p of the first movable body 260 is displayed according to the display of the stop symbol of the special map. A combination of the decorative patterns with a loss ("decoration 3"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 3") is displayed.

  In FIG. 260 (m), the hold represented by the first hold icon h1 which has been the display mode of the black rhombic look-ahead notice until now is consumed, and the special display device 213 shown in FIG. 255 starts the variable display of the special map. In response to the start of the variable display of the special figure, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the panel 260p of the first movable body 260. That is, the variable display of the symbols, which was the target of the pre-reading notice, is started. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (m), although it is difficult to visually recognize due to the rotating LED array 282, the first hold icon h1 which has been the display mode of the black diamond-shaped prefetching notice until now is a black diamond notice. The pending icons that are displayed as the changing icon h0 of the aspect and have moved to the left have moved one by one. That is, the variable display of the special figure (variable display of the decorative pattern) started in FIG. 260 (m) has been executed by changing the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the read-ahead notice until now. This is a variable display of the target. The black rhombus notice mode, which is the display mode of the changing icon h0, is a display mode that gives a notice of a big hit in the current symbol fluctuation display started here. Further, in this example, the rotation area s of the LED array 282, that is, the display on the POV display 280 (display of the design k of the character of the enemy samurai) is continued across the variable display.

  In FIG. 260 (n), a combination of reachable decorative symbols is displayed on the panel 260p of the first movable body 260, and in FIG. 260 (o), the second movable body 270 that has been in the initial position so far is displayed. It descends to the maximum descending position, overlaps with a part of the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208, and also overlaps with the rotating LED array 282. Only part of it is invisible. When the second movable body 270 descends to the maximum lowered position, it immediately returns to the initial position, and the second movable body 270 shown in FIG. 260 (p) has returned to the initial position. As a result, the display of the design k of the enemy samurai character displayed on the POV display 280 can be visually recognized again.

  In FIG. 260 (q), the LED array 282 that was rotating at the operation start position further descends, and the rotation area s of the LED array 282 overlaps the lower end portion of the bezel 208q of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in FIG. 260 (q), all the changing icons h0 and the holding icons are erased in a state where all the changing icons h0 and the holding icons overlap the rotation area s of the LED array 282. That is, when the LED array 282 starts moving from the operation start position (first operation position) toward the second operation position different from the initial position, all of the changing icon h0 and the hold icon are erased. . However, only the changing icon h0 may be deleted, only the hold icon may be deleted, and neither the changing icon h0 nor the hold icon may be deleted. Further, the rotation region s of the LED array 282 also overlaps a part of the first movable body 260 including the bezel 260b.

  The movement of the POV display 280 (the LED array 282 that rotates at a constant speed) displaying the pattern k of the character of the enemy samurai may be performed without fail when the POV display 280 displays the pattern, or the POV display 280. May be performed without fail when the vehicle is rotating at a constant speed without displaying a design, or may be performed only when the POV display 280 displays a predetermined design. However, it may or may not be performed depending on the selection lottery result regarding the effect on the sub-control unit side (the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500).

  FIG. 261 (a) is an enlarged view of FIG. 260 (q), and FIG. 261 (b) is a view of the display area hatched.

  The rotating area s of the LED array 282 overlaps with the lower end portion of the bezel 208q in the decorative pattern display device 208 and a portion including the bezel 260b of the first movable body 260, thereby passing through the POV display 280. It seems that the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208 and the panel 260p of the first movable body 260 are connected to each other, and the three parties (280, 208p, 260p) are different in arrangement in the front-back direction (depth direction). It becomes integrated (see the display area indicated by hatching in FIG. 261 (b)), and it seems that the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 is enlarged or the display area of the POV display 280 is enlarged. It seems that the display area of the first movable body 260 is enlarged. In this way, the fact that the display is performed even in a place where the display is not originally performed, such as the bezels 208q and 260b, can give a great visual effect to the player.

  Note that, here, since the upper edge 260bu of the bezel 260b of the first movable body 260 matches the lower edge 208pd of the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208, the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first edge The panel 260p of the movable body 260 is separated by the bezel 260b of the first movable body 260, but the two 208p and 260p are connected by the rotation area s of the LED array 282. Further, even if the first movable body 260 is located a little further downward, the rotating region s of the LED array 282 connects the two 208p and 260p to be integrated.

  Further, the bangs portion k1 of the design k of the character of the enemy samurai character is displayed on the panel p of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the foot portion k2 is displayed on the panel 260p of the first movable body 260. That is, the design k of the character of the enemy samurai is displayed across three of the POV display 280, the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the panel 260p of the first movable body 260. This also increases the sense of unity in the display areas of the three parties (280, 208p, 260p). Moreover, when viewed in the front-rear direction (depth direction), the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208 is on the farthest side, the POV display 280 is on the foremost side, and the panel 260p of the first movable body 260 is provided therebetween. Since there is a gap in the depth direction between these three members (208p, 280, 260p), the bangs part k1 looks considerably behind, and the foot part k2 looks a little behind. It is possible to give a sense of depth that is incomparable to the picture display.

  On the POV display 280 (rotation area s of the LED array 282) shown in FIG. 260 (p), the display position (center position of the rotation area s) of the design k of the character of the enemy samurai and the POV shown in FIG. It is different from the display position (the position near the left end of the rotation area s) of the design k of the enemy samurai character on the display 280 (the rotation area s of the LED array 282). It looks like it has moved. That is, the moving display of the pattern is being performed.

  In FIG. 260 (r), after the LED array 282 has risen diagonally to the upper left, horizontal movement is started. The rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 260 (r) overlaps the left end portion of the bezel 208q in the decorative symbol display device 208. On the POV display 280, since the display of the design k of the character of the enemy samurai is started in FIG. 260 (k), the display is continued, and in this FIG. 260 (r), the design k is still displayed. , The LED array 282 moves. Further, in the portion of the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (r), which is behind the rotating LED array 282, the display of the pattern t of the character of the main character is started, but it is rotated. The LED arrays 282 overlap and are difficult to see.

  In FIG. 260 (s), as the LED array 282 moves to the right, a part of the display of the design t of the character of the main character displayed on the panel 208p of the decorative design display device 208 is beginning to be seen. .. That is, in FIG. 260 (s), the rotation area s of the LED array 282 overlaps a part of the design t of the lord's character displayed on the decorative design display device 208.

  In FIG. 260 (t), by further moving the LED array 282 to the right, the entire display of the design t of the character of the main character appears on the panel 208p of the decorative design display device 208. The design t of the lord's character corresponds to an example of the first design, and the display of the design t corresponds to an example of the first effect display. It should be noted that only a part of the design t of the lord's character may correspond to an example of the first design. Alternatively, on the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208, in addition to the design t of the lord's character, another design (for example, a design of a horse or a character design of a game) may be displayed. It is good also as an example of the first effect display including "the pattern". The rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 260 (t) overlaps the right end of the bezel 208q in the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, the POV display 280 has moved to beyond the display area (area of the panel 208p) of the decorative symbol display device 208, and overlaps with the right end of the bezel 208q, so that the panel 208p and the POV of the decorative symbol display device 208 are overlapped. It seems that the display 280 is connected, and both (280, 208p) are integrated although there is a difference in the arrangement in the front-back direction (depth direction), and the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 is enlarged to the right. Looks like.

  In FIG. 260 (u), the LED array 282 further moves downward, and the rotation area s of the LED array 282 overlaps not only the right end of the bezel 208q of the decorative pattern display device 208 but also the lower end part thereof. . As a result, it seems that the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is expanded to the lower side in addition to the right side. From FIG. 260 (r) to FIG. 260 (u), the display position of the design k of the enemy samurai character on the moving POV display 280 (rotation area s of the LED array 282) is the center position of the rotation area s. Match with. However, since the POV display 280 (the rotation area s of the LED array 282) itself is moving, the pattern k also appears to be moving. That is, the moving display of the pattern is being performed.

  In FIG. 260 (v), the display of the design t of the lord's character displayed on the panel 208p of the decorative design display device 208 moves to the right. Then, a part of the display t of the character of the lord's character (here, the toes of the right foot, etc.), which has been displayed only on the panel 208p, is displayed in the rotation area s of the LED array 282. become. That is, the display of the design t of the lord's character is displayed across both the decorative design display device 208 and the POV display 280. As described above, the rotating area s of the LED array 282 overlaps the right end and the lower end of the bezel 208q of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208 expands to the lower side in addition to the right side. Since it looks like, the display of the design t of the lord's character displayed across both (208, 280) seems to be integrated, but between both (208, 280) the front-back direction ( Since there is a difference (distance) in the arrangement in the depth direction, it is possible to give a sense of depth to the display of the design t of the lord's character, as compared with the case of a simple three-dimensional design display. That is, since the POV display 280 is arranged in front of the decorative pattern display device 208, it looks as if the lord's character is moving diagonally forward to the right, and the player gradually sees the lord's character. Feel like approaching.

  In FIG. 260 (w), a confrontation animation between the lord's character and the enemy samurai character is displayed. Here, the display of the design t of the lord's character is not completely moved to the POV display 280, and the toes of the left foot are displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. In the POV display 280 shown in FIG. 260 (w), the character of the samurai character who is the enemy is lying down, and the pattern t of the lord's character displayed across the decorative pattern display device 208 and the POV display 280 has won. It is displayed. In addition, in the panel 260p of the first movable body 260, a combination of jackpot decorative patterns (here, "decoration 2"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2") is selected in accordance with the victory of the design t of the lord's character. The shaking display (temporary stop display) is started.

  In FIG. 260 (x), the display of the design t of the lord's character is completely moved to the POV display 280, and the entire display of the design t of the lord's character is displayed on the POV display 280. The entire display of the design t of the lord's character is displayed on the left side of the rotation area s of the LED array 282. In addition, the display of the pattern k of the character of the samurai character who is the enemy has disappeared.

  In FIG. 260 (y), the LED array 282 starts moving toward the operation start position at the upper left, and the rotation area s of the LED array 282 moves. That is, the POV display 280 in which the entire display of the design t of the lord's character is displayed starts moving toward the upper left. At this time, the relative display position in the horizontal direction of the display of the design t of the lord's character is displayed so as not to change. That is, in FIG. 260 (y), the entire display of the design t of the lord's character is displayed on the right side of the rotation area s of the LED array 282, and the rotation area s of the LED array 282 moves toward the upper left. On the other hand, the entire display of the design t of the lord's character displayed in the rotation area s is displayed so as to move to the right. On the other hand, the relative display position in the up-down direction of the display of the design t of the lord's character is changing, and the entire display of the design t of the lord's character is moved to the upper left of the rotation area s of the LED array 282. In addition, it is displayed so as to move upward. It should be noted that the relative display position in the vertical direction of the display of the character t of the lord's character may be displayed so as not to change. In this case, the entire display of the pattern t of the lord's character is displayed on the LED array 282. Although it is moving within the rotation area s, it is recognized by the player as relatively stationary.

  The display of the pattern t of the character of a part or all of the lord displayed in the rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 260 (v) to (y) corresponds to an example of the second effect display. . It should be noted that in the rotation area s of the LED array 282, in addition to the design t of the lord's character, another design (for example, a design of a horse or a character design of a game) may be displayed. It may be an example of the second effect display including the “pattern”.

  In FIG. 260 (z), the LED array 282 stops moving, the rotation is decelerated at the operation start position, and the display of the design t of the lord's character disappears from the POV display 280. However, on the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208, at the position on the back side of the rotation area s of the LED array 282 at the operation start position, the same pattern as the pattern t of the lord's character that has been displayed on the POV display 280 (the lord). The pattern in which the character is taking the same pose) is started to be displayed. In addition, from the stage where a part of the display t of the character of the lord's character in FIG. 260 (v) is displayed on the POV display 280, the same display of the part displayed on the POV display 280 may be started at the back side position. Then, from the stage where the entire display of the design t of the lord's character in FIG. 260 (x) moves to the POV display 280, the same display of the entire display may be started at the back side position.

  In FIG. 260 (a), the rotation of the LED array 282 is stopped in the initial posture, and the display of the design t of the lord's character displayed at the back position is visible. In FIG. 260 (b), the LED array is displayed. 282 rises toward the initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270. When the LED array 282 starts to rise toward the initial position, all the display of the changing icon h0 and the hold icon, which have disappeared so far, are restored. Note that these displays may be restored in response to the rotation of the LED array 282 being stopped. The changing icon h0 whose display has been restored here is a black rhombus notice mode. In FIG. 260 (c), the POV display 280 has returned to the initial position. It should be noted that, in the panel 260p of the first movable body 260 started in FIG. 260 (w), a swing display (temporary display) of a combination of the jackpot decorative patterns (“decoration 2”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 2”) The stop display) continues until this stage.

  In FIG. 260 (d), the decorative design that has been displayed on the panel 260p of the first movable body 260 so far is restored to the panel 208p of the decorative design display device 208, and the jackpot is hit on the panel 208p of the decorative design display device 208. The swing display (temporary stop display) of the combination of the decorative patterns ("decoration 2"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2") is performed. Further, along with this restoration, the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 also returns to the sky background image, and the background image of the first movable body 260 also returns to the background image of the sea. Although the decorative design is not displayed on the first movable body 260, the decorative design may be displayed together with the decorative design display device 208.

  In FIG. 260 (e), the first movable body 260, which has been in the retracted position until now, returns to the initial position. In the special figure display device 213 shown in FIG. 255, the variable display of the special figure is finished, the big hit stop symbol (lighting pattern) is displayed, and according to the display of the special symbol stop symbol, it is shown in FIG. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the shaking display (temporary stop display) of the combination of the large-decoration decorative patterns (“decoration 2”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 2”) ends, and the final display (stop display) is displayed. That is, the variable display of the notice target of the prefetch notice ends, and the jackpot pattern is displayed. In FIG. 260 (g), the jackpot character for notifying the jackpot is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a picture of a dedicated character that appears when it develops into super reach, a picture of a character that appears during a big hit game, etc. These pictures are examples of the second picture. Equivalent to.

  In the example shown in FIG. 260 described above, the rotation area s of the LED array 282, that is, the pattern is displayed on the POV display 280, and the display of the pattern on the POV display 280 may be hereinafter referred to as a verser notice. .. Even if the Versa notice is executed during execution of the symbol variation, even if it is configured such that the jackpot pattern mode is finally confirmed and displayed more easily in the symbol variation than when it is not executed. Good. That is, the reliability (expectation) of the jackpot becomes high (hereinafter the same). In addition, in the case where any one of the symbol fluctuations held at the time when this versa notice is executed is started, It may be configured so that the jackpot pattern mode is finally definitely displayed, or is finally configured so that the deviating pattern mode is always definitely displayed in the symbol variation in which this Versa notice is not executed. May be. Alternatively, when one of the symbol fluctuations held at the time this Versa notice is executed is started, the jackpot pattern mode is likely to be finally confirmed or displayed. May be configured.

  Further, during execution of the symbol variation, when the POV display 280 appears as shown in FIG. 260 (e), the jackpot symbol aspect is finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation than when it does not appear. It may be configured to be easily done, and when any one of the symbol fluctuations held at the time of appearance of the POV display 280 is started, the big hit symbol mode is always definitely displayed. It may be configured to be performed, or may be configured such that the final deviating symbol aspect is always definitely displayed in the symbol variation in which the POV display 280 does not appear. Alternatively, when one of the symbol fluctuations held at the time of appearance of the POV display 280 is started, the jackpot symbol mode is likely to be finally fixedly displayed, or the like. It may be configured.

  Further, during execution of the symbol variation, the case where the second movable body 270 operates as shown in FIG. 260 (o) is finally determined in the symbol variation in the symbol variation as compared with the case where it does not operate. It may be configured so as to be easily displayed, and when any one of the symbol fluctuations held at the time when the second movable body 270 operates is started, the big hit symbol finally occurs. May be configured to be definitely displayed, or may be configured to be finally configured to definitely display the deviating symbol mode in the pattern variation in which the second movable body 270 did not operate. . Alternatively, when any one of the symbol fluctuations held at the time when the second movable body 270 is operated is started, the jackpot symbol mode is likely to be finally fixedly displayed, or in some cases. It may be configured as is.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 260 (q), when the POV display 280 displaying the pattern moves during the execution of the pattern change, the final big hit in the pattern change is greater than in the case where the POV display 280 does not move. The symbol aspect may be configured to be easily displayed in a finalized manner, and any of the symbol fluctuations that are held at the time when the POV display 280 displaying the symbol starts to move is started. In the case where the big hit symbol pattern is finally definitely displayed, the POV display 280 displaying the pattern has not moved. It may be configured to be confirmed and displayed. Alternatively, when any one of the symbol fluctuations held at the time when the POV display 280 displaying the symbol starts to move is started, the jackpot symbol mode is likely to be finally confirmed and displayed. It may be configured so that it may be performed. The greater the amount of movement of the POV display 280, the higher the reliability (expectation) of the big hit may be.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 260 (v) to 260 (w), the display of the pattern t is displayed across both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the POV display 280 during execution of the symbol variation. However, it may be configured such that the jackpot pattern mode is finally settled and displayed more easily in the symbol variation than when it is not displayed across, and the display of the pattern t is displayed across both 208 and 280. When any one of the symbol fluctuations held at the time of starting is started, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol mode is always definitely displayed, and the pattern t The display may be configured such that the deviating symbol form is always definitely displayed in the symbol fluctuation that is not displayed across both 208 and 280. Alternatively, when any one of the symbol fluctuations held at the time when the display of the pattern t is started to be displayed across both 208 and 280 is started, the jackpot pattern mode is finally confirmed and displayed. It may be configured so that it may be easy or may be performed.

  Further, even if the confrontation animation is displayed during the execution of the symbol variation, it may be configured such that the jackpot symbol aspect is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation than when it is not displayed. Good, it is configured so that the jackpot pattern mode is always definitely displayed when any one of the symbol fluctuations held at the time when the display of the confrontation animation is started is started. Alternatively, it may be configured such that, in the symbol variation in which the confrontation animation is not displayed, the deviating symbol aspect is always definitely displayed. Alternatively, when one of the symbol fluctuations held at the time when the display of the confrontation animation is started is started, the jackpot symbol mode is likely to be finally confirmed or displayed. It may be configured as follows.

  Also, during execution of the symbol change, if the character of the protagonist Tono is victorious in the confrontation animation, it is configured so that the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol change than in the case of defeat. You may have, or when the character variation of the main character's lord's character wins when the display of the confrontation animation is started, one of the symbol fluctuations that has been suspended is finally started. May be configured to be fixedly displayed, or the main character's lord's character wins the confrontation animation is not displayed. May be. Alternatively, when one of the symbol fluctuations held at the time when the display of the confrontation animation that the character of the main character wins is started, the big hit symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed. It may be configured so as to be easy or in some cases.

  Further, during execution of the symbol variation, as shown in FIGS. 260 (a) to 260 (c), the design t of the lord's character is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 even if it disappears from the POV display 280. The case may be configured so that the jackpot pattern mode is finally finalized and displayed more easily in the symbol variation than when it is not displayed, and the pattern t is started to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When any one of the symbol fluctuations held at the time of being started is started, the jackpot symbol mode may be finally finally definitely displayed, and the symbol t is It may be configured so that the final deviating symbol aspect is always definitely displayed in the symbol variation not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Alternatively, when any one of the symbol fluctuations held at the time when the design t is started to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is started, the jackpot pattern mode is likely to be finally fixedly displayed. It may be configured so that it may be performed.

  FIG. 262 is a diagram showing an example of an effect different from the effect shown in FIG. 260 in stages. In this figure, the sequence proceeds from (a) to (t). Also in this FIG. 262, the decorative pattern display device 208 which becomes the main liquid crystal unit, the first movable body 260 which becomes the sub liquid crystal unit, the second movable body 270 displayed as a chance, and the POV display 280 are shown. . In the outline of the effect shown in FIG. 262, the character of the hero (lord) appears on the decorative pattern display device 208 as a notice in the variable display currently being performed, and the character moves to the POV display 280 to make a big hit. And so on. The details will be described below.

  In FIG. 262 (a), the first movable body 260 is in the initial position and hides a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The second movable body 270 is also in the initial position. The POV display 280 is also in the initial position behind the second movable body 270, and the POV display 280 is invisible to the player. On the decorative pattern display device 208, a combination of the decorative pattern defects (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed on the sky background image. In this example, neither the hold icon nor the changing icon is displayed, but it may be displayed as in the example shown in FIG. 260. Only the background image of the sea is displayed on the first movable body 260. The subsequent steps up to FIG. 262 (j) are the same as those in FIG.

  In FIG. 262 (k), the display of the design of the character of the enemy samurai is not started on the LED array 282 that is rotating at a constant speed at the operation start position, and the LED array 282 moves to the right from the operation start position. Starting, the rotation area s of the LED array 282 overlaps the right end of the bezel 208q of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 262 (l), the display of the design t of the character of the hero (lord) is started on the left side of the decorative design display device 208. The design t of the lord's character corresponds to an example of the first design, and the display of the design t corresponds to an example of the first effect display. Thereafter, the design t of the lord's character approaches the rotation area s of the LED array 282, which has moved to the right. Nothing is displayed in the rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 262 (l). In FIG. 262 (m), a part (here, the left half) of the display of the design t of the lord's character is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the remaining part (here, the right half) is displayed on the POV display 280. Has been done. That is, the design t of the lord's character is displayed across the decorative pattern display device 208 and the POV display 280. In FIG. 262 (n), the display of the design t of the lord's character has completely moved to the POV display 280, and the entire display of the design t of the lord's character has moved to the right center of the rotation area s of the LED array 282. Is displayed in. The display of the pattern t of the character of a part or all of the lord displayed in the rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 262 (m) to (n) corresponds to an example of the second effect display. .. Contrary to this example, on the right side of the decorative pattern display device 208, the display of the design of the character of the hero (lord) is started, and the rotation area s of the LED array 282 is displayed on the display of the design of the character of the lord. After approaching, after the state in which the right side portion of the display of the character t of the lord's character is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the left side portion is displayed on the POV display 280, the entire display of the pattern t of the lord's character is displayed. , May be displayed in the center of the rotation area s of the LED array 282 that has moved to the right.

  In FIG. 262 (o), the rotating LED array 282 starts moving toward the operation start position. At the center of the rotating area s of the moving LED array 282, the design t of the lord's character continues to be displayed. In FIG. 262 (p), the LED array 282 returns to the operation start position, and accordingly, in the panel 260p of the first movable body 260, the combination of the decorative patterns of the big hits (here, "decoration 3"-"decoration 3"). "-" Decoration 3 ") shaking display (temporary stop display) is started.

  In FIG. 262 (q), the rotation of the LED array 282 is decelerated at the operation start position, and the display of the design t of the lord's character disappears from the POV display 280. In FIG. 262 (r), the rotation of the LED array 282 stops in the initial posture. Note that, unlike the example shown in FIG. 260, the same pattern as the pattern t of the lord's character that has been displayed on the POV display 280 so far is not displayed at the position behind the rotation area s of the LED array 282. In FIG. 262 (s), the LED array 282 is raised toward the initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270. It should be noted that, in the panel 260p of the first movable body 260 started in FIG. 262 (p), a swing display (temporary display) of a combination of the jackpot decorative patterns (“decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3”) Stop display) continues. The shaking display may be continued until the LED array 282 returns to the initial position, or may be continued only until the LED array 282 starts the raising operation.

  In FIG. 262 (t), the LED array 282 has reached the initial position. Further, the first movable body 260 that has been in the retracted position so far is returned to the initial position, and the decorative pattern displayed on the first movable body 260 is returned to the decorative pattern display device 208 and the decorative pattern is displayed. In the device 208, a combination of jackpot decorative patterns ("decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3") is fixedly displayed (stopped display). Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the background image is restored to the sky background image, and in the first movable body 260, the background image is restored to the sea background image.

  It should be noted that the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns stopped and displayed in the example in FIG. 262 (“decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3”) and the jackpot decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the example in FIG. 261 Comparing the combination (“decoration 2”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 2”), the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns stopped and displayed in the example in FIG. 262 is a more advantageous combination of the jackpot decorative patterns. . That is, the combination of the decorative patterns for jackpots in FIG. 260 is a combination of the decorative patterns for jackpots without probability change, whereas the combination of the decorative patterns for jackpots in FIG. 262 is a combination of the decorative patterns for jackpots with probability change. Alternatively, the combination of the big hit decorative patterns in FIG. 262 may have a larger number of rounds of the big hit game. On the contrary, the combination of the jackpot decorative designs in FIG. 260 may be a more advantageous jackpot than the combination of the jackpot decorative designs in FIG. 262.

  FIG. 263 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the button advance notice continuing from FIG. 262 (k).

  FIG. 263 (l ') is a state continuing from FIG. 262 (k). In the rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 263 (l '), which overlaps the right end of the bezel 208q in the decorative pattern display device 208, the rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. As with, nothing is displayed. However, in the rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 263 (1 '), the pattern 136' of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 246 is displayed in dotted lines. This indicates that the design 136 ′ of the chance button 136 is displayed on the back side of the rotating area s of the LED array 282 of the panel 208 p in the decorative pattern display device 208, and the decorative pattern display device 208 is displayed. The displayed pattern 136 'of the chance button 136 is difficult to visually recognize. The pattern 136 ′ of the chance button displayed on the back side of the rotation area s of the LED array 282 of the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208 corresponds to an example of the first pattern, and the display of the pattern 136 ′ is as follows. This corresponds to an example of the first effect display.

  In the rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 263 (1 ') and shown in FIG. 183 (l'), a chance button pattern 136 'is displayed by a solid line. This indicates that the picture 136 'of the chance button is displayed on the POV display 280, that is, the rotation area s of the LED array 282. The pattern of the chance button is also displayed on the back side of the rotating area s of the LED array 282 of the panel 208p in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (m '). That is, the picture 136 'of the chance button is displayed so as to overlap with the POV display 280 and the decorative pattern display device 208 at the mutually corresponding positions.

  In FIG. 263 (n ′), the position of the rotation area s of the LED array 282 has not changed, but the chance button pattern 136 ′ is moving to the left, and the right half of the chance button pattern 136 ′ is It is displayed on the POV display 280, and the left half thereof is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. That is, an animation is displayed in which the chance button pattern 136 'exits from the rotation area s of the LED array 282. In FIG. 263 (n'), the chance button pattern 136 'is displayed as a POV display 280 and a decorative symbol. It is displayed across the devices 208. Although the entire design 136 'of the chance button is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the right half displayed in the rotation area s of the LED array 282 overlaps the right half thereof.

  The display of some or all of the chance button patterns 136 ′ displayed in the rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 263 (m ′) to (n ′) is an example of the second effect display. Correspondingly, in this example, in FIG. 263 (m ′) to FIG. 263 (n ′), the first effect display (display of the picture 136 ′ of the decorative pattern display device 208) and the second effect display (POV display 280). (Displaying the image 136 ') is configured to be performed together.

  In FIG. 263 (o ′), the picture 136 ′ of the chance button completely comes out of the rotation area s of the LED array 282 and is displayed only on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the POV display 280 and the decorative pattern display device 208. There is. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (p ′), a pattern (a character pattern “press” and a downward arrow pattern) that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is added to the pattern 136 ′ of the chance button. ing. The display of the pattern 136 ′ of the chance button and the pattern urging the operation of the chance button 136 corresponds to an example of the first effect display. Further, the chance button lamp 138 built in the actual chance button 136 also emits light, and the word “push” appears. On the first movable body 260 shown in FIG. 263 (p '), a combination of decorative symbols in the reach state is displayed.

  In FIG. 263 (q '), the chance button 136 is pushed down. When the chance button 136 is pushed down, as shown in FIG. 263 (r ′), the decoration button display device 208 disappears the chance button pattern 136 ′ and the pattern urging its operation, and the POV display 280 indicates “big hit”. The text pattern is displayed. In addition, in the first movable body 260, shaking display (temporary stop display) of a combination of large-decoration decorative symbols is started.

  In FIG. 263 (s'), the rotating LED array 282 starts moving toward the operation start position. In the rotating area s of the moving LED array 282, the jackpot character pattern continues to be displayed. In FIG. 263 (t '), the LED array 282 returns to the operation start position, the rotation of the LED array 282 is decelerated at the operation start position, and the display of the jackpot character pattern disappears from the POV display 280. In FIG. 263 (u ′), the rotation of the LED array 282 stops in the initial posture, and in FIG. 263 (v ′), the LED array 282 rises toward the initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270. There is. In addition, the shaking display (temporary stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hits on the panel 260p of the first movable body 260, which is started in FIG. 263 (r '), continues.

  In FIG. 263 (w '), the LED array 282 has reached the initial position. In addition, the first movable body 260 that has been in the retracted position so far is returned to the initial position, and the decorative pattern displayed on the first movable body 260 is returned to the decorative pattern display device 208, and the decorative pattern is displayed. On the display device 208, the combination of the decorative patterns of the big hits is fixedly displayed (stopped display). Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the background image is restored to the sky background image, and in the first movable body 260, the background image is restored to the sea background image.

  Even if the button notice described above is performed during the execution of the symbol variation, the final jackpot pattern mode is likely to be confirmed and displayed more easily in the symbol variation than when not performed. Good, it is configured so that the big hit symbol mode is always definitely displayed in the final when the symbol fluctuation of any of the symbol fluctuations held at the time when this button notice is executed is started. Alternatively, it may be configured such that, in the symbol variation in which this button advance notice is not executed, the deviating symbol aspect is always definitely displayed. Alternatively, when one of the symbol fluctuations held at the time this button notice is executed is started, it is likely that the big hit symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed. May be configured.

  FIG. 264 is a diagram showing, in steps, another example continuing from FIG. 262 (g).

  FIG. 264 (h ') is a state following FIG. 262 (g) in which the LED array 282 has reached the operation start position. In FIG. 264 (h ′), the LED array 282 does not start rotating, and starts to rise from the operation start position while maintaining the initial posture. In FIG. 264 (h ′), the LED array 282 reaches the initial position. is doing. In addition, the decorative pattern displayed on the first movable body 260 is returned to the decorative pattern display device 208, and in the decorative pattern display device 208, a combination of missing decorative patterns (here, "decoration 3"-"decoration 2"). -"Decoration 3") is confirmed (stopped). Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the background image is restored to the sky background image, and in the first movable body 260, the background image is restored to the sea background image. In this example, although the LED array 282 has been lowered to the operation start position, the rotation does not start, the POV display 280 does not touch the display, and the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms the combination of the defective decorative patterns. Is displayed. That is, this is an example in which the Versa notice is not actually started while expecting the Versa notice to be started.

  When the LED array 282 starts rotating as shown in FIG. 260 (h) during the execution of the symbol variation, it is the last in the symbol variation as compared with the case where the LED array 282 does not start rotating as shown in FIG. The jackpot symbol mode may be configured to be easily confirmed and displayed, or in the case where any one of the symbol fluctuations held at the time when the LED array 282 starts to rotate is started. It may be configured such that the jackpot pattern mode is finally definitely displayed, or finally the deviation pattern mode is always definitely displayed in the pattern variation in which the LED array 282 does not start rotating. It may have been done. Alternatively, when any one of the symbol fluctuations held at the time when the LED array 282 starts to rotate is started, the jackpot symbol mode is likely to be finally confirmed and displayed, or in some cases. It may be configured as follows.

  FIG. 265 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example continuing from FIG. 263 (1 ').

  FIG. 265 (m ″) is a state following FIG. 263 (l ′) in which the picture 136 ′ of the chance button 136 is displayed on the back side of the rotation area s of the LED array 282. In this FIG. 265 (m ″), nothing is still displayed in the rotation area s of the LED array 282, and the pattern 136 ′ of the chance button is displayed on the back side thereof. The rotation area s of the undisplayed LED array 282 starts moving toward the operation start position (FIG. 265 (n ″)), and in FIG. 265 (o ″), the rotation of the LED array 282 starts operation. The position is decelerated, and in FIG. 265 (p ″), the rotation of the LED array 282 is stopped in the initial posture. The pattern 136 'of the chance button 136 displayed on the back side of the rotation area s of the LED array 282 of the panel 208p in the decorative pattern display device 208 disappears when the LED array 282 starts decelerating the rotation. Alternatively, when the LED array 282 rotating at a constant speed reaches the operation start position, the LED array 282 disappears. Even when the LED array 282 starts decelerating the rotation, the first movable body 260 displays the combination of the decorative symbols in the reach state. In this example, after all, the player does not see the pattern 136 'of the chance button 136 clearly or at all, and no pattern prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is displayed, so the chance button 136 is operated. There is no such thing.

  In FIG. 265 (q ″), the LED array 282 is elevated toward the initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270. On the first movable body 260 shown in FIG. 265 (q ″), the combination of reachable decorative symbols is still displayed.

  In FIG. 265 (r ″), the LED array 282 has reached the initial position. In addition, the first movable body 260 that has been in the retracted position so far is returned to the initial position, and the decorative pattern displayed on the first movable body 260 is returned to the decorative pattern display device 208, and the decorative pattern is displayed. On the display device 208, the combination of the decorative patterns of the big hits is fixedly displayed (stopped display). Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the background image is restored to the sky background image, and in the first movable body 260, the background image is restored to the sea background image.

  As shown in FIG. 265, when the pattern 136 ′ of the chance button is displayed in the rotation area s of the LED array 282 as shown in FIG. 263 (m ′) during execution of the symbol variation, the LED array 282 is shown. It may be configured such that the jackpot pattern mode is finally confirmed and displayed more easily in the symbol variation than when it is not displayed even if rotated, and the chance button pattern 136 ′ starts to be displayed in the rotation area s. When any one of the symbol fluctuations held at the time of being started is started, the jackpot symbol mode may be finally displayed without fail, and its rotation area s It may be configured such that, in the symbol variation in which the pattern 136 'of the chance button is not displayed, finally, the deviating symbol mode is definitely displayed. Alternatively, when one of the symbol fluctuations held at the time when the chance button pattern 136 ′ is started to be displayed in the rotation area s is started, the big hit symbol pattern is finally confirmed and displayed. It may be configured so as to be easy or sometimes.

  FIG. 266 is a diagram showing, in steps, another example continuing from FIG. 262 (c).

  FIG. 266 (d ') is a state continuing from FIG. 262 (c) in which the first movable body 260 is at the initial position. In this FIG. 266 (d ′), the first movable body 260 does not move to the retracted position, but remains in the initial position, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. The symbol combination is fixedly displayed (stopped display).

  When the first movable body 260 moves to the retracted position as shown in FIG. 260 (c) during the execution of the symbol variation, as compared with the case where it remains at the initial position as shown in FIG. 266, The POV display 280 starts preparation for operation, and by extension, it is possible to make the player expect that the Versa notice will be started, and actually, the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol fluctuation. Easy to be affected. Further, in the case where any one of the symbol fluctuations held at the time when the first movable body 260 starts moving to the retreat position is started, the big hit symbol mode is always definitely displayed finally. May be configured so that the jackpot pattern mode may be finally confirmed or displayed, or the first movable body 260 may have an initial position. It may be configured so that the final deviating symbol aspect is always definitely displayed in the symbol variation that is still positioned at.

  FIG. 267 is a diagram illustrating another example of the big hit, which is continued from FIG. 262 (i), in stages.

  FIG. 267 (j ′) is a state continuing from FIG. 262 (i) while the LED array 282 starts rotating and is accelerating. In FIG. 267 (j ′), the rotation of the LED array 282 is further accelerated, and the pattern is displayed before the constant speed is reached. That is, on the POV display 280 shown in FIG. 267 (j ′), the display of the design t of the lord's character has started, and even in the same figure (k ′) where the rotation speed of the LED array 282 has reached a constant speed, The display of the pattern t is maintained. In this example, when a pattern is displayed in the rotating area s of the LED array 282 that has reached the constant speed, the first movable body 260 that has been in the reach state until then shows the swing display of the combination of the decorative patterns of the big hit ( (Temporary stop display) is started. Note that even in FIG. 267 (k ′), the rotation region s of the LED array 282 has not moved.

  In FIG. 267 (1 '), the rotation of the LED array 282 is decelerated, and the display of the design t of the lord's character disappears from the POV display 280. Even if the rotation of the LED array 282 starts decelerating, the design t of the lord's character may continue to be displayed for a certain period (for example, until it decreases to a certain speed).

  In FIG. 267 (m ′), the rotation of the LED array 282 is stopped in the initial posture, and in FIG. 267 (n ′), the LED array 282 rises toward the initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270. There is. Then, in FIG. 267 (o '), the LED array 282 has reached the initial position. In addition, the first movable body 260 that has been in the retracted position so far is returned to the initial position, and the decorative pattern displayed on the first movable body 260 is returned to the decorative pattern display device 208, and the decorative pattern is displayed. On the display device 208, a combination of jackpot decorative patterns (here, "decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3") is confirmed (stopped). Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the background image is restored to the sky background image, and in the first movable body 260, the background image is restored to the sea background image.

  FIG. 268 is a diagram illustrating, in a stepwise manner, an example in which there is a loss, continuing from FIG. 262 (i).

  FIG. 268 (j ″) is a state continuing from FIG. 262 (i) while the LED array 282 starts rotating and is accelerating. In this FIG. 268 (j ″), as in the previous FIG. 267 (j ′), the rotation of the LED array 282 is further accelerated and the pattern is displayed before the constant speed is reached. That is, the pattern t of the lord's character is displayed during the acceleration of the rotation of the LED array 282. Then, when the rotation speed of the LED array 282 reaches a constant speed, the display of the design t disappears as shown in FIG. In this example, nothing is displayed in the rotation area s of the LED array 282 that has reached the constant speed, and the first movable body 260 remains in the reach state.

  In FIG. 268 (1 ″), the rotation of the LED array 282 is decelerated, and in FIG. 268 (m ″), the rotation of the LED array 282 is stopped in the initial posture. Note that the rotation of the LED array 282 reaches a constant speed, and instead of disappearing the design t of the lord's character on the POV display 280, the character design of "sorry" may be displayed, or the rotation of the LED array 282 may be displayed. The character pattern "sorry" may be displayed for a certain period of time after the vehicle starts decelerating (for example, until it decreases to a certain speed).

  In FIG. 268 (n ″), the LED array 282 is elevated toward the initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270. Then, in FIG. 268 (o ″), the LED array 282 has reached the initial position. Further, the first movable body 260, which has been in the retracted position so far, has also returned to the initial position. Further, the display of the decorative design that was in the reach state on the first movable body 260 is returned to the decorative design display device 208, and the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. The combination (here, "decoration 3"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 3") is confirmed (stopped). In the decorative pattern display device 208, the background image is restored to the sky background image, and in the first movable body 260, the background image is restored to the sea background image.

  As shown in FIG. 268 (k ″), when a pattern is displayed in the rotation area s of the LED array 282 which has reached a constant speed as shown in FIG. 267 (k ′), during execution of the pattern change. It may be configured such that the jackpot pattern mode is finally confirmed and displayed more easily in the pattern variation than when it disappears or is not displayed. It may be configured so that the jackpot pattern mode is finally definitely displayed when any one of the symbol fluctuations that has been started is started, or the pattern disappears or is displayed. It may be configured such that the final deviation pattern is always definitely displayed in the symbol fluctuation that has not occurred. Alternatively, when any one of the symbol fluctuations held at the time when the pattern is started to be displayed in the rotation area s is started, the jackpot symbol mode is likely to be finally fixedly displayed. In some cases, it may be configured.

  FIG. 269 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, an example of an effect in which the first movable body 260 serving as a sub liquid crystal unit is rotated at a high speed by the mechanism shown in FIGS. 258 and 259 to display a pattern by the afterimage effect. In this figure, the sequence proceeds from (a) to (r). Also in this FIG. 269, the decorative pattern display device 208 that becomes the main liquid crystal unit, the first movable body 260 that becomes the sub liquid crystal unit, and the second movable body 270 that is displayed as a chance are shown, but FIGS. The POV display 280 shown in FIG. 268 is omitted. The outline of the effect shown in FIG. 269 is a notice of the currently displayed variable display using the first movable body 260 which becomes the sub liquid crystal unit. That is, in the effect here, the first movable body 260 corresponds to an example of the POV display. The details will be described below.

  In FIG. 269 (a), the first movable body 260 is in the initial position and hides a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The second movable body 270 is also in the initial position. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (a), a combination of decorative pattern defects is stopped and displayed on an empty background image. In this example as well, neither the hold icon nor the changing icon is displayed, but it may be displayed as in the example shown in FIG. 260. Only the background image of the sea is displayed on the first movable body 260.

  In FIG. 269 (b), the variable display of the special symbol is started, and in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. In FIG. 269 (c), the first movable body 260 moves to the retreat position, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach state is developed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. However, in the same figure (d), the display of the decorative pattern in the reach state is reduced and displayed in the upper right.

  In FIG. 269 (e), the first movable body 260 at the leftmost retracted position moves toward the right along the lower end portion of the bezel 208q of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in FIG. The first movable body 260, which is moving toward, starts moving up slightly after passing the center in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 269 (g), the first movable body 260 that has started to rise stops in the central area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the first movable body 260 that has stopped rising, the background image of the sea is switched to the background image of no pattern in preparation for the first movable body 260 to start the rotation operation.

  In FIG. 269 (h), the first movable body 260 starts rotating in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the player, and in FIG. ), The first movable body 260 finishes the acceleration rotation and shifts to the constant speed rotation. The rotation region 206s of the first movable body 260 does not overlap the display of the decorative design reduced and displayed on the upper right, but may partially or entirely overlap the display of the decorative design. When the first movable body 260 shifts to the constant speed rotation, it is possible to display the pattern due to the afterimage effect, but at the timing of FIG. 269 (j), the pattern is not yet displayed. The image due to the afterimage effect may be displayed at the same time when the constant speed rotation is reached, or the pattern due to the afterimage effect can be displayed before the constant speed rotation is reached and the pattern is displayed before the constant speed rotation is reached. You may.

  On the first movable body 260 that rotates at a constant speed, as shown in FIG. 269 (k), the display of the character pattern of the big hit is started. In addition, in response to the start of the display of the jackpot character pattern, the display of the decorative pattern reduced to the upper right, which has been a reach state until now, is a combination of the decorative patterns of the jackpot (here, (Decoration 3)-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3") is displayed in a shaking display (temporary stop display) (see Fig. 269 (l)). The shaking display of the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns may be performed at the same time as the display of the jackpot character pattern is started, or after the start.

  In FIG. 269 (m), the position of the rotation region 206s of the first movable body 260 has not changed, but the big hit character pattern is moving diagonally toward the upper left, and the “hit” character pattern is first. Is displayed in the rotation area 206s of the movable body 260 of FIG. That is, an animation in which the jackpot character pattern goes out from the rotation region 206s of the first movable body 260 is displayed. In FIG. 269 (m), the jackpot character pattern is the first movable body 260 and the decorative pattern. It is displayed across the display device 208. The partial or full jackpot character pattern displayed in the rotation area 206s of the first movable body 260 shown in FIGS. 269 (k) to (m) is equivalent to an example of the second effect display. To do. It should be noted that, in the rotation area 206s of the first movable body 260, in addition to the jackpot character pattern, another pattern (for example, an oval pattern or a pattern representing an effect) may be displayed. It is good also as an example of the second effect display including "the pattern".

  Also, in response to the fact that the jackpot character pattern has begun to be displayed in the rotation area 206s of the first movable body 260 (FIG. 269 (k)), the decorative symbol display device 208 also hits the back side of the rotation area 206s with a big hit. The display of the character pattern may be started. The display of the jackpot character pattern on the decorative pattern display device 208 may be performed at the same time as the jackpot character pattern is displayed in the rotation area 206s, or after the jackpot character pattern is displayed. Good. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (m), all of the jackpot character patterns are displayed. However, in the “hit” character pattern portion, the rotation area 206s of the first movable body 260 is displayed. It may be an overlapping mode.

  In FIG. 269 (n), the jackpot character pattern is completely removed from the rotation area 206s of the first movable body 260 and is displayed at the upper left of the decorative pattern display device 208. The jackpot character pattern corresponds to an example of the first pattern, and the display of the pattern corresponds to an example of the first effect display. On the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208, in addition to the jackpot picture, another picture (for example, a picture of an oval or a picture showing an effect) may be displayed, and this "other picture" is also displayed. It may be included as an example of the first effect display. Nothing is displayed in the rotation area 206s of the first movable body 260 shown in FIG. 269 (n). In FIG. 269 (o), the rotation of the first movable body 260 is decelerated, and in FIG. 269 (p), the rotation of the first movable body 260 stops in the initial posture. In FIG. 269 (q), the first movable body 260 has descended, and the background image of this first movable body 260 has returned to the background image of the sea. Further, in FIG. 269 (r), the first movable body 260 moves toward the left side along the lower end portion of the bezel 208q of the decorative symbol display device 208 and returns to the initial position. In response to the return of the first movable body 260 to the initial position, in the upper right area, the reduced display of the swinging decorative symbols is the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right. The display returns to the symbol display area 208c, and the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is fixedly displayed (stopped display). Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the background image is restored to the empty background image. The confirmation display may be performed at the same time when the first movable body 260 returns to the initial position, or after the return.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 269 described above, the pattern due to the afterimage effect is displayed in the rotation region 206s of the first movable body 260, and the display of the pattern due to the afterimage effect is also an example of the Versa notice. During execution of the symbol change, the case where this verser notice is executed is configured so that the final jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol change than when the versa notice is not executed. It may be configured so that the jackpot pattern mode is always finally confirmed and displayed when any one of the symbol fluctuations held at the time this Versa notice is executed is started. Alternatively, it may be configured such that, in the symbol variation in which the verser notice is not executed, the deviation symbol mode is finally definitely displayed. Alternatively, when one of the symbol fluctuations held at the time this Versa notice is executed is started, the jackpot pattern mode is likely to be finally confirmed or displayed. May be configured.

  FIG. 270 is a diagram showing an example of button advance notice, which continues from FIG. 269 (g).

  FIG. 270 (h ') is a state following the state in which the first movable body 260 is raised to the central region of the decorative pattern display device 208 from FIG. 269 (g). In this FIG. 270 (h '), the pattern 136' 'of the chance button and the pattern urging the operation of the chance button 136 (the character pattern "press" and the downward arrow) are displayed on the first movable body 260 in the stopped state. (Pattern) is displayed. Further, the chance button lamp 138 built in the actual chance button 136 also emits light, and the word “push” appears. Such an effect of urging the operation of the chance button 136 corresponds to an example of the button notice, and the button notice is started in FIG. 270 (h ').

  In FIG. 270 (i '), the chance button 136 is pushed down. When the chance button 136 is pushed down, as shown in FIG. 270 (j ′), the pattern 136 ″ of the chance button and the pattern urging its operation disappear from the first movable body 260, and the first movable body 260. But, it starts to rotate. That is, the first movable body 260 starts rotating in response to the operation of the chance button 136.

  In FIG. 270 (k ′), the rotation of the first movable body 260 is accelerated, and in FIG. 270 (l ′), the first movable body 260 finishes the accelerated rotation and shifts to the constant speed rotation. In the rotation area 206s of the first movable body 260 shown in FIG. 270 (1 '), a character pattern of a big hit due to the afterimage effect is displayed, and the Versa notice is started. In this example, the rotation speed of the first movable body 260 reaches a constant speed, and at the same time, the jackpot character pattern is displayed. It is a moment until the rotation speed reaches the constant speed after the first movable body 260 starts rotating, and in this example, the jackpot character pattern is displayed by the afterimage effect in accordance with the operation of the chance button 136. It looks like you are. That is, the button notice is changed to the Versa notice.

  In FIG. 270 (m '), the display of the decorative pattern reduced to the upper right, which has been the reach state until now, becomes the swing display (temporary stop display) of the combination of the decorative patterns of the big hit. In this example, the jackpot character pattern does not move and stays within the rotation region 206s of the first movable body 260.

  In FIG. 270 (n ′), the rotation of the first movable body 260 is decelerated, and the jackpot character pattern displayed in the rotation area 206s disappears. In FIG. 270 (o ′), the rotation of the first movable body 260 stops in the initial posture. In FIG. 270 (p '), the first movable body 260 has descended, and the background image on this first movable body 260 has returned to the background image of the sea. Further, in FIG. 270 (q ′), as in FIG. 269 (r), the first movable body 260 returns to the initial position, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the background image returns to the sky background image, and the symbol. The combination of the decorative symbols of the big hits is fixedly displayed (stopped display) in the display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 271 is a diagram illustrating, in a stepwise manner, continuing from FIG. 270 (i ′), in which the button advance notice is not developed to the Versa advance notice.

  FIG. 271 (j ″) is from FIG. 270 (i ′) in which the chance button 136 is pushed down in the state where the picture 136 ″ of the chance button and the picture prompting the operation are displayed on the first movable body 260. It is a state that continues. When the chance button 136 is pressed down, as shown in FIG. 271 (j ″), the pattern 136 ″ of the chance button and the pattern urging its operation disappear from the first movable body 260, but in this example, The rotation of the first movable body 260 is not started.

  In FIG. 271 (k ″), the first movable body 260 has started to descend, and the background image of this first movable body 260 has returned to the background image of the sea. Further, in the upper right area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (k ″), the reachable decorative symbol is still displayed. Then, in FIG. 271 (l ″), the first movable body 260 is returned to the initial position, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the background image is restored to an empty background image, and the symbol display regions 208a to 208c are lost. The combination of decorative patterns is confirmed (stopped).

  During execution of the symbol variation, when the button notice as shown in FIG. 270 (h ') is displayed, the jackpot symbol aspect is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation than when it is not displayed. It may be configured, and when any one of the symbol fluctuations held at the time this button advance notice is executed is started, the big hit symbol mode is always definitely displayed. It may be configured to, and in the symbol variation in which this button advance notice is not executed, it may be configured to finally display the deviating symbol mode without fail. Alternatively, when one of the symbol fluctuations held at the time this button notice is executed is started, it is likely that the big hit symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed. May be configured. Further, as described above, the case where the verser notice shown in FIG. 269 (k) or the like is executed during the execution of the symbol variation is larger than the case where the verser notice is not executed as shown in FIG. 271. In the symbol variation, the jackpot symbol aspect may be finally configured to be easily confirmed and displayed, and any symbol variation among the symbol variations held at the time of execution of this versa announcement is started. In the case where it is done, the jackpot symbol aspect may be finally configured to be definitely displayed, and in the symbol variation for which this Versa notice has not been executed, finally the deviating symbol aspect is always definitely displayed. May be configured. Alternatively, when one of the symbol fluctuations held at the time this Versa notice is executed is started, the jackpot pattern mode is likely to be finally confirmed or displayed. May be configured.

  FIG. 272 is a diagram showing, in succession from FIG. 269 (i), an example of making a big hit with another type of verser notice using the first movable body 260.

  272 (h ') is a state following FIG. 269 (i) in which the first movable body 260 that has risen to the central region of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. In FIG. 272 (h '), the first movable body 260 starts moving to the right while keeping the initial posture. In the first movable body 260 located on the lower right side as shown in FIG. 272 (h '), the character pattern of "hit" is displayed on the upper left.

  As shown in FIGS. 272 (i ') to (k'), the first movable body 260 starts the circular movement while maintaining the initial posture. In the first movable body 260 located on the upper right side shown in FIG. 272 (i '), a character pattern "hit" is displayed at the lower left. In the first movable body 260 located on the upper left side shown in FIG. 272 (j '), the character pattern of "Otowa" is displayed at the lower right. In the first movable body 260 located on the lower left side shown in FIG. 272 (k '), the character pattern of "Otowa" is displayed on the upper right. In this way, the first movable body 260 that cyclically moves changes the character pattern according to the position, and when the moving speed of the cyclic movement becomes faster, as shown in FIG. 272 (l ′), due to the afterimage effect. It looks like a jackpot character pattern is being displayed. The region 260s' of the circular movement of the first movable body 260 does not overlap the display of the decorative design reduced and displayed in the upper right, but may partially or entirely overlap the display of the decorative design.

  In FIG. 272 (m ′), the reach state decoration is reduced and displayed in the upper right of the decoration pattern display device 208 in the state where the big hit character pattern due to the afterimage effect is displayed on the first movable body 260 that cyclically moves. The display of the design becomes a swing display (temporary stop display) of a combination of the decorative designs of the big hit. It should be noted that the start of the shaking display may be the same as the timing at which the big hit character pattern due to the afterimage effect starts to be displayed on the first movable body 260, or may be after the timing.

  In FIG. 272 (n ′), the first movable body 260 that has been circulating is stopped, and the big hit character pattern due to the afterimage effect disappears. In FIG. 272 (o ′), the first movable body 260 is initially set. Returning to the position, in the decorative design display device 208, the background image is restored to the empty background image, and the combination of the large hitting decorative designs is fixedly displayed (stopped display) in the design display regions 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 273 is an example of the Versa notice that continues from FIG. 269 (i) similarly to FIG. 272, but is a diagram showing a stepwise example of losing.

  273 (h ') is a state following FIG. 269 (i) in which the first movable body 260 that has risen to the central region of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. In FIG. 273 (h '), the first movable body 260 starts moving to the right while maintaining the initial posture. In the first movable body 260 located on the lower right side shown in FIG. 273 (h '), the display including the character pattern of "n" is displayed on the upper left.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 273, the first movable body 260 starts the circular movement while maintaining the initial posture. In the first movable body 260 located on the upper right side shown in FIG. 273 (i '), a display including a character pattern of "n" is displayed at the lower left. In the first movable body 260 located on the upper left side shown in FIG. 273 (j '), a display including the character pattern of "cha" is displayed at the lower right. In the first movable body 260 located on the lower left side shown in FIG. 273 (k '), the display including the character pattern of "cha" is displayed on the upper right.

  In FIG. 273 (l ′), the moving speed of the circular movement reaches a certain speed, and it appears that the character pattern of chance is displayed in the circular movement area 260s ′ of the first movable body 260 due to the afterimage effect. . Further, at the same time when the moving speed of the circular movement of the first movable body 260 reaches a constant speed, that is, at the same time when the character pattern of the chance is displayed due to the afterimage effect, the reach reduced in the upper right of the decorative pattern display device 208 is displayed. The display of the decorative pattern in the state becomes the shaking display (temporary stop display) of the combination of the lost decorative patterns. It should be noted that before the swing display of the combination of lost decorative patterns is performed, the swing display of the combination of the decorative patterns of the big hit may be temporarily displayed, and then the swing display of the combination of the decorative patterns of lost may be displayed.

  In FIG. 273 (m ′), the state shown in FIG. 273 (l ′) continues, and in FIG. 273 (n ′), the first movable body 260 that has been circulating is stopped, and a big hit due to the afterimage effect occurs. The text pattern disappears. Then, in FIG. 273 (o ′), the first movable body 260 is returned to the initial position, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the background image is restored to an empty background image, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are lost. The combination of decorative patterns is fixedly displayed (stopped display). In addition, you may switch to the fixed display of the combination of the decorative patterns of a big hit from the shaking display of the combination of the decorative patterns of a loss.

  In the example shown in FIG. 272, the pattern of the afterimage effect due to the circular movement of the first movable body 260 is displayed, and the display of the pattern of the afterimage effect is also an example of the notice of Versa. During execution of the symbol change, the case where this verser notice is executed is easier to finally confirm and display the big hit symbol aspect in the symbol change than the case where the verser notice is not executed. In addition, in the Versa notice, the jackpot character pattern has a higher reliability (expectation) of the jackpot than the chance character pattern. In addition, even if it is configured such that finally the big hit symbol mode is always definitely displayed when any of the symbol fluctuations that are held at the time of execution of this Versa notice is started. It may be configured such that, in the symbol variation in which the Versa notice is not executed, the deviating symbol aspect is always definitely displayed. Alternatively, when one of the symbol fluctuations held at the time this Versa notice is executed is started, the jackpot pattern mode is likely to be finally confirmed or displayed. May be configured.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 269 to 273 described above, the POV display 280 shown in FIGS. 260 to 268 is omitted, but this POV display 280 is also mounted and the first movable body 260 is mounted. The effects shown in FIGS. 269 to 273, which are rotated or circulated, and the effects produced by the POV display 280 shown in FIGS. 260 to 268, may be performed simultaneously or may be shifted.

  FIG. 274 is a diagram showing, in a step-by-step manner, an example of changing the display mode of the hold icon using the Verser notice. In this figure, the sequence proceeds from (a) to (p). Also in this FIG. 274, a decorative symbol display device 208 which becomes a main liquid crystal unit, a first movable body 260 which becomes a sub liquid crystal unit, a second movable body 270 displayed as a chance, and a POV display 280 are shown. . In the outline of the effect shown in FIG. 274, the design that was displayed as the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 moves to the POV display 280, the display mode changes on the POV display 280, and the decorative symbol display device 208. Seems to return to. And so on. The details will be described below.

  In FIG. 274 (a), the first movable body 260 is in the initial position and hides a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The second movable body 270 is also in the initial position. The POV display 280 is also in the initial position behind the second movable body 270, and the POV display 280 is invisible to the player. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (a), a combination of decorative pattern defects is stopped and displayed on an empty background image. Further, four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and all of them are white circle display modes which are default display modes. The four hold icons may be the hold icons of Toku-zu 1 or all of them may be the hold icons of Toku-zu 2 or the hold icons of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 The hold icons of may be mixed. Further, only the background image of the sea is displayed on the first movable body 260 shown in FIG. 274 (a). The following description will be focused on differences from the example shown in FIG. 260, and description of common items may be omitted.

  In FIG. 274 (b), one hold is exhausted and three hold icons are displayed, and all display forms are default display forms. In FIG. 274 (c), the first movable body 260 has moved to the retracted position, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has developed into the reach state. Also, the POV display 280 begins preparation for operation. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (d), the changing icon h0 and the three hold icons are displayed on the unpatterned background.

  In FIG. 274 (e), the POV display 280 appears from the back side of the second movable body 270, and in FIG. 4 (f), the POV display 280 continues to descend, and in FIG. The operation start position is reached. In FIG. 274 (h), the LED array 282 starts rotating in the counterclockwise direction at the operation start position, and in FIG. 274 (i), the LED array 282 is in the process of accelerating the rotation. In FIG. 274 (j), the LED array 282 has finished the accelerated rotation and has shifted to the constant speed rotation. The rotation area s of the LED array 282 here overlaps a part of the changing icon h0 but does not overlap the hold icon. That is, it is possible to confirm all the display modes of the three hold icons. Up to this stage, all the three hold icons continue to be displayed in the default display mode in the hold icon display area 208f. Of the three hold icons, the design of the third hold icon h3 corresponds to an example of the first design, and the display of the design of the three hold icons including the design corresponds to an example of the first effect display.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (k), an animation in which the third hold icon h3 of the three hold icons moves from the hold icon display area 208f toward the rotation area s of the LED array 282 is displayed. In the hold icon display area 208f, only two hold icons are displayed. In FIG. 274 (l), the right half of the pattern h3 'representing the third hold icon h3 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the left half is displayed on the rotation area s of the LED array 282. That is, the pattern h3 'representing the third hold icon is displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the POV display 280. Then, in FIG. 274 (m), the display mode of the pattern h3 ′ representing the third hold icon, which is displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the POV display 280, changes from a white circle to a black rhombus and shines for a moment. Increase. As shown in FIG. 274 (n), the entire pattern h3 'whose display mode has changed is once displayed on the POV display 280. That is, so far, the pattern h3 ′ displayed near the edge of the rotation area s of the LED array 282 straddling the decorative pattern display device 208 and the POV display 280 enters the rotation area s of the LED array 282. Moving. The black diamond-shaped pattern h3 'then moves again to the vicinity of the edge of the rotation region s of the LED array 282, as shown in FIG. 274 (o). In FIG. 274 (o), the black diamond-shaped pattern h3 'is displayed again across the POV display 280 and the decorative pattern display device 208. The display of the pattern h3 representing a part or all of the third hold icons displayed in the rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 274 (l) to (o) is an example of the second effect display. Equivalent to.

  In FIG. 274 (p), the black diamond-shaped pattern h3 ′ displayed across the POV display 280 and the decorative pattern display device 208 returns to the hold icon display area 208f, and the hold icon display area 208f is also black. It is displayed as a diamond-shaped third hold icon h3, and a pre-reading notice is given.

  Even if the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 274 (j) is rotated at a constant speed, the display mode of the hold icon may not be changed and the rotation of the LED array 282 may end. From 274 (l) to (o) in the figure, the Versa notice is given, and the Versa notice here corresponds to the start of the prefetch notice.

  In addition, in the example in FIG. 274, the default display mode (white circle display mode) is changed to the pre-reading notification display mode (black rhombus display mode) using the Versa preview, but the default display is The mode can also be regarded as a type of display mode of the pre-reading notice in which the reliability [expectation] of the big hit is 0% or extremely low. Also, using the Versa notice, the display mode of the black circle look-ahead notice, which is less reliable than the black diamond display mode, may be changed to a black diamond display mode, or conversely, from the black diamond display mode. Also, the display mode of the pre-reading notice, which is marked as “heat” with high reliability, may be changed to a black diamond-shaped display mode.

  FIG. 275 is a diagram continuing from FIG. 274 (l) and showing stepwise an example of changing the display mode of the changing icon using the Verser notice.

  275 (l ') is a state continuing from FIG. 274 (k) in which the animation in which the third hold icon h3 moves toward the rotation area s of the LED array 282 is performed. Nothing is displayed in the rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 275 (l '). However, in the rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 275 (l '), a circle represented by a dotted line is shown. This means that the pattern h3 ″ of the third hold icon h3 in the default display mode is displayed on the back side of the rotation area s of the LED array 282 of the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208. is there. However, this pattern h3 ″ is difficult to visually recognize due to the rotating LED array 282. To the player, the moving third hold icon h3 appears to have disappeared in the rotation area s of the LED array 282.

  In the rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 275 (m '), a diamond shape indicated by a dotted line is shown. This indicates that the pattern h3 ″ of the third hold icon h3 changed to the rhombic display mode is displayed on the back side portion. However, this pattern h3 ″ is also difficult to visually recognize due to the rotating LED array 282. In FIG. 275 (n ′), the design h3 ″ of the diamond-shaped display mode displayed on the back side is returned to the hold icon display area 208f, and in the hold icon display area 208f, a black diamond-shaped third pattern is displayed. It is displayed as a hold icon h3 and a pre-reading notice is given. The state of the return here may be displayed as a moving animation or an increasing animation on the decorative symbol display device 208, or the black diamond-shaped third hold icon h3 may be suddenly displayed in the hold icon display area 208f. You can In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 of FIG. 275 (n ') displays the changing icon h0 in the display mode of a white circle. The pattern of the changing icon h0 in the white circle display mode corresponds to an example of the first pattern, and the display of the pattern corresponds to an example of the first effect display.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 275 (o ′), the changing icon h0 in the display mode of a white circle, which partially overlaps the rotation area s of the LED array 282, enters the rotation area s. The animation that looks like is displayed on the rotation area s, that is, the POV display 280. In the rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 275 (o '), a pattern h0' representing the changing icon h0 in the display mode of a white circle is displayed. Then, in the rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 275 (p '), the above-mentioned pattern h0' in the white circle display mode is changed to the white square display mode. The display of the pattern h0 'representing the changing icon displayed in the rotation area s of the LED array 282 corresponds to an example of the second effect display.

  In FIG. 275 (p ′), the above-described pattern h0 ′ that has changed to a white square display mode is returned to the changing icon display area 208e, and is displayed as a white square changing icon h0 also in the changing icon display area 208e. To be done. In the changing icon, the white circle display mode is the default display mode, and the white square display mode corresponds to the currently displayed change display advance notice mode.

  FIG. 276 is a diagram continuing from FIG. 275 (n ′) and showing stepwise another example of changing the display mode of the changing icon.

  276 (o ″) is a state following FIG. 275 (n ′) in which the display mode of the third hold icon h3 has changed. Nothing is displayed in the rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 276 (o ″). However, in the rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 276 (o ″), a circle indicated by a dotted line is shown. This indicates that the pattern h0 ″ of the changing icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed on the back side of the rotating area s of the LED array 282 of the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208. . However, this pattern h0 ″ is difficult to visually recognize due to the rotating LED array 282. To the player, the changing icon h0, which is partially overlapped with the rotation area s of the LED array 282, seems to have been sucked into the rotation area s and disappeared.

  In the rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 276 (p ″), a square represented by a dotted line is shown. This indicates that the pattern h0 ″ of the changing icon h0 which has been changed to the rectangular display mode is displayed on the back side portion. However, this pattern h0 ″ is also difficult to visually recognize due to the rotating LED array 282. In FIG. 276 (q ″), the rectangular pattern h0 ″ displayed on the back side is returned to the changing icon display area 208e, and the changing icon display area 208e also has a rectangular shape. It is displayed as a changing icon h0, and a notice (normal notice) of the currently changing display is given. It should be noted that the state of the return here may be displayed as a moving animation or an increasing animation on the decorative pattern display device 208, or a rectangular moving icon h0 may be suddenly displayed in the moving icon display area 208e. You may.

When the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the default display mode to the look-ahead notice display mode (for example, a black diamond-shaped display mode) while the symbol variation is being executed, the default display mode is still maintained. Rather, it is easy to confirm and display the big hit symbol mode until all the pending symbol variations are exhausted. That is, in the case where the black diamond-shaped display mode, which is the look-ahead notice mode, is not displayed as the mode of the hold icon, the case where it is displayed is finally changed in the pattern variation started when the hold icon is consumed. It is easy to confirm and display the jackpot pattern mode. It should be noted that there are a plurality of types of display modes for the prefetch notice, and the reliability (expectation level) of the jackpot varies depending on the display mode of the prefetch notice. In addition, the display mode of the hold icon changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the prefetch notice, or any of the symbol fluctuations that are held at the time when the display of the hold icon is started. When is started, it may be configured so that the jackpot pattern mode is finally definitely displayed.
Finally, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol pattern is likely to be fixedly displayed or may be displayed. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the final deviating symbol aspect is always definitely displayed in the symbol variation in which the change of the display mode of the hold icon is not executed.

  The examples shown in FIGS. 274 to 276 described above can be combined with the examples shown in FIGS. 260 to 268 by using the common POV display 280. Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 269 to 273, the POV display 280 is omitted, but this POV display 280 is also mounted, and the first movable body 260 is rotated or circulated and moved. The effect shown in FIG. 273 and the effect shown in FIGS. 274 to 276 by the POV display 280 may be performed simultaneously or may be shifted.

  FIG. 277 is a diagram showing a modification of the POV display 280 shown in FIG. 256, FIG. 260 and the like.

  The POV display 280 'of this modification has a pair of left and right lifting arms 281' and an LED array 282 'arranged between the pair of lifting arms 281'. FIG. 277 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the LED array 282 'is in the initial posture, with the front side of the paper surface being the front side (player side) and the back side of the paper being the back side. In the LED array 282 ', LEDs 2821' are arranged in a horizontal row on each of the front surface 282f and the back surface 282r. Further, as shown in FIG. 277 (a), the rotary shaft of the rotary motor 283 fixed to the right elevating arm 281 'is connected to the right end of the LED array 282'. On the other hand, the left end of the LED array 282 'is rotatably supported by the left lifting arm 281'.

  FIG. 277 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the LED array 282 ′ is rotated by 90 degrees, and in this figure, the front surface 282f of the LED array 282 ′ on which the LEDs 2821 ′ are respectively arranged is the lower side, The back surface 282r of 282 'is upward.

  In the POV display 280 'of this modification, the LED array 282' rotates about the horizontal axis as a center of rotation, and the light emission mode of each LED 2821 'arranged on each of the front surface and the back surface is changed, so that the player is left behind. Is visible. That is, an afterimage of light is generated on the rotation locus of each LED 2821 ', and a pattern is displayed.

  FIG. 278 is a diagram showing an example of the verser announcement using the POV display 280 'shown in FIG. 277. In this figure, the sequence proceeds from (a) to (p). The outline of the effect shown in FIG. 278 is a notice of the currently displayed variable display using the POV display 280 'shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 278 (a), the first movable body 260 is in the initial position and hides a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The second movable body 270 is also in the initial position. The POV display is also in the initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270, and the POV display is invisible to the player. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (a), a combination of decorative pattern defects is stopped and displayed on an empty background image. In this example as well, neither the hold icon nor the changing icon is displayed, but it may be displayed as in the example shown in FIG. 260. Only the background image of the sea is displayed on the first movable body 260.

  In FIG. 278 (b), the variable display of the special symbol is started, and in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. In FIG. 278 (c), the first movable body 260 moves to the retracted position, and the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into the reach state. Also, the POV display begins preparation for operation. In FIG. 278 (d), the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 disappears, and the combination of reachable decorative symbols also disappears. Further, the background image disappears even on the first movable body 260 that has moved to the retracted position, and on this first movable body 260, a combination of decorative symbols in the reach state is displayed. The POV display is preparing for operation even at the timing shown in FIG. 278 (d).

  In FIG. 278 (e), the POV display 280 'appears from the back side of the second movable body 270, and in FIG. 8 (f), the POV display 280' continues to descend, and in FIG. 282 ′ reaches the operation start position. In FIG. 278 (h), the LED array 282 ′ starts rotation about the horizontal axis at the operation start position. In FIG. 278 (i), the LED array 282 ′ is accelerating the rotation. Is. In FIG. 278 (j), the LED array 282 'finishes accelerated rotation and shifts to constant speed rotation at the operation start position. In the LED array 282 ′, at the same time when the rotation speed is changed to the constant speed rotation, the display of the character pattern of the big hit by the afterimage effect is started. In FIG. 278 (k), the swing display (temporary stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols for the big hit is started on the first movable body 260 that has been in the reach state until then. It should be noted that the pattern due to the afterimage effect is not limited to the jackpot character pattern, and may be another character pattern (for example, a character pattern of chance). Furthermore, it is not limited to the character pattern, and may be a pattern such as a figure or a symbol. It may be.

  In FIG. 278 (l), the rotation of the LED array 282 'is decelerated at the operation start position, and the display of the jackpot character pattern disappears from the POV display 280'. In FIG. 278 (m), the rotation of the LED array 282 ′ stops in the initial posture, and in FIG. 278 (n), the LED array 282 ′ rises toward the initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270. There is.

  In FIG. 278 (o), the LED array 282 'reaches the initial position. In FIG. 278 (p), the first movable body 260 that has been in the retracted position so far is returned to the initial position, and the decorative pattern displayed on the first movable body 260 is the decorative pattern display device 208. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit is fixedly displayed (stopped). Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the background image is restored to the sky background image, and in the first movable body 260, the background image is restored to the sea background image.

  In the example shown in FIG. 278, a pattern of the afterimage effect due to the rotation of the LED array 282 'is displayed, and displaying the pattern of the afterimage effect is also an example of the notice of the versa. During execution of the symbol change, the case where this verser notice is executed is configured so that the final jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol change than when the versa notice is not executed. It may be configured so that the jackpot pattern mode is always finally confirmed and displayed when any one of the symbol fluctuations held at the time this Versa notice is executed is started. Alternatively, it may be configured such that, in the symbol variation in which the verser notice is not executed, the deviation symbol mode is finally definitely displayed. Alternatively, when one of the symbol fluctuations held at the time this Versa notice is executed is started, the jackpot pattern mode is likely to be finally confirmed or displayed. May be configured.

  The effect shown in FIG. 278 described above may be performed simultaneously or alternately with the effect shown in FIGS. 260 to 268 using the POV display 280 and the effect shown in FIGS. 274 to 276. . Although the POV display 280 is omitted in the example shown in FIGS. 269 to 273, a POV display 280 ′ shown in FIG. 277 is also mounted to rotate the first movable body 260 or move it in circulation. The effect shown in FIGS. 269 to 273 to be performed and the effect shown in FIG. 278 by the POV display 280 ′ may be performed simultaneously or may be shifted.

  Further, the Versa notice described above is a so-called normal notice in which the currently displayed symbol variation display is the notice target, but it can also be applied to a look-ahead notice. For example, in the pattern variation display in which the jackpot character pattern is displayed on the POV display, a big hit does not occur, but the big hit symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed before all the pending symbol variations are exhausted. .. In this way, when the Versa notice is given as a look-ahead notice, than when it is not done, the big hit symbol aspect is definitely displayed and confirmed until all the pending symbol fluctuations are exhausted. Easy to display. Alternatively, when the Versa notice is not given as a prefetch notice, the lost symbol mode is definitely displayed until all the pending symbol variations are exhausted. Furthermore, whether it is a normal notice or a look-ahead notice, a jackpot character pattern or a pattern in which the character of the hero's lord wins may correspond to a jackpot confirmed pattern.

  FIG. 279 is a diagram illustrating an example of the Verser notice when the ball removal notification is being performed.

  When the lower plate full tank error occurs, an error notification is given. In FIG. 279 (a), for example, in the state shown in FIG. 260 (c), a lower plate full tank error occurs, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a character pattern "please remove the ball" which is a kind of error notification. Has been done. This character picture is displayed from above the picture t of the lord's character displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. That is, the character pattern "please remove the ball" is drawn in a layer on the front side (player side) of the layer in which the pattern t of the lord's character is drawn. As a result, the character pattern "please remove the ball" overlaps the design t of the lord's character, and the design t of the lord's character is more visible than when there was not the character pattern "please remove the ball". It's getting harder.

  FIG. 279 (b) shows an example when the lower plate full tank error occurs in the state shown in FIG. 262 (m). In FIG. 279 (b), the Versa notice is started before the lower plate full tank error occurs, and part (here, the left half) of the display of the design t of the lord's character is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. The remaining portion (here, the right half) is displayed in the rotation area s of the LED array 282. That is, the design t of the lord's character is displayed across the decorative pattern display device 208 and the POV display 280. In this state, when the lower plate full tank error occurs, the character pattern "please remove the ball" overlaps with the pattern t of the lord's character displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, but here, Since only the left half of the design image t of the lord's character is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, it overlaps only with the left half. That is, as shown in FIG. 279 (b), only the character pattern of "without" overlaps the pattern t of the lord's character. On the decorative pattern display device 208, as in the example shown in FIG. 279 (a), the entire character pattern "Please remove the ball" is displayed, but it is located in front of the decorative pattern display device 208. Due to the rotating region s of the LED array 282, the character pattern “please stay” is invisible or difficult to recognize, and only a part of the right end of the character pattern “i” is visible.

  In the example described above, the rotation notification area s of the LED array 282, that is, the POV display 280 does not display the error notification pattern, but preferentially displays the effect pattern. An error notification pattern may be displayed on the POV display 280. In this case, instead of displaying the effect pattern (here, the right half of the pattern t of the lord's character), "please stay" is displayed. You may make it display a character pattern.

  In addition, error-related notifications (for example, the display of the character pattern "The door is open"), error-related notifications such as error resolution notifications, and suggestion of how to hit (for example, the character pattern "Please right-hand") The display) is also treated in the same manner as the display of the character pattern "please remove the ball" described here.

  In the above description, as the POV display, the POV display 280 shown in FIG. 256, the rotating first movable body 260 shown in FIGS. 269 to 270, and the first movable body 260 that circulates and moves shown in FIGS. 272 to 273. , The POV display 280 ′ shown in FIG. 277 is taken as an example, but the POV display is not limited to these, and the light emitting mode of the light emitting body is changed during the operation of the movable body provided with the light emitting body such as the LED or the panel. Therefore, it is sufficient that the player can visually recognize the afterimage. For example, a plurality of LED arrays may be arranged on a rotatable disc at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. However, a plurality of LEDs may be arranged on the circumferential surface of a rotatable sphere.

  Further, although all of the POV displays 280, 280 ', 260 described above are configured to be movable, they may be configured to be non-movable. Further, the POV display 280 shown in FIG. 260 and the like may not move from the operation start position to other than the initial position like the POV display 280 'shown in FIG. 278. However, even if it does not move, it still performs operations such as rotation, rotation, and rocking. Further, the POV displays 280, 280 ′, 260 are arranged in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and when the player looks in front, all the display areas of the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208 are the POV display 280. , 280 ′, 260, the POV displays 280, 280 ′, 260 and the decorative pattern display device 208 may be arranged in such a manner that they are not hidden.

  Furthermore, when the POV displays 280, 280 ′, 260 are arranged behind a liquid crystal display device such as the decorative pattern display device 208 and viewed from the front, the two may be displaced, or some or all of them are overlapped. You may. When a part or all of them overlap, the display panel of the liquid crystal display device is a transmissive display panel (for example, a transparent liquid crystal panel or a liquid crystal shutter). Further, the display panel of the liquid crystal display device such as the decorative pattern display device 208 is movable, the POV displays 280, 280 ′, 260 are movable, or both are movable, and the POV display 280 is movable. , 280 ', 260 are behind the display panel of the liquid crystal display device, and can be changed to a state in which a part or all is hidden by the display panel and a state in which a part or all is not hidden. You may.

  The example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine (ball game machine) has been described above in detail. However, the game table of the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball) can be used. It can also be applied to the rotating drum game machine (slot machine) used. That is, the pachinko machine 100 described above is a pachinko machine (1 type + 1 type), but other pachinko machines (for example, 1 type, 2 types, 3 types, 1 type + 2 types, etc.) may be used. Parrot or ball) More specifically, when a medal (game medium) is thrown in and the reel is rotated by operating the start lever, the winning combination is internally determined by internal lottery, and the reel is stopped by operating the stop button. In addition, when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the symbol display window according to an internal decision, a winning combination is achieved, and when a winning combination is achieved, a specified number of medals are paid out, etc. It may be a spinning drum game machine (slot machine) in which a bonus is given to the player. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed as enclosed balls, the enclosed balls are launched into the game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the inclusion ball winning in the prescribed entry area. It may be an enclosed ball type gaming table which can be circulated and used by firing the enclosed ball that has won a prize in the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won a prize again to the game area.

  As described above, the present invention can be applied to various types of gaming machines. More specifically, it may be a gaming table equipped with a POV display, and if it is a gaming table equipped with an image display panel (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of executing effect display, in addition to the POV display, A combination of a POV display and an image display panel can be performed, which is preferable.

In the above description,
"An image display panel capable of performing effect display [for example, a panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208, a panel 260p of the first movable body 260, etc.],
A POV display capable of executing effect display [for example, the POV display 280 shown in FIG. 256, the rotating first movable body 260 shown in FIGS. 269 to 270, and the first movable body that cyclically moves shown in FIGS. 272 to 273. 260, POV display 280 ', etc. shown in FIG. 277],
A gaming machine equipped with
The first display may be performed by the image display panel,
There is a case where a second effect display is performed by the POV display,
The first effect display means one design (hereinafter, referred to as “first design”) [for example, all or a part of the design t of the lord's character, FIG. 263 (l ′) to FIG. All or part of the pattern 136 'of the chance button shown in'), all or part of the jackpot character pattern shown in FIGS. 269 (m) to (n), and the pattern representing the third hold icon shown in FIG. 274. All or part of h3 ′, all or part of the pattern h0 ′ representing the changing icon shown in FIG. 275, etc.], and
The second effect display is an effect display in a mode including the first picture [for example, the character of the lord shown in FIGS. 260 (v) to (y) and 262 (m) to (n). Display of picture t, display of picture 136 'of chance button shown in FIGS. 263 (m') to (n '), display of jackpot character picture shown in FIGS. 269 (k) to (m), figure 274 (l) to (o), the display of the pattern h3 'representing the third hold icon, 275 (o') to (p ') of the pattern h0' representing the changing icon, etc. ],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

  The "picture" referred to here may be a picture of a character, a picture of a character, or a picture.

  The image display panel may or may not execute the effect display without fail. Further, the image display panel may be capable of executing only the effect display, or may execute a display different from the effect display (for example, an error occurrence display, an error resolution display, a warning display, etc.). It can be anything. Further, the image display panel may always perform the first effect display.

  The POV display may be capable of executing only the effect display, or may be a display other than the effect display (for example, an error occurrence display, an error resolution display, a warning display, etc.). It may be. Further, the POV display may or may not always execute the effect display. Further, the POV display may always perform the second effect display.

  The first effect display may be an effect display in an aspect including at least all of the first design, or may be an effect display in an aspect including only all of the first design, The effect display may include at least a part of the first pattern, or the effect display may include only a part of the first pattern. Further, the second effect display may be a mode including at least all of the first pattern, or may be a mode including only all of the first pattern, and It may be an aspect including at least a part of the design.

Also,
“The first effect display [for example, display of the design 136 ′ of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (m ′) to FIG. 263 (n ′)] and the second effect display [for example, FIG. 263 ( m ′) to the display of the picture 136 ′ of the POV display 280 shown in (n ′) of FIG.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  The first effect display and the second effect display may be configured to be always performed together, or may be configured to be performed together in some cases. That is, the first effect display and the second effect display are performed together in the first period, not together in the second period, so that only one of the effect displays is performed. It may be configured.

Also,
“The second effect display is an effect display in a mode including only a part of the first pattern [for example, a part shown in FIGS. 260 (v) to (w) and FIG. 262 (m). Display of the design t of the lord's character, display of part of the chance button design 136 'shown in FIG. 263 (n'), display of part of the jackpot character design shown in FIG. 269 (m), and FIG. 274 (l) ) To (m) and (o) in the figure, the display of a pattern h3 ′ representing a part of the third hold icon, etc.],
Both the first effect display and the second effect display are displayed so that the player can visually recognize one of the first patterns.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  That is, the first design may be displayed across the second effect display and the first effect display. In other words, a picture including the first picture may be displayed across the second effect display and the first effect display, or only the first picture may be displayed. More specifically, a part of the first pattern may be displayed on the image display panel, and the remaining part of the first pattern may be displayed on the POV display. Further, the first picture displayed on the image display panel may be in the form of moving to the POV display, or conversely, the first picture displayed on the POV display. The pattern may look like moving to the image display panel.

  By both the first effect display and the second effect display so that the player can visually recognize one of the first patterns, a part of the first pattern is displayed on the POV display. Since the remaining portion of the first picture pattern emerges and is complemented by the image projected on the plane of the image display panel (for example, a liquid crystal display panel) to represent one picture, the POV The front-back separation from the position of the display to the position of the image display panel may give a sense of depth to the pattern compared to the case of mere three-dimensional pattern display, which may increase the player's concentration on the game. , You may be able to improve the interest of the game.

Also,
"The POV display is located at a certain position in front of the image display panel (hereinafter, referred to as" second position "). [For example, a rotation area of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 262 (l) to (n). s position, position of rotation area s of LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 274 (j) to (n), and rotation area s of LED array 282 shown in FIG. 263 (m ′) to FIG. Position, the position of the rotation region 206s of the first movable body 260 shown in FIG. 269 (k) to FIG. (N)],
The second display area in the image display panel [for example, in the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208, an area where the rotation areas s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 262 (l) to 262 (n) do not overlap, decoration In the panel 208p of the symbol display device 208, a region where the rotating regions s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 274 (j) to (n) do not overlap, and in the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208, FIG. 263 (m ′). ) A region where the rotating regions s of the LED array 282 shown in the same figure (o ') do not overlap with each other, a first movable portion shown in the same figure (n) of FIG. 269 (k) in the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208. The image may be displayed in a region where the rotation region 206s of the body 260 does not overlap.
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area in the image display panel,
The first display area is a display area behind the POV display located at the second position,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  The POV display may be configured to be moveable from the second position to another position, but conversely may be configured to be immovable. That is, the POV display may be fixedly arranged at the second position. However, the POV display may be fixedly arranged at the second position, or may perform operations such as rotation, rotation, and swing at the second position. Further, the POV display is arranged in front of the image display panel so that all the display areas of the image display panel are not hidden by the POV display when the player looks in front. And the image display panel may be provided.

  Further, the POV display may be arranged behind the image display panel. When viewed from the front, both may be displaced, or part or all may be overlapped. In the latter case, the image display panel may be a transmissive display panel (for example, a transparent liquid crystal panel or a liquid crystal shutter). The image display panel is movable, the POV display is movable, or both are movable, and the POV display is behind the image display panel and the image display is The state may be changeable between a state where a part or all is hidden by the panel and a state where a part or all is not hidden.

  The POV display may be always located at the second position, or may be located only at the second position. Further, the image may be always displayed in the second display area of the image display panel, or the image may be displayed only in the second display area. The “image” here may be the image of the first pattern, the image including the image of the first pattern, or the image not including the image of the first pattern.

Also,
"The first effect display is the effect display performed in the second display area [for example, the display of the design t of the lord's character in FIG. 262 (l), the design of the third hold icon in FIG. 274 (j). Display etc.]
There is a case where a third effect display is performed in the second display area,
There is a case where a fourth effect display is performed by the POV display,
There is a case where a fifth effect display is performed in the second display area,
There is a case where a sixth effect display is performed by the POV display,
The first effect display is an effect display in a mode that includes only a part of the first pattern [for example, the pattern t of the lord's character shown in FIG. 262 (m) on the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208. 274 (l) to (m) of FIG. 274 (l) to the upper right half of the pattern h3 ′ representing the third hold icon, etc.].
The third effect display is an effect display in a mode including all of the first patterns [for example, all the patterns t of the lord's character shown in FIG. 262 (l) on the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208. Display, full display of the design of the third hold icon h3 shown in FIG. 274 (j), etc.],
The fifth effect display is an effect display that does not include the first design [for example, a full display of the design t of the lord's character shown in FIG. 262 (n) on the panel 208p of the decorative design display device 208. 274 (n), a display in which all the patterns of the third hold icon are not displayed in the hold icon display area 208f shown in FIG. 274 (n), etc.].
The fourth effect display is an effect display that does not include the first design [for example, the entire display of the design t of the lord's character shown in FIG. 262 (l) in the rotation area s of the LED array 282 is displayed. No display, a display in which there is no full display of the design h3 ′ representing the third hold icon shown in FIG. 274 (j), etc.].
The sixth effect display is an effect display that includes all of the first design [for example, a full display of the design t of the lord's character shown in FIG. 262 (n) in the rotation area s of the LED array 282]. , All display of the pattern h3 ′ representing the third hold icon shown in FIG. 274 (n), etc.],
The third effect display and the fourth effect display are configured to be performed together,
The fifth effect display and the sixth effect display are configured to be performed together,
The second effect display [for example, display of the right half of the design t of the lord's character shown in FIG. 262 (m) in the rotation area s of the LED array 282, shown in FIGS. 274 (l) to 274 (m). The lower left half display of the pattern h3 ′ representing the third hold icon, etc.] is configured to be performed after the fourth effect display,
The second effect display is configured to be performed before the sixth effect display.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Of the first effect display to the sixth effect display, an odd effect effect display is an effect display performed by the image display panel, and an even effect effect display is an effect display performed by the POV display. The display area means the display area on the image display panel, and the position means the position of the POV display.

Also,
"The first effect display is configured to be performed after the third effect display,
The first effect display is configured to be performed before the fifth effect display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The second effect display [for example, the right half display of the picture 136 'of the chance button shown in FIG. 263 (n') in the rotation area s of the LED array 282, the jackpot character shown in FIG. 269 (m). The display of the right half of the design, etc.] is a display without the full display of the chance button design 136 ′ shown in FIG. 263 (o ′) in the fourth effect display [for example, the rotation area s of the LED array 282, FIG. 269 (n), which does not display all of the jackpot character patterns, etc.].
The second effect display is the sixth effect display [for example, in the rotation area s of the LED array 282, all display of the chance button pattern 136 ′ shown in FIG. 263 (m ′), FIG. 269 (l). It is configured to be performed after "displaying all of the jackpot character patterns, etc.]
The first effect display [for example, the left half display of the pattern 136 'of the chance button shown in FIG. 263 (n') on the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208, the jackpot character pattern shown in FIG. 269 (m). The left half of the display, etc.] is the third effect display [for example, all displays of the chance button pattern 136 'shown in FIG. 263 (o') on the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208, and FIG. 269 (n). ), The full display of the jackpot character pattern, etc.] is performed before
The first effect display is the fifth effect display [for example, in the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208, there is no display of the chance button pattern 136 ′ shown in FIG. 263 (m ′), FIG. (K) to display (l) in which there is no full-display of the jackpot character pattern], and the like.

Also,
[Third effect display [for example, full display of the pattern of the third hold icon h3 in the look-ahead notice mode in the modified example of FIG. 274 (j) on the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208] and the sixth [For example, all display of the design h3 ′ representing the third hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode shown in FIG. 274 (n)] is displayed in advance. [For example, the hold icon is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode. Pre-reading notice by]],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  It should be noted that the third effect display and the fourth effect display may be performed without fail as a pre-reading notice. Further, the first effect display and the second effect display may be performed as a pre-reading notice.

Also,
"When the first effect display including a partial aspect of the first design is being performed in the second display region, the remaining portion of the first design is displayed in the first display region. Is configured such that there is a case where the effect display including the mode is performed [for example, the case shown in FIG. 263 (n ′)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  That is, the effect display that is performed in the first display area and includes the remaining portion of the first pattern may be difficult to visually recognize on the POV display.

  In addition, when the first effect display including a mode of a part of the first design is being performed in the second display region, the remaining of the first design is displayed in the first display region. It may be configured such that the effect display including the part is always performed.

Also,
"When the effect display including all the first patterns is being performed on the POV display, the effect display including all the first patterns is performed in the first display area. There is a case [for example, the case shown in FIG. 263 (m ′)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  That is, in the case where the effect display that is performed in the first display area and that includes all of the first design is difficult to see by the POV display that is performing the second effect display. There is.

  Even when the second effect display is being performed on the POV display, there is a case where the effect display including the entire first pattern is performed in the first display area. Or, it may be configured to be performed without fail.

Also,
“The POV display is a movable body [for example, an LED array 282 shown in FIG. 256, a rotating first movable body 260 shown in FIGS. 260, the LED array 282 ′ etc. shown in FIG. 277] are provided.
The movable body is provided with a light-emitting body [eg, LEDs 2821, 2821 ′, panel 260p],
The POV display is configured to allow a player to visually recognize an afterimage by changing a light emitting mode of the light emitting body during operation of the movable body.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
“When the POV display is located at the second position means that the movable body is located at the second position,
The movable body may be located at an initial position (hereinafter, referred to as “first position”) [for example, an initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270 shown in FIG. 260 (a)],
The movable body is configured to be movable from the first position to the second position,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
“A symbol variation display means capable of executing symbol variation display [for example, a special symbol display device 213 shown in FIG. 255 and a decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260] is provided,
The second effect display may be performed during the execution of one-time symbol variable display [for example, variable display of special symbols or variable display of decorative symbols].
The symbol variation display in which the second effect display is performed is finally larger than the symbol variation display in which the second effect display [for example, Versa notice, etc.] is not performed. And combinations of decorative patterns] are easy to confirm and display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  The second effect display may be configured to start during execution of the symbol variation display and end with the symbol variation display subsequent to the symbol variation display. That is, the second effect display may be an effect display executed over a plurality of symbol variable displays. Alternatively, the second effect display may be configured to start and end without fail during execution of one symbol variation display.

  The first effect display may be performed during one execution of the symbol variation display. Alternatively, the first effect display may be configured to be started during the execution of the symbol variation display and to be ended in the symbol variation display after the symbol variation display. That is, the first effect display may be an effect display that is executed over a plurality of symbol variable displays. Further, the first effect display may be configured to start and end without fail during execution of one time of the symbol variation display.

Also,
"By the image display panel, one pattern (hereinafter, referred to as" second pattern ") [for example, a pattern of a dedicated character that appears when super reach is developed or a pattern of a character that appears during a jackpot game] There is a case where the effect display including a pattern etc. is performed,
The second design is a design different from the first design,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
“The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In the above description,
[POV display capable of performing effect display [for example, POV display 280 shown in FIG. 256, first movable body 260 that rotates shown in FIGS. 269 to 270, first movable body that circulates shown in FIGS. 272 to 273] A body 260, a POV display 280 ', etc. shown in FIG. 277],
A second effect display is displayed on the POV display [for example, display of the design t of the lord's character shown in FIGS. 260 (v) to (y) and 262 (m) to (n), and FIG. 260 (k) to FIG. 263 (m ′) to FIG. 263 (r ′) to FIG. 263 (r ′) to FIG. 263 (r ′) to FIG. 263 (m ′) to FIG. 263 (r ′) to FIG. Display of the jackpot character pattern shown in FIG. (S '), display of the jackpot character pattern shown in FIGS. 269 (k) to (m), and third hold shown in FIGS. 274 (l) to (o). 275 (o ') to (p') in FIG. 275 (o ') to display a pattern h0' representing a changing icon, etc.] may be performed.
When moving the POV display during execution of the second effect display [for example, FIG. 260 (q) to FIG. 260 (u), FIG. 262 (n) to FIG. 263 (r '). ~ Fig. (S ') etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ] Was explained.

  The POV display may or may not always execute the effect display. Further, the second effect display may be always performed by the POV display. Further, the POV display may be capable of executing only the effect display, or can execute a display different from the effect display (for example, an error occurrence display, an error resolution display, a warning display, etc.). It may be one.

Also,
"An image display panel capable of performing effect display [for example, a panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208, a panel 260p of the first movable body 260, etc.],
On the image display panel, it is possible to execute variable display of decorative designs [for example, FIG. 260 (m) to FIG. 260 (f)].
The movement of the POV display during execution of the second effect display is configured to be performed in the variable display of the decorative pattern [FIG. 260 (q) to FIG. 260 (u)],
The movement of the POV display during the execution of the second effect display is performed more than the case where the movement is not performed. "Decoration 2"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2"] is configured to be easily stopped and displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  The image display panel may or may not execute the effect display without fail. Further, the image display panel may be capable of executing only the effect display, or may execute a display different from the effect display (for example, an error occurrence display, an error resolution display, a warning display, etc.). It can be anything. Further, on the image display panel, variable display of decorative symbols may be executed without fail.

Also,
"The POV display is configured to always move during execution of the second effect display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
"When the POV display does not move during execution of the second effect display [For example, the POV display 280 does not move except when a predetermined pattern is displayed, or selection of effects on the sub-control unit side] When not moving according to the lottery result] is configured,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  When the POV display that is executing the second effect display moves, the display position of the pattern on the moving POV display may be constant or may change. That is, the position of the POV display itself and the display position in the POV display have a separate and independent relationship, and if the POV display displaying the pattern is simply moved, the relative display position of the pattern. Changes and it also appears that the pattern is moving. On the other hand, if the display position of the picture is adjusted in the moving POV display so that the relative display position of the picture does not change in accordance with the movement of the POV display, the picture may not move. appear.

Also,
“The second effect display being executed on the moving POV display is a moving display of a pattern [for example, a moving display of a pattern k in FIGS. 260 (p) to (q) and FIG. 260 (r). ) -Moving display of pattern k in FIG.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  The "picture" referred to here may be a picture of a character, a picture of a character, or a picture.

  Further, the moving display of the picture here may be a moving display in accordance with the movement of the POV display, or may be a moving display unrelated to the movement of the POV display. In the former case, by adjusting the display position of the design in the moving POV display so that the relative display position of the design does not change, it is possible to make the design look like it is not moving. This is possible, and in the latter case, the relative display position of the design can be changed, and the design appears to be moving.

  Further, the second effect display being executed on the moving POV display may be a mode including at least all of the patterns, or may be a mode including only all of the patterns. The embodiment may include at least a part of the design, or may include only a part of the design.

Also,
“The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
"The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"An image display panel capable of performing effect display [for example, a panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208, a panel 260p of the first movable body 260, etc.],
POV display capable of executing effect display [for example, POV display 280 shown in FIGS. 256, 274, 275, etc., rotating first movable body 260 shown in FIGS. 269 to 270, circulation shown in FIGS. 272 to 273. A first movable body 260 that moves, a POV display 280 ′ shown in FIG. 277],
A gaming machine equipped with
The POV display has a certain position (hereinafter, referred to as “second position”) in front of the image display panel [for example, a rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 260 (i) to 260 (p)]. 274 (l) to FIG. 275 (l ′) to FIG. 275 (l ′) to 275 (l ′) to 275 (l ′) to 275 (l ′) to 275 (l ′). A position including the rotation region s of the LED array 282 illustrated in FIG. (Q ′), a position including the rotation region s of the LED array 282 illustrated in FIG. 263 (l ′) to FIG. ) To the position including the rotation region 206s of the first movable body 260 shown in FIG.
The POV display is a movable body [for example, the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 256 and 274 (g), the rotating first movable body 260 shown in FIGS. 269 to 270, and the circular movement shown in FIGS. 272 to 273. First movable body 260, LED array 282 ′, etc. shown in FIG. 277]
Is provided,
The movable body is provided with a light-emitting body [eg, LEDs 2821, 2821 ′, panel 260p],
The POV display is performing a constant-speed operation by the movable body [for example, FIG. 260 (j) to FIG. 260 (y), FIG. 269 (j) to FIG. (M ′), FIG. 274 (j) to FIG. 274 (p), FIG. 275 (l ′) to FIG. 275 (j ′) to FIG. 278 (j) to FIG. By changing the light emission mode, the player can visually recognize the afterimage,
The POV display accelerates the movable body before the constant speed operation by the movable body is performed [for example, FIG. 260 (h) to FIG. 260 (i) and FIG. 269 (h) to FIG. 272 (h ')-(m'), 274 (h)-(i), 278 (h)-(i), etc.].
The acceleration operation means the movable body in the stopped state [for example, the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 260 (g), the first movable body 260 shown in FIG. 269 (g), and the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 274 (g). , LED array 282 ′ shown in FIG. 278 (g) increases the speed and shifts to the constant speed operation [for example, the operation shown in FIGS. 274 (h) to (i)]. And
The first display may be performed on the image display panel,
The first effect display means a state in which the acceleration operation by the movable body [for example, the LED array 282] is being performed [for example, the state shown in FIGS. 260 (h) to (i) or FIG. h) to (i) state], a region of the image display panel including the first display region of the image display panel [for example, the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208] (hereinafter, “a certain "Display area".)
In the POV display, a second effect display [for example, display of the design t of the lord's character shown in FIGS. 260 (v) to (y) and 262 (m) to (n), FIG. 260 (k) to FIG. 263 (m ′) to FIG. 263 (r ′) to FIG. 263 (r ′) to FIG. 263 (r ′) to FIG. 263 (m ′) to FIG. 263 (r ′) to FIG. Display of the jackpot character pattern shown in FIG. (S '), display of the jackpot character pattern shown in FIGS. 269 (k) to (m), and third hold shown in FIGS. 274 (l) to (o). 275 (o ') to (p') of FIG. 275 (o ') to displaying a pattern h0' representing a changing icon, etc.] may be performed.
The POV display in execution of the second effect display may be moved [for example, FIG. 260 (q) to FIG. 260 (u), FIG. 262 (n) to FIG. 263 (r). ') ~ Fig. (S') etc.],
The first display area refers to the second position [for example, FIG. 260 (i) to FIG. 260 (p) or FIG. 274 (i) to FIG. 274 (k) to FIG. 275 (l ′) to FIG. (Q ') is a display area behind the POV display [for example, the POV display 280] located in a position including the rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG.
The first effect display is an effect display in a mode including one pattern (hereinafter, referred to as “first pattern”) [for example, a pattern of the changing icon h0 in the white circle display mode] [for example, FIG. 260. (I) and the display of the pattern of the changing icon h0 shown in FIG. 274 (i)],
When the first pattern displayed in the certain display area moves to the POV display and the second effect display is performed [for example, FIG. 275 (o ′) to FIG. (P ′)] When the first picture displayed in the certain display area moves to the display area behind the POV display and the first picture disappears from the player [eg, FIG. 276 (o ''). ],
In the second effect display, the first design is a different design (hereinafter, referred to as “second design”) [for example, the changing icon h0 of the white square display mode shown in FIG. 275 (p ′) A notice display [for example, the display in FIG. 275 (p ′)] may be given by changing to the design h0 ′].
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

Also, in the above description,
"An image display panel capable of performing effect display [for example, a panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208, a panel 260p of the first movable body 260, etc.],
POV display capable of executing effect display [for example, POV display 280 shown in FIGS. 256, 274, 275, etc., rotating first movable body 260 shown in FIGS. 269 to 270, circulation shown in FIGS. 272 to 273. A first movable body 260 that moves, a POV display 280 ′ shown in FIG. 277],
A gaming machine equipped with
The POV display has a certain position (hereinafter, referred to as “second position”) in front of the image display panel [for example, a rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 260 (i) to 260 (p)]. 274 (l) to FIG. 275 (l ′) to FIG. 275 (l ′) to 275 (l ′) to 275 (l ′) to 275 (l ′) to 275 (l ′). A position including the rotation region s of the LED array 282 illustrated in FIG. (Q ′), a position including the rotation region s of the LED array 282 illustrated in FIG. 263 (l ′) to FIG. ) To the position including the rotation region 206s of the first movable body 260 shown in FIG.
The POV display is a movable body [for example, the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 256 and 274 (g), the rotating first movable body 260 shown in FIGS. 269 to 270, and the circular movement shown in FIGS. 272 to 273. The first movable body 260, the LED array 282 ′ etc. shown in FIG. 277] are provided.
The movable body is provided with a light-emitting body [eg, LEDs 2821, 2821 ′, panel 260p],
The POV display is performing a constant-speed operation by the movable body [for example, FIG. 260 (j) to FIG. 260 (y), FIG. 269 (j) to FIG. (M ′), FIG. 274 (j) to FIG. 274 (p), FIG. 275 (l ′) to FIG. 275 (j ′) to FIG. 278 (j) to FIG. By changing the light emission mode, the player can visually recognize the afterimage,
The POV display accelerates the movable body before the constant speed operation by the movable body is performed [for example, FIG. 260 (h) to FIG. 260 (i) and FIG. 269 (h) to FIG. 272 (h ')-(m'), 274 (h)-(i), 278 (h)-(i), etc.].
The acceleration operation means the movable body in the stopped state [for example, the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 260 (g), the first movable body 260 shown in FIG. 269 (g), and the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 274 (g). , LED array 282 ′ shown in FIG. 278 (g) increases the speed and shifts to the constant speed operation [for example, the operation shown in FIGS. 274 (h) to (i)]. And
The first display may be performed on the image display panel,
The first effect display means a state in which the acceleration operation is being performed by the movable body [for example, the LED array 282] [for example, a state shown in FIG. 260 (h) to FIG. h) to the state shown in (i)], the effect display performed in an area including the first display area in the image display panel [for example, the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208],
In the POV display, a second effect display [for example, display of the design t of the lord's character shown in FIGS. 260 (v) to (y) and 262 (m) to (n), FIG. 260 (k) to FIG. 263 (m ′) to FIG. 263 (r ′) to FIG. 263 (r ′) to FIG. 263 (r ′) to FIG. 263 (m ′) to FIG. 263 (r ′) to FIG. Display of the jackpot character pattern shown in FIG. (S '), display of the jackpot character pattern shown in FIGS. 269 (k) to (m), and third hold shown in FIGS. 274 (l) to (o). 275 (o ') to (p') of FIG. 275 (o ') to displaying a pattern h0' representing a changing icon, etc.] may be performed.
The POV display in execution of the second effect display may be moved [for example, FIG. 260 (q) to FIG. 260 (u), FIG. 262 (n) to FIG. 263 (r). ') ~ Fig. (S') etc.],
The first display area refers to the second position [for example, FIG. 260 (i) to FIG. 260 (p) or FIG. 274 (i) to FIG. 274 (k) to FIG. 275 (l ′) to FIG. (Q ') is a display area behind the POV display [for example, the POV display 280] located in a position including the rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG.
The first effect display is an effect display in a mode including one pattern (hereinafter, referred to as “first pattern”) [for example, a pattern of the changing icon h0 in the white circle display mode] [for example, FIG. 260. (I) and the display of the pattern of the changing icon h0 shown in FIG. 274 (i)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

Also,
"There is a case where a third effect display is performed after the first effect display,
The third effect display is an effect display performed on the POV display,
The third effect display is an effect display that does not include the first design [for example, a change in the display mode of the design h3 ′ of the third hold icon h3 shown in FIGS. 274 (l) to (o). Is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
"In the second effect display, the first pattern is a different pattern (hereinafter, referred to as" second pattern "). [For example, a changing icon h0 in a white square display mode shown in FIG. 275 (p ')] Display [0h] '] [for example, the display in FIG. 275 (p')] is performed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
"There may be a fourth effect display after the second effect display,
The fourth effect display is effect display performed in the first display area and the second display area,
The second display area is a display area in the image display panel,
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area,
The fourth effect display is an effect display in a mode including the second pattern [for example, a display of the changing icon h0 in the white square display mode shown in FIG. 275 (q ')]. , A gaming table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
"The first effect display means effect display performed in the first display area and the second display area in a state where the acceleration operation by the movable body is being performed [for example, FIG. ] The display of the pattern of the changing icon h0 in the display mode of a white circle] is shown.]. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
"The second effect display includes effect display in a mode including all the first patterns [eg, includes all patterns h0 'of the changing icon h0 in the white circle display mode shown in FIG. 275 (o'). Mode effect display].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
“When the POV display is located at the second position, the movable body is located at the second position [for example, the position of the rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 274 (l) or the like]. That's the case
The movable body may be located at an initial position (hereinafter, referred to as “first position”) [for example, an initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270 shown in FIG. 274 (a) and the like].
The movable body is movable from the first position to the second position,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In the above description,
“First image display means capable of displaying image display [for example, decorative pattern display device 208],
Second image display means capable of displaying an image display [for example, a sub display device 1030],
A gaming machine equipped with
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a variable display of decorative symbols,
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a fixed stop display of a stop symbol aspect of a decorative symbol [for example, a symbol combination aspect in which three decorative symbols are lined up],
The big hit may be notified by the fixed stop display of the stop pattern aspect of the decorative pattern,
Depending on the fixed stop display of the stop pattern of the decorative pattern, the deviation may be notified,
In the reach effect display [for example, the super reach effect display shown in FIGS. 235 (d) to 235 (h)] in the variable display of the decorative pattern, a display suggesting a deviation (hereinafter, referred to as “first display”) [eg, , 235 (f) to (g), the animation of the scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed], and the stop of the decorative symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbol Before the display (hereinafter referred to as "second display") [for example, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" shown in FIG. 235 (l)] is displayed, the first image display unit is displayed. In some cases, the first wipe effect display [for example, the wipe effect display by the wipe displays w1a and w1b shown in FIGS. 235 (h) to (j)] may be displayed.
When the first wipe effect display is displayed, before the second display is displayed, the second wipe effect display [eg, FIG. 235 (h )-(J) wipe display w2a, w2b wipe display] is displayed,
During the period from the start of the display of the second wipe effect display to the end of the display, no decorative pattern is displayed on the second image display means [see, for example, FIGS. 235 (h) to (j). ],
The display size of the decorative pattern included in the second display is larger than the display size of the decorative pattern included in the first display [for example, “decoration 2” shown in FIG. 235 (f)] [for example, FIG. 235 (l ) "Decoration 2"] is larger,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

(Appendix R0-1)
An image display panel that can execute performance display,
A POV display that can execute effect display,
A gaming machine equipped with
The POV display may be located at a certain position (hereinafter referred to as “second position”) in front of the image display panel,
The POV display is provided with a movable body,
The movable body is provided with a light emitting body,
The POV display allows a player to visually recognize an afterimage by changing a light emitting mode of the light emitter during a constant speed operation by the movable body.
The POV display is for accelerating the movable body before the constant speed operation is performed by the movable body,
The acceleration operation is an operation until the movable body in a stopped state increases in speed and shifts to the constant speed operation,
The first display may be performed on the image display panel,
The first effect display means an area in the image display panel including a first display area in the image display panel (hereinafter, “a certain display area”) in a state where the acceleration operation by the movable body is being performed. ").
There is a case where a second effect display is performed on the POV display,
The POV display that is executing the second effect display may be moved,
The first display area is a display area behind the POV display located at the second position,
The first effect display is an effect display in a mode including one picture (hereinafter, referred to as “first picture”),
When the first pattern displayed in the certain display area is moved to the POV display and the second effect display is performed, and when the first pattern displayed in the certain display area is In some cases, the player may not be able to see the first pattern by moving to the display area behind the POV display.
A notice display may be given by changing the first design to another design (hereinafter, referred to as “second design”) in the second effect display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-2)
The gaming table described in Appendix R0-1,
There may be a third effect display after the first effect display,
The third effect display is an effect display performed on the POV display,
The third effect display is an effect display in a mode that does not include the first design,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-3)
The gaming table according to supplementary note R0-1 or supplementary note R0-2,
There is a case where a fourth effect display is performed after the second effect display,
The fourth effect display is effect display performed in the first display area and the second display area,
The second display area is a display area in the image display panel,
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area,
The fourth effect display is an effect display in a mode including the second design,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-4)
The gaming table described in Appendix R0-3,
The first effect display is an effect display performed in the first display area and the second display area in a state where the acceleration operation by the movable body is being performed. And a gaming table.

(Appendix R0-5)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes R0-1 to R0-4,
The game table characterized in that the second effect display is an effect display in a mode including all of the first design.

(Appendix R0-6)
The gaming table according to any one of appendixes R0-1 to R0-5,
The case where the POV display is located at the second position is a case where the movable body is located at the second position,
The movable body may be located at an initial position (hereinafter, referred to as “first position”),
The movable body is movable from the first position to the second position,
A game table characterized by that.

  Note that in the above description, the description of "may be ..." may be replaced with "may not be ..." or "must be ..." as appropriate. Is.

  Further, in the above description, the description of “executable” can be read as “always executed” or “may be executed”.

  Further, even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of each of the embodiments, examples, modified examples, various examples, and supplementary notes described above, the constituent requirements of other embodiments, examples, and It may be applied to modified examples, various examples, supplementary notes, and the like.

100 Pachinko machine 136 Chance button 208 Decorative pattern display device 208p panel 260 First movable body 260p panel 280 POV display 282 LED array s rotating area 300 Main control unit 400 First sub control unit 500 Second sub control unit 600 Discharge control unit The design of the lord's character

Claims (1)

A first image display means capable of displaying an image display,
A second image display means capable of displaying an image display,
A gaming machine equipped with
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a variable display of decorative symbols,
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a fixed stop display of a stop symbol mode of a decorative symbol,
The big hit may be notified by the fixed stop display of the stop pattern aspect of the decorative pattern,
Depending on the fixed stop display of the stop pattern of the decorative pattern, the deviation may be notified,
In the reach effect display in the variable display of the decorative pattern, a display suggesting a shift (hereinafter, referred to as “first display”) is displayed, and in the variable design of the decorative pattern, the stop pattern of the decorative pattern is changed. The first wipe display may be displayed on the first image display unit before the confirmation stop display (hereinafter, referred to as “second display”) is displayed.
When the first wipe effect display is displayed, before the second display is displayed, a second wipe effect display is displayed on the second image display means,
In the period from the start of the display of the second wipe effect display until the end of the display, the decorative pattern is not displayed on the second image display means,
The display size of the decorative design included in the second display is larger than the display size of the decorative design included in the first display,
A game table characterized by that.